Operation Manual 950 Pages

g GE Power Systems
Gas Turbines MS 9001 E’
Operation Training Manual
Jamnagar
India
2008
All rights reserved by the General Electric Company.
No copies permitted without the prior written consent
of the General Electric Company.
The text and the classroom instruction offered with it

are designed to acquaint students with generally ac-
cepted good practice for the operation or maintenance
of equipment and/or systems.
They do not purport to be complete nor are they

intended to be specific for the products of any
manufacturer, including those of the General Electric
Company; and the Company will not accept any
liability whatsoever for the work undertaken on the
basis of the text or classroom instruction. The manu-
facturer’s operating and maintenance specifications
are the only reliable guide in any specific instance;
and where they are not complete, the manufacturer
should be consulted.
© 2003 General Electric Company

MS 9001 EA Gas Turbine
Operation Training Manual
Jamnagar, INDIA
Turbine Numbers : 890 123, 124, 129, 130, 131, 142.
Tab 1 Gas Turbine Overview
Gas Turbine Functional Description GFD91ES

Gas Turbine Fundamentals A 00203
Cross Section Cross Section
Tab 2 Gas Turbine Construction
Gas Turbine Arrangement (ML 0406) 91-104 E 8224 C

Compressor Rotor Assembly 9 EA CPSR
Turbine Rotor Assembly 9 EA TURB
Variable Inlet Guide Vane Arrangement (ML 0811) 91-172 D 7245 A
Gas Turbine Bucket to Wheel Assembly 1st Stage BKT ASM1C
Gas Turbine Bucket to Wheel Assembly 2nd and 3rd Stage BKT ASM1B
First Stage Nozzle 9 EA NZ1
Second Stage Nozzle 9 EA NZ2
Third Stage Nozzle 9 EA NZ3
N° 2 Bearing Arrangement 9 EA BRG2
Tab 3 Piping Reference Drawings
Device Summary (ML 0414) 137 A 3171 F

Piping Symbols 277 A 2415 H
Basic Control Device Function Numbers A 00029 B
Glossary of Terminology C 00023
International Conversion Tables GEK 95 149 C
Tab 4 Oil Systems
Lube Oil System Description

Schematic Diagram – PP Lube Oil (ML 0416) 206 D 6970 E
Hydraulic Supply System Description
Schematic Diagram – PP Hydraulic Supply (ML 0434) 209 D 7043 B
Inlet Guide Vane Description
Schematic Diagram – Inlet Guide Vane (ML 0469) 206 D 6828 B
Tab 5 Air Systems
Cooling and Sealing Air System Description

Schematic Diagram – PP Cooling and Sealing Air (ML 0417) 206 D 6971 D
Turbine Cooling Arrangement
Atomizing & Purge Air System Description
Schematic Diagram – PP Atomizing Air (ML 0425) 206 D 7308 A
Fuel Purge System Description
Schematic Diagram – PP Fuel Purge (ML 0477) 209 D 7645 B
Tab 6 Fuel Systems
Fuel Gas System Description

Schematic Diagram – PP Fuel Gas (ML 0422) 206 D 6972 D
Liquid Fuel System Description
Schematic Diagram – PP Liquid Fuel (ML 0424) 206 D 6600 C
Moog Servovalve Assembly
Additive Injection Skid System Description
Schematic Diagram – PP Additive Injection Skid (ML 0494) 206 D 6208 C
Tab 7 Water Systems
Cooling Water System Description

Schematic Diagram – PP Cooling Water (ML 0420) 206 D 6786 B
Compressor Water Wash System Description
Schematic Diagram – PP Compressor Washing (ML 0442) 205 D 4265 D
Gas Turbine Compressor Washing GEK 110 220 B
Field Performance Testing GEK 28 166 A
NOx Water Injection System Description
Schematic Diagram – PP Nox Water Injection (ML 0462) 206 D 6293 C
Tab 8 Other Systems
Turbine Control Device System Description

Schematic Diagram – Turbine Control Devices (ML 0415) 214 D 1164 A
Starting Means System Description (Typical)
Schematic Diagram – PP Starting Means (ML 0421) 205 D 4866 B
Fire Protection System Description
Schematic Diagram – PP Fire Protection (ML 0426) 206 D 6966 B
Heating and Ventilation System Description
Schematic Diagram – PP Heating & Ventilation (ML 0436) 206 D 6596 B
Inlet and Exhaust System Description
Schematic Diagram – Inlet and Exhaust Flow - Typical (ML 0471) 206 D 6968 B
Gas Detection System Description
Schematic Diagram – PP Gas Detection (ML 0474) 206 D 6595 A
Performance Monitoring System Description
Schematic Diagram – PP Performance Monitoring (ML 0492) 214 D 1258 C
Tab 9 Gas Turbine Operations
GE Gas Turbine Performance Characteristics GER 3567 H

Unit Operation, Turbine UOGTDLN
Tab 10 SPEEDTRONIC TM Mk VI Control System
Network Topology ( 4108 ) 132 B 8218 E

Speedtronic TM Mk VI Turbine Control System GER 4193 A
HMI for Speedtronic TM Turbine Control – Operator’s Guide GEH 6126 Vol. I
Mk VI Control - System Guide – Vol. I GEH 6421H Vol. I
Tab 11 Mark VI Commands / Control Support
Fundamentals of Mk VI Control System Fund Mk VI

Alarm List G1 Alarm Report
Tab 12 Generator Design and Fundamentals
General
GE Generator – Overview GER 3688 B
Elect. & Mechanical features - Description GEK 95 159 C
Description of Generator with Brushless Excitation GEK 106 931 D
Operation
Generator Fundamentals B 00 082
Operation of Generator with Brushless Excitation GEK 95 143 B
Lifting Oil System
Skid Schematic 123 E 2212 B
Skid Outline 245 C 2985 A
Skid Electrical Elementary 211 D 6606 B
Drawings
Mechanical Outline 134 E 5633

Data Plate 252 C 3997
Device Summary 387 A 4748 A
Load Equipment Schematic 361 B 3233 A
Tab 13 Generator and Exciter Control
Diode Fault Detector 351-02020-01 A

Instruction manual for Model 9A5 Brushless Exciters 352-56001-06

GFD91ES
Reformatted, February 1994
GE Power Systems
Gas Turbine
Gas Turbine Functional Description
I. INTRODUCTION
A. General
The MS9001 is a simple-cycle, single-shaft gas turbine with a 14 combustor, reverse-flow combustion
system. The MS9001 gas turbine assembly consists of six major sections or groups:
• Air inlet
• Compressor
• Combustion system
• Turbine
• Exhaust
• Support systems
This portion briefly presents a functional description of how the gas turbine operates and the function
that each major component performs in the operation of the gas turbine as air and combustion gases
flow through the gas path stream from inlet to exhaust.
The gas path is the path by which gases flow through the gas turbine from the air inlet through the com-
pressor, combustion section and turbine, to the turbine exhaust, as illustrated in the flow diagram, Fig-
ure 1. The location and functional relationships of the major sections of the MS9000 gas turbine assem-
bly are shown in Figure 2. The identification and location of individual turbine components,
mentioned in the following description and remaining sections of the book, are shown in relation to
the entire turbine assembly in the longitudinal cutaway view, Figure 3.
B. Detail Orientation
Throughout this manual, reference is made to the forward and aft ends, and to the right and left sides
of the gas turbine and its components. By definition, the air inlet of the gas turbine is the forward end,
while the exhaust stack is the aft end. The forward and aft ends of each component are determined in
These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment nor to provide for every possible
contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should further information be desired or
should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser’s purposes the matter should be
referred to the GE Company.
 1996 GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY
GFD91ES Gas Turbine Functional Description
Heat
Recovery Feedwater
Steam
Generator
Fuel
Compressed Combustion
Chamber Exhaust Steam
Air
Gases
Boiler
Steam Feed
Compres- Gas Generator
Turbine Pump
sor Turbine
Boiler Feed
Booster
Condenser Pump
Optional
Equipment
Hotwell
Figure 1. Single-Shaft STAG Unit Flow Diagram
Air Inlet Compressor Section Turbine Exhaust

Section Section Section
Combustion
Section
FWD AFT
Figure 2. Major Sections of the MS9000 Gas Turbine Assembly
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 14 10 1112 13 1516 1718 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
34 33 32 31
Item Component Name Weight (Lbs) Item Component Name Weight (Lbs)
1 Speed Ring 19 Support Ring 1,800
2 Thrust Bearing – 20 Turbine Casing & Shrouds 10,410
3 No. 1 Bearing – 21 Second-Stage Nozzle & Diaphragm 2,100
Figure 3. Gas Turbine Assembly-Component Identification

4 Journal Bearing – 22 Shroud –
5 Inlet Casing 24,000 23 Third-Stage Nozzle & Diaphragm 2,260
6 Compressor Rotor 61,700 24 Exhaust Air Cone 151
7 Forward Compressor Casing 6,440 25 Turbine Rotor Assembly 47,300
8 Aft Compressor Casing 4,920 26 No. 3 Bearing –
9 Compressor Discharge Casing 14,000 27 Exhaust Hood 19,000
10 Fuel Nozzle 62 28 Exhaust Diffuser 13,000
11 Spark Plug – 29 Load Coupling 4,500
12 Inner Compressor Discharge Casing 2,650 30 Turning Valves –
13 Combustion Liner 55 31 Third-Stage Turbine Wheel & Bucket Assembly –
14 Rotor Tie Bolt – 32 Second-Stage Turbine Wheel & Bucket Assembly –
15 Combustion Wrapper 15,000 33 First-Stage Turbine Wheel & Bucket Assembly –
16 Transition Piece 75 34 Rotor Unit 108,300
17 No. 2 Bearing –
GFD91ES
3
18 First-Stage Nozzle 1,500
like manner with respect to its orientation within the complete unit. The right and left sides of the turbine
or of a particular component are determined by standing forward and looking aft.
C. Gas Path Description
When the turbine starting system is actuated and the clutch is engaged, ambient air is drawn through the
air inlet plenum assembly, filtered and compressed in the 17-stage, axial-flow compressor. For pulsation
protection during startup, the 11th-stage extraction valves are open and the variable inlet guide vanes
are in the closed position. At high-speed, the 11th-stage extraction bleed valve closes automatically and
the variable inlet guide vane actuator energizes to open the inlet guide vanes to the normal turbine operat-
ing position. Compressed air from the compressor flows into the annular space surrounding the 14 com-
bustion chambers. From there, it flows into the combustion liners and enters the combustion zone
through metering holes in each of the combustion liners for proper fuel combustion.
Fuel from an off-base source is provided to 14 equal flow lines, each terminating at a fuel nozzle centered
in the end plate of a separate combusition chamber. Prior to being distributed to the nozzles, the fuel is
accurately controlled to provide an equal flow into the 14 nozzle feed lines at a rate consistent with the
speed and load requirements of the gas turbine. The nozzles introduce the fuel into the combustion cham-
bers where it mixes with the combustion air and is ignited by one or both of the spark plugs. At the instant
when fuel is ignited in one combustion chamber, flame is propagated through connecting crossfire tubes
to all other combustion chambers. After the turbine rotor approximates operating speed, combustion
chamber pressure causes the spark plugs to retract to remove their electrodes from the hot flame zone.
The hot gases from the combustion chambers expand into the 14 separate transition pieces attached to
the aft end of the combustion chamber liners and flow from there to the three-stage turbine section of
the machine. Each stage consists of a row of fixed nozzles followed by a row of rotatable turbine buckets.
In each nozzle row, the kinetic energy of the jet is increased, with an associated pressure drop, and in
each following row of moving buckets, a portion of the kinetic energy of the jet turns the turbine rotor.
Resultant rotation is used to turn the generator rotor and generate electrical power.
After passing through the third-stage buckets, the gases are directed into the exhaust hood and diffuser
which contains a series of turning vanes to turn the gases from an axial direction to a radial direction,
thereby minimizing exhaust hood losses. The gases then pass into the exhaust plenum and are introduced
to atmosphere through the exhaust stack.
II. BASE AND SUPPORTS
A. Accessory Base
Most of the mechanical and electrical auxiliary equipment necessary for starting and operating the gas
turbine is contained within the accessory compartment.
There are many systems involved in the operation of the turbine that are described in detail throughout
this set of manuals. Several of these systems have accessory devices, or mechanisms, located in the ac-
cessory section. These may include the starting, fuel, lubrication, hydraulic, cooling water, and atomiz-
ing air systems. Several major components of the accessory compartment include the starting means,
the torque converter and the accessory drive gear. Besides being the main link between the starting sys-
tem drive components and the gas turbine, the accessory drive gear is the gear reduction unit connected
directly to the turbine for driving several of the accessory devices of the gas turbine support systems.
These systems and their devices are described in detail in subsequent subsections.
4
A pressure gauge and switch cabinet located on the side of the accessory compartment contains panel-
mounted gauges and switches used with the system mentioned above.
Fabricated supports and mounting pads are welded to the upper surface of the accessory base for mount-
ing the accessory gear, starting device, pumps, and other accessory components. Lifting trunnions
installed on the base and mounting pads are provided on the bottom surface of the base longitudinal I–
beams to facilitate mounting of the base assembly to the foundation.
B. Turbine Base
The base that supports the gas turbine is a structural steel fabrication of welded steel beams and plate.
It provides a support upon which to mount the gas turbine.
Two lifting trunnions and supports are provided on each side of the base in line with the structural cross
members of the base frame. Machined pads, three on each side on the bottom of the base, facilitate its
mounting to the site foundation. Two machined pads atop the base frame are provided for mounting the
aft turbine supports.
C. Turbine Supports
The gas turbine is mounted to its base by vertical supports at three locations; the forward support at the
lower half vertical flange of the forward compressor casing and the aft two on either side of the turbine
exhaust frame.
The forward support is a flexible plate that is bolted and doweled to the turbine base, at the forward base
cross frame beam, and bolted and doweled to the forward flange of the forward compressor casing.
The aft supports, one on each side of the turbine exhaust frame, are leg-type supports. Both vertical sup-
port legs rest on machine pads on the base and attach snugly to the turbine exhaust-frame-mounted sup-
port pads. The legs provide centerline support and casing alignment.
Fabricated to the outer surface of each aft support leg is a water jacket. Cooling water is circulated
through the jackets to minimize thermal expansion of the support legs and assist in maintaining align-
ment between the turbine and the generator. The support legs maintain the axial and vertical positions
of the turbine, while a gib key coupled with the turbine support legs maintains its lateral position.
D. Gib Key and Guide Block
A gib key is machined on the lower half of the turbine shell. The key fits into a guide block which is
welded to the aft cross beam of the turbine base. The key is held securely in place in the guide block with
bolts that bear against the key on each side. This key-and-block arrangement prevents lateral or rotation-
al movement of the turbine while permitting axial and radial movement resulting from thermal expan-
sion.
5
III. COMPRESSOR SECTION
A. General
The axial-flow compressor section consists of the compressor rotor and the enclosing casing. Within the
compressor casing are the inlet guide vanes, 17 stages of rotor and stator blading, and the exit guide
vanes.
In the compressor, air is confined to the space between the rotor and stator blading where it is compressed
in stages by a series of alternate rotating (rotor) and stationary (stator) airfoil-shaped blades. The rotor
blades supply the force needed to compress the air in each stage and the stator blades guide the air so
that it enters the following rotor stage at the proper angle. The compressed air exits through the compres-
sor discharge casing to the combustion chambers. Air is extracted from the compressor for bearing seal-
ing and pulsation control.
B. Rotor
The compressor rotor is an assembly of 15 individual wheels, two stubshafts (each with an integral
wheel) a speed ring, tie bolts, and the compressor rotor blades (see Figure 4).
Each wheel and the wheel portion of each stubshaft has slots machined around its circumference. The
rotor blades and spacers are inserted into these slots and are held in axial position by staking at each end
of the slot. The wheels and stubshafts are assembled to each other with mating rabbets for concentricity
control and are held together with tie bolts. Selective positioning of the wheels is made during assembly
to reduce balance correction. After assembly, the rotor is dynamically balanced to a fine limit.
The forward stubshaft is machined to provide the forward and aft thrust faces and the journal for the No.
1 bearing, as well as the sealing surfaces for the No. 1 bearing oil seals and the compressor low-pressure
air seals.
C. Stator
1. General
The stator (casing) area of the compressor section is composed of four major sections (Figure 5).
These are the:
• Inlet casing
• Forward compressor casing
• Aft compressor casing
• Compressor discharge casing
These sections, in conjunction with the turbine shell, form the primary structure of the gas turbine.
They support the rotor at the bearing points and constitute the outer wall of the gas path annulus.
The casing bore is maintained to close tolerances with respect to the rotor blade tips for maximum
efficiency.
6
Compressor Discharge
Inlet Casing
Casing Assembly
Forward Aft Compressor
Compressor Casing
Casing
Figure 4. Compressor Stator-Cutaway View
2. Inlet Casing
The inlet casing (see Figure 5) is located at the forward end of the gas turbine. Its prime function
is to uniformly direct air into the compressor. The inlet casing also supports the No. l bearing hous-
ing, a separate casting that contains the No. 1 bearing. The No. 1 bearing housing is supported in
the inlet casing on machined surfaces on either side of the inner bellmouth of the lower half casing.
To maintain axial and radial alignment with the compressor rotor shaft, the bearing housing is
shimmed, doweled and bolted in place at assembly. The inner bellmouth is positioned to the outer
bellmouth by eight airfoil-shaped radial struts that provide structural integrity for the inlet casing.
The struts are cast into the bellmouth walls.
Variable inlet guide vanes are located at the aft end of the inlet casing as shown on Figure 5. The
position of these vanes affects the quantity of compressor air flow. Movement of these guide vanes
is accomplished by the inlet guide vane control ring that turns individual pinion gears attached to
Variable Inlet
Guide Vanes
Inlet Casing
Lower Half Number One
Bearing
Inlet Guide Vane
Control Ring
Figure 5. Air Inlet Casing With Variable Inlet Guide Vanes
7
the end of each vane. The control ring is positioned by a hydraulic actuator and linkage arm assem-
bly. The pinion gears and control ring arrangement is shown in Figure 6.
3. Forward Casing
The forward compressor casing contains the first four compressor stator stages. It also transfers the
structural loads from the adjoining casing to the forward support which is bolted and doweled to this
compressor casing’s forward flange. The forward compressor casing is equipped with two large in-
tegrally cast trunnions which are used to lift the gas turbine when it is separated from its base.
4. Aft Casing
The aft compressor casing contains the 5th through 10th compressor stages. Extraction ports in the
casing permit removal of 5th and 11th-stage compressor air. This air is used for cooling and sealing
functions and is also used for starting and shutdown pulsation control.
5. Discharge Casing
The compressor discharge casing is the final portion of the compressor section. It is the longest
single casting. It is situated at the midpoint — between the forward and aft supports and is, in effect,
the keystone of the gas turbine structure. The functions of the compressor discharge casings are to
contain the final seven compressor stages, to form both the inner and outer walls of the compressor
diffuser, and to join the compressor and turbine stators. They also provide support for the No. 2 bear-
ing, the forward end of the combustion wrapper, and the inner support of the first-stage turbine
nozzle.
The compressor discharge casing (Figure 7) consists of two cylinders, one being a continuation of
the compressor casings and the other an inner cylinder that surrounds the compressor rotor. The two
cylinders are concentrically positioned by twelve radial struts. These struts flair out to meet the larg-
er diameter of the turbine shell, and are the primary load bearing members in this portion of the gas
turbine stator.
The supporting structure for the No. 2 bearing is contained within the inner cylinder. A diffuser is
formed by the tapered annulus between the outer cylinder and inner cylinder of the discharge casing.
The diffuser converts some of the compressor exit velocity into added pressure.
6. Blading
The compressor rotor and stator blades are airfoil shaped and designed to compress air efficiently
at high blade tip velocities. The blades are attached to their wheels by dovetail arrangements. The
dovetail is very precise in size and position to maintain each blade in the desired position and loca-
tion on the wheel.
The compressor stator blades are airfoil shaped and are mounted by similar dovetails into ring seg-
ments. The ring segments are inserted into circumferential grooves in the casing and are held in
place with locking keys. The stator blades of the last nine stages and two exit guide vanes have a
square base dovetail that are inserted directly into circumferential grooves in the casing. Locking
keys also hold them in place.
8
Ring Gear
Control
Pinion
Ring
Gears
Gear Ring
Cover
Figure 6. Inlet Guide Vane Control Ring and Pinion Gears
9
Compressor
Discharte
Case-Upper
Half
Number Two
Bearing
Housing
Compressor
Inner Compressor
Discharge
Discharge Case
Case-Lower
Half
Figure 7. Compressor Discharge Casing Assembly
10
IV. COMBUSTION SYSTEM
A. General
The combustion system is a reverse-flow type with 14 combustion chambers arranged around the pe-
riphery of the compressor discharge casing (Figure 8). This system also includes fuel nozzles, spark plug
ignition system, flame detectors, and crossfire tubes. Hot gases, generated from burning fuel in the com-
bustion chambers, are used to drive the turbine.
High-pressure air from the compressor discharge is directed around the transition pieces and into the
combustion chamber liners. This air enters the combustion zone through both metering holes (for proper
fuel combustion) and through slots (to cool the combustion liner). Fuel is supplied to each combustion
chamber through a nozzle designed to disperse and mix the fuel with the proper amount of combustion
air.
Orientation of the combustion chambers around the periphery of the compressor is shown on Figure 9.
Combustion chambers are numbered counterclockwise when viewed looking downstream and starting
from the top of the machine. Spark plugs and flame detector locations are also shown.
B. Combustion Wrapper
The combustion wrapper is a fabricated casing that encloses the combustion area. It provides a support-
ing surface for the combustion chamber assemblies. A plenum is formed by the combustion wrapper in
which the compressor discharge air flow is directed to the combustion chambers. The forward face of
the combustion wrapper is slanted at a 13° angle from the vertical and contains the machined openings
for mounting the 14 covers of the combustion chamber assemblies (see Figure 9 and 10). Support plates
for mounting the spark plugs and flame detectors are recessed in wells in the outer wall of the wrapper.
The wrapper is supported by the compressor discharge casing and the turbine shell.
C. Combustion Chambers
Discharge air from the axial-flow compressor flows into each combustion flow sleeve from the combus-
tion wrapper (Figure 10). The air flows upstream along the outside of the combustion liner toward the
liner cap. This air enters the combustion chamber reaction zone through the fuel nozzle swirl tip, the
metering holes in both the cap and liner and combustion holes in the forward half of the liner.
The hot combustion gases from the reaction zone pass through a thermal soaking zone and then into a
dilution zone where additional air is mixed with the combustion gases. Metering holes in the dilution
zone allow the correct amount of air to enter and cool the gases to the desired temperature. Along the
length of the combustion liner and in the liner cap are openings whose function is to provide a film of
air for cooling the walls of the liner and cap as shown in Figure 11. Transition pieces direct the hot gases
from the liners to the turbine nozzles. All combustion liners, flow sleeves and transition pieces are identi-
cal.
D. Spark Plugs
Combustion is initiated by means of the discharge from two high-voltage retractable-electrode spark
plugs installed in adjacent combustion chambers. These spring-injected, pressure-retracted plugs re-
ceive their energy from ignition transformers. At firing, a spark at one or both of these plugs ignites the
gases in a chamber; the remaining chambers are ignited by crossfire through the tubes that interconnect
11
Spark Plug
Combustion
Liner
Fuel Nozzle
Compressor Transition
Discharge Piece
Casing
Combustion
Cover
Atomizing
Air Manifold Flame Detector
Fuel Oil
Line
Combustion
Wrapper
Figure 8. Combustion System Arrangement
12
Spark Plugs
Flame Detectors
Figure 9. Combustion Chamber Arrangement
13
14
Combustion
GFD91ES
Wrapper
C
L Chamber
Spark Plug
Slot
Flow Flow Cooling Cooled Combustion
Sleeve Sleeve Slots Liner Wrapper
View A
Turbine
Dual Fuel Shell
Nozzle
Combustion
Cover
Crossfire
Tube
Combustion
Figure 10. Combustion Chamber Details and Flow Diagram

Air
Compresspr
Discharge Transition
Casing Piece
Liner Stop Slot Cooling Holes Spring Seal
Crossfire Combustion
Tube Holes
Collar
Figure 11. Slot-Cooled Combustion Liner
the reaction zone of the remaining chambers. As rotor speed increases, chamber pressure causes the
spark plugs to retract and the electrodes are removed from the combustion zone.
E. Ultraviolet Flame Detectors
During the starting sequence, it is essential that an indication of the presence or absence of flame be trans-
mitted to the control system. For this reason, a flame monitoring system is used consisting of sensors
which are installed on adjacent combustion chambers and an electronic amplifier mounted in the turbine
control panel.
The ultraviolet flame sensor contains a gas-filled detector. The gas within this detector is sensitive to
the presence of ultraviolet radiation emitted by a hydrocarbon flame. A dc voltage, supplied by the am-
plifier, is impressed across the detector terminals. If flame is present, the ionization of the gas in the de-
tector allows conduction in the circuit which gives an output defining “flame.” Conversely, the absence
of flame will generate an opposite output defining “no flame.”
After the establishment of flame, if voltage is reestablished to both sensors defining the loss (or lack)
of flame, a signal is sent to a relay panel in the turbine control circuitry where auxiliary relays in the
turbine firing trip circuit, starting means circuit, etc. shut down the turbine. “FAILURE TO FIRE” or
“LOSS OF FLAME” is also indicated on the annunciator. If a loss of flame is sensed by only one flame
detector sensor, the control circuitry will cause an annunciation of only this condition.
F. Fuel Nozzles
Each combustion chamber is equipped with a fuel nozzle that emits a metered amount of fuel into the
combustion liner. Gaseous fuel is admitted directly into each chamber through metering holes located
in the outer wall of the gas swirl tip. When liquid fuel is used, it is atomized in the nozzle swirl chamber
by means of high pressure air. The atomized fuel/air mixture is then sprayed into the combustion zone.
Action of the tip imparts a swirl to the combustion air with the result of more complete combustion and
essentially smoke-free operation of the unit. See Figure 12 for fuel nozzle details.
15
Gasket (3)
Body Retainer (2)
Nozzle Pilot (1)
Body
Transition
Piece Assembly
(Includes 1, 2 & 3)
Fuel Oil Swirl Chamber

Connection
Swirl Tip Assembly

Inner Cap
Fuel Nozzle Ring
Atomizing Gas Connection

Air Connection (If Used)
Figure 12. Fuel Nozzle Assembly (Typical Air Atomized, Dual Fuel)
Detailed inspection and maintenance information on the fuel nozzles and other combustion system com-
ponents is included in the Maintenance section of this manual.
G. Crossfire Tubes
All fourteen combustion chambers are interconnected by means of crossfire tubes. These tubes allow
flame from the fired chambers to propagate to the unfired chambers.
V. TURBINE SECTION
A. General
The three-stage turbine section is the area where energy, in the form of high-temperature pressurized gas
produced by the compressor and combustion sections, is converted to mechanical energy.
MS9000 gas turbine hardware includes the turbine rotor, turbine casing exhaust frame, exhaust diffuser,
nozzles and shrouds.
B. Turbine Rotor
1. Structure
The turbine rotor assembly (Figure 13) consists of two wheel shafts; the first, second, and third-stage
turbine wheels with buckets; and two turbine spacers. Concentricity control is achieved with mating
rabbets on the turbine wheels, wheel shafts, and spacers. The wheels are held together with through
bolts. Selective positioning of rotor members is performed to minimize balance corrections.
16
2nd-Stage Turbine 3rd-Stage Turbine

Wheel Assembly Wheel Assembly
1st-Stage Turbine
Wheel Assembly
17 Stage Compressor
Wheel & Blade
Assembly
Forward Turbine
Wheel Shaft Aft Turbine
Wheel Shaft
Figure 13. Compressor and Turbine Rotor Assembly
17
The forward wheel shaft extends from the first-stage turbine wheel to the aft flange of the compres-
sor rotor assembly. The journal for the #2 bearing is a part of the wheel shaft.
The aft wheel shaft connects the third-stage turbine wheel to the load coupling. It includes the #3
bearing journal.
Spacers between the first and second, and between the second and third-stage turbine wheels deter-
mine the axial position of the individual wheels. These spacers carry the diaphragm sealing lands.
The forward faces of the spacer include radial slots for cooling air passages. The first- and second-
stage spacer also has radial slots for cooling air passages on the aft face.
2. Buckets
The turbine buckets (Figure 14) increase in size from the first to the third-stage. Because of the pres-
sure reduction resulting from energy conversion in each stage, an increased annulus area is required
to accommodate the gas flow; thus necessitating increasing the size of the buckets. The first-stage
buckets are the first rotating surfaces encountered by the extremely hot gases leaving the first-stage
nozzle. Each first-stage bucket contains a series of longitudinal air passages for bucket cooling as
shown in Figure 15. Air is introduced into each first-stage bucket through a plenum at the base of
the bucket dovetail. It flows through cooling holes extending the length of the bucket and exits at
the recessed bucket tip. The holes are spaced and sized to obtain optimum cooling of the airfoil with
minimum compressor extraction air.
3rd-Stage Integral
Turbine Bucket Shroud
2nd-Stage
Turbine Bucket
1st-Stage
Turbine Bucket
Bucket
Vane
Shank
Dovetail
Figure 14. First, Second and Third-Stage Turbine Buckets
18
Cross Section
of a Cooling
Hole in Bucket
Cooling
Air Inlet
Holes
Cooling Holes
& Squealer
Section
Suction Side
(Convex)
Bucket Blade
Pressure Side
(Concave)
Platform
Bucket Shank
Figure 15. First-Stage, Air-Cooled Bucket Details
19
Like the first-stage buckets, the second-stage buckets are cooled by span-wise air passages running
the length of the airfoil. Since the lower temperatures surrounding the bucket shanks do not require
shank cooling, the second-stage cooling holes are fed by a plenum cast into the bucket shank. Span-
wise holes provide cooling air to the airfoil at a higher pressure than shank holes. This increases the
cooling effectiveness in the airfoil with minimum penalty to the thermodynamic cycle.
The third-stage buckets are not internally air-cooled; the tips of these buckets, like the second-stage
buckets, are enclosed by a shroud which is a part of the tip seal. These shrouds interlock from bucket
to bucket to provide vibration damping.
Turbine buckets for each stage are attached to their wheels by straight, axial-entry, multiple-tang
dovetails that fit into matching cutouts in the turbine wheel rims. Bucket vanes are connected to their
dovetails by means of shanks (Figure 14). These shanks locate the bucket-to-wheel attachment at
a significant distance from the hot gases, reducing the temperature at the dovetail. The turbine rotor
assembly is arranged so that the buckets can be replaced without unstacking the wheels, spacers,
and wheel shaft assemblies.
3. Cooling
The turbine rotor must be cooled to maintain reasonable operating temperatures and, therefore, as-
sure a longer turbine service life. Cooling is accomplished by a positive flow of cool air radially
outward through a space between the turbine wheel with buckets and the stator, into the main gas
stream. This area is called the wheelspace.
4. First-Stage Wheelspaces
The first-stage forward wheelspace is cooled by compressor discharge air. High-pressure packing
is installed at the aft end of the compressor rotor between the rotor and the inner barrel of the com-
pressor discharge casing. Part of the leakage through this labyrinth furnishes the air flow through
the first-stage forward wheelspace. This cooling air flow discharges into the main gas stream aft of
the first-stage nozzle.
In addition, a small amount of air is supplied by a single hole at the forward end of the inner barrel.
This air provides adequate cooling during all transient operation conditions.
The first-stage aft wheelspace is cooled by compressor discharge air supplied through the second-
stage nozzle. Some of this first-stage aft wheelspace cooling air flows through the second-stage in-
ner seal while the remainder returns to the gas path forward of the second-stage nozzle.
5. Second-Stage Wheelspaces
The second-stage forward wheelspace is cooled by leakage from the first-stage aft wheelspace
through the interstage labyrinth. This air returns to the gas path at the entrance of the second-stage
buckets.
The second-stage aft wheelspace is cooled by air from the internal extraction system. This air enters
the wheelspace through slots in the forward face of the spacer. Some of this second-stage aft cooling
air flows through the third-stage inner seal while the remainder returns to the gas path at the third-
stage nozzle entrance.
20
6. Third-Stage Wheelspaces
The third-stage forward wheelspace is cooled by leakage from the second-stage aft wheelspace
through the interstage labyrinth. This air re-enters the gas path at the third-stage bucket entrance.
The third-stage aft wheelspace obtains its cooling air from the exhaust frame cooling system. This
air enters the wheelspace at the rear of the third-stage turbine wheel and then flows into the gas path
at the entrance to the exhaust diffuser.
C. Turbine Stator
1. Structure
The turbine shell and the exhaust frame constitute the major portion of the MS9000 gas turbine sta-
tor structure. The turbine nozzles, shrouds, #3 bearing and turbine exhaust diffuser are internally
supported from these components.
2. Turbine Casing (Shell)
The turbine shell controls the axial and radial positions of the shrouds and nozzles. It determines
turbine clearances and the relative positions of the nozzles to the turbine buckets. This positioning
is critical to gas turbine performance. See Figure 16 for positions of these components.
Hot gases contained by the turbine shell are a source of heat flow into the shell. To control the shell
diameter, it is important that the shell design reduces the heat flow into the shell and limits its temper-
ature. Heat flow limitations incorporate insulation, cooling, and multi-layered structures. The exter-
nal surface of the shell incorporates cooling air passages. Flow through these passages is generated
by an off-base cooling fan.
Structurally, the shell forward flange is bolted to flanges at the aft end of the compressor discharge
casing and combustion wrapper. The shell aft flange is bolted to the forward flange of the exhaust
frame. Trunnions cast onto the sides of the shell are used with similar trunnions on the forward com-
pressor casing to lift the gas turbine when it is separated from its base.
3. Nozzles
In the turbine section, there are three stages of stationary nozzles (Figure 16) which direct the high-
velocity flow of the expanded hot combustion gas against the turbine buckets causing the turbine
rotor to rotate. Because of the high pressure drop across these nozzles, there are seals at both the
inside and the outside diameters to prevent loss of system energy by leakage. Since these nozzles
operate in the hot combustion gas flow, they are subjected to thermal stresses in addition to gas pres-
sure loadings.
4. First-Stage Nozzles
The first-stage nozzle (Figure 17) receives the hot combustion gases from the combustion system
via the transition pieces (Figure 10). The transition pieces are sealed to both the outer and inner side-
walls on the entrance side of the nozzle. This minimizes leakage of compressor discharge air into
the nozzles. The 18 cast nozzle segments, each with two partitions or airfoils, are contained by a
horizontally-split retaining ring which is centerline supported to the turbine shell on lugs at the sides
21
First-Stage Second-Stage
Shroud Shroud
Second-Stage Third-Stage
Nozzle Nozzle
Third-Stage
Shroud
First-Stage
#2 Retaining
Ring
First-Stage
Nozzle
Third-Stage
First-Stage Diaphragm
Nozzle Support
Ring
Second-Stage
Diaphragm
Segment
Third-Stage
Turbine Wheel
First-Stage Second-Stage
Turbine Wheel Turbine Wheel
Figure 16. Turbine Section-Cutaway View
22
Outer Wall
Cooling Holes
Cooling Air
Impingement Plate
Partition Core
Cooling Holes
(Air Inlet)
Assembled View
Cooling Holes
(Air Exit)
Suction End of Partition
Hollow Core of
Partition
Trailing Edge
Cooling Holes
(Not Visible)
Pressure Side
Cooling Holes Partition
(Air Exit)
Partially Assembled View
Figure 17. First-Stage Turbine Nozzle Segment
23
and guided by pins at the top and bottom vertical centerlines. This permits radial growth of the re-
taining ring, resulting from changes in temperature, while the ring remains centered in the shell.
The aft outer diameter of the retaining ring is loaded against the forward face of the first-stage tur-
bine shroud and acts as the air seal to prevent leakage of compressor discharge air between the nozzle
and shell.
On the inner sidewall, the nozzle is sealed by direct bearing of the nozzle inner load rail against the
first-stage nozzle support ring bolted to the compressor discharge casing.
The nozzle is prevented from moving forward by the lugs welded to the aft outside diameter of the
retaining ring at 45° from vertical and horizontal centerlines. These lugs fit in a groove machined
in the turbine shell just forward of the first-stage shroud T-hook. By moving the horizontal joint sup-
port block and the bottom centerline guide pin, the lower half of the nozzle can be rolled out with
the turbine rotor in place.
5. Second-Stage Nozzle
Combustion air exiting from the first-stage buckets is again expanded and redirected against the se-
cond-stage turbine buckets by the second-stage nozzle. This nozzle is made of 16 cast segments
(Figure 19), each with three partitions or airfoils. The male hooks on the entrance and exit sides of
the outer sidewall fit into female grooves on the aft side of the first-stage shrouds and on the forward
side of the second-stage shroud to maintain the nozzle concentric with the turbine shell and rotor.
This close tongue-and-groove fit between nozzle and shrouds acts as an outside diameter air seal.
The nozzle segments are held in a circumferential position by radial pins from the shell into axial
slots in the nozzle outer sidewall.
The second-stage nozzle is cooled by compressor discharge air.
6. Third-Stage Nozzles
The third-stage nozzle receives the hot gas as it leaves the second-stage buckets, increases its veloc-
ity by pressure drop, and directs this flow against the third-stage buckets. The nozzle consists of 16
cast segments, each with four partitions or airfoils (Figure 18). It is held at the outer sidewall forward
and aft sides in grooves in the turbine shrouds in a manner identical to that used on the second-stage
nozzle. The third-stage nozzle is circumferentially positioned by radial pins from the shell.
7. Diaphragms
Attached to the inside diameters of both the second and third-stage nozzle segments are the nozzle
diaphragms (Figure 18). These prevent air leakage past the inner sidewall of the nozzles and the tur-
bine rotor. High/low labyrinth seal teeth are machined into the inside diameter of the diaphragm.
They mate with opposing sealing lands on the turbine rotor. Minimal radial clearance between sta-
tionary parts (diaphragm and nozzles) and the moving rotor are essential for maintaining low inter-
stage leakage. This results in higher turbine efficiency.
8. Shrouds
Unlike the compressor blading, the turbine bucket tips do not run directly against an integral ma-
chined surface of the casing but against annular curved segments called turbine shrouds. The
24
Nozzle Nozzle
Partitions Segment
Cooling Air
Exit Openings
Diaphragm Nozzle
Segment Segment
Seal Nozzle
Teeth Partition
Figure 18. Second- and Third-Stage Turbine Nozzle and Diaphragm Segments
25
shrouds’ primary function is to provide a cylindrical surface for minimizing bucket tip clearance
leakage. This bucket-to-shroud interface can be seen in Figure 19.
The turbine shrouds’ secondary function is to provide a high thermal resistance between the hot
gases and the comparatively cool shell. In doing this, shell cooling load is drastically reduced, the
shell diameter is controlled, the shell roundness is maintained, and important turbine clearances are
assured.
The shroud segments are maintained in the circumferential position by radial pins from the shell.
Joints between shroud segment are sealed by interconnecting tongues and grooves.
9. Exhaust Frame Assembly
The exhaust frame assembly (Figure 20) consists of the exhaust frame and the exhaust diffuser. The
exhaust frame is bolted to the aft flange of the turbine shell. Structurally, the frame consists of an
outer cylinder and inner cylinder interconnected by ten radial struts. On the inner gas path surfaces
of the two cylinders are attached the inner and outer diffusers. The #3 bearing is supported from the
inner cylinder.
The exhaust diffuser (Figure 21), located at the extreme aft end of the gas turbine, bolts to, and is
supported by, the exhaust frame. The exhaust diffuser is a fabricated assembly consisting of an inner
cylinder and an outer divergent cylinder that flairs at the exit end at a right angle to the turbine center-
line. At the exit end of the diffuser, between the two cylinders, are five turning vanes mounted at
the bend. Gases exhausted from the third turbine stage enter the diffuser where velocity is reduced
by diffusion and pressure is recovered. At the exit of the diffuser, turning vanes direct the gases into
the exhaust plenum.
Exhaust frame radial struts cross the exhaust gas stream. These struts position the inner cylinder and
#3 bearing in relation to the outer casing of the gas turbine. The struts must be maintained at a uni-
form temperature to control the center position of the rotor in relation to the stator. This temperature
stabilization is accomplished by protecting the struts from exhaust gases with a metal fairing fabri-
cated into the diffuser and then forcing cooling air into this space around the struts.
Turbine shell cooling air enters the space between the exhaust frame and the diffuser and flows in
two directions — into the turbine shell cooling annulus and also down through the space between
the struts and the airfoil fairings surrounding the struts and, subsequently, into the load shaft tunnel
and turbine third-stage aft wheelspace.
VI. BEARINGS
A. General
The MS9000 gas turbine unit contains three main journal bearings used to support the gas turbine rotor.
The unit also includes thrust bearings to maintain the rotor-to-stator axial position and support the thrust
loads developed on the rotor. These bearings and seals are incorporated in three housings: one at the
inlet casing, one in the discharge casing, and one in the exhaust frame. These bearings are pressure-lubri-
cated by oil supplied from the main lubricating oil system. The oil flows through branch lines to an inlet
in each bearing housing.
26
Figure 19. Turbine Area-Top Half Removed Showing Turbine Nozzles and Wheel Assemblies
27
Exhaust Diffuser
Enlarged View Of
Strut Cross Section
Assembled View
Exhaust
Frame
Inner
Cylinder
Outer
Cylinder
Exhaust
Frame
Exhaust
Frame Airfoil
Strut
Lower Half Assembly
Figure 20. Exhaust Frame Assembly
28
Insulation Pack
Inner Turning Vanes

Diffuser
Outer
Difference
Figure 21. Exhaust Diffuser
29
The bearings used in this gas turbine are classified as follows:
No. Class Type
1 Loaded Tilting Pad–Thrust Equalizing

Unloaded Tilting Pad-Non-Thrust Equalizing
1 Journal Elliptical
2 Journal Elliptical
3 Journal Tilting Pad
B. Elliptical Journal Bearings
1. General
Elliptical bearings are the predominant type of journal bearings used in gas turbines. These are char-
acterized by their non-cylindrical bores, and are designed to improve the stability of the shafts at
high speeds.
In the design of these bearings, convergent clearance regions exist even at a concentric shaft posi-
tion. The convergence increases with an increase in shaft eccentricity. This convergency creates
high-pressure regions which, in effect, puts an additional load on the bearing; a factor which tends
to improve the shaft stability. The extra clearance space, as compared with a cylindrical bearing of
a diameter equal to the inscribed circle in these bearings, increases the oil flow and also often reduces
power losses resulting in lower temperature rises in the bearing.
Figure 22 shows the elliptical journal bearing installed in a typical bearing assembly as used in Gen-
eral Electric gas turbine units.
2. Description
The elliptical bearing is made up of two cylindrical halves brought together so that their centers are
displaced several millimeters from the bearing center. It is manufactured by placing shims at the
horizontal split and then machining a cylindrical bore. The shims are then removed and the two
halves are brought together to form the elliptical bearing as shown in Figure 23.
3. Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance section of this Service Manual for information.
C. Tilting Pad Journal Bearings
1. General
In those gas turbine applications where a shaft may exhibit susceptibility to whirl or misalignment,
tilting pad bearings are frequently employed. These bearings are distinguished by their movable
segments or pads, which give them very stable dynamic properties.
Tilting pad bearings operate in the hydrodynamic mode just like elliptical types which are more
commonly employed in gas turbines. The pads are assembled creating converging passages between
30
1 2 3 4 5 6
1. Oil Baffle 4. Bearing Housing

2. Journal Bearing 5. Flatland Thrust Bearing
3. Tilting-pad Thrust Bearing 6. Oil Seal
Figure 22. Typical Bearing Assembly with Elliptical Journal (Bottom Lobe) and
Thrust Bearings (Lower Half) Installed
RL is the radius of each lobe

RL RC is the radius of the inscribed
d
circle.
d
RL d is the distance at which the
RC center of each lobe arc is dis-
placed from the center of the in-
scribed circle.
Figure 23. Elliptical Journal Bearing Schematic Diagram
31
each pad and the journal surface. These converging passages generate a high-pressure oil film be-
neath each pad which produces a symmetric loading or “clamping” effect on the journal. This is a
stabilizing influence which is very effective in resisting shaft whirl particularly in bearings that are
lightly loaded and operating at high speed. Because the pads are point pivoted, they are free to move
in two dimensions which makes them capable of tolerating both offset and angular shaft misalign-
ment. Another very desirable characteristic of this bearing is its ability to run cool when supporting
heavy loads, due to the relatively short arc length of the individual pads.
Figure 24 shows a typical tilting pad journal bearing employed in a General Electric gas turbine.
This particular bearing has five pads which is a common design.
2. Description
A tilting pad journal bearing is comprised of pads and a retainer ring. The pads are made from a
cylindrical steel shell which is babbitted, cut into sectors, and then finish bored. In their final as-
sembled configuration, the pads are displaced inward toward the bearing center to produce converg-
ing clearances when assembled around the bearing journal. The inscribed clearance circle formed
by the pads is located high relative to the outside diameter of the retaining ring. This allows the rotor
to run concentric with respect to the stator under full-speed operating conditions. Figure 25 de-
scribes the clearance geometry present in a tilting pad bearing. In most designs, the pad pivots are
offset toward the trailing edges of the pads. This is done deliberately to improve the hydrodynamic
operation of the bearing.
The retainer ring serves to locate and support the pads. It is a horizontally-split member which con-
tains the pad support pins, adjusting shims, oil feed orifices, and oil discharge seals. The outside
diameter of the retainer ring is carefully machined to produce a good fit when inserted into the bear-
ing housing. The oil discharge seals have babbitted surfaces and float on the shaft. The support pins
and shims transmit the loads generated at the pad surfaces and are used to set the bearing clearance.
An anti-rotation pin extends from one edge of the lower half of the retainer ring. This pin locates
the bearing within its housing and prevents the bearing from rotating with the journal. The anti-rota-
tion pin also provides the correct installation of the bearing liner in the bearing housing which is
essential. The offset of individual pads on their supporting pins makes the bearing non-symmetrical
with respect to shaft rotation. Some of the components of a tilting pad bearing are shown in Figures
24 and 27.
Oil is fed from the lower half of the bearing housing into the annulus which surrounds the retainer
ring. Orifice holes are drilled radially through the ring into the gaps that exist between the individual
pads. These orifices serve to control the flow entering the bearing. The oil is then drawn by the shaft
into the gap between shaft and pads. Floating ring seals with babbitted surfaces restrict the outgoing
oil flow thereby maintaining an adequate oil supply within the pad region. Excess oil drains from
the liner through slots in the bottom area of the lower half of the liner.
3. Maintenance
A minimum of maintenance is required for tilting pad journal bearings. During the regularly sched-
uled complete unit disassembly, the bearings should be thoroughly cleaned and inspected. Special
attention should be given to the pad support pins to be sure that they do not exhibit fretting or exces-
sive wear. The pad must also be inspected for scratches, loose particles and any high or low spots
which may exist. These must be removed or repaired in accordance with procedures used in the
maintenance of babbitted surfaces. The bearing clearance must also be checked especially if the pad
pins have shown any signs of wear. This can be done with either a three-point micrometer or a ma-
32
4
CL Pad
CL Pivot Rotation
Pin RC
2 Offset d
Trailing
5 Edge of
Pad RP
1 3
6
7
8
RP is the radius of each pad

1. Antirotation Pin 5. Pad Retaining Ring
2. Pivit Pin (Lower Half) RC is the radius of the inscribed
3. Oil Feed Hole 6. Pad clearance circle.
4. Pad Retaining Ring 7. Pad Holding Pin
(Upper Half) 8. Oil Seal Surfaces d is the pad preload distance
Figure 24. Typical Tilting Pad Figure 25. Tilting Pad Journal
Journal Bearing Bearing Schematic Diagram
Upper Half
Lower Half
Figure 26. Upper and Lower Halves of a Typical Tilting Pad

Journal Bearing-Disassembled
33
1 2 3 4
7 6 5
1. Seal Ring Assembly 5. Pivot Pin

2. Bearing Liner Pad 6. Shim
3. Pivot Pin Bushing 7. Tilting Pad Retainer
4. Headless Shoulder Pin
Figure 27. Tilting Pad Journal Bearing-Section Through Pad
34
chined mandrel. If the clearance is found to be outside of drawing tolerances, it must be reset by
adjusting the shims.
When cleaning the bearing, be sure that the bearing surfaces do not come in contact with hard objects
which may scratch or dent them. The bearing should be cleaned by using kerosene and clean rags.
Do no use cotton waste as it will leave lint on the bearing surfaces.
After the bearing has been cleaned and inspected, the bearing parts should be coated with a good
rust-inhibited turbine oil, to protect against corrosion, and wrapped to protect against mechanical
damage. If it should be necessary to hold the bearing parts in storage, the parts should be coated with
a good rust-inhibited grease and wrapped in a moisture and vapor-proof barrier such as vinylidene
chloride-coated, paper-backed foil.
D. Bearing Lubrication
1. General
The three gas turbine bearing housings are pressure-lubricated with oil supplied from the lubricating
oil reservoir and interconnected tanks and piping. Oil feed piping, where practical, is run within the
lube oil reservoir drain line, or drain channels, as a protective measure. This construction is referred
to as double piping. In the event of a supply line leak, oil will not be sprayed on nearby equipment,
thus eliminating a potential safety hazard.
When the oil enters the housing inlet, it flows into an annulus around the bearing. From the annulus,
the oil flows through machined holes or slots to the bearing-rotor interface.
2. Lubricant Sealing
Oil on the surface of the turbine shaft is prevented from being spun along the shaft by oil seals in
each of the three bearing housings. These labyrinth seals are assembled at the extremities of the bear-
ing assemblies where oil control is required. A smooth surface is machined on the shaft and the seals
are assembled so that only a small clearance exists between the oil seal and the shaft. The oil seals
are designed with tandem rows of teeth and an annular space between them. Pressurized sealing air
is admitted into this space and prevents lubricating oil from spreading along the shaft. Some of this
air returns with the oil to the main lubricating oil reservoir and is vented through a lube oil vent.
The remainder of the air passes into adjoining turbine spaces or is vented into atmosphere.
E. #1 Bearing
The #1 bearing subassembly is located in the center of the inlet casing assembly (Figure 28) and contains
three bearings: (1) active (loaded) thrust bearing, (2) inactive (unloaded) thrust bearing, and (3) journal
bearing. Additionally, it contains a “running-type” ring seal, four labyrinth seals and a two-part housing
in which the components are installed. The components are keyed to the housing to prevent rotation. The
#1 bearing housing is supported from the inner cylinder of the compressor inlet casing. The top of the
housing is removable, being flanged and bolted to the bottom half.
The outer labyrinth seals at each end of the housing are pressurized with air extracted from the compres-
sor fifth-stage. Inboard of the pressurized labyrinth seals, are two additional labyrinth back-up seals for
positive sealing of the bearing oil cavity. The “running-type” ring seal at the forward end of the thrust
bearing cavity contains the oil within the bearing and limit entrance of air into the cavity. The #1 journal
35
No. 1 Bearing Liner

Shim
Unloaded Thrust Bearing
Shaft Thrust Runner
Loaded Thrust Bearing
Inlet Casing
Figure 28. No. 1 Bearing In Inlet Casing
bearing liner has an integral, non-contacting ring seal which contains the oil in a circumferential drain
groove. The oil drains from this groove through a vertical slot into the bearing drain cavity.
F. #2 Bearing
The #2 bearing subassembly is located in the center of the inner cylinder of the compressor discharge
casing. The casing support consists of ledges at the horizontal plane and an axial key at the bottom center-
line. This arrangement permits relative growth resulting from temperature differences while the bearing
remains centered in the discharge casing. The #2 bearing housing and its mounting arrangement in the
compressor discharge casing is shown in Figure 7.
The assembly includes a bearing liner, labyrinth seals and a bearing housing. This assembly is located
in a pressurized space (the inner barrel) between the turbine and compressor.
The seal system is shown in Figure 29
The #2 bearing liner is prevented from rotating with the shaft by an anti-rotation pin located in the lower
bearing liner.
G. #3 Bearing
The #3 bearing subassembly is located at the aft end of the turbine shaft in the center of the exhaust frame
assembly (Figure 20). It consists of a tilting pad bearing, three labyrinth seals, two floating ring seals
and a bearing housing. The individual pads are designed and assembled so that a high pressure oil film
is generated between each pad and the bearing surface. This produces a symmetrical loading or “clamp-
ing” effect on the bearing surface that helps maintain shaft stability. Because the pads are free to move
in two dimensions, they are capable of tolerating a certain amount of shaft misalignment.
36
Vented Cavity Bearing Liner

Oil Deflector Bearing Cavity
Turbine End Compressor End
Figure 29. #2 Bearing Assembly
H. Thrust Bearings –Tilting Pad Equalizing and Non-Equalizing Types
1. General
A thrust bearing unit is made up of a shaft member called the “thrust runner” and a stationary mem-
ber, called the “bearing.” Thrust bearings support the thrust loads developed on the rotor surfaces
of a gas turbine unit. The thrust load imposed on such a bearing is the sum of the forces that act on
the rotor assembly in a direction along the rotor axis. For example, the thrust forces of an axial-flow
compressor, such as those used in General Electric gas turbines, are only partially compensated for
by the anti-thrust forces of the turbine that drives it. The resultant thrust load will tend to move the
rotor assembly in a direction opposite to that of the air flow through the compressor. During normal
operation of a gas turbine unit, the thrust load of a rotor assembly is unidirectional; however, during
startup and shutdown of the unit, the direction of the thrust load will generally reverse. Thus, two
thrust bearings are provided on a rotor shaft assembly in order to support the thrust loads imposed
in either direction. The bearing which takes the thrust load during normal operation is called the “ac-
tive” or “loaded” thrust bearing. That which takes the thrust load during startup or shutdown of the
unit is called the “inactive” or “unloaded” thrust bearing.
Tilting pad, equalizing-type thrust bearings are commonly employed as “loaded” thrust bearings in
General Electric gas turbines. This type of bearing will sustain high loads and is tolerant of shaft
and housing misalignment. A typical tilting pad, equalizing-type thrust bearing is shown in Figure
30. A typical outline and section are shown in Figure 31.
Tilting pad, non-equalizing type thrust bearings are used for the “inactive” or “unloaded” applica-
tion. This type of bearing is capable of carrying high thrust loads but is less tolerant of misalignment
than the tilting pad, equalizing-type. A cross section and outline diagram of a typical non-equalizing
thrust bearing is shown in Figure 32.
2. Description
The principal parts of the tilting pad equalizing thrust bearing include the stationary pivoted seg-
ments or “pads;” two rows of hardened steel equalizing levers called “leveling plates;” and the sup-
37
1
2
8
7
6 4
5
1. Pad 5. Lower Leveling Plate

2. Oil Control Plate 6. Pad Support
3. Base Ring 7. Upper Leveling Plate Screw
4. Upper Leveling Plate 8. Base Ring Key
Figure 30. Typical Tilting Pad Equalizing Thrust Bearing
38
1
5
2
4 3
1. Thrust Pad
2. Pad-Babbit Surface
3. Pad Support
4. Base Ring
5. Upper Leveling Link
6. Lower Leveling Link
7. Anti-Rotation Dowel Pin
Figure 31. Outline of Typical Tilting-Pad Equalizing Thrust Bearing
39
4
5 2
4 3
1. Base Ring at Oil Control

Plate
2. Base Ring at Thrust Pad
3. Pad Support
4. Thrust Pad
5. Pad-Babbit Surface
6. Oil Control Plate
Figure 32. Typical Tilting-Pad Non-Equalizing Thrust Bearing-Outline Diagram
40
porting member called the “base ring.” Typical pads, leveling plates, and the base ring are shown
in Figures 33, 34, and 35.
The tilting pad, non-equalizing types of thrust bearing is similar to the equalizing types, except for
the “leveling plates” which are not a part of the design.
The pads and the leveling plates are assembled in the base ring. The complete assembly is supported
in a bearing housing which is secured to the main turbine structure. The thrust bearings are keyed
in place to prevent rotation.
The bearing pad is shaped like the sector of a ring. Its bearing surface is faced with babbitt and each
pad has a hardened steel button, called a “pad support,” set into its back which allows the pad to tilt
slightly in any direction on its leveling plate.
The leveling plates are in effect short levers with center fulcrums. Their function is to align the bear-
ing pads with the thrust runner and equalize the load among the pads despite possible slight mis-
alignment of the shaft axis from the normal, a condition that might result from small deflections in
the turbine structure during operation.
The leveling plates are located in the base ring by dowels or screws such that the plates are free to
tilt on their fulcrums. The arrangement of the leveling plates with respect to the pads and the base
ring is shown in Figure 36. The load transmitted by the thrust runner to any one pad causes that pad
to press against the upper leveling plate immediately behind it. Each leveling plate, in turn, is sup-
ported upon one edge of each of the two adjacent lower leveling plates, the other edges of which
take part in supporting the next upper leveling plates on either side. As a result of this arrangement,
any incipient excess of thrust on one pad is shared through the interaction of the leveling plates by
the adjacent pads. This interaction and load sharing is distributed all around the circle so that all the
pads receive equal loading.
The tilting pad, non-equalizing-type thrust bearing does not contain leveling plates and, as a result,
is thinner in the axial dimension.
The base ring provides support for all the parts of the bearing assembly and keeps the parts in their
proper location. In some bearing applications, the base ring is specially designed to contain the oil
flow around the pads and thrust runner to prevent flooding of adjacent compartments. Such a base
ring incorporates a tooth which surrounds the thrust runner on the shaft to contain the oil flow within
the bearing. In other applications, a base ring such as the one shown in Figure 35 is used. A thrust
bearing with this type of base ring would be installed in a bearing housing which would incorporate
the necessary oil baffles or other devices to allow proper oil flow around the bearing and prevent
excessive leakage along the shaft where such leakage would be objectionable.
Oil control plates (Figure 30) are used on some tilting pad thrust bearings to direct the flow of lubri-
cating oil to the pads and prevent excessive leakage of oil outward away from the pads. The oil con-
trol plates are bronze segments which are placed between the pads and attached at both ends to the
base ring.
The tilting pad thrust bearing is classified as a hydrodynamically lubricated bearing which means
that the bearing surfaces are separated from the thrust runner by a thin film of lubricating oil which
is formed and maintained by the relative motion of the bearing surfaces. This oil film supports the
thrust load and prevents metal-to-metal contact of the bearing surfaces. In addition to acting as a
41
1 2
1. Babbitted Bearing Surface

2. Pad Support
Figure 33. Pads
1
2
1. Lower Leveling Plate Showing Dowel Hole

2. Upper Leveling Plate Showing Set-Screw Hole
Figure 34. Leveling Plates
42
4 5
1 2 3 6
1. Holes for Fastening Oil-Control Plates

2. Bearing Pad Space
3. Lube Oil Passages
4. Upper Leveling-Plate Set-Screw Hole
5. Base Ring Key
6. Lower Leveling-Plate Dowel
Figure 35. Typical Base Ring
Pad
Collar
Leveling Base
Plates Ring
Figure 36. Schematic Diagram Showing Arrangement of Equalizing Means
43
load-supporting medium, the oil also carries away the heat generated by the shearing action in the
oil film.
The pads of a tilting pad thrust bearing are free to assume the position which will provide for the
optimum wedge-shaped oil film required by different combination of load, speed, oil viscosity and
temperature to which the bearing is subjected.
The tilting pad thrust bearing is lubricated by oil which is admitted under pressure through ports in
the bearing housing to an annulus behind the base ring. The lube oil then flows through ports in the
base ring to the thrust bearing cavity where it is picked up by the rotating thrust runner and carried
around the entire bearing surface. Oil circulation through the tilting pad thrust bearing is assisted
by the natural pumping action of the rotating thrust collar.
Oil leaves the bearing at the outer periphery of the pads and thrust collar where it is gathered in a
large annular cavity and drained. The drain annulus and exit ports are cast or machined into the bear-
ing housing.
3. Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Manual for information.
VII. COUPLINGS
A. Accessory Gear Coupling –Oil Filled
1. Description
The major components of the oil-filled accessory gear coupling consist of sleeves, hubs, and a float-
ing shaft (Figure 37). The coupling sleeves include flanges which interface with the accessory gear
box and the turbine rotor. Internal gear teeth machined within the coupling sleeve mesh with the
external crowned teeth of the hubs. These hubs are splined onto the floating shaft, and the resultant
pivoting action of the sleeves and the hubs compensate for a nominal misalignment of the accessory
gear box and the turbine rotor. The sliding action between the hubs and the sleeves permits axial
movement of the turbine relative to the accessory gear box. The O-ring seals, recessed in the face
of the coupling flanges and located between the sleeves and hubs, are used to contain the lubricant
within the coupling.
2. Operation Check
During the startup and normal rotation of the gas turbine, a visual check of the accessory gear cou-
pling should be made for possible misalignment or malfunction as evidenced by unusual motion or
vibration. A check should also be made for lubricant leakage.
After performing a running check,the turbine should be shut down and the general alignment and
axial clearance, torque values of the coupling fasteners, and lube plugs should be rechecked for leak-
age.
44
3. Maintenance
Periodic inspection and maintenance procedures, as described in the Maintenance section of the
MS9000 Instruction Manual, provide suggested routine inspections and maintenance to be per-
formed at recommended specified time intervals. The procedures also include inspections which
are not specified for definite time intervals, but are based on operating experience, turbine condi-
tions, and as-needed determinations. The actual time interval established for any particular gas tur-
bine should be based on the user’s operating experience, and on ambient conditions such as tempera-
ture range, humidity, dust and corrosive atmosphere.
4. Lubrication
The oil-filled couplings are to be cleaned and inspected every three years, and relubricated with the
proper lubricant as specified in the Lubrication Guidance Chart contained in the Maintenance vol-
ume of this manual. The procedure outlined below should be strictly followed during the relubrica-
tion operation to prevent shaft misalignment and possible damage to the accessory gear box or to
the coupling.
a. Remove Accessory Coupling
1. Matchmark the accessory shaft to the rotor, and the accessory coupling to the accessory
gear box shaft. See Figure 37 for matchmark location.
2. Support the coupling adequately and unbolt it from the accessory gear box and rotor. The
coupling must be unbolted to completely drain the oil from each end of the coupling.
b. Flush, Clean and Inspect
1. Flush and clean out all dirty oil with clean oil.
2. Caution should be exercised to remove all accumulation of sludge and foreign material
from the gear teeth and spline areas.
3. Inspect the splines and gear teeth for cleanliness, damage, and wear. See Inspection para-
graph below.
4. Inspect and replace the O-ring if necessary.
c. Reassemble
1. Reassemble the coupling to the accessory gear box and the turbine rotor using the follow-
ing torque values:
7/8–14 Bolts –275/285 ft–lb
1–8 Bolts –400/410 ft–lb
2. Extreme caution should be taken not to pinch the O-ring seals.
d. Relubrication
1. Remove the lube plugs on each end of the coupling.
45
Mating Flange
Matchmark Both Ends of
O-Ring Coupling Assembly
Sleeve
O-Ring
Hub Floating Shaft
Lube Plug
Figure 37. Oil-Filled Accessory Gear Coupling Assembly
46
2. Fill each end of the coupling with 335 cc (11.3 fluid ounces) of lubricant conforming to
MIL–L–2105B, Grade 140 and replace the plugs.
CAUTION
Do not overfill the coupling with lubricant. Overfilling

can result in damage to the accessory gear box bearing.
3. Record the lubrication date for future reference.
5. Inspection
Inspect the gear teeth for abrasive wear indicated by scratch-like lines or marks on the tooth surfaces
that are caused by dirt or foreign particles in the oil. Excessive gear tooth wear clearances and tooth
failure can cause a large vibration response. Vibration levels should be plotted against time over the
running history of the gas turbine so that trends, if any, can be used to detect coupling deterioration.
A record should be maintained of the wearing surfaces so that wear progress can be determined with
time.
6. Reassembly Check List
The following list of items should be checked prior to startup:
a. Check that matchmarked parts are correctly positioned.
b. Check the axial movement of the hub. Adequate clearance should be provided between the end
of the shaft assembly and the connected equipment to accommodate variations in shaft separa-
tion. For further information, refer to the Field Alignment Instructions.
c. Check that radial movement between the hubs and the sleeves is held to an absolute minimum
by the pilot fit of the gear.
d. Confirm that the coupling has been properly lubricated and that the lube date is recorded.
e. Check fasteners for correct bolt torque and lube plugs for tightness.
f. Check that the general alignment is correct.
g. Ascertain that connected equipment is properly secured and ready for operation.
VIII. GEAR ASSEMBLIES
A. General
Gear assemblies are used to increase, or decrease, shaft rpm as required by driven equipment such as
load and accessories.
47
B. Accessory Drive
The accessory drive gear, located at the compressor end of the gas turbine, is a gearing assembly coupled
directly through a flexible coupling to the turbine rotor. Its function is to drive each gas turbine accessory
at its proper speed and to connect the turbine to its starting device. In addition, it contains the system
main lube oil pump and the turbine overspeed bolt and trip mechanism.
Contained within the gear casing, there are the gear trains which provide the proper gear reductions to
drive the accessory devices at the required speed with the correct torque values.
Accessories driven by the gear may include the main lube oil pump, the main hydraulic supply pump,
the liquid fuel pump, the water pump, and the main atomizing air compressor. Lubrication of the gear
is from the turbine’s pressurized bearing header supply.
A high–pressure turbine overspeed trip, capable of mechanically dumping the oil in the trip circuits, is
mounted on the exterior casing of the gear. This device can shut the turbine down when the speed exceeds
the design speed. The overspeed bolt which actuates the trip upon overspeed is installed in the main shaft.
1. Description
For ease of maintenance and inspection, the gear casing is split at the horizontal plane into an upper
and lower section. Interconnected shafts are arranged in a parallel axis in the lower casing. Three
of the shafts are located on the same horizontal plane as the casing joint.
The gear consists of four parallel axis, interconnected shafts arranged in a casing which provides
mounting pads for the various driven accessories. With the exception of the lube oil pump and hy-
draulic supply pump shaft, all the shaft centerlines are located on the horizontal joint of the accesso-
ry drive casing. Numbers are assigned to the various shafts and the rpm of each shaft and the load
horsepower are shown in the design data which follows this text.
The gear casing is made of cast iron and split at the horizontal joint to facilitate assembly. The lower–
half casing has a closed bottom with openings for lube oil pump suction and discharge lines and cas-
ing drain line.
All of the shafts are connected together by single helical gears which are shrunk to the shafts after
the teeth are cut. It is possible, in some instances, to remove individual gears which may have been
damaged in service, and to replace them with new gears. This operation, however, should be per-
formed at the factory so that the required precision may be maintained.
All of the shafts located on the horizontal joint are contained in babbitt–lined, steel–backed journal
bearings with integral thrust faces which are split on the horizontal joint of the casing. The thrust
faces of the bearings maintain the shafts in their proper axial location. The necessary thrust clearance
is preset at the factory. The shafts which are not on the horizontal joint are contained in babbitt–lined,
steel–backed, non–split bushings with integral thrust faces. Their thrust clearance is preset at the
factory.
The main lubricating oil pump is located on the inboard wall of the lower–half casing of the accesso-
ry drive gear and is described in the Lubrication System section.
48
2. Maintenance
Very little routine inspection of the gear is required. However, should excessive temperatures, un-
usual noises, or oil leaks occur, their cause should be determined and corrected. Refer to the
Manufacturer’s operating and maintenance instructions.
49
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
50
GE Power Systems
GAS TURBINE FUNDAMENTALS
Model Series 9001E

Simple-Cycle, Single-Shaft Heavy-Duty Gas Turbine
id0002
Figure 1
GENERAL The Diesel Cycle
Figure 1 depicts a General Electric simple–cycle The Diesel Cycle, Figure 3, is similar, except that
single–shaft, heavy–duty gas turbine. It is an inter- combustion takes place at a constant pressure (2–3).
nal combustion engine which produces energy This is accomplished by injecting fuel at a rate suffi-
through a cycle similar to the Otto or Diesel cycles in cient to compensate for the volume change. Expan-
that the three cycles consist of the same four stages: sion and exhaust then take place as it does in the Otto
compression, combustion, expansion, and exhaust. Cycle.
There are, however, differences in the details of the
three cycles which are worth examining. P = PRESSURE
V = VOLUME
2 3
P
The Otto Cycle 4
1
In the Otto Cycle, Figure 2, the compression stroke V
(from 1 to 2) is followed by combustion of constant id0022
volume (2 to 3) resulting in increased pressure. The Figure 3 Diesel Cycle

pressure causes expansion (3 to 4) with exhaust tak-
ing place between points 4 and 1. The Brayton Cycle
3
In both the Otto and Diesel cycles a loss occurs due
P = PRESSURE to the pressure drop involved in the exhaust stroke.
V = VOLUME
This loss is avoided by creating a cycle in which the
P 2 4 exhaust stroke is longer than the compression
stroke, thus allowing the working fluid to be ex-
1
panded to atmospheric pressure. Such a cycle has
V
been devised, and is called a Brayton Cycle (Figure
id0021
4). It is also called a Constant Pressure Cycle since
Figure 2 Otto Cycle
combustion and exhaust both take place at constant
A00203 1 GAS TURBINE FUNDAMENTALS
GE Power Systems
pressure. When the Brayton Cycle is worked out for GENERAL DESCRIPTION
a steady–flow process, we have the simple gas tur-
bine cycle. The Model Series 9001E gas turbine is a 3000–rpm,
single–shaft, simple–cycle power package that basi-
cally requires only fuel and fuel connections, gener-
ator breaker connections, and an AC–power source
2 3 for turbine start–up. The MS9001E is also available
in a combined–cycle configuration for applications
P = PRESSURE
V = VOLUME
utilizing a Heat Recovery Steam Generator or simi-
P lar device.
4
1
GAS TURBINE UNIT
V The gas turbine unit consists of a 17–stage axial–
id0010
Figure 4 Brayton Cycle

flow compressor and a 3–stage power turbine. Each
section, compressor rotor and turbine rotor, is as-
sembled separately and then joined together.
In the simple gas turbine cycle, combustion and ex- Through–bolts connect the compressor rotor wheels
haust occur at constant pressure and compression to the forward and aft stubshafts. The turbine rotor
and expansion occur continuously, rather than inter- also utilizes through–bolt construction with spacer
mittently as in the Otto or Diesel cycles. This means wheels between the first– and second–stage and the
that gas turbine power is continuously available, second– and third–stage wheels.
whereas in a reciprocating engine power takeoff is The assembled rotor is a three–bearing design utiliz-
available only on the expansion stroke. Figure 5 ing pressure–feed elliptical and tilt–pad journal
schematically represents the hardware necessary for bearings. The three–bearing design assures that ro-
the cycle. The points on Figures 4 and 5 are consis- tor–critical speeds are above the operating speed and
tent. At point 1, air enters the compressor (c). The allows for optimum turbine bucket/turbine shell
high pressure compressor discharge air at point 2 is clearances.
mixed with fuel in the burner (b). The product of this
continuous combustion at point 3 enters the turbine
(t), and is expanded to atmospheric pressure (point
4). The turbine provides the horsepower to drive the
compressor and load (in this case, a generator).
TURBINE COMPONENTS –
OVERVIEW
FUEL
The major components of the gas turbine are the ro-
tor components, primarily the axial flow compres-
2 3 4
b sor and the turbine wheels; the stationary
components, primarily the compressor casings, tur-
c t
bine shell, and nozzles; and the combustion compo-
GEN
nents.
1 c = COMPRESSOR Casings
b = BURNERS
AIR t = TURBINE
id0017
The casings make up the structural backbone of the
Figure 5 Fundamental Gas Turbine gas turbine. This structure supports the rotating ele-
GAS TURBINE FUNDAMENTALS 2 A00203
GE Power Systems
ments through its bearing housings, functions as a Nozzles

pressure vessel to contain the turbine’s working
fluids of compressed air and combustion gases, and General Electric turbines are of the impulse or high–
provides a surface of revolution for the blading to energy stage design (i.e., pressure and heat conver-
operate while maintaining minimum radial and axial sion in the nozzle). The high pressure drop across the
clearance and, therefore, optimum performance. nozzle imparts a high velocity (kinetic energy) to the
combustion gases. This energy is directed to the
buckets which use this energy to rotate the shaft,
Compressor driving the axial compressor and load.
Combustion System
The function of the axial flow compressor is to fur-
nish high pressure air to the combustion chambers
for the production of the hot gases necessary to oper- The overall function of the combustion system is to
ate the turbine. Since only a portion of its output is supply the heat energy to the gas turbine cycle. This
used for combustion the compressor also serves as a is accomplished by burning fuel mixed with com-
source of cooling air for the turbine nozzles, turbine pressor discharge air. The combustion gases are then
wheels, transition pieces, and other portions of the diluted with excess air to achieve the desired gas
hot–gas path. temperature at the inlet of the first–stage turbine
nozzle.
Air enters the inlet of the multistage compressor The combustion system consists of a number of sim-
where it is compressed from atmospheric pressure to ilar combustion chambers. Compressor discharge
approximately 8.95 to 12.92 bar (130 to 185 psig), air is distributed to these chambers where it is bled
depending on frame size. This gives a Compressor into a cylindrical combustion liner. Fuel is injected
Pressure Ratio of approximately 10:1 to 13.5:1, into the forward end of the liners where it mixes with
the compressor discharge air and combustion takes
Atmos Press ) Compressor Disch Pressure
C.R. + place, thereby creating hot gases with temperatures
(Atmospheric Pressure)
in excess of 1650°C (3000°F) in the flame zone. As
well as being used for combustion, the relatively
again dependent on frame size. The air which con-
cool compressor discharge air acts as a blanket to
tinuously discharges from the compressor will
protect the liners from the heat of combustion. In
occupy a smaller volume at the compressor dis-
addition to cooling the combustion liners, compres-
charge than at the inlet and, due to heating during
sor discharge air mixes with the combustion gases
compression, will have a temperature of 315°C to
downstream of the combustion reaction zone, cool-
360°C (600°F to 680°F).
ing and diluting the gases which now pass through
transition pieces to the turbine first–stage nozzle.
The amount of air necessary to cool the liner wall
Turbine
and dilute the hot gas to the temperature desired at
the first–stage nozzle is about four times that re-
quired for complete combustion; this “excess air” in
The turbine wheels are an area of primary impor-
the turbine exhaust makes it possible to install auxil-
tance because they are the point at which the kinetic
iary burners in a Heat Recovery Steam Generator if
energy of the hot gases is converted into useful rota-
so desired.
tional, mechanical energy by the turbine buckets.
This produces the power necessary to meet the load The schematic operation of the single–shaft simple–
requirements and drive the axial–flow compressor. cycle gas turbine may be seen in Figure 6.
A00203 3 GAS TURBINE FUNDAMENTALS

GE Power Systems
IGNITION
ATMOSPHERIC (FOR STARTUP)
AIR EXHAUST
COMPRESSED HOT GASES

AIR COMBUSTION
CHAMBER
FUEL
TORQUE
TORQUE COMPRESSOR TURBINE OUTPUT
OUTPUT TO DRIVEN
TO DRIVEN LOAD
ACCESSORIES
TORQUE
INPUT
FROM
STARTING
DEVICE
ROTOR
id0020
Figure 6 Simple–Cycle Gas Turbine Operation
GE Power Systems Training
GAS TURBINE FUNDAMENTALS 4 A00203

G
E
DT-1C
O
ffi
ci
al
G
E
O
ffi
ci
al
RADIAL BUCKET
LOCKING
PIN
AXIAL
LOCKING ”D” KEY
PIN
RADIAL
SECTION VIEW LOCKING
LOCKING BUCKET DOVETAIL PIN
LOCKING PIN ASSEMBLY
MS7001EA
1st STAGE
BUCKET
(Example)
BUCKET
SEALS
REFER TO
VIEW A
BKTASM1A
BUCKET ASSEMBLED
IN DOVETAIL
LOCKING
”D” KEY PLACED IN TURBINE WHEEL BUCKET
SLOT AND PUSHED INTO BUCKET DOVETAIL AXIAL
POCKET LOCKING THE BUCKET TO LOCKING BUCKET
THE TURBINE WHEEL PIN ”D” KEY
POCKET
ENLARGED VIEW C
BUCKET & ”D” KEY
ASSEMBLY
”D” KEY ASSEMBLY
BKTASM1C 10/94
TWISTLOCKS
MS7001EA
2nd STAGE
BUCKET
(Example)
TWISTLOCK ROTATED
TO SECURE BUCKET
TWISTLOCK
STAKING
GROOVE
HEAD STAKED INTO

GROOVE TO PREVENT
FURTHER ROTATION
DETAIL VIEW
BUCKET & TWISTLOCK
ASSEMBLY
TWISTLOCK ASSEMBLY
BKTASM1B 10/94

SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 1 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060- Rev : 001
ISO PROJECTION REVISIONS

REV DESCRIPTION NAMES DATE SIGNATURES
T. Fischer
A First issue D. Pâques 20/03/2006
JM. Jost
EACH SECTION SHALL BE REVISED IN T. Fischer
ITS ENTIRETY. B IM-2006002198 D. Pâques 21/03/2006
ALL SHEETS OF EACH SECTION JM. Jost
ARE THE SAME REVISION LEVEL T. Fischer
AS INDICATED IN THE REVISION
C IM-2006002376 D. Pâques 28/03/2006
BLOCK
JM. Jost
SECTION NO. OF REV JM. Jost
IM-2006006416
SHEETS D D. Pâques 19/09/2006
(DCI 06018692)
INDEX 1 F V. Sicard
D. Pâques
01E 1 F
E IM-2007001938 JM. Jost 07/03/2007
01F 1 F
V. Sicard
D. Pâques
F IM-2007003054 JM. Jost 10/04/2007
V. Sicard
al
ci
ffi
Ce document, propriété exclusive de

O
GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel.

Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou
reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable.
This document, exclusive property of

GE Energy Products France SNC is strictly confidential.
E
It must not be communicated, copied or

reproduced without our prior written consent. First made for : 9171E ITEM : 0414
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED NAMES DATE
G
DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM [INCHES] DRAWN 20/03/06

T. Fischer
TOLERANCES ON:
CHECKED 20/03/06
1 [2] PL DECIMALS + D. Pâques
APPROVED 20/03/06
2 [3] PL DECIMALS + JM. Jost NOMENCLATURE DES APPAREILS DE CONTROLE
ANGLES +
DIAGRAM. SCHEMA. P.P. – DEVICE SUMMARY
FRACTIONS +
WEIGHT : 0000 kg SIZE CAGE CODE DWG NO
INDEX
A4 137A3171
SCALE SHEET 1/1
DT-1C Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 1 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
REVISIONS
Rev Description
A First issue
- Modified wiring diagram for 95BT-1, 2 & 3 : ENCL-T instead of ENCL-??
- Added water injection enclosure (PID 0436) :
B
20JS-30, 33JS-1 & 2, 63JS-30, 88JS-1 & 2, AT-WI-1
- Modified level of voltage :

C replaced 230 VAC by 240 VAC and 115 VAC by 120 VAC
- Added devices 20BA-31, 63BA-31, 95BA-4, 5 & 6
- Suppressed devices 63FL-2, 71QL-1 & 71QH-1
- Added devices 23QV-2 / 88QV-2 / 96QL-1 / 96QV-1 / 96FL-2A & 2B / 96FP-1 & 2 / FF2-2 /
D FF11-2
- Modified PID for MLI 0425 : 206D7308 instead of 209D7177
- Modified setting for 63PL-21
E Add PF1-90
F Add 88QAOB and 88QEOB
SIZE CAGE CODE DWG NO

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 1/ 29
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
PRESSURE : All pressures are gauge pressure, abs means absolute pressure.
Abbreviations Descriptions
AA Atomizing Air
ACF Control Filter Downstream Pressure
AD Compressor Discharge Air
AE Extraction Air
AMF Lube Oil Filter Downstream Pressure
DEC. Decreasing
DPDT Double pole, double throw
DPG Differential Pressure Gauge
FC Fail safe to close
FO Fail open
GF Gas Fuel
GFV Gas Fuel Vent
GPL Gas Valve Stem Packaging Leakoff
INC. Increasing
LVDT Linear variable differential transformer
Model List Item : four digit code used by General Electric to
MLI identify components, assembly, drawings or specifications,
example : MLI 0414 for Device Summary
NC Normally closed
NO Normally open
Means absolute zero energy level, such as no power, no oil, no
Normal
speed, no temperature
OD Oil Drain
OD
Oil drain above oil tank level
OD
Oil drain below oil tank level
OH Control Oil High Pressure

OHT Trip Oil High Pressure
OL Lube Oil
OLV Lube Oil Event
OR Regulated Lube Oil
PC Piping connecting point
The arrow direction indicates the liquid gravitational drainage
Slope
due to the slope
SPDT Single pole, double throw
SPST Single pole, single throw
WD Water Drain
WF Water Feed
WR Water Return

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 2/ 29
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
Wiring diagram Description

ACCY The device is in the accessories wiring diagram (MLI 401A)
AIR The device is in the cooling fan module wiring diagram (MLI A132)
ENCL-G The device is in the gas enclosure interface drawing (MLI 1658)
The device is in the liquid fuel / atomizing air / water injection module
ENCL-LF
enclosure interface drawing (MLI 1650)
The device is in the lube oil / fuel gas module enclosure interface drawing (MLI
ENCL-LO
1634)
ENCL-T The device is in the turbine enclosure interface drawing (MLI 1605)
ENCL-WI The device is in the water injection enclosure interface drawing (MLI 1659)
FILT The device is in the air filter wiring diagram (MLI A040)
GAS The device is in the gas module wiring diagram (MLI 0991 or 401G)
GENE The device is in the generator wiring diagram
IBH The device is in the bleed heating wiring diagram (MLI A037)
The device is in the liquid fuel / atomizing air / water injection module wiring
LF AA WI
diagram (MLI A162)
LF-SR The device is in the liquid fuel recirculation skid wiring diagram (MLI 969C)
LO FG The device is in the lube oil / fuel gas module wiring diagram (MLI A160)
LOAD The device is in the load gear wiring diagram (MLI A012)
MIST The device is in the mist eliminator outline drawing (MLI A098)
OIL The device is in the lube oil wiring diagram (MLI 0991 or 401H)
STEAM The device is in the steam injection module wiring diagram (MLI A135)
TURB The device is in the gas turbine wiring diagram (MLI 401T)
The device is in the additive injection vanadium module wiring diagram (MLI
VAN
E021)
WI The device is in the water injection module wiring diagram (MLI A035)

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 3/ 29
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
System Name Items System Reference

Control Devices Turbine System 0415 CD 214D1164
Lube Oil System 0416 LO 206D6970
Cooling and Sealing Air System 0417 CSA 206D6971
Trip Oil System 0418 TO N/A
Instrument Air System 0419 APU N/A
Cooling Water System 0420 CW 206D6786
Starting Means System 0421 SM 205D4866
Gas Fuel System 0422 GF 206D6972
Liquid Fuel System 0424 LF 206D6600
Atomizing Air System 0425 AA 206D7308
Fire Protection System 0426 FP 206D6966
PP Station Air System 0428 AE N/A
Steam Injection System 0431 SI N/A
Inlet Air heating System 0432 IAR N/A
Hydraulic Supply System 0434 HS 209D7043
Heating and Ventilation System 0436 HV 206D6596
Turbine and Compressor Cleaning System 0441 TCC N/A
Turbine and Compressor Washing System 0442 TCW 205D4265
Water Injection System 0462 WI 206D6293
Compressor Inlet Guide Vanes System 0469 IGV 206D6828
Flow Inlet and Exhaust System 0471 IE 206D6968
Gas Detection System 0474 GD 206D6595
Fuel Purge System 0477 FPU 209D7645
Nitrogen Injection System 0491 NI N/A
Performance Monitor System 0492 PM 214D1258
Additive Injection Skid System 0494 LFAD 206D6208
Load Gear System 0495 LG N/A

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 4/ 29
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Wiring
Devices MLI Designation
PID Diagram
Solenoid valve for VA18-1 control
0425 20AA-1 0983 TURB
Characteristics : Normal : 1 to 3 open ; 2 closed | 0.035 kW | 125 VDC
0425 20AB-1 0922 ACCY
Electromagnet, air inlet filtring system by pass door, auxiliaries compartment
0436 20BA-30 1605 ENCL-T
Characteristics : 24 VDC
Electromagnet, air inlet filtring system by pass door auxiliaries compartment
0436 20BA-31 1605 ENCL-T
Electromagnet, air inlet filtring system by pass door, GT compartment
0436 20BT-30 1605 ENCL-T
Electromagnet, air inlet filtring system by pass door
0436 20BT-40 1605 ENCL-T
Compressor bleed solenoid valve
0417 20CB-1 1071 TURB
Characteristics : Normal : B to C Open, A closed | 0.04 kW | 125 VDC
Fuel pump clutch solenoid
0424 20CF-1 0601 ACCY
Characteristics : Normal : NO | 0.16 kW (max) | 125 VDC
Trip solenoid valve for gas control valve (VGC-1)
0422 20FGC-1 0509 GAS
Characteristics : Normal : NO | 0.0156 kW | 125 VDC
Fuel gas stop valve solenoid valve
0422 20FGS-1 0507 GAS
Liquid fuel stop valve solenoid
0424 20FL-1 1019 ACCY
Solenoïd valve
0494 20IA-11 E021 VAN
Characteristics : Normal : NC | 12 W | 125 VDC
Electromagnet, air inlet filtring system by pass door, water injection compartment
0436 20JS-30 1659 ENCL-WI
Purge fuel liquid solenoid valve
0424 20PF-100 0961 TURB
Characteristics : Normal : A to P open. B closed | 40 W | 125 VDC
0477 20PG-1 0991 GAS
Settings : A needle-valve is installed upstream of 20PG-1 in order to adjust VA13-1 time
opening at 30 seconds
0477 20PG-2 0991 GAS
Settings : A needle-valve is installed upstream of 20PG-1 in order to adjust VA13-1 time
opening at 30 seconds
0477 20PL-1 918T TURB
Torque converter fill / drain solenoid valve
0421 20TU-1 0605 ACCY
Characteristics : Normal : NC
Solenoid valve for compressor IGV trip system
0469 20TV-1 1019 ACCY
Motor valve off-line compressor water wash
0442 20TW-1. 0953 TURB
Characteristics : Normal : FC | 0.092 kW | 50 Hz | 115 VAC
Motor valve on-line compressor water wash
0442 20TW-3. 0953 TURB
Characteristics : Normal : FC | 0.092 kW | 50 Hz | 115 VAC
Fuel gas vent solenoid valve
0422 20VG-1 0991 GAS

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 5/ 29
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Wiring
PID Diagram
Vent solenoid valve of inter-valve cavity VA13-1 and VA13-2
0477 20VG-2 0991 GAS
Electromagnet, load compartment air inlet filtering system by pass door
0436 20VG--30 1605 ENCL-T
Electromagnet, gas compartment air inlet filtering system by pass door
0436 20VL-30 1658 ENCL-T
Water injection stop valve solenoid valve
0462 20WN-1 A035 WI
Characteristics : Normal : NO | 125 VDC
Water injection stop valve solenoid valve (part of VS2-2)
0462 20WN-2 A035 WI
Characteristics : Normal : NO | 125 VDC
Anti-condensation heater for motor 88AB-1
0425 23AB-1 1047 ACCY
Characteristics : 50 Hz | 0.05 kW | 240 VAC
Anti-condensation heater for motor 88BA-1
0436 23BA-1 1605 ENCL-T
Anti-condensation heater for motor 88BA-2
0436 23BA-2 1605 ENCL-T
Anti-condensation heater for motor 88BT-1
0436 23BT-1 1605 ENCL-T
Anti-condensation heater for motor 88BT-2
0436 23BT-2 1605 ENCL-T
Anti-condensation heater for motor 88CR-1
0421 23CR-1 0603 ACCY
0421 23CR-2 0603 ACCY
0421 23CR-3 0603 ACCY
Auxiliaries compartment heater
0436 23HA-1 1113 ENCL-T
Gas compartment heater
0436 23HA-11 1195 ENCL-G
Gas compartment air inlet heater
0436 23HA-12 1195 ENCL-G
Characteristics : 50 Hz | 15 kW | 415 VAC
0436 23HA-2 1113 ENCL-T
0436 23HA-3 1113 ENCL-T
0436 23HA-4 1113 ENCL-T
Anti-condensation heater for motor 88HQ-1
0434 23HQ-1 0628 ACCY
Turbine compartment heater
0436 23HT-1 1113 ENCL-T
0436 23HT-2 1113 ENCL-T
0436 23HT-3 1113 ENCL-T
0436 23HT-4 1113 ENCL-T

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 6/ 29
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Wiring
PID Diagram
Anti-condensation heater for motor 88QA-1
0416 23QA-1 1006 ACCY
Immersion heater lube oil tank
0416 23QT-1 0938 ACCY
Anti-condensation heater for motor 88QV-1
0416 23QV-1 A098 MIST
Anti-condensation heater for motor 88QV-2
0416 23QV-2 A098 MIST
Anti-condensation heater for motor 88TG-1
0421 23TG-1 0603 ACCY
Anti-condensation heater for motor 88TK-1
0417 23TK-1 1233 ACCY
Anti-condensation heater for motor 88TK-2
0417 23TK-2 1233 ACCY
Anti-condensation heater for motor 88VG-1
0436 23VG-1 1605 ENCL-T
Anti-condensation heater for motor 88VG-2
0436 23VG-2 1605 ENCL-T
Anti-condensation heater for motor 88WN-1
0462 23WN-1 A035 WI
0471 27TF-1 A040 FILT GT air filter general alarm dispatching
0415 28FD-10 1121 TURB Flame detector combustion chamber n°10
Alarm relay
0415 30SG-1 1213 TURB
Characteristics : Normal : NO
Auxiliaries compartment ventilation damper limit switch
0436 33BA-1 1605 ENCL-T
Auxiliaries compartment ventilation damper limit switch
0436 33BA-2 1605 ENCL-T
GT compartment ventilation damper limit switch
0436 33BT-1 1605 ENCL-T Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Flap closed : limit switch activated, contact closed
GT compartment ventilation damper limit switch
0436 33BT-2 1605 ENCL-T Characteristics : Normal : NO
11 stage compressor bleed valve limit switch
0417 33CB-1 1022 TURB Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Valve opened : limit switch activated, contact closed

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 7/ 29
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Wiring
PID Diagram
Auxiliaries compartment door limit switch
0436 33DT-1 1605 ENCL-T Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Door closed : limit switch activated, contact closed
Gas compartment door limit switch
0436 33DT-12 1658 ENCL-G Characteristics : Normal : NO
Auxiliaries compartment door limit switch
GT compartment door limit switch
GT compartment door limit switch
Liquid fuel stop valve limit switch
0424 33FL-1 0511 ACCY Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Valve closed : limit switch activated, contact closed
Water injection skid enclosure : ventilation damper limit switch
0436 33JS-1 1659 ENCL-WI Characteristics : Normal : NO
Water injection skid enclosure : ventilation damper limit switch
0436 33JS-2 1659 ENCL-WI Characteristics : Normal : NO
Purge fuel liquid valve limit switch VP-1
0424 33PF-1 0961 TURB Characteristics : Normal : NO
Purge fuel liquid valve limit switch VP-2
0424 33PF-2 0961 TURB Characteristics : Normal : NO
VA13-1 close position limit switch
0477 33PG-1 0991 GAS Characteristics : Normal : NO
VA13-1 open position limit switch
VA13-2 close position limit switch
VA13-2 open position limit switch

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 8/ 29
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Wiring
PID Diagram
Torque converter solenoid valve limit switch
0421 33TC-1 0605 ACCY Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : 20TU-1 de-energized : switch activated, contact closed
Torque converter low torque limit switch
0421 33TM-5 0605 ACCY Characteristics : Normal : NO, switch closed for IGV closed or max torque
Settings : Setup at 2 round (range 0-31 rack bar revolution)
Torque converter high torque limit switch
0421 33TM-6 0605 ACCY Characteristics : Normal : NO, switch closed for IGV closed or max torque
Settings : Setup at 28 round (range 0-31 rack bar revolution)
Load compartment ventilation damper limit switch
0436 33VG-1 1605 ENCL-T Characteristics : Normal : NO
Solenoid valve 20VG-1 limit switch
0422 33VG-11 0991 GAS Characteristics : Normal : NC
Load compartment ventilation damper limit switch
0436 33VG-2 1605 ENCL-T Characteristics : Normal : NO
Gas compartment ventilation damper limit switch
0436 33VL-1 1658 ENCL-G Characteristics : Normal : NO
Gas compartment ventilation damper limit switch
0436 33VL-2 1658 ENCL-G Characteristics : Normal : NO
Water injection control valve limit switch (part of VC4-1)
0462 33WN-1 A035 WI Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Valve full opened : limit switch activated, contact closed
Water injection control valve limit switch (part of VC4-1)
Settings : Valve full closed : limit switch activated, contact closed
Water injection stop valve limit switch (part of VS2-2)
Settings : Valve full opened : limit switch activated, contact closed
Water injection stop valve limit switch (part of VS2-2)
Settings : Valve full closed : limit switch activated, contact closed
Vibration sensor
0415 39V-1A 1218 TURB
Characteristics : For 25.4 mm/s (1 in/s), 150 ± 4.5 mV peak
Vibration sensor
0415 39V-1B 1218 TURB
Vibration sensor
0415 39V-2A 1218 TURB
Vibration sensor
0415 39V-3A 1218 TURB
Vibration sensor
0415 39V-3B 1218 TURB
Vibration sensor
0415 39VS-11 235A TURB Characteristics : Output proximitor : 7.87 V/mm (0.2 V/mil)
Settings : Gap : 1.4 ± 0.05 mm (0.055 ± 0.002 in)
Vibration sensor
0415 39VS-12 235A TURB Characteristics : Output proximitor : 7.87 V/mm (0.2 V/mil)

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 9/ 29
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Wiring
PID Diagram
Vibration sensor
0415 39VS-21 235B TURB Characteristics : Output proximitor : 7.87 V/mm (0.2 V/mil)
Vibration sensor
Vibration sensor
Vibration sensor
Vibration sensor
0415 39VS-31 235C TURB Characteristics : Output proximitor : 7.87 V/mm (0.2 V/mil)
Vibration sensor
0415 39VS-32 235C TURB Characteristics : Output proximitor : 7.87 V/mm (0.2 V/mil)
Break glass unit auxiliaries compartment access door
0426 43CP-1 1113 ENCL-T
Break glass unit GT compartment access door
0426 43CP-2 1113 ENCL-T
Break glass unit auxiliaries compartment access door
0426 43CP-3 1113 ENCL-T
Break glass unit GT compartment access door
0426 43CP-4 1113 ENCL-T
Break glass unit load compartment access door
0426 43CP-5 1113 ENCL-T
Break glass unit gas compartment access door
0426 43CP-6 1195 ENCL-G
Break glass unit gas compartment access door
0426 43CP-7 1195 ENCL-G
Off-line water wash push button
0442 43TW-1/PB 1105 TURB
Thermostatic fire detector auxiliaries compartment
0426 45FA-10A 1113 ENCL-T Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Closed : 163 ± 14°C (325 ± 25°F)
0426 45FA-10B 1113 ENCL-T Characteristics : Normal : NO

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 10/ 29
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Wiring
PID Diagram
0426 45FA-1A 1104 ACCY Characteristics : Normal : NO
0426 45FA-1B 1104 ACCY Characteristics : Normal : NO
0426 45FA-2A 1104 ACCY Characteristics : Normal : NO
0426 45FA-2B 1104 ACCY Characteristics : Normal : NO
Thermostatic fire detector gas compartment
0426 45FA-6A A116 GAS Characteristics : Normal : NO
0426 45FA-6B 1195 GAS Characteristics : Normal : NO
0426 45FA-7A A116 GAS Characteristics : Normal : NO
0426 45FA-7B A116 GAS Characteristics : Normal : NO
Thermostatic fire detector GT compartment
0426 45FT-1A 1103 TURB Characteristics : Normal : NO
0426 45FT-1B 1103 TURB Characteristics : Normal : NO
Thermostatic fire detector load compartment

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 11/ 29
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Wiring
PID Diagram
Gas detector auxiliary compartment
0474 45HA-1 1153 ACCY
Characteristics : Range : 0 - 20% LEL
Gas detector
0474 45HA-10 1113 ENCL-T
Gas detector
0474 45HA-11 1113 ENCL-T
Gas detector
0474 45HA-12 1113 ENCL-T
0474 45HA-2 1153 ACCY
0474 45HA-3 1153 ACCY
Gas detector gas module compartment ventilation duct
0474 45HA-4 1195 ENCL-G
0474 45HA-5 1195 ENCL-G
0474 45HA-6 1195 ENCL-G
Gas detector turbine compartment
0474 45HT-1 1154 TURB
0474 45HT-2 1154 TURB
0474 45HT-3 1154 TURB
Gas detector turbine compartment ventilation duct
0474 45HT-4 1113 ENCL-T
0474 45HT-5 1113 ENCL-T
0474 45HT-6 1113 ENCL-T
Security thermostat gas compartment heater
0436 49HA-12 1658 ENCL-G
Characteristics : Normal : NO | Closed at 100°C (212°F)
Emergency stop button auxiliaries compartment
0426 5E-1 1104 ACCY
Emergency stop button auxiliaries compartment
0426 5E-2 1104 ACCY
Pressure switch
0494 63AF-11 E021 VAN
Settings :
Increase open at 3 ± 0.25 bar (43.5 ± 4 psi)

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 12/ 29
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Wiring
PID Diagram
Differential pressure switch , air inlet auxiliaries compartment
0436 63BA-30 1605 ENCL-T Settings :
Closed at 1 ± 0.1 mbar (0.015 ± 0.001 psi)
Differential pressure switch air inlet auxiliaries compartment
0436 63BA-31 1605 ENCL-T Settings :
Differential pressure switch air inlet
0436 63BT-30 1605 ENCL-T Settings :
Differential pressure switch air inlet
0436 63BT-40 1605 ENCL-T Settings :
GT compressed air inlet filter low pressure switch
0471 63CA-1 A040 FILT Settings :
Decrease open at : 5.5 ± 0.5 bar (79.77 ± 7.25 psi) |
Not adjustable : increase close at : 6 ± 0.5 bar (87 ± 7.25 psi)
GT inlet air system differential pressure switch
0471 63CS-2A A040 FILT
Settings :
Increase open at : 23 ± 0.5 mbar (0.33 ± 0.007 psi)
GT inlet air system differential pressure switch
0471 63CS-2B A040 FILT
Settings :
Increase open at : 23 ± 0.5 mbar (0.33 ± 0.007 psi)
Gas fuel pressure switch
0422 63FG-1 0991 GAS Settings :
Not adjustable : increase open at : 2.41 ± 0.05 bar (35.0 ± 0.75 psi) |
Decrease close at : 1.03 ± 0.05 bar (15.0 ± 0.75 psi)
Gas fuel pressure switch
0422 63FG-2 0991 GAS Settings :
Not adjustable : increase open at : 2.41 ± 0.05 bar (35.0 ± 0.75 psi) |
Decrease close at : 1.03 ± 0.05 bar (15.0 ± 0.75 psi)
Hydraulic filter differential pressure alarm
0434 63HF-1 0926 ACCY Settings :
Increase open at : 4.13 ± 0.2 bar (60 ± 3 psi) |
Not adjustable : decrease close at : 2.75 ± 1.03 bar (40 ± 15 psi)
Low hydraulic supply pressure auxiliary hydraulic pump start
0434 63HQ-1 0926 ACCY Settings :
Decrease open at : 93 ± 1.7 bar (1350 ± 25 psi) |
Not adjustable : increase close at : 100 ± 3.1 bar (1450 ± 45 psi)
Differential pressure switch air inlet water injection compartment
0436 63JS-30 1659 ENCL-WI Settings :
Fuel filter differential pressure alarm
0424 63LF-3 0992 ACCY
Settings :
Increase open at : 1.3 ± 0.07 bar (19 ± 1 psi)

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 13/ 29
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Wiring
PID Diagram
Pressure switch on VA13-1 & VA13-2 intervalves space
0477 63PG-1 0991 GAS Settings :
Pressure switch on liquid fuel purge air
0477 63PL-21 918T TURB Settings :
Not adjustable : decrease open at : 4.6 ± 0.3 bar (67 ± 4 psi) |
Increase close at : 6 ± 0.3 bar (87 ± 4 psi)
Low lube oil pressure alarm
0416 63QA-2 0926 ACCY Settings :
Decrease open at : 2.8 ± 0.07 bar (40.6 ± 1 psi) |
Not adjustable : increase close at : 3.1 ± 0.14 bar (45 ± 2 psi)
Differential pressure switch main lube oil filter
0416 63QQ-1 0926 ACCY Settings :
Oil mist eliminator filter high pressure drop alarm
0416 63QQ-10 A098 MIST
Settings :
Increase open at : 80 ± 3 mbar (1.16 ± 0.044 psi)
Torque converter filter differential pressure
0416 63QQ-8 0916 ACCY
Settings :
Increase open at : 1.5 ± 0.2 bar (21.75 ± 3 psi)
Generator bearing low lube oil pressure
0416 63QT-2A ALT. GENE Settings :
Decrease open at : 0.55 ± 0.021 bar (8 ± 0.3 psi) |
Not adjustable : increase close at : 0.62 ± 0.035 bar (9 ± 0.5 psi)
Turbine exhaust frame cooling pressure switch
0417 63TK-1 A053 ACCY
Settings :
Closed above 381 ± 19 mm H2O (15 ± 0.75 in H2O)
Turbine exhaust frame cooling pressure switch
0417 63TK-2 A053 ACCY
Settings :
Closed above 381 ± 19 mm H2O (15 ± 0.75 in H2O)
Differential pressure switch, air inlet load compartment
0436 63VG-30 1605 ENCL-T Settings :
Differential pressure switch, air inlet gas compartment
0436 63VL-30 1658 ENCL-T Settings :
Water injection differential pressure switch
0462 63WN-1 A035 WI Characteristics : Normal : NC
Settings : Open on decreasing pressure / atm : -0.270 ± 0.01 bar (-3.9 ± 0.14 psi)
Water injection pressure switch
Settings : Open on decreasing pressure : 25 bar (363 psi)
Water injection differential pressure switch
0462 63WN-3 A035 WI Characteristics : Normal : NC
Settings : Open on increasing differential pressure : 1.03 bar ± 0.1 bar (15 ± 1 psi)

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 14/ 29
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Wiring
PID Diagram
0424 65FP 0533 ACCY Liquid fuel pump (by pass valve) servo valve
0422 65GC-1 0509 GAS Gas control valve servo valve (VGC-1)
Level switch
0494 71FA-11 E021 VAN Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Opening on low level
Level switch
0494 71FA-12 E021 VAN Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Opening on low level
Level sensor
0442 71FF-4 969L TURB Characteristics : Normal : NC
Settings : Opening on high level
Level sensor
Settings : Opening on high-high level
Level sensor
Settings : Opening on high-high level
Flow divider magnetic pickup-speed
0424 77FD-1 0910 ACCY
0424 77FD-2 0910 ACCY
0424 77FD-3 0910 ACCY
Speed sensor
0415 77HT-1 0546 TURB
Speed sensor
0415 77HT-2 0546 TURB
Speed sensor
0415 77HT-3 0546 TURB
Speed sensor
0415 77NH-1 0546 TURB
Speed sensor
0415 77NH-2 0546 TURB
Speed sensor
0415 77NH-3 0546 TURB
Vibration sensor
0415 77RP-11 235A TURB Characteristics : Output proximitor : 7.87 V/mm (0.2 V/mil)
Atomizing air booster motor
0425 88AB-1 1047 ACCY
Characteristics : 15 kW | 2925 rpm | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Cooling air fan motor - acoustic enclosure GT compartment
0436 88BA-1 1605 ENCL-T
Characteristics : 15 kW | - rpm | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
0436 88BA-2 1605 ENCL-T
0436 88BT-1 1605 ENCL-T
0436 88BT-2 1605 ENCL-T
Electrical cranking motor
0421 88CR-1 0603 ACCY
Characteristics : 1000 kW | 2975 rpm | 6.6 kV | 50 Hz

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 15/ 29
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Wiring
PID Diagram
Electrical motor
0494 88FA-10 E021 VAN
Characteristics : 0.46 kW | 1500 rpm | 240 VAC | 50 Hz
Electrical motor
0494 88FA-11 E021 VAN
Electrical motor
0494 88FA-12 E021 VAN
Flow divider starting motor
0424 88FM 0613 ACCY
Auxiliary hydraulic supply pump motor
0434 88HQ-1 0628 ACCY
Cooling air fan motor water injection skid enclosure
0436 88JS-1 1659 ENCL-WI
Characteristics : 0.37 kW | - rpm | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Cooling air fan motor water injection skid enclosure
0436 88JS-2 1659 ENCL-WI
Characteristics : 0.37 kW | - rpm | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Auxiliary lube oil pump motor
0416 88QA-1 1006 ACCY
Liquid fuel Warren pump normal lubrication pump motor
0424 88QAOB 0611 OTHER
Characteristics : 0.75 kW | 415 VAC
Emergency lube oil pump motor
0416 88QE-1 1007 ACCY
Characteristics : 7.5 kW | 1750 rpm | 125 VDC
Liquid fuel Warren pump emergency lubrication pump motor
0424 88QEOB 0611 OTHER
Characteristics : 0.75 kW | 125 VDC
Lube oil mist eliminator motor
0416 88QV-1 A098 MIST
Lube oil mist eliminator motor
0416 88QV-2 A098 MIST
Turning gear electrical motor
0421 88TG-1 0538 ACCY
Turbine exhaust frame cooling blower & motor
0417 88TK-1 1233 ACCY
Turbine exhaust frame cooling blower & motor
0417 88TK-2 1233 ACCY
Torque adjuster drive motor
0421 88TM-1 0605 ACCY
Cooling air fan motor acoustic enclosure load compartment
0436 88VG-1 1605 ENCL-T
Cooling air fan motor acoustic enclosure load compartment
0436 88VG-2 1605 ENCL-T
Cooling air fan motor gas module acoustic enclosure
0436 88VL-1 1658 ENCL-G
Cooling air fan motor gas module acoustic enclosure
0436 88VL-2 1658 ENCL-G
Water injection pump motor
0462 88WN-1 A035 WI
0422 90SR-1 0507 GAS Speed ratio/stop valve servovalve
0469 90TV-1 0548 TURB Servovalve, compressor IGV actuator

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 16/ 29
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Wiring
PID Diagram
Electro-pneumatic converter
Settings :
0462 90WN-1 A035 WI
04 ± 0.20 mA for 0 ± 0.01 bar (0 ± 0.14 psi)
20 ± 0.20 mA for 3.1 ± 0.1 bar (45 ± 1.4 psi)
Air flow control (anemometer) for ventilation
0436 95BA-1 1605 ENCL-T
Settings : 16 ± 1 mA when the fan is running
Characteristics : 4 - 20 mA for 0.5 - 30 m/s
0436 95BA-2 1605 ENCL-T Settings : fan not running, 0% air flow : 4 -0/+1 mA
fan running and doors closed : adjust the speedtronic constant software at a value
equivalent to { [60% * (x1 - 4) ] + 4 mA }
Air flow control (anemometer) for turbine enclosure
0436 95BT-1 1605 ENCL-T Settings : fan not running, 0% air flow : 4 -0/+1 mA

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 17/ 29
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Wiring
PID Diagram
Ignition transformer for 95SP-13
0415 95SG-13 1213 TURB
Characteristics : 0.15 kVA | 115 VAC (230 VAC) | 15 kV | 50 Hz
Ignition transformer for 95SP-14
0415 95SG-14 1213 TURB
Characteristics : 0.15 kVA | 115 VAC (230 VAC) | 15 kV | 50 Hz
0415 95SP-13 1214 TURB Spark plug for combustion chamber n°13
0415 95SP-14 1214 TURB Spark plug for combustion chamber n°14
Air flow control (anemometer) for gas skid enclosure
0436 95VL-1 1658 ENCL-G Settings : fan not running, 0% air flow : 4 -0/+1 mA
0436 95VL-2 1658 ENCL-G Settings : fan not running, 0% air flow : 4 -0/+1 mA
0436 95VL-3 1658 ENCL-T Settings : fan not running, 0% air flow : 4 -0/+1 mA
Atomizing air main compressor differential pressure transmitter
Settings :
0425 96AD-1 0926 ACCY
4 ± 0.02 mA for 0 bar (0 psi)
20 ± 0.1 mA for 6 bar (87 psi)
Pressure transmitter
Settings :
0492 96AP-1A 0559 ACCY
04 ± 0.02 mA for 0.745 bar abs (22 in of Hg)
20 ± 0.10 mA for 1.250 bar abs (36.9 in of Hg)
Settings :
0492 96AP-1B 0559 ACCY
Settings :
0492 96AP-1C 0559 ACCY
Settings :
0492 96BD-1 0559 ACCY
04 ± 0.02 mA for 0.000 bar (0.000 in of H2O)
20 ± 0.10 mA for 0.345 bar (138.5 in of H2O)
Compressor discharge pressure transmitter
Settings :
0417 96CD-1A 0557 ACCY
04 ± 0.05 mA for 0 bar (0 psi)
20 ± 0.05 mA for 21 bar (304.5 psi)
Settings :
0417 96CD-1B 0557 ACCY
04 ± 0.05 mA for 0 bar (0 psi)
20 ± 0.05 mA for 21 bar (304.5 psi)

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 18/ 29
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Wiring
PID Diagram
Settings :
0417 96CD-1C 0557 ACCY
04 ± 0.05 mA for 0 bar (0 psi)
20 ± 0.05 mA for 21 bar (304.5 psi)
Settings :
0492 96CS-1 0559 ACCY
04 ± 0.02 mA for 0 mbar
20 ± 0.10 mA for 27.4 mbar (11 in of H2O)
GT air inlet system differential pressure transmitter
Settings :
0471 96CS-3 A040 FILT
04 ± 0.05 mA for 0 mbar (0 psi)
20 ± 0.05 mA for 63 mbar (0.91 psi)
Inlet gas fuel module pressure transmitter
Settings :
0422 96FG-1 0991 GAS
4 ± 0.05 mA for 0 bar (0 psi)
20 ± 0.1 mA for 34.5 bar (500 psi)
Fuel gas inter-valve pressure transmitter
Settings :
0422 96FG-2A 0991 GAS
4 ± 0.05 mA for 0 bar (0 psi)
20 ± 0.1 mA for 34.5 bar (500 psi)
Settings :
0422 96FG-2B 0991 GAS
4 ± 0.05 mA for 0 bar (0 psi)
20 ± 0.1 mA for 34.5 bar (500 psi)
Settings :
0422 96FG-2C 0991 GAS
4 ± 0.05 mA for 0 bar (0 psi)
20 ± 0.1 mA for 34.5 bar (500 psi)
Liquid fuel module pressure transmitter inlet
Settings :
0424 96FL-2A 0992 ACCY
4 ± 0.05 mA for 0 bar (0 psi)
20 ± 0.1 mA for 10 bar (145 psi)
Liquid fuel module pressure transmitter inlet
Settings :
0424 96FL-2B 0992 ACCY
4 ± 0.05 mA for 0 bar (0 psi)
20 ± 0.1 mA for 10 bar (145 psi)
Liquid fuel control valve (VC3) LVDT
Settings :
0424 96FP-1 0992 ACCY
0.7 ± 0.01 VAC for 0 mm
3.5 ± 0.01 VAC for 20.5 mm (0.81 in)
Liquid fuel control valve (VC3) LVDT
Settings :
0424 96FP-2 0992 ACCY
0.7 ± 0.01 VAC for 0 mm
3.5 ± 0.01 VAC for 20.5 mm (0.81 in)
Gas control valve (VGC-1) LVDT
0422 96GC-1,2 0509 GAS
Settings : 0.7 ± 0.01 VAC for 0 mm
Lube oil system VPR-2 inlet pressure transmitter
Settings :
0416 96QA-2 0926 ACCY
4 ± 0.05 mA for 0 bar (0 psi)
20 ± 0.1 mA for 7 bar (101.5 psi)
Lube oil tank level transmitter
Settings :
0416 96QL-1 1038 ACCY
4 ± 0.05 mA for 456 mm (17.95 in)
20 ± 0.1 mA for 246 mm (9.68 in)

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 19/ 29
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Wiring
PID Diagram
Low lube oil pressure transmitter generator
Settings :
0416 96QT-2B ALT. GENE
4 ± 0.05 mA for 0 bar (0 psi)
20 ± 0.1 mA for 1.72 bar (25 psi)
Tank's air vacuum differential pressure transmitter
Settings :
0416 96QV-1 A098 MIST
4 ± 0.05 mA for 0 bar (0 psi)
20 ± 0.1 mA for 0.025 bar (0.36 psi)
Dew point and temperature transmitter
Settings :
Outlet 1 :
04 ± 0.05 mA for -50°C (-58 °F)
0471 96RH A040 FILT
20 ± 0.05 mA for +50°C (122 °F)
Outlet 2 :
04 ± 0.05 mA for 0% RH
20 ± 0.05 mA for 100 % RH
Stop ratio fuel gas (VSR-1) LVDT
0422 96SR-1,2 0507 GAS
Settings : 0.7 ± 0.01 VAC for 0 mm
Differential pressure transmitter of total filtration stages
Settings :
0471 96TF-1 A040 FILT
4 ± 0.05 mA for 0 mbar (0 psi)
20 ± 0.1 mA for 25 mbar (0.36 psi)
Torque converter IGV position transmitter
Settings :
0421 96TM-1 0605 ACCY
04 ± 0.05 mA for 0 rack bar revolution (range 0-31 rack bar revolution )
20 ± 0.05 mA for 31 rack bar revolution (range 0-31 rack bar revolution )
LVDT (Linear variable displacement transmitter), compressor IGV actuator
0469 96TV-1 0548 TURB
Settings : 0.7 ± 0.01 VAC for 34° IGV angle
LVDT (Linear variable displacement transmitter), compressor IGV actuator
0469 96TV-2 0548 TURB
Settings : 0.7 ± 0.01 VAC for 34° IGV angle
Vibration sensor
0415 96VC-11 235A TURB Characteristics : Output proximitor : 7.87 V/mm (0.2 V/mil)
Vibration sensor
0415 96VC-12 235A TURB Characteristics : Output proximitor : 7.87 V/mm (0.2 V/mil)
Mass flow transmitter
Settings : Factory Calibrated :
0422 96VM-1 0639 GAS
4 ± 0.05 mA for 0 kg/s (0 lbm/s)
20 ± 0.1 mA for 10 kg/s (22 lbm/s)
Flow transmitter
Settings :
0462 96WF-1 A035 WI
04 ± 0.2 mA for 0 m3/h (0 gpm)
20 ± 0.2 mA for 30 ± 0.1 m3/h (132 ± 0.44 gpm)
Flow transmitter
Settings :
0462 96WF-2 A035 WI
04 ± 0.2 mA for 0 m3/h (0 gpm)
20 ± 0.2 mA for 30 ± 0.1 m3/h (132 ± 0.44 gpm)
Flow transmitter
Settings :
0462 96WF-3 A035 WI
04 ± 0.2 mA for 0 m3/h (0 gpm)
20 ± 0.2 mA for 30 ± 0.1 m3/h (132 ± 0.44 gpm)
Atomizing air precooler air discharge thermocouple
0425 AAT-1A 637T TURB
Characteristics : Type K

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 20/ 29
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Wiring
PID Diagram
Atomizing air precooler air discharge thermocouple
Control oil hydraulic accumulator
0434 AH1-1 0908 N/A Characteristics : 17.8 l (4.7 gal) | Nitrogen
Settings : 51.7 ± 1 bar (750 ± 15 psi)
Control oil hydraulic accumulator
0422 AH1-3 0991 N/A Characteristics : 17.8 l (4.70 gal)
Settings : 51.7 ± 1 bar (750 ± 15 psi)
0471 AR-20 A040 FILT Air filter electrical control box
Thermocouple accessory compartment
0436 AT-AC-1 1113 ENCL-T
Thermocouple gas compartment
0436 AT-AC-11 1113 ENCL-T
Air temperature load compartment
0436 AT-LC-1 637T TURB Characteristics : Platinum PT100 | 100 Ohm at 0°C (32°F) | 0.385 Ohm/°C (0.214 Ohm/°F)
| -50 to 260 °C (-58 to 500 °F)
Air temperature turbine compartment
0436 AT-TC-1 637T TURB Characteristics : Platinum PT100 | 100 Ohm at 0°C (32 °F) | 0.385 Ohm/°C (0.214
Ohm/°F) | -50 to 260 °C (-58 to 500 °F)
Thermocouple : turbine compartment enclosure
0436 AT-TC-2 1113 ENCL-T
Thermocouple : turbine compartment enclosure
0436 AT-TC-3 1113 ENCL-T
Water injection compartment temperature water injection compartment
0436 AT-WI-1 1659 ENCL-WI
Dual thermocouple temperature journal bearing n°1
0415 BT-J1-1A,1B 235A TURB
0415 BT-J1-2A,2B 235A TURB
0415 BT-J2-1A,1B 235B TURB
0415 BT-J2-2A,2B 235B TURB
0415 BT-J3-1A,1B 235C TURB
0415 BT-J3-2A,2B 235C TURB
Dual thermocouple temperature pad n°2 of thrust bearing n°1
0415 BT-TA1-2A,2B 235A TURB
Dual thermocouple temperature pad n°2 of counter thrust bearing n°1
0415 BT-TI1-2A,2B 235A TURB

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 21/ 29
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Wiring
PID Diagram
Main atomizing air compressor
0425 CA1 0607 N/A
Characteristics : Centrifugal | 2.7 kg/s | 6600 rpm
Booster atomizing air compressor
0425 CA2 1047 N/A
Characteristics : Volumetric | 510 m3/h (2245.46 gal/min) | 6200 rpm
Thermocouple temperature compressor air outlet
0415 CT-DA-1 637T TURB
Thermocouple temperature compressor air outlet
Thermocouple temperature compressor air inlet
0415 CT-IF-1 637T TURB
Thermocouple temperature compressor air inlet
Resistance temperature detector
0492 CT-IF-3/R 637T TURB Characteristics : Platinum PT100 | 100 Ohm at 0°C (32 °F) | 0.385 Ohm/°C (0.214
Ohm/°F) | -50 to 260 °C (-58 to 500 °F)
Cranking motor stator Ph1 temperature sensor 1
0421 ET-CRS-11/R 0603 ACCY Characteristics : Platinum PT100 | 100 Ohm at 0°C (32 °F) | 0.385 Ohm/°C (0.214
Ohm/°F) | -50 to 260 °C (-58 to 500 °F)
Cranking motor stator Ph1temperature sensor 2
Ohm/°F) | -50 to 260 °C (-58 to 500 °F)
Ohm/°F) | -50 to 260 °C (-58 to 500 °F)
Ohm/°F) | -50 to 260 °C (-58 to 500 °F)
Ohm/°F) | -50 to 260 °C (-58 to 500 °F)
Ohm/°F) | -50 to 260 °C (-58 to 500 °F)
Liquid fuel purge air filter
0477 FA3-1 918T N/A
Characteristics : 5 µm
Filter on actuation air of atomizing air and purge systems
0425 FA4-1 0983 N/A
Water injection air filter
0462 FA8-2 A035 N/A
Flow divider
0424 FD1-1 0613 N/A Characteristics : type lineare 7 elements with double pumps ; 14 elements 60 tooth wheel
| 1650 Hz | 883 l/min (233 gpm) at 1650 rpm
Filter
0494 FF11-1 E021 N/A
Filter
0494 FF11-2 E021 N/A
HP fuel filter
0424 FF2-1 1014 N/A
Characteristics : Beta 40 = 75
HP fuel filter
0424 FF2-2 1014 N/A
Characteristics : Beta 40=75

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 22/ 29
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Wiring
PID Diagram
Hydraulic oil supply filter
0434 FH2-1 1051 N/A
Characteristics : Beta 3 > 200
Hydraulic oil supply filter
0434 FH2-2 1051 N/A
Characteristics : Beta 3 > 200
Hydraulic filter liquid fuel servo valve (control)
0424 FH3 0992 N/A
Filter, hydraulic oil supply , IGV controller assembly
0469 FH6-1 0548 N/A
Servo hydraulic supply filter of stop ratio valve (VSR)
0422 FH7-1 0507 N/A
Characteristics : 15 µ abs
Gas fuel control valve (VGC) servo hydraulic oil supply filter
0422 FH8-1 0509 N/A
Characteristics : 15 µ abs
Water injection flowmeter
0462 FM1-1 A035 WI Characteristics : 3.6 m3/h (16 gpm) | 29.5 m3/h (130 gpm) | Nominal K factor : 158.5
pulse / l (600 pulse/US gallon)
High pressure filter
0462 FW1-1 A035 N/A
Water injection upstream pump unit conical filter
0462 FW1-2 A035 N/A
Characteristics : Filtering media 800µm
Conical filter downstream flowmeter
0462 FW1-3 A035 N/A
Characteristics : Filtering media 150µm
0421 HM-1 0605 N/A Torque converter and reversing gear
Actuator assembly, inlet guide valve system
0469 HM3-1 0548 N/A
Characteristics : Actuator operation limits : 32° to 86°
0425 HX1-1 1003 N/A Atomizing air precooler
Lube oil thermocouple #1 bearing drain
0416 LT-B1D-1 637T TURB
0416 LT-B2D-1 637T TURB
0416 LT-B3D-1 637T TURB
Lube oil thermocouple #1 bearing thrusts drain
0416 LT-BT1D-1 637T TURB
Lube oil thermocouple generator and load gear #1 bearing drain
0416 LT-G1D-1 ALT. GENE
Lube oil thermocouple generator and load gear #2 bearing drain
0416 LT-OT-1A 637A ACCY Characteristics : Platinum PT100 | 100 Ohm at 0°C (32 °F) | 0.385 ohm/°C (0.214
Ohm/°F) | -50 to 260 °C (-58 to 500 °F)
0416 LT-OT-2A 637A ACCY Characteristics : Platinum PT100 | 100 Ohm at 0°C (32 °F) | 0.385 ohm/°C (0.214
Ohm/°F) | -50 to 260 °C (-58 to 500 °F)
Lube oil temperature turbine header thermocouple
0416 LT-TH-1A,1B 637A ACCY

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 23/ 29
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Wiring
PID Diagram
0422 MG1 0512 N/A Gas fuel nozzle
Main fuel Pump
0424 PF1 0611 ACCY Characteristics : Positive displacements screw up | 870.5 l/min (230 gpm) | 68.9 bar
(1000 psi) | 1500 rpm
Lubricator pump
0424 PF1-90 0611 N/A
Characteristics : Refer to P&ID LMA-37361
Unloading pump
0494 PFA-10 E021 N/A
Characteristics : Volumetric pump | 25 l/min (6.60 gpm)
Dosing pump
0494 PFA-11 E021 N/A
Characteristics : Volumetric pump | 4 l/h (0.88 Gal/h) | 10 bar (145 psi) | 1500 rpm
Dosing pump
0494 PFA-12 E021 N/A
Characteristics : Volumetric pump | 4 l/h (0.88 Gal/h) | 10 bar (145 psi) | 1500 rpm
Main hydraulic supply pump
0434 PH1 0627 ACCY
Characteristics : Volumetric pump | 65 l/min (17.1 gpm) | 105 bar (1500 psi) | 1422 rpm
Auxiliary hydraulic supply pump
0434 PH2 0628 ACCY
Characteristics : Volumetric pump | 45.4 l/min (12 gpm) | 105 bar (1500 psi) | 1450 rpm
Breather valve of 501BA tank
0494 PSV-11 E021 N/A Characteristics : Normal : NC
Settings : Overpressure : 0.15 bar (2.17 psi); Vaccum : 0.01 bar (0.15 psi)
0462 PW1-1 A035 N/A Water injection pump unit
Light warning auxiliaries compartment
0426 SLI-1 1104 ACCY
Characteristics : 240 UPS | 50 Hz
Fire alarm auxiliaries compartment
0426 SLI-1A 1113 ENCL-T
Fire alarm GT compartment
0426 SLI-1B 1113 ENCL-T
0426 SLI-1C 1113 ENCL-T
Fire alarm gas compartment
0426 SLI-1D 1195 ENCL-G
Characteristics : Visual alarm | 24 VDC
0426 SLI-1E 1195 ENCL-G
Light warning auxiliaries compartment
0426 SLI-2 1104 ACCY
Characteristics : 240 UPS | 50 Hz
0426 SLI-2B 1113 ENCL-T
0426 SLI-2C 1113 ENCL-T
0426 SLI-2E 1195 ENCL-G
Fire alarm load compartment
0426 SLI-3C 1113 ENCL-T
Thermocouple temperature exhaust tunnel
0415 TT-IB-1 637T TURB
Thermocouple temperature outer position after first wheel space
0415 TT-WS1AO-1 637T TURB
Thermocouple temperature outer position after first wheel space

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 24/ 29
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Wiring
PID Diagram
Thermocouple temperature inner position forward first wheel space
0415 TT-WS1FI-1 637T TURB
Thermocouple temperature inner position forward first wheel space
Thermocouple temperature outer position after second wheel space
Thermocouple temperature outer position after second wheel space
Thermocouple temperature outer position forward second wheel space
0415 TT-WS2FO-1 637T TURB
Thermocouple temperature outer position forward second wheel space
Thermocouple temperature outer position after third wheel space
Thermocouple temperature outer position after third wheel space
Thermocouple temperature outer position forward third wheel space
Thermocouple temperature outer position forward third wheel space
Thermocouple temperature exhaust gas diffuser
0415 TT-XD-1 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-10 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-11 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-12 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-13 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-14 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-15 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-16 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-17 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-18 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-19 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-2 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-20 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-21 0623 TURB

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 25/ 29
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Wiring
PID Diagram
0415 TT-XD-22 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-23 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-24 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-3 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-4 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-5 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-6 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-7 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-8 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-9 0623 TURB
Fuel gas circuit purge air valve
0477 VA13-1 918T N/A
Settings : Opening time shall be 35 ± 5 seconds.
Closing time shall be 10 seconds at maximum.
Fuel gas circuit purge air valve
0477 VA13-2 918T N/A
Settings : Opening time shall be 35 ± 5 seconds.
Closing time shall be 10 seconds at maximum.
False start drain valve-combustion wrapper
0442 VA17-1 1026 N/A
False start drain valve-exhaust frame
0442 VA17-2 1026 N/A
False start drain valve-exhaust plenum
0442 VA17-5 1026 N/A
Atomizing air compressor pressure adjustment valve
0425 VA18-1 1070 N/A
Liquid fuel purge air valve
0477 VA19-1 918T N/A
Characteristics : Normal : C to L opened ; U closed
Compressor bleed valve 11th stage
0417 VA2-1 1022 N/A
0417 VA2-2 1022 N/A
CA2 booster atomizing air compressor inlet air isolation butterfly valve
0425 VA22-1 0922 N/A
0417 VA2-3 1022 N/A
0417 VA2-4 1022 N/A

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 26/ 29
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Wiring
PID Diagram
Quick exhaust pneumatic valve
Characteristics :
0477 VA36-1 918T N/A
under pressure: 1 to 2 open and vent 3 closed
out of pressure: 2 open to vent 3
Quick exhaust pneumatic valve
Characteristics :
0477 VA36-2 918T N/A
under pressure: 1 to 2 open and vent 3 closed
out of pressure: 2 open to vent 3
Pneumatic valve
0494 VA99-11 E021 N/A
Pneumatic valve
0494 VA99-12 E021 N/A
Pneumatic valve
0494 VA99-13 E021 N/A
0434 VAB1 0947 N/A Hydraulic system air bleed valve (main)
0434 VAB2 0947 N/A Hydraulic system air bleed valve (auxiliary)
By pass control valve
0424 VC3 0516 N/A
Characteristics : Normal : NO | Stroke = 28.57 mm (1.125 in)
Water injection flow control valve
0462 VC4-1 A035 N/A
0462 VCK100 A035 N/A Check valve
Liquid fuel nozzle check valve
0424 VCK1-1T14 0961 N/A Characteristics : Normal : NC
Settings : Cracking pressure : 8.27 ± 0.34 bar (120 ± 5 psi)
Liquid fuel primary nozzle purge air check valve
0477 VCK2-1T14 918T N/A Characteristics : Normal : NC
Settings : Cracking pressure : Minimum 0.07 bar (1 psi)
Hydraulic pump check valve for main pump
0434 VCK3-1 0947 N/A Characteristics : Normal : NC
Settings : Treshold = 1.5 bar (21.75 psi)
Hydraulic pump check valve for auxiliary pump
Settings : Treshold = 1.5 bar (21.75 psi)
Turbine exhaust frame cooling check valve
Settings : opening pressure : 7 mbar (0.1 psi)
Turbine exhaust frame cooling check valve
Settings : opening pressure : 7 mbar (0.1 psi)
Gas control valve primary
0422 VGC-1 0509 GAS
Characteristics : Normal : NC | Stroke maxi = 38.1 mm (1.5 in)
0469 VH3-1A 0548 N/A Trip relay, hydraulic IGV
0469 VH3-1B 0548 N/A Trip relay, hydraulic IGV
Gas fuel dump valve (VSR-1) - Stop/speed ratio valve
0422 VH5-1 0507 GAS
Gas fuel dump valve (VGC-1) - Gas control valve
0422 VH5-2 0509 GAS

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 27/ 29
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Wiring
PID Diagram
0422 VM-1 0639 N/A Coriolis mass flow meter
0434 VM4 1052 N/A Hydraulic filter transfer valve
Fuel liquid purge multiport valve
0424 VP-1 0961 N/A
Fuel liquid purge multiport valve
0424 VP-2 0961 N/A
Bearing header pressure regulator valve
0416 VPR2-1 1023 N/A Characteristics : Normal : NC
Settings : Set point : 1.72 +0.13/-0 bar (25 +2/-0 psi)
Filter regulator
0494 VPR30-11 E021 N/A Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : 4 ± 0.35 bar (58 ± 5 psi)
Hydraulic supply pump (PH1) compensator
0434 VPR3-1 0627 N/A
Settings : 103.4 ± 1.37 bar (1500 ± 20 psi)
Filter pressure regulator on actuation air of gas fuel purge air valve
0477 VPR44-1 918T N/A
Settings : 2.3 +0/-0.2 bar (33 +0/-3 psi)
Filter pressure regulator on actuation air of gas fuel purge air valve
0477 VPR44-2 918T N/A
Settings : 2.3 +0/-0.2 bar (33 +0/-3 psi)
Filter pressure regulator on actuation air of liquid fuel purge air valve
0477 VPR54-1 918T N/A
Settings : 3.27 +1.7/-0 bar (47.5 +2.7/-0 psi)
Water injection control valve pressure regulation (part of VC4-1)
0462 VPR62-1 A035 N/A
Settings : 3.1 ± 0.1 bar (45 ± 1.5 psi)
Water Injection control valve pressure regulation (part of VS2-2)
0462 VPR62-13 A035 N/A
Settings : 3.1 ± 0.1 bar (45 ± 1.5 psi)
Pressure regulator valve booster AA isolation valve
0425 VPR68-1 0922 N/A
Settings : 3.79 ± 0.13 bar (55 ± 2 psi)
Main lube oil pump pressure relief valve
0416 VR1 1016 N/A Characteristics : Normal : NC
Settings : Opening at 6.89 + 0.13/-0 bar (100 + 2/-0 psi)
Main hydraulic supply pump pressure relief valve
Settings : 113.7 ± 1.37 bar (1650 ± 20 psi)
Auxiliary hydraulic supply pump pressure relief valve
Settings : 113.7 ± 1.37 bar (1650 ± 20 psi)
Fuel oil supply pressure relief valve
Settings : 6.2 ± 0.2 bar (87 ± 2.9 psi)
Main fuel pump pressure relief valve
Settings : 82.7 ± 1.72 bar (1200 ± 25 psi)
Pump relief pressure valve
0494 VR60-11 E021 N/A Characteristics : Normal : NC
Settings : Opening at 12 ± 1 bar (174 ± 14.5 psi)
PFA-12 pump relief pressure valve
0494 VR60-12 E021 N/A Characteristics : Normal : NC
Settings : Opening at 12 ± 1 bar (174 ± 14,5 psi)
Fuel oil stop valve
0424 VS1 0511 N/A
Water injection stop valve
0462 VS2-2 A035 N/A

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 28/ 29
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Wiring
PID Diagram
Fuel gas stop/speed ratio valve
0422 VSR-1 0507 GAS
Characteristics : Normal : NC | Stroke maxi = 88.9 ± 0.127 mm (3.5 ± 0.05 in)
Thermostatic valve regulating lube oil temperature
0420 VTR1-1 1035 N/A Characteristics : Normal : E to B open, C closed
Settings : Starts to open at Oil T° = 54 ± 2°C (130 ± 3.6 °F)
Thermostatic valve regulating atomizing air temperature
0420 VTR2-1 1027 N/A Characteristics : Normal : B to E open, C closed
Settings : T° air = 107 ± 2 °C (225 ± 3.6 °F)
Resistance thermometer detector support legs water temperature
0420 WT-TL-1 637T TURB Characteristics : Platinum PT100 | 100 Ohm at 0°C (32 °F) | 0.385 Ohm/°C (0.214
Ohm/°F) | -50 to 260 °C (-58 to 500 °F)
Resistance thermometer detector support legs water temperature
0420 WT-TL-2 637T TURB Characteristics : Platinum PT100 | 100 Ohm at 0°C (32 °F) | 0.385 Ohm/°C (0.214
Ohm/°F) | -50 to 260 °C (-58 to 500 °F)

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 29/ 29
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
REVISIONS
Rev Description
A Première édition
- Modifié schéma de cablâge pour 95BT-1, 2 & 3 : ENCL-T au lieu de ENCL-??
B - Ajout du package module injection d'eau (PID 0436) :
20JS-30, 33JS-1 & 2, 63JS-30, 88JS-1 & 2, AT-WI-1
- Modifié niveau de tension :
C remplacé 230 VAC par 240 VAC et 115 VAC par 120 VAC
- Ajout appareils 20BA-31, 63BA-31, 95BA-4, 5 & 6
- Suppression des appareils 63FL-2, 71QL-1 & 71QH-1
- Ajout appareils 23QV-2 / 88QV-2 / 96QL-1 / 96QV-1 / 96FL-2A & 2B / 96FP-1 & 2 / FF2-2 /
D FF11-2
- Modifié PID pour MLI 0425 : 206D7308 au lieu de 209D7177
- Modifié réglage pour 63PL-21
E Ajout PF1-90
F Ajout de 88QAOB et 88QEOB

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 1/30
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
PRESSION : Toutes les pressions sont relatives, abs indique pression absolue.
Abréviations Désignations
AA Air d’atomisation
ACF Pression aval filtre huile contrôle
AD Air sortie compresseur
AE Air d’extraction
AMF Pression aval filtre principal huile
DEC. Décroissant
DPDT Double contact, double pôle
DPG Manomètre – Pression différentielle
FC Fermeture par sécurité
FO Ouverture par sécurité
GF Combustible gazeux
GFV Event de gaz
GPL Fuite aux garnitures vanne combinée gaz
INC. Croissant
LVDT Transmetteur de position linéaire différentiel
Model List Item : Code composé de 4 caractères utilisé par
General Electric pour identifier les composants, assemblages,
MLI
plans ou spécifications, exemple : MLI 0414 pour la nomenclature
des appareils de contrôle
NC Normalement fermé
NO Normalement ouvert
Niveau d'énergie zéro absolu, aucune puissance, pas d'huile,
Normal
aucune vitesse, aucune température
OD Retour d’huile
OD
Retour d’huile au-dessus du niveau cuve à huile
OD
Retour d’huile au-dessous du niveau cuve à huile
OH Huile de régulation HP
OHT Huile de sécurité HP
OL Huile de graissage
OLV Event d’huile de graissage
OR Huile de graissage modulée
PC Point de connexion
Le sens de la flèche indique l'écoulement gravitationnel du liquide dû à la
Pente
pente
SPDT Simple contact, double pôle
SPST Simple contact, simple pôle
WD Egouttures d’eau
WF Alimentation d’eau
WR Retour d’eau

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 2/30
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
Nom du Système Items Système Référence

Système Instrumentation Turbine 0415 CD 214D1164
Système Huile de Lubrification 0416 LO 206D6970
Système Air Refroidissement et Etanchéité 0417 CSA 206D6971
Système Huile de Déclenchement 0418 TO N/A
Système Air Instrument 0419 APU N/A
Système Eau de Refroidissement 0420 CW 206D6786
Système de Lancement 0421 SM 205D4866
Système Combustible Gaz 0422 GF 206D6972
Système Combustible Liquide 0424 LF 206D6600
Système Air Atomisation 0425 AA 206D7308
Système Protection Incendie 0426 FP 206D6966
Système Tuyauterie Poste Air 0428 AE N/A
Système Injection Vapeur 0431 SI N/A
Système Réchauffage Air Aspiration 0432 IAR N/A
Système Alimentation Huile HP 0434 HS 209D7043
Système Chauffage et Ventilation 0436 HV 206D6596
Système Nettoyage Compresseur et Turbine 0441 TCC N/A
Système Lavage Compresseur et Turbine 0442 TCW 205D4265
Système Injection d'Eau 0462 WI 206D6293
Système Commande Aubes Variables Compresseur 0469 IGV 206D6828
Système Débit Aspiration et Echappement 0471 IE 206D6968
Système Détection Gaz 0474 GD 206D6595
Système Balayage Combustible 0477 FPU 209D7645
Système d'Injection N2 0491 NI N/A
Système Moniteur de Performances 0492 PM 214D1258
Système Module d'Injection Additif 0494 LFAD 206D6208
Système Réducteur de Puissance 0495 LG N/A

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 3/30
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
Schéma de
Description
câblage
ACCY L'appareil est dans le schéma de câblage auxiliaires (MLI 401A)
L'appareil est dans le schéma de câblage du module de ventilation &
AIR
refroidissement (MLI A132)
ENCL-G L'appareil est dans le plan d'interface du package module gaz (MLI 1658)
L'appareil est dans le plan d'interface du package module fioul / air
ENCL-LF
atomisation / injection d'eau (MLI 1650)
L'appareil est dans le plan d'interface du package module huile / gaz
ENCL-LO
(MLI 1634)
ENCL-T L'appareil est dans le plan d'interface du package turbine (MLI 1605)
L'appareil est dans le plan d'interface du package module d'injection
ENCL-WI
d'eau (MLI 1659)
FILT L'appareil est dans le schéma de câblage du filtre à air (MLI A040)
GAS L'appareil est dans le schéma de câblage module gaz (MLI 0991 ou 401G)
GENE L'appareil est dans le schéma de câblage de l'alternateur
L'appareil est dans le schéma de câblage réchauffage entrée d'air (MLI
IBH
A037)
L'appareil est dans le schéma de câblage module fioul / air atomisation /
LF AA WI
injection d'eau (MLI A162)
L'appareil est dans le schéma de câblage du module de recirculation fioul
LF-SR
(MLI 969C)
LO FG L'appareil est dans le schéma de câblage module huile / gaz (MLI A160)
L'appareil est dans le schéma de câblage du réducteur de puissance (MLI
LOAD
A012)
MIST L'appareil est dans le plan d'arrangement du déshuileur (MLI A098)
L'appareil est dans le schéma de câblage module huile (MLI 0991 ou
OIL
401H)
L'appareil est dans le schéma de câblage module d'injection vapeur (MLI
STEAM
A135)
TURB L'appareil est dans le schéma de câblage turbine (MLI 401T)
L'appareil est dans le schéma de câblage module d'injection additive de
VAN
vanadium (MLI E021)
L'appareil est dans le schéma de câblage module d'injection d'eau (MLI
WI
A035)

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 4/30
SIZE DWG NO SH REV

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 5/30
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Schéma
Appareils MLI Désignation
PID câblage
Electrovanne air atomisation pour la commande de VA18-1
0425 20AA-1 0983 TURB
Caractéristiques : Normal : 1 vers 3 ouvert ; 2 fermé | 0,035 kW | 125 VDC
Electrovanne air atomisation suppresseur de démarrage
0425 20AB-1 0922 ACCY
Electroaimant clapet de filtration entrée d'air compartiment auxiliaires
0436 20BA-30 1605 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : 24 VDC
Electroaimant clapet de filtration entrée d'air compartiment auxilaire
0436 20BA-31 1605 ENCL-T
Electroaimant clapet de filtration entrée d'air compartiment turbine
0436 20BT-30 1605 ENCL-T
Electroaimant clapet de filtration entrée d'air
0436 20BT-40 1605 ENCL-T
Electrovanne commande vanne anti-pompage compresseur
0417 20CB-1 1071 TURB
Caractéristiques : Normal : B vers C ouvert, A fermé | 0,04 kW | 125 VDC
Embrayage électromagnetique pompe à fuel
0424 20CF-1 0601 ACCY
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO | 0,16 kW (max) | 125 VDC
Electrovanne de déclenchement vanne de controle gaz (VGC-1)
0422 20FGC-1 0509 GAS
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO | 0,0156 kW | 125 VDC
Electrovanne arrêt combustible gaz
0422 20FGS-1 0507 GAS
Electrovanne arrêt combustible liquide
0424 20FL-1 1019 ACCY
Electrovanne
0494 20IA-11 E021 VAN
Caractéristiques : Normal : NC | 12 W | 125 VDC
Electroaimant clapet de filtration entrée d'air compartiment injection d'eau
0436 20JS-30 1659 ENCL-WI
Electrovanne commande vanne multiport purge fuel liquide VP-1 et VP-2
0424 20PF-100 0961 TURB
Caractéristiques : Normal : A vers P ouvert. B fermé | 40 W | 125 VDC
Electrovanne de commande de la VA13-1
0477 20PG-1 0991 GAS
Réglages : Installation d'un robinet-pointeau en amont de 20PG-1 pour régler le temps
d'ouverture de VA13-1 à 30 secondes
0477 20PG-2 0991 GAS
Réglages : Installation d'un robinet-pointeau en amont de 20PG-1 pour régler le temps
d'ouverture de VA13-1 à 30 secondes
0477 20PL-1 918T TURB
Electrovanne d'appoint / décharge du convertisseur de couple
0421 20TU-1 0605 ACCY
Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Electrovanne système déclenchement des aubes variables entrée compresseur (IGV)
0469 20TV-1 1019 ACCY
Vanne motorisée lavage compresseur off-Line
0442 20TW-1. 0953 TURB
Caractéristiques : Normal : FC | 0,092 kW | 50 Hz | 115 VAC
Vanne motorisée lavage compresseur on-Line
0442 20TW-3. 0953 TURB
Caractéristiques : Normal : FC | 0,092 kW | 50 Hz | 115 VAC
Electrovanne évent combustible gaz
0422 20VG-1 0991 GAS

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 6/30
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Schéma
PID câblage
Electrovanne de mise à l'évent de l'espace inter-vannes VA13-1 et VA13-2
0477 20VG-2 0991 GAS
Electro-aimant clapet de filtration entrée d'air compartiment puissance
0436 20VG--30 1605 ENCL-T
Electroaimant clapet de filtration entrée d'air compartiment gaz
0436 20VL-30 1658 ENCL-T
Electrovanne arrêt injection d'eau
0462 20WN-1 A035 WI
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO | 125 VDC
Electrovanne d'arrêt injection d'eau (partie de VS2-2)
0462 20WN-2 A035 WI
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO | 125 VDC
Résistance anti-condensation du moteur 88AB-1
0425 23AB-1 1047 ACCY
Caractéristiques : 50 Hz | 0,05 kW | 240 VAC
Résistance anti-condensation du moteur 88BA-1
0436 23BA-1 1605 ENCL-T
Résistance anti-condensation du moteur 88BA-2
0436 23BA-2 1605 ENCL-T
Résistance anti-condensation du moteur 88BT-1
0436 23BT-1 1605 ENCL-T
Résistance anti-condensation du moteur 88BT-2
0436 23BT-2 1605 ENCL-T
Résistance anti-condensation du moteur 88CR-1
0421 23CR-1 0603 ACCY
0421 23CR-2 0603 ACCY
0421 23CR-3 0603 ACCY
Chauffage compartiment auxiliaires
0436 23HA-1 1113 ENCL-T
Chauffage compartiment gaz
0436 23HA-11 1195 ENCL-G
Chauffage entrée d'air du compartiment gaz
0436 23HA-12 1195 ENCL-G
Caractéristiques : 50 Hz | 15 kW | 415 VAC
0436 23HA-2 1113 ENCL-T
0436 23HA-3 1113 ENCL-T
0436 23HA-4 1113 ENCL-T
Résistance anti-condensation du moteur 88HQ-1
0434 23HQ-1 0628 ACCY
Chauffage compartiment turbine
0436 23HT-1 1113 ENCL-T
0436 23HT-2 1113 ENCL-T
0436 23HT-3 1113 ENCL-T
0436 23HT-4 1113 ENCL-T

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 7/30
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Schéma
PID câblage
Résistance anti-condensation du moteur 88QA-1
0416 23QA-1 1006 ACCY
Thermoplongeur réservoir d'huile
0416 23QT-1 0938 ACCY
Résistance anti-condensation du moteur 88QV-1
0416 23QV-1 A098 MIST
Résistance anti-condensation du moteur 88QV-2
0416 23QV-2 A098 MIST
Résistance anti-condensation du moteur 88TG-1
0421 23TG-1 0603 ACCY
Résistance anti-condensation du moteur 88TK-1
0417 23TK-1 1233 ACCY
Résistance anti-condensation du moteur 88TK-2
0417 23TK-2 1233 ACCY
Résistance anti-condensation du moteur 88VG-1
0436 23VG-1 1605 ENCL-T
Résistance anti-condensation du moteur 88VG-2
0436 23VG-2 1605 ENCL-T
Résistance anti-condensation moteur 88WN-1
0462 23WN-1 A035 WI
0471 27TF-1 A040 FILT Report d'alarme général filtre à air
0415 28FD-10 1121 TURB Détecteur de flamme chambre de combustion n°10
Relais alarme
0415 30SG-1 1213 TURB
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Fin de course clapet anti-retour de la ventilation du compartiment auxilaire
0436 33BA-1 1605 ENCL-T
Fin de course clapet anti-retour de la ventilation du compartiment auxiliaire
0436 33BA-2 1605 ENCL-T
Fin de course clapet anti-retour de la ventilation du compartiment TG
0436 33BT-1 1605 ENCL-T Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Volet fermé : fin de course actionné, contact fermé
Fin de course clapet anti-retour de la ventilation du compartiment TG
0436 33BT-2 1605 ENCL-T Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Fin de course vanne anti-pompage (11 ème étage)
0417 33CB-1 1022 TURB Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Vanne ouverte : fin de course actionné, contact fermé

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 8/30
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Schéma
PID câblage
Fin de course porte du compartiment auxiliaire
0436 33DT-1 1605 ENCL-T Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Porte fermée : fin de course actionné, contact fermé
Fin de course porte du compartiment gaz
0436 33DT-12 1658 ENCL-G Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Fin de course porte du compartiment auxiliaire
Fin de course porte de l'enceinte TG
Fin de course porte de l'enceinte TG
Fin de course vanne arrêt combustible liquide
0424 33FL-1 0511 ACCY Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Vanne fermée : fin de course actionné, contact fermé
Fin de course clapet anti-retour de la ventilation de l'enceinte du skid injection d'eau
0436 33JS-1 1659 ENCL-WI Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Fin de course clapet anti-retour de la ventilation de l'enceinte du skid injection d'eau
0436 33JS-2 1659 ENCL-WI Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Fin de course sur vanne multiport VP-1
0424 33PF-1 0961 TURB Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Fin de course sur vanne multiport VP-2
0424 33PF-2 0961 TURB Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Fin de course position fermeture de VA13-1
0477 33PG-1 0991 GAS Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Fin de course position ouverture de VA13-1
Fin de course position fermeture de VA13-2
Fin de course position ouverture de VA13-2

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 9/30
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Schéma
PID câblage
Fin de course position électrovanne convertisseur de couple
0421 33TC-1 0605 ACCY Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : 20TU-1 au repos : fin de course actionné, contact fermé
Fin de course couple bas convertisseur de couple
0421 33TM-5 0605 ACCY Caractéristiques : Normal : NO, vanne fermée pour IGV fermé ou couple max
Réglages : Réglé à 2 tr de crémaillère (échelle 0-31 tr de crémaillère)
Fin de course couple haut convertisseur de couple
0421 33TM-6 0605 ACCY Caractéristiques : Normal : NO, vanne fermée pour IGV fermé ou couple max
Réglages : Réglé à 28 tr de crémaillère (échelle 0-31 tr de crémaillère)
Fin de course clapet anti-retour de la ventilation du compartiment puissance
0436 33VG-1 1605 ENCL-T Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Fin de course électrovanne 20VG-1
0422 33VG-11 0991 GAS Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Fin de course clapet anti-retour de la ventilation du compartiment puissance
0436 33VG-2 1605 ENCL-T Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Fin de course clapet anti-retour de la ventilation du compartiment gaz
0436 33VL-1 1658 ENCL-G Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Fin de course clapet anti-retour de la ventilation du compartiment gaz
0436 33VL-2 1658 ENCL-G Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Fin de course vanne de contrôle (partie de VC4-1)
0462 33WN-1 A035 WI Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Vanne complètement ouverte : fin de course activé, contact fermé
Fin de course vanne de contrôle (partie de VC4-1)
Réglages : Vanne complètement fermée : fin de course actionné, contact fermé
Fin de course vanne stop (partie de VS2-2)
Réglages : Vanne complètement ouverte : fin de course activé, contact fermé
Fin de course vanne stop (partie de VS2-2)
Réglages : Vanne complètement fermée : fin de course activé, contact fermé
Capteur de vibration
0415 39V-1A 1218 TURB
Caractéristiques : Pour 25,4 mm/s, 150 ± 4,5 mV crête
0415 39V-1B 1218 TURB
0415 39V-2A 1218 TURB
0415 39V-3A 1218 TURB
0415 39V-3B 1218 TURB
0415 39VS-11 235A TURB Caractéristiques : Sortie proximitor : 7,87 V/mm
Réglages : Entrefer : 1,4 ± 0,05 mm
0415 39VS-12 235A TURB Caractéristiques : Sortie proximitor : 7,87 V/mm

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 10/30
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Schéma
PID câblage
0415 39VS-21 235B TURB Caractéristiques : Sortie proximitor : 7,87 V/mm
0415 39VS-31 235C TURB Caractéristiques : Sortie proximitor : 7,87 V/mm
0415 39VS-32 235C TURB Caractéristiques : Sortie proximitor : 7,87 V/mm
Bris de glace porte d'accès compartiment auxiliaire
0426 43CP-1 1113 ENCL-T
Bris de glace porte d'accès compartiment TG
0426 43CP-2 1113 ENCL-T
Bris de glace porte d'accès compartiment auxiliaire
0426 43CP-3 1113 ENCL-T
Bris de glace porte d'accès compartiment TG
0426 43CP-4 1113 ENCL-T
Bris de glace porte d'accès compartiment puissance
0426 43CP-5 1113 ENCL-T
Bris de glace porte d'accès compartiment gaz
0426 43CP-6 1195 ENCL-G
Bris de glace porte d'accès compartiment gaz
0426 43CP-7 1195 ENCL-G
Bouton-poussoir lavage off-Line
0442 43TW-1/PB 1105 TURB
Détecteur thermostatique incendie compartiment auxiliaires
0426 45FA-10A 1113 ENCL-T Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Fermé : 163 ± 14°C
0426 45FA-10B 1113 ENCL-T Caractéristiques : Normal : NO

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 11/30
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Schéma
PID câblage
Détecteur thermostatique incendie compartiment auxiliaire
0426 45FA-1A 1104 ACCY Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
0426 45FA-1B 1104 ACCY Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
0426 45FA-2A 1104 ACCY Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
0426 45FA-2B 1104 ACCY Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Détecteur thermostatique incendie compartiment gaz
0426 45FA-6A A116 GAS Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
0426 45FA-6B 1195 GAS Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
0426 45FA-7A A116 GAS Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
0426 45FA-7B A116 GAS Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Détecteur thermostatique incendie compartiment TG
0426 45FT-1A 1103 TURB Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
0426 45FT-1B 1103 TURB Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Détecteur thermostatique incendie compartiment puissance

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 12/30
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Schéma
PID câblage
Détecteur gaz compartment auxiliaire
0474 45HA-1 1153 ACCY
Caractéristiques : Gamme de mesure : 0 à 20% LIE
Détecteur gaz
0474 45HA-10 1113 ENCL-T
Détecteur gaz
0474 45HA-11 1113 ENCL-T
Détecteur gaz
0474 45HA-12 1113 ENCL-T
Détecteur gaz compartiment auxiliaire
0474 45HA-2 1153 ACCY
Détecteur gaz compartiment auxiliaire
0474 45HA-3 1153 ACCY
Détecteur gaz dans gaine de ventilation compartiment gaz
0474 45HA-4 1195 ENCL-G
0474 45HA-5 1195 ENCL-G
0474 45HA-6 1195 ENCL-G
Détecteur gaz compartiment turbine
0474 45HT-1 1154 TURB
0474 45HT-2 1154 TURB
0474 45HT-3 1154 TURB
Détecteur gaz dans gaine de ventilation compartiment turbine
0474 45HT-4 1113 ENCL-T
0474 45HT-5 1113 ENCL-T
0474 45HT-6 1113 ENCL-T
Thermostat de sécurité chauffage compartiment gaz
0436 49HA-12 1658 ENCL-G
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO | Fermé à 100°C
Bouton d'arrêt d'urgence compartiment auxiliaire
0426 5E-1 1104 ACCY
Bouton d'arrêt d'urgence compartiment auxiliaire
0426 5E-2 1104 ACCY
Pressostat
0494 63AF-11 E021 VAN
Réglages :
Ouvert à la montée à : 3 ± 0,25 bar

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 13/30
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Schéma
PID câblage
Pressostat différentiel entrée d'air compartiment auxiliaire
0436 63BA-30 1605 ENCL-T Réglages :
Fermé à 1 ± 0,1 mbar
Pressostat différentiel entrée d'air compartiment auxiliaire
0436 63BA-31 1605 ENCL-T Réglages :
Pressostat différentiel entrée d'air
0436 63BT-30 1605 ENCL-T Réglages :
Pressostat différentiel entrée d'air
0436 63BT-40 1605 ENCL-T Réglages :
Pressostat pression basse entrée air comprimé filtre à air TG
0471 63CA-1 A040 FILT Réglages :
Ouvert à la descente à : 5,5 ± 0,5 bar |
Non réglable : fermé à la montée à : 6 ± 0,5 bar
Pressostat différentiel admission d'air TG
0471 63CS-2A A040 FILT
Réglages :
Ouvert à la montée à : 23 ± 0,5 mbar
Pressostat différentiel admission d'air TG
0471 63CS-2B A040 FILT
Réglages :
Ouvert à la montée à : 23 ± 0,5 mbar
Manostat
0422 63FG-1 0991 GAS Réglages :
Non réglable : ouvert à la montée à : 2,41 ± 0,05 bar |
Fermé à la descente à : 1,03 ± 0,05 bar
Manostat
0422 63FG-2 0991 GAS Réglages :
Non réglable : ouvert à la montée à : 2,41 ± 0,05 bar |
Fermé à la descente à : 1,03 ± 0,05 bar
Manostat différentiel filtre alimentation hydraulique
0434 63HF-1 0926 ACCY Réglages :
Ouvert à la montée à : 4,13 ± 0,2 bar |
Non réglable : fermé à la descente à : 2,75 ± 1,03 bar
Manostat de pression basse alimentation huile HP
0434 63HQ-1 0926 ACCY Réglages :
Ouvert à la descente à : 93 ± 1,7 bar |
Non réglable : fermé à la montée à : 100 ± 3,1 bar
Pressostat différentiel entrée d'air compartiment injection d'eau
0436 63JS-30 1659 ENCL-WI Réglages :
Manostat de pression différentielle filtre fuel principal
0424 63LF-3 0992 ACCY
Réglages :
Ouvert à la montée à : 1,3 ± 0,07 bar

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 14/30
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Schéma
PID câblage
Manostat sur pression dans l'espace inter vannes VA13-1 et VA13-2
0477 63PG-1 0991 GAS Réglages :
Manostat sur air de balayage des injecteurs de combustible liquide
0477 63PL-21 918T TURB Réglages :
Non réglable : ouvert à la descente à : 4,6 ± 0,3 bar |
Fermé à la montée à : 6 ± 0,3 bar
Manostat pression huile de lubrification
0416 63QA-2 0926 ACCY Réglages :
Non réglable : fermé à la montée à : 3,1 ± 0,14 bar
Manostat pression différentielle filtre huile principal
0416 63QQ-1 0926 ACCY Réglages :
Alarme haute pression différentielle filtre de l'éliminateur de brouillard d'huile
0416 63QQ-10 A098 MIST
Réglages :
Ouvert à la montée à : 80 ± 3 mbar
Manostat pression différentielle filtre convertisseur de couple
0416 63QQ-8 0916 ACCY
Réglages :
Ouvert à la montée à : 1,5 ± 0,2 bar
Manostat pression huile de lubrification palier #2 alternateur
0416 63QT-2A ALT. GENE Réglages :
Non réglable : fermé à la montée à : 0,62 ± 0,035 bar
Manostat de contrôle de ventilation du corps turbine
0417 63TK-1 A053 ACCY
Réglages :
Fermé au dessus de 381 ± 19 mm H2O
Manostat de contrôle de ventilation du corps turbine
0417 63TK-2 A053 ACCY
Réglages :
Fermé au dessus de 381 ± 19 mm H2O
Pressostat différentiel, entrée d'air compartiment puissance
0436 63VG-30 1605 ENCL-T Réglages :
Pressostat différentiel entrée d'air compartiment gaz
0436 63VL-30 1658 ENCL-T Réglages :
Pressostat différentiel entrée pompe injection d'eau
0462 63WN-1 A035 WI Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Réglages : Ouvert à la descente à : -0,270 ± 0,01 bar
Pressostat sortie pompe injection d'eau
Réglages : Ouvert à la descente à : 25 bar
Pressostat sortie pompe injection d'eau
0462 63WN-3 A035 WI Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Réglages : Ouvert à la montée à : 1,03 ± 0,1 bar

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 15/30
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Schéma
PID câblage
0424 65FP 0533 ACCY Servovalve (bypass) pompe à fuel
0422 65GC-1 0509 GAS Servovalve contrôle gaz (VGC-1)
Controleur de niveau
0494 71FA-11 E021 VAN Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Ouvert à niveau bas
Contrôleur de niveau
0494 71FA-12 E021 VAN Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Ouvert à niveau bas
Détecteur de niveau
0442 71FF-4 969L TURB Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Réglages : Ouverture au niveau haut
Réglages : Ouverture au niveau très haut
Réglages : Ouverture au niveau très haut
Capteur de vitesse magnétique diviseur de débit
0424 77FD-1 0910 ACCY
0424 77FD-2 0910 ACCY
0424 77FD-3 0910 ACCY
Capteur de vitesse
0415 77HT-1 0546 TURB
Capteur de vitesse
0415 77HT-2 0546 TURB
Capteur de vitesse
0415 77HT-3 0546 TURB
Capteur de vitesse
0415 77NH-1 0546 TURB
Capteur de vitesse
0415 77NH-2 0546 TURB
Capteur de vitesse
0415 77NH-3 0546 TURB
0415 77RP-11 235A TURB Caractéristiques : Sortie proximitor : 7,87 V/mm
Moteur compresseur de démarrage air atomisation
0425 88AB-1 1047 ACCY
Caractéristiques : 15 kW | 2925 tr/min | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Moteur électrique ventilateur refroidissement compartiment TG
0436 88BA-1 1605 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : 15 kW | - tr/min | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
0436 88BA-2 1605 ENCL-T
0436 88BT-1 1605 ENCL-T
0436 88BT-2 1605 ENCL-T
Moteur électrique de lancement
0421 88CR-1 0603 ACCY
Caractéristiques : 1000 kW | 2975 tr/min | 6,6 kV | 50 Hz

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 16/30
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Schéma
PID câblage
Moteur électrique
0494 88FA-10 E021 VAN
Caractéristiques : 0,46 kW | 1500 tr/min | 240 VAC | 50 Hz
Moteur électrique
0494 88FA-11 E021 VAN
Moteur électrique
0494 88FA-12 E021 VAN
Moteur électrique démarrage répartiteur de débit combustible liquide
0424 88FM 0613 ACCY
Moto-pompe auxiliaire huile HP
0434 88HQ-1 0628 ACCY
Moteur électrique ventilation enceinte acoustique skid injection d'eau
0436 88JS-1 1659 ENCL-WI
Caractéristiques : 0,37 kW | - tr/min | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Moteur électrique ventilation enceinte acoustique skid injection d'eau
0436 88JS-2 1659 ENCL-WI
Caractéristiques : 0,37 kW | - tr/min | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Moteur électrique de la pompe à huile auxiliaire
0416 88QA-1 1006 ACCY
Moteur pompe de lubrification principale de la pompe Warren fuel liquide
0424 88QAOB 0611 OTHER
Caractéristiques : 0,75 kW | 415 VAC
Moteur électrique de la pompe à huile de secours
0416 88QE-1 1007 ACCY
Caractéristiques : 7,5 kW | 1750 tr/min | 125 VDC
Moteur pompe de lubrification d'urgence de la pompe Warren fuel liquide
0424 88QEOB 0611 OTHER
Caractéristiques : 0,75 kW | 125 VDC
Moteur électrique de l'éliminateur de brouillard
0416 88QV-1 A098 MIST
Moteur électrique de l'éliminateur de brouillard
0416 88QV-2 A098 MIST
Moteur électrique de virage
0421 88TG-1 0538 ACCY
Ventilateur centrifuge + moteur électrique groupe moto ventilateur refroidissement corps
0417 88TK-1 1233 ACCY TG
Ventilateur centrifuge + moteur électrique groupe moto ventilateur refroidissement corps
0417 88TK-2 1233 ACCY TG
Moteur convertisseur de couple
0421 88TM-1 0605 ACCY
Moteur électrique ventilateur refroidissement compartiment puissance
0436 88VG-1 1605 ENCL-T
Moteur électrique ventilateur refroidissement compartiment puissance
0436 88VG-2 1605 ENCL-T
Moteur électrique ventilateur compartiment gaz
0436 88VL-1 1658 ENCL-G
Moteur électrique ventilateur compartiment gaz
0436 88VL-2 1658 ENCL-G
Moteur de la pompe à injection d'eau
0462 88WN-1 A035 WI
0422 90SR-1 0507 GAS Servovalve arrêt et régulation gaz
0469 90TV-1 0548 TURB Servovalve actionneur IGV compresseur

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 17/30
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Schéma
PID câblage
Régulateur électro-pneumatique
Réglages :
0462 90WN-1 A035 WI
04 ± 0,20 mA pour 0 ± 0,01 bar
20 ± 0,20 mA pour 3,1 ± 0,1 bar
Contrôleur de débit d'air (anémomètre) de ventilation
0436 95BA-1 1605 ENCL-T
Réglages : 16 ± 1 mA lorsque le ventilateur fonctionne
Caractéristiques : 4 - 20 mA pour 0,5 - 30 m/s
0436 95BA-2 1605 ENCL-T Réglages : ventilateur à l'arrêt sans débit d'air : 4 -0/+1 mA
ventilateur en service et portes fermées : x1 mA, régler la constante du speedtronic à une
valeur équivalente à { [60% x (x1 - 4) ] + 4 mA }
Contrôleur de débit d'air (anémomètre) de ventilation compartiment turbine
0436 95BT-1 1605 ENCL-T Réglages : ventilateur à l'arrêt sans débit d'air : 4 -0/+1 mA

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 18/30
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Schéma
PID câblage
Transformateur pour bougie d'allumage 95SP-13
0415 95SG-13 1213 TURB
Caractéristiques : 0,15 kVA | 115 VAC (230 VAC) | 15 kV | 50 Hz
Transformateur pour bougie d'allumage 95SP-14
0415 95SG-14 1213 TURB
Caractéristiques : 0,15 kVA | 115 VAC (230 VAC) | 15 kV | 50 Hz
0415 95SP-13 1214 TURB Bougie d'allumage chambre de combustion n°13
0415 95SP-14 1214 TURB Bougie d'allumage chambre de combustion n°14
Contrôleur de débit d'air (anémomètre) de ventilation compartiment gaz
Réglages : ventilateur à l'arrêt sans débit d'air : 4 -0/+1 mA
0436 95VL-1 1658 ENCL-G

0436 95VL-2 1658 ENCL-G Réglages : ventilateur à l'arrêt sans débit d'air : 4 -0/+1 mA
0436 95VL-3 1658 ENCL-T Réglages : ventilateur à l'arrêt sans débit d'air : 4 -0/+1 mA
Transmetteur de la pression différentielle du compresseur principal d'air d'atomisation
Réglages :
0425 96AD-1 0926 ACCY
4 ± 0,02 mA pour 0 bar
Transmetteur de pression
Réglages :
0492 96AP-1A 0559 ACCY
04 ± 0,02 mA pour 0,745 bar abs
20 ± 0,10 mA pour 1,250 bar abs
Réglages :
0492 96AP-1B 0559 ACCY
04 ± 0,02 mA pour 0,745 bar abs
20 ± 0,10 mA pour 1,250 bar abs
Réglages :
0492 96AP-1C 0559 ACCY
04 ± 0,02 mA pour 0,745 bar abs
20 ± 0,10 mA pour 1,250 bar abs
Réglages :
0492 96BD-1 0559 ACCY
04 ± 0,02 mA pour 0,000 bar
20 ± 0,10 mA pour 0,345 bar
Transmetteur de pression sortie compresseur
Réglages :
0417 96CD-1A 0557 ACCY
04 ± 0,05 mA pour 0 bar
20 ± 0,05 mA pour 21 bar
Réglages :
0417 96CD-1B 0557 ACCY
04 ± 0,05 mA pour 0 bar
20 ± 0,05 mA pour 21 bar

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 19/30
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Schéma
PID câblage
Réglages :
0417 96CD-1C 0557 ACCY
04 ± 0,05 mA pour 0 bar
20 ± 0,05 mA pour 21 bar
Réglages :
0492 96CS-1 0559 ACCY
04 ± 0,02 mA pour 0 mbar
20 ± 0,10 mA pour 27,4 mbar
Transmetteur de pression différentielle admission d'air TG
Réglages :
0471 96CS-3 A040 FILT
Transmetteur de pression entrée module gaz
Réglages :
0422 96FG-1 0991 GAS
20 ± 0,1 mA pour 34,5 bar
Transmetteur de pression gaz inter-vanne
Réglages :
0422 96FG-2A 0991 GAS
20 ± 0,1 mA pour 34,5 bar
Réglages :
0422 96FG-2B 0991 GAS
20 ± 0,1 mA pour 34,5 bar
Réglages :
0422 96FG-2C 0991 GAS
20 ± 0,1 mA pour 34,5 bar
Transmetteur de pression entrée module fuel
Réglages :
0424 96FL-2A 0992 ACCY
20 ± 0,1 mA pour 10 bar
Transmetteur de pression entrée module fuel
Réglages :
0424 96FL-2B 0992 ACCY
20 ± 0,1 mA pour 10 bar
Transmetteur de position linéaire différentiel (LVDT) vanne contrôle liquid fuel (VC3)
Réglages :
0424 96FP-1 0992 ACCY
0,7 ± 0.01 VAC for 0 mm
3,5 ± 0.01 VAC for 20,5 mm
Transmetteur de position linéaire différentiel (LVDT) vanne contrôle fuel (VC3)
Réglages :
0424 96FP-2 0992 ACCY
0,7 ± 0.01 VAC for 0 mm
3,5 ± 0.01 VAC for 20,5 mm
Transmetteur de position linéaire différentiel (LVDT) vanne contrôle gaz (VGC-1)
0422 96GC-1,2 0509 GAS
Réglages : 0,7 ± 0,01 VAC pour 0 mm
Transmetteur de pression huile de lubrification avant VPR-2
Réglages :
0416 96QA-2 0926 ACCY
Transmetteur de niveau de la cuve à huile
Réglages :
0416 96QL-1 1038 ACCY
4 ± 0,05 mA pour 456 mm
20 ± 0,1 mA pour 246 mm

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 20/30
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Schéma
PID câblage
Transmetteur pression huile de graissage palier #2 alternateur
Réglages :
0416 96QT-2B ALT. GENE
20 ± 0,1 mA pour 1,72 bar
Transmetteur pression d'air dans la cuve
Réglages :
0416 96QV-1 A098 MIST
20 ± 0,1 mA pour 0,025 bar
Transmetteur de point de rosée et de température
Réglages :
Sortie 1 :
04 ± 0,05 mA pour -50°C
0471 96RH A040 FILT
20 ± 0,05 mA pour +50°C
Sortie 2 :
04 ± 0,05 mA pour 0% HR
20 ± 0,05 mA pour 100 % HR
Transmetteur de position linéaire différentiel (LVDT) vanne stop ratio gaz (VSR-1)
0422 96SR-1,2 0507 GAS
Réglages : 0,7 ± 0,01 VAC pour 0 mm
Transmetteur de pression différentielle de l'étage de filtration
Réglages :
0471 96TF-1 A040 FILT
Transmetteur de position aubes variables convertisseur de couple
Réglages :
0421 96TM-1 0605 ACCY
04 ± 0,05 mA pour 0 tr de crémaillère (échelle 0-31 tr de crémaillère)
20 ± 0,05 mA pour 31 tr de crémaillère (échelle 0-31 tr de crémaillère)
Transmetteur de position linéaire différentiel (LVDT), actionneur aubes variables entrée
0469 96TV-1 0548 TURB compresseur
Réglages : 0,7 ± 0,01 VAC pour 34° angle IGV
Transmetteur de position linéaire différentiel (LVDT), actionneur aubes variables entrée
0469 96TV-2 0548 TURB compresseur
Réglages : 0,7 ± 0,01 VAC pour 34° angle IGV
0415 96VC-11 235A TURB Caractéristiques : Sortie proximitor : 7,87 V/mm
0415 96VC-12 235A TURB Caractéristiques : Sortie proximitor : 7,87 V/mm
Transmetteur de débit massique gaz
Réglages : Réglages usine :
0422 96VM-1 0639 GAS
4 ± 0,05 mA pour 0 kg/s
20 ± 0,1 mA pour 10 kg/s
Transmetteur de débit
Réglages :
0462 96WF-1 A035 WI
04 ± 0,2 mA pour 0 m3/h
20 ± 0,2 mA pour 30 ± 0,1 m3/h
Réglages :
0462 96WF-2 A035 WI
04 ± 0,2 mA pour 0 m3/h
20 ± 0,2 mA pour 30 ± 0,1 m3/h
Réglages :
0462 96WF-3 A035 WI
04 ± 0,2 mA pour 0 m3/h
20 ± 0,2 mA pour 30 ± 0,1 m3/h

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 21/30
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Schéma
PID câblage
Thermocouple sur air en aval du réfrigérant d'air d'atomisation
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple sur air en aval du réfrigérant d'air d'atomisation
Accumulateur sur huile de contrôle
0434 AH1-1 0908 N/A Caractéristiques : 17,8 l | Azote
Réglages : 51,7 ± 1 bar
Accumulateur sur huile de contrôle
0422 AH1-3 0991 N/A Caractéristiques : 17,8 l
Réglages : 51,7 ± 1 bar
0471 AR-20 A040 FILT Armoire électrique filtre à air
Thermocouple compartiment auxiliaire
0436 AT-AC-1 1113 ENCL-T
Thermocouple compartiment gaz
0436 AT-AC-11 1113 ENCL-T
Température compartiment puissance
0436 AT-LC-1 637T TURB
Caractéristiques : Platine PT100 | 100 Ohm à 0°C | 0,385 Ohm/°C | -50 à 260 °C
Température compartiment turbine
0436 AT-TC-1 637T TURB
Thermocouple : compartiment turbine
0436 AT-TC-2 1113 ENCL-T
Thermocouple : compartiment turbine
0436 AT-TC-3 1113 ENCL-T
Température compartiment injection d'eau compartiment injection d'eau
0436 AT-WI-1 1659 ENCL-WI
Thermocouple dual température coussinet du palier n°1
0415 BT-J1-1A,1B 235A TURB
0415 BT-J1-2A,2B 235A TURB
0415 BT-J2-1A,1B 235B TURB
0415 BT-J2-2A,2B 235B TURB
0415 BT-J3-1A,1B 235C TURB
0415 BT-J3-2A,2B 235C TURB
Thermocouple dual température patin n°2 de la butée du palier n°1
Thermocouple dual température patin n°2 de la contre butée du palier n°1

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 22/30
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Schéma
PID câblage
Compresseur principal d'air d'atomisation
0425 CA1 0607 N/A
Caractéristiques : Centrifuge | 2,7 kg/s |6600 tr/min
Compresseur d'air d'atomisation de démarrage
0425 CA2 1047 N/A
Caractéristiques : Volumétrique | 510 m3/h | 6200 tr/min
Thermocouple température air sortie du compresseur
Thermocouple température air sortie du compresseur
Thermocouple température air entrée du compresseur
Thermocouple température air entrée du compresseur
Détecteur de température à résistance
0492 CT-IF-3/R 637T TURB
Capteur de température 1 stator Ph1 du moteur de lancement
0421 ET-CRS-11/R 0603 ACCY
0421 ET-CRS-12/R 0603 ACCY
0421 ET-CRS-21/R 0603 ACCY
0421 ET-CRS-22/R 0603 ACCY
0421 ET-CRS-31/R 0603 ACCY
0421 ET-CRS-32/R 0603 ACCY
Filtre sur air de balayage du combustible liquide
0477 FA3-1 918T N/A
Caractéristiques : 5 µm
Filtre sur air de commande des systèmes d'air d'atomisation et d'air de balayage
0425 FA4-1 0983 N/A
Filtre à air injection d'eau
0462 FA8-2 A035 N/A
Répartiteur de débit
0424 FD1-1 0613 N/A Caractéristiques : type linéaire : 7 éléments à double pompes | 1650 Hz | 883 l/min à 1650
tr/min
Filtre
0494 FF11-1 E021 N/A
Filtre
0494 FF11-2 E021 N/A
Filtre fuel HP
0424 FF2-1 1014 N/A
Caractéristiques : Béta 40 = 75
Filtre fuel HP
0424 FF2-2 1014 N/A
Caractéristiques : Béta 40=75
Filtre alimentation huile HP
0434 FH2-1 1051 N/A
Caractéristiques : Béta 3 > 200
Filtre alimentation huile HP
0434 FH2-2 1051 N/A
Caractéristiques : Béta 3 > 200
Filtre hydraulique servo vanne fuel liquide (contrôle)
0424 FH3 0992 N/A

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 23/30
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Schéma
PID câblage
Filtre alimentation bloc de commande hydraulique IGV
0469 FH6-1 0548 N/A
Filtre hydraulique du circuit d'alimentation de la servo-valve de la VSR
0422 FH7-1 0507 N/A
Caractéristiques : 15 µ abs
Filtre hydraulique alimentation hydraulique vanne control gaz (VGC)
0422 FH8-1 0509 N/A
Caractéristiques : 15 µ abs
Débimètre injection d'eau
0462 FM1-1 A035 WI
Caractéristiques : 3,6 m3/h | 29,5 m3/h | Facteur nominal K : 158,5 impulsions / l
Filtre haute pression
0462 FW1-1 A035 N/A
Filtre cônique amont pompe d'injection d'eau
0462 FW1-2 A035 N/A
Caractéristiques : Media filtrant 800µm
Filtre cônique aval débimètre
0462 FW1-3 A035 N/A
Caractéristiques : Media filtrant 150µm
0421 HM-1 0605 N/A Convertisseur de couple et inverseur
Ensemble actionneur système aubes variables entrée compresseur
0469 HM3-1 0548 N/A
Caractéristiques : Course vérin de 32° à 86°
0425 HX1-1 1003 N/A Réfrigérant de l'air d'atomisation en amont du compresseur d'air d'atomisation
Thermocouple retour huile palier #1
0416 LT-B1D-1 637T TURB
0416 LT-B2D-1 637T TURB
0416 LT-B3D-1 637T TURB
Thermocouple retour huile butées palier #1
0416 LT-BT1D-1 637T TURB
Thermocouple retour d'huile palier #1 alternateur et réducteur
Thermocouple retour d'huile palier #2 alternateur et réducteur
0416 LT-OT-1A 637A ACCY
0416 LT-OT-2A 637A ACCY
Thermocouple huile de lubrification collecteur turbine
0422 MG1 0512 N/A Injecteur combustible gaz
Pompe Principale Combustible Liquide
0424 PF1 0611 ACCY
Caractéristiques : Pompe à vis | 870,5 l/min | 68,9 bar | 1550 tr/min
Pompe de lubrification
0424 PF1-90 0611 N/A
Caractéristiques : Voir le P&ID LMA-37361
Pompe de chargement
0494 PFA-10 E021 N/A
Caractéristiques : Pompe volumétrique | 25 l/min

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 24/30
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Schéma
PID câblage
Pompe doseuse
0494 PFA-11 E021 N/A
Caractéristiques : Pompe volumétrique à piston | 4 l/h | 10 bar | 1500 tr/min
Pompe doseuse
0494 PFA-12 E021 N/A
Caractéristiques : Volumétrique à piston | 4 l/h | 10 bar | 1500 tr/min
Pompe hydraulique principale
0434 PH1 0627 ACCY
Caractéristiques : Type volumétrique à débit variable | 65 l/min | 105 bar | 1422 tr/min
Pompe auxiliaire huile HP
0434 PH2 0628 ACCY
Caractéristiques : Volumétrique | 45,4 l/min | 105 bar | 1450 tr/min
Respirateur du bac 501BA
0494 PSV-11 E021 N/A Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Réglages : Surpression : 0.15 bar ; Vide : 0.01 bar
0462 PW1-1 A035 N/A Groupe moto-pompe injection d'eau
Avertisseur lumineux compartiment auxiliaire
0426 SLI-1 1104 ACCY
Caractéristiques : 240 UPS | 50 Hz
Avertisseur incendie compartiment auxiliaire
0426 SLI-1A 1113 ENCL-T
Avertisseur incendie compartiment TG
0426 SLI-1B 1113 ENCL-T
0426 SLI-1C 1113 ENCL-T
Avertisseur incendie compartiment gaz
0426 SLI-1D 1195 ENCL-G
Caractéristiques : Alarme lumineuse | 24 VDC
0426 SLI-1E 1195 ENCL-G
Avertisseur lumineux compartiment auxiliaire
0426 SLI-2 1104 ACCY
Caractéristiques : 240 UPS | 50 Hz
0426 SLI-2B 1113 ENCL-T
0426 SLI-2C 1113 ENCL-T
0426 SLI-2E 1195 ENCL-G
Avertisseur incendie compartiment puissance
0426 SLI-3C 1113 ENCL-T
Thermocouple température tunnel échappement
0415 TT-IB-1 637T TURB
Thermocouple température position extérieure après première roue
Thermocouple température position extérieure après première roue
Thermocouple température position intérieure avant première roue
Thermocouple température position intérieure avant première roue
Thermocouple température position extérieure après deuxième roue
Thermocouple température position extérieure après deuxième roue

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 25/30
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Schéma
PID câblage
Thermocouple température position extérieure avant deuxième roue
Thermocouple température position extérieure avant deuxième roue
Thermocouple température position extérieure après troisième roue
Thermocouple température position extérieure après troisième roue
Thermocouple température position extérieure avant troisième roue
Thermocouple température position extérieure avant troisième roue
Thermocouple température gaz d'échappement de la turbine
0415 TT-XD-1 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-10 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-11 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-12 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-13 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-14 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-15 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-16 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-17 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-18 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-19 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-2 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-20 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-21 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-22 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-23 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-24 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-3 0623 TURB

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 26/30
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Schéma
PID câblage
0415 TT-XD-4 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-5 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-6 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-7 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-8 0623 TURB
0415 TT-XD-9 0623 TURB
Vanne d'air de balayage du circuit de combustible gazeux
0477 VA13-1 918T N/A
Réglages : Temps d'ouverture doit être 35 ± 5 secondes.
Temps de fermeture doit être 10 secondes au maximum.
Vanne d'air de balayage du circuit de combustible gazeux
0477 VA13-2 918T N/A
Réglages : Temps d'ouverture doit être 35 ± 5 secondes.
Temps de fermeture doit être 10 secondes au maximum.
Vanne purge faux départ
0442 VA17-1 1026 N/A
Vanne purge faux départ
0442 VA17-2 1026 N/A
Vanne purge caisson échappement faux départ
0442 VA17-5 1026 N/A
Vanne d'ajustement de la pression d'air d'atomisation
0425 VA18-1 1070 N/A
Vanne d'air de balayage du circuit de combustible liquide
0477 VA19-1 918T N/A
Caractéristiques : Normal : C vers L ouvert ; U fermé
Vanne anti-pompage 11ème étage
0417 VA2-1 1022 N/A
0417 VA2-2 1022 N/A
Vanne type papillon pour isolement entrée d'air du compresseur d'air d'atomisation CA2
0425 VA22-1 0922 N/A
0417 VA2-3 1022 N/A
0417 VA2-4 1022 N/A
Vanne pneumatique de dépressurisation rapide
Caractéristiques :
0477 VA36-1 918T N/A
sous pression: 1 vers 2 ouvert et évent 3 fermé
hors pression: 2 ouvert vers l'évent 3
Vanne pneumatique de dépressurisation rapide
Caractéristiques :
0477 VA36-2 918T N/A
sous pression: 1 vers 2 ouvert et évent 3 fermé
hors pression: 2 ouvert vers l'évent 3
Vanne pneumatique
0494 VA99-11 E021 N/A

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 27/30
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Schéma
PID câblage
Vanne pneumatique
0494 VA99-12 E021 N/A
Vanne pneumatique
0494 VA99-13 E021 N/A
0434 VAB1 0947 N/A Purge air sur circuit hydraulique principal
0434 VAB2 0947 N/A Purge air sur circuit hydraulique auxiliaire
Vanne de dérivation de contrôle débit fuel
0424 VC3 0516 N/A
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO | Course = 28,57 mm
Vanne de régulation d'injection d'eau
0462 VC4-1 A035 N/A
0462 VCK100 A035 N/A Clapet anti-retour
Clapet anti-retour sur injecteur pour combustible fuel
0424 VCK1-1T14 0961 N/A Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Réglages : Tarage : 8,27 ± 0,34 bar
Clapet anti-retour sur air de balayage des injecteurs primaires de combustible liquide
0477 VCK2-1T14 918T N/A Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Réglages : Pression d'ouverture : Minimum 0,07 bar
Clapet anti-retour pompe principale
0434 VCK3-1 0947 N/A Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Réglages : Seuil = 1,5 bar
Clapet anti-retour pompe auxiliaire
Réglages : Seuil = 1,5 bar
Clapet circuit air refroidissement corps turbine
Réglages : pression d'ouverture : 7 mbar
Clapet circuit air refroidissement corps turbine
Réglages : pression d'ouverture : 7 mbar
Vanne de contrôle gaz primaire
0422 VGC-1 0509 GAS
Caractéristiques : Normal : NC | Course maxi = 38,1 mm
0469 VH3-1A 0548 N/A Vanne de déclenchement hydraulique IGV
0469 VH3-1B 0548 N/A Vanne de déclenchement hydraulique IGV
Vanne de déclenchement hydraulique (VSR-1) - Vanne Stop Gaz
0422 VH5-1 0507 GAS
Vanne de déclenchement hydraulique (VGC-1) - Vanne contrôle gaz
0422 VH5-2 0509 GAS
0422 VM-1 0639 N/A Débitmètre massique à effet coriolis
0434 VM4 1052 N/A Vanne transfert pour filtre huile HP
Vanne multiport
0424 VP-1 0961 N/A
Vanne multiport
0424 VP-2 0961 N/A
Vanne de régulation pression alimentation huile de lubrification
0416 VPR2-1 1023 N/A Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Réglages : Point de consigne : 1,72 +0,13/-0 bar

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 28/30
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Schéma
PID câblage
Filtre régulateur
0494 VPR30-11 E021 N/A Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : 4 ± 0.35 bar
Compensateur de pression pompe hydraulique
0434 VPR3-1 0627 N/A
Réglages : 103,4 ± 1,37 bar
Filtre détendeur d'air de commande de la vanne d'air de balayage du combustible gazeux
0477 VPR44-1 918T N/A
Réglages : 2,3 +0/-0,2 bar
Filtre détendeur d'air de commande de la vanne d'air de balayage du combustible gazeux
0477 VPR44-2 918T N/A
Réglages : 2,3 +0/-0,2 bar
Filtre détendeur d'air de commande de la vanne d'air de balayage du combustible liquide
0477 VPR54-1 918T N/A
Réglages : 3,27 +1,7/-0 bar
Filtre détendeur (partie de VC4-1)
0462 VPR62-1 A035 N/A
Filtre détendeur (partie de VS2-2)
0462 VPR62-13 A035 N/A
Vanne de régulation de pression pour isolation surpresseur AA
0425 VPR68-1 0922 N/A
Réglages : 3,79 ± 0,13 bar (55 ± 2 psi)
Vanne de décharge pompe principale huile de lubrification
0416 VR1 1016 N/A Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Réglages : Ouverture à 6,89 + 0,13/-0 bar
Vanne de décharge pompe principale huile HP
Vanne de décharge pompe auxiliaire huile HP
Soupape de décharge pression alimentation combustible liquide
Vanne de décharge pompe à fuel
Soupape de sécurité de la pompe
0494 VR60-11 E021 N/A Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Réglages : Ouverture à 12 ± 1 bar
Soupape de sécurité de la pompe PFA-12
0494 VR60-12 E021 N/A Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Réglages : Ouverture à 12 ± 1 bar
Vanne arrêt fuel
0424 VS1 0511 N/A
Vanne d'arrêt injection d'eau
0462 VS2-2 A035 N/A
Vanne d'arrêt et réglage gaz
0422 VSR-1 0507 GAS
Caractéristiques : Normal : NC | Course maxi = 88,9 ± 0,127 mm
Vanne thermostatique régulant la température de l'huile de graissage
0420 VTR1-1 1035 N/A Caractéristiques : Normal : E vers B ouvert, C fermé
Réglages : Début d'ouverture à T° d'huile = 54 ± 2°C
Vanne thermostatique régulant la température d' air d'atomisation
0420 VTR2-1 1027 N/A Caractéristiques : Normal : B vers E ouvert, C fermé
Réglages : T° air = 107 ± 2 °C

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 29/30
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
MLI Schéma
PID câblage
RTD température eau pattes turbine
0420 WT-TL-1 637T TURB
RTD température eau pattes turbine
0420 WT-TL-2 637T TURB

137A3171
A4
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 30/30
G
E
O
ffi
c ia
l
BASIC CONTROL DEVICE FUNCTION NUMBERS
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE
1 MASTER ELEMENT 50 INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT or

RATE–of–RISE RELAY
2 SEQUENCE TIMER 51 AC TIME OVERCURRENT RELAY
3 CHECKING RELAY 52 AC CIRCUIT BREAKER or CONTACTOR
4 MASTER RELAY 55 POWER FACTOR RELAY
5 STOPPING DEVICE 57 SHORT CIRCUITING or GROUNDING DEVICE
6 STARTING CIRCUIT BREAKER 59 OVERVOLTAGE RELAY
8 CONTROL POWER DISCONNECTING DEVICE 60 VOLTAGE or CURRENT BALANCE RELAY
10 UNIT SEQUENCE SWITCH 62 STOPPING or OPENING TIMER RELAY
12 OVERSPEED DEVICE 63 LIQUID or GAS PRESSURE or VACUUM
13 SYNCHRONOUS SPEED DEVICE 64 GROUND PROTECTIVE RELAY
14 SPEED RELAY 65 GOVERNOR
15 SPEED or FREQUENCY MATCHING DEVICE 66 NOTCHING or JOGGING DEVICE
18 ACCELERATING or DECELERATING DEVICE 67 AC DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT RELAY
20 SOLENOID VALVE 68 BLOCKING RELAY
21 DISTANCE RELAY 69 PERMISSIVE CONTROL DEVICE
23 TEMPERATURE CONTROL DEVICE 70 ELECTRICALLY OPERATED RHEOSTAT
25 SYNCHRONISM CHECK DEVICE 71 LIQUID or GAS LEVEL RELAY
26 TEMPERATURE SENSING DEVICE 72 DC CIRCUIT BREAKER or CONTACTOR
27 UNDERVOLTAGE 75 POSITION CHANGING MECHANISM
28 FLAME DETECTOR 77 PULSE TRANSMITTER
30 ANNUNCIATOR RELAY 80 LIQUID or GAS FLOW RELAY
32 DIRECTIONAL POWER RELAY 81 FREQUENCY RELAY
33 POSITION SWITCH 82 DC RECLOSING RELAY
34 MASTER SEQUENCE DEVICE 83 AUTOMATIC SELECTIVE CONTROL or
TRANSFER RELAY
37 UNDERCURRENT or UNDERPOWER RELAY 84 OPERATING MECHANISM
38 BEARING PROTECTIVE DEVICE 85 CARRIER or PILOT–WIRE RECEIVER RELAY
39 MECHANICAL CONDITION MONITOR 86 LOCK–OUT RELAY
40 FIELD RELAY 87 DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTIVE RELAY
41 FIELD CIRCUIT BREAKER 88 AUXILIARY MOTOR or MOTOR GENERATOR
43 MANUAL TRANSFER or SELECTOR DEVICE 89 LINE SWITCH
45 ATMOSPHERIC CONDITION MONITOR 90 REGULATING DEVICE
46 REVERSE–PHASE or PHASE–BALANCE 91 VOLTAGE DIRECTIONAL RELAY
CURRENT RELAY
47 PHASE–SEQUENCE VOLTAGE RELAY 93 FIELD–CHANGING CONTACTOR
48 INCOMPLETE SEQUENCE RELAY 94 TRIPPING or TRIP–FREE RELAY
49 MACHINE or TRANSFORMER THERMAL 96 TRANSDUCER
RELAY
A00029b 1 BASIC CONTROL DEVICE

FUNCTION NUMBERS
General Electric Company
One River Road
Schenectady, NY 12345
A00029b 2 BASIC CONTROL DEVICE

FUNCTION NUMBERS
GE Power Systems
GLOSSARY OF TERMINOLOGY
(Mark IV, Mark V Gas Turbine Control System)
An understanding of the Mark IV and V gas turbine to perform operations which require a fast execu-
control system requires a knowledge of the terminol- tion time.
ogy used in the electrical control system and for the
mechanics of the gas turbine. This glossary is di- Assembler A computer program that converts
vided into part (A) Mark IV and V Electrical Control assembly language programs into a form (machine
language) that the computer can understand. The
Terminology, and part (B) Gas Turbine Terminolo-
assembler translates mnemonic instruction codes
gy.
into binary numbers, replaces names with their
binary equivalents, and assigns locations in
memory to data and instructions.
A. MARK IV AND MARK V
ELECTRICAL CONTROL Assembly Language A programmming lan-
TERMINOLOGY guage in which the programmer can use mnemonic
instruction codes, labels, and names to refer direct-
Address The identification code that distin- ly to their binary equivalents. The assembler is a
guishes one memory location or input/output port low-level language, since each assembly language
from another. instruction translates directly into a specific ma-
chine language instruction.
Address Bus A bus used to transmit the identifi-
Asynchronous Operation of a switching net-
cation code that distinguishes one memory location
work by a free-running signal. Completion of one
or I/O port from another.
instruction triggers the next instruction.
Algorithm Refer to CONTROL ALGORITHM Back-plane The internal wiring of a module be-
tween pins of the cards located in the module. Some
Analog A continuous signal or a representation modules have a “flow-soldered” back-plane, which
of a quantity that can have any value. is a printed circuit card that the other cards plug
into.
Application Application-oriented computer pro-
grams, such as the Sequencer Code and Control Al- Baud A measure of the rate of data flow transfer.
gorithms. The number of signal elements (bits) transmitted
per second. (2400 Baud transfers 2400 Bits = 300
Software which are customized to the needs of Bytes/sec.)
each installation.
Binary A system of numbers using 2 as a base.
Array Systematic arrangement of numbers or (In contrast to the decimal system, which uses 10 as
data in tabulated form. a base).
ASCII Abbreviation for American Standard Bit A single binary digit which can be in either of
Code for Information Interchange. Each character two states (0/ or 1).
is assigned a number between 32 and 127.
Bootstrap Technique for loading first instruc-
ASM-86 A low-level programming language de- tions of a program into memory and then using
signed for the Intel 8086 microprocessor. ASM-86 these instructions to bring in the rest of the pro-
is used in the Mark IV computer operating system gram.
C00023 1 GLOSSARY OF TERMINOLOGY
GE Power Systems
BRAM Battery-backed Random Access control block (instruction-decoding, execution and

Memory is used to retain field editable software timing) and I/O.
during power outages for a given length of time.
Cycle The process of powering-down, then pow-
Bus A group of parallel lines that connect two or ering-up a processor; (i.e. moving the toggle
more devices. switch on the processor’s power supply to first the
DISABLE position, then the ENABLE position).
Byte A data element consisting of 8 bits. The processor will re-initialize when it is powered
back up.
Checksum A logical sum of data that is included
in a record as a guard against recording or transmis- Data Information that is processed by a micro-
sion errors. processor according to its Code. Generally, the mi-
croprocessor’s input, output and ‘workspace’
Clock The pulse generator which controls the information.
timing of switching circuits in the microprocessor.
Hardware architecture and programming are other Database The organized collection of Data and
factors in determining the rate of data manipula- Constants that are important to field service per-
tion. sonnel.
Coding The writing of programs in a language Data Bus A bus used to transfer coded informa-
that is comprehensible to a computer system. tion to and from the CPU memory storage and pe-
ripheral devices.
Cold Junction The junction between the ther-
Differential Input An analog input which has a
mocouple wire and the screw terminals on the ther-
high impedance to ground on input wires.
mocouple modules generates an EMF at point of
termination called the “cold junction”. Downloading The processor’s operation which
copies information from one section of a proces-
Compiler A program that converts a program in sor’s Memory into a different section of the same
a high-level (i.e. procedure-oriented) language into Memory or into another processor’s Memory. If a
an assembly or machine language program. Controller is ‘cycled’ (powered-down, then pow-
ered-up), the <RST> Sequencer Code is down-
Control Algorithm A PLM-86 Application loaded from the Communicator <C> to the
Software program that performs a specific func- Controller.
tion, such as speedcontrol or vibration protection.
“Dumb Terminal” Terminal for data input/out-
Control Bus The bus carries commands from put to/from Host Computer; (by strict definition:
and to the CPU for control of the operating system No internal data storage/manipulation)
(i.e. read, write, etc.).
Editor A program that manipulates text material
Control Constants The subset of “Constants” and allows the user to make corrections, additions,
that are used in the Control Algorithms and the Se- deletions, and other changes.
quencer Code to define gains, time constants, off-
sets, etc. Each Control Constant can be called by its EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only
Signal Name as shown in the Elementary. Memory can be erased by exposure to ultraviolet
light.
CPU Central Processing Unit, the heart of the
computer system, consists of storage elements EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable
(registers), arithmetic unit (computation circuits), Read Only Memory is used to store the field edit-
GLOSSARY OF TERMINOLOGY 2 C00023
GE Power Systems
able Application Software so that it will not be lost Interrupt A computer input that temporarily
during a power outage. suspends the normal sequence of operations and
transfers computer control to an Interrupt Service
Firmware A method of system control program Routine.
design in which all control instructions are con-
tained in ROM or PROM. Interrupt Service Routine A program that per-
forms the actions required to respond to an inter-
Handshaking A method of controlling data rupt.
transfers in which the transmitting device generates
a data ready signal. This signal directs the receiving IVAR A Database array dedicated to storing inte-
device to accept the data. The receiving device then ger data.
generates a data accepted signal to inform the trans-
LDATA A Database array dedicated to storing
mitting device that it may remove the data and pro-
logic data Signal Names, such as “complete se-
ceed.
quence” (L3) or “flame detected” (L28FD).
Hardware Physical equipment forming a com- LVAR A Database array dedicated to storing log-
puter system (as opposed to the Software). ic data.
Hexadecimal A system of numbers using 16 as a Linking Loader A loader that will enter a series
base (In contrast to the decimal system which uses of program and subroutines into memory and pro-
10 as a base.) vide the required interconnections.
High-Level Language A programming lan- Low-Level Language A language in which each

guage in which the statements represent procedures statement is directly translated into a single ma-
rather than single machine instructions. PLM-86 is chine language instruction.
the high-level language used within the Mark IV
system. A high-level language requires a compiler MDATA A Database array dedicated to storing
that translates each statement into a series of ma- pre-defined miscellaneous data Signal Names.
chine language instructions.
MEM A Medium Electronics Module can con-
IDATA A Database array dedicated to storing in- tain up to 24 circuit cards. The Communicator <C>
teger variable Signal Names, such as speed (TNH) is a MEM.
or fuel stroke reference (FSR).
Machine Language The programming lan-
guage that the computer can directly understand
Instruction A group of bits that defines a com- with no translation other than numeric conversions.
puter operation and is part of the instruction set. A machine language program can be loaded into
memory and executed. The value of every bit in ev-
Instruction Set The set of general-purpose ery instruction in the program must be specified.
instructions available with a given computer — the
set of inputs to which the CPU will produce a Membrane Switch One of the pushbuttons
known response during the instruction fetch cycle. which are beneath the overlay on the Operator In-
terface Module.
Interpreter A program that fetches and executes
instructions written in a high-level language. An in- Memory The section of a computer which stores
terpreter executes each instruction as soon as it information (i.e. code, data and constants) in binary
reads the instruction; it does not produce an object form. Each item in the Memory has a unique ad-
program, as a compiler does. dress that the CPU can use to access it.
GE Power Systems
Microcomputer A computer whose CPU is a ences have no effect because the devices are
microprocessor plus memory and input/output cir- electrically separated.
cuitry.
Page A subdivision of Memory containing 64K
Microprocessor A central processing unit gen- (i.e. 65,0/0/0/ bytes).
erally consisting of an arithmetic and logic unit,
control block and register array, and a memory stor- Party Line A large number of devices connected
age system. to a single line originating in a CPU.
PLM-86 A high-level language designed for
Modem A device that adds or removes a carrier
systems and application programming of the Intel
frequency to an existing signal which allows data to
8086 microprocessor. Control programs algo-
be transmitted or received on a high frequency
rithms are written in PL/M-86.
channel.
Port The point where the I/O is in contact with
Modular Programming A programming meth- the outside world.
od whereby the entire task is divided into logically
separate sections or modules. Programming The implementation of the con-
trol function of a processing system as a sequence
MOV A Metal Oxide Veristor. A zener-oxide de- of control signals that is organized into words and
vice that suppresses voltage spikes. stored in memory.
Multiplexing A process of transmitting more PROM Programmable Read Only Memory is
than one signal at a time on a single link via time- used to store software which is not field adjustable
sharing (i.e. serial) or frequency-sharing (i.e. paral- and will not be lost during a power outage.
lel).
PROM Programmer A piece of equipment that
MVAR A Database array dedicated to storing stores Software in a PROM.
miscellaneous data.
Processor A microcomputer (a microprocessor
Object Program (Object Code) The program plus Memory and Input/Output circuitry) used in
that is the output of a translator program (such as an the Mark IV panel. The Communicator <C> and
assembler or compiler). Usually a machine lan- the Controllers <RST>.
guage program ready for execution.
Protocol A procedure for data communication.
Off-line A function performed with the turbine
RAM Random Access Memory can be read and
stopped and/or the control disconnected from the
written to during operation and must be backed-up
process.
to retain its contents during a power outage.
Operating System System software that con- Real Time In synchronization with the actual oc-
trols the overall operation of a computer system and currence of events.
performs such tasks as memory allocation, input
and output distribution, interrupt processing, and Real Time Operation A data processing tech-
task scheduling. nique which allows the machine to use information
as it becomes available, as opposed to batch proces-
Optical Isolation A semiconductor device con- sing at a time unrelated to the time the information
sisting of an LED and a photodiode or phototrans- is generated.
istor in close proximity. Current through the LED
causes an internal light emission that forces cur- Refresh The process of restoring the contents of
rent flow in the phototransistor. Voltage differ- a dynamic memory before they are lost.
GE Power Systems
Register A temporary small scale memory used by Subroutine A sub-program that can be reached
the CPU for logic, arithmetic or transfer operations. from one or more places in a main program.
RS232 An IEEE communication standard used Stack A data structure used for temporary stor-
for communication between <C>, <R>, <S>, <T> age which receives data on the top of the stack and
and the panel mounted printer. It is also available pushes existing data further down in the stack. Data
for remote communication. is removed from the top of the stack creating a last-
in, first-out arrangement.
RS422 An IEEE communication standard used
for remote communication. Stall A cessation of processor operation (due to
malfunction).
Rung A series of Sequencer Code commands
(i.e. pseudo-contacts) which result in a store state- String A sequence of character codes stored se-
ment (i.e. pseudo-coil). quentially in Memory. The Relay Ladder Diagram
Rungs consist of one or more strings.
Sampling Rate The frequency that a given pro-
gram is run. Some control algorithms are run four TTL Transistor-Transistor Logic is the most
times every second. widely used bi-polarity technology for digital inte-
grated circuits.
SEM A Small Electronics Module contains up to
12 circuit cards. Controllers <RST> are SEM’s.
Utility Program A program that provides basic
Sequencer Code The set of instructions that per- functions, such as loading and saving programs,
forms the turbine’s sequencing functions. initiating program execution, observing and chang-
ing the contents of memory locations, or setting
Serial Link An interface between two computer breakpoints and tracing.
systems that permits one of the systems to transmit
data to, and receive data from, the other system. Voting Voting in the Mark IV means that the con-
trol will respond to the majority logic from the three
Single Ended Input An input which has a high Controllers.
impedance to ground on one of the two incoming
wires. Word Sixteen consecutive bits which the com-
puter can manipulate in a single cycle.
Softswitch One of the six pushbuttons, located at
the right of the CRT display, which are assigned a Wire Wrap Wiring within modules is termi-
function by the display which currently appears on nated on the card or relay socket pins by wrapping
the screen. the wire around the pins.
Software Computer programs.

GE Power Systems
GAS TURBINE TERMINOLOGY Annular Space or Annulus The ring like space
between the combustion liner and the flow shield.
Accessory Compartment A sheet metal house
with access doors which may be located on the Anti-Icing System Preheating of the inlet air to
same base as the turbine or on a separate base. It prevent ice formation in the inlet system.
contains the mechanical accessories needed to sup- Atomizing Air High pressure air which is used
port the prime mover operation. to break up liquid fuel into small droplets to im-
prove the combustion.
Accessory Coupling A fluid or grease filled
flexible coupling which drives the accessory gear Aux. Hydraulic Supply Pump The motor driv-
from (the forward end of) the prime mover. en high pressure pump used to supply servo pres-
sure during start-up or emergency conditions.
Accessory Gear Encompasses a number of gears
which drive most of the gas turbine accessories at Aux. Lube Pump Provides lubricating oil dur-
the proper speeds and which connects the turbine to ing start-up and shutdown, and serve as a standby
its starting device. The gear is driven by the starting to the main pump. An AC motor is usually the
device, and then by the turbine when the unit reach- drive source.
es self-sufficient speed. Common items driven by
this gear are: liquid fuel pump, water pump, main Axial Flow A (gas turbine) compressor which
lube pump, main hydraulic pump, main atomizing moves air axially through a series of rotor and sta-
air compressor. tor compressor blades. The rotating elements
impart momentum to the air mass, and the stator
Accessory Gear Box Refers to the complete ac- elements convert that momentum to pressure in
cessory gear assembly. conjunction with the converging walls of the com-
pressor casing.
Accumulator A hydro-pneumatic device de-
signed to absorb a hydraulic shock and to deliver a Base Load The load at the rated temperature
regulated force (in the form of pressure and flow) control setpoint at which the turbine can be oper-
during transient demands on a system. ated to maintain the recommended parts life expec-
tancy.
Acid Removal Filter The machine part that
neutralizes acid in the lube oil supply. Bearing The stationary machine part which con-
tains the journal bearing liner.
Actuator A self-contained device designed to
Bearing Feed Header The section of the lube oil
deliver a controlled or regulated force in order to
piping, downstream of the oil filters, which carries
activate some other device.
lubrication to the individual turbine bearings.
Aft End The exhaust end of the gas turbine. Bearing Seal A general term identifying a means
of preventing oil leakage from a bearing.
Aftercooler The atomizing air cooler down-
stream of the main atomizing air compressor. Bellmouth The flared bell-shaped cast inlet
which provides an even airflow distribution to the
Air Separator The device which removes large compressor through the inlet guide vanes.
particulate matter from an air supply via an inertial
or centrifugal force. Black Start The means of starting a turbine with-
out incoming AC power.
Ambient Air Air surrounding the gas turbine
housing which enters the turbine to support com- Blade A rotating or stationary airfoil in an axial
bustion. compressor.
GE Power Systems
Blow Off Valve A valve which bypasses air from Combustion Liner The chamber where chemical
the compressor around the regenerator and the high energy is released and added to the gas flow path.
and low pressure turbines (i.e. two (2) shafts gas
turbine) to reduce available energy and prevent Combustion System A system consisting of fuel
overspeed during a sudden loss of load. It is primar- nozzles, spark plugs, flame detectors, crossfire
ily used on two shaft, generator drives. tubes, combustion liners, transition pieces and a
combustion casing or wrapper.
Brittle The loss of resiliency in the parent metal
due to aging, extreme cold or chemical action. Compression Ratio The ratio of the compressor
discharge pressure to the inlet pressure.
Brake Horsepower The horsepower developed
Compressor The mechanical component which
at the load coupling.
is used to increase the pressure of the working me-
dium within its structure.
Buckets Airfoil elements mounted radially on
the rotor wheel to transfer energy from the working Compressor Discharge Casing Contains the
medium to the turbine rotor. last stages of the compressor stator blades and is
used to:
Burnishing The process of smoothing a metal
surface by means of a mechanical action with no — Join the compressor and turbine stators
loss of material. This normally occurs on plain — Support the forward end of the combustion
bearing surfaces. wrapper
Bypass Valve A device which regulates the flow — Provide an inner support for the first stage
of a fluid in: A) A fuel bypass valve on a liquid fuel turbine nozzles.
system using a positive displacement pump or, B) — May provide support for a bearing
An air control valve used for compressor pulsation
protection. Control Compt. (Control CAB) The compart-
ment which contains the gas turbine electrical con-
Centrifugal Separator A device used to re- trols and protection equipment.
move dust from the gas turbine cooling and seal-
ing air system. Separation is achieved by a Cooling and Sealing Air A system which pro-
centrifugal action. vides air pressure for cooling and sealing various
turbine components.
Chamfer A beveled edge (i.e. by the removal of
some of the gear material at an angle from the top Cooling Water Pump Provides cooling water
land to the bottom land at the ends of the teeth. flow for the system. A gear box or electric motor
drives the pump.
Check Valve A device which allows fluid flow in Cooling Water Radiator The on or off base wa-
only one (1) direction. ter/air or water/water heat exchanger.
CO2 Carbon dioxide, used as a fire extinguishing Coupling A component which connects a driven
medium. component to the drive source. Examples: Acces-
sory Gear Coupling, Load Coupling, Pump Cou-
Combustor or Combustion Chamber The me- pling, Starting Motor Coupling, etc.
chanical component of the combustion system in
which the combustion takes place (increasing the Coupling Comp. A housing for the load cou-
temperature of the working medium). pling.
GE Power Systems
Cranking The turning of the turbine rotor during Exhaust Frame The machine part which usually
start-up or shutdown. support the aft journal bearing. The air discharged
from the exhaust diffuser is directed to the turning
Crossfire Tubes The piping which interconnects vanes. Air-cooled, internal struts maintain position
the combustion chambers on multiple combustion of the bearing.
chamber turbines. These tubes also allow flame
propagation from the two (2) spark plug ignited Exhaust Hood The component which surrounds
combustors to the other chambers. the aft bearing area and is bolted to the turbine case
aft flange. It assists in guiding air flow in to the turn-
Cycle Thermal The ratio of the net work output ing vanes.
to the total heat input = [ Work of Turbine - Work of
Exhaust Plenum An enclosed cavity which re-
Efficiency Compressor ]/Heat Input.
ceives discharged exhaust gases after the gases exit
from the load turbine wheel.
Diaphragm The stationary element containing a
set of nozzles used to expand the working medium Exhaust Ports Machine bosses on the compressor
and direct it against the rotating blades. casing which extracts air for cooling and sealing.
Diffuser The section designed to increase the Exhaust Pressure Drop Exhaust duct losses.
area of the flowpath to convert flow velocity to stat-
ic fluid pressure. Exhaust Stack The exhaust assembly which can
include silencing sections.
Distance Piece A hollow cylindrical shaft used
to couple the axial-flow compressor to the first Exit Guide Vanes Guide vanes at the exhaust
stage turbine wheel. end of the load turbine which direct the gas flow to
the exhaust.
Eductor A device used for evacuating an en- Expansion Joints Devices that allow thermal
closed space usually by means of air purge. expansion.
Electrostatic A device used for removing oil Extraction Valves Devices used to assist in pre-
particles from an air/oilmixture using the charged venting compressor surge by allowing air to be ex-
particle Precipitator method. tracted during off-design periods from an
intermediate compressor stage.
Emergency Stop An immediate de-activation of
the fuel system due to an emergency electrical or Filters Components normally used to remove
mechanical device or done manually. solid particulate matter in a given size range from
an air/fluid supply and from lube oil.
Emergency Lube Oil Pump The back-up lube
oil pump to the main pump. It uses the 125 Vdc bat- Fin Fan (Cooling Fan) A mechanically or elec-
tery to power the motor. tric motor driven air fan used tocool the water run-
ning through the radiators.
Evaporator Cooling Liquid (usually water) is
Firing Temp The temperature of the air mass at
added to an air supply, and the resultant evaporation
the inlet of the first stage turbine nozzle.
cools the air mass and increases its mass per unit
volume. Flame Detectors Sensors (usually ultraviolet)
used to detect flame.
Exhaust Diffuser The component which slows
the exhaust gas exit from the last turbine stage to re- Flow Divider A device which distributers fuel
cover energy, and reduce losses. flow equally to the fuel nozzles.
GE Power Systems
Fluid A general term used to describe a liquid or Heat Exchanger/Cooler The heat transfer
gas. equipment used to extract excessive heat from one
working fluid and transmit it to another non-work-
Fuel Forwarding Skid The off-base pumping ing fluid for eventual dissipation to the atmosphere.
unit used to transfer, condition and control the flow
of liquid fuel to the turbine. Heat Rate The ratio of input energy to output en-
ergy (i.e. BTU/BHP-HR).
Fuel, Gas Either natural gas with a high heat con-
tent or manufactured gas. Heat Recovery System The means of recover-
ing heat which would otherwise be lost during the
Fuel, Light Distillate (Also known as No. 2 process.
fuel.) A volatile distillate fuel having good com-
bustion properties, clean burning and readily atom- Heating Value The heat content of a given fuel
ized. Preheating is usually not necessary. (i.e. BTU/lb.).
High Pressure Turbine The first stage turbine
Fuel Nozzle The device that injects fuel into the (that drives the compressor on 2-shaft gas turbines).
combustion chamber.
Hot Gas Path A path of flow of the hot gases
Fuel Oil Stop Valve A spring-closed, hydrauli- consisting of the combustion chambers, transition
cally opened device used as a positive shutoff of pieces, turbine nozzles and buckets, and the ex-
liquid fuel. haust section.
Fuel Pump, Main The shaft driven, high pres- Hydraulic Ratchet A form of turning gear
sure, liquid fuel pump. which turns the rotor slightly at periodic intervals.
Fuel, Residual Low volatility petroleum prod- Inductor Alternator A permanent magnet type
ucts remaining at the end of a refinery distillation of AC generator connected to the compressor shaft.
processes. All residual fuels require heating for
pumping, filtering and proper air atomization at the Inlet Guide Vane The guide vanes at the inlet to
fuel nozzle. the compressor which direct and control the air
flow to the first stage of the axial flow compressor.
Fuel Treatment The process of treating residual
fuel to eliminate or inhibit contaminants. Inlet Plenum An enclosed cavity that directs the
inlet air to the gas turbine.
GAC Abbreviation for the Generator Auxiliary Inlet Pressure Drop The inlet duct pressure drop
Compartment containing high voltage switch gear (in inches of water).
and excitation.
Inlet Temperature The inlet air temperature to
Gib Block A steel block welded to the turbine the gas turbine compressor.
base which has adjusting bolts for axial and trans-
verse locating of the turbine. Provision is made for Journal Bearing The part that supports the
a gib key in the gib block. weight of the rotating shaft during normal operation.
Gib Key The key for the gib block (i.e. described Labyrinth Packing A seal designed with mul-
above). It is machined as an integral part of the low- tiple rows of (aluminum alloy) teeth located at
er half of the exhaust frame. the extremities of the bearing assemblies. Seal-
ing air is circulated between the shaft and the seal
Heat Consumption The heat consumed at rated to prevent oil from passing the seal and spreading
output (i.e. BTU/hr.). along the shaft.
GE Power Systems
Lagging The thermal and/or acoustic covering Overspeed Bolt A spring loaded sliding rod,
or enclosure. which is located in the accessory gear box monuted
on the shaft connected to the turbine rotor, and me-
Lifting Trunnion Extensions which are inte- chanically senses a rotor overspeed condition and
grally cast as part of the casing and used to hold generates a trip independent of the electrical over-
slings for lifting purposes. speed protection system.
Lighting Transformer A device usually Pad Support pads located on all base mounted
associated with backfeeding the generator output assemblies.
of 13.8KV and reducing it to 480/V 3-phase.
Partition The airfoil shaped stator portion of the
Load Shaft The low pressure turbine shaft. nozzle assembly.
Peak Load The load reached at the peak exhaust
Load Turbine Nozzle The variable angle nozzle
temperature control setpoint (above the base load
between the high pressure and low pressure turbine
setpoint) which produces more power but reduces
wheels on 2-shaft turbines which is to aproportion
the life expectancy of the turbine parts.
energy distribution between the turbines.
Peak Reserve A short term rating (seldom used)
Low Pressure Turbine The load turbine. for getting maximum power, recognizing that this
drastically reduces the life of the hot section turbine
Lube Oil Header The main lube oil piping parts.
which feeds the turbine bearings, gears, cou-
pling, etc. Platform The portion of a turbine bucket be-
tween the airfoil shape and the shank.
LVDT Abbreviation for Linear Variable Differ-
ential Transformer. Plenum An enclosure which contains a volume
of air (i.e. inlet) or exhaust gas (i.e. exhaust).
Mist Eliminator A device which removes small
oil droplets from the oil tank vent system prior to Power Plant A comprehensive term for the com-
the discharge of the vapor in to the atmosphere. ponents which are contained in an integrated power
system.
Model Defines the gas turbine frame size.
Pre-cooler The air cooler upstream of the main
Nozzle/Diaphragm Assembly A combination atomizing air compressor.
of the nozzle and the air control device between the
Pre-selected Load An adjustable, pre-desig-
turbine stages at the inner side wall.
nated load point between spinning reserve and base
load.
Nozzle Segment A small number of nozzle parti-
tions made as an assembly: multiple assemblies Pressure Ratio The ratio of the compressor dis-
will constitute a complete nozzle assembly. charge pressure to the inlet pressure.
Off-Base A part which is not mounted on the ac- Pulsation Protection A mechanical network de-
cessory, turbine or generator base. signed to prevent surge/pulsation during off-speed
conditions of the compressor.
On-Base A part which is mounted on th accesso-
ry, turbine or generator base. Pump, Centrifugal A non-positive displace-
ment pump designed to use a rotor impeller in an
Outer Combustion Casing A cover that pro- enclosure as a means of transferring a fluid from
vides a pressure vessel and an air flow path. one place to another.
GE Power Systems
Pump, Gear A positive displacement pump that Soleplates Individually grouted-in foundation
consists of a drive gear and driven gear mounted in plates used for mounting and supporting the pads of
a housing. The working medium travels from the the gas turbine bases.
intake port around the outside of the gear to the out-
let port. Spinning Reserve The minimum load control
point based on generator output.
Regenerative Cycle The working cycle which
recovers a portion of the exhaust heat to reduce the Stage The combination of one row of stator
cycle heat input required to read cycle operating blades or nozzles with one row of rotor blades or
temperatures. The working medium passes through buckets.
compressor, regenerator, combustor, turbine and
regenerator. Starting Clutch The (overrunning, hydraulical-
ly positioned jaw) clutch which connects the torque
converter or turning gear output to the accessory
Regenerator A heat exchanger used to transfer
gear box and disengages when the turbine reaches
heat from the exhaust gas to the working fluid be-
self-sustaining speed.
fore it enters the combustor.
Starting Device The machine part used to pro-
Rotor The rotating part of an assembly which is duce adequate torque for the starting system. Some
usually surrounded by a stator or stationary casing. types of starting devices are:
RTD Abbreviation for a Resistance Temperature 1. Diesel Engine
Detector. 2. Electric Motor
SFC Specific fuel consumption (i.e. lbs/BHP- 3. Steam Turbine
HR) defined for a given fuel heating value. 4. Natural Gas Expansion Turbine
Shaft Horsepower The power developed at the 5. Turbine Impingement
input or output shaft. 6. Air motor
Shank The portion of a bucket between the plat- Stator The stationary part of an assembly usually
form and the dovetail. surrounding a rotating component or rotor.
Shroud A segmented part located adjacent to the Stub Shaft A hollow cylindrical section integral
blade tips which is used to limit the working fluid with the first stage compressor wheel.
leakage.
Thermocouple A pair of dissimilar metals
joined in series to form a closed circuit, which will
Silencer A section of the inlet or exhaust of a gas
generate a thermo-electric current when heated.
turbine designed to reduce the sound level of air
passing through it. Thrust Bearing An active or inactive machine
part which absorbs the axial thrust of the rotating
Simple Cycle A cycle where the working fluid shaft.
passes directly through the compressor, combustor
and turbine (without heating/cooling). Tie Bolt A large bolt used to assemble the com-
pressor rotor wheels.
Single Shaft Turbine A gas turbine whose rotat-
ing components, (compressor and turbine) are ar- Torque Converter A hydraulic device coupled
ranged on one shaft. to the turbine starting means which transfers and
GE Power Systems
amplifies torque causing turbine compressor shaft Valve, Relief A valve that automatically main-
rotation during start up. tains a maximum, predetermined pressure by dis-
charging or bypassing the fluid in a system.
Transition Piece A thin walled duct used to
conduct the combustion gases from the circular Valve, Servo A hydraulically powered valve
combustion chambers to the annular turbine with provisions for direct control (i.e. position-
nozzle passage. ing) in direct relation with a primary control of a
comparatively low level of force. Used for pro-
portional control.
Turbine Stage A set of stationary nozzles and
one row of moving buckets mounted on a wheel. Valve, Solenoid A valve specifically designed to
The working medium expands through the station- control the flow of fluid by means of the magnetic
ary nozzle to a lower pressure causing kinetic ener- action of an electric coil on a movable core or
gy to be transfered to the moving buckets. plunger, which actuates the valve stem or pilot
needle. Used for on-off control.
Turbine Wheels Discs on the gas turbine
shaft which are used to mount buckets on the Valve, Temp. Regulating A self-acting valve
wheel periphery. designed for controlling the flow of fluids via a
thermostatic element located in the fluid.
Turning Gear The machine part which is used to
break the turbine away while starting and rotate the Vane An airfoil used to direct the flow of air or gas.
shaft during cooldown and inspection.
Water Removal Filter A device which removes
suspended water from the lube oil.
Two-shaft Turbine A turbine arrangement
where the high pressure and low pressure turbine Wheelspace Temperature The temperature of
stages are only coupled aerodynamically and run at the air in close proximity to the surface of the tur-
different speeds. bine wheel below the platform surface of the tur-
bine buckets.
Valve, Pressure Regulating A valve designed
for continuous automatic control of pressure.

One River Road

GEK 95149C
Revised, June 2001
GE Power Systems
Generator
International Conversion Tables

Category To convert from To Multiply by +
Ft/sec2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . meter/sec2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.048 E-01
ACCELERATION
In/sec2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . meter/sec2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.540 E–02
Ft2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . meter2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.290 E–02
AREA
In2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . meter2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.452 E–04
dyne⋅cm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . newton meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.000 E-07
kilogram-force⋅meter . . . . . . . . . . . . newton meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.807 E+00
TORQUE lb-force⋅inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . newton meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.130 E-01
lbf⋅foot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . newton meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.356 E+00
ozf⋅foot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . newton meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.062 E-03
lbf⋅ft/in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . newton m/m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.338 E+01
TORQUE/LENGTH
lbf⋅in/in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . newton m/m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.448 E+00
amp hr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . coulomb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.600 E+03
faraday (chem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . coulomb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.650 E+04
ELECTRICITY gauss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tesla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.000 E–04
and gilbert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . amp-turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.958 E–01
MAGNETISM maxwell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . weber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.000 E–08
oersted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . amp/meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.958 E+01
unit pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . weber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.257 E–07
Btu* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . joule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.054 E+03
ft⋅lb-force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . joule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.356 E+00
ENERGY
kilowatt hr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . joule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.600 E+06
(Includes Work)
watt⋅sec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . joule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.000 E+00
ft⋅poundal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . joule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.214 E–02
kg-force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . newton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.807 E+00
oz-force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . newton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.780 E–01
FORCE
lb-force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . newton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.448 E+00
poundal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . newton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.383 E–01
lb-force/in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . newton/meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.751 E+02
FORCE/LENGTH
lb-force/ft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . newton/meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.459 E+01
Btu* in/sec ft2 deg F . . . . . . . . . . . . watt/meter K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.189 E+02
Btu* in/hr ft2 deg F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . water/meter K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.441 E–01
Btu* /ft2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . joule/meter2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.135 E+04
Btu* /hr ft2 deg F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . joule/kg K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.674 E+00
Btu*/lbm deg F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . joule/kg K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.184 E+03
HEAT Btu*/sec ft2 deg F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . watt/meter2 K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.043 E+04
cal/cm2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . joule/meter2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.184 E+04
cal/cm2 sec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . watt/meter2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.184 E+04
cal/cm sec deg C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . watt/meter K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.184 E+02
cal*/g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . joule/kg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.184 E+03
cal*/g deg C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . joule/kg K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.184 E+03
foot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.048 E–01
inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.540 E–02
LENGTH
foot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . millimeter (mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.048 E+02
inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . millimeter (mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.40 E+00
+E Indicates the power of 10 by which the number must be multiplied, i.e., 4.047E+03 = 4.047 x 103.
*Thermochemical
GEK 95149C International Conversion Tables
Category To convert from To Multiply by +

oz mass (av) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kilogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.835 E–02
MASS lb-mass (av) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kilogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.536 E–01
ton (2000 lbm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kilogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.072 E+02
lbm/ft3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kilogram/meter3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.602 E+01
lbm/in 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kilogram/meter3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.768 E+04
MASS/VOLUME
(Includes Density) oz-mass (av)/in3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kilogram/meter3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.730 E+03
lb-mass (av)/gal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kilogram/meter3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.198 E+02
g/cm3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kilogram/meter3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.000 E+03
Btu*/sec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . watt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.054 E+03
Btu*/min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . watt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.757 E+01
Btu*/hr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . watt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.929 E–01
Cal*/sec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . watt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.184 E+00
POWER Cal*/min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . watt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.973 E–02
ft⋅lb force/hr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . watt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.766 E–04
ft⋅lb force/min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . watt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.260 E–02
ft⋅lb force/sec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . watt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.356 E+00
hp (elec) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . watt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.460 E+02
atm (760 Torr) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pascal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.013 E+05
bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pascal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.000 E+05
dyne/cm2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pascal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.000 E–01
gram (force)/cm2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pascal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.807 E+01
PRESSURE in of Hg (60 F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pascal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.377 E+03
(Force/Area) in of water (60 F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pascal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.488 E+02
lb-force/ft2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pascal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.788 E+01
lbf/ft2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kg/m2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.882 E+00
lbf/in2 (psi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pascal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.895 E+03
lbf/in2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kg/cm2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.037 E–02
Torr (mm Hg, 0 C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pascal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.333 E+02
degree Celsius (°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . degree Kelvin (K) . . . . . . . . . . . . TK = tC + 273.15
TEMPERATURE degree Farenheit (°F) . . . . . . . . . . . degree Celsius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tC = (tF - 32)/1.8
degree Celsius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . degree Farenheit . . . . . . . . . . . . tF = (tC ⋅ 1.8)+32
ft/hr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . meter/sec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.467 E–05
VELOCITY ft/min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . meter/sec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.080 E–03
(Includes Speed) ft/sec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . meter/sec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.048 E–01
in/sec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . meter/sec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.540 E–02
ft2/sec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . meter2/sec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.290 E–02
VISCOSITY lbm/ft sec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pascal–sec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.488 E+00
lbf sec/ft2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pascal–sec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.788 E+01
ft3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . meter3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.832 E–02
VOLUME gallon (US) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . meter3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.785 E–03
inch 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . meter3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.639 E–05
(Includes Capacity)
liter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . meter3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.000 E–03
oz (US fluid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . meter3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.957 E–05
ft3/min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . meter3/sec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.719 E–04
VOLUME/TIME ft3/sec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . meter3/sec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.832 E–02
(Includes Flow) in3/min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . meter3/sec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.731 E–07
gal/min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . meter3/sec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.309 E–05
+E Indicates the power of 10 by which the number must be multiplied, i.e., 4.047E+03 = 4.047 x 103.
*Thermochemical
GE Power Systems

One River Road, Schenectady, NY 12345
518 • 385 • 2211 TX: 145354

G
GEE EEnneerrggyy PPrroodduuccttss –– EEuurrooppee
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Rev : A

Page : 1/3
DESCRIPTION
LUBRICATING OIL SYSTEM
1 DEFINITION
The lube oil system is designed for insuring the following functions :
• To lubricate the shaft line including the accessory gear box

• To provide oil for the Hydraulic system
• To provide oil for the Trip oil system
• To provide oil for the torque converter
The lubricating oil system is a close loop where oil flow is built up from the oil tank located in
the lower part of the accessory base by :
• A shaft driven main pump

• An Alternative Current motor driven auxiliary pump for starting and shutdown sequences
• A Direct Current motor driven emergency pump for emergency shutdown
Lubricating oil conditioning includes :
• Oil tank warming up to keep acceptable oil viscosity while the unit is at standstill
• Oil flow cooling down to evacuate heat from the bearings
• Oil flow filtering
• Oil Header Pressure regulating at constant pressure
• Oil mist elimination
Bearings feeding and return lines are concentric lines, feeding line is installed in return line. The
lubricating oil flows back in the tank by gravity.
Part of the gas turbine bearing sealing air provided by the compressor returns with the oil in the
oil tank and is evacuated to the atmosphere through the oil mist eliminator. Oil mist elimination
consist of two redundant assembly.
2 COMPONENT FUNCTION
23QA-1 Prevents motor from internal condensation while not running.
23QT-1 Warms up the lube oil.
23QV-1 Prevents motor from internal condensation while not running.
23QV-2 Prevents motor from internal condensation while not running.
63QA-2 Detects the low lube oil pressure.
63QQ-1 Detects the clogging of lube oil filter.
63QQ-8 Detects the clogging of the filter.
All right reserved Copyright – Droits de reproduction réservés

OMMD_0416_9E_E0601_EN Revision : A Date : 01/2007
G

Page : 2/3
DESCRIPTION
63QQ-10 Detects low performance of oil mist eliminator.
63QT-2A Detects the low lube oil pressure.
88QA-1 Drives the auxiliary lube oil pump .
88QE-1 Drives the emergency lube oil pump.
88QV-1 Drives the oil mist eliminator fan.
88QV-2 Drives the oil mist eliminator fan.
96QA-2 Measures the lube oil pressure.
96QL-1 Measures the lube oil level tank.
96QT-2B Measures the lube oil pressure.
96QV-1 Measures the air pressure in the lube oil tank.
LT-B1D-1 Measures the lube oil #1 bearing drain temperature.
LT-BT1D-1 Measures the lube oil #1 bearing drain temperature.
LT-G1D-1 Measures the lube oil #1 generator bearing drain temperature.
LT-G2D-1 Measures the lube oil #2 generator bearing drain temperature.
LT-OT-1A Measures the lube oil temperature in the tank.
LT-OT-2A Measures the lube oil temperature in the tank.
LT-TH-1A,1B Measures the lube oil header temperature.
VCK20-1 Prohibits air recirculation.
VCK20-2 Allows maintenance activity while GT running.
VCK20-3 Prohibits air recirculation.

G

Page : 3/3
DESCRIPTION
VCK20-13 Regulates the oil tank vacuum pressure.
VPR2-1 Regulates the lube oil header pressure.
VR1 Protects the lube oil system against overpressure.
3 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Lubricating oil heater :

When the heater is heating, starting manually or not, the auxiliary lube oil pump is running
automatically
Auxiliary and emergency pump test :

A test valve associated with a push button valve connected upstream the VPR2-1 regulating
valve allows testing sequence of both pumps while the gas turbine is running. When the test is
completed and the test valve closed, auxiliary pump stops automatically, the emergency pump
needs a stop order at the MCC panel to stop.
The auxiliary and emergency pump test must be demonstrated once a month.
Emergency oil pump – Loss of AC power :

The emergency lube oil pump starts automatically only during loss of AC power at the shaft line
run down. Run down may be resulting of normal or emergency shut down or loss of turning
gear sequence. If loss of AC power remains after complete shaft stop, the emergency oil pump
runs three minutes every fifteen minutes to cool down the bearings until AC power comes back.
Refer to Special sequences.
Oil sampling :
Two valves connected both sides of the filter allows filtered oil and not filtered oil sampling. Oil
characteristics must be checked once every three months.
Oil flowing :
Sight glasses are fitted at filter vent, cooler vent, bearing return lines. They allow the operator to
check oil flowing, especially after manual operation related to those components.
Oil characteristics :
Lubricating oil characteristics must comply to GEK 32568.

G
E
O
ffi
DT-1C
ci
al
G
E
O
ffi
ci
al
G

Page : 1/2
DESCRIPTION
HYDRAULIC SUPPLY SYSTEM
1 DEFINITION
The hydraulic supply system is designed to provide high pressure oil at constant pressure to
control :
• The gas fuel flow and gas fuel pressure regulating valves
• The liquid fuel bypass regulating valve and stop valve
• The compressor inlet guide vanes
The hydraulic supply system is a closed loop where the oil pressure is built up from lubricating
oil header by :
• A shaft driven main pump.

• An electrical motor driven auxiliary pump for starting and shut down sequences
Hydraulic oil supply conditioning includes :
• Automatic purging
• Dual filtering
• Accumulator
Hydraulic oil flows back to the lubricating oil tank by gravity.
23HQ-1 Prevents motor from internal condensation while not running.
63HF-1 Detects the clogging of the filter.
63HQ-1 Detects the low hydraulic oil pressure.
88HQ-1 Drives the hydraulic supply oil pump.
AH1-1 Absorbs and compensates the pressure variation.
FH2-1 Filters the hydraulic supply oil.
PH1 Provides main hydraulic supply.
PH2 Provides auxiliary hydraulic supply.
VAB1 Purge automatically the main hydraulic pump circuit.

G

Page : 2/2
DESCRIPTION
VAB2 Purge automatically the auxiliary hydraulic pump circuit.
VCK3-1 Prohibits the return of the main pump oil flow.
VCK3-2 Prohibits the return of the auxiliary pump oil flow.
VM4 Allows manual filter transfer.
VPR3-1 Regulates the HP pump oil pressure.
VR21 Protects system against overpressure.
VR22 Adjusts the pump outlet pressure.
Auxiliary pump safety valve :

The safety valve of the auxiliary pump regulates the hydraulic pressure during start up and shut
down sequence. It is normal to find an oil flow at the outlet of this safety valve.

al
ci
ffi
O
E
G
DT-1C
DT-1C
G

Page : 1/1
DESCRIPTION
INLET GUIDE VANES SYSTEM
1 DEFINITION
The inlet guide vanes system is designed to adjust the compressor airflow according to
compressor and combustion needs.
The compressor inlet guide vanes system is actuated with hydraulic supply. The oil returns to the
lubricating oil tank by gravity.
20TV-1 Allows oil supply feeding of IGV.
90TV-1 Controls the IGV position.
96TV-1 Measures the IGV angle.
96TV-2 Measures the IGV angle.
HM3-1 Represents the IGV assembly.
VH3-1A Controls the operation of IGV .
VH3-1B Controls the operation of IGV .
None.

G
E
O
ffi
DT-1C
ci
al
G
E
O
ffi
ci
al

G

Page : 1/2
DESCRIPTION
COOLING & SEALING AIR SYSTEM
1 DEFINITION
The cooling & sealing air system is designed for insuring the following functions :
• To cool down the turbine exhaust frame and turbine casing

• To cool down the turbine stage nozzle
• To provide gas turbine bearing’s sealing air
• To protect the compressor during starting and shut down sequences
• To measure the compressor discharge pressure
• To provide instrument air or air supply for other systems
• To cool down the third bearing vibration sensors
• To purge gas fuel or liquid fuel or water injection lines when they are not used
The cooling & sealing air system is an open loop where :
• The cooling air for the turbine exhaust frame and for the turbine casing is provided by two
electrically driven blowers. Cooling air is then evacuated through the # 3 bearing tunnel for
the exhaust frame cooling and inside the turbine enclosure for the cooling of turbine casing.
Each blower delivers 50% of the requested cooling flow.
• The gas turbine bearing sealing air from the compressor flows back in the oil tank and is
evacuated through the oil mist eliminator vent.
20CB-1 Controls the bleed valves.
23TK-1 Prevents motor from internal condensation while not running.
23TK-2 Prevents motor from internal condensation while not running.
33CB-1 Indicates the valve open position.
63TK-1 Detects the blower outlet pressure.
63TK-2 Detects the blower outlet pressure.
88TK-1 Drives the fan.
88TK-2 Drives the fan.

G

Page : 2/2
DESCRIPTION
96CD-1A Measures the compressor discharge pressure.
96CD-1B Measures the compressor discharge pressure.
96CD-1C Measures the compressor discharge pressure.
VA2-1 Connects the compressor concerned stage at atmospheric pressure.
VCK7-1 Prohibits the running blower air flow to return in the stand by blower.
VCK7-2 Prohibits the running blower air flow to return in the stand by blower.
Compressor bleed valves :

The four compressor bleed valves remain open during start up and shut down sequences to
protect the compressor from surging.
A position fault, indicated by the Speedtronic®, must be analyzed and rectified before the next
starting sequence.
Turbine exhaust frame cooling :

Cooling down is achieved by two blowers, each one providing 50% of air flow. If one blower
fails, the unit is able to run with a load limited by the gas turbine third bearing tunnel
temperature.

G
E
O
ffi
DT-1C
ci
al
G
E
O
ffi
ci
al
G

Page : 1/2
DESCRIPTION
ATOMIZING AIR SYSTEM
1 DEFINITION
Atomization is the process whereby a volume of liquid is converted into a multiplicity of very
small droplet by air stream. The atomizing air system is designed for insuring the following
functions :
• To atomize the liquid fuel

• To purge the liquid fuel lines when the gas turbine burns gas fuel
The atomizing air system is an open loop where the air from the axial compressor is cooled
down and then pressurized by the shaft driven main compressor. An electrical motor driven
booster built up the atomizing air pressure during starting sequence.
The atomizing air system includes a piloted bypass valve to adapt atomizing air pressure and
flow according to liquid or gas fuel burning conditions.
20AA-1 Controls the VA18 valve.
20AB-1 Controls the VA22 valve.
23AB-1 Prevents motor from internal condensation while not running.
88AB-1 Drives the AA booster.
96AD-1 Measures the AA compressor differential pressure.
AAT-1A Measures the inlet air temperature of main atomizing air compressor CA1.
AAT-2A Measures the inlet air temperature of main atomizing air compressor CA1.
CA1 Provides atomizing air.
CA2 Provides atomizing air during starting sequence.
FA4-1 Filters the control air.
HX1-1 Cools down the atomizing air.
VA18-1 Lowers the main compressor pressure ratio.
VA22-1 Cuts off the booster while the unit is at full speed.
VPR68-1 Regulates the air pressure.

G

Page : 2/2
DESCRIPTION
Permanent purging :
Permanent atomizing air purging is provided through small orifices and silencers at compressor
upstream.
Air ejector :
An air ejector installed on the top of the accessory gear box receives air flow from the
atomizing air system to create a gear box vacuum pressure.
Compressor washing :
Manual valves are provided to isolate atomizing air lines during compressor Off line washing
sequence.

G
E
O
ffi
DT-1C
ci
al
G

Page : 1/2
DESCRIPTION
FUEL PURGE SYSTEM
1 DEFINITION
The fuel purge system is designed to purge :
• The liquid fuel lines when the unit is running with gas fuel
• The gas fuel lines when the unit is running with liquid fuel
The fuel purge system is an open loop where :
• Purging air flow for liquid fuel lines is provided by atomizing air system through a three ways
control valve
• Purging air flow for gas line is provided from the axial compressor through two purging
valves installed in serial to guaranty gas tightness
• Control air is provided by atomizing air and axial compressor
20PG-1 Controls the VA13-1 valve.
20PG-2 Controls the VA13-2 valve.
20PL-1 Controls the VA19-1 valve.
20VG-2 Vents the VA13 inter-valve space.
33PG-1 Indicates Valve VA13-1 Close Position.
33PG-2 Indicates Valve VA13-1 open Position.
33PG-3 Indicates Valve VA13-2 closed Position.
33PG-4 Indicates Valve VA13-2 open Position.
63PG-1 Detects the pressure of VA13-1 and VA13-2 inter-valves cavity.
63PL-21 Detects the low nozzle air purge pressure.
FA3-1 Filters the purge air.
VA13-1 Allows gas system purging.
VA13-2 Allows gas system purging.
VA19-1 Allows liquid fuel system purging.
VA36-1 Allows slow opening time and fast closing time for VA13-1 valve.

G

Page : 2/2
DESCRIPTION
VA36-2 Allows slow opening time and fast closing time for VA13-2 valve.
VCK2-1T14 Prohibits liquid fuel to return in purge line.
Telltale leak-off :
A telltale leak-off allows the operator the check liquid fuel leaks when the gas turbine is
operating with liquid fuel. Liquid fuel leaks at this level represents a VCK2 defect and must be
investigated and corrected quickly.
Gas fuel purge :

When the gas turbine is operating with gas fuel the two purge valves are closed and the
solenoid valve in between the two gas purge valves is open. A pressure switch detects any built
up pressure due to a tightness seal defect. In this event, corrective action must be undertaken
quickly.

G
E
O
ffi
DT-1C
ci
al

G

Page : 1/2
DESCRIPTION
GAS FUEL SYSTEM
1 DEFINITION
The gas fuel system providing gas fuel for the combustion chambers is designed for insuring the
following functions :
• To fire, warm up and accelerate the unit up to nominal speed

• To power the unit up to base load
• To shut down and trip the unit
• To measure the gas flow
The gas fuel system is an open loop including :
• A speed/stop ratio valve to adjust the gas pressure versus the gas turbine speed and to stop
the unit
• A control valve to adjust the gas flow
• Temporary filters for first commissioning and permanent filters
• Piloted inter-valves venting system
• A gas flow meter
• Hydraulic accumulator
20FGC-1 Controls the gas valve.
20FGS-1 Controls the operation of VSR valve.
20VG-1 Vents the inter-valve space.
33VG-11 Indicates the vent valve closed position.
63FG-1 Detects a low gas supply pressure.
63FG-2 Detects a low gas supply pressure.
65GC Controls the valve position.
90SR-1 Controls the valve position.
96FG-1 Measures the gas inlet pressure.
96FG-2A Measures the inter-valve gas pressure.
96FG-2B Measures the inter-valve gas pressure.
96FG-2C Measures the inter-valve gas pressure.

G

Page : 2/2
DESCRIPTION
96GC-1,2 Measures the valve stroke.
96SR-1,2 Measures the valve stroke.
96VM-1 Measures the gas flow.
AH1-3 Absorbs and compensates the pressure variation.
MG1 Represents the gas nozzles.
VGC-1 Regulates the gas flow.
VH5-1 Controls the operation of VSR valve.
VH5-2 Controls the operation of VGC valve.
VM-1 Measures the gas fuel mass flow upstream VSR.
VSR-1 Adjusts the gas pressure and cuts off the gas flow for shut down sequence.
Gas :
The gas system as well as the control’s parameters are calculated according to the gas
composition included in the Control Specification. Gas calorific value, gas density and gas
temperature at the gas turbine inlet piping are corresponding to a Wobbe index.
Wobbe index must remain within ± 5% of contractual Wobbe index to guaranty reliable
operation of the gas turbine.

G
E
O
ffi
DT-1C
ci
al
G
E
O
ffi
ci
al
G
E
O
ffi
ci
al
G
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Rev : B

Page : 1/3
DESCRIPTION
LIQUID FUEL SYSTEM
1 DEFINITION
The liquid fuel system providing liquid fuel for the combustion chambers is designed for insuring
the following functions :
• Fire, warm up and accelerate the unit up to nominal speed

• Power the unit up to base load
• Shut down and trip the unit
The liquid fuel system is an open loop including :
• A safety valve to stop the fuel flow

• A shaft driven main fuel pump
• A control valve to adjust the fuel flow by bypassing the main fuel pump
• An electrical clutch to drive the main fuel pump
• High pressure filters
• A flow divider to distribute equal flow in each combustion chamber
• Purge valves to drain with distillate the remaining heavy fuel after a gas turbine trip
• Turbine casing and exhaust casing drain valves to drain the unburned liquid fuel at false
starts
Due to liquid fuel characteristics, the liquid fuel pump is lubricated by a separate system from
the gas turbine lubricating oil, including :
• A lubricating oil tank

• One AC driven lubricating oil pump
• One DC driven lubricating pump
• One cooler
• Dual filters
20CF-1 Controls the fuel pump clutch.
20FL-1 Controls the liquid fuel stop valve.
20PF-100 Controls the multi-port valve VP1/VP2.
33FL-1 Indicates the closed position of the liquid fuel stop valve.
33PF-1 Indicates the valve closed position.
33PF-2 Indicates the valve closed position.
63LF-3 Detects the clogging of the filter.

OMMD_0424_9E_E0601_EN Revision : B Date : 02/2007
G

Page : 2/3
DESCRIPTION
65FP Controls the bypass valve position.
77FD-1 Measures FD1-1 speed.
88FM Starts the flow divider.
96FL-2A Measures liquid fuel module inlet pressure.
96FL-2B Measures liquid fuel module inlet pressure.
96FP-1 Measures the bypass control valve position.
96FP-2 Measures the bypass control valve position.
FD1-1 Splits the liquid fuel into equal flow for each combustion chamber.
FF2-1 Filters the liquid fuel flow at flow divider upstream .
FF2-2 Filters the liquid fuel flow at flow divider upstream .
FH3 Filters the hydraulic supply oil.
PF1 Provides the liquid fuel pressure.
VA17-1 Drains out the liquids.
VC3 Regulates the liquid fuel flow.

Prohibits the air or liquid fuel flow to return in the line and prohibits normal
VCK1-1T14
liquid fuel flow to enter the combustion chamber at low pressure.
VP-1 Allows drainage of liquid fuel flow.
VP-2 Allows drainage of liquid fuel flow.
VR27 Protects system against overpressure.
VR4 Protects the fuel pump against overpressure.
VS1 Cuts off the liquid fuel flow.

G

Page : 3/3
DESCRIPTION
Nozzle pressure :
A manual selector is provided to measure individual nozzle pressure. The maximum allowed
pressure spread between the nozzles cannot exceed 10 bars. High spread configuration must
be analyzed and rectified urgently.
Purge valve :
The gas turbine cannot be fired with heavy fuel. A set of purge valves is installed to drain the
remaining heavy fuel after a gas turbine trip on load with heavy fuel. The purge sequence is
initiated automatically straight away after a trip and is completed when the fuel line contains
100% of distillate. A sight glass allows visual flow check.

G
E
O
ffi
DT-1C
ci
al
G
E
O
ffi
ci
al
Servovalve Overview
Moog CONTROLS COILS
TORQUE MOTOR
TOP POLE PIECE
PERMANENT
MAGNET
ARMATURE
FLAPPER
MOTOR FLEXURE SLEEVE

SHIM BOTTOM POLE PIECE
FILTER NOZZLE
ORIFICE, INLET
FEEDBACK
SPRING
SPOOL
STOP
BUSHING
(SLEEVE)
SPOOL
(SLIDE)
ORIFICE,
RETURN
END CAP
1350 PSI
DRAIN
BODY
(HOUSING)
TO < RST > LVDT
SUPPLY PRESSURE CONTROL PORT PRESSURES
FILTERED 1st STAGE SUPPLY PRESSURE RETURN PRESSURE
MOOG2 9/97 1st STAGE CONTROL PRESSURE INTERNAL DRAIN PRESSURE

G

Page : 1/3
DESCRIPTION
ADDITIVE INJECTION SKID
1 DEFINITION
The vanadium inhibitor injection system is designed to inject additive product in the liquid fuel
system.
The vanadium inhibitor injection system includes :
• A tank forwarding pump

• A vanadium inhibitor main tank
• A small capacity storage buffer tank
• A strainer
• A set of two electrically driven dosing pumps, rated 100% each
• A flow meter
• A manual valve to measure the vanadium inhibitor flow
The cycle of the vanadium inhibitor is as follow :
• Delivered at site in drums,

• Transferred from drums to the main tank manually using the forwarding pump,
• Circulating by gravity from main tank to buffer tank
• Feeding the dosing pump from buffer tank
• Injected in the gas turbine liquid fuel system at filtering skid level
20IA-11 Controls the VA99-12 valve.
63AF-11 Detects the pressure in the circuit.
71FA-11 Detects super lubricant low level.
71FA-12 Detects super lubricant level.
88FA-10 Drives the unloading pump.
88FA-11 Drives the dosing pump.
88FA-12 Drives the dosing pump.
FF11-1 Filters the super lubricant.
FF11-2 Filters the super lubricant.
PFA-10 Allows tank feeding.

G

Page : 2/3
DESCRIPTION
PFA-11 Feeds the fuel system with the additive product.
PFA-12 Feeds the fuel system with the additive product.
PSV-11 Protects the tank against overpressure.
VA99-11 Is used with VA99-13 valve to manually adjust the flow of the pump.
VA99-12 Is used to fill up the buffer tank.
VA99-13 Is used with VA99-11 valve to manually adjust the flow of the pump.
VPR30-11 Regulates the control air pressure.
VR60-11 Protects system against overpressure.
VR60-12 Protects system against overpressure.
Vanadium inhibitor flow :

Vanadium inhibitor requested flow depends of the characteristics of the liquid fuel and the
inhibitor used. The general formula is
Q additive (Liter/h) = [ ρadditive (kg/L) × Q fuel (kg/h) × (3V(PPM)+Ni+Zn/2)]

[106 × Mgadditive Concentration]
ρadditive is the density of the vanadium inhibitor in kg/liter

Q fuel is the nominal liquid fuel flow of the gas turbine in kg/hour
V is the vanadium content in the liquid fuel in ppm
Ni is the Nickel content in the liquid fuel in ppm
Zn is the Zinc content in the liquid fuel in ppm
Vanadium inhibitor flow manual measurement :

A manual valve is provided to proceed to flow measurement. Once this valve is depressed, the
main and the buffer tanks are isolated and the dosing pump feeds up from the vertical piping
installed in between the two tanks. A pressure gage scaled in meter show the consummated
volume. Using a stopwatch during the test allows the operator to calculate the flow. For this
11.3 mm diameter vertical piping.
The formula is :
Flow in liter/hour = (3.601 x ∆P) / t

∆P is the level difference in the vertical pipe given by the pressure gage scaled in meter
t is the time corresponding to ∆P
Note : the duration of this test cannot be higher than 15 sec, due to the small capacity of the
vertical piping

G

Page : 3/3
DESCRIPTION
The additive product flow can be adjusted by acting on the vernier (the vernier allowing the
adjustment of the dosing pump flow must be on the hold% position).
Vanadium inhibitor characteristics:

GE recommend to use the following product :
• BAKER PETROLITE KI200 or KI110
• TURBOTECT T134 or T131
Other product must comply with GEK 28150 and be approved by GE.

G
E
O
ffi
DT-1C
ci
al

G

Page : 1/1
DESCRIPTION
COOLING WATER SYSTEM
1 DEFINITION
The cooling water system is designed for insuring cooling down of :
• The lubricating oil

• The atomizing air system
• The flame detectors
• The turbine supports
• The liquid fuel shaft driven pump
The above equipment are part of the installation’s cooling water closed loop.
VTR1 Prohibits water circulation in the cooler for low oil temperature.
VTR2-1 Prohibits water circulation in the cooler for low air temperature.
WT-TL-1 Measures the water temperature of the Turbine supports.
WT-TL-2 Measures the water temperature of the Turbine supports.
Cooling water characteristics :

Cooling water characteristics must comply to GEI 41004H
Lubricating oil temperature :

During gas turbine operation the lubricating oil temperature is between 49°C and 70°C (120°F –
158°F) according to the water flow through the heat exchanger and the site ambient air
temperature.

G
E
O
ffi
DT-1C
ci
al
G
E
O
ffi
ci
al
G

Page : 1/1
DESCRIPTION
TURBINE AND/OR COMPRESSOR WASHING SYSTEM
1 DEFINITION
The compressor washing system is designed for insuring the following functions :
• To clean the compressor at stand still (Off line)

• To clean the compressor at nominal speed (On line)
A module not included in this chapter provides the clean washing water flow.
20TW-1 Controls the water flow for compressor washing.
20TW-3 Controls the water flow for compressor washing.
43TW-1/PB Controls the 20TW-1 valve.
71FF-4 Detects flange leakage.
On line water wash :

During On line water wash with the shaft line at nominal speed the water is evacuated with gas
turbine exhaust gas.
Off line water wash :

Off line water wash is carried out when the unit is cold and needs manual configuration for
water wash valves. Please refer to the maintenance manual.
Water characteristics :
The washing water must comply to GEI 41042

G
E
O
ffi
DT-1C
ci
al
G
E
O
ffi
ci
al
GEK 110220b
Revised March 2004
GE Energy
Gas Turbine Compressor Water Wash System
These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment nor to provide for
every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should
further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for
the purchaser's purposes the matter should be referred to the GE Company.
GEK 110220b Gas Turbine Compressor Water Wash System
I. GENERAL
Gas turbines can experience a loss of performance during operation as result of deposits of contaminants
on internal components. This loss is indicated by a decrease in power output and an increase in heat rate.
The deposits of atmospheric contaminants on compressor parts occurs with the ingestion of air.
The ingested air may contain dirt, dust, insects, and hydrocarbon fumes. A large portion of these can be
removed before they get to the compressor by inlet air filtration. The dry contaminants that pass through the
filters as well as wet contaminants, such as hydrocarbon fumes, have to be removed from the compressor
by washing with a water-detergent solution followed by a water rinse.
A. On-Base Supplied Equipment
The on-base turbine equipment supplied with this compressor wash system consists of piping from
the purchaser's connection on the base, air operated water injection valve(s), and the appropriate spray
manifold(s). Drains from the inlet plenum, combustion area, exhaust frame, and the exhaust plenum
are also provided.
The new false drain system includes a pneumatically operated FSD valves with limit switches for po-
sition detection. These new valves shall use customer supplied instrument air and therefore require
solenoid activation. The system also utilizes an RTD (Resistive Thermal Device) for measuring tem-
peratures inside the FSD piping arrangement. This same piping serves dual functions of removal of
fuel oil during false starts and/or removal of water during off-line water washes.
The schematic for this on-base water wash equipment is located in the Reference Drawing sections of
this manual.
B. Off-Base Equipment
The off-base portion of the water wash system, known as the water wash skid, contains both a water
tank and a detergent tank. The water tank is equipped with temperature sensors and electric heaters
to maintain proper water temperatures. The skid is equipped with a centrifugal water pump motor
(88TW-1) and a venturi used with the water pump to mix detergent solution. Also included on the skid
are the various control panels to initiate wash and to manually start/stop the appropriate devices. All
equipment is made of corrosion resistant material. The schematic for the water wash skid is included
in the Reference Drawings section of this manual.
All devices are set to give proper temperature, pressure, and flow. The settings for these devices can
be found in the device summary for the corresponding system.
C. Functional Description
During the washing operation, water or wash solution is delivered through customer piping to the gas
turbine in the proper mix ratio. The wash water solution is delivered to the turbine unit at the proper
pressure, temperature, and flow rate to wash the gas turbine compressor. Refer to the system schematic
in the Reference Drawing section for proper pressure(s), temperature(s), and flow rate(s) for this gas
turbine.
1. Water used for washing turbine parts should be reasonably clean so that it does not cause fouling
or corrosion in itself. Distilled or deionized water is recommended. Water quality requirements
are listed in Table 1 of GEK-107122 (Latest Revision). Oily or varnished oil deposits on internal
2
Gas Turbine Compressor Water Wash System GEK 110220b
gas turbine parts require that a detergent solution be used during the washing operation. The
detergent shall meet the requirements of GEK-107122 (Latest Revision), Appendix 1.
2. Compressor Washing Frequency
The frequency of compressor washing depends upon the severity and type of atmospheric con-
tamination that fouls the compressor and reduces performance. The recommended method for
establishing the frequency is to monitor gas turbine performance, comparing the routine perfor-
mance with the baseline performance to observe the performance trends.
If the performance has fallen significantly, and compressor fouling is suspected, it must be verified
by visual inspection. This visual inspection should include the compressor inlet, bellmouth, inlet
guide vanes and the first and, possibly, the second stage of the compressor blades.
NOTE
Inspection should be made for the source of the oily deposits. If possible, correc-
tive action should be taken.
D. Washing System Operation
1. General
a. Off-line Water Wash
Off-line water washing should be scheduled during a normal shutdown, if possible. This will
allow enough time for the internal machine temperature to drop to the required levels for the
washing. The time required to cool the machine can be shortened by maintaining the unit at
crank speed. During this cooling of the turbine, the wash water may be heated to the proper
level.
Refer to GEK-107122 (Latest Revision) for gas turbine compressor liquid washing recom-
mendations
b. On-line Water Wash
The period between off-line water washes can be extended via frequent on-line washing.
When the compressor is suspected of being heavily fouled, an off-line wash should be per-
formed.
The on-line compressor wash system allows an operator to water wash the turbine compres-
sor without having to shut down the turbine. The method of washing is similar in many ways
to the off-line system. Both systems use the same pump, 88TW-1, and piping to supply high
quality wash solution to the compressor. When the supply pipe reaches the vicinity of the
turbine base, it splits into two branches, one for the off-line system and one for the on-line
system. Each branch contains a stop valve, flow control orifice, manifold(s) and spray noz-
zles.
There are significant differences, though, between the two systems. GE recommends against
the use of detergents during on-line washing, while the use of detergents during off-line wash-
ing are encouraged. The on-line wash water requirements differ from that of off-line wash
3
solution and must meet the requirements of Table 1 of GEK-107122 (Latest Revision) for
on-line washing. Finally, the on-line system proceeds automatically after it is manually initi-
ated; whereas, the off-line system requires operator intervention before and after the wash.
NOTE
When using a detergent solution for on-line washing, it is recommended that the
wash be followed by enough rinse water to remove the detergent residue from the
wash nozzles at the spray manifold. This will prevent the detergent solutions from
drying and clogging the nozzles.
2. Mandatory Precautions
Before water washing of the compressor begins, the turbine blading temperature must be low
enough so that the water does not cause thermal shock.
CAUTION
The differential temperature between the wash water and the interstage wheelspace
temperature must not be greater than 120°F (67°C) to prevent thermal shock to the
hot gas parts. The maximum wheelspace temperature as per TIL 1196–1 must be
no greater than 150°F (65.5°C) as measured by the digital thermocouple readout
system on the turbine control panel.
To reduce this difference, the wash water may be heated and the turbine kept on crank until the
wheelspace temperatures drop to an acceptable level. The wheelspace temperatures are read in
the control room.
CAUTION
If, during operation, there has been an increase in exhaust temperature spread
above the normal 15°F to 30°F (8.3°C to 16.6°C), the thermocouples in the ex-
haust plenum should be examined. If they are coated with ash, the ash should be
removed.
Radiation shields should also be checked. If they are not radially oriented relative to the turbine,
they should be repositioned per the appropriate drawing. If the thermocouples are coated with
ash, or if the radiation shields are not properly oriented, a correct temperature reading will not be
obtained.
If neither of the above conditions exists and there is no other explanation for the temperature
spread, consult the General Electric Service Engineering representative.
4
Gas Turbine Compressor Water Wash System GEK 110220b
***WARNING***
THE WATER WASH OPERATION INVOLVES WATER UNDER

HIGH-PRESSURE. CAUTION MUST BE EXERCISED TO EN-
SURE THE PROPER POSITIONING OF ALL VALVES DURING
THIS OPERATION. SINCE THE WATER MAY ALSO BE HOT,
NECESSARY PRECAUTIONS SHOULD BE TAKEN IN HAN-
DLING VALVES, PIPES, AND POTENTIALLY HOT SURFACES.
NOTE
Before water washing the compressor, inspect the inlet plenum and gas turbine
bellmouth for large accumulations of atmospheric contaminants that could be
washed into the compressor. The deposits can be removed by washing with a
garden hose.
II. FALSE START DRAIN SYSTEM
The false start drain system shall be designed in accordance with the latest version of GEK 110885 and
GEK 110886. After a failure to fire on liquid fuel, the liquid fuel must be completely drained from the
system. TIL 1424-1R2 shall be followed after a failure to fire on liquid fuel. The false start drain valves are
instrument air operated with a open and closed limit switch. The liquid fuel from the combustion cans will
drain from a common header for the lower combustion cans through the false start drain valve (VA17-1A).
The position of this valve is controlled by a solenoid valve (20TFD-1). The limit switches (33TFD-1 and
33TFD-2) are used to verify valve position and take action if required.
5
GE Energy
www.gepower.com
6
GEK 28166A
Revised January 1997
GE Power Systems
Gas Turbine
Field Performance Testing Procedure
GEK 28166A Field Performance Testing Procedure
TABLE OF CONTENTS
I. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
II. PURPOSE OF TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
III. TEST PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

A. Fuel Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
IV. EVALUATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
V. CONCLUSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
GAS TURBINE PERFORMANCE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
FIGURE
Figure 1. Gas Flow Measurement Instrumentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2
Field Performance Testing Procedure GEK 28166A
I. GENERAL
This instruction specifies the methods and equipment to be used during field performance tests of heavy-duty
gas turbines using station instrumentation. It applies only to turbine generator power plants.
II. PURPOSE OF TEST
The primary purpose of the test shall be the measurement of turbine or generator output and fuel heat con-
sumption at one or more load conditions.
Sufficient supporting data shall be recorded to enable the “as tested” performance to be corrected to the stan-
dard conditions so that an accurate comparison may be made between tested and base line machine capability
and heat rate at specified conditions.
The attached data sheets should be used to record the test data. They are designed to provide the information
required to evaluate the aero-thermodynamic performance of the gas turbine only. Any other operating data
should be taken separately to prevent interference with the timing required for the performance test.
III. TEST PROCEDURE
These testing procedures are patterned after those specified and described by the American Society of Me-
chanical Engineers Power Test Code PTC-22-1966, “Gas Turbine Power Plants,” with the following addi-
tions and/or exceptions. Figures in parentheses refer to the relevant paragraph in the code. Past experience
has shown that a gas turbine operator and four (4) test assistants are required for testing. One day of setup
time and one day of testing are usually needed per machine.
A test point will consist of four sets of instrument readings taken at 10-minute intervals over a 30-minute
time span after steady-state conditions have been established (3.12).
The machine will be considered to be in a steady-state condition when turbine wheelspace temperatures do
not change more than 5°F (2.77°C) in 15 minutes prior to the test point.
Past experience has shown that test points for gas turbines that cover longer than a half-hour time span are
apt to experience changes in inlet air temperatures, which change the operating characteristics of the power
plant and make the test less accurate.
Speed measurements may not be required when a single-shaft generator drive unit is connected into a large
power system. When the power system is small or frequency variations of more than 0.5% occur, then turbine
speed (or frequency) must be measured by an electronic tachometer or equivalent.
Average generator output must be measured by a polyphase watt-hour meter (4.24).
Load is to be calculated by carefully timing, with stopwatch or equivalent, a fixed number of disc revolutions
throughout the test point, averaging those times and calculating the resulting average power output by apply-
ing the appropriate factor (pri. Kh) stamped on the face of the meter.
Power Ouput + n revolutions ) Pri K h ) (3, 600/1, 000)

Sec. for n rev.
where;
3
Pri K h + PTR ) CTR ) meter K
PTR + Potential Instrument Transformer Ratio
CTR + Current Instrument Transformer Ratio
Ideally, the total number of disc revolutions should be counted for the entire test point. This is, however, a
tedious task and seldom worthwhile. Instead, a count of 20 revolutions should be made continuously
throughout the point with the only interruption being the recording of the elapsed time for each group of
revolutions.
Gas turbine exhaust temperature will be measured by the unit control thermocouples mounted in the exhaust
plenum (4.56).
It is essential that the temperature-indicating system be adjusted and calibrated in place with a known milli-
volt source prior to the test so that it reports reliable data. If more than 25% of the control thermocouples
are inoperative, the performance test should not be conducted.
When liquid-in-glass manometers are used, bores of smaller than 5/16 inch (0.079 cm) will be permitted
(4.59).
Barometric pressure at the gas turbine site shall be measured with a mercury or aneroid barometer. A mini-
mum reading accuracy of 0.01 inch (0.03 cm) Hg is required (4.65).
As stated in paragraph 5.33 of the code, inlet air relative humidity has negligible effects on power output and
heat consumption. It will therefore be ignored for performance evaluation.
A. Fuel Consumption
For units designed to burn more than one type of fuel, liquid fuel generally yields higher test accuracy
and repeatability and should therefore be preferred. If there is a choice of liquid fuels, lighter fuels yield
more accurate test results.
1. Liquid Fuel
Liquid fuel flow is to be measured by a positive displacement meter which has been calibrated. The
total fuel consumed during the exact 30-minute test as measured with a stopwatch must be recorded.
The fuel temperature at the meter must also be measured.
A sample of the fuel consumed during the test must be taken for laboratory measurement of higher
heating value (HHV) and specific gravity. The lower heating value (LHV) will be determined by
the method specified in paragraph 4.45 of PTC 22-1966.
If the fuel is drawn from a large storage tank, a single sample will suffice for several test points;
however, if variations in fuel characteristics are suspected, a fuel sample should be taken for each
test point. Fuel samples of one pint are sufficient for HHV and specific gravity measurement.
4
The heat consumption will be calculated using

Heat Consumption (Btu/hr) + gal/min ) 8.33 lb/gal (H 2O)
) Specific Gravity (Oil) at metering temp.
) Heating Value * Btu/lb ) 60 min/hr.
2. Gas Fuel
Gas fuel is to be measured with a flat-plate orifice installed in accordance with ASME or AGA stan-
dards. See Figure 1. The upstream pressure will be measured with a precision test gauge, the pres-
sure drop with a manometer, the gas temperature with a thermometer or thermocouple.
A gas sample must be taken from the fuel system during the test for laboratory measurement of high-
er heating value and specific gravity. A ratio (HHV/LHV) of 1.11 will be used to calculate the lower
heating value.
Calculation of gas flow will be done in accordance with ASME or AGA standards as described in
ASME PTC 19.5; 4-1959 or AGA Report #3.
Inlet air temperature will be measured with at least two thermometers or thermocouples installed
in the inlet plenum near the gas turbine compressor inlet. The compressor inlet air temperature must
be measured with an accuracy of ±1.0°F (.5°C) (4.55).
5 to 10 D
Gas
D d
Flow
Thermometer well
D. Pipe inside diameter
d. Orifice diameter
Pressure connections shown Indicate manometer type

as flange taps. List tap and fluid used for ∆ P
∆P measurement; mercury,
location on front of sheet.
Give dimensions if not water, or mercury with scale
flange taps. in water.
Figure 1. Gas Flow Measurement Instrumentation.

*Use HHV or LHV as specified by rating.
5
If waste heat recovery equipment is used, turbine exhaust static pressure at or near the gas turbine
flange must be measured using at least four-disc type static pressure probes.
When the tests are performed at “Base” and “Peak” mode, the gas turbine control system must be
adjusted to operate at the correct average gas turbine exhaust temperature for the test conditions,
as defined by the appropriate control curve.
IV. EVALUATION
Test results are based on the averaged data taken during the test. The averaged results are corrected to
the standard conditions using the appropriate correction curves for the installation. Performance as indi-
cated by determining the heat rate based on the test results is defined by:
Heat Consumption
Heat Rate +
Power Output
When decisions are required based on test results, one should recognize the tolerance due to measure-
ment uncertainties associated with each particular test result.
The tolerances around the test results are defined as twice the estimated standard deviation (2 Σ), com-
puted from the tolerances associated with each measured test parameter and the influence of that parame-
ter on the calculation of the corrected test results.
The resulting performance tolerances of a single unit station instrumentation test, when performed as
described in this document are
Power output: ± 3.01%
Heat rate (oil fuel): ± 2.09%
Heat rate (gas fuel): ± 2.32%
V. CONCLUSION
This procedure may be used to periodically measure unit performance in order to establish trends and
to determine the effectiveness of compressor cleaning. This data should be retained for historical refer-
ence.
6
GAS TURBINE PERFORMANCE DATA
CUSTOMER___________________________________________________
STATION______________________________________________________
Unit ID Date
Gas Turbine S/N Operating Mode
Generator S/N Data Page
Fired Hours Test Number
Fired Starts
Reading Number 1 2 3 4
Starting Time of Reading ______ ______ ______ ______
Ambient Condition
Compressor Inlet Temp. °F ______ ______ ______ ______
______ ______ ______ ______
______ ______ ______ ______
______ ______ ______ ______
______ ______ ______ ______
______ ______ ______ ______
Barometric Pressure
Inches of Mercury ______ ______ ______ ______
Compressor Discharge
Pressure PSIG
Unit Gauge ______ ______ ______ ______
Precision Gauge ______ ______ ______ ______
Fuel Measurement - Oil*
Fuel Meter Reading - Gal. ______ ______ ______ ______
Elapsed Time - Min. ______ ______ ______ ______
Fuel Temperature °F ______ ______ ______ ______
Fuel Meter Type & S/N______________________________________
Lube Oil
Turbine Header Temp. °F. ______ ______ ______ ______
Lube Oil Tank Temp. °F ______ ______ ______ ______
Recorded By ______________________________________
*For Gas Fuel use data under Fuel Consumption
7

CUSTOMER___________________________________________________
STATION______________________________________________________
Unit ID Date
Test Number
Wheelspace Temperatures °F
Comp. Disch. Left ______ ______ ______ ______
Comp. Disch. Right ______ ______ ______ ______
1st Stage Forward ______ ______ ______ ______
1st Stage Forward ______ ______ ______ ______
1st Stage Aft ______ ______ ______ ______
1st Stage Aft ______ ______ ______ ______
2nd Stage Forward ______ ______ ______ ______
2nd Stage Forward ______ ______ ______ ______
2nd Stage Aft ______ ______ ______ ______
2nd Stage Aft ______ ______ ______ ______
3rd Stage Aft ______ ______ ______ ______
3rd Stage Aft When ______ ______ ______ ______
3rd Stage Forward Applicable ______ ______ ______ ______
3rd Stage Forward ______ ______ ______ ______
Exhaust Temperatures - Control T/C °F
1. ______ ______ ______ ______
2. ______ ______ ______ ______
3. ______ ______ ______ ______
4. ______ ______ ______ ______
5. ______ ______ ______ ______
6. ______ ______ ______ ______
7. ______ ______ ______ ______
8. ______ ______ ______ ______
9. ______ ______ ______ ______
10. ______ ______ ______ ______
11. ______ ______ ______ ______
12. ______ ______ ______ ______
Exhaust Average
Electrical ______ ______ ______ ______
Calculated ______ ______ ______ ______
Recorded By ______________________________________
8
CUSTOMER___________________________________________________
STATION______________________________________________________
Unit ID Date
Test Number
Turbine Panel Board

Set Point ______ ______ ______ ______
VCE ______ ______ ______ ______
Generator Panel Board

Megawatts ______ ______ ______ ______
Record WHM Time on Pg. 10
WHM (sec/20 rev) ______ ______ ______ ______
Megavars ______ ______ ______ ______
Generator Voltage, KV
Phase 1-2 ______ ______ ______ ______
Phase 2-3 ______ ______ ______ ______
Phase 3-1 ______ ______ ______ ______
Generator Amperes, KA
Phase 1 ______ ______ ______ ______
Phase 2 ______ ______ ______ ______
Phase 3 ______ ______ ______ ______
Excitation Voltage ______ ______ ______ ______
Excitation Amperes ______ ______ ______ ______
Frequency, Hertz ______ ______ ______ ______
Recorded By ______________________________________
9
CUSTOMER___________________________________________________
STATION______________________________________________________
Unit ID Date
Test Number
Power Measurement (Cont’d)

WHM (Sec/20 Revs.) Begin Test
End Test
Repeatedly Time 20 Revolutions of Watt Hour Meter Disc

During Entire Test Period Pri Kh Factor
1) ______ 2) _______ 3) _______ 4) _______

5) _______ 6) _______ 7) _______ 8) _______
Auxiliary WHM (Sec/Rev.)

1) _______ 2) _______ 3) _______ 4) _______
Pri Kh Factor
Comment/Calculations
Recorded By ______________________________________
10
CUSTOMER___________________________________________________
STATION______________________________________________________
Unit ID Date
Generator S/N Test Number
Data Page
Fuel Gas Flow (Record data every two minutes)
Time Pressure ∆P Temp

__________ __________ __________ __________
__________ __________ __________ __________
__________ __________ __________ __________
__________ __________ __________ __________
__________ __________ __________ __________
__________ __________ __________ __________
__________ __________ __________ __________
__________ __________ __________ __________
__________ __________ __________ __________
__________ __________ __________ __________
__________ __________ __________ __________
__________ __________ __________ __________
__________ __________ __________ __________
__________ __________ __________ __________
__________ __________ __________ __________
Pipe Size Pressure Tap Location
Orifice Size Pressure Measured Upstream or

Downstream of Orifice
Fuel Heating Value
Specific Gravity
*See Figure 1, Gas Flow Measurement Instrumentation
Recorded By ______________________________________
11
GE Power Systems

One River Road, Schenectady, NY 12345
Iss. Date 11/77 518 • 385 • 2211 TX: 145354
Reformat 1/93
G

Page : 1/2
DESCRIPTION
WATER INJECTION SYSTEM
1 DEFINITION
The water injection system is designed to reduce the NOx level when the gas turbine is burning
liquid fuel.
The water injection system is an open loop where water flow is built up by an electrically driven
water pump. The system includes :
• Temporary and permanent filters

• A water flow regulating valve to adjust the water flow according to the fuel flow
• A flow meter
• A stop valve to cut off the water flow
• A pump cooler to allow pump cooling down
Injection water flow is injected in the combustion chambers and evacuated in the atmosphere
through the exhaust duct. The total water injection flow is distributed in the gas turbine through
two manifolds, one for gas turbine low load and one for additional flow for higher load and full
load.
Flow regulating valve and stop valve are piloted using instrument air.
20WN-1 Allows water injection in the combustion chambers.
20WN-2 Controls the VS2-2 valve.
23WN-1 Prevents motor from internal condensation while not running.
33WN-1 Indicates the valve open position.
33WN-2 Indicates the valve closed position.
33WN-3 Indicates the open position of the valve.
33WN-4 Indicates the closed position of the valve.
63WN-1 Detects low inlet pump pressure.
63WN-2 Detects low pump discharge pressure.
63WN-3 Detects low pump discharge pressure.
96WF-1 to 3 Measures the injection water flow.
88WN-1 Drives the water pump.

G

Page : 2/2
DESCRIPTION
90WN-1 Converts 4-20mA signal into a pneumatic signal for valve position setting.
FA8-2 Filters the control air.
FM1-1 Measures the injection water flow.
FW1-1 Filters the injection water flow.
FW1-2 Filters the injection water flow at the pump upstream.
FW1-3 Filters the injection water flow at the nozzle upstream.
PW1-1 Provides the injection water pressure.
VC4-1 Regulates the water flow.
VCK100 Prohibits water return in the flow.
VS2-2 Cuts off the injection water flow big flow line.
Water characteristics :
Water characteristics must comply with GEK 101944

G
E
O
ffi
DT-1C
ci
al
G
E
O
ffi
ci
al

G

Page : 1/4
DESCRIPTION
TURBINE CONTROL DEVICES SYSTEM
1 DEFINITION
Turbine and compressor control and protection sensors are grouped as a single system
including :
• Turbine speed sensors

• Ignition transformers, spark plugs and flame detectors
• Vibrations sensors
• Compressor temperature measurement
• Turbine cooling temperature measurement
• Gas turbine exhaust temperature measurement
• Turbine bearings oil and metal temperature measurement
28FD-10 Detects flame in the secondary zone of chamber combustion n°10.
30SG-1 Gathers the alarms.
39V-1A Measures vibrations on the hat of bearing n°1.
39V-1B Measures vibrations on the hat of bearing n°1.
39V-2A Measures vibrations on the flange of oil return piping of bearing n°2.
39V-3A Measures vibrations on the hat of bearing n°3.
39V-3B Measures vibrations on the hat of bearing n°3.
39VS-11 Measures the movement of the rotor in the plan X,Y of bearing n°1.

G

Page : 2/4
DESCRIPTION
77HT-1 Measures shaft line speed specific circuit of overspeed.
77NH-1 Measures the shaft line speed.
77RP-11 Detects the shaft position.
95SG-13 Provides high voltage for ignition to the spark plug.
95SG-14 Provides high voltage for ignition to the spark plug.
95SP-13 Realizes ignition of combustion.
95SP-14 Realizes ignition of combustion.
96VC-11 Measures the axial movement of the turbine rotor.
96VC-12 Measures the axial movement of the turbine rotor.
BT-J1-1A,1B Measures temperature of Bearing bushing n°1.
BT-TA1-2A,2B Measures temperature of pad n°2 of thrust bearing n °1.
BT-TI1-2A,2B Measures temperature of pad n°2 of cou nter thrust bearing n°1.
G

Page : 3/4
DESCRIPTION
CT-DA-1 Measures air temperature of the outlet of compressor.
CT-DA-2 Measures air temperature of the outlet of compressor.
CT-IF-1 Measures air temperature of the inlet of compressor.
CT-IF-2 Measures air temperature of the inlet of compressor.
TT-IB-1 Measures air temperature in exhaust tunnel.
TT-WS1A0-1 Measures wheel space temperature, external position after first wheel.
TT-WS1A0-2 Measures wheel space temperature, external position after first wheel.
TT-WS1FI-1 Measures wheel space temperature, internal position before first wheel.
TT-WS1FI-2 Measures wheel space temperature, internal position before first wheel.
TT-WS2A0-1 Measures wheel space temperature, external position after second wheel.
TT-WS2A0-2 Measures wheel space temperature, external position after second wheel.
TT-WS2F0-1 Measures wheel space temperature, external position before second wheel.
TT-WS2F0-2 Measures wheel space temperature, external position before second wheel.
TT-WS3A0-1 Measures wheel space temperature, external position after third wheel.
TT-WS3A0-2 Measures wheel space temperature, external position after third wheel.
TT-WS3F0-1 Measures wheel space temperature, external position before third wheel.
TT-WS3F0-2 Measures wheel space temperature, external position before third wheel.
TT-XD-1 to 24 Measures temperature of GT exhaust.
Gas turbine speed :

Magnetic pick up sensors measure the pulse given by the toothed wheel fitted at compressor
shaft front end. The frequency in Hz is equal to the speed in RPM due to the 60 tooth of the
wheel.
Vibration measurements :
Seismic sensors and proximity probes measure the shaft vibrations. The vibration map after
commissioning load tests represents the original vibration signature.

G

Page : 4/4
DESCRIPTION
Gas turbine cooling :

Gas turbine cooling is monitored by wheel space thermocouples. Two thermocouples situated
at the same wheel space level should measure similar temperature. A temperature difference
between two thermocouples in the same wheel space, detected by the Speedtronic® ,
represents a cooling fault or a measurement fault which must be analyzed and rectified quickly.
Gas turbine exhaust temperature :

TT-XD thermocouples measure gas turbine exhaust temperature. An exhaust spread, detected
by the Speedtronic® , represents a combustion fault or a measurement fault and must be
analyzed and rectified quickly.

G
E
O
ffi
DT-1C
ci
al
G
E
O
ffi
ci
al
G

Page : 1/2
DESCRIPTION
STARTING MEANS SYSTEM
1 DEFINITION
The starting means system is designed for insuring the following functions :
• To break away and crank the shaft line up to nominal speed

• To allow the shaft line cooling down
• To crank the unit for Off line washing
The starting means includes :
• A main electrical cranking motor loaded at 150% of nominal power at maximum torque
• An electrical turning gear motor
• A torque converter including an auxiliary two ways electrical motor to drive the variable inlet
guide vanes to adjust the output torque during starting sequences.
Lube oil from auxiliary lube oil pump feeds the torque converter during cranking sequences
20TU-1 Allows oil supply feeding of torque converter.
23CR-1 Prevents motor from internal condensation while not running.
23TG-1 Prevents motor from internal condensation while not running.
33TC-1 Indicates the closed position of the converter supply oil valve.
33TM-5 Detects the stroke corresponding to minimum torque.
33TM-6 Detects the stroke corresponding to maximum torque.
88CR-1 Provides the power to crank the shaft line.
88TG-1 Rotates the turbine shaft at low speed during its cooling down.
88TM-1 Controls the position of the converter adjustable vanes.
96TM-1 Indicates the position of the adjustable vanes of the converter.
ET-CRS-11/R Measures the stator temperature.

G

Page : 2/2
DESCRIPTION
HM1 Represents the torque converter unit.
Cranking motor :
The starting sequence should be limited to three per hour to limit the effect of starting current
and the thermal effect of load current.
Clutch :
There is no mechanical clutch between the starting means and the gas turbine. Therefore the
accessory gearbox drives the torque converter output shaft while the gas turbine is running.
The starting means may run at low speed while the gas turbine is running at nominal speed due
to the dragging effect.
Torque converter :
Maintenance frequency must follow the instruction from supplier documentation.

G
E
O
ffi
DT-1C
ci
al
G

Page : 1/3
DESCRIPTION
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
1 DEFINITION
The fire protection system is designed for insuring the following functions :
• To detect fire automatically

• To trip the unit and extinguish fire quickly
• To keep low concentration of combustive agent after fire
• To inform the operator
• To allow manual fire fighting release
In the enclosures listed here below :
• Auxiliaries
• Gas turbine
• Load
• Gas
Fire fighting is achieved using carbon dioxide (CO2)
43CP-1 Releases manually the fire protection in zone 1.
45FA-1A Detects a high temperature in the compartment.
45FA-1B Detects a high temperature in the compartment.

G

Page : 2/3
DESCRIPTION
45FT-1A Detects a high temperature in the compartment.
45FT-1B Detects a high temperature in the compartment.
5E-1 Initiates manually an emergency trip.
5E-2 Initiates manually an emergency trip.
SLI-1 Gives a visual fire alarm.
SLI-1A Gives a visual fire alarm.
SLI-1B Gives a visual fire alarm.
SLI-1C Gives a visual and audible fire alarm.

G

Page : 3/3
DESCRIPTION
SLI-1D Gives a visual fire alarm.
SLI-1E Gives a visual and audible fire alarm.
SLI-2 Gives a visual fire alarm.
SLI-2B Gives a visual fire alarm.
SLI-2E Gives a visual and audible fire alarm.
Compartments access:
Access inside the compartments at any time must be under strict control using access permit or
work permit to guaranty operator safety regarding potential risk including carbon dioxide
emission.
Fire alarm :
Fire alarm appears before fire trip. Any alarm must be investigated and rectified quickly
Carbon dioxide emission :

After carbon dioxide emission and confirmation that fire risk do not exist any more, the
compartment ventilation must be activated the clear the inside atmosphere. Concentration
measurement must be carried out to confirm safe access. Local carbon dioxide vacuum must
be undertaken if the concentration remains important.

G
E
O
ffi
DT-1C
ci
al
G
E
O
ffi
ci
al
G
E
O
ffi
ci
al
G

Page : 1/4
DESCRIPTION
HEATING AND VENTILATION SYSTEM
1 DEFINITION
The heating and ventilation system is designed for insuring the following functions :
• To evacuate the hot air from inside the compartment to outside

• To heat the enclosure when the unit is not operating
• To dilute gas leak to avoid hazardous area in the enclosures listed here below :
• Auxiliaries
• Gas turbine
• Load gear
• Gas valves
• Water injection
Enclosure purpose is :
• To protect personnel from high temperature and fire risks.

• To provide proper cooling and ventilation for the equipment.
• To provide attenuation of the noise generated by the equipment
• To contain fire fighting medium
• To provide weather protection for the equipment.
Redundant electrically driven fans provide airflow. Ventilation airflow direction is according to
the need of each enclosure.
Flap at ventilation air intake are use to restrict airflow while the ventilation is not in operation
and to participate to fire fighting effectiveness.
Electrical heaters are provided in enclosures for heating the ambient air.
20BA-30 Controls the opening of the bypass flap.
20BA-31 Controls the opening of the bypass flap.
20BT-30 Controls the opening of the bypass flap.
20BT-40 Controls the opening of the bypass flap.
20JS-30 Keeps the flap closed.
20VG-30 Controls the opening of the bypass flap.
20VL-30 Controls the opening of the bypass flap.
23BT-1,2 Prevents motor from internal condensation while not running.

G

Page : 2/4
DESCRIPTION
23HA-1 Heats the compartment.
23HT-1 Heats the compartment.
23VG-1 Prevents motor from internal condensation while not running.
23VG-2 Prevents motor from internal condensation while not running.
33BA-1 Indicates the flap closed position.
33BA-2 Indicates the flap closed position.
33BT-1 Indicates the flap closed position.
33DT-1 Indicates the door closed position.
33JS-1 Indicates the flap closed position.

G

Page : 3/4
DESCRIPTION
33JS-2 Indicates the flap closed position.
33VG-1 Indicates the flap closed position.
33VG-2 Indicates the flap closed position.
33VL-1 Indicates the flap closed position.
33VL-2 Indicates the flap closed position.
49HA-12 Protects the heater against overload.
63BA-30 Detects the clogging of the compartment air inlet filters.
63BA-31 Detects the clogging of the compartment air inlet filters.
63BT-30 Detects the clogging of the compartment air inlet filters.
63BT-40 Detects the clogging of the compartment air inlet filters.
63JS-30 Detects the ventilation air flow.
63VG-30 Detects the clogging of the compartment air inlet filters.
63VL-30 Detects the clogging of the compartment air inlet filters.
88BA-1 Drives the fan.
88BA-2 Drives the fan.
88BT-1 Drives the fan.
88BT-2 Drives the fan.
88JS-1 Drives the fan.
88JS-2 Drives the fan.
88VG-1 Drives the fan.
88VG-2 Drives the fan.
88VL-1 Drives the fan.
88VL-2 Drives the fan.
95BA-1 Detects the ventilation air flow.

G

Page : 4/4
DESCRIPTION
95BT-1 Detects the ventilation air flow.
95VL-1 Detects the ventilation air flow.
AT-AC-1 Measures the ambient temperature in the compartment.
AT-AC-11 Measures the ambient temperature in the compartment.
AT-LC-1 Measures the ambient temperature in the compartment.
AT-TC-1 Measures the ambient temperature in the compartment.
AT-WI-1 Measures the ambient temperature in the compartment.
Compartments access :
Access inside the compartments at any time must be under strict control using access permit or
work permit to guaranty operator safety regarding potential risk including carbon dioxide
emission.
Carbon dioxide emission :

After carbon dioxide emission and confirmation that fire risk do not exist any more, the
compartment ventilation must be activated the clear the inside atmosphere. Concentration
measurement must be carried out to confirm safe access.
Unit cooling down sequence :

During cooling down period using turning gear, all the turbine compartment doors must remain
closed to avoid cool air excess flow distribution near the gas turbine casing.

G
E
O
ffi
DT-1C
ci
al
G
E
O
ffi
ci
al
G
E
O
ffi
ci
al
G
E
O
ffi
ci
al
G

Page : 1/1
DESCRIPTION
AIR FILTER SYSTEM
1 DEFINITION
The flow inlet & exhaust is designed for insuring the following functions :
• To supply the gas turbine with filtered air flow

• To reduce the compressor air inlet acoustical level
• To protect the air inlet duct against high pressure drop
27TF-1 Gathers the air filter alarms.
63CA-1 Detects the compressed air low pressure.
63CS-2A Detects high pressure drop in the air inlet duct.
63CS-2B Detects high pressure drop in the air inlet duct.
96CS-3 Measures the pressure drop downstream of the air inlet silencer.
96RH Measures the ambient air temperature and humidity.
96TF-1 Measures the air filter pressure drop.
AR_20 Represents the air filter electrical system.
None

G
E
O
ffi
DT-1C
ci
al
G

Page : 1/2
DESCRIPTION
GAS DETECTION SYSTEM
1 DEFINITION
The gas detection system is designed to detect gas fuel leaks inside
• The auxiliary compartment

• The gas turbine compartment.
• The gas compartment
The gas detection system include gas detector installed inside the ventilation air duct.
45HA-1 Detects a gas concentration in auxiliary compartment.
45HA-4 Detects a gas concentration in the ventilation duct.
45HT-1 Detects a gas concentration in gas turbine compartment.
45HT-4 Detects a gas concentration in the ventilation duct.

G

Page : 2/2
DESCRIPTION
Gas detection alarm :

A gas leak detection alarm signal must be considered as high priority. It confirms a gas fuel
leak in the enclosure. Access to this enclosure must be prohibited for safety reason.
Corrective action must be undertaken quickly.

G
E
O
ffi
DT-1C
ci
al
G
E
O
ffi
ci
al
G
E
O
ffi
ci
al
G

Page : 1/1
DESCRIPTION
PERFORMANCE MONITORING SYSTEM
1 DEFINITION
The performance monitoring system is designed to measure :
• The inlet plenum air temperature

• The atmospheric pressure
• The differential pressure between compressor air inlet duct and compressor bell mouth
96AP-1A Measures atmospheric pressure.
96AP-1B Measures atmospheric pressure.
96AP-1C Measures atmospheric pressure.
96BD-1 Measures the difference between the air inlet of GT and the bell of GT intake.
Measures the differential pressure between the air inlet of GT and the
96CS-1
atmosphere.
CT-IF-3/FR Measures air temperature of the inlet of compressor.
None

G
E
O
ffi
DT-1C
ci
al
G
E
O
ffi
ci
al

GER-3567H
GE Power Systems
GE Gas Turbine
Performance
Characteristics
Frank J. Brooks
GE Power Systems
Schenectady, NY
GE Gas Turbine Performance Characteristics
Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Thermodynamic Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
The Brayton Cycle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Thermodynamic Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Combined Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Factors Affecting Gas Turbine Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Air Temperature and Site Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Humidity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Inlet and Exhaust Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Fuels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Fuel Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Diluent Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Air Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Performance Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Inlet Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Steam and Water Injection for Power Augmentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Peak Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Performance Degradation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Verifying Gas Turbine Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
List of Figures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
List of Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
GE Power Systems GER-3567H (10/00)

■ ■ i

■ ■ ii
Introduction tions the product line covers a range from

approximately 35,800 hp to 345,600 hp (26,000
GE offers both heavy-duty and aircraft-derivative
kW to 255,600 kW).
gas turbines for power generation and industri-
al applications. The heavy-duty product line con- Table 1 provides a complete listing of the avail-
sists of five different model series: MS3002, able outputs and heat rates of the GE heavy-duty
MS5000, MS6001, MS7001 and MS9001. gas turbines. Table 2 lists the ratings of mechani-
The MS5000 is designed in both single- and cal-drive units, which range from 14,520 hp to
two-shaft configurations for both generator 108,990 hp (10,828 kW to 80,685 kW).
and mechanical-drive applications. The The complete model number designation for
MS5000 and MS6001 are gear-driven units that each heavy-duty product line machine is pro-
can be applied in 50 Hz and 60 Hz markets. vided in both Tables 1 and 2. An explanation of
GE Generator Drive Product Line

Model Fuel ISO Base Heat Heat Exhaust Exhaust Exhaust Exhaust Pressure
Rating Rate Rate Flow Flow Temp Temp Ratio
(kW) (Btu/kWh) (kJ/kWh) (lb/hr) (kg/hr) (degrees F) (degrees C)
x10-3 x10-3
PG5371 (PA) Gas 26,070. 12,060. 12,721 985. 446 905. 485 10.6
Dist. 25,570. 12,180. 12,847 998. 448 906. 486 10.6
PG6581 (B) Gas 42,100. 10,640. 11,223 1158. 525 1010. 543 12.2
Dist. 41,160. 10,730. 11,318 1161. 526 1011. 544 12.1
PG6101 (FA) Gas 69,430. 10,040. 10,526 1638. 742 1101. 594 14.6
Dist. 74,090. 10,680. 10,527 1704. 772 1079. 582 15.0
PG7121 (EA) Gas 84,360. 10,480. 11,054 2361. 1070 998. 536 12.7
Dist. 87,220. 10,950. 11,550 2413. 1093 993. 537 12.9
PG7241 (FA) Gas 171,700. 9,360. 9,873 3543. 1605 1119. 604 15.7
Dist. 183,800. 9,965. 10,511 3691. 1672 1095. 591 16.2
PG7251 (FB) Gas 184,400. 9,245. 9,752 3561. 1613 1154. 623 18.4
Dist. 177,700. 9,975. 10,522 3703. 1677 1057. 569 18.7
PG9171 (E) Gas 122,500. 10,140. 10,696 3275. 1484 1009. 543 12.6
Dist. 127,300. 10,620. 11,202 3355. 1520 1003. 539 12.9
PG9231 (EC) Gas 169,200. 9,770. 10,305 4131. 1871 1034. 557 14.4
Dist. 179,800. 10,360. 10,928 4291. 1944 1017. 547 14.8
PG9351 (FA) Gas 255,600. 9,250. 9,757 5118. 2318 1127. 608 15.3
Dist. 268,000. 9,920. 10,464 5337. 2418 1106. 597 15.8
GT22043E
Table 1. GE gas turbine performance characteristics - Generator drive gas turbine ratings
All units larger than the Frame 6 are direct- the model number is given in Figure 1.
drive units. The MS7000 series units that are This paper reviews some of the basic thermo-
used for 60 Hz applications have rotational dynamic principles of gas turbine operation
speeds of 3600 rpm. The MS9000 series units and explains some of the factors that affect its
used for 50 Hz applications have a rotational performance.
speed of 3000 rpm. In generator-drive applica-

■ ■ 1
Mechanical Drive Gas Turbine Ratings

Model Year ISO Rating ISO Rating Heat Heat Mass Mass Exhaust Exhaust
Continuous Continuous Rate Rate Flow Flow Temp Temp
(kW) (hp) (Btu/shp-hr) (kJ/kWh) (lb/sec) (kg/sec) (degrees F) (degrees C)
M3142 (J) 1952 11,290 15,140 9,500 13,440 117 53 1,008 542
M3142R (J) 1952 10,830 14,520 7,390 10,450 117 53 698 370
M5261 (RA) 1958 19,690 26,400 9,380 13,270 205 92 988 531
M5322R (B) 1972 23,870 32,000 7,070 10,000 253 114 666 352
M5352 (B) 1972 26,110 35,000 8,830 12,490 273 123 915 491
M5352R (C) 1987 26,550 35,600 6,990 9,890 267 121 693 367
M5382 (C) 1987 28,340 38,000 8,700 12,310 278 126 960 515
M6581 (B) 1978 38,290 51,340 7,820 11,060 295 134 1,013 545
GT25385A
Table 2. GE gas turbine performance characteristics - Mechanical drive gas turbine ratings
MS7000
PG 7 12 1 (EA)
Application Series Power Number Model

of
Shafts
M - Mech Frame Approx 1 or 2 R - Regen

Drive 3,5,7 Output Blank - SC
PG - Pkgd 6,9 Power in
Gen Hundreds,
Thousands, or
10 Thousands
GT23054A
of Horsepower
Figure 1. Heavy-duty gas turbine model designation
Thermodynamic Principles Air entering the compressor at point 1 is com-

pressed to some higher pressure. No heat is
A schematic diagram for a simple-cycle, single-
added; however, compression raises the air
shaft gas turbine is shown in Figure 2. Air enters
temperature so that the air at the discharge of
the axial flow compressor at point 1 at ambient
the compressor is at a higher temperature and
conditions. Since these conditions vary from
pressure.
day to day and from location to location, it is
convenient to consider some standard condi- Upon leaving the compressor, air enters the
tions for comparative purposes. The standard combustion system at point 2, where fuel is
conditions used by the gas turbine industry are injected and combustion occurs. The combus-
59 F/15 C, 14.7 psia/1.013 bar and 60% relative tion process occurs at essentially constant pres-
humidity, which are established by the sure. Although high local temperatures are
International Standards Organization (ISO) reached within the primary combustion zone
and frequently referred to as ISO conditions. (approaching stoichiometric conditions), the

■ ■ 2
Fuel
Combustor Exhaust
2
Compressor 4
Generator
Turbine
Inlet Air GT08922A
Figure 2. Simple-cycle, single-shaft gas turbine

combustion system is designed to provide mix- A schematic diagram for a simple-cycle, two-
ing, burning, dilution and cooling. Thus, by the shaft gas turbine is shown in Figure 3. The low-
time the combustion mixture leaves the com- pressure or power turbine rotor is mechani-
bustion system and enters the turbine at point cally separate from the high-pressure turbine
3, it is at a mixed average temperature. and compressor rotor. The low pressure rotor
In the turbine section of the gas turbine, the is said to be aerodynamically coupled. This
energy of the hot gases is converted into work. unique feature allows the power turbine to be
This conversion actually takes place in two operated at a range of speeds and makes two-
steps. In the nozzle section of the turbine, the shaft gas turbines ideally suited for variable-
hot gases are expanded and a portion of the speed applications.
thermal energy is converted into kinetic energy. All of the work developed by the power turbine
In the subsequent bucket section of the turbine, is available to drive the load equipment since
a portion of the kinetic energy is transferred to the work developed by the high-pressure tur-
the rotating buckets and converted to work. bine supplies all the necessary energy to drive
Some of the work developed by the turbine is the compressor. On two-shaft machines the
used to drive the compressor, and the remain- starting requirements for the gas turbine load
der is available for useful work at the output train are reduced because the load equipment
flange of the gas turbine. Typically, more than is mechanically separate from the high-pressure
50% of the work developed by the turbine sec- turbine.
tions is used to power the axial flow compressor.
The Brayton Cycle
As shown in Figure 2, single-shaft gas turbines
are configured in one continuous shaft and, The thermodynamic cycle upon which all gas
therefore, all stages operate at the same speed. turbines operate is called the Brayton cycle.
These units are typically used for generator- Figure 4 shows the classical pressure-volume
drive applications where significant speed varia- (PV) and temperature-entropy (TS) diagrams
tion is not required. for this cycle. The numbers on this diagram cor-

■ ■ 3
Fuel
Combustor Exhaust
Compressor
HP LP Load
Turbine GT08923C
Inlet Air
Figure 3. Simple-cycle, two-shaft gas turbine
respond to the numbers also used in Figure 2. air at point 1 on a continuous basis in exchange
Path 1 to 2 represents the compression occur- for the hot gases exhausted to the atmosphere
ring in the compressor, path 2 to 3 represents at point 4. The actual cycle is an “open” rather
the constant-pressure addition of heat in the than “closed” cycle, as indicated.
combustion systems, and path 3 to 4 represents Every Brayton cycle can be characterized by two
the expansion occurring in the turbine. significant parameters: pressure ratio and firing
The path from 4 back to 1 on the Brayton cycle temperature. The pressure ratio of the cycle is
diagrams indicates a constant-pressure cooling the pressure at point 2 (compressor discharge
process. In the gas turbine, this cooling is done pressure) divided by the pressure at point 1
by the atmosphere, which provides fresh, cool (compressor inlet pressure). In an ideal cycle,
2 3
P
Fuel
2 4
1 4
3
V
3
1 4
T
2
1
GT23055A
S
Figure 4. Brayton cycle

■ ■ 4
this pressure ratio is also equal to the pressure sented as firing temperature by point 3 in Figure
at point 3 divided by the pressure at point 4. 4.
However, in an actual cycle there is some slight Steam-cooled first stage nozzles do not reduce
pressure loss in the combustion system and, the temperature of the gas directly through
hence, the pressure at point 3 is slightly less mixing because the steam is in a closed loop.
than at point 2. As shown in Figure 5, the firing temperature on
The other significant parameter, firing temper- a turbine with steam-cooled nozzles (GE’s cur-
ature, is thought to be the highest temperature rent “H” design) has an increase of 200
reached in the cycle. GE defines firing temper- degrees without increasing the combustion
ature as the mass-flow mean total temperature exit temperature.
OPEN LOOP ADVANCED CLOSED LOOP

AIR-COOLED NOZZLE STEAM-COOLED NOZZLE
200F More Firing Temp. at Same NOx Production Possible GT25134
Figure 5. Comparison of air-cooled vs. steam-cooled first stage nozzle
at the stage 1 nozzle trailing edge plane. An alternate method of determining firing tem-
Currently all first stage nozzles are cooled to perature is defined in ISO document 2314, “Gas
keep the temperatures within the operating lim- Turbines – Acceptance Tests.” The firing tem-
its of the materials being used. The two types of perature here is a reference turbine inlet tem-
cooling currently employed by GE are air and perature and is not generally a temperature that
steam. exists in a gas turbine cycle; it is calculated from
Air cooling has been used for more than 30 a heat balance on the combustion system, using
years and has been extensively developed in air- parameters obtained in a field test. This ISO
craft engine technology, as well as the latest fam- reference temperature will always be less than
ily of large power generation machines. Air the true firing temperature as defined by GE, in
used for cooling the first stage nozzle enters the many cases by 100 F/38 C or more for machines
hot gas stream after cooling down the nozzle using air extracted from the compressor for
and reduces the total temperature immediately internal cooling, which bypasses the combustor.
downstream. GE uses this temperature since it is Figure 6 shows how these various temperatures
more indicative of the cycle temperature repre- are defined.

■ ■ 5
Turbine Inlet
Temperature
- Average Gas Temp
in Plane A. (TA)
Firing Temperature
- Average Gas Temp
in Plane B. (TB)
ISO Firing Temperature

- Calculated Temp
in Plane C.
TC = f(Ma , Mf)
CL
GE Uses Firing Temperature TB

• Highest Temperature at Which Work Is Extracted
GT23056
Figure 6. Definition of firing temperature
Thermodynamic Analysis efficiency for different firing temperatures and

various pressure ratios. Output per pound of
Classical thermodynamics permit evaluation of airflow is important since the higher this value,
the Brayton cycle using such parameters as pres- the smaller the gas turbine required for the same
sure, temperature, specific heat, efficiency fac- output power. Thermal efficiency is important
tors and the adiabatic compression exponent. If because it directly affects the operating fuel costs.
such an analysis is applied to the Brayton cycle,
Figure 7 illustrates a number of significant
the results can be displayed as a plot of cycle points. In simple-cycle applications (the top
efficiency vs. specific output of the cycle. curve), pressure ratio increases translate into
Figure 7 shows such a plot of output and efficiency gains at a given firing temperature.
GT17983A
Figure 7. Gas turbine thermodynamics

■ ■ 6
The pressure ratio resulting in maximum out- while simple-cycle efficiency is not maximized,
put and maximum efficiency change with firing combined-cycle efficiency is at its peak.
temperature, and the higher the pressure ratio, Combined cycle is the expected application for
the greater the benefits from increased firing the MS7001FA.
temperature. Increases in firing temperature
provide power increases at a given pressure Combined Cycle
ratio, although there is a sacrifice of efficiency A typical simple-cycle gas turbine will convert
due to the increase in cooling air losses 30% to 40% of the fuel input into shaft output.
required to maintain parts lives. All but 1% to 2% of the remainder is in the
In combined-cycle applications (as shown in the form of exhaust heat. The combined cycle is
bottom graph in Figure 7 ), pressure ratio generally defined as one or more gas turbines
increases have a less pronounced effect on effi- with heat-recovery steam generators in the
ciency. Note also that as pressure ratio increas- exhaust, producing steam for a steam turbine
es, specific power decreases. Increases in firing generator, heat-to-process, or a combination
temperature result in increased thermal effi- thereof.
ciency. The significant differences in the slope Figure 8 shows a combined cycle in its simplest
of the two curves indicate that the optimum form. High utilization of the fuel input to the
cycle parameters are not the same for simple gas turbine can be achieved with some of the
and combined cycles. more complex heat-recovery cycles, involving
Simple-cycle efficiency is achieved with high multiple-pressure boilers, extraction or topping
pressure ratios. Combined-cycle efficiency is steam turbines, and avoidance of steam flow to
obtained with more modest pressure ratios and a condenser to preserve the latent heat content.
greater firing temperatures. For example, the Attaining more than 80% utilization of the fuel
MS7001FA design parameters are 2420 F/1316 C input by a combination of electrical power gen-
firing temperature and 15.7:1 pressure ratio; eration and process heat is not unusual.
Exhaust
HRSG
ST Gen
Turb Gen
Fuel
Comb
Comp Turb Gen
Air
Gas Turbine GT05363C
Figure 8. Combined cycle

■ ■ 7
Combined cycles producing only electrical parameters and component efficiencies as well
power are in the 50% to 60% thermal efficien- as air mass flow.
cy range using the more advanced gas turbines. Correction for altitude or barometric pressure
Papers dealing with combined-cycle applica- is more straightforward. The air density reduces
tions in the GE Reference Library include: as the site elevation increases. While the result-
GER-3574F, “GE Combined-Cycle Product Line ing airflow and output decrease proportionate-
and Performance”; GER-3767, “Single-Shaft ly, the heat rate and other cycle parameters are
Combined-Cycle Power Generation Systems”; not affected. A standard altitude correction
and GER-3430F, “Cogeneration Application curve is presented in Figure 10.
Considerations.”
Humidity
Factors Affecting Gas Turbine Similarly, humid air, which is less dense than
Performance dry air, also affects output and heat rate, as
shown in Figure 11. In the past, this effect was
Air Temperature and Site Elevation thought to be too small to be considered.
Since the gas turbine is an air-breathing engine, However, with the increasing size of gas turbines
its performance is changed by anything that and the utilization of humidity to bias water and
affects the density and/or mass flow of the air steam injection for NOx control, this effect has
intake to the compressor. Ambient weather greater significance.
conditions are the most obvious changes from It should be noted that this humidity effect is a
the reference conditions of 59 F/15 C and 14.7 result of the control system approximation of
psia/1.013 bar. Figure 9 shows how ambient tem- firing temperature used on GE heavy-duty gas
perature affects the output, heat rate, heat con- turbines. Single-shaft turbines that use turbine
sumption, and exhaust flow of a single-shaft exhaust temperature biased by the compressor
MS7001. Each turbine model has its own tem- pressure ratio to the approximate firing tem-
perature-effect curve, as it depends on the cycle perature will reduce power as a result of
130
120
110
Heat Rate
Percent
Design 100
90
Exhaust Flow
Heat Cons.
80
Output
70
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Compressor
°F
Inlet
Temperature
-18 -7 4 16 27 38 49
GT22045D
°C
Figure 9. Effect of ambient temperature

■ ■ 8
GT18848B
Figure 10. Altitude correction curve
GT22046B
Figure 11. Humidity effect curve

increased ambient humidity. This occurs moist air (due to humidity) to the allowable
because the density loss to the air from humidi- temperature. This fuel increase will increase the
ty is less than the density loss due to tempera- gas generator speed and compensate for the
ture. The control system is set to follow the inlet loss in air density.
air temperature function.
Inlet and Exhaust Losses
By contrast, the control system on aeroderiva-
Inserting air filtration, silencing, evaporative
tives uses unbiased gas generator discharge tem-
coolers or chillers into the inlet or heat recov-
perature to approximate firing temperature.
The gas generator can operate at different ery devices in the exhaust causes pressure losses
speeds from the power turbine, and the power in the system. The effects of these pressure loss-
will actually increase as fuel is added to raise the es are unique to each design. Figure 12 shows

■ ■ 9
4 Inches (10 mbar) H2O Inlet Drop Produces:

1.42% Power Output Loss
0.45% Heat Rate Increase
1.9 F (1.1 C) Exhaust Temperature Increase
4 Inches (10 mbar) H2O Exhaust Drop Produces:

0.42% Power Output Loss
0.42% Heat Rate Increase
1.9 F (1.1 C) Exhaust Temperature Increase
GT18238C
Figure 12. Pressure drop effects (MS7001EA)
the effects on the MS7001EA, which are typical possible to make some general assumptions. If
for the E technology family of scaled machines the fuel consists only of hydrocarbons with no
(MS6001B, 7001EA, 9001E). inert gases and no oxygen atoms, output
increases as LHV increases. Here the effects of
Fuels
Cp are greater than the effects of mass flow.
Work from a gas turbine can be defined as the
Also, as the amount of inert gases is increased,
product of mass flow, heat energy in the com-
the decrease in LHV will provide an increase in
busted gas (Cp), and temperature differential
output. This is the major impact of IGCC type
across the turbine. The mass flow in this
fuels that have large amounts of inert gas in the
equation is the sum of compressor airflow
fuel. This mass flow addition, which is not com-
and fuel flow. The heat energy is a function
pressed by the gas turbine’s compressor,
of the elements in the fuel and the products
increases the turbine output. Compressor
of combustion.
power is essentially unchanged. Several side
Tables 1 and 2 show that natural gas (methane) effects must be considered when burning this
produces nearly 2% more output than does dis- kind of lower heating value fuels:
tillate oil. This is due to the higher specific heat
■ Increased turbine mass flow drives up
in the combustion products of natural gas,
compressor pressure ratio, which
resulting from the higher water vapor content
eventually encroaches on the
produced by the higher hydrogen/carbon ratio
compressor surge limit
of methane. This effect is noted even though
the mass flow (lb/h) of methane is lower than ■ The higher turbine power may exceed
the mass flow of distillate fuel. Here the effects fault torque limits. In many cases, a
of specific heat were greater than and in oppo- larger generator and other accessory
sition to the effects of mass flow. equipment may be needed
Figure 13 shows the total effect of various fuels ■ High fuel volumes increase fuel piping
on turbine output. This curve uses methane as and valve sizes (and costs). Low- or
the base fuel. medium-Btu coal gases are frequently
Although there is no clear relationship between supplied at high temperatures, which
fuel lower heating value (LHV) and output, it is further increases their volume flow

■ ■ 10
60
100%
30 H2
50
LHV-Btu/lb (Thousands)
Kcal/kg (Thousands)
40
20
30
100%
20 CH4
10
100%
CH4H10
10
75% N2 - 25% CH4
100% CO 75% CO2 - 25% CH4
0
100 105 110 115 120 125 130
Output - Percent GT25842
Figure 13. Effect of fuel heating value on output

■ Lower-Btu gases are frequently its design life. In most cases of operation with
saturated with water prior to delivery lower heating value fuels, it can be assumed that
to the turbine. This increases the output and efficiency will be equal to or higher
combustion products heat transfer than that obtained on natural gas. In the case of
coefficients and raises the metal higher heating value fuels, such as refinery
temperatures in the turbine section gases, output and efficiency may be equal to or
which may require lower operating lower than that obtained on natural gas.
firing temperature to preserve parts
lives Fuel Heating
■ As the Btu value drops, more air is Most of the combined cycle turbine installations
required to burn the fuel. Machines are designed for maximum efficiency. These
with high firing temperatures may not plants often utilize integrated fuel gas heaters.
be able to burn low Btu gases Heated fuel results in higher turbine efficiency
due to the reduced fuel flow required to raise
■ Most air-blown gasifiers use air
the total gas temperature to firing temperature.
supplied from the gas turbine
Fuel heating will result in slightly lower gas tur-
compressor discharge
bine output because of the incremental volume
■ The ability to extract air must be flow decrease. The source of heat for the fuel
evaluated and factored into the overall typically is the IP feedwater. Since use of this
heat and material balances energy in the gas turbine fuel heating system is
As a result of these influences, each turbine thermodynamically advantageous, the com-
model will have some application guidelines on bined cycle efficiency is improved by approxi-
flows, temperatures and shaft output to preserve mately 0.6%.
GE Power Systems GER-3567H (10/00) ■ ■ 11

Diluent Injection Generally, up to 5% of the compressor airflow

can be extracted from the compressor dis-
Since the early 1970s, GE has used water or
charge casing without modification to casings
steam injection for NOx control to meet appli-
or on-base piping. Pressure and air temperature
cable state and federal regulations. This is
will depend on the type of machine and site
accomplished by admitting water or steam in
conditions. Air extraction between 6% and 20%
the cap area or “head-end” of the combustion
may be possible, depending on the machine
liner. Each machine and combustor configura-
and combustor configuration, with some modi-
tion has limits on water or steam injection levels
fications to the casings, piping and controls.
to protect the combustion system and turbine
Such applications need to be reviewed on a
section. Depending on the amount of water or
case-by-case basis. Air extractions above 20%
steam injection needed to achieve the desired
will require extensive modification to the tur-
NOx level, output will increase because of the
bine casing and unit configuration. Figure 15
130
With 5%
Steam
120 Injection
110
Output
100
%
90 No Steam
Injection
3%
80 1%
70
40 60 80 100 120
ºF
4 16 27 38 49
ºC
Compressor Inlet Temperature
GT18851A GT22048-1C
Figure 14. Effect of steam injection on output and Figure 15. Effect of air extraction on output and heat
heat rate rate
additional mass flow. Figure 14 shows the effect shows the effect of air extraction on output and
of steam injection on output and heat rate for heat rate. As a “rule of thumb,” every 1% in air
an MS7001EA. These curves assume that steam extraction results in a 2% loss in power.
is free to the gas turbine cycle, therefore heat
Performance Enhancements
rate improves. Since it takes more fuel to raise
water to combustor conditions than steam, Generally, controlling some of the factors that
water injection does not provide an improve- affect gas turbine performance is not possible.
ment in heat rate. The planned site location and the plant config-
uration (such as simple- or combined-cycle)
Air Extraction determine most of these factors. In the event
In some gas turbine applications, it may be additional output is needed, several possibilities
desirable to extract air from the compressor. to enhance performance may be considered.

■ ■ 12
Inlet Cooling
The ambient effect curve (see Figure 9) clearly
shows that turbine output and heat rate are
improved as compressor inlet temperature
decreases. Lowering the compressor inlet tem-
perature can be accomplished by installing an
evaporative cooler or inlet chiller in the inlet
ducting downstream of the inlet filters. Careful
application of these systems is necessary, as con-
densation or carryover of water can exacerbate
compressor fouling and degrade performance.
These systems generally are followed by mois-
ture separators or coalescing pads to reduce the GT22419-1D
possibility of moisture carryover.

Figure 16. Effect of evaporative cooling on output
As Figure 16 shows, the biggest gains from evap- and heat rate
orative cooling are realized in hot, low-humid-
ity climates. It should be noted that evapora- ture. For most applications, coolers having an
tive cooling is limited to ambient temperatures effectiveness of 85% or 90% provide the most
of 59 F/15 C and above (compressor inlet tem- economic benefit.
perature >45 F/7.2 C) because of the potential Chillers, unlike evaporative coolers, are not lim-
for icing the compressor. Information con- ited by the ambient wet bulb temperature. The
tained in Figure 16 is based on an 85% effective achievable temperature is limited only by the
evaporative cooler. Effectiveness is a measure capacity of the chilling device to produce
of how close the cooler exit temperature coolant and the ability of the coils to transfer
approaches the ambient wet bulb tempera- heat. Cooling initially follows a line of constant
Psychrometric 100% RH
40 .020
Chart 60% RH
(Simplified)
35
.015
30 40% RH
Btu Per Pound Evaporative
of Dry Air Cooling Process
25
Specific
.010
Humidity
20 20% RH
Inlet Chilling
Process
15
.005
10% RH
.000
°F 40 60 80 100 120
Dry Bulb
Temperature °C 4 GT21141D
16 27 38 49
Figure 17. Inlet chilling process

■ ■ 13
specific humidity, as shown in Figure 17. As satu- Performance defines base load as operation at
ration is approached, water begins to condense 8,000 hours per year with 800 hours per start. It
from the air, and mist eliminators are used. also defines peak load as operation at 1250
Further heat transfer cools the condensate and hours per year with five hours per start.
air, and causes more condensation. Because of In recognition of shorter operating hours, it is
the relatively high heat of vaporization of water, possible to increase firing temperature to gen-
most of the cooling energy in this regime goes erate more output. The penalty for this type of
to condensation and little to temperature operation is shorter inspection intervals.
reduction. Despite this, running an MS5001, MS6001 or
Steam and Water Injection for Power MS7001 at peak may be a cost-effective way to
Augmentation obtain more kilowatts without the need for
additional peripheral equipment.
Injecting steam or water into the head end of
the combustor for NOx abatement increases Generators used with gas turbines likewise have
mass flow and, therefore, output. Generally, the peak ratings that are obtained by operating at
amount of water is limited to the amount higher power factors or temperature rises. Peak
required to meet the NOx requirement in order cycle ratings are ratings that are customized to
to minimize operating cost and impact on the mission of the turbine considering both
inspection intervals. starts and hours of operation. Firing tempera-
tures between base and peak can be selected to
Steam injection for power augmentation has
maximize the power capabilities of the turbine
been an available option on GE gas turbines for
while staying within the starts limit envelope of
over 30 years. When steam is injected for power
the turbine hot section repair interval. For
augmentation, it can be introduced into the
instance, the 7EA can operate for 24,000 hours
compressor discharge casing of the gas turbine
on gas fuel at base load, as defined. The starts
as well as the combustor. The effect on output
limit to hot section repair interval is 800 starts.
and heat rate is the same as that shown in Figure
14. GE gas turbines are designed to allow up to For peaking cycle of five hours per start, the hot
5% of the compressor airflow for steam injec- section repair interval would occur at 4,000
tion to the combustor and compressor dis- hours, which corresponds to operation at peak
charge. Steam must contain 50 F/28 C super- firing temperatures. Turbine missions between
heat and be at pressures comparable to fuel gas five hours per start and 800 hours per start may
pressures. allow firing temperatures to increase above base
but below peak without sacrificing hours to hot
When either steam or water is used for power
section repair. Water injection for power aug-
augmentation, the control system is normally
mentation may be factored into the peak cycle
designed to allow only the amount needed for
rating to further maximize output.
NOx abatement until the machine reaches base
(full) load. At that point, additional steam or
water can be admitted via the governor control.
Performance Degradation
All turbomachinery experiences losses in per-
Peak Rating formance with time. Gas turbine performance
The performance values listed in Table 1 are degradation can be classified as recoverable or
base load ratings. ANSI B133.6 Ratings and non-recoverable loss. Recoverable loss is usually

■ ■ 14
associated with compressor fouling and can be power plant performance. Power, fuel, heat
partially rectified by water washing or, more consumption and sufficient supporting data
thoroughly, by mechanically cleaning the com- should be recorded to enable as-tested per-
pressor blades and vanes after opening the unit. formance to be corrected to the condition of
Non-recoverable loss is due primarily to the guarantee. Preferably, this test should be
increased turbine and compressor clearances done as soon as practical, with the unit in new
and changes in surface finish and airfoil con- and clean condition. In general, a machine is
tour. Because this loss is caused by reduction in considered to be in new and clean condition if
component efficiencies, it cannot be recovered it has less than 200 fired hours of operation.
by operational procedures, external mainte- Testing procedures and calculation methods are
nance or compressor cleaning, but only patterned after those described in the ASME
through replacement of affected parts at rec- Performance Test Code PTC-22-1997, “Gas
ommended inspection intervals. Turbine Power Plants.” Prior to testing, all sta-
Quantifying performance degradation is diffi- tion instruments used for primary data collec-
cult because consistent, valid field data is hard tion must be inspected and calibrated. The test
to obtain. Correlation between various sites is should consist of sufficient test points to ensure
impacted by variables such as mode of opera- validity of the test set-up. Each test point should
tion, contaminants in the air, humidity, fuel and consist of a minimum of four complete sets of
dilutent injection levels for NOx. Another prob- readings taken over a 30-minute time period
lem is that test instruments and procedures vary when operating at base load. Per ASME PTC-22-
widely, often with large tolerances. 1997, the methodology of correcting test results
Typically, performance degradation during the to guarantee conditions and measurement
first 24,000 hours of operation (the normally uncertainties (approximately 1% on output and
recommended interval for a hot gas path heat rate when testing on gas fuel) shall be
inspection) is 2% to 6% from the performance agreed upon by the parties prior to the test.
test measurements when corrected to guaran-
teed conditions. This assumes degraded parts Summary
are not replaced. If replaced, the expected per- This paper reviewed the thermodynamic princi-
formance degradation is 1% to 1.5%. Recent ples of both one- and two-shaft gas turbines and
field experience indicates that frequent off-line discussed cycle characteristics of the several
water washing is not only effective in reducing models of gas turbines offered by GE. Ratings of
recoverable loss, but also reduces the rate of the product line were presented, and factors
non-recoverable loss. affecting performance were discussed along
One generalization that can be made from the with methods to enhance gas turbine output.
data is that machines located in dry, hot cli- GE heavy-duty gas turbines serving industrial,
mates typically degrade less than those in utility and cogeneration users have a proven
humid climates. history of sustained performance and reliabili-
ty. GE is committed to providing its customers
Verifying Gas Turbine Performance with the latest in equipment designs and
Once the gas turbine is installed, a perform- advancements to meet power needs at high
ance test is usually conducted to determine thermal efficiency.

■ ■ 15
List of Figures
Figure 1. Heavy-duty gas turbine model designation
Figure 2. Simple-cycle, single-shaft gas turbine
Figure 3. Simple-cycle, two-shaft gas turbine
Figure 4. Brayton cycle
Figure 5. Comparison of air-cooled vs. steam-cooled first stage nozzle
Figure 6. Definition of firing temperature
Figure 7. Gas turbine thermodynamics
Figure 8. Combined cycle
Figure 9. Effect of ambient temperature
Figure 10. Altitude correction curve
Figure 11. Humidity effect curve
Figure 12. Pressure drop effects (MS7001EA)
Figure 13. Effect of fuel heating value on output
Figure 14. Effect of steam injection on output and heat rate
Figure 15. Effect of air extraction on output and heat rate
Figure 16. Effect of evaporative cooling on output and heat rate
Figure 17. Inlet chilling process
List of Tables
Table 1. GE gas turbine performance characteristics - Generator drive gas turbine ratings
Table 2. GE gas turbine performance characteristics - Mechanical drive gas turbine ratings

■ ■ 16
UOGTNODLN
Revision D, July 1999
GE Power Systems
Gas Turbine
Unit Operation/Turbine (Gas)

(Applicability MS 5001P, 6001B, 7001EA, 7001FA, 9001E Non Dry Low NOx)
I. REFERENCE DATA AND PRECAUTIONS
A. Operator Responsibility
It is essential that the turbine operators be familiar with the information contained in the following opera-
tion text, the Control Specification drawings (consult the Control System Settings drawing for the index
of Control Specification drawings), the Piping Schematic drawings including the Device Summary
(consult the Control System Settings Drawing for the index by model list and drawing number of appli-
cable schematics), the SPEEDTRONIC control sequence program and the SPEEDTRONIC
Mark V Users’ Manual (GEH 5979). The operator must also be aware of the power plant devices which
are tied into the gas turbine mechanically and electrically and could affect normal operation. No starts
should be attempted whether on a new turbine or a newly overhauled turbine until the following condi-
tions have been met:
1. Requirements listed under CHECKS PRIOR TO OPERATION have been met.

2. Control systems have been functionally checked for proper operation before restarting.
3. All GENERAL OPERATING PRECAUTIONS have been noted.
It is extremely important that gas turbine operators establish proper operating practices. We emphasize
adherence to the following:
1. Respond to Annunciator Indicators — Investigate and correct the cause of the abnormal condition.
This is particularly true for the protection systems, such as low oil pressure, overtemperature, vibra-
tion, overspeed etc.
2. Check of Control Systems — After any type of control maintenance is completed, whether repair or
replacement of parts, functionally check control systems for proper operation. This should be done
prior to restart of the turbine. It should not be assumed that reassembly, “as taken apart” is adequate
without the functional test.
3. Monitor Exhaust Temperature During All Phases of Startup — The operator is alerted to the following:
1999 GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY
UOGTNODLN Unit Operation/Turbine (Gas)
CAUTION
Overtemperature can damage the turbine hot gas path parts.
Monitor exhaust temperature for proper control upon first startup and after any turbine maintenance is
performed. Trip the turbine if the exhaust temperature exceeds the normal trip level, or increases at an
unusual rate. A particularly critical period for overtemperature damage to occur is during the startup
phase before the turbine reaches governing speed. At this time air flow is low and the turbine is unable
to accelerate away from excess fuel.
B. General Operating Precautions
1. Temperature Limits
Refer to the Control Specifications for actual exhaust temperature control settings. It is important to
define a “baseline value” of exhaust temperature spread with which to compare future data. This
baseline data is established during steady state operation after each of the following conditions:
a. Initial startup of unit
b. Before and after a planned shut-down
c. Before and after planned maintenance
An important point regarding the evaluation of exhaust temperature spreads is not necessarily the
magnitude of the spread, but the change in spread over a period of time. The accurate recording and
plotting of exhaust temperatures daily can indicate a developing problem. Consult Control Specifi-
cation-Settings Drawings for maximum allowable temperature spreads and wheelspace tempera-
ture operating limits.
The wheelspace thermocouples, identified together with their nomenclature, are on the Device
Summary. A bad thermocouple will cause a “High Wheelspace Differential Temperature” alarm.
The faulty thermocouple should be replaced at the earliest convenience.
When the average temperature in any wheelspace is higher then the temperature limit set forth in the
table, it is an indication of trouble. High wheelspace temperature may be caused by any of the fol-
lowing faults:
1. Restriction in cooling air lines
2. Wear of turbine seals
3. Excessive distortion of the turbine stator
4. Improper positioning of thermocouple
5. Malfunctioning combustion system
6. Leakage in external piping
7. Excessive distortion of exhaust inner diffuser
UOGTNODLN–2
Unit Operation/Turbine (Gas) UOGTNODLN
Check wheelspace temperatures very closely on initial startup. If consistently high, and a check of
the external cooling air circuits reveals nothing, it is permissible to increase the size of the cooling
air orifices slightly. Consult with a GE Company field representative to obtain recommendations
as to the size that an orifice should be increased. After a turbine overhaul, all orifices should be
changed back to their original size, assuming that all turbine clearances are returned to normal and
all leakage paths are corrected.
CAUTION
Wheelspace temperatures are read on the CRT. Temperatures in excess of

the maximum are potentially harmful to turbine hot-gas-path parts over a pro-
longed period of time. Excessive temperatures are annunciated but will not
cause the turbine to trip. High wheelspace temperature readings must be re-
ported to the GE technical representative as soon as possible.
2. Pressure Limits
Refer to the Device Summary for actual pressure switch settings. Lube oil pressure in the bearing feed
header is a nominal value of 25 psig (172.36 kPa). The turbine will trip at 8 psig (55.16 kPa). Pressure
variations between these values will result from entrapped particulate matter within the lube oil filter-
ing system.
3. Vibration Limits
The maximum overall vibration velocity of the gas turbine should never exceed 1.0 inch (2.54 cm)
per second in either the vertical or horizontal direction. Corrective action should be initiated when
the vibration levels exceed 0.5 inch (1.27 cm) per second as indicated on the SPEEDTRONIC 
CRT.
If doubt exists regarding the accuracy of the reading or if more accurate and specific vibration read-
ings are desired a vibration check is recommended using vibration test equipment.
4. Load Limit
The maximum load capability of the gas turbine is given in the control specification. For the upper
limits of generator capability, refer to the Reactive Capability Curve.
5. Overloading of Gas Turbine, Facts Involved and Policy
It is GE practice to design gas turbines with margins of safety to meet the contract commitments and
to secure long life and trouble-free operation.
So that maximum trouble-free operation can be secured, GE designs these machines with more than
ample margins on turbine bucket thermal and dynamic stresses, compressor and turbine wheel
stresses, generator ventilation, coolers, etc. As a result, these machines are designed somewhat bet-
ter than is strictly necessary, because of the importance of reliability of these turbines to our custom-
ers and to the electrical industry.
It cannot be said, therefore, that these machines cannot be safely operated beyond the load limits.
Such operation, however, always encroaches upon the design margins of the machines with a conse-
UOGTNODLN–3
quent reduction in reliability and increased maintenance. Accordingly, any malfunction that occurs
as a result of operation beyond contract limits cannot be the responsibility of the GE Company.
The fact that a generator operates at temperature rises below the 185F° (85C°) for the rotor and
140F° (60C°) for the stator permitted by the AIEE Standards does not mean that it can be properly
run with full safety up to these values by overloading beyond the nameplate rating. These standards
were primarily set up for the protection of insulation from thermal deterioration on small machines.
The imbedded temperature detectors of the stator register a lower temperature than the copper be-
cause of the temperature drop through the insulation from the copper to the outside of the insulation,
where the temperature detectors are located. There are also conditions of conductor expansion, in-
sulation stress, etc., which impose limitations. These factors have been anticipated in the “Vee”
curves and reactive capability curves which indicate recommended values consistent with good op-
erating practice. The “Vee” curves and reactive capability curves form part of the operating instruc-
tions for the generator and it is considered unwise to exceed the values given.
The gas turbine-generator sets may require gearing between the gas turbine and the generator.
Where a reduction (or speed-increasing) gear is required between the gas turbine and generator, the
gear is rated at the maximum capability of the gas turbine, or the maximum kVa capability of the
generator, whichever is less. If the gas turbine-generator set is operated beyond the maximum rating
of the gear, the gear will also be overloaded with corresponding increased maintenance and reduced
length of life.
The gas turbines are mechanically designed so that (within prescribed limits), advantage can be tak-
en of the increased capability over nameplate rating, which is available at lower ambient tempera-
tures (because of increased air density), without exceeding the maximum allowable turbine inlet
temperature.
The load limit of the gas turbine-generator must not be exceeded, even when the ambient tempera-
ture is lower than that at which the load limit of the gas turbine is reached. Under these conditions,
the gas turbine will operate at this load with a lower turbine inlet temperature and the design stresses
on the load coupling and turbine shaft will not be exceeded.
If the turbine is overloaded so that the turbine exhaust temperature schedule is not followed for rea-
sons of malfunctioning or improper setting of the exhaust temperature control system, the maximum
allowable turbine inlet temperature or the maximum allowable exhaust temperature, or both, will be
exceeded and will result in a corresponding increase in maintenance and, in extreme cases, might
result in failure of the turbine parts.
The exhaust temperature control system senses the turbine exhaust temperature and introduces
proper bias to limit the fuel flow so that neither the maximum allowable turbine inlet temperature
nor the maximum allowable turbine exhaust temperature is exceeded.
6. Fire Protection System Operating Precautions
The fire protection system, when actuated, will cause several functions to occur in addition to actuat-
ing the media discharge system. The turbine will trip, an audible alarm will sound, and the alarm
message will be displayed on the CRT. The ventilation openings in the compartments will be
closed by a pressure-operated latch and the damper in the turbine shell cooling discharge will be
actuated.
UOGTNODLN–4
The annunciator audible alarm may be silenced by clicking on the alarm SILENCE target. The alarm
message can be cleared from the ALARM list on the CRT after the ACKNOWLEDGE target
and the ALARM RESET target are actuated, but only after the situation causing the alarm has been
corrected.
The fire protection system must be replenished and reset before it can automatically react to another
fire. Reset must be made after each activation of the fire protection system which includes an initial
discharge followed by an extended discharge period of the fire protection media.
Fire protection system reset is accomplished by resetting the pressure switch located on the fire
protection system.
Ventilation dampers, automatically closed by a signal received from the fire protection system, must
be reopened manually in all compartments before restarting the turbine.
CAUTION
Failure to reopen compartment ventilation dampers will severely shorten the

service life of major accessory equipment. Failure to reopen the load coupling
compartment dampers will materially reduce the performance of the generator.
7. Combustion System Operating Precautions
* * * WARNING * * *
Sudden emission of black smoke may indicate a possibility of outer casing

failure or other serious combustion problems. In such an event :
a. Immediately shut down the turbine.

b. Allow no personnel inside the turbine compartment until turbine is shut down.
c. Caution all personnel against standing in front of access door openings into pressurized
compartments.
d. Perform a complete combustion system inspection.
To reduce the possibility of combustion outer casing failure, the operator should adhere to the
following:
a. During operation, exhaust temperatures are monitored by the SPEEDTRONIC control sys-
tem. The temperature spread is compared to allowable spreads with alarms and/or protective
trips resulting if the allowable spread limits are exceeded.
b. After a trip from 75% load or above, observe the exhaust on startup for black or abnormal smoke
and scan the exhaust thermocouples for unusually high spreads. Record temperature spread dur-
ing a normal startup to obtain base line signature for comparison. Excessive tripping should be
investigated and eliminated.
c. Adhere to recommended inspection intervals on combustion liners, transition pieces and fuel
nozzles.
Operating a turbine with non-operational exhaust thermocouples increases the risk of turbine overfiring and
prevents diagnosis of combustion problems by use of temperature differential readings.
UOGTNODLN–5
To prevent the above described malfunctions the operator should keep the number of non-operational ex-
haust thermocouples to a maximum of two but no more than one of any three adjacent thermocouples.
CAUTION
Operation of the gas turbine with a single faulty thermocouple should not be
neglected, as even one faulty thermocouple will increase the risk of an invalid
“combustion alarm” and/or “Trip”. The unit should not be shut down just for
replacement of a single faulty thermocouple. However, every effort should be
made to replace the faulty thermocouples when the machine is down for any
reason.
Adherence to the above criteria and early preventive maintenance should reduce distortions of the
control and protection functions and the number of unnecessary turbine trips.
8. Cooldown/Shutdown Precautions
CAUTION
In the event of an emergency shutdown in which internal damage of any rotat-

ing equipment is suspected, do not turn the rotor after shutdown. Maintain lube
oil pump operation, since lack of circulating lube oil following a hot shutdown
will result in rising bearing temperatures which can result in damaged bearing
surfaces. If the malfunction that caused the shutdown can be quickly repaired,
or if a check reveals no internal damage affecting the rotating parts, reinstate
the cooldown cycle.
If there is an emergency shutdown and the turbine is not turned with the rotor turning device, the
following factors should be noted:
a. Within 20 minutes, maximum, following turbine shutdown, the gas turbine may be started with-
out cooldown rotation. Use the normal starting procedure.
b. After a shutdown of between 20 minutes and 48 hours, a restart should not be attempted unless
the gas turbine rotor has been turned from one to two hours prior to the startup attempt.
c. If the unit has been shut down and not turned at all, it must be shut down for approximately 48
hours before it can be restarted without danger of shaft bow.
UOGTNODLN–6
CAUTION
Where the gas turbine has not been on rotor turning operation after shutdown
and a restart is attempted, as under conditions (a) and (b) above, the operator
should maintain a constant check on vibration velocity as the unit is brought
up to its rated speed. If the vibration velocity exceeds one inch per second at
any speed, the unit should be shut down and the shaft rotated for at least one
hour before a second starting attempt is made. If seizure occurs during the turn-
ing operation of the gas turbine, the turbine should be shut down and remain
idle for at least 30 hours, or until the rotor is free. The turbine may be rotated
at any time during the 30-hour period if it is free; however, audible checks
should be made for rubs.
NOTE
The vibration velocity must be measured at points near the gas turbine bear-
ing caps.
II. PREPARATIONS FOR NORMAL LOAD OPERATION
A. Standby Power Requirements
Standby AC power insures the immediate startup capability of particular turbine equipment and related
control systems when the start signal is given. Functions identified by asterisk are also necessary for unit
environmental protection and should not be turned off except for maintenance work on that particular
function. Standby AC power is required for:
1. Lube oil heaters, which when used in conjunction with the lube oil pumps, heat and circulate turbine
lube oil at low ambient temperatures to maintain proper oil viscosity.
2. *Control panel heating.
3. *Generator heating.
4. Lube oil pumps. Auxiliary pump should be run at periodic intervals to prevent rust formation in the
lube oil system.
5. Fuel oil heaters, where used. These heaters used in conjunction with the fuel oil pumps, heat and
circulate fuel oil at low ambient temperatures to maintain proper fuel oil viscosity.
6. Compartment heating.
7. *Operation of control compartment air conditioner during periods of high ambient temperature to
maintain electrical equipment insulation within design temperature limits.
8. *Battery charging (where applicable).
9. Heating diesel engine cooling water to assure quick starting capability. (Applicable to diesel engine
starting only.)
If a black start is required, it is recommended that the turbine be started and loaded within one hour of
losing AC power.
UOGTNODLN–7
B. Checks Prior to Operation
The following checks are to be made before attempting to operate a new turbine or an overhauled turbine.
It is assumed that the turbine has been assembled correctly, is in alignment and that calibration of the
SPEEDTRONIC system has been performed per the Control Specifications. A standby inspection of
the turbine should be performed with the lube oil pump operating and emphasis on the following areas:
1. Check that all piping and turbine connections are securely fastened and that all blinds have been
removed. Most tube fittings incorporate a stop collar which insures proper torquing of the fittings at
initial fitting make up and at reassembly. These collars fit between the body of the fitting and the nut
and contact in tightening of the fitting. The stop collar is similar to a washer and can be rotated freely
on unassembled fittings. During initial assembly of a fitting with a stop collar, tighten the nut until it
bottoms on the collar. The fitting has to be sufficiently tightened until the collar cannot be rotated by
hand. This is the inspection for a proper fitting assembly. For each remake of the fitting, the nut
should again be tightened until the collar cannot be rotated.
2. Inlet and exhaust plenums and associated ducting are clean and rid of all foreign objects. All access
doors are secure.
3. Where fuel, air or lube oil filters have been replaced check that all covers are intact and tight.
4. Verify that the lube oil tank is within the operating level and if the tank has been drained that it has
been refilled with the recommended quality and quantity of lube oil. If lube oil flushing has been
conducted verify that all filters have been replaced and any blinds if used, removed.
5. Check operation of auxiliary and emergency equipment, such as lube oil pumps, water pumps, fuel
forwarding pumps, etc. Check for obvious leakage, abnormal vibration (maximum 3 mils), noise or
overheating.
6. Check lube oil piping for obvious leakage. Also using provided oil flow sights, check visually that
oil is flowing from the bearing drains. The turbine should not be started unless flow is visible at each
flow sight.
7. Check condition of all thermocouples and/or resistance temperature detectors (RTDs) on the 
CRT. Reading should be approximately ambient temperature.
8. Check spark plugs for proper arcing.
* * * WARNING * * *
Do not test spark plugs where explosive atmosphere is present.
If the arc occurs anywhere other than directly across the gap at the tips of the electrodes, or if by
blowing on the arc it can be moved from this point, the plug should be cleaned and the tip clearance
adjusted. If necessary, the plug should be replaced. Verify the retracting piston for free operation.
9. Devices requiring manual lubrication are to be properly serviced.

10. Determine that the cooling water system has been properly flushed and filled with the recommended
coolant. Any fine powdery rust, which might form in the piping during short time exposure to atmo-
sphere, can be tolerated. If there is evidence of a scaly rust, the cooling system should be power
flushed until all scale is removed. If it is necessary to use a chemical cleaner, most automobile cool-
UOGTNODLN–8
ing system cleaners are acceptable and will not damage the carbon and rubber parts of the pump
mechanical seals or rubber parts in the piping.
Refer to “Cooling Water Recommendations for Combustion Gas Turbine Closed Cooling Systems” in-
cluded under tab titled Fluid Specifications. Note the following regarding antifreeze.
CAUTION
Do not change from one type antifreeze to another without first flushing the
cooling system very thoroughly. Inhibitors used may not be compatible and can
cause formation of gums, in addition to destroying effectiveness as an inhibitor.
Consult the antifreeze vendor for specific recommendations.
Following the water system refill ensure that water system piping, primarily pumps and flexible cou-
plings, do not leak. It is wise not to add any corrosion inhibitors until after the water system is found to
be leak free.
11. Turbines having a diesel engine starting means should have the engine tested using the diesel test
pushbutton in the accessory compartment.
12. The use of radio transmitting equipment in the vicinity of open control panels is not recommended.
Prohibiting such use will assure that no extraneous signals are introduced into the control system
that might influence the normal operation of the equipment.
13. Check the Cooling and Sealing Air Piping against the assembly drawing and piping schematic, to
ensure that all orifice plates are of designated size and in designated positions.
14. At this time all annunciated ground faults should be cleared. It is recommended that units not be
operated when a ground fault is indicated. Immediate action should be taken to locate all grounds
and correct the problems.
C. Checks During Start Up and Initial Operation
The following is a list of important checks to be made on a new or newly overhauled turbine with the
OPERATION SELECTOR in various modes. The Control Specifications — Control Systems Adjust-
ments should be reviewed prior to operating the turbine.
CAUTION
Where an electric motor is used as the starting means refer to the Control Speci-
fications for maximum operating time.
When a unit has been overhauled those parts or components that have been removed and taken apart for
inspection/repair should be critically monitored during unit startup and operation. This inspection
should include: leakage check, vibration, unusual noise, overheating, lubrication.
1. Crank
a. Listen for rubbing noises in the turbine compartment and in the reduction gear compartment
especially in the load tunnel area. A soundscope or some other listening type device is sug-
gested. Shutdown and investigate if unusual noise occurs.
UOGTNODLN–9
b. Check for unusual vibration.

c. Inspect for water system leakage.
2. Fire
* * * WARNING * * *
Due to the complexity of gas turbine fuel systems, it is imperative for ev-
eryone to exercise extreme caution in and near any turbine compartment,
fuel handling system, or any other enclosures or areas containing fuel pip-
ing or fuel system components.
Do not enter the turbine compartment unless absolutely necessary. When
it is necessary, exercise caution when opening and entering the compart-
ment. Be aware of the possibility of fuel leaks, and be prepared to shut
down the turbine and take action if a leak is discovered.
At any time, if/when entering the turbine compartment or when in the vi-
cinity of the fuel handling system or other locations with fuel piping, fuel
system components, or fuel system connections, while the turbine is oper-
ating, implement the following:
Conduct an environmental evaluation of the turbine compartment,
fuel handling system, or specific area. Pay particular attention to all
locations where fuel piping/components/connections exist.
Follow applicable procedures for leak testing. If fuel leaks are discov-
ered, exit the area quickly, shut the turbine down, and take appropri-
ate actions to eliminate the leak(s).
Require personnel entering the turbine comparrtment to be fitted

with the appropriate personal protective equipment, i.e., hard hat,
safety glasses, hearing protection, harness/manline (optional depend-
ing on space constraints), heat resistant/flame retardant coveralls and
gloves.
Establish an attendant to maintain visual contact with personnel in-

side the turbine compartment and radio communications with the
control room operator.
During the first start-up after a disassembly, visually check all connections
for fuel leaks. Preferably check the fittings during the warm-up period
when pressures are low. Visually inspect the fittings again at full speed, no
load, and at full load. Do not attempt to correct leakage problems by tight-
ening fittings and/or bolting while lines are fully pressurized. Note area in
question and, depending on severity of leak, repair at next shutdown, or
if required shut unit down immediately. Attempts to correct leakage prob-
lem on pressurized lines could lead to sudden and complete failure of com-
ponent and resulting damage to equipment and personnel injury.
UOGTNODLN–10
a. Bleed fuel oil filters, if appropriate. Then check entire fuel system and the area immediately
around the fuel nozzle for leaks. In particular check for leaks at the following points:
Turbine Compartment
(1) Fuel piping/tubing to fuel nozzle
(2) Fuel check valves
(3) Atomizing air manifold and associated piping (when used)
(4) Gas manifold and associated piping (when used)
Accessory Compartment or Fuel Module
(1) Flow divider (when used)
(2) Fuel and water pumps
(3) Filter covers and drains
CAUTION
Elimination of fuel leakage in the turbine compartment is of extreme impor-

tance as a fire preventive measure.
b. Monitor FLAME status on the processor to verify all flame detectors are correctly indicat-
ing flame. Two sight glasses are included as part of the unit startup kit. Use of sight glasses to be
limited to initial startup and special requirements, as opposed to normal operation. Following
initial startup remove sight glasses and plug opening.
c. Monitor the turbine control system readings on the processor for unusual exhaust thermo-
couple temperature, wheelspace temperature, lube oil drain temperature, highest to lowest ex-
haust temperature spreads and “hot spots” i.e. combustion chamber(s) burning hotter than all
the others.
d. Listen for unusual noises and rubbing.
e. Monitor for excessive vibration.
3. Automatic, Remote
On initial startup, permit the gas turbine to operate for a 30 to 60 minute period in a full speed, no
load condition. This time period allows for uniform and stabilized heating of the parts and fluids.
Tests and checks listed below are to supplement those recorded in Control Specification — Control
System Adjustments. Record all data for future comparison and investigation.
a. Continue monitoring for unusual rubbing noises and shutdown immediately if noise persists.
b. Monitor lube oil tank, header and bearing drain temperatures continually during the heating pe-
riod. Refer to the Schematic Piping Diagram — Summary Sheets for temperature guidelines.
Adjust VTRs if required.
UOGTNODLN–11
c. At this time a thorough vibration check is recommended, using vibration test equipment such as
IRD equipment (IRD Mechanalysis, Inc.) or equivalent with filtered or unfiltered readings. It is
suggested that horizontal, vertical and axial data be recorded for the:
(1) accessory gear (when used) forward and aft sides
(2) all accessible bearing covers on the turbine
(3) turbine forward compressor casing
(4) turbine support legs
(5) reduction gear (when used) forward and aft sides, gear and pinion
(6) bearing covers on the load equipment

d. Check wheelspace, exhaust and control thermocouples for proper indication on the CRT.
Record these values for future reference.
e. Flame detector operation should be tested per the Control Specification — Control System Ad-
justments.
f. Utilize all planned shutdowns in testing the Overspeed Trip System per the Control Specifica-
tions — Control System Adjustments. Refer to Special Operations section of this text.
g. Monitor CRT display data for proper operation.
III. OPERATING PROCEDURES
A. General
The following instructions pertain to the operation of a model series 5001, 6001, 7001EA or 9001E gas
turbine unit designed for generator drive application. These instructions are based on use of Mark V
SPEEDTRONIC turbine control panels.
Functional description of the CRT Main Display follows; however, panel installation, calibration,
and maintenance are not included.
Operational information includes startup and shutdown sequencing in the AUTO mode of operation.
The most common causes of alarm messages can be found in the concluding section.
It is not intended to cover initial turbine operation herein; rather, it will be assumed that initial startup,
calibration and checkouts have been completed. The turbine is in the cooldown or standby mode ready
for normal operation with AC and DC power available for all pumps, motors, heaters, and controls and
all annunciator drops are cleared.
Refer to the Control Specifications in this volume, and the previously furnished Control Sequence Pro-
gram (CSP) for additional operating sequence information and related diagrams.
UOGTNODLN–12
B. Start-Up
1. General
Operation of a single turbine/generator unit may be accomplished either locally or remotely.
The following description lists operator, control system and machine actions or events in starting the
gas turbine.
Reference the section “Description of Panels and Terms — Turbine Control Panel” for description
of turbine panel devices. The following assumes that the unit is off of cooldown, and in a ready to
start condition.
2. Starting Procedure
a. Using the cursor positioning device, select “MAIN” display from the DEMAND DISPLAY
menu.
(1) The display will indicate speed, temperature, various conditions etc. Three lines displayed
on the CRT will read:
SHUTDOWN STATUS
OFF COOLDOWN
OFF
b. Select “AUTO” and “EXECUTE”
(1) The CRT display will change to:
STARTUP STATUS
READY TO START
AUTO
c. Select “START” and “EXECUTE”
(1) Unit auxiliaries will be started including a motor driven lube oil pump used to establish lube
oil pressure. The CRT message SEQ IN PROGRESS will appear.
(2) If the starting clutch is not engaged, the rotor turning device will operate until the clutch
engages. With the clutch engaged, the lube oil pressure and all other permissives satisfied,
the master protective logic (L4) will be satisfied. The CRT display will change to:
STARTUP STATUS
STARTING
AUTO;
START
(3) Where a diesel engine is utilized as starting equipment, the starting diesel will start and run
at idle for two minutes to warm up. At the end of the diesel warmup period, the rotor turning
device will operate continuously and the diesel will accelerate. Where an electric motor is
utilized as starting equipment, the motor will start immediately.
UOGTNODLN–13
(4) The turbine shaft will begin to rotate and accelerate. When the unit reaches approximately
10 rpm, the turning device will be turned off. The CRT display will change to START-
UP STATUS/CRANKING. The zero speed signal “14HR” will be displayed.
(5) When the unit reaches approximately 20% speed, the minimum speed signal “14HM” will
be displayed on the CRT. (For machines with cooling water fan motors receiving power
from the generator terminals via the UCAT transformer, field flashing will be initiated to
build up generator voltage to power the fans; otherwise, field flashing to build up generator
voltage will occur at operating speed.)
(6) If the unit configuration requires purging of the gas path prior to ignition, the starting device
will crank the gas turbine at purge speed for a period of time determined by the setting of the
purge timer. See Control Specifications-Settings Drawing for purge timer settings.
(7) FSR will be set to firing value. (FSR, Fuel Stroke Reference, is the electrical signal that de-
termines the amount of fuel delivered to the turbine combustion system.) Ignition sequence
is initiated. The CRT display will change to START UP STATUS/FIRING.
(8) When flame is established, the CRT display will indicate flame in those combustors
equipped with flame detectors.
(9) FSR is set back to warm-up value, and the CRT display will indicate STARTUP STA-
TUS/WARMING UP. If the flame goes out during the 60 second firing period, FSR will be
reset to firing value. (At the end of the ignition period, if flame has not been established, the
unit will remain at firing speed.) At this time the operator may shut the unit down or attempt
to fire again. To fire again select CRANK on the Main Display. The purge timer and firing
timer are reinitialized. The purge timer will begin to time. Reselecting AUTO will cause the
ignition sequence to repeat itself after the purge timer has timed out. If the unit is being oper-
ated remotely (REMOTE having previously been selected on the Main Display), and no fire
has been established at the end of the ignition period, the unit will be purged of unburned
fuel. At the end of the purge period (normally 1 to 2 minutes) ignition will be attempted
again. If flame is not established at this time, the starting sequence will be terminated and the
unit will shutdown.
At the end of the warmup period, with flame established, FSR will begin increasing. The
 CRT will indicate STARTUP STATUS/ACCELERATING and the turbine will increase
in speed. At approximately 50% speed, the accelerating speed signal “14HA” will be dis-
played on the CRT.
(10) The turbine will continue to accelerate. When it reaches about 60% speed, the starting de-
vice will disengage and shutdown (if the starting device is a diesel engine, it will cooldown
at idle speed before shutting down). The CRT will indicate the change in status from
STARTUP CONTROL to SPEED CONTROL at approximately 60% speed.
(11) When the turbine reaches operating speed, the operating speed signal “14HS” will be dis-
played on the CRT. The motor-driven lube oil pump will shutdown, since lube oil is
being supplied by the shaft driven pump. Field flashing is terminated. If the synchronizing
selector switch (43S) on the generator control panel is in the OFF position and REMOTE is
not selected on the CRT, as the turbine reaches operating speed, CRT will now read:
UOGTNODLN–14
RUN STATUS
FULL SPEED NO LOAD
AUTO; START
If the synchronizing selector switch on the generator panel is in the AUTO position or RE-
MOTE is selected on the CRT automatic synchronizing is initiated. The CRT will read
SYNCHRONIZING.
The turbine speed is matched to the system (to less than 1/3 Hz difference) and when the proper
phase relationship is achieved the generator breaker will close. The machine will load to Spin-
ning Reserve unless a load control point BASE, PEAK or PRESELECTED LOAD has been
selected.
The CRT will display SPINNING RESERVE, once the unit has reached this load point.
C. Synchronizing
When a gas turbine-driven synchronous generator is connected into a power transmission system, the
phase angle of the generator going on-line must correspond to the phase angle of the existing line voltage
at the moment of its introduction into the system. This is called synchronizing.
CAUTION
Before initiating synchronization procedures, be sure that all synchronization

equipment is functioning properly, and that the phase sequence of the incoming
unit corresponds to the existing line phase sequence and the potential trans-
formers are connected correctly to proper phases. Initial synchronization and
checkout after performing maintenance to synchronizing equipment should be
performed with the breaker racked out.
NOTE
Synchronizing cannot take place unless AUTO or REMOTE has been selected on
the CRT Main Display and the turbine has reached full speed.
Generator synchronization can be accomplished either automatically or manually. Manual synchroniza-

tion is accomplished by the following procedure:
1. Place the synchronizing selector switch on the generator panel (43S) in the MANUAL position.
2. Select AUTO on the CRT Main Display.
3. Select START and EXECUTE on the CRT Main Display. This will start the turbine and acceler-
ate it to full speed as previously described. At this point the CRT will indicate RUN STATUS, FULL
SPEED NO LOAD.
4. Compare the generator voltage with the line voltage. (These voltmeters are located on the generator
control panel.)
5. Make any necessary voltage adjustment by operating the RAISE- LOWER (90R4) switch on the
generator panel until the generator voltage equals the line voltage.
UOGTNODLN–15
6. Compare the generator and line frequency on the synchroscope (located on the generator control
panel). If the pointer is rotating counterclockwise, the generator frequency is lower than the line fre-
quency and should be raised by increasing the turbine-generator speed. The brightness of the syn-
chronizing lights will change with the rotation of the synchroscope. When the lights are their dullest
the synchroscope will be at the 12 o’clock position. The lights should not be used to synchronize but
only to verify proper operation of the synchroscope.
7. Adjust the speed until the synchroscope rotates clockwise at approximately five seconds per revolu-
tion or slower.
8. The generator circuit breaker “close” signal should be given when it reaches a point approximately
one minute before the 12 o’clock position. This allows for a time lag for the breaker contacts to close
after receiving the close signal.
Automatic synchronization is accomplished by the following steps:
1. Place the synchronizing selector switch (43S) in the AUTO position.

2. Select AUTO on the CRT Main Display.
3. Select START on the CRT Main Display.
This procedure will start the turbine, and upon attainment of “complete sequence”, match generator volt-
age to line voltage (if equipped with optional voltage matching), synchronize the generator to the line
frequency, and load the generator to the preselected value. A “breaker closed” indicator will actuate
when the generator circuit breaker has closed placing the synchronized unit on-line.
Once the generator has been connected to the power system, the turbine fuel flow may be increased to
pick up load, and the generator excitation may be adjusted to obtain the desired KVAR value.
* * * WARNING * * *
Failure to synchronize properly may result in equipment damage and/or

failure, or the creation of circumstances which could result in the automat-
ic removal of generating capacity from the power system.
In those cases where out-of-phase breaker closures are not so serious as to cause immediate equipment
failure or system disruption, cumulative damage may result to the on-coming generator. Repeated occur-
rences of out-of-phase breaker closures can eventually result in generator failure because of the stresses
created at the time of closure. Gear damage may result on load packages with a reduction gear in the gas
turbine-generator train. Such damage may occur separately or in conjunction with generator damage
from out-of-phase breaker closure. Damage may be to the gear teeth or to the quill shaft (if there is a
quill shaft).
Out-of-phase breaker closure of a magnitude sufficient to cause either immediate or cumulative equip-
ment damage mentioned above will usually result in annunciator drops to notify the operator of the prob-
lem. The following alarms have been displayed at various occurrences of known generator breaker mal-
closures:
1. High vibration trip

2. Loss of excitation
UOGTNODLN–16
3. Various AC undervoltage drops
Out-of-phase breaker closure will result in abnormal generator noise and vibration at the time of closure.
If there is reason to suspect such breaker malclosure, the equipment should be immediately inspected
to determine the cause of the malclosure and for any damage to the generator and/or reduction gear.
Refer to the “Control and Protection” section of this volume for additional information on the synchro-
nizing system.
D. Normal Load Operation
1. Manual Loading
Manual loading is accomplished by clicking on the SPEED SP RAISE/SPEED SP LOWER targets

on the CRT Main Display.
Manual loading can also be accomplished by means of the governor control switch (70R4/CS) on
the generator control panel. Holding the switch to the right will increase the load; holding it to the left
will decrease the load.
Manual loading beyond the selected temperature control point BASE or PEAK is not possible. The
manual loading rate is shown in the Control Specification-Settings Drawing.
NOTE
When manually loading with the governor control switch (70R4/CS) for load
changes greater than 25% of full load, the operator should not change more than
25% of full load in one minute.
2. Automatic Loading
On startup if no load point is selected, the unit will load to the SPINNING RESERVE load point. The
SPINNING RESERVE load point is slightly greater than no load, typically 8% of base rating.
An intermediate load point, PRE-SELECTED load, and temperature control load points BASE and
PEAK can be selected anytime after a start signal has been given. The selection will be displayed on
the CRT. The unit will load to the selected load point. PRESELECTED LOAD is a load point
greater than SPINNING RESERVE and less than BASE, typically 50%. The auto loading rate is
shown in Control Specification-Settings Drawing.
E. Remote Operation
To transfer turbine control from the control compartment to remotely located equipment, select RE-
MOTE on the CRT Main Display. The turbine may then be started, automatically synchronized, and
loaded by the remote equipment.
If manual synchronization is to be performed at the remote location, the synchronizing selector switch
(43S) mounted on the generator control panel must be placed in the OFF/REMOTE position.
UOGTNODLN–17
F. Shutdown and Cooldown
1. Normal Shutdown
Normal shutdown is initiated by selecting STOP on the CRT Main Display. The shutdown pro-
cedure will follow automatically through generator unloading, turbine speed reduction, fuel shutoff
at part speed and initiation of the cooldown sequence as the unit comes to rest.
2. Emergency Shutdown
Emergency shutdown is initiated by depressing the EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton. An emergen-

cy shutdown can also be mechanically initiated by pushing the manual emergency trip valve on the
gauge cabinet assembly, or the manual trip button on the overspeed trip mechanism mounted on the
side of the accessory gear. Cooldown operation after emergency shutdown is also automatic pro-
vided the permissives for this operation are met.
3. Cooldown
Immediately following a shutdown, after the turbine has been in the fired mode, the rotor is turned to
provide uniform cooling. Uniform cooling of the turbine rotor prevents rotor bowing, resultant rub-
bing and imbalance, and related damage that might otherwise occur when subsequent starts are at-
tempted without cooldown. The turbine can be started and loaded at any time during the cooldown
cycle.
The cooldown cycle may be accelerated using the starting device; in which case it will be operated at
cranking speed. On units having an electric motor as the starting device, the operator must heed
instructions regarding the length of time the motor can be operated without overheating. Refer to the
control specifications.
The device furnished for cooldown rotation on MS 5001P, MS 6001B, and MS 7001EA units is
the hydraulic ratchet which is mounted as part of the torque converter. The ratchet cycles once
every 3.0 minutes to turn the rotor 47°. A description of rotor turning operation and servicing
can be found in the Starting System tab. The MS 9001E is a continuous turning gear system at
6.0 rpm.
The minimum time required for turbine cooldown depends mainly on the turbine ambient tem-
perature. Other factors, such as wind direction and velocity in outdoor installations and air
drafts in indoor installations, can have an affect on the time required for cooldown. The cool-
down times recommended in the following paragraphs are the result of GE Company operating
experience in both factory and field testing of GE gas turbines. The purchaser may find that
these times can be modified as experience is gained in operation of the gas turbine under his
particular site conditions.
Cooldown times should not be accelerated by opening up the turbine compartment doors or the
lagging panels since uneven cooling of the outer casings may result in excessive stress.
The unit must be on rotor turning operation immediately following a shutdown for at least 24
hours to ensure minimum protection against rubs and unbalance on a subsequent starting at-
tempt. The GE Company, however, recommends that the rotor turning operation continue for 48
hours after shutdown to ensure uniform rotor cooling.
UOGTNODLN–18
To terminate the cooldown sequence, prior to timer timeout select the Auxiliary Control Dis-
play on the CRT. Select “RATCHET OFF”. This will cause the cooldown auxiliaries to be
turned off. Similarly, by selecting the “RATCHET ON” target, the cooldown auxiliaries can be
reinstated.
G. Special Operations
1. Black Start Operation

(Optional with Gas Turbines equipped with a diesel engine starting device)
a. General
Gas turbine operation under “black start” conditions is defined as a requirement to start and run
the turbine when an external AC power source is not available. Diesel engines are normally uti-
lized as starting equipment with other compatible steam or gas starting means optional.
The prime DC controlling power for the turbine control system is derived from the unit battery.
Ignition and internal AC control power is obtained through DC conversion circuitry within the
SPEEDTRONIC power supply system.
b. Operation
When the turbine is started, the DC emergency lube pump will supply adequate lubrication until
the accessory gear-driven main lube oil pump pressure is established. The emergency pump
continues to run until the accelerating speed signal (14HA) indicates that the unit has acceler-
ated to 50% speed. The emergency pump then shuts down if lube oil pressure switch (63QL)
indicates adequate pressure.
Black start operation also requires the addition of the 88HR DC hydraulic ratchet pump assem-
bly. This unit furnishes the required hydraulic control oil pressure for operation of the starting
clutch and ratchet assembly.
For liquid fuel machines, fuel pressure delivered to the input of the turbine gear driven fuel
pump is provided by a dc/ac powered fuel forwarding pump. The DC motor drives the pump
until AC power is available to drive the AC motor. The turbine high pressure fuel oil require-
ments are satisfied by the normal accessory gear driven fuel pump.
Gas turbine AC powered cooling system fan drive motors are operated from partial to full power
by driven load generator output, as the gas turbine is brought up to operational speed level.
During turbine shutdown and cooldown periods, the operational lube supply is again furnished
by the emergency DC lube pump and the 88HR DC hydraulic ratchet supply pump assembly
mentioned previously operates to turn the rotor.
Refer to the Lube Oil and Hydraulic Oil Supply Schematic Piping Diagrams; and the SPEED-
TRONIC Control instructions of this service manual for further related information.
UOGTNODLN–19
2. Fuel Transfer (Gas-Distillate Option)
Fuel transfer is initiated using the Fuel Mixture Display on the CRT. When transferring from one
fuel to the other, there is a thirty second delay before the transfer begins. For the gas-to-distillate
transfer, the delay allows for filling the liquid fuel lines. For the distillate-to-gas transfer, the delay
allows time for the speed ratio valve (and gas control valve) to modulate the inter volume gas pres-
sure before the transfer begins. Once started, fuel transfer takes approximately thirty seconds. The
transfer can be stopped at any fuel mixture proportion within limits as specified in the Control Speci-
fication-Settings Drawing by setting the FUEL MIX SETPOINT and then selecting MIX. Fuel
transfer should be initiated prior to ignition or after the unit reaches operating speed.
3. Automatic Fuel Transfer On Low Gas Pressure (Gas-Distillate Option)
In the event of low fuel gas pressure the turbine will transfer to liquid fuel. The transfer will occur
with no delay for line filling. To return to gas fuel operation after an automatic transfer, manually
reselect gas fuel.
4. Diesel Testing (Optional on MS 5001 and MS 6001 Units)
The starting diesel may be tested either with the turbine operating or while shutdown. To test the
diesel, first select the Auxiliary Control Display on the CRT. Select the “DIESEL TEST ON”
target. The diesel can now be tested by operating the diesel test pushbutton located on the accessory
base. The diesel will run at idle speed as long as the pushbutton is held in. (Do not exceed two (2)
minutes.)
5. Jogging Turbine Rotor (MS 5001 and MS 6001 Units)
A pushbutton (43HR) located on the accessory base is provided for manual jogging of the turbine
shaft by means of the hydraulic ratchet.
6. Testing the Emergency DC Lube Pump
The DC emergency pump may be tested using the test pushbutton on the motor starter.
7. Overspeed Trip Checks
Overspeed trip system testing should be performed on an annual basis on peaking and intermittently
used gas turbines. On continuously operated units, the test should be performed at each scheduled
shutdown and after each major overhaul. All units should be tested after an extended shutdown peri-
od of two or more months unless otherwise specified in the Control Specifications-Adjustments
Drawing.
NOTE
The turbine should be operated for at least 30 minutes at rated speed before
checking the overspeed settings. This will allow determination of the actual
trip speed, which might be higher or lower than the “cold” trip speed depend-
ing upon several contributing factors, such as oil temperature and vibration.
UOGTNODLN–20
8. Electrical Overspeed
Turbine speed is controlled by the turbine speed reference signal TNR. The maximum speed called
for by TNR is limited by the high speed stop control constant. This value is nominally set at 107% of
rated speed. It will be necessary to enter a new constant value for the high speed stop constant that
will allow the speed to increase above the electrical overspeed trip setting. New constants can be
entered with the Control Constant Adjust display activated and via the keypad. Reference the
control specification and the SPEEDTRONIC Mark V Maintenance Manual (GEH 5980) for de-
tails. For security, an identification code must be entered via the keypad in order to make any
changes to the control system constants. With the high speed stop constant adjusted to be higher than
the electrical overspeed trip speed, raise unit speed gradually by using the SPEED SP RAISE target
on the Main Display and observe speed at which the unit trips against the value tabulated in the
Control Specifications — Setting drawing.
CAUTION
1. Do not exceed the maximum search speed as defined in the Control

Specifications.
2. Return all constants to their normal value after coastdown of unit.
9. Mechanical Overspeed (if applicable)
In order to test the mechanical overspeed bolt it is necessary to change the electrical overspeed trip
setting constant to be greater than the mechanical overspeed bolt overspeed setting. After changing
the required constants raise unit speed gradually by using the SPEED SP RAISE target on the 
Main Display and observe speed at which the unit trips against the value tabulated in the Control
Specifications — Settings drawing.
CAUTION
1. Do not exceed the maximum search speed as defined in the Control

Specifications.
2. Return all constants to their normal values following tests.
3. Reset mechanical overspeed trip mechanism on unit accessory gear.
Record all trip speeds. Mechanical testing should also include the emergency trip button on the tur-
bine control panel and the manual overspeed mechanical trip located on the right side of the accesso-
ry gear. Successful completion of the above tests will assure that all shutdown devices are operating
correctly.
To reduce the possibility of overspeed bolt trip system degradation where the trip speed becomes
excessively high, especially after long periods of inactivity, it is recommended that the mechanical
bolt be tested periodically by carefully overspeeding the turbine and noting the speed at which the
trip occurs. If the trip does not occur within the limits, as defined in the Control Specifications, the
bolt should be sparingly oiled in place with a lightweight machine oil, stroked by manually depress-
ing the plunger several times through its stroke limits, and retested. The overspeed bolt should then
be tripped three successive times within 1% of nominal trip speed and within 1% repeatability unless
defined otherwise in the Control Specifications.
UOGTNODLN–21
CAUTION
1. Do not exceed the maximum search speed as defined in the Control Speci-
fications.
2. The turbine should not be operated unless the overspeed bolt, the over-
speed trip mechanisms, the fuel stop valves and other shutdown devices are
in reliable condition.
If a trip does not occur within reliable limits, refer to the adjustment instructions in the Service
Manual, Protection System, Overspeed Bolt Assembly. If three successive trips do not occur within
acceptable repeatability limits, see instructions for Maintenance and Replacement or contact your
Field Service Representative for assistance.
10. Steam Injection Operation (Optional)
Before operating the steam injection system for the first time following an overhaul or periods of
extended shutdown, it is important that the following checks be made:
a. Steam supply is within design parameters
b. Instrument air supply is at required pressure
c. Steam line orifice size is correct
a. Pre-Operation Checks
Prior to operation, check for the following conditions:

a. CRT controls are in non-select positions (Steam Injection OFF)
b. Manual stop valve is open
c. All hand valves in line of flow are open
d. All valves to temperature or pressure gauges are open
e. Steam supply pressure and temperature are in operating range
b. Startup
The automatic control system, in conjunction with logic circuits of the microcomputer of the
SPEEDTRONIC control system, operates the steam injection system control valving and as-
sures that the proper amount of steam injection is provided to the turbine combustion system
during operation.
To initiate steam injection the operator must first select the Steam Injection Overview Display
on the CRT. Selecting the STM INJ ON target initiates the steam injection control. At this
point the automatic steam control circuits will take over, initiate the drain and stop valve se-
quences and control the system. When steam conditions are correct, the steam control valve re-
leases steam into the combustion system at the proper steam-to-fuel flow ratio.
The startup and operating sequence of the steam injection system is described and explained in
the Steam Injection control system text of the Control and Protection Tab.
UOGTNODLN–22
c. Trouble Shooting
The purpose of the system is to provide steam to the turbine combustion system at the desired
pressure, temperature and flow. If this does not happen, the following problems may be the
cause:
(1) Steam supply exhausted
(2) Insufficient supply pressure
(3) Control valve closed
(4) Stop valve closed
The following should be checked:
(1) Adequate steam supply
(2) Check steam supply system
(3) Check control valve actuator and drain valve operation
(4) Check that instrument air supply pressure is sufficient and/or check solenoid control valve
operation.
Alarm and shutdown conditions of the steam injection system are detected by a protection pro-
gram built into Control Sequence Program. Alarm and trip indications are displayed on the 
CRT. An alarm condition is initiated by high or low pressure levels and by high or low tempera-
tures. See Control Specifications for alarm and trip point values.
The computer program is designed to trip the steam stop valve and prevent steam flow if steam
temperature becomes too high or too low. It can trip the system on temperature or pressure to
protect against loss of superheat and carry over of condensate. Steam at too high a pressure can
cause damage to valve stem packing and system seals. A steam injection trip only shuts down
the steam injection system. It does not trip the turbine.
11. Water Washing System Operation (Optional)
a. General
Water washing should be scheduled during a normal shutdown, if possible. This will allow
enough time for the internal machine temperature to drop to the required levels for the washing.
The time required to cool the machine can be shortened by maintaining the unit at crank speed.
During this cooling of the turbine, the wash water is to be heated to the proper level.
b. Mandatory Precautions
Before water washing of the compressor begins, the turbine blading temperature must be low
enough so that the water does not cause thermal shock.
UOGTNODLN–23
CAUTION
The differential temperature between the wash water and the interstage wheel-
space temperature must not be greater than 120°F (48.9°C) to prevent thermal
shock to the hot gas parts. For wash water of 180°F (82.2°C), the maximum
wheelspace temperature must be no greater than 300°F (148.9°C) as measured
by the digital thermocouple readout system on the turbine control panel.
To reduce this difference, the wash water may be heated and the turbine kept on crank until the
wheelspace temperatures drop to an acceptable level. The wheelspace temperatures are read in
the control room on the CRT.
CAUTION
If, during operation, there has been an increase in exhaust temperature spread
above the normal 15°F to 30°F (8.3°C to 16.6°C), the thermocouples in the ex-
haust plenum should be examined. If they are coated with ash, the ash should
be removed.
Radiation shields should also be checked. If they are not radially oriented rela-
tive to the turbine, they should be repositioned per the appropriate drawing. If
the thermocouples are coated with ash, or if the radiation shields are not proper-
ly oriented, a correct temperature reading will not be obtained.
If neither of the above conditions exists and there is no other explanation for the temperature
spread, consult the GE Installation and Service Engineering representative.
* * * WARNING * * *
The water wash operation involves water under high pressure. Caution
must be exercised to ensure the proper positioning of all valves during this
operation. Since the water may also be hot, necessary precautions should
be taken in handling valves, pipes, and potentially hot surfaces.
NOTE
Before water washing the compressor, inspect the inlet plenum and gas turbine
bellmouth for large accumulations of atmospheric contaminants which could be
washed into the compressor. These deposits can be removed by washing with a
garden hose.
c. Water Wash Procedures
Refer to cleaning publication included in this section for details on procedures.
12. Standby Gas Turbines on Extended Shutdown
The GE Company recommends the following procedures for gas turbines subject to extended shut-
downs.
UOGTNODLN–24
a. The turbine rotor should be operated on turning gear or ratchet for one hour each day to prevent
the buildup of corrosive deposits in the turbine wheel dovetails, OR
b. The gas turbine should be operated at full speed, no load for one hour per week to dry the turbine
out and thereby preventing moisture condensation in the turbine wheel dovetail crevices.
IV. DESCRIPTION OF PANELS AND TERMS
A. Turbine Control Panel (TCP)
The turbine control panel contains the hardware and software required to operate the turbine.
EMERGENCY STOP (5E) — This red pushbutton is located on the front of the TCP. Operation of this
pushbutton immediately shuts off turbine fuel.
BACKUP OPERATOR INTERFACE (BOI) — This interactive display is mounted on the front of the
TCP. All operator commands can be issued from this module. In addition, alarm management can be
performed and turbine parameters can be monitored from the <BOI>.
B. CRT
The CRT is a personal computer that directly interfaces to the turbine control panel. This is the pri-
mary operator station. All operator commands can be issued from the CRT. Alarm management can
be performed and turbine parameters can be monitored. With the proper password, editing can also be
accomplished.
1. Main Display
Operator selector targets and master control selector targets can be actuated from the main display
by using the cursor positioning device (CPD). Operator selector targets include:
OFF — Inhibits a start signal.
CRANK — With crank selected, a start signal will bring the machine to cranking speed (14HM).
FIRE — With FIRE selected, a START signal will bring the machine to minimum speed and estab-
lish flame in the combustors. Selecting FIRE while the machine is on CRANK will initiate the firing
sequence and establish flame in the combustors.
AUTO — With AUTO selected, a START signal will bring the machine to operating speed. Chang-
ing selections from FIRE to AUTO will allow the machine to accelerate to operating speed.
REMOTE — With REMOTE selected, control for the unit is transferred to the remote control equip-
ment.
Master control selector targets include:
START — A START selection will cause the unit to start. With AUTO selected, the unit will load to
the SPINNING RESERVE load point.
UOGTNODLN–25
FAST START - A FAST START selection will cause the unit to start. With AUTO selected, the unit
will load to the PRESELECTED load point. The machine will load at the manual loading rate.
STOP - A STOP selection will cause the unit to initiate a normal shutdown.
All operator selector switches and master control selector targets are green and are located on the
right side of the display. All green targets are the AUTO/EXECUTE type, which means that the tar-
get must be selected with the CPD and then, within three seconds, the EXECUTE target at the bot-
tom of the display must also be selected in order to actuate that command.
2. Load Control Display
Load selector targets can be actuated from the load control display by using the cursor positioning
device (CPD). Load selector targets include:
PRESEL - Select the preselected load point.
BASE - Select base temperature control load point.
*PEAK - Select peak temperature control load point.
3. *Fuel Mixture Display
Fuel selector targets are used to select the desired fuel by using the cursor positioning device (CPD).
Fuel selector targets include:
GAS SELECT - 100% gas fuel operation.
DIST SELECT - 100% distillate fuel operation.
MIX SELECT - Selecting MIX while on 100% single fuel will cause the machine to transfer to
mixed fuel operation at a preset mixture.
4. *Isochronous Setpoint Display
Governor selector targets are used to select the desired type of speed control by using the cursor posi-
tioning device (CPD). Governor selector targets include:
DROOP SELECT - Used to select droop speed control.
ISOCH SELECT - Used to select isochronous speed control.
5. *Inlet Guide Vane Control Display
The inlet guide vane (IGV) temperature control targets are IGV TEMP CNTL ON and IGV TEMP
CNTL OFF. The IGV AUTO target selects normal operation of the IGVs. The IGV MANUAL tar-
get allows the maximum IGV angle to be manually set by the operator (not normally used while
on-line).
*Optional equipment
UOGTNODLN–26
6. Alarm Display
This screen displays the current un-reset alarms, the time when each alarm occurred, the alarm drop
number and a word description of the alarm. An “*” indicates that the alarm has not been acknowl-
edged. The “*” disappears after the alarm has been acknowledged. For more information, see the
Mark V Users’ Manual (GEH 5979).
7. Auxiliary Display
COOLDOWN ON and COOLDOWN OFF can be selected from this display. The DIESEL TEST
ON and DIESEL TEST OFF targets (if diesel starting means is used) can also be selected from this
display. Selecting the DIESEL TEST ON target enables the permissive which allows the Diesel Test
Pushbutton to be manually operated.
8. *Mechanical Overspeed Test Display
After selecting the ENABLE SOFTSW’s target, the OVERSPEED TEST HP target can be selected.
This will adjust the electrical overspeed setpoint to allow testing of the mechanical overspeed
equipment.
9. Manual Reset Target
Selecting the manual reset target resets the Master Reset Lockout function. This target must be se-
lected so that the unit can be restarted following a trip.
C. Definition of Terms
SPINNING RESERVE - The minimum load control point based on generator output. The spinning re-
serve magnitude in MWs can be found in the control specifications (5–10% of rating is a typical value).
PRESELECTED LOAD - A load control point based on generator output. The preselected load point
is adjustable within a range designated in the Control Specification. The preselected load point is nor-
mally set below the base load point (50–60% of rating is a typical value).
BASE LOAD - This is the normal maximum loading for continuous turbine operation as determined by
turbine exhaust temperature levels.
PEAK LOAD (Optional) - This is the maximum allowable output permitted for relatively long-duration,
emergency power requirement situations consistent with acceptable turbine parts life. Peak loading
duration is based on turbine exhaust temperature levels.
D. Generator Control Panel (Typical)
SYNCHRONIZING LAMPS — Rough indication of the speed and phase relationship between the gen-
erator and the bus.
FREQUENCY METER — Indicates generator frequency.
INCOMING VOLTMETER — Indicates generator voltage.
UOGTNODLN–27
RUN VOLTMETER — Indicates bus voltage.
SYNCHROSCOPE — Indicates the phase relationship between the generator and bus voltage.
GENERATOR AMMETER — Indicates generator phase current. The phase current to be read is se-
lected on the three position ammeter selector switch.
GENERATOR WATTMETER — Indicates the generator output in megawatts.
GENERATOR VARMETER — Indicates the generator reactive output in megavars.
GENERATOR TEMPERATURE METER — (Traditionally included on the Generator Control Panel,

but actually displayed in Mark V SPEEDTRONIC systems on the CRT.) Reads the generator Re-
sistance Temperature Detector (RTD) selected by the temperature meter selector switch.
EXCITER VOLTMETER — Indicates generator field voltage (if used).
GENERATOR FIELD AMMETER — Indicates generator field amperes (if used).
AMMETER SELECTOR SWITCH — See Generator Ammeter (above).
SYNCHRONIZING SELECTOR SWITCH (43S/CS) — Three position switch used to select the syn-
chronizing mode.
Manual — Selects manual synchronizing mode. In this position the generator frequency and voltage,
bus voltage, and phase relationship will be displayed to facilitate manual synchronizing.
Off/Remote — Used when the unit is being controlled from the remote control equipment.
Auto — Used for local automatic synchronizing.
VOLTMETER SWITCH (VS) — Used to select the phase of the bus voltage to be displayed on the run
voltmeter.
TEMPERATURE METER SELECTOR SWITCH — Traditionally included on the Generator Control

Panel, but actually displayed in Mark V SPEEDTRONIC systems on the CRT.
VOLTAGE/VAR CONTROL SWITCH (90R4/CS) — Controls generator voltage when the unit is off
the line, and controls voltage/vars when the machine is on the line. (Increase — Right; Decrease — Left;
spring return to normal.)
GENERATOR BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH (52G/CS) — Used to open or close the generator
breaker. The indicator lights above the switch indicate Open (Green) and Closed (Red).
NOTE
Using this switch, the generator breaker should be closed only when proper syn-
chronizing techniques are used or when the system onto which the generator is be-
ing brought is not energized.
GENERATOR DIFFERENTIAL LOCK-OUT SWITCH (86G) — Manual reset lockout switch which
operates in the event of a generator fault.
UOGTNODLN–28
GOVERNOR RAISE/LOWER CONTROL SWITCH (70R4/CS) — Used to control turbine speed

when the generator is off the line (i.e. for manual synchronizing); generator load when the generator is
on the line; and frequency when the generator is running isolated and on DROOP speed control.
TRANSFORMER DIFFERENTIAL LOCK-OUT SWITCH (86T) — Manual reset lockout switch

which operates in the event of a transformer fault.
WATTHOUR METER — Measures the watthour output of the generator.
E. Motor Control Center
The turbine is provided with a motor control center for the control of the electrical auxiliaries. The motor
control center includes AC and DC distribution systems.
Motor controllers are used for auxiliaries such as motors and heaters. Each motor controller normally
consists of a breaker, control power transformer, control circuit, power contactor, selector switch and
indicator lights. The selector switch is normally left in AUTO. Each motor control center is also provided
with AC and DC distribution panel boards with circuit breakers.
F. Supervisory Remote Equipment
Supervisory equipment is normally functionally the same as the equipment described in the cable con-
nected master panel. However, it may differ somewhat in metering and indications. Refer to the supervi-
sory manufacturer’s instruction manual for details.
G. Annunciator System
The attached alarm list is a maxcase of alarms that may be available. All alarms may not be used on this
project.
Alarms are displayed on the CRT when the ALARM Display mode is selected. Before clearing an
alarm, action should be taken to determine the cause and perform the necessary corrective action. The
following is a list of annunciator messages along with suggested operator action.
NOTE
The alarm messages can be categorized as either “trip” or “alarm”. The “trip” mes-
sages contain the word TRIP in the message. The “alarm” messages do not indicate
TRIP. For those alarms associated with permissive to start and trip logics latched
up through the MASTER RESET function, it will be necessary to call up the 
CRT Display with the Master Reset target in order to unlatch and clear these
alarms.
UOGTNODLN–29

DT-1C G
E
O
ffi
ci
al
SIZE DWG. NO. SH. REV.
A3 132B8218 1 E
9G3 Control Room

HMI
CRM3
Server Laser Color Laser Color
(moved from HMI HMI Printer Printer HMI
Network control room)
CRM1 CRM2 PRT1 PRT2 CRM4
Time Server
DCS Global
21"
Multi-Unit Multi-Unit Multi-Unit
Time RS2 32 PDH UDH Server Server Server
Source UPS- UPS- UPS-
BN Modbus (3) 110VAC 110VAC UPS- 110VAC
Ethernet GSM (1) 21" 21" UPS-
21"
TCP/IP+S1 UPS- UPS-
UDH PDH UDH PDH
110VAC 110VAC
UDH PDH
110VAC 110VAC
(1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (3) (3) (3)

(1)
(6) (4) (4)
SW17
PDH UDH ADH TRUNK
SW18
PDH UDH ADH TRUNK
UPS-
P49A P49A
UPS-
110VAC 110VAC
B
(1)
M
9G2 9G1
UPS- UPS- UPS-
SW5 110VAC 110VAC 110VAC
SW13 SW3
PDH
PDH
GCP GCP
BN Mark VI C (from 9G4) (5) BN Mark VI
UDH
GPP AVR GPP AVR

UDH
EPM
UDH
EX2100 D (from 9G5)
EPM
P49A EX2100
T60B
G60A
G60B
T S R P50A
T60B
G60B
G60A
RIM
T S R
RIM
V
M2 M1 E (from 9G6) V
TRUNK
max max M2 M1
ADH
ADH
P48A J (from 9G4) same I (from 9G4)
TRUNK
PDH
TRUNK
as
9G2
UPS- UPS- UPS-
SW6 110VAC 110VAC 110VAC
SW14 SW4
PDH
PDH
F (from 9G4) (5)
UDH
HMI HMI
UDH
G (from 9G5)
UDH
RS2 32 UDH PDH
P49A RS2 32 UDH PDH
9G3 H (from 9G6) P50A

9G2
TRUNK
20" UPS- UPS-

20"
ADH
ADH
Single-Unit 110VAC Single-Unit 110VAC
P48A L (from 9G4) K (from 9G4)
TRUNK
Server
PDH
TRUNK
Server
Alarm Printer Alarm Printer
UPS- UPS-
110VAC 110VAC
(1) Customer Supply

(2) (2) Fiber optic between units is provided by GE
Hardware Link / Cable Remote to Scada (3) 21" LCD Color monitors provided by customer
(4) One monitor displayed alarms
Fiber Optic: (1) Single mode max 15 km length - SC type connectors (5) Only used during 9G3 and 9G4 commissionning. To be removed when other units available
(6) Hardware signal exchange with DCS from each ECB
UDH: Unit Data Highway. Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cable, 4 pair, Category 5, RJ-45 connectors.
SIZE DWG NO
132B8218
PDH: Plant Data Highway. (UTP) cable, 4 pair, Category 5, RJ-45 connectors.
Trunk: cross-over UTP cable is used to connect a switch to a switch.
gGE Energy Products - Europe A3 4108
Fiber Optic: (2) Multimode max 2 km length - SC type connectors DRAWN by H Ginestous
JAMNAGAR PROJECT
SCALE SHEET
Time Synchronization: (1) Modulated IRIG-B time code signal, RG-58 Coaxial cable, BNC connector DATE 21 December 2006 CONT ON 1
DT-1C
A3 132B8218 2 E
9G4 Control Room

ROUTER1
Laser Color Laser Color
(optional)
Printer Printer
110VAC
PRT3 PRT4 UPS
Network HMI HMI

DCS Global
Time Server 2 CRM5 CRM6
Time Multi-Unit PERFORMANCE
Historian Multi-Unit OSM
Source UPS- UPS-
Server MONITOR
BN Modbus 11 0VAC 110VAC Server (optional)
Ethernet GSM (1)
TCP/IP+S1 UPS- UPS- UPS- UPS- UPS-
110VAC 110VAC 110VAC 110VAC 110VAC
21" 21" 21" 21" 21"
UPS-
(1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) 110VAC
UDH PDH
UDH PDH UDH PDH PDH UDH PDH
(6) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3)
SW19
SW20
PDH UDH ADH TRUNK PDH UDH ADH TRUNK
UPS- P49A UPS- P49A

110VAC 11 0VAC
(1)
(1) (6)
M
9G5 9G6
UPS- UPS- UPS-
SW7 110VAC SW15 110VAC SW9 110VAC
PDH
PDH
GCP GCP
BN Mark VI UDH
I (from 9G1) BN Mark VI
GPP AVR GPP AVR
UDH
EPM
UDH
EPM
EX2100
P49A J (from 9G2) EX2100
T60B
G60B
G60A
T S R P50A
G60B
G60A
RIM
T S R
T60B
RIM
C (from 9G3) (5)
V
max M2 M1 TRUNK V
max M2 M1
ADH
ADH
P48A same
TRUNK
PDH
TRUNK
D (from 9G3) as E (from 9G3)
9G5
UPS- UPS- UPS-
SW8 110VAC SW16 110VAC SW10 110VAC
PDH
PDH
K (from 9G1)
UDH
HMI HMI
UDH
UDH
RS2 32 UDH PDH
P49A L (from 9G2) RS2 32 UDH PDH
9G4 F (from 9G3) (5) 9G5 P50A

TRUNK
20" UPS- UPS-

20"
ADH
ADH
Single-Unit 110VAC Single-Unit 110VAC
P48A
TRUNK
PDH
Server
TRUNK
Alarm Printer
Server
Alarm Printer
UPS- UPS-
G (from 9G3) H (from 9G3)
110VAC 110VAC
(1) Customer Supply

(2) (2) Fiber optic between units is provided by GE
Hardware Link / Cable Remote to Scada (3) 21" LCD Color monitors provided by customer
(4) One monitor displayed alarms
Fiber Optic: (1) Single mode max 15 km length - SC type connectors (5) Only used during 9G3 and 9G4 commissionning. To be removed when other units available
(6) Hardware signal exchange with DCS from each ECB
SIZE DWG NO
132B8218
JAMNAGAR PROJECT
SCALE CONT ON SHEET
Time Synchronization: (1) Modulated IRIG-B time code signal, RG-58 Coaxial cable, BNC connector DATE 21 December 2006 2
A3 132B8218 3 E
Switch : SW1 Location : ECB 9G1 Switch : SW3 Location : ECB 9G2 Switch : SW5 Location : ECB 9G3
Type : 323A4747NZP50A Type : 323A4747NZP50A Type : 323A4747NZP49A
Port_1 GT1_SVR\PDHA Cat 5 PDH Port_1 GT2_SVR\PDHA Cat 5 PDH Port_1 GT3_SVR\PDHA Cat 5 PDH
Port_2 9G1\G60A Cat 5 PDH Port_2 9G2\G60A Cat 5 PDH Port_2 9G3\G60A Cat 5 PDH
Port_3 9G1\EPM Cat 5 PDH Port_3 9G2\EPM Cat 5 PDH Port_3 9G3\EPM Cat 5 PDH
Port_6 9G1\BN Cat 5 PDH Port_6 9G2\BN Cat 5 PDH Port_4 CRM3_SVR\PDHA Cat 5 PDH
Port_7 9G1\BN\RIM Cat 5 PDH Port_7 9G2\BN\RIM Cat 5 PDH Port_5 9G3_DCS\GSM-A_GT3_SVR Cat 5 PDH
Port_9 GT1_SVR\UDHA Cat 5 UDH Port_9 GT2_SVR\UDHA Cat 5 UDH Port_6 9G3\BN Cat 5 PDH
Port_10 9G1\R Cat 5 UDH Port_10 9G2\R Cat 5 UDH Port_7 9G3\BN\RIM Cat 5 PDH
Port_13 9G1\M1 Cat 5 UDH Port_13 9G2\M1 Cat 5 UDH Port_8 Network Time Server 1\PDH Cat 5 PDH
Port_20 SW2\Port_20 Crossover Trunk Port_20 SW4\Port_20 Crossover Trunk Port_9 GT3_SVR\UDHA Cat 5 UDH
FOPort_1 9G3\SW13\FOPort_1 Fiber FO FOPort_1 9G3\SW13\FOPort_2 Fiber FO Port_10 9G3\R Cat 5 UDH
FOPort_2 9G4\SW15\FOPort_3 Fiber FO FOPort_2 9G4\SW15\FOPort_4 Fiber FO Port_13 9G3\M1 Cat 5 UDH
Port_15 CRM3_SVR\UDHA Cat 5 UDH
Switch : SW2 Location : ECB 9G1 Switch : SW4 Location : ECB 9G2 Port_16 Network Time Server 1\UDH Cat 5 UDH
Type : 323A4747NZP50A Type : 323A4747NZP50A Port_20 SW13\Port_8 Crossover Trunk
Port_1 GT1_SVR\PDHB Cat 5 PDH Port_1 GT2_SVR\PDHB Cat 5 PDH FOPort_1 CRM\SW17\FOPort_1 Fiber FO
Port_2 9G1\G60B Cat 5 PDH Port_2 9G2\G60B Cat 5 PDH
Port_3 9G1\T60B Cat 5 PDH Port_3 9G2\T60B Cat 5 PDH Switch : SW6 Location : ECB 9G3
Port_6 9G1\BN Cat 5 PDH Port_6 9G2\BN Cat 5 PDH Type : 323A4747NZP49A
Port_9 GT1_SVR\UDHB Cat 5 UDH Port_9 GT2_SVR\UDHB Cat 5 UDH Port_1 GT3_SVR\PDHB Cat 5 PDH
Port_11 9G1\S Cat 5 UDH Port_11 9G2\S Cat 5 UDH Port_2 9G3\G60B Cat 5 PDH
Port_12 9G1\T Cat 5 UDH Port_12 9G2\T Cat 5 UDH Port_3 9G3\T60B Cat 5 PDH
Port_13 9G1\M2 Cat 5 UDH Port_13 9G2\M2 Cat 5 UDH Port_4 CRM3_SVR\PDHB Cat 5 PDH
Port_14 9G1\Vmax Cat 5 UDH Port_14 9G2\Vmax Cat 5 UDH Port_5 9G3_DCS\GSM-B_GT3_SVR Cat 5 PDH
Port_20 SW1\Port_20 Crossover Trunk Port_20 SW3\Port_20 Crossover Trunk Port_6 9G3\BN Cat 5 PDH
FOPort_1 9G3\SW14\FOPort_2 Fiber FO FOPort_1 9G3\SW14\FOPort_1 Fiber FO Port_7 9G3_DCS\BN-A Cat 5 PDH
FOPort_2 9G4\SW16\FOPort_3 Fiber FO FOPort_2 9G4\SW16\FOPort_4 Fiber FO Port_8 9G3_DCS\BN-RIM Cat 5 PDH
Port_9 GT3_SVR\UDHB Cat 5 UDH
Port_11 9G3\S Cat 5 UDH
Port_12 9G3\T Cat 5 UDH
Port_13 9G3\M2 Cat 5 UDH
Port_14 9G3\Vmax Cat 5 UDH
Port_15 CRM3_SVR\UDHB Cat 5 UDH
Port_20 SW14\Port_8 Crossover Trunk
FOPort_1 CRM\SW18\FOPort_1 Fiber FO
Switch : SW13 Location : ECB 9G3

Type : 323A4747NZP48A
FOPort_1 9G1\SW1\FOPort_1 Fiber FO

Hardware Link / Cable Remote to Scada
Fiber Optic: (1) Single mode max 15 km length - SC type connectors FOPort_5 9G6\SW12\FOPort_1 Fiber FO
SIZE DWG NO
132B8218
JAMNAGAR PROJECT
SCALE CONT ON SHEET
A3 132B8218 4 E
Switch : SW7 Location : ECB 9G4 Switch : SW9 Location : ECB 9G5 Switch : SW11 Location : ECB 9G6
Type : 323A4747NZP49A Type : 323A4747NZP50A Type : 323A4747NZP50A
Port_1 GT4_SVR\PDHA Cat 5 PDH Port_1 GT5_SVR\PDHA Cat 5 PDH Port_1 GT6_SVR\PDHA Cat 5 PDH
Port_2 9G4\G60A Cat 5 PDH Port_2 9G5\G60A Cat 5 PDH Port_2 9G6\G60A Cat 5 PDH
Port_3 9G4\EPM Cat 5 PDH Port_3 9G5\EPM Cat 5 PDH Port_3 9G6\EPM Cat 5 PDH
Port_5 9G4_DCS\GSM-A_GT4_SVR Cat 5 PDH Port_6 9G5\BN Cat 5 PDH Port_6 9G6\BN Cat 5 PDH
Port_6 9G4\BN Cat 5 PDH Port_7 9G5\BN\RIM Cat 5 PDH Port_7 9G6\BN\RIM Cat 5 PDH
Port_7 9G4\BN\RIM Cat 5 PDH Port_9 GT5_SVR\UDHA Cat 5 UDH Port_9 GT6_SVR\UDHA Cat 5 UDH
Port_8 Network Time Server 2\PDH Cat 5 PDH Port_10 9G5\R Cat 5 UDH Port_10 9G6\R Cat 5 UDH
Port_9 GT4_SVR\UDHA Cat 5 UDH Port_13 9G5\M1 Cat 5 UDH Port_13 9G6\M1 Cat 5 UDH
Port_10 9G4\R Cat 5 UDH Port_20 SW10\Port_20 Crossover Trunk Port_20 SW12\Port_20 Crossover Trunk
Port_13 9G4\M1 Cat 5 UDH FOPort_1 9G3\SW13\FOPort_4 Fiber FO FOPort_1 9G3\SW13\FOPort_5 Fiber FO
Port_16 Network Time Server 2\UDH Cat 5 UDH FOPort_2 9G4\SW15\FOPort_2 Fiber FO FOPort_2 9G4\SW15\FOPort_1 Fiber FO
FOPort_1 CRM\SW19\FOPort_1 Fiber FO Switch : SW10 Location : ECB 9G5 Switch : SW12 Location : ECB 9G6
Type : 323A4747NZP50A Type : 323A4747NZP50A
Switch : SW8 Location : ECB 9G4 Port_1 GT5_SVR\PDHB Cat 5 PDH Port_1 GT6_SVR\PDHB Cat 5 PDH
Type : 323A4747NZP49A Port_2 9G5\G60B Cat 5 PDH Port_2 9G6\G60B Cat 5 PDH
Port_1 GT4_SVR\PDHB Cat 5 PDH Port_3 9G5\T60B Cat 5 PDH Port_3 9G6\T60B Cat 5 PDH
Port_2 9G4\G60B Cat 5 PDH Port_6 9G5\BN Cat 5 PDH Port_6 9G6\BN Cat 5 PDH
Port_3 9G4\T60B Cat 5 PDH Port_9 GT5_SVR\UDHB Cat 5 UDH Port_9 GT6_SVR\UDHB Cat 5 UDH
Port_5 9G4_DCS\GSM-B_GT4_SVR Cat 5 PDH Port_11 9G5\S Cat 5 UDH Port_11 9G6\S Cat 5 UDH
Port_6 9G4\BN Cat 5 PDH Port_12 9G5\T Cat 5 UDH Port_12 9G6\T Cat 5 UDH
Port_7 9G4_DCS\BN-A Cat 5 PDH Port_13 9G5\M2 Cat 5 UDH Port_13 9G6\M2 Cat 5 UDH
Port_8 9G4_DCS\BN-RIM Cat 5 PDH Port_14 9G5\Vmax Cat 5 UDH Port_14 9G6\Vmax Cat 5 UDH
Port_9 GT4_SVR\UDHB Cat 5 UDH Port_20 SW9\Port_20 Crossover Trunk Port_20 SW11\Port_20 Crossover Trunk
Port_11 9G4\S Cat 5 UDH FOPort_1 9G3\SW14\FOPort_4 Fiber FO FOPort_1 9G3\SW14\FOPort_5 Fiber FO
Port_12 9G4\T Cat 5 UDH FOPort_2 9G4\SW16\FOPort_1 Fiber FO FOPort_2 9G4\SW16\FOPort_2 Fiber FO
Port_13 9G4\M2 Cat 5 UDH
Port_14 9G4\Vmax Cat 5 UDH
FOPort_1 CRM\SW20\FOPort_1 Fiber FO



Fiber Optic: (1) Single mode max 15 km length - SC type connectors
SIZE DWG NO
132B8218
JAMNAGAR PROJECT
SCALE CONT ON SHEET
A3 132B8218 5 E
Switch : SW17 Location : Control Room Switch : SW19 Location : Control Room
Type : 323A4747NZP49A Type : 323A4747NZP49A
Port_1 CRM1_SVR\PDHA Cat 5 PDH Port_1 HIST1_SVR\PDHA Cat 5 PDH
Port_2 CRM2_SVR\PDHA Cat 5 PDH Port_2 PERF_MONITOR Cat 5 PDH
Port_4 CRM4_SVR\PDHA Cat 5 PDH Port_3 OSM\PDHA Cat 5 PDH
Port_7 Laser Printer PRT1 Cat 5 PDH Port_5 CRM5_SVR\PDHA Cat 5 PDH
Port_9 CRM1_SVR\UDHA Cat 5 UDH Port_6 CRM6_SVR\PDHA Cat 5 PDH
Port_10 CRM2_SVR\UDHA Cat 5 UDH Port_7 Laser Printer PRT3 Cat 5 PDH
Port_12 CRM4_SVR\UDHA Cat 5 UDH Port_9 HIST1_SVR\UDHA Cat 5 UDH
Port_20 SW18\Port_20 Crossover Trunk Port_10 CRM5_SVR\UDHA Cat 5 UDH
Port_21 SW19\Port_21 Crossover Trunk Port_11 CRM6_SVR\UDHA Cat 5 UDH
FOPort_1 9G3\SW5\FOPort_1 Fiber FO Port_12 OSM\UDHA Cat 5 UDH
Switch : SW18 Location : Control Room Port_21 SW17\Port_21 Crossover Trunk
Type : 323A4747NZP49A FOPort_1 9G4\SW7\FOPort_1 Fiber FO
Port_1 CRM1_SVR\PDHB Cat 5 PDH
Port_2 CRM2_SVR\PDHB Cat 5 PDH
Port_4 CRM4_SVR\PDHB Cat 5 PDH Switch : SW20 Location : Control Room
Port_7 Laser Printer PRT2 Cat 5 PDH Type : 323A4747NZP49A
Port_9 CRM1_SVR\UDHB Cat 5 UDH Port_1 HIST1_SVR\PDHB Cat 5 PDH
Port_10 CRM2_SVR\UDHB Cat 5 UDH Port_2 PERF_MONITOR Cat 5 PDH
Port_12 CRM4_SVR\UDHB Cat 5 UDH Port_3 OSM\PDHA Cat 5 PDH
Port_20 SW17\Port_20 Crossover Trunk Port_5 CRM5_SVR\PDHB Cat 5 PDH
Port_21 SW20\Port_21 Crossover Trunk Port_6 CRM6_SVR\PDHB Cat 5 PDH
FOPort_1 9G3\SW6\FOPort_1 Fiber FO Port_7 Laser Printer PRT4 Cat 5 PDH
Port_9 HIST1_SVR\UDHB Cat 5 UDH
Port_11 OSM\UDHB Cat 5 UDH

Fiber Optic: (1) Single mode max 15 km length - SC type connectors
SIZE DWG NO
132B8218
JAMNAGAR PROJECT
SCALE CONT ON SHEET
g
GER-4193A
GE Power Systems
SPEEDTRONIC™
Mark VI Turbine
Control System
Walter Barker
Michael Cronin
GE Power Systems
Schenectady, NY
SPEEDTRONIC™ Mark VI Turbine Control System
Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Architecture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Triple Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
I/O Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
General Purpose I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Application Specific I/O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Operator Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Software Maintenance Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Communication Link Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Time Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Codes and Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Safety Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Printed Wire Board Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
CE – Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
CE – Low Voltage Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Gas Contaminants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Dust Contaminants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Seismic Universal Building Code (UBC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
List of Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
GE Power Systems GER-4193A (10/00)

■ ■ i

■ ■ ii
Introduction Architecture
The SPEEDTRONIC™ Mark VI turbine control The heart of the control system is the Control
is the current state-of-the-art control for GE tur- Module, which is available in either a 13- or 21-
bines that have a heritage of more than 30 years slot standard VME card rack. Inputs are
of successful operation. It is designed as a com- received by the Control Module through termi-
plete integrated control, protection, and moni- nation boards with either barrier or box-type
toring system for generator and mechanical terminal blocks and passive signal conditioning.
drive applications of gas and steam turbines. It is Each I/O card contains a TMS320C32 DSP
also an ideal platform for integrating all power processor to digitally filter the data before con-
island and balance-of-plant controls. Hardware version to 32 bit IEEE-854 floating point format.
and software are designed with close coordina- The data is then placed in dual port memory
tion between GE’s turbine design engineering that is accessible by the on-board C32 DSP on
and controls engineering to insure that your con- one side and the VME bus on the other.
trol system provides the optimum turbine per-
In addition to the I/O cards, the Control
formance and you receive a true “system” solu-
Module contains an “internal” communication
tion. With Mark VI, you receive the benefits of
card, a main processor card, and sometimes a
GE’s unmatched experience with an advanced
flash disk card. Each card takes one slot except
turbine control platform. (See Figure 1.)
for the main processor that takes two slots.
Cards are manufactured with surface-mounted
technology and conformal coated per IPC-CC-
830.
I/O data is transmitted on the VME backplane
between the I/O cards and the VCMI card
located in slot 1. The VCMI is used for “inter-
nal” communications between:
■ I/O cards that are contained within its
card rack
■ I/O cards that may be contained in
expansion I/O racks called Interface
Modules
• Over 30 years experience ■ I/O in backup Protection
Modules
• Complete control, protection, and
monitoring ■ I/O in other Control Modules used in
triple redundant control
• Can be used in variety of applications configurations
• Designed by GE turbine and controls ■ The main processor card
engineering The main processor card executes the bulk of
the application software at 10, 20, or 40 ms
depending on the requirements of the applica-
Figure 1. Benefits of Speedtronic™ Mark VI tion. Since most applications require that spe-

■ ■ 1
cific parts of the control run at faster rates (i.e. Protection Module, but it is not required for
servo loops, pyrometers, etc.), the distributed tripping.
processor system between the main processor
and the dedicated I/O processors is very impor- Triple Redundancy
tant for optimum system performance. A QNX Mark VI control systems are available in
operating system is used for real-time applica- Simplex and Triple Redundant forms for small
tions with multi-tasking, priority-driven preemp- applications and large integrated systems with
tive scheduling, and fast-context switching. control ranging from a single module to many
Communication of data between the Control distributed modules. The name Triple Module
Module and other modules within the Mark VI Redundant (TMR) is derived from the basic
control system is performed on IONet. The architecture with three completely separate and
VCMI card in the Control Module is the IONet independent Control Modules, power supplies,
bus master communicating on an Ethernet and IONets. Mark VI is the third generation of
10Base2 network to slave stations. A unique pol- triple redundant control systems that were pio-
ing type protocol (Asynchronous Drives neered by GE in 1983. System throughput
Language) is used to make the IONet more enables operation of up to nine, 21-slot VME
deterministic than traditional Ethernet LANs. racks of I/O cards at 40 ms including voting the
An optional Genius Bus™ interface can be pro- data. Inputs are voted in software in a scheme
vided on the main processor card in Mark VI called Software Implemented Fault Tolerance
Simplex controls for communication with the (SIFT). The VCMI card in each Control
GE Fanuc family of remote I/O blocks. These Module receives inputs from the Control
blocks can be selected with the same software Module back-plane and other modules via “its
configuration tools that select Mark VI I/O own” IONet.
cards, and the data is resident in the same data- Data from the VCMI cards in each of the three
base. Control Modules is then exchanged and voted
The Control Module is used for control, pro- prior to transmitting the data to the main
tection, and monitoring functions, but some processor cards for execution of the application
applications require backup protection. For software. Output voting is extended to the tur-
example, backup emergency overspeed protec- bine with three coil servos for control valves and
tion is always provided for turbines that do not 2 out of 3 relays for critical outputs such as
have a mechanical overspeed bolt, and backup hydraulic trip solenoids. Other forms of output
synch check protection is commonly provided voting are available, including a median select
for generator drives. In these applications, the of 4-20ma outputs for process control and 0-
IONet is extended to a Backup Protection 200ma outputs for positioners.
Module that is available in Simplex and triple Sensor interface for TMR controls can be either
redundant forms. The triple redundant version single, dual, triple redundant, or combinations
contains three independent sections (power of redundancy levels. The TMR architecture
supply, processor, I/O) that can be replaced supports riding through a single point failure in
while the turbine is running. IONet is used to the electronics and repair of the defective card
access diagnostic data or for cross-tripping or module while the process is running. Adding
between the Control Module and the sensor redundancy increases the fault tolerance

■ ■ 2
of the overall “system.” Another TMR feature is has one, fixed, box-type terminal block. It can
the ability to distinguish between field sensor accept one 3.0 mm2 (#12AWG) wire or two 2.0
faults and internal electronics faults. mm2 (#14AWG) wires with 300 volt insulation.
Diagnostics continuously monitor the 3 sets of I/O devices on the equipment can be mounted
input electronics and alarms any discrepancies up to 300 meters (984 feet) from the termina-
between them as an internal fault versus a sen- tion boards, and the termination boards must
sor fault. In addition, all three main processors be within 15 m (49.2’) from their correspon-
continue to execute the correct “voted” input ding I/O cards. Normally, the termination
data. (See Figure 2.) boards are mounted in vertical columns in ter-
mination cabinets with pre-assigned cable
ToTo Other
Other
Control
Control
GEGE
Systems
Systems
Operator
Operator Maintenance
/Maintenance
Interface
Interface
lengths and routing to minimize exposure to
Communications to DCS
Unit
Unit Data
Data Highway
Highway
CommunicationsToDCS
1.RS232
1. RS232 Modbus
Modbus Slave/Master
Slave/Master emi-rfi for noise sensitive signals such as speed
Ethernet
Ethernet Ethernet TCP-IP
2.Ethernet TCP-IPModbus
Modbus Slave
Slave
CIMPLICITY® Display
CIMPLICITY RDisplay System
System
WindowsNT TM OperatingSystem
Windows NT™ Operating System
3.
3.Ethernet
Ethernet TCP-IP GSM
TCP-IPGSM inputs and servo loops.
Backup Protection
Primary Controllers BackupProtection
Primary Controllers 1.Emergency
Emergency Overspeed
1. Control 1. Overspeed
1. Control
2.2.Protection
Protection
2. Synch
2. Synch Check
Check Protection
Protection General Purpose I/O
3.
3.Monitoring
Monitoring 

<R>
<R>
Protection
Protection Module
Module Discrete I/O. A VCRC card provides 48 digital
Ethernet Control
Control Module
Module
Ethernet
P.S.
P.S.
CPU
inputs and 24 digital outputs. The I/O is divid-
X CPU
P
S
I/O
I/O
ed between 2 Termination Boards for the con-
Redundant Unit tact inputs and another 2 for the relay outputs.
RedundantUnit
Data Highway
Data Highway
(Required)
(ifrequired)
Ethernet- IONet
Ethernet - IONet (See Table 1.)
<S><S>
Control
Control Module
Module Analog I/O. A VAIC card provides 20 analog
Voting
SoftwareVoting
P.S.
P.S.
Y CPU
CPU inputs and 4 analog outputs. The I/O is divided
Software
P I/O
S I/O
between 2 Termination Boards. A VAOC is ded-
icated to 16 analog outputs and interfaces with
Ethernet --IONet
Ethernet IONet
1 barrier-type Termination Board or 2 box-type
<T>
<T>
Control
Control Module
Module Termination Boards. (See Table 2.)
P.S.
P.S.
Z CPU
CPU
P
S
I/O
I/O Temperature Monitoring. A VTCC card pro-
vides interface to 24 thermocouples, and a
Ethernet
Ethernet - IONet
- IONet VRTD card provides interface for 16 RTDs. The
input cards interface with 1 barrier-type
Figure 2. Mark VI TMR control configuration
TB Type I/O Characteristics
TBCI Barrier 24 CI 70-145Vdc, optical isolation, 1ms SOE
I/O Interface DTCI Box 24 CI

2.5ma/point except last 3 input are 10ma / point
18-32Vdc, optical isolation, 1ms SOE
2.5ma/point except last 3 input are 10ma/point
There are two types of termination boards. One TICI Barrier 24 CI 70-145Vdc, 200-250Vdc, 90-132Vrms, 190-264Vrms
(47-63Hz), optical isolation 1ms SOE, 3ma / point
type has two 24-point, barrier-type terminal TRLY Barrier 12 CO Plug-in, magnetic relays, dry, form “C” contacts
6 circuits with fused 3.2A, suppressed solenoid outputs
blocks that can be unplugged for field mainte- Form H1B: diagnostics for coil current
Form H1C: diagnostics for contact voltage
nance. These are available for Simplex and Voltage Resistive Inductive
24Vdc 3.0A 3.0 amps L/R = 7 ms, no suppr.
TMR controls. They can accept two 3.0 mm2 3.0 amps L/R = 100 ms, with suppr
125Vdc 0.6A 0.2 amps L/R = 7 ms, no suppr.
(#12AWG) wires with 300 volt insulation. 0.6 amps L/R = 100 ms, with suppr
120/240Vac 6/3A 2.0 amps pf = 0.4
Another type of termination board used on DRLY Box 12 CO Same as TRLY, but no solenoid circuits
Simplex controls is mounted on a DIN rail and Table 1. Discrete I/O
GE Power Systems GER-4193A (10/00) ■ ■ 3

reduced by eliminating peripheral instrumenta-

Analog I/O tion. The VTUR card is designed to integrate
TBAI Barrier 10 AI (8) 4-20ma (250 ohms) or +/-5,10Vdc inputs several of the unique sensor interfaces used in
2 AO (2) 4-20ma (250 ohms) or +/-1ma (500 ohms) inputs
Current limited +24Vdc provided per input turbine control systems on a single card. In
(2) +24V, 0.2A current limited power sources
(1) 4-20ma output (500 ohms)
some applications, it works in conjunction with
(1) 4-20ma (500 ohms) or 0-200ma (50 ohms) output
TBAO Barrier 16 AO (16) 4-20ma outputs (500 ohms)
the I/O interface in the Backup Protection
DTAI Box 10 AI (8) 4-20ma (250 ohms) or +/-5,10Vdc inputs Module described below.
2 AO (2) 4-20ma (250 ohms) or +/-1ma (500 ohms) inputs
Current limited +24Vdc available per input
(1) 4-20ma output (500 ohms)
Speed (Pulse Rate) Inputs. Four-speed inputs
DTAO Box 8 AO
(1) 4-20ma (500 ohms) or 0-200ma (50 ohms) output
(8) 4-20ma outputs (500 ohms)
from passive magnetic sensors are monitored by
the VTUR card. Another two-speed (pulse rate)
Table 2. Analog I/O inputs can be monitored by the servo card
VSVO which can interface with either passive or
Termination Board or 2 box-type Termination active speed sensors. Pulse rate inputs on the
Boards. Capacity for monitoring 9 additional VSVO are commonly used for flow-divider feed-
thermocouples is provided in the Backup back in servo loops. The frequency range is 2-
Protection Module. (See Table 3.) 14k Hz with sufficient sensitivity at 2 Hz to
detect zero speed from a 60-toothed wheel. Two
Temperature Monitoring
additional passive speed sensors can be moni-
TBTC Barrier 24 TC Types: E, J, K, T, grounded or ungrounded
H1A fanned (paralleled) inputs, H1B dedicated inputs
tored by “each” of the three sections of the
DTTC Box 12 TC Types: E, J, K, T, grounded or ungrounded Backup Protection Module used for emergency
TRTD Barrier 16 RTD 3 points/RTD, grounded or ungrounded
10 ohm copper, 100/200 ohm platinum, 120 ohm nick overspeed protection on turbines that do not
H1A fanned (paralleled) inputs, H1B dedicated inputs
DTAI Box 8 RTD RTDs, 3 points/RTD, grounded or ungrounded have a mechanical overspeed bolt. IONet is
10 ohm copper, 100/200 ohm platinum, 120 ohm nick
used to communicate diagnostic and process
Table 3. Temperature Monitoring data between the Backup Protection Module
and the Control Module(s) including cross-trip-
ping capability; however, both modules will ini-
Application Specific I/O tiate system trips independent of the IONet.
In addition to general purpose I/O, the Mark (See Table 4 and Table 5.)
VI has a large variety of cards that are designed
Synchronizing. The synchronizing system con-
for direct interface to unique sensors and actu-
sists of automatic synchronizing, manual syn-
ators. This reduces or eliminates a substantial
chronizing, and backup synch check protec-
amount of interposing instrumentation in
tion. Two single-phase PT inputs are provided
many applications. As a result, many potential
single-point failures are eliminated in the most VTUR I/O Terminations from Control Module
critical area for improved running reliability TTUR Barrier 4 Pulse rate Passive magnetic speed sensors (2-14k Hz)
2 PTs Single phase PTs for synchronizing
and reduced long-term maintenance. Direct Synch relays Auto/Manual synchronizing interface
2 SVM Shaft voltage / current monitor
interface to the sensors and actuators also TRPG* Barrier 3 Trip solenoids (-) side of interface to hydraulic trip solenoids
enables the diagnostics to directly interrogate TRPS*
TRPL*
8 Flame inputs UV flame scanner inputs (Honeywell)
the devices on the equipment for maximum DTUR Box 4 Pulse Rate Passive magnetic speed sensors (2-14k Hz)
DRLY Box 12 Relays Form “C” contacts – previously described
effectiveness. This data is used to analyze device DTRT Transition board between VTUR & DRLY
and system performance. A subtle benefit of Table 4. VTUR I/O terminations from Control
this design is that spare-parts inventories are Module

Flame Detection. The existence of flame either

VPRO I/O Terminations from Backup Protection Module
can be calculated from turbine parameters that
TPRO Barrier 9 Pulse rate Passive magnetic speed sensors (2-14k Hz) are already being monitored or from a direct
2 PTs Single phase PTs for backup synch check
3 Analog inputs (1) 4-20ma (250 ohm) or +/-5,10Vdc inputs interface to Reuter Stokes or Honeywell-type
(2) 4-20ma (250 ohm)
9 TC inputs Thermocouples, grounded or ungrounded flame detectors. These detectors monitor the
TREG* Barrier 3 Trip solenoids (+) side of interface to hydraulic trip solenoids
TRES* 8 Trip contact in 1 E-stop (24Vdc) & 7 Manual trips (125Vdc) flame in the combustion chamber by detecting
TREL*
UV radiation emitted by the flame. The Reuter
Table 5. VPRO I/O terminations from Backup Stokes detectors produce a 4-20ma input. For
Protection Module Honeywell flame scanners, the Mark VI supplies
on the TTUR Termination Board to monitor the 335Vdc excitation and the VTUR / TRPG
the generator and line busses via the VTUR monitors the pulses of current being generated.
card. Turbine speed is matched to the line fre- This determines if carbon buildup or other
quency, and the generator and line voltages are contaminates on the scanner window are caus-
matched prior to giving a command to close the ing reduced light detection.
breaker via the TTUR. Trip System. On turbines that do not have a
An external synch check relay is connected in mechanical overspeed bolt, the control can
series with the internal K25P synch permissive issue a trip command either from the main
relay and the K25 auto synch relay via the processor card to the VTUR card in the Control
TTUR. Feedback of the actual breaker closing Module(s) or from the Backup Protection
time is provided by a 52G/a contact from the Module. Hydraulic trip solenoids are wired with
generator breaker (not an auxiliary relay) to the negative side of the 24Vdc/125Vdc circuit
update the database. An internal K25A synch connected to the TRPG, which is driven from
check relay is provided on the TTUR; however, the VTUR in the Control Module(s) and the
the backup phase / slip calculation for this relay positive side connected to the TREG which is
is performed in the Backup Protection Module driven from the VPRO in each section of the
or via an external backup synch check relay. Backup Protection Module. A typical system trip
Manual synchronizing is available from an oper- initiated in the Control Module(s) will cause
ator station on the network or from a synchro- the analog control to drive the servo valve actu-
scope. ators closed, which stops fuel or steam flow and
Shaft Voltage and Current Monitor. Voltage can de-energizes (or energizes) the hydraulic trip
build up across the oil film of bearings until a solenoids from the VTUR and TRPG. If cross-
discharge occurs. Repeated discharge and arc- tripping is used or an overspeed condition is
ing can cause a pitted and roughened bearing detected, then the VTUR/TRPG will trip one
surface that will eventually fail through acceler- side of the solenoids and the VPTRO/TREG
ated mechanical wear. The VTUR / TTUR can will trip the other side of the solenoid(s).
continuously monitor the shaft-to- ground volt- Servo Valve Interface. A VSVO card provides 4
age and current, and alarm at excessive levels. servo channels with selectable current drivers,
Test circuits are provided to check the alarm feedback from LVDTs, LVDRs, or ratio metric
functions and the continuity of wiring to the LVDTs, and pulse-rate inputs from flow divider
brush assembly that is mounted between the feedback used on some liquid fuel systems. In
turbine and the generator. TMR applications, 3 coil servos are commonly

used to extend the voting of analog outs to the mination board can be provided with active iso-
servo coils. Two coil servos can also be used. lation amplifiers to buffer the sensor signals
One, two, or three LVDT/Rs feedback sensors from BNC connectors. These connectors can be
can be used per servo channel with a high select, used to access real-time data by remote vibra-
low select, or median select made in software. At tion analysis equipment. In addition, a direct
least 2 LVDT/Rs are recommended for TMR plug connection is available from the termina-
applications because each sensor requires an AC tion board to a Bently Nevada 3500 monitor.
excitation source. (See Table 6 and Table 7.) The 16 vibration inputs, 8 DC position inputs,
and 2 Keyphasor inputs on the VVIB are divid-
TSVO Barrier 2 chnls. (2) Servo current sources
ed between 2 TVIB termination boards for
(6) LVDT/LVDR feedback 3,000 rpm and 3,600 rpm applications. Faster
0 to 7.0 Vrms
(4) Excitation sources shaft speeds may require faster sampling rates
7 Vrms, 3.2k Hz on the VVIB processor, resulting in reduced
(2) Pulse rate inputs (2-14k Hz)
*only 2 per VSVO vibration inputs from 16-to-8. (See Table 8.)
DSVO Box 2 chnls. (2) Servo current sources
(6) LVDT/LVDR feedback
0 to 7.0 Vrms
VVIB I/O Terminations from Control Module
(2) Excitation sources
7 Vrms, 3.2k Hz TB Type I/O Characteristics
(2) Pulse rate inputs (2-14k Hz) TVIB Barrier 8 Vibr. Seismic, Proximitor,
*only 2 per VSVO Velomitor, accelerometer
charge amplifier
Table 6. VSVO I/O terminations from Control DC inputs
4 Pos.
Module 1 KP Keyphasor
Current limited –24Vdc
provided per probe
Nominal Servo Valve Ratings
Coil Nominal Coil Mark VI Table 8. VVIB I/O terminations from Control
Type Current Resistance Control
#1 +/- 10 ma 1,000 ohms Simplex & TMR Module
#2 +/- 20 ma 125 ohms Simplex
#3 +/- 40 ma 62 ohms Simplex Three phase PT and CT monitoring. The VGEN
#4 +/- 40 ma 89 ohms TMR
#5 +/- 80 ma 22 ohms TMR
card serves a dual role as an interface for 3
#6 +/- 120 ma 40 ohms Simplex phase PTs and 1 phase CTs as well as a special-
#7 +/- 120 ma 75 ohms TMR
ized control for Power-Load Unbalance and
Table 7. Nominal servo valve ratings Early-Valve Actuation on large reheat steam tur-
bines. The I/O interface is split between the
Vibration / Proximitor® Inputs. The VVIB card TGEN Termination Board for the PT and CT
provides a direct interface to seismic (velocity), inputs and the TRLY Termination Board for
Proximitor®, Velomitor®, and accelerometer relay outputs to the fast acting solenoids. 4-
(via charge amplifier) probes. In addition, DC 20ma inputs are also provided on the TGEN for
position inputs are available for axial measure- monitoring pressure transducers. If an EX2000
ments and Keyphasor® inputs are provided. Generator Excitation System is controlling the
Displays show the 1X and unfiltered vibration generator, then 3 phase PT and CT data is com-
levels and the 1X vibration phase angle. -24vdc municated to the Mark VI on the network
is supplied from the control to each Proximitor rather than using the VGEN card. (See Table 9.)
with current limiting per point. An optional ter- Optical Pyrometer Inputs. The VPYR card moni-

■ ■ 6
■ A backup operator interface to the

TB Type I/O Characteristics plant DCS operator interface
TGEN Barrier 2 PTs 3 Phase PTs, 115Vrms
5-66 Hz, 3 wire, open delta ■ A gateway for communication links to
3 CTs 1 Phase CTs, 0-5A
other control systems
(10A over range) 5-66 Hz
4 AI 4-20ma (250 ohms) ■ A permanent or temporary
or +/-5,10Vdc inputs
Current limited +24Vdc/input
maintenance station
TRLY Barrier 12 CO Plug-in magnetic relays
■ An engineer’s workstation
previously described
Table 9. VGEN I/O terminations from Control

Module
tors two LAND infrared pyrometers to create a
temperature profile of rotating turbine blades.
Separate, current limited +24Vdc and –24Vdc
sources are provided for each Pyrometer that
returns four 4-20ma inputs. Two Keyphasors are
used for the shaft reference. The VPYR and
matching TPYR support 5,100 rpm shaft speeds
and can be configured to monitor up to 92 buck-
ets with 30 samples per bucket. (See Table 10.)
TB Type I/O Characteristics Figure 3. Operator interface graphics:

TPYR Barrier 2 Pyrometers (8) 4-20ma (100 ohms) 7FA Mark VI
(2) Current limited
+24Vdc sources All control and protection is resident in the
(2) Current limited
Mark VI control, which allows the HMI to be a
-24Vdc sources
(2) Keyphasor inputs non-essential component of the control system.
It can be reinitialized or replaced with the
Table 10. VPYR I/O terminations from Control
process running with no impact on the control
Module
system. The HMI communicates with the main
processor card in the Control Module via the
Operator Interface Ethernet based Unit Data Highway (UDH). All
The operator interface is commonly referred to analog and digital data in the Mark VI is acces-
as the Human Machine Interface (HMI). It is a sible for HMI screens including the high reso-
PC with a Microsoft® Windows NT® operating lution time tags for alarms and events.
system supporting client/server capability, a System (process) alarms and diagnostics alarms
CIMPLICITY® graphics display system, a for fault conditions are time tagged at frame
Control System Toolbox for maintenance, and a rate (10/20/40 ms) in the Mark VI control and
software interface for the Mark VI and other transmitted to the HMI alarm management sys-
control systems on the network. (See Figure 3.) tem. System events are time tagged at frame
It can be applied as: rate, and Sequence of Events (SOE) for contact
■ The primary operator interface for inputs are time tagged at 1ms on the contact
one or multiple units input card in the Control Module. Alarms can

■ ■ 7
be sorted according to ID, Resource, Device, made with password protection (5 levels) and
Time, and Priority. Operators can add com- downloaded to the Control Module while the
ments to alarm messages or link specific alarm process is running. All application software is
messages to supporting graphics. stored in the Control Module in non-volatile
Data is displayed in either English or Metric flash memory.
engineering units with a one-second refresh Application software is executed sequentially
rate and a maximum of one second to repaint a and represented in its dynamic state in a ladder
typical display graphic. Operator commands diagram format. Maintenance personnel can
can be issued by either incrementing / decre- add, delete, or change analog loops, sequenc-
menting a setpoint or entering a numerical ing logic, tuning constants, etc. Data points can
value for the new setpoint. Responses to these be selected and “dragged” on the screen from
commands can be observed on the screen one one block to another to simplify editing. Other
second from the time the command was issued. features include logic forcing, analog forcing,
Security for HMI users is important to restrict and trending at frame rate. Application soft-
access to certain maintenance functions such as ware documentation is created directly from
editors and tuning capability, and to limit cer- the source code and printed at the site. This
tain operations. A system called “User includes the primary elementary diagram, I/O
Accounts” is provided to limit access or use of assignments, the settings of tuning constants,
particular HMI features. This is done through etc. The software maintenance tools (Control
the Windows NT User Manager administration System Toolbox) are available in the HMI and
program that supports five user account levels. as a separate software package for virtually any
Windows 95 or NT based PC. The same tools
Software Maintenance Tools are used for EX2000 Generator Excitation
The Mark VI is a fully programmable control Systems, and Static Starters. (See Figure 4 and
system. Application software is created from in- Figure 5.)
house software automation tools which select
proven GE control and protection algorithms Communications
and integrate them with the I/O, sequencing, Communications are provided for internal data
and displays for each application. A library of transfer within a single Mark VI control; com-
software is provided with general-purpose munications between Mark VI controls and
blocks, math blocks, macros, and application peer GE control systems; and external commu-
specific blocks. It uses 32-bit floating point data nications to remote systems such as a plant dis-
(IEEE-854) in a QNX operating system with tributed control system (DCS).
real-time applications, multitasking, priority- The Unit Data Highway (UDH) is an Ethernet-
driven preemptive scheduling, and fast context based LAN with peer-to-peer communication
switching. between Mark VI controls, EX2000 Generator
Software frame rates of 10, 20, and 40 ms are Excitation Controls, Static Starters, the GE
supported. This is the elapsed time that it takes Fanuc family of PLC based controls, HMIs, and
to read inputs, condition the inputs, execute Historians. The network uses Ethernet Global
the application software, and send outputs. Data (EGD) which is a message-based protocol
Changes to the application software can be with support for sharing information with mul-

■ ■ 8
control. All trips between units are hardwired

even if the UDH is redundant.
The UDH communication driver is located on
the Main Processor Card in the Mark VI. This is
the same card that executes the turbine appli-
cation software; therefore, there are no poten-
tial communication failure points between the
main turbine processor and other controls or
monitoring systems on the UDH. In TMR sys-
tems, there are three separate processor cards
executing identical application software from
identical databases. Two of the UDH drivers are
Figure 4. Software maintenance tools – card normally connected to one switch, and the
configuration other UDH driver is connected to the other
switch in a star configuration. Network topolo-
gies conform to Ethernet IEEE 802.3 standards.
The GE networks are a Class “C” Private
Internet according to RFC 1918: Address
Allocation for Private Internets – February
1996. Internet Assigned Numbers Authority
(IANA) has reserved the following IP address
space 192.168.1.1: 192.168.255.255 (192.168/
Relay Ladder Diagram Editor
for Boolean Functions
16 prefix).
Communication links from the Mark VI to
remote computers can be implemented from
either an optional RS232 Modbus port on the
Figure 5. Software maintenance tools – editors
main processor card in Simplex systems, or
tiple nodes based on the UDP/IP standard from a variety of communication drivers from
(RFC 768). Data can be transmitted Unicast, the HMI. When the HMI is used for the com-
Multicast or Broadcast to peer control systems. munication interface, an Ethernet card in the
Data (4K) can be shared with up to 10 nodes at HMI provides an interface to the UDH, and a
25Hz (40ms). A variety of other proprietary second Ethernet card provides an interface to
protocols are used with EGD to optimize com- the remote computer.
munication performance on the UDH. All operator commands that can be issued from
40 ms is fast enough to close control loops on an HMI can be issued from a remote computer
the UDH; however, control loops are normally through the HMI(s) to the Mark VI(s), and the
closed within each unit control. Variations of remote computer can monitor any application
this exist, such as transmitting setpoints software data in the Mark VI(s). Approximately
between turbine controls and generator con- 500 data points per control are of interest to a
trols for voltage matching and var/power-factor plant control system; however, about 1,200

■ ■ 9
points are commonly accessed through the ■ Additional “master” communication

communication links to support programming drivers are available from the HMI.
screen attributes such as changing the color of
a valve when it opens. Time Synchronization
Time synchronization is available to synchro-
Communication Link Options
nize all controls and HMIs on the UDH to a
Communication link options include: Global Time Source (GTS). Typical GTSs are
■ An RS-232 port with Modbus Slave Global Positioning Satellite (GPS) receivers
RTU or ASCII communications from such as the StarTime GPS Clock or other time-
the Main Processor Card. (Simplex: processing hardware. The preferred time
full capability. TMR: monitor data only sources are Universal Time Coordinated (UTC)
– no commands) or GPS; however, the time synchronization
■ An RS-232 port with Modbus Master / option also supports a GTS using local time as
Slave RTU protocol is available from its base time reference. The GTS supplies a
the HMI. time-link network to one or more HMIs with a
time/frequency processor board. When the
■ An RS-232/485 converter (half- HMI receives the time signal, it is sent to the
duplex) can be supplied to convert Mark VI(s) using Network Time Protocol
the RS-232 link for a multi-drop (NTP) which synchronizes the units to within
network. +/-1ms time coherence. Time sources that are
■ Modbus protocol can be supplied on supported include IRIG-A, IRIG-B, 2137, NASA-
an Ethernet physical layer with TCP-IP 36, and local signals.
for faster communication rates from
the HMI. Diagnostics
■ Ethernet TCP-IP can be supplied with Each circuit card in the Control Module con-
a GSM application layer to support the tains system (software) limit checking, high/low
transmission of the local high- (hardware) limit checking, and comprehensive
resolution time tags in the control to a diagnostics for abnormal hardware conditions.
DCS from the HMI. This link offers System limit checking consists of 2 limits for
spontaneous transmission of alarms every analog input signal, which can be set in
and events, and common request engineering units for high/high, high/low, or
messages that can be sent to the HMI low/low with the I/O Configurator. In addition,
including control commands and each input limit can be set for latching/non-
alarm queue commands. Typical latching and enable/disable. Logic outputs
commands include momentary logical from system limit checking are generated per
commands and analog “setpoint frame and are available in the database (signal
target” commands. Alarm queue space) for use in control sequencing and alarm
commands consist of silence (plant messages.
alarm horn) and reset commands as
High/low (hardware) limit checking is provid-
well as alarm dump requests that cause
ed on each analog input with typically 2 occur-
the entire alarm queue to be
rences required before initiating an alarm.
transmitted from the Mark VI to the
These limits are not configurable, and they are
DCS.

■ ■ 10
selected to be outside the normal control ing the correct termination point. One wire in
requirements range but inside the linear hard- each connector is dedicated to transmitting an
ware operational range (before the hardware identification message with a bar-code serial
reaches saturation). Diagnostic messages for number, board type, hardware revision, and a
hardware limit checks and all other hardware connection location to the corresponding I/O
diagnostics for the card can be accessed with card in the Control Module.
the software maintenance tools (Control System
Toolbox). A composite logic output is provided
Power
in the data base for each card, and another
logic output is provided to indicate a high/low In many applications, the control cabinet is
(hardware) limit fault of any analog input or powered from a 125Vdc battery system and
the associated communications for that signal. short circuit protected external to the control.
Both sides of the floating 125Vdc bus are con-
The alarm management system collects and
tinuously monitored with respect to ground,
time stamps the diagnostic alarm messages at
and a diagnostic alarm is initiated if a ground is
frame rate in the Control Module and displays
detected on either side of the 125Vdc source.
the alarms on the HMI. Communication links
to a plant DCS can contain both the software When a 120/240vac source is used, a power
(system) diagnostics and composite hardware converter isolates the source with an isolation
diagnostics with varying degrees of capability transformer and rectifies it to 125Vdc. A diode
depending on the protocol’s ability to transmit high select circuit chooses the highest of the
the local time tags. Separate manual reset com- 125Vdc busses to distribute to the Power
mands are required for hardware and system Distribution Module. A second 120/240vac
(software) diagnostic alarms assuming that the source can be provided for redundancy.
alarms were originally designated as latching Diagnostics produce an under-voltage alarm if
alarms, and no alarms will reset if the original either of the AC sources drop below the under-
cause of the alarm is still present. voltage setting. For gas turbine applications, a
Hardware diagnostic alarms are displayed on separate 120/240vac source is required for the
the yellow “status” LED on the card front. Each ignition transformers with short circuit protec-
card front includes 3 LEDs and a reset at the tion of 20A or less.
top of the card along with serial and parallel The resultant “internal” 125Vdc is fuse-isolated
ports. The LEDs include: RUN: Green; FAIL: in the Mark VI power distribution module and
Red; STATUS: Yellow. fed to the internal power supplies for the
Each circuit card and termination board in the Control Modules, any expansion modules, and
system contains a serial number, board type, the termination boards for its field contact
and hardware revision that can be displayed; 37 inputs and field solenoids. Additional 3.2A fuse
pin “D” type connector cables are used to inter- protection is provided on the termination
face between the Termination Boards and the board TRLY for each solenoid. Separate 120Vac
J3 and J4 connectors on the bottom of the feeds are provided from the motor control cen-
Control Module. Each connector comes with ter for any AC solenoids and ignition trans-
latching fasteners and a unique label identify- formers on gas turbines. (See Table 11.)

■ ■ 11
IEC 6100-4-4: 1995

Steady Electrical Fast Transient Susceptibility
State Freq. Load Comments
Voltage
IEC 6100-4-5: 1995
125Vdc 10.0 A dc Ripple <= 10V p-p Surge Immunity
(100 to Note 1 IEC 61000-4-6: 1995
144Vdc)
Conducted RF Immunity
120vac 47 - 63Hz 10.0 A rms Harmonic distortion < 5%
(108 to Note 2 IEC 61000-4-11: 1994
132vac) Voltage Variation, Dips, and Interruptions
240vac 47 - 63 Hz 5.0 A rms Harmonic distortion < 5 % ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1
(200 to Note 3
264vac) Surge
Table 11. Power requirements CE - Low Voltage Directive

EN 61010-1
Codes and Standards Electrical Equipment, Industrial Machines
IEC 529
ISO 9001 in accordance with Tick IT by Lloyd's Intrusion Protection Codes/NEMA 1/IP 20
Register Quality Assurance Limited. ISO 9000-
Reference the Mark VI Systems Manual GEH-
3 Quality Management and Quality Assurance
6421, Chapter 5 for additional codes and stan-
Standards, Part 3: Guidelines for the Appli-
dards.
cation of ISO 9001 to Development Supply and
Maintenance of Software.
Environment
Safety Standards The control is designed for operation in an air-
UL 508A Safety Standard Industrial Control conditioned equipment room with convection
Equip. cooling. Special cabinets can be provided for
CSA 22.2 No. 14 Industrial Control Equipment operation in other types of environments.
Printed Wire Board Assemblies Temperature:

UL 796 Printed Circuit Boards Operating 0° to +45°C +32° to +113°F
UL recognized PWB manufacturer, Storage -40° to +70°C -40° to +158°F
UL file number E110691 The control can be operated at 50∞C during

maintenance periods to repair air-conditioning
ANSI IPC guidelines
systems. It is recommended that the electronics
ANSI IPC/EIA guidelines be operated in a controlled environment to
CE - Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) maximize the mean-time-between-failure
EN 50081-2 (MTBF) on the components.
Generic Emissions Standards Purchased commercial control room equipment
EN 50082-2:1994 such as PCs, monitors, and printers are typically
Generic Immunity Industrial Environment capable of operating in a control room ambient
EN 55011
of 0° to +40°C with convection cooling.
Radiated and Conducted Emissions
IEC 61000-4-2:1995 Humidity
Electrostatic Discharge Susceptibility
IEC 6100-4-3: 1997 5% to 95% non-condensing
Radiated RF Immunity Exceeds EN50178: 1994

■ ■ 12
Elevation Communication Links From HMI:

Exceeds EN50178: 1994 RS232 Modbus Master/Slave, Ethernet
Modbus Slave, Ethernet TCP-IP GSM HMI
Gas Contaminants
SPEEDTRONIC™ Application Manual -
EN50178: 1994 Section A.6.1.4 Table A.2 (m)
Chapter 7 (GEH-6126), Ethernet TCP-IP
Dust Contaminants GEDS Standard
Exceeds IEC 529: 1989-11 (IP-20) Message Format (GSM) (GEI-100165)
■ Operator/Maintenance Interface HMI
Seismic Universal Building Code (UBC)
HMI for SPEEDTRONIC™ Turbine
Section 2312 Zone 4
Controls
Documentation Application Manual (GEH-6126)
The following documentation is available for Cim Edit Operation Manual (GFK-1396)
Mark VI Turbine Controls. A subset of this doc- User Manual (GFK-1180)
umentation will be delivered with each control
Cimplicity HMI For Windows NT
depending on the functional requirements of
Trending Operators
each system.
Manual (GFK-1260)
Manuals ■ Turbine Historian System Guide
■ System Manual for SPEEDTRONICTM (GEH-6421)
Mark VI Turbine Control (GEH-6421)
■ Standard Blockware Library (SBLIB)
■ Control System Toolbox, for
■ Turbine Blockware Library
Configuring a Mark VI Controller
(TURBLIB)
(GEH-6403)
Configuring the Trend Recorder (GEH-
Drawings
6408) ■ Equipment Outline Drawing AutoCAD
R14
System Data Base for System Toolbox
(GEI-100189) ■ Equipment Layout Drawing AutoCAD
R14
System Data Base Browser (GEI-100271)
■ I/O Termination List (Excel
Data Historian (used for trip history)
Spreadsheet)
(GEI-100278)
■ Network one-line diagram (if
■ Communications To Remote
applicable)
Computers / Plant DCS
■ Application Software Diagram
RS232 Modbus Slave From Control
(printout from source code)
Module
■ Data List For Communication Link To
Modbus Communications
DCS
Implementation UCOC2000 - I/O
Drivers, Chapter 2

■ ■ 13
List of Figures
Figure 1. Benefits of Speedtronic™ Mark VI
Figure 2. Mark VI TMR control configuration
Figure 3. Operator interface graphics: 7FA Mark VI
Figure 4. Software maintenance tools – card configuration
Figure 5. Software maintenance tools – editors
List of Tables
Table 1. Discrete I/O
Table 2. Analog I/O
Table 3. Temperature Monitoring
Table 4. VTUR I/O terminations from Control Module
Table 5. VPRO I/O terminations from Backup Protection Module
Table 6. VSVO I/O terminations from Control Module
Table 7. Nominal servo valve ratings
Table 8. VVIB I/O terminations from Control Module
Table 9. VGEN I/O terminations from Control Module
Table 10: VPYR I/O terminations from Control Module
Table 11: Power requirements

■ ■ 14
GEH-6126A Volume I (1 of 2)
g
(Supersedes GEH-6126)
GE Industrial Systems
For SPEEDTRONIC™ Turbine Control
Operator’s Guide
Document: GEH-6126A Volume I (1 of 2)
Issued: 2002-02-14
For SPEEDTRONIC™ Turbine Control
Operator’s Guide
© 2002 General Electric Company, USA.
All rights reserved.
Printed in the United States of America.
GE provides the following document and the information included therein as is and without
warranty of any kind, express or implied, including but not limited to any implied statutory
warranty of merchantability or fitness for particular purpose.
These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to provide for
every possible contingency to be met during installation, operation, and maintenance. The
information is supplied for informational purposes only, and GE makes no warranty as to the
accuracy of the information included herein. Changes, modifications, and/or improvements to
equipment and specifications are made periodically and these changes may or may not be reflected
herein. It is understood that GE may make changes, modifications, or improvements to the
equipment referenced herein or to the document itself at any time. This document is intended for
trained personnel familiar with the GE products referenced herein.
GE may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in this document.
The furnishing of this document does not provide any license whatsoever to any of these patents.
All license inquiries should be directed to the address below. If further information is desired, or if
particular problems arise that are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser’s purpose, the matter
should be referred to:
Post Sales Service
1501 Roanoke Blvd.
Salem, VA 24153-6492 USA
Phone: + 1 888 GE4 SERV (888 434 7378, United States)
+ 1 540 378 3280 (International)
Fax: + 1 540 387 8606 (All)
(“+” indicates the international access code required when calling from outside the USA)
This document contains proprietary information of General Electric Company, USA and is
furnished to its customer solely to assist that customer in the installation, testing, operation, and/or
maintenance of the equipment described. This document shall not be reproduced in whole or in
part nor shall its contents be disclosed to any third party without the written approval of GE
Industrial Systems.
Document Identification: GEH-6126A Volume I (1 of 2)

Technical Writer/Editor: Teresa Davidson
Technical Responsibility: Michael Good
ARCNET is a registered trademark of Datapoint Corporation.

CIMPLICITY and Genius are registered trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.
Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation.
Excel, Microsoft, NetMeeting, Windows, and Window NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
Modbus is a registered trademark of Schneider Automation.
Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.
PI-ProcessBook is a registered trademark of OSI Software Inc.
SPEEDTRONIC is a trademark of General Electric Company, USA.
Safety Symbol Legend
Indicates a procedure, condition, or statement that, if not

strictly observed, could result in personal injury or death.

strictly observed, could result in damage to or destruction of
equipment.
Indicates a procedure, condition, or statement that should be

strictly followed in order to optimize these applications.
Note Indicates an essential or important procedure, condition, or statement.
GEH-6126A, Volume I Operator’s Guide Safety Symbol Legend • a

To prevent personal injury or equipment damage
caused by equipment malfunction, only adequately
trained personnel should modify any
programmable machine.
The example and setup screens in this manual do

not reflect the actual application configurations. Be
sure to follow the correct setup procedures for
your application.
b • Safety Symbol Legend HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
To:
g GE Industrial Systems
Documentation Design, Rm. 291
Reader Comments 1501 Roanoke Blvd.
General Electric Company Fax: 1-540-387-8651
(GE Internal DC 8-278-8651)
We welcome comments and suggestions to make this publication more useful.
Your Name Today’s Date If needed, how can we contact you?
Fax No.
Your Company’s Name and Address Job Site
Phone No.
GE Requisition No.
E-mail
Your Job Function / How You Use This Publication Publication No.
Address
Publication Issue/Revision Date
General Rating
Excellent Good Fair Poor Additional Comments
Contents ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ _____________________________________________________________
Organization ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ _____________________________________________________________
Technical Accuracy ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ _____________________________________________________________
Clarity ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ _____________________________________________________________
Completeness ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ _____________________________________________________________
Drawings / Figures ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ _____________________________________________________________
Tables ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ _____________________________________________________________
Referencing ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ _____________________________________________________________
Readability ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ _____________________________________________________________
Specific Suggestions (Corrections, information that could be expanded on, and such.)
Page No. Comments
______ __________________________________________________________________________________
______ __________________________________________________________________________________
______ __________________________________________________________________________________
______ __________________________________________________________________________________
______ __________________________________________________________________________________
______ __________________________________________________________________________________
Other Comments (What you like, what could be added, how to improve, and such.) ________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Overall grade (Compared to publications from other manufacturers of similar products, how do you rate this publication?)
¡ Superior ¡ Comparable ¡ Inferior ¡ Do not know Comment ____________________________________________
Detach and fax or mail to the address noted above.

......................................................................... Fold here and close with staple or tape ..........................................................................................
____________________________ Place
stamp
____________________________ here.
____________________________
1501 Roanoke Blvd.
...........................................................................................Fold here first .........................................................................................................

Contents
Reader Comments
Chapter 1 Overview
Introduction ..............................................................................................................1-1
HMI Overview..........................................................................................................1-2
Product Features ................................................................................................1-2
HMI Components ..............................................................................................1-3
Graphic Displays ...............................................................................................1-4
Communications................................................................................................1-6
Optional Features ..............................................................................................1-7
Application-Specific Features ...........................................................................1-7
Technical Specifications...........................................................................................1-7
Related Documentation ............................................................................................1-8
How to Use This Document .....................................................................................1-9
Text Conventions ..............................................................................................1-9
How to Get Help.....................................................................................................1-10
Chapter 2 Quick-Start Procedures

Introduction ..............................................................................................................2-1
Starting Up HMI.......................................................................................................2-2
Alarm Displays.........................................................................................................2-3
Opening Projects ......................................................................................................2-4
Other Tools...............................................................................................................2-5
Dynamic Rung Display .....................................................................................2-5
Trip History .......................................................................................................2-5
Trip Log Viewer................................................................................................2-5
Demand Display................................................................................................2-6
Alarm Logger Control .......................................................................................2-6
Hold List Display (Steam Turbine Applications)..............................................2-6
Chapter 3 Display-Only Programs

Introduction ..............................................................................................................3-1
Dynamic Rung Display ............................................................................................3-2
File Structure .....................................................................................................3-2
Dynamic Rung Display Windows .....................................................................3-3
Starting the Dynamic Rung Display..................................................................3-6
Selecting a Sequencing Display Screen.............................................................3-7
Using the Find All Function ..............................................................................3-7
Viewing Tabular Data .......................................................................................3-8
Trip History ..............................................................................................................3-9
Trip History File................................................................................................3-9
Starting Trip History .......................................................................................3-11
Trip History Dialog Box..................................................................................3-11
Data History Results Window.........................................................................3-12
Trip History on the Mark VI ...........................................................................3-13
GEH-6126A Volume I Operator’s Guide Contents • i

Contents — Continued
Trip Log Viewer .....................................................................................................3-14
Trip Log File ...................................................................................................3-14
Trip Log Viewer Dialog Box...........................................................................3-14
Viewing Results...............................................................................................3-15
Starting the Trip Log Viewer...........................................................................3-15
Chapter 4 Control (Command) Programs

Introduction ..............................................................................................................4-1
Demand Display .......................................................................................................4-2
Starting Demand Display...................................................................................4-2
Working with Files ............................................................................................4-3
Demand Display Windows................................................................................4-4
Data Area Description ............................................................................... 4-6
Command Target Types ............................................................................ 4-6
Using Demand Display......................................................................................4-7
Displaying, Creating, and Modifying Screens........................................... 4-7
Working with Command Targets ............................................................ 4-11
Other Options .......................................................................................... 4-13
Command Line Configuration.........................................................................4-13
Commands and Arguments ..................................................................... 4-13
Using Multiple Arguments ...................................................................... 4-14
Alarm Logger Control ............................................................................................4-15
Starting the Alarm Logger Control.......................................................... 4-15
Hold List (Steam Applications) ..............................................................................4-16
Hold List Points...............................................................................................4-16
Hold List Programs..........................................................................................4-16
Hold List Rules................................................................................................4-16
Chapter 5 CIMPLICITY Displays

Introduction ..............................................................................................................5-1
CIMPLICITY ActiveX Objects................................................................................5-2
Manual Synchronizing Display .........................................................................5-2
Triggered Plot (Valve Travel) ...........................................................................5-6
Alarm Filtering in HMI Servers................................................................................5-8
Configuring Users .............................................................................................5-8
Configuring Resources ....................................................................................5-12
Configuring Alarm Filters ...............................................................................5-14
Examples of Screens for Filtered Alarms ........................................................5-23
Currently Implemented Filters.........................................................................5-25
Extended Alarm Commands...................................................................................5-26
Reactive Capability Display ...................................................................................5-28
ii • Contents HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I

Contents — Continued
Chapter 6 CIMPLICITY Project Configuration
Introduction ..............................................................................................................6-1
Using Workbench.....................................................................................................6-2
Opening a Project .....................................................................................................6-3
Signal Manager.........................................................................................................6-4
Setup..................................................................................................................6-4
Signals ...............................................................................................................6-5
Alarms ...............................................................................................................6-6
Importing Signals ..............................................................................................6-8
External Alarm Manager ........................................................................................6-10
SDB Exchange .......................................................................................................6-10
SDB Utilities ..........................................................................................................6-10
®
Modbus Data Interface .........................................................................................6-11
OLE for Process Controls (OPC) ...........................................................................6-12
Appendix A HMI Function Reference

HMI Functions for GE Turbine Controllers ............................................................A-1
CIMPLICITY HMI Supported Functions ...............................................................A-4
Appendix B Alarm Overview

Introduction ............................................................................................................. B-1
Hold List Alarms (Steam Turbine Only) ................................................................. B-2
Process Alarms ........................................................................................................ B-2
Process (and Hold) Alarm Data Flow............................................................... B-2
Diagnostic Alarms ................................................................................................... B-3
Glossary
Index
GEH-6126A Volume I Operator’s Guide Contents • iii

Notes
iv • Contents HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I

Chapter 1 Overview
Introduction
GE document GEH-6126A The Human-Machine Interface (HMI) for SPEEDTRONIC turbine control is a user-
Volume 2 describes HMI friendly operator interface for real-time control of power-plant processes and
maintenance features equipment. It runs on a pc-based workstation using a Microsoft® Windows NT®
introduced in this chapter. client-server architecture. The HMI provides operator display and control for the
Mark IV, Mark V, Mark V LM, and Mark VI turbine controllers.
This document covers HMI operation. It is written as a guide to assist the operator in
using applicable HMI and supported CIMPLICITY® HMI functions with the
SPEEDTRONIC Mark IV, Mark V, Mark V LM, and Mark VI turbine controllers.
Refer to How to Use This Document for more information.
This chapter provides a brief overview of the HMI, including both operator and
maintenance features. Additionally, it defines the document content and structure to
help the user better understand the information provided.
This chapter is organized as follows:
Section Page
HMI Overview..........................................................................................................1-2
Product Features ................................................................................................1-2
HMI Components ..............................................................................................1-3
Graphic Displays ...............................................................................................1-4
Communications................................................................................................1-6
Optional Features ..............................................................................................1-7
Application-Specific Features ...........................................................................1-7
Technical Specifications...........................................................................................1-7
Related Documentation ............................................................................................1-8
How to Use This Document .....................................................................................1-9
Text Conventions ..............................................................................................1-9
How to Get Help.....................................................................................................1-10
GEH-6126A Volume I Operator’s Guide Chapter 1 Overview • 1-1

HMI Overview
The CIMPLICITY HMI is a HMI functions (listed in Appendix A) are provided by the Turbine Control Interface
product of GE Fanuc (TCI), CIMPLICITY Bridge (TCIMB), and GE Turbine Control Systems Solutions
Automation. CD. Additionally, the HMI supports many functions of the CIMPLICITY HMI, for
graphical interface and some support functions (see Appendix A).
The HMI can be configured to operate with a variety of system devices, integrating
plant operation at a single level. Plant operators and engineers can view and control
plant equipment through a common interface.
The toolbox is GE’s Windows-
based software package used Note The GE Turbine Control Systems Solutions CD contains the Turbine Control
for controller configuration and System Toolbox (toolbox), Data Historian, and Trend Recorder programs. Mark VI
diagnostics. turbine controllers use the toolbox as a configuration and diagnostic interface.
An operator can use the HMI for the following turbine control functions:
• Monitor one or more turbines through graphical displays (for example, alarms,
wheelspace temperatures, and vibration feedback)
• Issue commands to the selected turbine or driven device (for example, Start,
Stop, Cooldown On, Auto, and Raise Speed/Load)
Product Features
The HMI contains a number of product features important for power plant control:
• Dynamic graphics
• Alarm displays
• Process variable trending
• Point control panel display (for maintenance)
• HMI access security
1-2 • Chapter 1 Overview HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
HMI Components
The turbine control HMI consists of the following functional components (refer to
Figure 1-1):
GFK-1180 provides a detailed • CIMPLICITY HMI is used primarily to display turbine status screens, which
description of the CIMPLICITY enable an operator to monitor the unit(s). Refresh rate is typically 1 second.
product’s capabilities. CIMPLICITY cannot configure the turbine control.
– HMI Server is the hub of the system, channeling data between the Unit Data
Highway and the Plant Data Highway (Mark VI only), and providing data
support and system management. The server also provides device
communication for both internal and external data interchanges.
– HMI Viewer provides the visual functions, and is the client of the server. It
contains the operator interface software, which allows the operator or
maintenance personnel to view screen graphics, data values, alarms, and
trends, as well as to issue commands, edit control coefficient values, and
obtain system logs and reports.
• Turbine Control Interface (TCI) is used to display higher speed data (faster
than 1-second updates), and to configure and control a turbine unit. TCI allows
remote access to turbine data and controls the following data functions:
– Provides real-time device communications to the turbine control (Mark IV
and V)
– Provides turbine control configuration capabilities (Mark IV and V)
– Collects data, alarms and forwards commands to the turbine control (Mark
VI)
– Maintains a data dictionary (Mark IV and V)
• TCIMB (TCI/CIMPLICITY Bridge, previously called CIMB or CIMBridge) is
an interface between the CIMPICITY and TCI, as follows:
– Enables CIMPLICITY to collect data and alarms from a turbine unit
– Forwards points (Mark IV, V, V LM) and alarms (all) to CIMPLICITY
• System database (Mark VI only) establishes signal management and definition
for the control system. It provides a single repository for system alarm messages
and definitions, and defines mapping between controller software and physical
I/O. Additionally, it defines Ethernet Global Data (EGD) exchanges. The
database is used for system configuration, but not required for running the
system.
Depending on the size of the system, these elements can be combined into a single
pc, or distributed in multiple units. The modular nature of the HMI allows units to be
expanded incrementally as system needs change.

CIMPLICITY TCIMB TCI
Point Alarm
Database Queue
Alarm External Alarm

Alarms
Point Data
Manager Alarm Queue

Manager
s
m
ar
Devices
A l Device
int Collector
Po
Point Point Data Mark V Data

Manager RP Dictionary
Devcom
(EGD...)
Devices
Figure 1-1. Data Flow Between HMI Components
Graphic Displays
The HMI uses the graphics and alarm features of the CIMPLICITY software to
integrate controls from a variety of applications. The graphical displays offer
realistic viewing in a real-time environment.
Screens are developed using The HMI displays data and processes operator commands using screens that
preconfigured graphic building represent a variety of signals, their values, and units. Display items change color
blocks that provide based on logic signals, while certain objects are dynamic and refresh with every data
commonality to different plant update, like bar graphs. High-speed viewing allows the displayed data to be updated
applications that use the HMI. once per second, and special tools allow collection and storage of data at rates as fast
as 10 ms.
HMI graphic displays include main unit, vibration, sensor readings, control setpoints,
alarms, permissives, logic forcing, demand display, sequence editor, dynamic rung
display, trip history display, trending, and many others depending on the application.
An operator can view alarms from any HMI on the network as they occur and to
freeze the scrolling as needed to address an alarm condition. The alarm management
feature provides options for response.
Figure 1-2 illustrates a typical Viewer screen using graphics to display real-time
turbine data.
The associated printer(s) enables the operator to manually select and copy any
display, to automatically log selected parameters, and to log alarms.
Alarm Viewer Setpoint Entry Alarm Detail Shaft Vibration
window selection display selection display selection
Figure 1-2. Sample HMI Display Showing Steam Turbine and Generator Data
The graphic system performs key HMI functions and provides the operator with real-
time process visualization and control using the following:
GFK-139 provides a detailed • CimEdit is an object-oriented program that creates and maintains the user
description of the CimEdit and graphic screen displays. Editing and animation tools, with the familiar Windows
CimView applications. environment, provide an intuitive, easy to use interface. Features include:
– Standard shape library
– Object Linking and Embedding (OLE)
– Movement and rotation animation
– Filled object capabilities, and interior and border animation
• CimView is the HMI run-time portion, displaying the process information in
graphical formats (as shown in Figure 1-2). In CimView, the operator can view
the system screens, and screens from other applications, using OLE automation,
run scripts, and get descriptions of object actions. Screens have a 1-second
refresh rate, and a typical graphical display takes one second to repaint. HMI
opens in CimView.

• Alarm Viewer provides alarm management functions such as sorting and
filtering by priority, by unit, by time, or by source device. Also supported are
configurable alarm field displays, and embedding dynamically updated objects
into CimView screens.
• Trending, based on Active X technology, gives users data analysis capabilities.
Trending uses data collected by the HMI or data from other third-party software
packages or interfaces. Data comparisons between current and past variable data
can be made for identification of process problems. Trending includes multiple
trending charts per graphic screen with unlimited pens per chart, and the operator
can resize or move trend windows to convenient locations on the display.
• The point control panel provides a listing of points in the system with real-time
values and alarm status. Operators can view and change local and remote set
points by direct numeric entry.
• The basic control engine allows users to define control actions in response to
system events. A single event can invoke multiple actions, or one action can be
invoked by many events. The program editor uses a Visual Basic for
Applications compliant programming language.
Communications
Refer to GEH-6126 Vol. II Figure 1-3 shows the networks used by the HMI to communicate within a
and individual controller SPEEDTRONIC turbine control system.
documents for more detail
about the networks and
protocol used for HMI Mark VI Plant Data Highway (Ethernet)
communication.
Data Data
HMI
HMI Server # 1 HMI Server # 2 Viewer Historian
TR
Mark VI Unit Data Highway (Ethernet)
Mark IV Control System Freeway (CSF)
Mark V Stagelink
Mark VI Mark IV Mark V

Turbine Turbine Turbine
Control Control Control
I/O I/O I/O
Figure 1-3. Example of a Turbine Control Communications Network
For Ethernet TCP/IP communication to third party equipment, such as a distributed
control system (DCS ), the HMI provides GE Industrial Systems standard messages
(GSM) and Modbus® protocol. GSM application layer protocols support four classes
of application-level messages: administration, event-driven, periodic data, and
common request messages.
Alternatively, communication to remote DCS equipment is available through a
Modbus interface, where the HMI acts as a slave to the DCS master. Such a system
allows an operator at a remote location to initiate any operator command and to
monitor turbine data.
Optional Features
Document GEH-6422 provides The HMI supports a Windows NT®-based Historian computer, which collects and
information about the stores data from the control units for later analysis. OSI’s PI-ProcessBook® provides
Historian. historical and real-time trending of all process data, and can run in the Historian
and/or HMI Viewer. The HMI communicates with the Historian through the
Ethernet-based Plant Data Highway (PDH) and through RS-232C lines.
The HMI includes a time synchronization capability in both low- and high-
resolution forms. When redundant time masters are available, all turbine controllers
and operator interface units on a system automatically select the same, highest
quality time master.
A Web Gateway allows operators to access HMI data from anywhere in the world
over the Internet. Third party interfaces allow the HMI to exchange data with the
DCS, programmable logic controllers, I/O devices, and other computers.
Application-Specific Features
When the HMI is paired with either the Mark V or the Mark VI turbine
controllers, the turbine control software tools can be added to as an integral part of
the HMI. The Mark VI features are based on the GE Control System Toolbox
(toolbox).
When the HMI is used in our Integrated Control Systems (ICS) product line or as a
Balance-of-Plant (BOP) control interface, the ICS/BOP toolset becomes part of the
HMI.
Technical Specifications
Exact hardware and software specifications for the HMI are determined according to
the customer’s needs and purchased options. The HMI workstation is typically sent
to the customer with the HMI program already installed.

Related Documentation
The following documents apply to the HMI and SPEEDTRONIC turbine controllers
and may assist in understanding HMI operation:
“GEH-####” is the document HMI-related documents:
identification number.
• GEH-6126A Volume II, HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control, Application
Guide
• GEI-100165, GEDS Standard Message Format
• GEI-100279, SDB Exchange User’s Guide for Control System Solutions
• GEI-100500, System Database Utilities for Control System Solutions
• GEI-100513, HMI Time Synchronization for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control
• GEI-100514, Power Block Control for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control,
Product Description
• GEI-100515, Microsoft NetMeeting® 3.0 for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control,
Installation and Setup
• GEI-100516, GE Industrial System Standard Messages (GSM)
• GEI-100535, Modbus Communication Interface for SPEEDTRONIC Mark VI
Turbine Controllers
• GEH-6422, Turbine Historian System Guide
• GFK-1180, CIMPLICITY Base System User's Manual
• GFK-1181, CIMPLICITY HMI Plant Edition, Base System Device
Communications Manual
• GFK-1396, CIMPLICITY HMI CimEdit Operation Manual
• GFK-1675, CIMPLICITY HMI, OPC Server Operation Manual
Mark VI controller and related documents:
• GEH-6403, Control System Toolbox for Configuring a Mark VI Turbine
Controller
• GEH-6408, Control System Toolbox for Configuring the Trend Recorder
• GEH-6421, SPEEDTRONIC Mark VI System Guide, Volumes I and II
• GEJ-7485, SPEEDTRONIC Mark VI Turbine Control, Software Maintenance
• GEI-100278, Data Historian
Mark V and V LM controller and related documents:
• GEH-5979, SPEEDTRONIC Mark V Turbine Control User’s Manual
• GEH-5980, SPEEDTRONIC Mark V Turbine Control Maintenance Manual
• GEH-6195, SPEEDTRONIC Mark V Turbine Control Application Manual
Overview
• GEH-6354, Mark V LM SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control <I+> User’s Manual
How to Use This Document
The user of this document should be familiar with the Microsoft Windows pc
interface and experienced with SPEEDTRONIC controllers and operating turbine
control systems.
For an exact outline of the This document is organized into the following chapters and appendices to assist an
document’s content and operator in understanding and using the HMI.
organization, refer to the Table
Chapter 1, Overview, provides an introductory product summary with related
of Contents.
reference information to assist the user.
Chapter 2, Quick Startup, serves as a reference to assist the operator in starting up
the HMI.
Chapter 3, Display-Only Applications, describes HMI programs for data display,
including sample screens.
Chapter 4, Control (Command) Applications, describes HMI programs for
displaying and controlling data, including sample screens.
Chapter 5, CIMPLICITY Displays, covers HMI functions that use CIMPLICITY
screens, including ActiveX objects and filtered alarms.
Chapter 6, CIMPLICITY Project Configuration, defines applications used to
configure a CIMPLICITY project.
Appendix A, HMI Function Reference, lists all current HMI functions and
identifies which SPEEDTRONIC controller includes each function.
Appendix B, Alarm Overview, a general overview of turbine controller alarms
viewed and addressed using the HMI.
Text Conventions
The following symbols, formatting, and presentation conventions are used in this
document to assist the user.
Convention Meaning
Ø A procedure follows.
Numbered list Procedural steps to be followed in order (for example, 1, 2, 3).
Alphabetized list Procedural substeps (of numbered steps) to be followed in
order (for example, a, b, c).
Bulleted (•) list Related items or procedures, but order does not matter.
w A procedure with only one step.
Boxed (¨) list A checklist.
Arial Bold When describing software, indicates the actual command or
option that is chosen from a menu or dialog box, or typed in a
text box or at the command prompt.
Monospace Represents examples of DOS screen text or display.

How to Get Help
If help is needed beyond the instructions provided in the system documentation,
contact GE as follows:
“+” indicates the international GE Industrial Systems
access code required when Post Sales Service
calling from outside the USA. 1501 Roanoke Blvd.
Phone: + 1 888 GE4 SERV (888 434 7378, United States)
Fax: + 1 540 387 8606 (All)
Note Please have the GE requisition or shop order number and the equipment serial
or model number available to exactly identify the equipment when calling.
Chapter 2 Quick-Start Procedures
Introduction
A facility receives the HMI pre-loaded with all the programs and customized
software required for the customer’s application. It is then configured during
installation to automatically log on and open to the main operator screen when
powered-up.
This chapter provides basic startup procedures to help the operator use the HMI.
Detail of these HMI features is covered in the other sections of this document.
Section Page
Starting Up HMI.......................................................................................................2-2
Alarm Displays.........................................................................................................2-3
Opening Projects ......................................................................................................2-4
Other Tools...............................................................................................................2-5
Dynamic Rung Display .....................................................................................2-5
Trip History .......................................................................................................2-5
Trip Log Viewer................................................................................................2-5
Demand Display................................................................................................2-6
Alarm Logger Control .......................................................................................2-6
Hold List Display (Steam Turbine Applications) ..............................................2-6
GEH-6126A Volume I Operator’s Guide Chapter 2 Quick-Start Procedures • 2-1

Starting Up HMI
Ø To start up the HMI and open your application
w Power up the pc if it is off, or press the three keys Ctrl+Alt+Delete all at once if
the system needs to be restarted.
GFK-1180 describes CimView When the pc starts up, it opens the CIMPLICITY Viewer (CimView) and displays
in detail. the main operation screen for its custom application (see Figure 2-1). All needed
programs are loaded and CIMPLICITY is started.
Note The HMI displays for your system are CimView screens (*.cim files), which
may open before CIMPLICITY finishes loading. If at first the screen is not animated
or setpoints fail, wait a few minutes for the startup to complete before beginning
operation.
Click buttons and

other animated
objects to open
additional screens or
objects.
Click to open screen

displaying all alarms.
Select an alarm listed, then click the button for the desired Alarm Display (see Figure 2-2)
for action
Figure 2-1. Example of HMI Starting Screen
2-2 • Chapter 2 Quick-Start Procedures HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
Alarm Displays
OCX is an object linking and Alarm Viewer is an OCX object embedded into a CIMPLICITY HMI screen, as
embedding (OLE) custom shown in Figure 2-1. It provides alarm management functions such as sorting and
control. filtering by priority, unit, time, or source device. Also supported are configurable
alarm field displays.
Custom TCI programs are used to enhance the CIMPLICITY alarm viewer for
Turbine applications. TCI provides the Silence, Lock, and Unlock Alarm Viewer
features (see Extended Alarm Commands in Chapter 5).
To apply a button to an alarm, highlight the alarm from the list, then click the button
Alarms are listed

in the display.
Figure 2-2. Example of Alarm Display Screen

Opening Projects
Document GFK-1180 provides The CIMPLICITY Workbench is an application used to view, configure, organize,
detail about using Workbench. and manage projects. Refer to Chapter 5 for examples using Workbench.
Ø To open a project
1. Open the Windows File Explorer.
2. Open the f:\cimproj directory.
3. Double-click on the .gef file.
The Workbench display opens (see Figure 2-3).
Left to right:
Left to right: - Configuration update
- Dynamic update - Status log
- Stop project - Project properties Right pane Search
- Start project - Project wizard views Help Properties Field chooser
Screens
Points
Application folder
Objects in application
Runtime
Alarms
Files or records Fields chosen for

associated with object display
Figure 2-3. Sample Workbench Display
Other Tools
The following sections provide simple Windows-based start-up instructions for HMI
display-only and control applications. However, they can also be started up and
configured using typed in commands, as described in Chapters 3 and 4 of this
document.
Dynamic Rung Display

Refer to Chapter 3 for more The Dynamic Rung Display program is used to step through the control
information. programming of a Mark V controller. It displays the control rungs and blocks in a
control sequence segment for a given unit. (Mark VI uses the toolbox for this
function.)
Ø To open the Dynamic Rung Display

w On the Windows desktop, select Start, Turbine Control Maintenance Group,
Unit T#, then Dynamic Rung Display.
Trip History
Refer to Chapter 3 for more The Trip History program provides a chronological record (log) of relevant data
information. gathered by the unit control. The data is organized according to post-trip, pre-trip,
and alarm categories.
Ø To view the Trip History

1. On the Windows desktop, select Start, Turbine Control Maintenance Group,
Unit T#, then Trip History.
2. From the Trip History dialog box (see Figure 3-3), select a valid unit from the
Select Unit list.
3. Click a Select Log option button for the type of historical data to be collected.
4. Click the Collect button to retrieve the data or the Cancel button to stop.
You can retrieve only one type of data at a time. When the data retrieval completes
successfully, the program displays the results in a separate window.
Trip Log Viewer

Refer to Chapter 3 for more If TCI and HMI are running during Mark V controller trips, the program
information. automatically collects and stores data of the last ten trips in the HMI. (The HMI
must also be communicating with the control.)
Ø To view the Mark V Trip log

Unit T#, then Trip Log Viewer.
2. From the Trip Log Viewer dialog box, select a valid unit from the Select Unit list
box.
3. From the Select a Previous Trip Log, select a log to display by highlighting it.
4. Click the Go To button to display the selected log (file) with data from that trip.

Demand Display
Refer to Chapter 4 for more This display allows you to view values of a selected list of points.
information.
Ø To load an existing Demand Display file
Unit T#, then Demand Display.
2. From the File menu, select Open.
3. Select the file from the directory that displays.
If no existing file is specified when using Demand Display, the default file
DEMAND01.DM2 (located in the F:\RUNTIME directory) loads.
Alarm Logger Control

Refer to Chapter 4 for more The HMI’s Alarm Logger Control program allows you to select alarms and events to
information. output to the printer.
Ø To print alarms or events using this program

Unit T#, then Alarm Logger Control.
2. Select the Unit and the Logger Function from the dialog box.
3. Click OK.
Hold List Display (Steam Turbine Applications)

Refer to Chapter 4 and The Hold List is required for the HMI to support Mark V large and medium steam
Appendix B for more turbine controls on systems that have Automatic Turbine Startup (ATS). Turbine
information on the Hold List. operating conditions may cause a hold, which prevents ATS from setting the speed
or load target to a higher value.
The CIMPLICITY Alarm Viewer displays the Hold List on the HMI, to view and
override the current hold points. Refer to Alarm Displays in this chapter.
Chapter 3 Display-Only Programs
Introduction
The HMI provides an online database for collecting and storing data from multiple
controllers. Refer to the controller documentation for a description of this.
Chapter 4 describes control The HMI’s display-only programs allow you to view turbine control data as needed
(command) programs. to monitor the system. You cannot, however, send control commands from these.
This chapter describes display-only programs. It is presented as follows:
Section Page
Dynamic Rung Display ............................................................................................3-2

File Structure .....................................................................................................3-2
Dynamic Rung Display Windows .....................................................................3-3
Starting the Dynamic Rung Display..................................................................3-6
Selecting a Sequencing Display Screen.............................................................3-7
Using the Find All Function ..............................................................................3-7
Viewing Tabular Data .......................................................................................3-8
Trip History ..............................................................................................................3-9
Trip History File................................................................................................3-9
Starting Trip History .......................................................................................3-11
Trip History Dialog Box..................................................................................3-11
Data History Results Window.........................................................................3-12
Trip History on the Mark VI ...........................................................................3-13
Trip Log Viewer .....................................................................................................3-14
Trip Log File ...................................................................................................3-14
Trip Log Viewer Dialog Box ..........................................................................3-14
Viewing Results ..............................................................................................3-15
Starting the Trip Log Viewer ..........................................................................3-15
GEH-6126A Volume I Operator’s Guide Chapter 3 Display-Only Programs • 3-1

Dynamic Rung Display
Mark VI uses the toolbox for The Dynamic Rung Display program is used for viewing the control programming of
this function. a Mark V controller. It displays the control rungs and blocks in a control sequence
segment for a given unit. The program features the following:
• Animation to show the current state of the control
• Rung Ladder Display (RLD) rungs displayed with green representing continuity
in contacts and the energized state in a coil
• Primitive and Big Block rungs sometimes displayed with their associated picture
files showing either signal names or actual point values
• A Demand Display (see Chapter 4) with all of the signal names and values from a
rung
• A Find utility to display the locations and usage of all occurrences of a signal in
the unit’s Control Sequence Program (CSP).
The following rules apply to the Dynamic Rung Display:
• TCI must be running
• More than one control segment from a given unit can be open at a time
• Can display only segments from a single unit at any time
• Cannot be used to alter the unit’s CSP
File Structure
Table 3-1. Dynamic Rung Display File Description
File Name Description

MSTR_SEQ.CFG Lists the sequencing source files (*.SRC) used in the
control
*.SRC The source files for the individual control sequence
segments
\PROM\BIGBLOCK.DEF The block definition file for the unit
\PROM\PRIMITIVE.DEF The primitive definition file for the unit
\PROM\*.PIC The picture files for the big blocks and primitives
\PROM\*.SPC Sequencing BBL source files
The files are used by the Dynamic Rung Display to coordinate and accurately display
the unit control data. These files are also used for unit control configuration and
cannot be altered by the Dynamic Rung Display. It is imperative that the
configuration and sequencing files in the unit control and in the operator interface
match. The Dynamic Rung Display does not independently verify that the operator
interface files match the unit control files. If these files do not match, the Dynamic
Rung Display may display data that does not reflect the state of the unit control.
3-2 • Chapter 3 Display-Only Programs HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
The Dynamic Rung Display can save picture file displays in a text format for future
reference. These text files may be opened by any text editor or word processor. It
also creates temporary Demand Display files (*.DM2) in the system temporary
directory when the Demand Display is used to show the points and values from a
given rung. These files are automatically deleted when the Demand Display closes.
Dynamic Rung Display Windows

The Dynamic Rung Display is a multiple document interface that allows you to open
windows with different segments or the same segment. The user may also have
picture file windows and sub rung windows open. The windows are sized to display
a full view of a rung. However, the window may be resized and repositioned.
There are three major types of windows: rung, picture, and main frame, described
below.
Rung Windows
Rung windows (see Figure 3-1) are used to display the animation of the control
sequencing and navigate through the control sequencing segments. They can display
data from main sequencing rungs or sub rungs that are predefined into Big Blocks.
Title bar displays unit name and

segment name
Header, which displays the

following data:
• Unit, site, program, and
segment name
• Rung number
• Timetag
The Header can scroll off the

screen or be hidden by other
windows. However, it is good
practice to keep it visible because
it contains valuable process
information.
Figure 3-1. Example of a Dynamic Rung Display Window

Dynamic Rung Display windows can contain the following types of data:
• RLD rung
• Primitive rungs
• Big blocks
• Comment rungs
Header data is located in the The type of information in the header timetag depends on the type of display:
upper left of the window.
• In both the RLD and primitive rung displays, the timetag provides the oldest
piece of data being displayed in the RLD portions of the rung. If it has not
received data from the unit, the timetag display is No Valid Data. If the oldest
piece of data in the rung has not been updated for at least five seconds, the
timetag is highlighted. Rung animation occurs once per second (see Table 3-2).
• In both the big block and comment rung displays, the timetag indicates the
operator interface time when the rung was displayed. It does not update.
Note RLD Rung displays update automatically, and thus are animated in the rung
window. Parameter information passed in Primitive Block and Big Block rungs is
not animated in the rung window, although you can update the display manually.
Comment Rungs do not update.
Table 3-2. Animation Rules for Both RLD and Primitive Rungs
Rung
Component Animation Rule
Normally • A green rectangle between the contacts shows continuity.
Open
Contacts • No rectangle between the contacts shows an open circuit.
• A ">" symbol between the contacts means forced signals.
• A rectangle outline around the ">" symbol highlights contacts that are forced to the open condition.
Normally • A slash through the contact indicates normally closed.

Closed
Contacts • A green rectangle between the contacts shows continuity.
• No rectangle between the contacts means an open circuit.
• A rectangle outline around the ">" symbol highlights contacts that are forced to the open condition.
The slash through the contacts is broken in the middle to highlight the ">" symbol.
Normal Coils • A coil circle filled with green is energized.

• A coil circle filled with the window background color is de-energized.
• A ">" symbol in the coil circle indicates forced signals.
Inverted Coils • A slash through the coil indicates that it is inverted.

• A coil circle filled with green is energized.
• A coil circle filled with the window background color is de-energized.
• A ">" symbol in the coil circle indicates forced signals. The slash through the contacts is broken in
the middle to highlight the ">" symbol.
Ø To update the Primitive Block Rung or Big Block Rung display to
show passed parameters
w Select either Picture File or Demand Display from the View menu.
Ø To update Big Block Rung display to show automatic parameters

w Select Demand Display from the View menu.
Picture File Windows

Picture file windows (see Figure 3-2) are used to display the picture file and
animation of the passed parameters for Primitive and Big Blocks.
Title bar displays:

• Unit name
• Segment name
• Rung number
• Picture file name
Header, which displays

the following data:
• Unit, site, segment, and
picture file name
• Rung number
• Timetag (differs for Static
and Values displays)
The Header can scroll off the screen or be

hidden by other windows. However, it is good
practice to keep it visible because it contains
valuable process information.
Figure 3-2. Dynamic Rung Display’s Picture File Window
The type of information in the header timetag depends on the type of display:
• For a values display, the timetag provides the oldest piece of data being
displayed as a passed parameter. This includes the coil output for primitive
blocks. If it has not received data from the unit, the timetag display is No Valid
Data. If the oldest piece of data in the rung has not been updated for at least five
seconds, the timetag is highlighted.
• For a static display, the header timetag provides the operator interface time of
when the rung was displayed.

Note Picture files cannot be opened directly by selecting Open from the File menu.
Ø To open a picture file

1. Open a sequencing segment (see Selecting a Sequencing Display Screen).
2. Navigate to the rung that contains the applicable Primitive or Big Block.
3. Select Picture File from the View menu.
A static picture file window displays with the passed parameter point names
represented as inputs and outputs to the block.
4. Select Values from the View menu to change to a values type display.
The parameter point names are replaced with their current values from the real-
time database. The data is updated once per second.
The following rules also apply to the picture file displays:

• To toggle between the values display and the static display, select Values from
the View menu.
• Big Block automatic parameters are not animated in the picture file window. You
can only view their values by selecting Demand Display from the View menu.
• You cannot navigate to other rungs or picture file windows from a picture file
window.
• A picture file window remains open until you close it by selecting Close from
the File menu.
Main Frame Window

This is the outer window that contains the rung and picture file windows. If no
control sequencing files or picture files are open, this window is empty.
Starting the Dynamic Rung Display

There are four ways to start the Dynamic Run Display:
• Double-click the program icon (if it is available on the desktop).
• On the Windows desktop, select Start, Turbine Control Maintenance Group,
Unit T#, then Dynamic Rung Display.
• Enter dynrung.exe in the Run dialog box in the Start menu.

• Enter dynrung.exe at the DOS command line, then press Enter.
To quickly bring the display to a desired configuration, you can launch the Dynamic
Rung Display from the DOS command line with the following arguments:
/UNIT:
You can use the command line
arguments to customize the /FILE:
Dynamic Rung Display startup. /RUNG:
For example:
G:\EXEC\DYNRUNG.EXE /UNIT:T1: specifies the unit as T1
G:\EXEC\DYNRUNG.EXE /UNIT:T1 /FILE:SEQ_40.SRC: specifies the file name
G:\EXEC\DYNRUNG.EXE /UNIT:T1 /FILE:SEQ_40.SRC/RUNG:23 specifies the
rung number
Selecting a Sequencing Display Screen
Sequencing files contain the Control Sequence for each control segment. The
following rules apply when opening these files:
• Selecting File then Open can only open a regular sequencing segment from the
files listed in the MSTR_SEQ.CFG.
• You must select a unit before you can open a sequencing file.
• You can open more than segment at a time, or have multiple views of the same
segment.
• Use the Window menu to change between views.
• To navigate within a segment, use the Rung menu and toolbar buttons.
Using the Find All Function

The Dynamic Rung Display includes a Find All function, which allows you to find
the occurrence of a particular signal anywhere within the control sequencing. This
function will find the following:
• Signal names in RLD rungs
• Signal names as passed parameters
• Signal names as automatic parameters
• Primitive names
• Big Block names
Find All does not do the following:
• Locate signals and block names used in sub rungs

• Search Comment Rungs. The Find All Function is available only after a valid
unit has been selected.
Ø To display results using the Find All function

1. Select Find All from the Edit menu.
2. In the dialog box, enter the desired signal or block name.
3. Select Find to display the results.
The Find All Results dialog box contains four columns, as follows:
• The first column displays the rung number where the rung was found.
• The second column shows the segment name.
• The third column shows the rung type.
• The fourth column shows how the signal is used in the rung.

Ø To open a segment from the Find All results with the desired rung
displayed
w On the rung number, double-click the left mouse button.
-Or-
w Highlight the rung number and click the Goto button.
Note The Find All Results dialog box remains open until you select the Close
button or change units.
Viewing Tabular Data

Viewing tabular data can be useful when studying the behavior of a BBL with
automatic parameters.
The Dynamic Run Display allows you to launch the Demand Display to view RLD
elements, Big Block and Primitive passed parameters, and Big Block automatic
parameters. The data is in tabular form.
The Demand Display is a
Ø To view tabular data in a Demand Display
separate program outside of the
Dynamic Rung Display. Refer w Select Demand Display from the View menu.
to Chapter 4 for more
This displays all of the points from the current rung.
information.
Trip History
Mark VI uses the Control The Trip History program provides a chronological record (log) of relevant data
System Toolbox for this gathered by the Mark V or V LM unit control. The data is organized according to
function. post-trip, pre-trip, and alarm categories. The program is used to help evaluate turbine
trip events.
You can use this program to retrieve data from the unit control and view it on the
operator interface (see Trip History Dialog Box below).
Control Signal Database Points (CSDBs) can be defined for collection. These
definitions (64 max.) are made in a single file (HIST_B.SRC). All data in the display
is chronologically indexed according to Mark V controller time and a separate
controller counter (HIS_AGE).
Trip History File

Trip History stores the results of the data retrieval in a read-only temporary text file.
This file is displayed using Microsoft Notepad (see Data History Results Window).
The Trip History file contains the points for collection and retrieval by the Trip
History program. This file for the unit is HIST_B.SRC, located in the unit
configuration directory. Information logged in the alarm section of the display is not
user-definable. You can use any text editor to modify the file.
SOEs are sequence of events. For pre-trip and post-trip screens, timetag (TIME) definitions are listed for the
displayed Control Data Point information. These designations provide a
chronological index that ties the exhibited signal information to the unit control time.
This register can provide valuable information for determining the SOEs that lead to
a turbine trip.
If the controller time is reset during an event, this index is lost. To prevent this, the
Trip Log Display includes a second counter (HIS_AGE) that is internal to the unit
control, but runs independently of the controller clock. This counter updates once-
per-second. It advances until a maximum value is reached, at which point the counter
returns to zero and restarts.
Figure 3-3 provides a sample HIST_B.SRC file in which the counter increments only
when the turbine is in a run condition. HIS_AGE must always be the first point in the
HIST_B.SRC file.
Note After modifying the Trip History file, you should process and downloaded it.

;------------------------------------------
; HIST_B.SRC
; HIS_AGE MUST BE THE FIRST POINT!
;
; Signal Name
; -----------
HIS_AGE
DWATT
TNH
FSR
L52GX
L14HR
L14HM
L14HA
L14HS
L94X
L4
L3
L2TV
L28FDX
TTXD_1
TTXD_2
TTXD_3
TTXD_4
TTXD_5
TTXD_6
TTXD_7
TTXD_8
TTXD_9
TTXD_10
TTXD_11
TTXD_12
TTXD_13
TTXD_14
TTXD_15
TTXD_17
TTXD_18
FQG
FQL1
FSG
CTIM
CSGV
CPD
TTXSPL
TTXSP1
TTXSP2
TTXSP3
L4CT
Figure 3-3. Example of a Trip History File (HIST_B.SRC)
Starting Trip History
You can start the Trip History program any of four ways:
Unit T#, then Trip History.
• Enter tripdlog.exe in the Start menu’s Run dialog box.

You can use the command line • Enter tripdlog.exe at the DOS command line, then press Enter.
arguments to customize the
Trip History startup. When the program starts, the Trip History dialog box displays (described below).
From there, you select the unit and type of data to display.
To quickly bring the display to a desired configuration, you can launch the Trip
History Program from the DOS command line with the /UNIT argument, as follows:
G:\EXEC\TRIPDLOG.EXE /UNIT:T1 specifies the unit as T1
Trip History Dialog Box

The Trip History dialog box controls the collection of Trip History data and
Historical log data from the unit control.
Ø To view the Trip History log

You can retrieve only one type 1. From the Trip History dialog box (see Figure 3-4), select a valid unit from the
of data at a time. Select Unit list.
2. Choose the type of historical data to be collected from the Select Log options.
3. Click the Collect button to collect the data or the Cancel button to stop it.
When the data collection completes successfully, the results display in a separate
window (see Data History Results Window). A message box displays if the data
retrieval fails or is stopped by a user command.
Click to start data collection.
Click to close the Trip History dialog box.
Select the Unit from the list.
Select the type of data to be collected.
Trip History is saved when the turbine trips. For Mark V LM unit
controls, the data is saved in the control even after the control is reset.
Saved Data is saved into the control memory when you collect New
Data. It remains in memory until it is overwritten by New Data or until
the control is reset.
New Data is saved to the control memory when the user collects New
Data. The data reflects the most recent control data. The data remains
in the control memory as Saved Data until it is overwritten or until the
control is reset.
Note Collecting New Data overwrites the Saved History Data in

the control. On Mark V units, New Data overwrites the Trip History
Data in the control.
Figure 3-4. Trip History Dialog Box

Note Trip History data is lost in Mark V controllers if the unit control is reset. The
trip history data is preserved in the controller memory over a unit control reset or
reboot in Mark V LM units.
Data History Results Window

When the data retrieval completes successfully, the program opens Microsoft
Notepad and displays the results in a separate viewer window (see Figure 3-5). The
data is designed to be displayed in a fixed pitch font (all characters have the same
width) and word wrapping disabled. The results shown are stored in a read-only
temporary file.
Ø To save the Trip History data displayed by Notepad

1. From the Notepad File menu, select Save As.
2. Select the directory and name for the .txt file.
3. Click the Save button.
The results saved are in the following format:

• Post Trip List: three 1 second post trip records. These three records are filled
with data only when there has been an actual trip. Otherwise, they are blank.
• 10 Second List: ten 1-second records
• 1-Minute List: five 10-second records
• 10-Minute List: nine 1-minute records
• 1-Hour List: five 10-minute records
• 4-Hour List: four 1-hour records
• Last 60 Process Alarms
Enumerated state variable data Each record consists of the following fields:
is displayed as numbers, not as
text strings. • Timetag
• Value of from 1 to 64 points from the CSDB.
Header, identifies the unit and location.
Up to 64 points can be viewed. HIS_AGE is

always reserved as the first point.
Post trip list

Three 1-sec records
10-sec. list
Ten 1-sec records
1-min. list
Five 10-sec records
Figure 3-5. Trip History Results Displayed in Notepad
Trip History on the Mark VI

Refer to Data Historian The Mark VI controller uses the Data Historian, a toolbox program to collect and
document GEI-100278 and view trip history data. The Historian trip log is a combination of historical analog
Trend Recorder document and discrete data collected at a rate of one second, and multiple capture buffers
GEH-6408 for more collected at high speed. Ethernet Global Data (EGD) is available for 24 hours. The
information. controller capture buffers hold 60 seconds of data.
This trip history data is viewed using the Trend Recorder, another toolbox program.
With this, multiple analog signals are trended on a full-page screen, which also
contains information on the configured discrete variables. High-speed discrete data
including all events, alarms, and SOEs can also be viewed in a list format showing
the logic state and time of the event.

Trip Log Viewer
Refer to GEH-6126 Volume 2 A Mark V controller loses the trip history data stored in its memory if the unit
for information on the Trip Log control is reset or rebooted. A Mark V LM controller keeps the data for the last trip
Collection utility. if a reset or reboot occurs. However, the Turbine Control Interface (TCI) includes a
Trip Log Collection utility that automatically collects and stores the data. (Both the
utility and HMI must be running during the trip.)
You can access this data, which is displayed in a separate viewer window, using the
HMI’s Trip Log Viewer.
Trip Log File

The Viewer reads the previously saved trip text files stored on the disk. It determines
the trip times associated with each file from the name of the file, which is encoded
with the trip date and time information. Viewer opens Microsoft Notepad and
displays the valid trip times for the selection.
Ø To save the trip times

1. From Notepad, select Save As from the File menu.
The Trip Log Collection utility 2. Type in a file name and click Save.
stores the last 1 – 10 trips .
The files are stored in the C:\HMIDATA directory. The automatic collection
After that, it overwrites the
program manages the file names in the format YYYYMMDD_UU_TRx.CSV, as
oldest trip file with any new trip
follows:
data.
YYYYMMDD_HHMMSS_UU_TRx.CSV
File extension (to allow Microsoft Excel
viewing and analysis)
TRP indicates that the file contains trip

information; TRQ indicates a normal
shutdown or an aborted startup
Unit name
Data and time of trip (Y = year; M = minute,

D = day, H = hour, S = second
Figure 3-6. Trip History File Name Convention
Trip Log Viewer Dialog Box

The Trip Log Viewer dialog box controls the selection of Trip History data stored on
the disk.
Ø To view the trip log data (refer to Figure 3-7)

1. From the Trip Log Viewer dialog box, select a valid unit from the Select Unit
list box.
2. From the Select a Previous Trip Log, select a log to display by highlighting it.
3. Click the Go To button to display the selected log (file) with data from that trip.
4. Select the Close button to exit.
Select to view log
Identifies location
Select to exit dialog box
Select the Unit from the list
Listed by Trip Date and

Time stamp.
Logs of past trip events.

Select to display
The number of trips is set
by the Trip Log Collection
utility. Default is 10.
The most recent is listed at
the top. Additional trips
overwrite the oldest log.
Figure 3-7. Mark V and Mark V LM Trip Log Viewer Dialog Box
Viewing Results
Refer to the previous Data History Results Window for a detailed description of the
data format and viewer program.
Starting the Trip Log Viewer

There are four ways to start the Trip Log Viewer:
Unit T#, then Trip Log Viewer.
• Enter tripvwr.exe in the Start menu’s Run dialog box.

You can use the command line • Enter tripvwr.exe at the DOS command line, then press Enter.
arguments to customize the
Trip Log Viewer startup. When the program starts, the Trip History dialog box displays (described previousy
in this chapter). From there, you select the unit and type of data to display.
To quickly bring the display to a desired configuration, you can launch the Trip
History Program from the DOS command line with the /UNIT argument, as follows:
G:\EXEC\TRIPVWR.EXE /UNIT:T1 specifies the unit as T1

Notes
Chapter 4 Control (Command)
Programs
Introduction
Chapter 3 describes display- The HMI’s control (command) programs allow you to control system operation by
only programs. sending commands to the controller.
This chapter describes the HMI control programs. It is presented as follows:
Section Page
Demand Display .......................................................................................................4-2

Starting Demand Display ..................................................................................4-2
Working with Files............................................................................................4-3
Demand Display Windows................................................................................4-4
Figure 4-1. Example of Menu Window............................................................4-4
Data Area Description............................................................................... 4-6
Command Target Types ............................................................................ 4-6
Using Demand Display .....................................................................................4-7
Displaying, Creating, and Modifying Screens .......................................... 4-7
Working with Command Targets ............................................................ 4-11
Other Options .......................................................................................... 4-13
Command Line Configuration.........................................................................4-13
Commands and Arguments ..................................................................... 4-13
Using Multiple Arguments...................................................................... 4-14
Alarm Logger Control ............................................................................................4-15
Starting the Alarm Logger Control ......................................................... 4-15
Hold List (Steam Applications) ..............................................................................4-16
Hold List Points...............................................................................................4-16
Hold List Programs .........................................................................................4-16
Hold List Rules................................................................................................4-16
GEH-6126A Volume I Operator’s Guide Chapter 4 Control (Command) Programs • 4-1

Demand Display
This program is used on Mark Demand Display is a Microsoft® Windows®-based program that offers flexible
IV, V, and V LM controllers. monitoring and control of a variety of datapoints and multiple units. It provides the
For Mark VI, refer to the Con- following turbine control features:
trol System Toolbox documen-
tation, • Ability to monitor several datapoints at a time
• Ability to issue simple commands to the unit(s)
• Alterable displays that conform to the user needs
• Easy conformance to the displays required for testing and special procedures
• Control of special unit functions while monitoring associated data
• Ability to accommodate different types of units in one Demand Display file (see
Working with Files in this chapter).
Only qualified personnel knowledgeable about turbine con-

trol and protection should create and execute commands.
The commands can affect the control state and action of the
unit control.
The Demand Display program can be started and customized through either Win-
dows or a DOS-based line command (see Starting Demand Display). This chapter
includes instructions using Demand Display with Mark IV, V, and V LM controllers.
For Mark VI controllers, use the toolbox.
Starting Demand Display

There are four ways to start Demand Display:
Unit T#, then Demand Display.
• At the DOS command prompt, type DEMAND then press Enter.

• On the Windows desktop, select Start and Run, then enter DEMAND.EXE in the
dialog box.
DEMAND01.DM2 is located in Demand Display automatically opens a generic default file DEMAND01.DM2, which
the F:\RUNTIME directory can use data from multiple units. The program provides two types of working win-
dows:
For description and operation • A Menu window contains a list (menu) of all of the screens available in the se-
of these program windows, see lected Demand Display file.
the Demand Display Windows
section in this chapter. • Data windows contain data associated with a particular unit. These screens are
selected from the Menu window.
4-2 • Chapter 4 Control (Command) Programs HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
Ø To load an existing .DM2 file from the Demand Display
1. From the File menu, select Open.
Or click .
2. Select the file from the directory that displays.
If no existing file is specified when executing Demand Display the default file
DEMAND01.DM2 (located in the F:\RUNTIME directory) loads.
Ø To create a new .DM2 file from the Demand Display
Or click . w From the File menu, select New.

A blank Demand Display Menu screen displays with the single menu item De-
mand Display. This is a template that must be renamed after modification.
Saving a new Demand Display file without renaming it over-

writes the existing file data with the new file data.
Saving the Demand Display template screen without a new
screen name causes the template to no longer be a blank.
Note Exiting either the screen or file without saving loses changes to the file.
Working with Files

Demand Display uses the following files:
File name Location (Directory) Description

DEMAND.EXE G:\EXEC (executable directory) Opens the Demand Display program. The program opens files with
.DM2 extensions (for example, DEMAND01.DM2).
To ensure that the Demand Display program

functions correctly, do not modify the
DEMAND.EXE file.
xxxxx.DM2 RUNTIME directory in the F:\ Demand Display files, which are in binary format, contain defini-
drive (typically). The Demand tions for all of the Data screens listed on the Demand Display Menu
Display program saves new for that file. One file generally saves several Demand Display
files in the directory in which screens. One unit may use several of these files. Open, modify,
the program was executed, and save these files using the Demand Display program (do not
unless a different directory is edit the files directly).
selected.
unitname.DD Files that make up the Data Data Dictionary files contain the point list available for use in the
(unitname varies Dictionary for a unit are stored Data screens. Demand Display obtains points values directly from
as needed.) in its unit-specific directory and the Data Dictionary. (SYSTEM.DD is the master data dictionary file,
should always be kept there. which contains pointers to all *.DD files used by the Demand Dis-
plays).

Demand Display Windows
As defined previously, there are two types of Demand Display windows:
To display a screen listed on • The Menu window lists all screens available in the selected *.DM2 file (see Fig-
the menu, select that item using ure 4-1). It is the starting point for working with Data screens. .
the mouse or Enter key.
• Data windows are screens selected from the Menu window. The name and defi-
nition of Data screen is associated with a particular unit. (For example, Unit 1
would differ from Unit 2 in the names and definitions of the Data displays.)
There are two types of Data screens: Point List and Data Dictionary (see Fig-
ures 4-2 and 4-3).
The titlebar displays the filename currently in the Demand Display.
Menu selections include both standard Windows

and program-specific commands.
The toolbar provides quick access to menu

commands. Holding the cursor over the
button displays the button function (see Note).
Header, which contains process identification

d t )
Data Area, which contains menu of available data
screens. New screens can be added.
Note Selecting the Help button opens the

Help window. Selecting the Context Sensitive Help
button changes the cursor to an arrow with a
question mark. You can then select an item with
this cursor to open the item’s Help information.
Figure 4-1. Example of Menu Window
The Point List data screen is created and edited

from points and commands entered by the user
from the Demand Display program. It is the most
common type of display.
You can define additional Header

point names and command
targets or remove existing ones
from Point List data screens. Legend
Data Area
Command Target Field
Figure 4-2. Example of Point List Type of Data Screen, User-Defined
The Data Dictionary data screen is built auto-
matically from point information stored in the
Data Dictionary. It configures the screens from
options that select the points and commands to
display. The Value field updates once each
second.
Header
This data screen is used for
examining specific point types Legend
and command options.
Adding and deleting point names

and command pushbuttons from
a Data Dictionary data screen is Data Area
temporary and cannot be saved.
Figure 4-3. Example of Data Dictionary Type of Data Screen Using Logics
Both Demand Display windows are made up of three main regions (refer to Figures
4-1 through 4-3):
GE recommends that you keep • The screen Header is non-scrolling process identification data. It contains the:
the screen header visible at all – Unit name
times. – Site name
– Program name
– Display screen name
– Timetag (pc time) for the oldest piece of data in the Data Area.
Although the header cannot scroll off the screen, you can toggle it on or off by
selecting Header from the View menu.
The Timetag displays the oldest of the displayed point name timetags in the
controller. If the Data Area is empty (contains no valid points), or the Data Area
contains valid points but no data has been received from the unit, then the timetag
is No Valid Data. A highlighted timetag indicates that the oldest piece of data in
the Data Area has not been updated for five seconds.
GE recommends that you keep • The Legend displays the non-scrolling column headers for the Data Area. Al-
the column headers visible at though the header cannot scroll off the screen, you can toggle it on or off by se-
all times. lecting Header from the View menu.
• The Data Area is below the Header and Legend. In the Menu screen, the Data
Area consists of a list of the Data screens available for viewing. In a Data screen,
the Data Area consists of an unlimited list of point names, their values, and units.
This information is in a tabular format. (See Data Area Description below for
more details.)
Any Command Targets defined display on the right side of the window. (See
Command Target Types below for more details.)

Data Area Description
Unlike the Header and Legend, the point names and command targets in the Data
Area scroll with the scroll bars. Demand Display updates only the visible points. The
following sections in the Data Area provide information or require input:
• The Point Name field holds the control signal point name (or synonym) of valid
unit database points. Entering the point name causes Demand Display to use the
currently selected unit’s data, which is the unit listed in the Header. Entering the
unit name with a colon before the point name, as in T2:{Pointname}, displays
data from the requested unit.
The Point Name field is 15 characters in length. Demand Display allows you to
enter other text into this field for commenting and separating sections of points.
Invalid point names are treated as text to allow for entering textual separations of
the data.
• The Value field contains point value information. This field updates once each
second, is right justified, and may contain up to 10 characters. If the value is
larger than 10 characters, 10 asterisks display. Enumerated state values display
across both the Value field and the Units field. The Demand Display program
centers the Enumerated state values across these fields and truncates them if they
are over 17 characters long. A blank Value field indicates either of 2 conditions:
– The point information is invalid
– There is no data for the point in the Data Dictionary
• The Units field displays engineering units for valid point names exactly as en-
tered in the Data Dictionary file. This field is blank for invalid point names, but
indicates the units for valid points without data in the Data Dictionary. The Units
field combines with the Value field to display the text for enumerated points.
• The Command Target field is to the right of the Units field. It contains Unit
Command Targets (buttons) for sending control commands to the unit.
Command Target Types

Command Targets (see Figure 4-2) are essentially buttons that you select to perform
the action identified on its label. There are three Command Target types:
Feedback logic is optional. • Immediate Action type sends a command to the control immediately without
requiring further action. They typically perform an incremental change to the
control, such as Raise or Lower.
These targets are red and their text turns yellow if the feedback logic is supplied
and met.
• Arm/Execute type typically performs changes to the control state, such as Start
and Stop. When selected, it opens the Execute Command dialog box to confirm
execution. Selecting OK sends the command to the unit. Selecting Cancel can-
cels the command. No response causes the Demand Display to cancel the com-
mand through default.
These targets are green and their text turns yellow if the feedback logic is sup-
plied and met.
Note Requiring command confirmation before sending them to the unit prevents
execution of false commands.
Speed or Temperature references • Analog Setpoint type changes the setpoint value of the specified control. It does
are examples of control signals. not use feedback logic. When selected, a Setpoint Dialog box (see Figure 4-4)
opens, requesting the new value for the control signal. No response cancels the
command through default.
These targets are gray and their text turns yellow if the feedback logic is supplied
and met.
Enter new value Uses the current

display engineer-
ing units
Sends new value Cancels command

to unit and closes box
Figure 4-4. Example of Change Setpoint Dialog Box
Using Demand Display

Each unit can have more than As described previously, each Demand Display file (*.DM2) contains its own Menu
one Demand Display file. window and set of Data screens. After you select a *.DM2 file (see Starting Demand
Display), Demand Display opens into a Menu window. This is the starting point for
working with Demand Display data screens within that file.
Note You can also use command line arguments to start Demand Display and open
specific screens and files. Refer to the Command Line Configuration section of this
chapter for the instructions.
Save Demand Display files Ø To save a Demand Display file

anytime a Demand Display
1. Select Save or Save As from the File menu.
screen is saved or added.
2. Save As displays the Save As dialog box, allowing you to select the directory
and a new file name.
If you exit the Demand Display program before saving changes to the Menu or
Data screens, the program asks if you want to save the file.
3. Select Yes to save the file and No to exit the program without saving.
Note Saving a Demand Display file and a Demand Display screen require different
steps. How to save a screen is described below.
Displaying, Creating, and Modifying Screens

Ø To open (display) an existing Data screen
1. From the list in Menu window select a data screen that you want to open.
2. Either double-click on the selection or press Enter to open the screen.

Ø To create (add) a new Data screen
1. From the Menu window, place the cursor at the point in the list where you want
to insert the new screen title.
2. Select Insert Line from the Edit menu.
This adds a new, blank data screen and its title as Untitled:#, where the # is the
number of the new screen.
3. Give the screen a new name as described in the modify instructions below.
Ø To modify a Data screen (title, type, options)

1. From the Menu window, place the cursor at line with the screen name.
2. Select Modify Line from the Edit menu. Or, select Definition from the Display-
menu.
The Display Definition dialog box opens (see Figure 4-5).
Data screen title (see

guidelines below).
Allows you to change the

Data screen type.
Select the point types to

display in a Data Dictionary
type Data screen.
Display Title guidelines:

• Screen title can be up to 25
characters long.
• Names should not be
duplicated, empty, or all
blanks
• The use of ellipsis (.....)
placed before the title of a
Data Dictionary type Data
screen is recommended to
differentiate it from a Point
List type Data screen.
Figure 4-5. Display Definition Dialog Box
3. In the Display Title text box, type a new name, if desired.
Figures 4-2 and 4-3 provide 4. Use the Display Type options to change between a Point List type or a Data
samples of these types of Data Dictionary type, as desired.
screens.
5. Select OK to save the changes.
6. Save the Data screen, as described below.
Ø To save a Data screen

7. Select Save or Save As from the Display menu.
– Save saves the screen changes to the same screen title on the Menu window.
– Save As saves the screen changes to a new screen title on the Menu window.
It also opens the Display Definition dialog box.
8. If the Display Definition dialog box opens, type a new name in the Display Title
text box (see Figure 4-5).
9. Select OK or Save As from the Display menu to save changes. Keep in mind the
following:
– Save As does not change the old Display Title to a new one. It inserts the title
of the new Data screen at the bottom of the Menu list.
– If you do not enter a new Display Title, another Demand Display screen with
the same name is added to the bottom of the Demand Display Menu. You
should rename the edited Demand Display screens if you keep the original.
– If you exit the Demand Display program before saving changes to the
screens, the program asks if you want to save changes before exiting. Select
Yes to save the changes in the *.DM2 file and No to exit without saving.
Ø To copy a Data screen from one unit to another

At locations with duplicate or 1. From the Menu window, open the desired screen.
similar units, it may be useful to
2. Select Unit from the Edit menu.
copy a Demand Display screen
from one unit to another. 3. Select the new unit.
4. Select Save from the Display menu.
5. To make this change permanent to the Demand Display file (*.DM2), select Save
or Save As from the File menu.

Working with Point Names
Lines can be added, deleted, or Ø To add a point name or line

modified in either Data screen
1. On the Data screen, place the cursor on the line below where you want to add the
type, but saved only in a Point
point name or line.
List type.
2. Select Insert Blank Line from the Edit menu.
This inserts a blank line above the selected line.
3. Give the screen a new name as described in the modify instructions below.
Ø To modify a point name or line

1. On the data screen, place the cursor on the line to modify.
2. Select Modify Line from the Edit menu.
The Modify Line dialog box displays (see Figure 4-6).
3. Enter the desired point name then select OK to change the information on the line
or add information to a blank line.
4. Save both the Demand Display screen and Demand Display file to make the
changes permanent.
Type new Point Name in

text box.
Click to save Point Name

entries and exit box.
Click to cancel Point Name

entries and exit dialog box.
Displays only when you can add or modify a
Command Target associated with the line.
Figure 4-6. Modify Line Dialog Box
Ø To delete a point name or line

1. On the Data screen, place the cursor on the line to modify.
2. Select Delete Line from the Edit menu.
If the line corresponds to the first line of a Command Target, the target deletes.
3. Save both the Demand Display screen and Demand Display file to make the
changes permanent.
Working with Command Targets
Refer to the Command Target Ø To add a Command Target

Types section in this chapter.
1. Place the cursor on the line that corresponds to the Command Target. You must
Command targets can be added insert one blank line between targets in the Target Field.
in either Demand Display
screen type, but saved only in a
Point List type. The point name dialog box displays (see Figure 4-6).
3. Enter the desired point name if adding to a blank line. Typically, the point name
on the line corresponding to the first line of the Command Target has direct rele-
vance to the target (button) and its action.
4. Select the Define Command button.
The Command Definition dialog box displays (see Figure 4-7). It contains fields
for information to define a Command Target and its feedback (optional).
5. Enter values and selections into the Command Definition dialog box (Figure 4-7
provides descriptions):
– Target (button) text in Text Line 1 and Text Line 2, as needed.
– Point name of the unit command in the Point Name field.
– Target Type.
– Unit command Value of the point.
– Value Type.
– Feedback Signal Pointname and Sense.
6. Confirm, check, or cancel as needed by selecting any of the following buttons on
the dialog box:
– Check Form checks the command definition entries for consistency and er-
rors.
– OK saves any changes and creates the target.
– Help initiates the help data for this dialog box.
– Cancel stops all changes to the command definition.
– Delete resets the Command Definition and destroys the Command Target.
Ø To delete a Command Target

1. Place the cursor on the point name in the line that corresponds to the to the text
line of the target
The point name dialog box displays (see Figure 4-6).
The Command Definition dialog box displays.
4. Select Delete to reset the Command Definition and delete the Command Target.
-Or-
1. Place the cursor on the point name in the line corresponding to the top text line of
the target.
2. Select Delete Line from the Edit menu to delete the point name and the Com-
mand Target.

Target Text should indicate the Command Target’s action.
Text appears black, but turns yellow if the associated feed-
back logic is supplied and the sense met.
Allows two lines of up to eight characters per line.
Text is automatically centered on the target (button).
Unit command Point Name is the control signal pointname

that receives the target’s value. Only command pointnames are
allowed. They can be pushbutton, logics, or analog setpoints.
Target Type defines which Command Target to use.

For definitions, refer to Command Target Types.
Value holds the value the Command target sends to the unit.
Use the following guidelines (based on pointnames):
• A Target’s value is the number of scans to hold the
target (pushbutton) true. The minimum value is four scans.
• Logic States require a value of 1 or 0.
• Analog setpoints require a value in the engineering units
specified for the command signal point.
Value type determines how the Command Target sends the

value to the unit:
• Set (=) sends the value from the value type to the unit.
It is required for Pushbuttons and Logic States and optional
for Analog Setpoints.
• Increment (+) adds the value in the value field to the
current value of an Analog Setpoint and sends it to the unit.
• Decrement (-) subtracts the value in the value field from the Feedback Signal contains the feedback signal’s
current value of an Analog Setpoint and sends it to the unit. definition. Immediate Action and Arm/Execute
types can use feedback signals. Analog Setpoint
target types cannot.
Pointname is for the control signal point name of the
feedback signal, which can only be logic point types.
Sense can invert the sense of the feedback signal.
Figure 4-7. Example of Command Definition Dialog Box
Ø To modify a Command Target

1. Place the cursor on the point name in the line that corresponds to the to the top
text line of the desired Command Target.
The point name dialog box displays (see Figure 4-6).
The Command Definition dialog box displays.
4. Modify the definition as defined above using the procedure to add a Command
Target.
Other Options
There are several other options available in the Demand Display program:
• Selecting Set Font from the Edit menu displays the Windows Font dialog box.
You can then select the font and color of the Demand Display screen. The selec-
tion applies to all Demand Display screens, except for the Command Targets,
whose colors are predefined.
• Selecting Select Unit from the Edit menu allows you to select a unit. In multiple
unit sites, any unit can be monitored from one Demand Display screen. Select
Unit displays the Unit Selection dialog box. The currently selected unit is high-
lighted. The available units display in alphabetical order. Select the desired unit.
This option is not available in single unit sites.
• Selecting Menu from the View menu toggles between the menu and the most re-
cently viewed Data screen. Toggling to the Menu screen from a Data screen loses
any changes if the Data screen is not saved. The Demand Display program asks
whether or not to save the Demand Display screen. Selecting Yes saves the
screen, No toggles to the Menu window without saving. Selecting Menu from
the Demand Display Menu screen displays the most recently viewed screen.
Command Line Configuration

The Demand Display program For Mark IV, V, and V LM controllers, you can use command line arguments to start
is executable from any direc- Demand Display and open specific windows and files.
tory.
Ø To load an existing Demand Display file from the command line
w Type in the DEMAND command with the /FILE argument and complete filename.
For example:
F:\RUNTIME>DEMAND /FILE:{FILENAME}.DM2
where {filename}.DM2 is a Demand Display filename such as OPERATOR.DM2.
Commands and Arguments

To configure Demand Display more specifically from the command line, type
DEMAND then any of the following arguments at the command prompt, as needed:
• The /UNIT: argument starts the Demand Display program for the unit specified.
For example:
F:\RUNTIME>DEMAND /UNIT:T1
The unit name must be a valid unit. Selecting an invalid unit or no unit displays
the Unit Selection dialog box. Single unit sites ignore this argument and default
to the single unit.
• The /FILE: argument executes the Demand Display program and loads a re-
quested Demand Display file. For example:
F:\RUNTIME>DEMAND /FILE:OPERATOR.DM2
or
F:\RUNTIME>DEMAND /FILE:F:\RUNTIME\OPERATOR.DM2
Incorrect entries cause error This argument requires permission to read the file and/or directory. Entering an
messages. invalid path or filename displays an error message and a blank, untitled Demand
Display file. When entering no filename, the program attempts to open the de-
fault file F:\RUNTIME\DEMAND01.DM2. If it cannot open the file, the program
displays an error message and a blank file.

• The /DISPLAY: argument displays the screen in a particular file. For example:
F:\RUNTIME>DEMAND /FILE:OPERATOR.DM2 /DISPLAY:”LUBE OIL”
If the screen name is invalid, the program displays the menu for the file re-
quested. If the file is invalid, a blank, untitled file displays.
• The /TYPE: argument displays the data screen with points specified at the com-
mand line. For example:
F:\RUNTIME>DEMAND /TYPE:(L1,F4)
The program displays a blank Demand Display file if the point types are invalid.
If a filename is entered, it ignores the point types.
Using Multiple Arguments

You can enter multiple arguments to configure Demand Display more specifically.
The following combination rules apply:
• File and Display ignores the Type argument
• File ignores an invalid Display argument
• Type can only be used with the Unit argument or alone
• Unit can be used with any other argument, unless it is a single unit system (then
the Unit is ignored
• Unit ignores any following invalid argument
• Display requires a File argument preceding it
Examples of valid combinations:
F:\RUNTIME>DEMAND /UNIT:T2 /FILE:OPERATOR.DM2/DISPLAY:”LUBE OIL”
or
F:\RUNTIME> DEMAND/UNIT:T2 /TYPE:(F4)
Alarm Logger Control
This program is used with Mark Several classes of turbine control actions can be automatically logged to a printer.
IV, V, V LM, and VI control- The HMI’s Alarm Logger allows you to select alarms and events to output to the
lers. printer using the Alarm Logger Control dialog box (see Figure 4-8).
The Alarm Logger Control does not access any files when making its changes. In-
stead, it writes its output to a special section of global memory that is then read by
the Alarm Logger program, which writes the alarms and events to the alarm printer.
Note Alarm Logger Control does not configure individual points.
Exits dialog box without saving

Process identification data changes.
Saves selections and exits.
Cancels changes and exits.
Click on drop-down box arrow to
select unit (displayed in alpha- Applies current unit’s settings to all
numeric order). units.
Immediately deletes all pending
There are four functions (categories alarm print jobs for all units from
of information that can be printed. the Alarm Printer (does not require
Click on box to select. (Blank is OK to be selected).
unselected; a check is selected.)
You can select each function on a
unit basis by selecting the Unit and
Function, then OK button.
Figure 4-8. Alarm Logger Control Dialog Box
Starting the Alarm Logger Control

You can start the Alarm Logger Control program any of four ways:
Unit T#, then Alarm Logger Control.
• Enter logger.exe in the Run dialog box in the Start menu.

• Enter logger.exe at the DOS command line, then press Enter.
You can use the command line To quickly display the desired configuration, start the Alarm Logger Control from
arguments to customize the the DOS command line with following argument:
Alarm Logger Control startup.
G:\EXEC\LOGGER.EXE /UNIT:T1 specifies the unit name as T1

Hold List (Steam Applications)
This program is used with Mark The Hold List is required for the HMI to support Mark V controllers on systems that
V and Mark VI controllers. have Automatic Turbine Startup (ATS). The ATS code resides in ROM in the <C>
processor only.
ATS is active only when the Automatic mode is selected. It is used to set speed con-
trol targets and valve positions based on various inputs (such as steam temperatures
and pressures, calculated valve stresses, turbine rotor stresses, and turbine shell
stresses, metal temperatures, speed and operating mode.)
Turbine operating conditions may cause a hold, which prevents ATS from setting the
speed or load target to a higher value. In the HMI, the Hold List display enables you
to view the current points on the Hold List and to override any or all hold points, if
desired. Overriding a hold allows the ATS to advance its targets as operating condi-
tions permit.
Hold List Points

The points for the Hold list are listed in the HMI unit configuration directory
F:\UNITN\TOTT_B.SRC file. The list can hold 64 points, maximum. The points are
either Alarms or Events, which display on the Alarm and Event Logger.
This file must be compiled by the table compiler G:\EXEC\TABLE_C.EXE. For Mark
V, the point list is then downloaded to <C> and <D> processors with the EEPROM
downloader G:\EXEC\EEPROM.EXE. Select TOTT for the section to download.
Reboot the processors activate any list changes.
Hold List Programs

For Mark V, the Hold List is maintained in the <C> and <D> processors by programs
in PROM. The Hold List receiver in the HMI is automatically started by the TCI
system service.
Refer to Chapter 2 and Appen- The CIMPLICITY Alarm Viewer displays the Hold List on the HMI. You should
dix B for more information on configure a separate CIMPLICITY Alarm Viewer for the Hold List to allow only the
alarm displays. holds from a given unit on the display and to exclude holds from the regular alarm
list. You can change this at any time.
Hold List Rules

The Hold List is maintained according to the following rules:
• A point that is picked up is entered in the Hold List as (0 - > 1).
• Unacknowledged entries have an N character in the ACK field.
• Acknowledged entries have a Y character in the ACK field.
• A hold point whose state is a picked up (logic 1) displays the ALARM state.
• A hold point whose state is a dropped out (logic 0) displays the NORMAL state.
• A point has been acknowledged is removed from the Hold List display.
• A picked up hold point may be overridden by an operator using the Lock com-
mand button.
• An overridden point displays Locked as the first part of their long name text.
• An overridden point loses its override when it drops out (1 -> 0).
• The Hold List displays the time of the last pickup or override, unit, acknowledge
state, current state, override status, and the short and long name of each hold
point in the list.
• The text Hold displays in the drop number field and the CSDB offset displays in
the reference field. The reference field is typically not displayed.
• The Hold List program in <C>, not <D>, outputs a logic signal indicating that
there are one or more active holds that have not been overridden. This point is
named L68DW_ATS_HL. ATS and the turbine control use this signal to set speed,
load, and valve position targets.

Notes
Chapter 5 CIMPLICITY Displays
Introduction
The CIMPLICITY HMI product The CIMPLICITY HMI collects data from plant sensors and devices, then
must be installed before these transforms the data into dynamic text, alarm, and graphic displays. Operators can
applications can be used. access real-time information when monitoring and making control decisions. The
turbine control HMI supports many CIMPLICITY applications for operation.
GFK-1180 provides a detailed CIMPLICITY is used primarily to display turbine status screens, which enable an
description of the CIMPLICITY operator to monitor the unit(s). Refresh rate is typically 1 second. CIMPLICITY
display features. cannot configure the turbine control.
CIMPLICITY supports OLE and ActiveX applications for automation displays.
CIMB (CIMPLICITY Bridge) enables CIMPLICITY to collect data and alarms from
a turbine unit with Mark V. (Mark VI used EGD) TCIMB provides the following
software functions:
• MARKV_RP collects data from a turbine using TCI and forwards the information
to the CIMPLICITY Point Manager.
• EXTMGR collects alarms and forwards them to the CIMPLICITY Alarm
Manager. (See Chapter 6.)
• LOCKOUT sends a lockout command to a unit using TCI. (See Extended Alarm
Commands below.)
• SILENCE sends a silence command to a unit using TCI. (See Extended Alarm
Commands below.)
This chapter identifies these functions, as follows:
Section Page
CIMPLICITY ActiveX Objects................................................................................5-2

Manual Synchronizing Display .........................................................................5-2
Triggered Plot (Valve Travel) ...........................................................................5-6
Alarm Filtering in HMI Servers ...............................................................................5-8
Configuring Users .............................................................................................5-8
Configuring Resources ....................................................................................5-12
Configuring Alarm Filters ...............................................................................5-14
Examples of Screens for Filtered Alarms........................................................5-23
Currently Implemented Filters ........................................................................5-25
Extended Alarm Commands...................................................................................5-26
Reactive Capability Display ...................................................................................5-28
GEH-6126A Volume I Operator’s Guide Chapter 5 CIMPLICITY Displays • 5-1

CIMPLICITY ActiveX Objects
Microsoft Corporation ActiveX controls allow different types of software objects to communicate if the
developed ActiveX controls software supports ActiveX. The controls are interactive within an application. They
originally to support the can be gauges, charts, displays, graphs, or any other object that allows a user to
creation of Internet-enabled access the particular functionality of the object.
applications.
For operator control, the HMI includes two CIMPLICITY add-ons supplied by
Industrial Systems (Salem, VA) and identified as ActiveX objects: Manual
Synchronizing Display and Triggered Plot. These are described below.
Mark V, V LM. Manual Synchronizing Display

To bring a generator online with a power grid, the speed (frequency) and phase angle
of the generator’s ac waveform must match that of the power grid. The preferred
method is to use the turbine controller’s auto-synchronizing function.
OLE is “Object Linking and For Mark V and V LM, a Manual Sync Object (an OLE object) is provided in
Embedding” (see the Glossary CIMPLICITY HMI to allow the user to see a display representing this
for a more detailed definition). synchronization process (see Figure 5-1). The object contains all the fields that need
to be updated at a fast rate. For Mark V and V LM, all data in the object is updated at
16 Hz. For Mark VI, this operation is at 10 Hz.
The Manual Synchronizing Display must be run from a CIMPLICITY server for the
desired controller. This is because the object uses the messaging services of TCI.
The object consists of five parts, which you can set using tabs on the CIMPLICITY
HMI Properties dialog box for that object. These tabs are described below.
Synchroscope -- Resets green dots at end of pointer

Configure using Scope tab (see Figure 5-2)
Breaker close times --

Configure using
Breaker tab
Breaker Trip and Breaker

Close buttons --
Configure using Buttons
tab (see Note below)
Values that need updating

quickly -- Configure using Permissives needed to close
Values tab the breaker -- Configure using
Permissives tab.
Figure 5-1. Manual Sync Object (Used in CIMPLICITY HMI)
Note When you push the Breaker Close or Breaker Trip button, a dialog box
displays with two buttons for command confirmation:
• Command sends the breaker close or trip command when selected and released
• Done exits the dialog box and cancels the breaker close or trip command
5-2 • Chapter 5 CIMPLICITY Displays HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
Configuring the Synchroscope
To configure the Synchroscope part of the object, enter parameters into the Scope
tab.
Signal that drives synchroscope pointer. Pointer is

Name of positioned at this angle as long as slip frequency is
ActiveX control less than the Maximum slip frequency.
Select unit from drop-down list.
Signal used to determine current slip frequency.

If greater than maximum slip frequency, pointer
is positioned at bottom of scope.
Maximum slip frequency.
Locations marks on scope. Entered in degrees

separated by spaces.
(Optional.) Signal used to change pointer color. If

signal is not defined, pointer is white. If true, pointer
is green. If false, pointer is red.
(Optional.) Signal indicating state of Sync relay. Each time signal is true
and pointer is updated, a green dot is drawn at end of pointer. Scope’s R
button (located top right; see Figure 5-1) is used to reset dots.
Configuring Breaker Close Times

To configure the object’s breaker close times, enter values into the Breaker tab.
BMS Socket (usually 15) used to obtain TCEA

diagnostic message. (Message is how object gets
breaker close times.)
I/O Processor (usually 2F hex) used to obtain

TCEA diagnostic message.
Diagnostic Message type (usually 5).
Offset (usually 40) into the Diagnostic Message

to the Nominal Close Time value.
Offset (usually 42) into the diagnostic message

to the Learned Close Time value.
Offset (usually 48) into the diagnostic message

to the Actual Close Time value.

Configuring Permissives
To configure the Permissives part of the object, add or edit the list entries in the
Permissives tab.
Logic signal used. String displayed next to

box. Permissives display
Determines color of box in object in the same
displayed by variable. If order as in list box.
variable value equals
Sense value, box is
green. If not equal, box is Move currently selected
red with a dash next to it. entry up one row in the
list.
Add entries to list. Move currently selected
entry down one row in
Delete currently selected list.
entry.
Edit currently selected

entry.
Configuring Breaker Close and Trip Buttons

To configure the object’s Breaker Close and Breaker Trip buttons, enter parameters
into the Buttons tab.
(Optional.) Signal to send Breaker Close

pushbutton command to. If not filled in, button is
not displayed. Set length of pushbutton command
in duration box.
(Optional.) Signal to send the Breaker Trip

pushbutton command to. If not filled in, button is
not displayed. Set length of pushbutton command
in duration box.
Configuring Values
To configure the object’s Values, enter data into the Value tab.
Values in display in the object in the same order

as in the list box
Sets number of digits for displaying the value.

Uses number of decimal places and units string
specified in the scale code.
Signal used for the value.
String that displays to the left of the value.
Add entries to end of list.
Apply to the currently selected entry.

Up moves currently selected entry up one row;
Down moves it down one row.
Configuring Object Colors

The change colors in the object, edit the Colors tab.
Click down arrow to

select area to change –
Background or
Foreground (text) color
Box shows current color
of selection (Background Click to change color of
or Foreground) selection.

Mark V, V LM Triggered Plot (Valve Travel)
The Triggered Plot function is an ActiveX object that provides a graph of high-speed
turbine data. The graph can be triggered by the change in state of a logic signal in the
unit. Turbine commands can be sent from here, making it useful for initiating turbine
tests (such as valve travel tests).
Like the Manual Synchronizing Display, Triggered Plot is run from a CIMPLICITY
server for the desired controller (see Figure 5-2). You configure the object by setting
configuration information on the Triggered Plot Control Properties tabs, which is a
CIMPLICITY HMI Properties dialog box (see Figure 5-3).
Plotted data displays within

graph box, up to two data points
versus time.
Data (status points) collected at

a sample rate of 8 times per
second for an elapsed time of 1
to 120 seconds, as selected by
user. Updates once per second.
Plot is triggered by user-specified

logic signal and its desired state
to trigger.
Figure 5-2. Inactive Triggered Plot Screen
Configuring Object Properties
There are six tabs for configuring Triggered Plot Control Properties (see Figure
5-3).
Specify up to 2 push- Set status points Select Elapsed time for

buttons for sending (up to 8) and position object data collection
commands to unit on the display. colors. (1 to 120 sec.)
Select unit from drop-down list
Name of variable that determines beginning of test
State of trigger to begin the plot
Plot points for left and right axis
Range for low and high plot (in raw counts)
Select color for each plot line
Selected plot points are plotted from the time the

trigger first reaches the specified state until the end
of the entered elapsed time.
Figure 5-3. Inactive Triggered Plot Screen Showing Version Window

Alarm Filtering in HMI Servers
GFK-1180 provides a detailed Normally, all alarms for the roles assigned to your CIMPLICITY User ID are
description of the CIMPLICITY displayed in the separate Alarm Viewer window (an OCX control). You can also
display features. filter alarms to display subsets using the Alarm Setups dialog box.
The Alarm Filter feature allows specific displays for alarms. These can be based on:
• Various Resources or Types. An example of a resource would be each single Gas
or Steam Turbine, the Exciter, BOP, or the system itself.
• Alarm type or function (for example, Diagnostic, Process, Low, Medium, High).
To configure alarms for filtering in HMI servers, you need to do the following:
1. Configure users
2. Configure resources
3. Configure the alarm filters
All procedures must be followed and completed in the order

presented.
It is good practice to check off each procedure when you
complete it. For this purpose, this chapter includes checkboxes
next to each procedure heading
Note The procedures in this section require that you have a working knowledge of
CIMPLICITY, including its Workbench application, User Configuration, Resource
Configuration, and various aspects of Alarms. Document GFK-1180 provides this
information.
Configuring Users
A user is an individual person working with a CIMPLICITY HMI project. Each
CIMPLICITY HMI user has the following attributes, which must be configured:
Security – A user may be assigned a Password. If a Password is configured and
enabled, then a user cannot access CIMPLICITY HMI project functions without
entering both the User ID and Password.
Roles and Privileges – A user is assigned a role. Each role in the CIMPLICITY
HMI project has certain privileges assigned to it. The privileges define the functions
the user can access. If a user lacks the privilege to access a secure function, an error
message is displayed and access is denied.
View of Resources – A user’s view determines the accessible resource data.
Alarms for resources outside a user’s view do not display on the user’s Alarm
Viewer window.
¨ All procedures in this Ø To configure Users for the CIMPLICITY HMI project
section were completed
1. Open the project in the CIMPLICITY Workbench (refer to Chapter 6 for an
successfully.
overview).
2. In the Workbench left pane under the Security folder, select Users, as shown
below.
Left pane
displays
CIMPLICITY
application
folders
Select
Right pane
displays files
or records of
selected object.
3. Open the New User dialog box and add a new user called OPERATOR.
Type in the new name

(User ID) then click OK.

4. Open the User Properties dialog box for the user OPERATOR and enter
Operator as the User name.
Select tab.
Type in the new

User Name
then click OK.
The Resources properties let 5. Select the Resources tab and add all resources T1 through T8.
you define the resources for
which the user can view
alarms. Select tab.
Displays resources
currently assigned
to user.
To add resources,
select from
Available box then
click Add .
Note Resources can be added or removed based on the User’s rights. For example
if you want to have a User name as User1 who is supposed to operate only Gas
Turbine T1 (GT1), then add only T1 as the Resource for the User1.
6. Define the Role Properties for the user OPERATOR, as shown below.
Select
options Click boxes
to select

Configuring Resources
¨ All procedures in this Ø To configure Resources for the CIMPLICITY HMI project
successfully. 1. In the Workbench left pane under the Security folder, select Resources, as
shown in the figure below.
Select
2. Add a New Resource T1 and click OK, as shown in the figure below.
Type in the new name

(Resource ID) then click OK.
3. Add the Resource Definition for T1, as shown in the figure below.
Type in Description.
Displays Users currently assigned to Resource.
To add Users for this Resource, select from

Available Users box, then click Add.
Displays Users available for this Resource.
4. Using the procedures in steps 2 and 3, add resources from T1 to T8 for GT1 to
GT8, as shown in the figure below.

Configuring Alarm Filters
¨ All procedures in this Ø To configure Alarm Filters for the CIMPLICITY HMI project
successfully. 1. In the Workbench left pane under the Advanced folder, select Alarm
Classes, as shown below.
Select
2. Add an Alarm Class named DIAG, as show below.
Type in
Select
The Order value is the priority for the
Alarms that fall under that particular class.
The lower the Order number, the higher
the priority.
Select options
Click to apply inputs
Click to exit
3. Using the procedures in step 2, add the classes and descriptions shown in the
figure below.
Enter values as shown here Colors selected in Alarm Class

into Alarm Class dialog box dialog box are displayed as a
(as shown in step 2). numerical equivalent here.

4. In the Workbench left pane as shown below, select Screens. Alarm.cim
(standard template from Cimproj) then displays in the right panel. Select
Alarm.cim.
1. Select
2. Select
5. Right click in CimEdit, then select Edit to open the following Alarms screen.
Open Frame Container from the menu, as shown below.
Select
Note CIMPLICITY HMI uses frame animation (frame containers) to navigate

between individual screens. This enables you to access all control and monitoring
features needed. The frame displayed can be changed by clicking buttons or other
frames.

6. Right click in CimEdit, then select CIMPLICITY AMV Control Object and
Properties from the menu, as shown below. This displays the CIMPLICITY AMV
Control Properties dialog box.
1. Select
2. Select
7. Add the project, by clicking Add Project, as shown below.
Select (the
Select Project
dialog box
displays).
Projects are
listed here after
being added.
For servers, select.
(Connect to the remote project
only when the alarm is not
available locally
Select the project from the drop-

down list.
Click OK. The project displays in the

Projects tab.
8. In Projects tab, double-click the newly added project ALARM_FILTER. This

displays the Project Settings dialog box, as shown below. Add the Alarm setup
as shown below.
Click to select Alarm

setup and exit back to
the previous Projects
dialog box.
Type in

Project and
Setup listed.
Select to apply
changes, thus
adding new
project.
9. Open the Alarm.cim file in CimVview and click Setup, as shown below. The
Alarm Setup dialog box displays.
Click
Bet sure to include the “$” 10. Add a Setup called $DIAG_GT1, as shown below.
symbol at the beginning of
the Setup name. This makes
it accessible to all users.
Without the symbol, it can be
accessed only by the user
account that created it.
Type in Setup name
Click
The Modify Setup box then

displays (see below).
11. Select the Classes tab, then select DIAG from the list box.
Click
Click
(Do not click
OK)

12. Select the Resources tab. Then select T1 from the list box and OK to return to
the Alarm Setups dialog box, as shown below.
Click
Click
Click
13. Click Save to save this setup.
14. Follow the same procedure (steps 10 to 13) to create other setup.
Examples of Screens for Filtered Alarms
After configuring filtered alarms, triggered alarms display according to the filter
setup for that particular screen. Figures 5-4 through 5-6 show examples.
Figure 5-4. Screen for Gas Turbine T1, Displaying Alarm Only for T1
Note Typically the top alarm window is for process alarms and the bottom one for
diagnostic alarms.

Figure 5-5. Screen for Gas Turbine T2, Displaying Alarm Only for T2
Figure 5-6. Screen for All, Displaying Alarms for All
Currently Implemented Filters

Available setups:
• $DIAG_GT1 (TO GT8)
• $PROC_GT1 (TO GT8)
• $EX200_GT1 (TO GT8) or $EX2K_GT1 (TO GT8)
• $ALL
• $SYSTEM
• $BOP

Extended Alarm Commands
To display alarms, a stand- Custom TCI commands are used to enhance the CIMPLICITY Alarm Viewer for
alone Alarm Viewer is turbine applications. These include the Silence and Lockout (Lock and Unlock),
embedded into a CIMPLICITY which are configured as buttons in the CIMPLICITY Alarm Viewer.
screen.
Silence, Lock, and Unlock buttons are usually configured so that you must highlight
and select an alarm before pressing the buttons.
Ø To edit custom alarm features for the Silence, Lock, and Unlock
buttons
1. Right-click on the white background of the Alarm window.
A menu displays, as shown below.
2. Select CIMPLICITY AMV Control Object, then Properties.
The properties window displays. Make the Buttons tab selections, as shown in
the figure below.
Select tab to display

Button properties options.
Select to move
highlighted button up
Button list. Highlight or down.
button name to select for
modifying. Select to modify
highlighted button’s
properties.
Select to display the
Lock, Unlock, and
Silence button list. (A
different list displays for
each selection.)
3. In the Button Caption window, modify the button properties as shown in the
figure below.
Enter button name
Enter button function
Enter configuration
properties command
Use the following command strings to configure the buttons:

Required data and data format • LOCKOUT uses the syntax:
can be viewed from the DOS
LOCKOUT: <action><unitname><Encoded_drop><RefID>[(nodename)]
command line by typing
SILENCE and LOCKOUT. LOCK lockout 1 %res %id %refid [(nodename)]
UNLOCK: lockout 0 %res %id %refid [(nodename)]
• SILENCE uses the syntax:
SILENCE %res [(node)].

Reactive Capability Display
The Reactive Capability Display is a real-time graphic that shows the turbine
Mark IV, V, V LM, VI generator's current MW and MVAR operating point (see Figure 5-7).
You can use this display to check how close the generator is operating to its thermal
limits.
Three static curves represent the

generator’s thermal limits at three discrete
operating points. The curves are plotted at
constant generator hydrogen pressure or Red dot represents the current turbine
constant ambient temperature, depending operating point. It moves as the point
on the application. changes.
Figure 5-7. Example of Generator Capability Curves Screen
Chapter 6 CIMPLICITY Project
Configuration
Introduction
The CIMPLICITY HMI product This chapter provides information about configuring CIMPLICITY projects for use
must be installed before these with the turbine control HMI product. To understand and implement the information
applications can be used. in this chapter, you should have a working knowledge of CIMPLICITY projects.
Document GFK-1180 provides this information.
CIMPLICITY HMI should be configured with the following project properties:
Project Name – Appropriate name (for example, SVR1)
Sub Directory – Must be Cimproj
Path – F:\Cimproj
General options – Basic control, external alarm manager
Protocols – MarkV+ Communication (this is TCIMB)
Others determined by the type of controller
The project properties can be examined using the CIMPLICITY Workbench (see
Figure 6-2).
Section Page
Using Workbench.....................................................................................................6-2
Opening a Project .....................................................................................................6-3
Signal Manager.........................................................................................................6-4
Setup..................................................................................................................6-4
Signals ...............................................................................................................6-5
Alarms ...............................................................................................................6-6
Importing Signals ..............................................................................................6-8
External Alarm Manager ........................................................................................6-10
SDB Exchange .......................................................................................................6-10
SDB Utilities ..........................................................................................................6-10
®
Modbus Data Interface .........................................................................................6-11
OLE for Process Controls (OPC) ...........................................................................6-12
GEH-6126A Volume I Operator’s Guide Chapter 6 CIMPLICITY Project Configuration • 6-1

Using Workbench
Document GFK-1180 provides The CIMPLICITY HMI Workbench is an application used to view, configure,
detail about using Workbench. organize, and manage projects. It is similar to the Microsoft Windows Explorer in its
display of the file structure and menu options across the top of the window. Refer to
Alarm Filtering in HMI Servers (Chapter 5) for examples of the Workbench
window.
Ø To open Workbench
1. Click Start on the Windows task bar.
2. Select Programs, then CIMPLICITY, HMI, and Workbench.
-Or-
w Select the .gef file in the f:\Cimproj directory.
Figure 6-1 shows the File menu for starting a New Project. Figure 6-2 shows the
Project menu selection for examining project Properties.
Figure 6-1. Workbench Menu Figure 6-2. Workbench Menu

Showing Selections for Showing Selections for
Starting a New Project Examining Project Properties
6-2 • Chapter 6 CIMPLICITY Project Configuration HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Vol. I
Opening a Project
Using the CIMPLICITY HMI, there are three ways to open a project, as described
below.
Ø To open a CIMPLICITY project through the Windows Start menu
2. Select Programs, then CIMPLICITY, HMI, and Workbench.
A blank CIMPLICITY Workbench now opens.
3. From the Workbench window, select Open from the File menu.
4. Select the project you want to open.
Ø To open a CIMPLICITY project from the Windows File Explorer

1. Open File Explorer.
2. Open the f:\cimproj directory.
3. Double-click the .gef file.
Ø To open a CIMPLICITY project from the Start Menu

2. Select Documents.
3. Click the .gef file.

Signal Manager
The program can be found on In Mark IV, V, and V LM, the Signal Manager is a program for configuring
the HMI in CIMPLICITY points and alarms for the turbine controllers. The TCI service must be
G:\EXEC\CSDBUtil.EXE. running before using this utility, since it accesses data from each unit’s Data
Dictionary, which is built and maintained by the TCI service.
For Mark IV, Mark V, and Mark V LM controllers, the Signal Manager is used to
configure both points and alarms. Point information is retrieved from the Control
Signal Database (CSDB) and used to populate the CIMPLICITY Point Manager
Database. Alarm information is configured for run-time retrieval of the alarm text
from the TCI.
For a Mark VI, signal management is through an HMI device.
Setup
Ø To enable alarms for CIMPLICITY
1. Create a new project.
2. Select options in the New Project dialog box , shown below.
Click
when
completed
Select
directory
Select
Select
applicable
After creating a new CIMPLICITY project, you must configure a CIMPLICITY Port
for the communications protocol. This enables signals to be imported into the
project. Refer to the CIMPLICITY Base System User’s Manual GFK-1180 for more
information on creating projects and configuring ports.
When the Signal Manager imports controller signals into CIMPLICITY, it
configures any needed CIMPLICITY devices and resources, if they are not already
present. For example, when importing signals for unit T1, the utility configures a
CIMPLICITY device and a CIMPLICITY resource, both called T1.
MARKV_RP is TCIMB function For each device that Signal Manager configures, it a also configures three virtual
that collects data from a points needed by the MARKV_RP program. For example, for a device called T1, the
turbine using TCI and forwards utility produces the following virtual points:
the information to the
CIMPLICITY Point Manager. • T1_TIME, which contains the unit’s current time
• T1_DATE, which contains the unit’s current date
• T1_VALID, a Boolean value that indicates if the HMI is currently
communicating with the unit
Signals
CSDB is Control System Signal Manager displays data from the Data Dictionary, which describes the unit’s
Database. CSDB. Each row of the display shows information about a signal, divided into
columns that display the following signal attributes:
Signal
attribute Description
Name Signal’s name
Access Read /write
Cim Type CIMPLICITY point type that corresponds to this signal
Description Description of the signal
Eng. Units Engineering Units
Flags Signal attributes (for example, alarm, command, permanent)
High Limit High limit for the signal’s value
Low Limit Low limit for the signals value
Offset Offset into the CSDB where this signal is located
Precision Numeric precision for display of the signal’s value
Scale Code Scale code for engineering unit conversion
Synonym Optionally specified synonym for this signal
Type Datatype for this signal
Value Signal’s current value
You can configure the items listed. The display is a standard Windows List Control,
which supports the expected user interface commands for selecting items, sorting
rows, and sizing columns.

Alarms
The Signal Manager can also CIMPLICITY alarms are only placeholders that are given the appropriate parameters
be used to configure alarms for at run-time when they occur. The Signal Manager can be used to configure the
EX2000 and EX2100 exciters. alarms for Mark V, Mark V LM, and Mark VI turbine controllers, as well and other
events. It uses the following configuration IDs:
Alarm use Alarm ID for configuration

Process alarms for turbine P<n>*
Diagnostic alarms for turbine D<n>* (Mark V only)
Hold list points** HOLD (Steam only)
Sequence of events** SOE
Digital events** EVENT
* n is the drop number reported by the controller.
** These CIMPLICITY alarms are generated multiple times at run-time with different
parameters for each instance.
When the Signal Manager configures alarms, it also configures alarm classes, as
follows:
• If a needed alarm class is not configured, it is added to the CIMPLICITY
configuration
• If the alarm class is already configured, the existing alarm class definition is used
• The following alarm classes apply:
Class Definition
PRC Process alarms
DIAG Diagnostic alarms
HOLD Hold list entries
SOE Sequence of events
EVENT Digital events
EX2K Exciter alarms (see below)
Configuring Exciter Alarms

Exciter alarms are configured from information contained in the file F:\EX2000.DAT.
This information is specific to the EX2000 exciter and represents interpretations of
the fault codes generated by the EX2000 exciter. The exciter alarms are not
placeholders and are configured with all parameters fully defined.
Ø To configure alarms for controllers

w Select Alarms from the Action menu.
Signal Manager then configures process and diagnostic alarms, as well as alarms for
Hold List, SOEs, and digital events.
Ø To configure alarms for EX2000 exciters
1. Select EX2000 Alarms from the Action menu.
Signal Manager then configures exciter alarms as defined in F:\EX2000.DAT and
displays the Exciter Fault Code dialog box.
2. Make the signal selections as shown in the figure below.
Signal Manager then runs command line utilities and displays their output in a
scrolling text box. In CIMPLICITY, these utilities configure events and actions
that generate alarms when the value of the fault code CIMPLICITY point
changes value.
Type in signal name (Point ID)
Select exciter core that generates the fault
Click when selections for the signal are

completed in this box. The box remains open
Click when no more signal selections are to

be made. This closes the dialog box.
3. After these events and actions are configured, specify additional exciter fault
code points using the Exciter Fault Code box as in step 2.
4. When completed, select Done.

Importing Signals
When the Signal Manager is started, an empty list displays.
Ø To add signals to the Signal Manager list

1. Select New from the File menu.
2. A dialog box displays, allowing you to specify which signals to get from the Data
Dictionary.
Type in name with wildcards to filter signals retrieved

from the Data Dictionary. Supported are:
• Asterisk (*), which matches zero or more occurrences
of any character
• Question mark (?), which matches zero or one
occurrence of any character
Select box(es) to filter the signals by type. (A check mark

in a box allow signals of the corresponding type to pass
through the filter).
Select Unit from list of available units.
Click when completed, adding signals to Signal Manager.
Ø To individually import signals individually into CIMPLICITY
w In Signal Manager, select the desired signals from the displayed list.
Ø To import all signals at once into CIMPLICITY

1. In Signal Manager, select Select All from the Edit menu.
2. Select Import from the Action menu.
This displays a dialog box that allows you to select the .gef file for the desired
CIMPLICITY project (see Figure 6-6).
Figure 6-6. Example of CIMPLICITY Project Selection Dialog Box
You may sometimes want to populate the CIMPLICITY point database with points
from a set of screens.
Ø To populate the Signal Manager’s displayed list of signals with the

signals referenced in a set of screens
1. Select Match from the Action menu.
Signal Manager then scans all the screens and displays any points not found in
the Data Dictionary.
2. Select the signals as desired and import them into the CIMPLICITY point
database using the procedures described previously.

External Alarm Manager
The External Alarm Manager is a software component of the CIMPLICITY Bridge
(CIMB). It functions as an interface that collects turbine controller alarms and
forwards them to the CIMPLICITY Alarm Manager, where they are displayed.
For Mark IV and VI controllers, only process alarms can be displayed. For Mark V
controllers, both process and diagnostic alarms can be displayed. Mark VI
controllers use the toolbox to display diagnostic alarms (refer to GEH-6403).
SDB Exchange
The System Database (SDB) Exchange is available for Mark VI controllers. It
provides a way to populate the CIMPLICITY point and alarm databases with the
data extracted from the Mark VI SDB.
Refer to GEI-100279 for more information about the SDB Exchange.
SDB Utilities
The SDB Utilities must run on The SDB Utilities are available for Mark VI controllers. They provide a way to
the PC that is the CIMPLICITY populate the CIMPLICITY point and alarm databases with the data extracted from
Server. the Mark VI SDB. The SDB Utilities support four sources for importing signal and
alarm data into the CIMPLICITY HMI Project:
• Signals from the SDB, which contains data used by one or more system devices.
• Signals from a comma separated variable file (*.csv), which is a common text
format for spreadsheet and database output.
• Signals from a shared name file (*.snf), associated with the Series 90™-70
programmable logic controller (PLC).
• Alarms imported from the SDB into the CIMPLICITY HMI Project alarm
definitions.
Refer to GEI-100500 for more information about the SDB Utilities.
.
Modbus® Data Interface
This utility is used with Mark The HMI acts as a Modbus slave (see Figure 6-7). This means that it waits for
IV and VI controllers. requests from another computer (a Modbus master) and answers them by returning
the current value of the variables requested. When the HMI receives turbine control
Modbus is an industry standard
commands, it forwards them to the turbine controller. Both RS-232C and Ethernet
communication link used by the
links are supported.
HMI to provide the current
value of variables from the CimMod is a program supplied by Industrial Systems (Salem, VA) as part of the
HMI to any system that CIMPLICITY project. Its function is to communicate between the CIMPLICITY
requests it via the Modbus link. point database and the TCI Modbus slave. This allows transfer of data to the Modbus
master.
HMI Server
Mark VI
TCI
Mark IV TCI CIMMOD Modbus DCS
CIMPLICITY
Slave
Mark V
& Mark
V LM
Figure 6-7. Data Flow from Controllers in Modbus Slave Mode
CimMod_L is a command line utility (CIMMOD_L.EXE) that reads the necessary

configuration files in the TCI to create a Modbus list for CIMPLICITY
(CIMMOD.LST). The list defines the format and scaling of each mapped coil and
register. It also indicates which signals are controller commands.
Refer to document GEI-100517 for more information about using CimMod and
CimMod_L.

OLE for Process Controls (OPC)
OPC was developed by the OPC is a standard communications mechanism for moving data between HMIs and
OPC Foundation and endorsed I/O Servers. It is based on Microsoft OLE technology.
by Microsoft.
CIMPLICITY OPC Client software provides CIMPLICITY users with access to
process data from OPC servers. The OPC Client supports all CIMPLICITY data
types and the following CIMPLICITY features:
• Collection of unsolicited data from an OPC Server
• Poll after setpoint
• Triggered reads
• Analog deadband through CIMPLICITY filtering
Refer to GE Fanuc document GFK-1181 for OPC Client information.
OPC Servers provide real time data by firing events whenever the value of an item
added by the OPC client changes. The CIMPLICITY HMI OPC Server provides a
standards-based way to access run-time information from a CIMPLICITY HMI
project.
Refer to GE Fanuc document GFK-1675 for OPC Server information.
Appendix A HMI Function Reference
Section Page
HMI Functions for GE Turbine Controllers ............................................................A-1
CIMPLICITY HMI Supported Functions ...............................................................A-4
HMI Functions for GE Turbine Controllers

GE’s Turbine Control HMI functions are provided by the TCI, TCIMB, and GE
Turbine Control Systems Solutions CD. The following table lists these functions and
identifies their applicability in the SPEEDTRONIC turbine controllers. Functions are
provided through CIMPLICITY, unless otherwise noted.
Mark Mark Mark Mark

HMI Function Application Notes
IV V V LM VI
Data and Control Displays
Demand Display ü ü ü ü Toolbox graphics for Mark VI
Logic Forcing ü ü ü Toolbox function for Mark VI
Dynamic Rung Display ü ü ü Toolbox function for Mark VI
Pre-vote Data Display ü ü ü TSM for Mark VI
Diagnostic Counters Display ü ü ü TSM for Mark VI
Control Constants Display ü ü ü Toolbox function for Mark VI
Control Constants Adjust Display ü ü ü Toolbox function for Mark VI
Autocalibrate Display ü ü Toolbox function for Mark VI
Trip History ü ü ü Capture blocks for Mark VI
CIMPLICITY Add-ons
CIMPLICITY Bridge ü ü ü ü
Signal Manager ü ü ü ü SDB Exchange for Mark VI
External Alarm Manager ü ü ü ü

Reactive Capability Display ü ü ü ü
Manual Synchronizing Display ü ü ü Implemented with CIMPLICITY for Mark VI
Emissions Analysis ü ü
Triggered Plot ü ü
GEH-6126A Volume I Operator’s Guide Appendix A HMI Function Reference • A-1

Mark Mark Mark Mark
IV V V LM VI
Unit Communications
Stagelink ü ü
CSF ü Not available in some Mark IVs
MAMSP ü Not available in some Mark IVs
TCI Modbus™ Master ü ü Not available in some Mark IVs
EGD ü
Unit Communications (continued)
Process Alarms ü ü ü ü
Diagnostic Alarms ü ü ü Toolbox function for Mark VI
Events ü ü ü ü
SOEs ü ü ü ü
Hold List ü ü Controllers with Steam ATS only
SDB Utilities / Exchange ü

Unit Configuration Tools
Sequence Editor ü ü ü Toolbox function for Mark VI
Sequence Compiler ü ü ü Toolbox function for Mark VI
Sequence Documentor ü ü ü Toolbox function for Mark VI
CSP Printer ü ü ü Toolbox function for Mark VI
Table Compiler ü ü
Application Code Downloads ü ü ü Toolbox function for Mark VI
Firmware Downloader ü ü Toolbox for Mark VI
Mark V Make ü ü
Card Identification ü ü ü TSM for Mark VI
Alarm List ü ü ü ü
FMV ID ü
LDB Configuration Tools ü
I/O Configuration Tool ü ü ü Toolbox function for Mark VI
Time Synchronizing
Timesync Function ü ü ü ü NTP for Mark VI
High Resolution (IRIG) ü ü ü ü Option
GPS ü ü ü ü Option
NTP ü ü ü ü Option
A-2 • Appendix A HMI Function Reference HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A, Volume I
Mark Mark Mark Mark
IV V V LM VI
Other Functions
Alarm Printing ü ü ü ü
Alarm History ü ü ü ü
Trip History Automatic Collection ü ü ü Capture Blocks + Data Historian for Mark VI
Normal Data Collection ü ü ü ü Toolbox function for Mark VI
High-speed Data Collection ü ü ü Toolbox Trend Recorder for Mark VI
Control Constants Compare ü ü ü

Optional Functions
TCI Modbus Slave ü ü ü ü
TCI Modbus Master ü ü ü For external device interface
GSM ü ü ü ü
Power Block Control ü ü ü ü
Performance Monitor ü ü ü Simple cycle only
Web Diagnostic Functions

Demand Display ü ü ü
Logic Forcing Display ü ü
Alarm Display ü ü ü ü
Control Constants Display ü ü
HMI Log Files ü ü ü ü
ARCWHO Utility ü ü ü
Diagnostic Programs
Product Code File Verification ü ü ü ü

CIMPLICITY HMI Supported Functions
The turbine control HMI supports many functions of the CIMPLICITY HMI. The
following table lists and identifies these functions.
Do not load unsupported CIMPLICITY functions on the HMI

for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine controllers.
Although the CIMPLICITY HMI function listed below will run
on the HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine controllers, they are
not necessarily supported by GE Power Systems for use on the
HMI. Please check with a GE Power Systems representative for
availability.
Options not listed as supported in the following table have not
been qualified.
Earliest
Supported CIMPLICITY Function Supported Application Notes
Version
Action Calendar Calendar-based Control
Alarm Blocking
Alarm Horn
3.2 SP7 Alarm Viewer ü Interactive ActiveX alarm viewing object
3.2 SP7 Basic Control Engine ü Visual Basic for applications scripting language
Data Logger Data logging via ODBC
DDE Server (CWSERV)
Dynamic Measurement Systems Dynamically switch between English and metric units
Genius Communication from HMI
Historical Data Analyzer Comprehensive data summarization
Historical Trends Interactive ActiveX object for viewing trend
HMI for CNC Integration with GE Fanuc CNC controllers
3.2 SP7 HMI Modbus Master ü

Marquee Display alarms and messages to marquee devices
3.2 SP7 Modbus Plus Communications ü

Modbus TCP/IP Communications
4.01 SP2 OPC Client Consult Salem, VA factory, Turbine Control

Application Engineering (540) 387-7388
4.01 SP2 OPC Server Consult Salem, VA factory, Turbine Control
Application Engineering (540) 387-7388
4.01 SP8 OpenProcess Pending
3.2 SP7 Pager ü Send alarm information to alpha-numeric pagers
PocketViewer WinCE CimView
Earliest
Supported CIMPLICITY Function Supported Application Notes
Version
3.2 SP7 PointBridge ü Allows CIMPLICITY server to act as device to

another server
4.01 SP2 Quick Trends ü Pop-up trends for any points on a screen
3.2 SP7 Real-time Trends ü Interactive ActiveX object for viewing trend
Recipes Device-independent recipe management
Report Manager Report generation and management from process
3.2 SP7 Series 90™ PLC Fault Tables ü View PLC faults
Server Redundancy Complete mission critical redundancy support
4.01 SP2 SmartObjects™ ü Reusable drag and drop graphic and scripted objects
SPC New features for SPC
System Sentry Constantly watches HMI and system parameters
Tracker Option Track items through a production facility
3.2 SP7 Web Gateway ü Send CIMPLICITY HMI data to web pages
Web Viewer Send screens over web to standard web browsers
3.2 SP7 XY Plots ü ActiveX object for plotting multiple x-y data

Notes
Appendix B Alarm Overview
Introduction
The turbine controllers generate three types of alarms, which are viewed on the HMI
or toolbox: Process, Hold List, and Diagnostic (see Figure B-1).
Alarm Diagnostic
HMI HMI Toolbox
Display Display
UDH
<R> Process & <S> <T> Diagnostic

Hold List
Controller Controller Controller Alarms
Alarms
Diagnostic
I/O I/O I/O
Alarm Bits
Figure B-1. Three Types of Alarms Generated by the Mark VI Controller
This appendix provides a general overview of turbine controller alarms viewed and
addressed using the HMI. It is intended to assist the operator in understanding how to
use the HMI for monitoring, using the features described in this document.
Note The information in this appendix applies specifically to the Mark VI

controller. However, it should also apply to Mark IV, Mark V, and Mark V LM
controllers, except in discussion of Control System Toolbox features.
This information is provided as follows:

Section Page
Hold List Alarms ..................................................................................................... B-2

Process Alarms ........................................................................................................ B-2
Process (and Hold) Alarm Data Flow............................................................... B-2
Diagnostic Alarms ................................................................................................... B-3
GEH-6126A, Volume I Operator’s Guide Appendix B Alarm Overview • B-1

Hold List Alarms (Steam Turbine Only)
Refer to the Hold List section in Hold List alarms are similar to process alarms with the additional feature that the
Chapter 4. scanner drives a specified signal True whenever any Hold List signal is in the alarm
state (hold present). This signal is used to disable automatic turbine startup logic at
various stages in the sequencing. Operators may override a hold list signal so that the
sequencing can proceed even if the hold condition has not cleared.
Process Alarms
Process Alarms are caused by machinery and process problems, and alert the
operator by means of messages on the HMI screen. The alarms are created in the
controller using alarm bits generated in the I/O boards or in sequencing. The user
configures the desired analog alarm settings in sequencing using the toolbox.
Process Alarms are generated by the transition of Boolean signals configured by the
toolbox (for Mark VI) with the alarm attribute. The signals may be driven by
sequencing or they may be tied to input points to map values directly from I/O
boards. Process alarm signals are scanned each frame after the sequencing is run. In
TMR systems, process signals are voted and the resulting composite diagnostic is
present in each controller.
A useful application for process alarms is the annunciation of system limit checking.
Limit checking takes place in the I/O boards at the frame rate, and the resulting
Boolean status information is transferred to the controller and mapped to Process
Alarm signals.
Two system limits are available for each process input, including thermocouple,
RTD, current, voltage, and pulse rate inputs. System limit 1 can be the high or low
alarm setting, and system limit 2 can be a second high or low alarm setting. These
limits are configured from the toolbox in engineering units.
There are several choices when configuring system limits. Limits can be configured
as enabled or disabled, latched or unlatched, and greater than or less than the preset
value. System out of limits can be reset with the RESET_SYS signal.
Process (and Hold) Alarm Data Flow

The operator or the controller Process and Hold alarms are time stamped and stored in a local queue in the
can take action based on controller. Changes representing alarms are time stamped and sent to the alarm
process alarms. queue. Reports containing alarm information are assembled and sent over the UDH
to the CIMPLICITY HMIs. Here the alarms are again queued and prepared for
operator display by the Alarm Viewer.
Operator commands from the HMI, such as alarm Acknowledge, Reset, Lock, and
Unlock, are sent back over the UDH to the alarm queue. There they change the status
of the appropriate alarms. An alarm entry is removed from the controller queue when
its state has returned to normal and it has been acknowledged and reset (refer to
Figure B-2).
Hold alarms are managed in the same fashion but are stored on a separate queue.
Additionally, hold alarms cannot be locked but may be overridden.
B-2 • Appendix B Alarm Overview HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
Mark VI Controller UDH Mark VI HMI
Input Signal 1
. . Alarm
Report
Alarm
Receiver
Alarm
Viewer
Alarm
. . Scanner
. . Alarm
Com-
mand Alarm Queue
Input Signal n Operator Commands
Alarm
Queue - Ack
Alarm Logic Including - Reset
Variable Time - Lock
- Unlock
Alarm ID - Override for Hold Lists
Figure B-2. Generating Process Alarms
Diagnostic Alarms
Diagnostic Alarms are caused by equipment problems, and use settings factory
programmed in the boards. Diagnostic Alarms identify the failed module to help the
service engineer quickly repair the system. For details of the failure, the operator can
request a display on the toolbox screen (Mark VI) or review the details in the HMI
Alarm Display screen.
The controller and I/O boards all generate diagnostic alarms, including the VCMI,
which generates diagnostics for the power subsystem. The controller has extensive
self-diagnostics, most that are available directly at the toolbox (for Mark VI).
Diagnostic alarms can be viewed from the toolbox by selecting the desired board,
clicking the right mouse button to display the drop down menu, and selecting display
diagnostics. A list of the diagnostic alarms for any I/O board can be displayed, and
may be reset from the toolbox.
GEH-6126A, Volume I Operator’s Guide Appendix B Alarm Overview • B-3

Notes
B-4 • Appendix B Alarm Overview HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
Glossary
ActiveX
ActiveX, developed by Microsoft, is a set of rules for how applications should share
information. With ActiveX, users can ask or answer questions, use pushbuttons, and
interact in other ways with the web page or compatible program. It is not a
programming language, but rather a model for writing programs so that other
programs and the operating system can call them. ActiveX technology is used with
Microsoft Internet Explorer® to make interactive web pages that look and behave
like computer programs, rather than static pages.
ActiveX control
A control (object) using ActiveX technologies to enable animation. An ActiveX
control can be automatically downloaded and executed by a web browser.
Programmers can develop ActiveX controls in a variety of languages, including C,
C++, Visual Basic, and Java. ActiveX controls have full access to the Windows
operating system.
alarm
A message notifying an operator or administrator of equipment, network, or process
problems.
Alarm Viewer
A standalone window within CIMPLICITY (an OCX control) for monitoring and
responding to alarms.
AMV
Alarm Viewer.
application
A complete, self-contained program that performs a specific function directly for the
user. Application programs are different than system programs, which control the
computer and run application programs and utilities.
ARCNET
Attached Resource Computer Network, a LAN communications protocol developed
by Datapoint Corporation. ARCNET defines the physical (coax and chip) and
datalink (token ring and board interface) layer of a 2.5 MHz communication
network.
GEH-6126A Volume I Operator’s Guide Glossary • 1

Balance of Plant (BOP)
Plant equipment other than the turbine that needs to be controlled.
board
Printed wiring board, or circuit board, used for electronic circuits.
Boolean
Digital statement that expresses a condition that is either True or False, also called a
discrete, or logical signal.
breaker (circuit breaker)

A switching device, capable of making, carrying, and breaking currents under
normal circuit conditions and also making, carrying for a specified time, and
breaking currents under specified abnormal conditions, such as those of short circuit.
<C>
The turbine controller’s Communicator core (processor).
CimEdit
An object-oriented graphics editor tool of CIMPLICITY HMI that functions with its
runtime viewer CimView. It can create graphical screens with animation, scripting,
colors, and a variety of graphical elements that represent power plant operation.
CIMPLICITY HMI
Pc-based operator interface software from GE Fanuc Automation, configurable to
work with a wide variety of control and data acquisition equipment.
cimproj
The required subdirectory name for a CIMPLICITY HMI project (F:\Cimproj). The
project configuration Workbench (.gef) is located in this subdirectory.
CimView
An interactive graphical user interface of CIMPLICITY HMI used to monitor and
control power plant equipment, displaying data as text or a variety of graphic objects.
Its screens were created with CimEdit. They include a variety of interactive control
functions for setting point values, displaying other graphic screens, and initiating
custom software routines and other Windows applications.
client-server
Software architecture where one software product makes requests on another
software product. For example, an arrangement of PCs with software making one a
data acquisition device and the other a data using device.
command line
The line on a computer display where the user types commands to be carried out by a
program. This is a feature of a text-based interface such as MS-DOS, as opposed to a
graphical user interface (GUI) such as Windows.
configure
Select specific options, either by editing disk files, or by setting the location of
hardware jumpers, or by loading software parameters into memory.
2 • Glossary HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I

control system
Equipment that automatically adjusts the output voltage, frequency, MW, or reactive
power, as the case may be, of an asset in response to certain aspects of common
quality such as voltage, frequency, MW, or reactive power. Such equipment
includes, but is not limited to, speed governors and exciters.
Control System Solutions

Product software provided on a CD for a GE control system. For example, this may
include the Control System Toolbox or SDB Exchange programs.
Control System Toolbox

See toolbox.
CRC
Cyclic Redundancy Check which is used to detect errors in data such as
transmissions or files on a disk.
cross plot
Display of two variables, plotted one against the other over time, in an X-Y type plot
to detect signal correlations and to analyze performance.
CSDB
Control Signal Database, used in the turbine controller to store real time process data
used in the control calculations.
CSF
Control System Freeway, a token passing communication network, typically using
TWINAX cabling, running at 2.3 MHz.
<D>
The turbine controller’s backup Communicator core (processor). (Also see <C>.)
data dictionary
A system file that contains the information needed to operate a database in a
database management system. This file includes basic operating information about
the records and fields of a certain database, the limits on acceptable data values, and
access-authorization information. For the HMI, the data dictionary files contain
information about unit-specific control signal database pointnames, alarm text
messages (for both process and diagnostic alarms), and display information for
signal pointnames (type/units, messages, and such). The primary unit Data
Dictionary file, UNITDATA.DAT, can be created on an HMI in the unit-specific
directory.
DCS
Distributed Control System, used for process control applications including control
of boilers and other power plant equipment.
deadband
Range of values inside of which the incoming signal can be altered without changing
the output response. The Historian uses a sophisticated deadband algorithm to decide
whether to save or discard incoming data, as part of its data compression function.

Demand Display
An HMI function that allows you to monitor several turbine data points at a time and
issue simple commands. It supports multiple units.
device
A configurable component of a process control system.
Devcom
Application program that serves as a communications bridge between the
CIMPLICITY HMI Point Manager and a device being monitored.
dynamic
An attribute emphasizing motion, change, and process as opposed to static.
EGD
Ethernet Global Data, a network protocol used by some controllers. Devices share
data through periodic EGD exchanges (pages of data).
Ethernet
LAN with a 10 or 100 megabaud data rate, used to link one or more computers
and/or controllers together. It features a collision avoidance/collision detection
system. It uses TCP/IP and I/O services layers that conform to the IEEE 802.3
standard, developed by Xerox, Digital Equipment Corporation (DEC), and Intel.
event
Discrete signal generated by a change in a status of a logic signal in a controller.
EX2000
GE generator exciter control. It regulates the generator field current to control the
generator output voltage.
fault code
A message from the controller to the HMI indicating a controller warning or failure.
firmware
Set of executable software, stored in memory chips that hold their content without
electrical power, such as EPROM or Flash memory.
filter
A program that separates data or signals in accordance with specified criteria.
forcing
Setting a signal to a particular value, regardless of the value the blockware or I/O is
writing to that signal.
frame rate
Basic scheduling rate of the controller. It encompasses one complete input-compute-
output cycle for the controller.

GSM
GE Industrial Systems Standard Messages. Application-level messages processed in
gateway to the DCS. The gateway serves as a protocol translator and can
communicate directly with several process controllers. No data is emitted from the
gateway unless previously requested by the DCS equipment.
Global Time Source (GTS)

Worldwide system supplying UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) using a network of
satellites.
graphical user interface (GUI)

An operating system interface between the user and the computer, based on graphics.
GUIs typically use a mouse or other tracking device and icons. First developed by
Xerox as an easier to learn interface than text-based ones, it was adopted by Apple
for the Macintosh, Microsoft for Windows, and even forUNIX systems as
XWindows.
header
Textual information, such as a title, date, name, or other applicable identifying
information, positioned at the top of a screen, column, or page, and usually repeated
at every occurrence.
Historian
A client/server-based data archival system for data collection, storage, and display of
power island and auxiliary process data.. It combines high-resolution digital event
data from the turbine controller with process analog data to create a sophisticated
tool for investigating cause-effect relationships.
HMI
Human-Machine Interface. The GE HMI is a Windows NT-based operator interface
to the turbine controllers and auxiliary power plant equipment. The HMI uses
CIMPLICITY as the operator interface, and supports the Historian Client Toolset for
viewing Historian data.
HRSG
Heat Recovery Steam Generator. This uses exhaust heat from a gas turbine to
generate steam.
icon
A small picture intended to represent something (a file, directory, or action) in a
graphical user interface. When an icon is clicked on, some action is performed, such
as opening a directory or aborting a file transfer
ICS
Integrated Control System. The GE ICS combines various power plant controls into
a single distributed control system.
initialize
Set values (addresses, counters, registers, and such) to a beginning value prior to the
rest of processing.

IONet
The Mark VI I/O Ethernet communication network.
LAN
Local area network (communications). A typical LAN consists of peripheral devices
and controllers contained in the same building, and often on the same floor.
logical
Statement of a true/false sense, such as a Boolean.
Mark IV
SPEEDTRONIC gas turbine controller, introduced in 1983. The first GE triple
modular redundant (TMR) control for fault-tolerant operation.
Mark V
All-digital SPEEDTRONIC gas and steam turbine controller, introduced in 1991,
available in Simplex and TMR control versions. At first equipped with a DOS-based
pc operator interface, later upgraded to use the NT-based CIMPLICITY HMI.
Mark V LM
SPEEDTRONIC gas turbine controller, introduced in 1995, designed specifically to
support the aeroderivative Dry Low Emissions (DLE) technology developed by GE
Aircraft Engines. Equipped to use the NT-based CIMPLICITY HMI.
Mark VI
VME-based SPEEDTRONIC gas and steam turbine controller, available in Simplex
and TMR control versions. Equipped to use the NT-based CIMPLICITY HMI and
Control System Toolbox.
menu
(Software.) A list from which the user may select an operation to be performed.
Modbus
Serial communication protocol, initially developed by Gould Modicon for use
between PLCs and other computers.
network
A data communication system that links two or more computers and peripheral
devices.
object
(Software.) Generally, any item that can be individually selected and manipulated.
This can include shapes and pictures that appear on a display screen, as well as less
tangible software entities. In object-oriented programming, for example, an object is
a self-contained entity that consists of both data and procedures to manipulate the
data.
OCX
OLE custom control. An independent program module that can be accessed by other
programs in a Windows environment. ActiveX (Microsoft’s next generation of
controls) is backward compatible OCX.

OLE
(Pronounced as separate letters.) Object linking and embedding. A compound
document standard developed by Microsoft Corporation. It enables you to create
objects with one application and then link or embed them in a second application.
Embedded objects retain their original format and links to the application that
created them. Support for OLE is built into the Windows.
OPC
OLE for Process Controls. The OPC Specification is a non-proprietary technical
specification that defines a set of standard interfaces based upon Microsoft’s
OLE/COM technology. The application of the OPC standard interface makes
possible interoperability between automation/control applications, field
systems/devices, and business/office applications.
panel
The side or front of a piece of equipment on which terminations and termination
assemblies are mounted.
pc
Abbreviation for personal computer.
PDH
See Plant Data Highway.
permissives
Conditions that allow advancement from one state to another.
Plant Data Highway (PDH)

Ethernet communication network linking the Historian, HMI Servers, HMI Viewers,
workstation, and printers.
PLC
Programmable logic controller. These are designed for discrete (logic) control of
machinery, and they also compute math (analog) functions and perform regulatory
control.
plot
To draw an image by connecting a series of precisely placed points on a screen or
paper, using a series of lines.
point
Basic unit for variable information in the controller, also referred to as signal.
product code (runtime)

Software stored in the controller’s Flash memory that converts application code
(pcode) to executable code.

reactive capability
The reactive power injection or absorption capability of generating sets and other
reactive power resources such as Static Var Compensators, capacitors, and
synchronous condensers. This includes reactive power capability of a generating set
during the normal course of the generating set operations.
reboot
Restart the controller or pc after a controlled shutdown.
relay ladder diagram (RLD)

A ladder diagram represents a relay circuit. Power is considered to flow from the left
rail through contacts to the coil connected at the right.
resources
Also known as groups. Resources are systems (devices, machines, or work stations
where work is performed) or areas where several tasks are carried out. Resource
configuration plays an important role in the CIMPLICITY system by routing alarms
to specific users and filtering the data users receive.
runtime
See product code.
Sequence of Events (SOE)

A high-speed record of contact closures taken during a plant upset to allow detailed
analysis of the event. Most turbine controllers support a data resolution of 1
millisecond.
server
A pc that gathers data over Ethernet from plant devices, and makes the data available
to pc-based operator interfaces known as Viewers.
setpoint
Value of a controlled variable, departure from which causes a controller to operate to
reduce the error and restore the intended steady state.
signal
Basic unit for variable information in the controller, also referred to as point.
Simplex
Operation that requires only one set of control and I/O, and generally uses only one
channel.
SOE
See Sequence of Events.
SRTP
Service Request Transfer Protocol. An Ethernet communications protocol for
communications between the turbine controller and the HMI.

Stagelink
ARCNET-based communication link used by many controllers.
synchroscope
Instrument for detecting whether two moving parts are synchronized
tag
Identifying name given to a process measurement point.
TCEA
DS200TCEA Emergency Overspeed Board (TCEA), located in the controller’s
Protective Core <P1>, is used for the high-speed protection circuitry. It is often
referred to as the Protective Processor. The three TCEA boards used in the <P1>
core are referred to as the <X>, <Y>, and <Z> processors. These boards scale and
condition input for high and low shaft speed, flame detection, and automatic
synchronization. They then output the signals via the TCEA (location 1) board over
the IONET to the <R1> core’s DS200STCA board. The TCEAs send emergency trip
signals to the Turbine Trip Board (DS200TCTG). Each TCEA has its own power
supply and power supply diagnostics.
TCI
Turbine Control Interface. The GE-supplied software package on the HMI that
interfaces to the turbine control.
TCP/IP
Communications protocols developed to inter-network dissimilar systems. It is a de
facto UNIX standard, but is supported on almost all systems. TCP controls data
transfer and IP provides the routing for functions, such as file transfer and e-mail.
timetag
Information added to data to indicate the time at which it was collected. Also called a
time stamp.
TMR
Triple Modular Redundancy. This is an architecture that uses three identical sets of
control and I/O, and votes the results to obtain highly reliable output signals.
toolbox (Control System Toolbox)

Windows-based software package used to configure the Mark VI controllers,
exciters, and drives.
trend
Time-based screen plot showing the history of process values, available in the
Historian, HMI, and the Control System Toolbox.
trigger
Transition in a discrete signal from 0 to 1, or from 1 to 0, initiating an action or
sequence.

Unit Data Highway (UDH)
Connects the Mark VI controllers, LCI, EX2000, PLCs, and other GE provided
equipment to the HMI servers. Sometimes used to refer to Stagelink.
UTC
Coordinated Universal Time, an international time-reference standard.
utility
A small helper program that performs a specific task, usually related to managing
system resources. Utilities differ from applications mostly in terms of size,
complexity, and function.
web browser
Pc software, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator, allowing
screens and data to be viewed over a network from a server.
Windows NT
Advanced 32-bit operating system from Microsoft Corporation for 386-based PCs
and above.
Workbench
A CIMPLICITY HMI program used to view, configure, organize, and manage every
component of a CIMPLICITY project through a single window.

Index B
Balance of Plant, 1-7, 5-8, 5-25
board (see printed wiring boards)
Boolean, 6-5, B-2
BOP (see Balance of Plant)
breaker (see circuit breaker)
A
ActiveX objects, 1-9, 5-1, 5-2, 5-6, A-4, A-5 C
Manual Synchronizing Display, 5-2, 5-6, A-1
CimEdit, 1-5, 1-8, 5-17
trends, 1-6, A-4, A-5
animation, 1-5, 3-3, 3-4, 5-17
Triggered Plot, 5-2, 5-6, 5-7, A-1
CIMPLICITY
alarm display, 2-3, 2-6, 4-16
ActiveX objects, 1-9, 5-1, 5-2, 5-6, A-4, A-5
Alarm Viewer, 1-6, 2-3, 2-6, 4-16, 5-8, 5-26, A-4, B-2
HMI, 1-3, 1-8, 2-3, 5-1, 5-2, 5-6, 5-8, 5-12, 5-14, 5-17,
CimView, 1-5, 1-6, 2-2
6-1 – 6-3, 6-10, 6-12, A-1, A-4, A-5, B-2
Extended Alarm Commands, 2-3, 5-1, 5-26
Cimproj, 5-16, 6-1, 6-2
Lock, 2-3, 4-17, 5-26, 5-27, B-2
CimView, 1-5, 1-6, 2-2, A-4
Lockout, 5-1, 5-26, 5-27
circuit breaker, 5-2, 5-3
Silence, 2-3, 5-1, 5-26, 5-27
client-server, 1-1
Unlock, 2-3, 5-26, 5-27, B-2
command line, 3-6, 3-11, 3-15, 4-13 – 4-15, 5-27,
alarm filters, 5-8
6-7, 6-11
configuring, 5-14
communications, 1-3, 1-6, 1-8, 6-4, 6-12, A-2, A-4
Alarm Viewer, 1-6, 2-3, 2-6, 4-16, 5-8, 5-26, A-4, B-2,
Ethernet, 1-7, 3-13, 6-1, 6-11
AMV, 5-18, 5-26
Modbus, 1-7, 6-11, A-2 – A-4
CimView, 1-5, 1-6, 2-2
configuration, 1-3, 1-9, 2-4, 4-7, 4-13, 4-14, 4-16, 5-1,
5-3 – 5-6, 5-8, 5-12, 5-14, 6-2, 6-4 – 6-7
Lock, 2-3, 4-17, 5-26, 5-27, B-2
alarm filters, 5-14
Lockout, 5-1, 5-26, 5-27
Demand Display, 4-13
Silence, 2-3, 5-1, 5-26, 5-27
resources, 5-12
Unlock, 2-3, 5-26, 5-27, B-2
users, 5-8
alarms, 1-3, 1-4, 1-6, 2-3, 2-5, 3-9, 4-15, 4-16, 5-1, 5-8,
Control Signal Database (CSDB), 4-17, 6-4, 6-5
5-26, 6-4, 6-5, 6-6, 6-10, A-4, B-2
control system, 1-3, 1-6, 1-9, 4-1
alarm display, 2-3, 2-6, A-3, B-3
Control System Freeway (CSF), A-2
Alarm Logger Control, 2-6, 4-15
Control System Solutions, 1-8
Alarm Viewer, 1-6, 2-3, 2-6, 4-16, 5-8, 5-26, A-4, B-2
Control System Toolbox (toolbox), 1-2, 1-7, 1-8, 2-5,
alarm.cim file, 5-16, 5-20
3-2, 3-9, 3-13, 4-2, 6-10, B-1 – B-3
AMV, 5-18, 5-26
Trend Recorder, 1-2, 1-8, 3-13, A-3
diagnostic, 6-6, 6-10, A-2, B-1, B-3
controllers
Mark IV, 1-1, 1-3, 4-2, 4-13, 4-15, 5-28, 6-4, 6-10,
Lock, 2-3, 4-17, 5-26, 5-27, B-2
6-11, A-1, A-2, B-1
Lockout, 5-1, 5-26, 5-27
Mark V, 1-1 – 1-3, 1-7, 1-8, 2-5, 2-6, 3-2, 3-9,
Silence, 2-3, 5-1, 5-26, 5-27
3-12 – 3-15, 4-2, 5-2, 5-6, 6-4, 6-6, 6-10, A-1 –
Unlock, 2-3, 5-26, 5-27, B-2
A-3, B-1 – B-3
External Alarm Manager, 6-10, A-1
Mark V LM, 1-1, 1-8, 3-12, 3-14, 3-15, 6-4, 6-6, A-1,
filtered, 1-9, 5-23
B-1
filtering, 5-8, 6-2
Mark VI, 1-1 – 1-3, 1-7, 1-8, 2-5, 3-2, 3-9, 3-13,
Hold List, 2-6, 4-16, 4-17, 6-6, A-2, B-1, B-2
4-2, 4-16, 5-2, 6-4, 6-6, 6-10, A-1 – A-3, B-1 – B-3
process, 3-12, 6-10, A-2, B-1 – B-3
controls
AMV, 5-18, 5-26
ActiveX, 1-9, 5-1, 5-2, 5-6, A-4, A-5
animation, 1-5, 3-3, 3-4, 5-17
CSDB (see Control Signal Database)
graphic displays, 1-2, 1-3, 1-4, A-1
CSF (see Control System Freeway)
GEH-6126A Volume I Operator’s Guide Index • 1

D G
Data Dictionary, 1-3, 4-3 – 4-6, 4-9, 6-4, 6-5, 6-9 GE Standard Messages (GSM), 1-7, A-3
data history, 3-9, 3-11, 3-12, 3-15 graphic displays, 1-2 – 1-6, 5-1, 5-28, A-1, A-5
database CimEdit, 1-5, 1-8, 5-17
Control Signal Database (CSDB), 4-17, 6-4, 6-5 CimView, 1-5, 1-6, 2-2
SDB Exchange, 1-8, 6-10 GSM (see GE Standard Messages)
SDB Utilities, 6-10, A-2
DCS (see Distributed Control System) H
Demand Display, 2-6, 3-2, 3-3, 3-5, 3-8, 4-2 – 4-11,
4-13, 4-14, A-1, A-3 Help, 4-11
configuring, 4-13 How to Get, 1-10
Find All Function, 3-7 Historian, 1-2, 1-7, 1-8, 3-13, A-3
starting, 4-2 HMI (see Human-Machine Interface)
timetag, 4-5 hold alarms
diagnostic alarms, 6-6, 6-10, A-2, B-1, B-3 data flow, B-1, B-2
displays Hold List, 2-6, 4-16, 4-17, 6-6, A-2, B-1, B-2
CimView, 1-5, 1-6, 2-2 Human-Machine Interface (HMI)
Demand Display, 2-6, 3-2, 3-3, 3-5, 3-8, 4-2 – 4-11, features, 1-2
4-13, 4-14, A-1, A-3 optional features, 1-7
Manual Synchronizing, 5-2, 5-6, A-1 other tools, 2-5
Reactive Capability, 5-28, A-1 program files, 4-3
Sequencing, 3-7 setup, 1-8, 5-19 – 5-21, 6-4
Distributed Control System (DCS), 1-7 specifications, 1-7
documentation, 1-8, 1-10, 4-2 startup, 2-2
DOS commands (command line), 3-6, 3-11, 3-15, 4-13 –
4-15, 5-27, 6-7, 6-11 I
Dynamic Rung Display, 1-4, 3-2 – 3-8
starting, 3-6 ICS, 1-7
timetag, 3-4, 3-5, 3-9
K
E keypad
EGD (see Ethernet Global Data), 3-13, A-2 menus, 1-9
Ethernet, 1-7, 3-13, 6-11
Ethernet Global Data (EGD), 3-13, A-2 M
EX2000, 6-6, 6-7
fault code, 6-6, 6-7 Manual Synchronizing Display, 5-2, 5-6, A-1
exciter, 5-8, 6-6, 6-7 Mark IV, 1-1, 1-3, 4-2, 4-13, 4-15, 5-28, 6-4, 6-10, 6-11,
Extended Alarm Commands, 2-3, 5-1, 5-26 A-1, A-2, B-1
Lock, 2-3, 4-17, 5-26, 5-27, B-2, 4-17 Mark V, 1-1 – 1-3, 1-7, 1-8, 2-5, 2-6, 3-2, 3-9, 3-12 –
Lockout, 5-1, 5-26, 5-27 3-15, 4-2, 4-16, 5-2, 5-6, 6-4, 6-6, 6-10, A-1 – A-3,
Silence, 2-3, 5-1, 5-26, 5-27 B-1 – B-3
Unlock, 2-3, 5-26, 5-27, B-2 Mark V LM, 1-1, 1-8, 3-12, 3-14, 3-15, 6-4, 6-6, A-1,
External Alarm Manager, 6-10, A-1 B-1
Mark VI, 1-1 – 1-3, 1-7, 1-8, 2-5, 3-2, 3-9, 3-13, 4-2,
4-16, 5-2, 6-4, 6-6, 6-10, A-1 – A-3, B-1 – B-3
F Modbus, 1-7, 6-11, A-2, A-3, A-4
fault code, 6-6, 6-7
file structure, 3-2, 6-2 N
filter, 5-8
filtered alarms, 1-9, 5-23 network, 1-4
Resource Definition, 5-13 Ethernet, 1-7, 3-13, 6-1, 6-11
Role Properties, 5-11 Modbus, 1-7, 6-11, A-2, A-3, A-4
User Properties, 5-10
2 • Index HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I

O Mark V, 1-1 – 1-3, 1-7, 1-8, 2-5, 2-6, 3-2, 3-9,
3-12 – 3-15, 4-2, 4-16, 5-2, 5-6, 6-4, 6-6, 6-10,
objects A-1 – A-3, B-1 – B-3
ActiveX, 1-9, 5-1, 5-2, 5-6, A-4, A-5 Mark V LM, 1-1, 1-8, 3-12, 3-14, 3-15, 6-4, 6-6, A-1,
OCX, 2-3, 5-8 B-1
OLE, 1-5, 2-3, 5-1, 5-2, 6-12 Mark VI, 1-1 – 1-3, 1-7, 1-8, 2-5, 3-2, 3-9, 3-13,
OPC, 1-8, 6-12, A-4 4-2, 4-16, 5-2, 6-4, 6-6, 6-10, A-1 – A-3, B-1 – B-3
OCX, 2-3, 5-8 startup, 1-5, 1-6, 2-2
OLE, 1-5, 2-3, 5-1, 5-2, 6-12
OLE for Process Controls (OPC), 1-8, 6-12, A-4
OPC (see OLE for Process Controls) T
TCI (see Turbine Control Interface)
P TCP/IP, 1-7, A-4
timetag, 3-4, 3-5, 3-9, 3-12, 4-5
panel, 1-6, 5-16 TMR (see Triple Modular Redundancy)
PDH (see Plant Data Highway) toolbox (see Control System Toolbox)
permissives, 1-4, 5-4 trend, 1-6, A-4, A-5
Plant Data Highway (PDH), 1-3 Trend Recorder, 1-2, 1-8, 3-13, A-3
PLC (see Programmable Logic Controller) Trip History, 2-5, 3-9 – 3-15, A-1, A-3
points, 1-3, 1-6, 2-6, 3-3, 3-8, 3-9, 3-12, 4-3, 4-5, 4-6, trends
4-14 – 4-17, 6-4 – 6-7, 6-9, A-5, B-2 ActiveX objects, 1-6, A-4, A-5
printed wiring boards, B-3 Triggered Plot, 5-2, 5-6, 5-7, A-1
process alarms, 3-12, 6-10, A-2, B-1 – B-3 valve travel, 5-6
data flow, B-1, B-2 Trip History, 2-5, 3-9 – 3-15, A-1, A-3
TMR systems, B-2 Data History Results Window, 3-9, 3-11, 3-12, 3-15
program files, 4-3 Dialog Box, 3-9, 3-11
Programmable Logic Controller (PLC), 6-10, A-5 Display, 2-5
projects, 1-9, 2-4, 5-8, 5-12, 5-14, 5-19, 6-1 – Log, 2-5, 3-14, 3-15
6-4, 6-9, 6-10, 6-12 Mark VI, 3-13
configuration starting, 3-11
Cimproj, 5-16, 6-1, 6-2 timetag, 3-9
Workbench, 2-4, 5-8, 5-12, 5-14, 5-16, 6-1 – 6-3 Triple Modular Redundancy (TMR), B-2
opening, 2-4, 6-3 Turbine Control Interface (TCI), 1-2, 1-3, 2-3, 2-5, 3-14,
4-16, 5-1, 5-2, 5-26, 6-4, 6-5, 6-11, A-1 – A-3
R
Reactive Capability Display, 5-28, A-1 U
requisition, 1-10 UDH (see Unit Data Highway)
Resource Definition, 5-13 Unit Data Highway (UDH), 1-3, B-2
resources, configuring, 5-12 User Properties, 5-10
Role Properties, 5-11 users, configuring, 5-8
rungs, 2-5, 3-2, 3-3, 3-6 – 3-8, A-1
V
S
valve travel, 5-6
SDB Exchange, 1-8, 6-10
SDB Utilities, 6-10, A-2
security, 1-2, 5-8, 5-12 W
Sequence of Events (SOE), 6-6 web, A-5
Sequencing Display, 3-7 Diagnostic Functions, A-3
setpoint, 4-7, 6-12, 4-7 Gateway, 1-7, A-5
Signal Manager, 6-4 – 6-9, A-1 Workbench, 2-4, 5-8, 5-12, 5-14, 5-16, 6-1 – 6-3
signals, importing, 6-8
SOE (see Sequence of Events)
specifications, 1-7
SPEEDTRONIC controllers
Mark IV, 1-1, 1-3, 4-2, 4-13, 4-15, 5-28, 6-4, 6-10,
6-11, A-1, A-2, B-1
GEH-6126A Volume I Operator’s Guide Index • 3

Notes
4 • Index HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I

*(,QGXVWULDO6\VWHPV
*HQHUDO(OHFWULF&RPSDQ\
5RDQRNH%OYG
ZZZ*(LQGXVWULDOFRP 6DOHP9$86$
g GE Energy
GEH-6421H, Volume I
TM
SPEEDTRONIC
Mark VI Control
System Guide, Volume I
TM
SPEEDTRONIC
Mark VI Control
System Guide, Volume I
These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to
provide for every possible contingency to be met during installation, operation, and
maintenance. The information is supplied for informational purposes only, and GE makes
no warranty as to the accuracy of the information included herein. Changes,
modifications, and/or improvements to equipment and specifications are made
periodically and these changes may or may not be reflected herein. It is understood that
GE may make changes, modifications, or improvements to the equipment referenced
herein or to the document itself at any time. This document is intended for trained
personnel familiar with the GE products referenced herein.
GE may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in this
document. The furnishing of this document does not provide any license whatsoever to
any of these patents. All license inquiries should be directed to the address below. If
further information is desired, or if particular problems arise that are not covered
sufficiently for the purchaser’s purpose, the matter should be referred to:
GE Energy
Post Sales Service
1501 Roanoke Blvd.
Phone: 1 888 GE4 SERV (888 434 7378, United States)
Fax: + 1 540 387 8606 (All)
(“+” indicates the international access code required when calling from outside the
USA)
This document contains proprietary information of General Electric Company, USA and
is furnished to its customer solely to assist that customer in the installation, testing,
operation, and/or maintenance of the equipment described. This document shall not be
reproduced in whole or in part nor shall its contents be disclosed to any third party
without the written approval of GE Energy.
GE PROVIDES THE FOLLOWING DOCUMENT AND THE INFORMATION

INCLUDED THEREIN AS IS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED STATUTORY
WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
2004 by General Electric Company, USA.

All rights reserved
Belden is a registered trademark of Belden Electronic Wire and Cable of Cooper.

CIMPLICITY is a registered trademark of GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.
CompactPCI is a registered trademark of PICMG.
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation.
IEEE is a register trademark of Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
Modbus is a registered trademark of Schneider Automation.
NEC is a registered trademark of the National Fire Protection Association.
QNX is a registered trademarks of QNX Software Systems, Ltd. (QSSL)
Siecor is registered trademarks of Corning Cable Systems Brands, Inc.
Tefzel is a registered trademarks of E.I. du Pont de Nemours and Company
Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
g
To:
Reader Comments GE Energy

1501 Roanoke Blvd.
Fax: 1-540-387-8651
(GE Internal DC 8-278-8651)
We welcome comments and suggestions to make this publication more useful.

Your Name Today’s Date If needed, how can we contact you?
Fax No.
Your Company’s Name and Address Job Site
Phone No.
GE Requisition No.
E-mail
Your Job Function / How You Use This Publication Publication No.
Address
Publication Issue/Revision Date
General Rating
Excellent Good Fair Poor Additional Comments
Contents { { { { ____________________________________________________________
Organization { { { { ____________________________________________________________
Technical Accuracy { { { { ____________________________________________________________
Clarity { { { { ____________________________________________________________
Completeness { { { { ____________________________________________________________
Drawings / Figures { { { { ____________________________________________________________
Tables { { { { ____________________________________________________________
Referencing { { { { ____________________________________________________________
Readability { { { { ____________________________________________________________
Specific Suggestions (Corrections, information that could be expanded on, and such.)
Page No. Comments
_____ _________________________________________________________________________________
_____ _________________________________________________________________________________
_____ _________________________________________________________________________________
_____ _________________________________________________________________________________
_____ _________________________________________________________________________________
_____ _________________________________________________________________________________
Other Comments (What you like, what could be added, how to improve, and such.) ________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Overall grade (Compared to publications from other manufacturers of similar products, how do you rate this publication?)
{ Superior { Comparable { Inferior { Do not know Comment ____________________________________________
Detach and fax or mail to the address noted above.

........................................................................ Fold here and close with staple or tape ..........................................................................................
____________________________ Place
stamp
____________________________ here.
____________________________
GE Energy
1501 Roanoke Blvd.
.......................................................................................... Fold here first ........................................................................................................


strictly observed, could result in personal injury or death.

strictly observed, could result in damage to or destruction of
equipment.
Indicates a procedure, condition, or statement that should be

strictly followed in order to optimize these applications.
Note Indicates an essential or important procedure, condition, or statement.
GEH-6421 Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Safety Symbol Legend x a

This equipment contains a potential hazard of electric shock
or burn. Only personnel who are adequately trained and
thoroughly familiar with the equipment and the instructions
should install, operate, or maintain this equipment.
Isolation of test equipment from the equipment under test

presents potential electrical hazards. If the test equipment
cannot be grounded to the equipment under test, the test
equipment’s case must be shielded to prevent contact by
personnel.
To minimize hazard of electrical shock or burn, approved

grounding practices and procedures must be strictly followed.
To prevent personal injury or equipment damage caused by

equipment malfunction, only adequately trained personnel
should modify any programmable machine.
b x Safety Symbol Legend GEH-6421 Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I

Contents
Chapter 1 Overview 1-1

Introduction ...............................................................................................................................................1-1
Related Documents ...................................................................................................................................1-2
How to Get Help .......................................................................................................................................1-3
Acronyms and Abbreviations ....................................................................................................................1-3
Chapter 2 System Architecture 2-1

Introduction ...............................................................................................................................................2-1
System Components ..................................................................................................................................2-1
Control Cabinet ..............................................................................................................................2-1
I/O Cabinet.....................................................................................................................................2-1
Unit Data Highway (UDH) ............................................................................................................2-2
Human-Machine Interface (HMI) ..................................................................................................2-3
Computer Operator Interface (COI)...............................................................................................2-3
Link to Distributed Control System (DCS)....................................................................................2-4
Plant Data Highway (PDH)............................................................................................................2-4
Operator Console ...........................................................................................................................2-4
Excitation Control System .............................................................................................................2-5
Generator Protection ......................................................................................................................2-5
Static Starter Control System .........................................................................................................2-5
Control Module ..............................................................................................................................2-6
Interface Module ............................................................................................................................2-8
Controller .......................................................................................................................................2-9
VCMI Communication Board......................................................................................................2-10
IONet............................................................................................................................................2-11
I/O Boards....................................................................................................................................2-12
Terminal Boards...........................................................................................................................2-14
Power Sources..............................................................................................................................2-17
Turbine Protection Module ..........................................................................................................2-18
Operating Systems .......................................................................................................................2-19
Levels of Redundancy .............................................................................................................................2-20
Control and Protection Features ..............................................................................................................2-21
Triple Modular Redundancy ........................................................................................................2-21
TMR Architecture ........................................................................................................................2-22
TMR Operation ............................................................................................................................2-24
Designated Controller ..................................................................................................................2-25
Output Processing ........................................................................................................................2-26
Input Processing...........................................................................................................................2-28
State Exchange.............................................................................................................................2-30
Median Value Analog Voting ......................................................................................................2-31
Two Out of Three Logic Voter ....................................................................................................2-31
Disagreement Detector.................................................................................................................2-32
Peer I/O ........................................................................................................................................2-32
Command Action .........................................................................................................................2-32
Rate of Response..........................................................................................................................2-32
Failure Handling ..........................................................................................................................2-33
Turbine Protection...................................................................................................................................2-34
Reliability and Availability .....................................................................................................................2-36
Online Repair for TMR Systems..................................................................................................2-36
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Contents x i

Reliability.....................................................................................................................................2-37
Third Party Connectivity .........................................................................................................................2-38
Chapter 3 Networks 3-1

Introduction ...............................................................................................................................................3-1
Network Overview ....................................................................................................................................3-1
Enterprise Layer .............................................................................................................................3-1
Supervisory Layer ..........................................................................................................................3-2
Control Layer .................................................................................................................................3-3
Data Highways ..........................................................................................................................................3-4
Plant Data Highway (PDH)............................................................................................................3-4
Unit Data Highway (UDH) ............................................................................................................3-5
Data Highway Ethernet Switches...................................................................................................3-6
Selecting IP Addresses for UDH and PDH ....................................................................................3-8
IONet.........................................................................................................................................................3-9
IONet - Communications Interface ..............................................................................................3-10
I/O Data Collection ......................................................................................................................3-11
Ethernet Global Data (EGD) ...................................................................................................................3-12
Modbus Communications........................................................................................................................3-14
Ethernet Modbus Slave............................................................................................................................3-15
Serial Modbus Slave................................................................................................................................3-17
Modbus Configuration .................................................................................................................3-18
Hardware Configuration...............................................................................................................3-19
Serial Port Parameters ..................................................................................................................3-21
Ethernet GSM..........................................................................................................................................3-22
PROFIBUS Communications..................................................................................................................3-24
Configuration ...............................................................................................................................3-25
I/O and Diagnostics......................................................................................................................3-26
Fiber-Optic Cables...................................................................................................................................3-27
Components..................................................................................................................................3-27
Component Sources......................................................................................................................3-31
Time Synchronization .............................................................................................................................3-32
Redundant Time Sources .............................................................................................................3-32
Selection of Time Sources............................................................................................................3-33
Chapter 4 Codes, Standards, and Environment 4-1

Introduction ...............................................................................................................................................4-1
Safety Standards ........................................................................................................................................4-1
Electrical....................................................................................................................................................4-2
Printed Circuit Board Assemblies ..................................................................................................4-2
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ..........................................................................................4-2
Low Voltage Directive ...................................................................................................................4-2
Supply Voltage...............................................................................................................................4-3
Environment ..............................................................................................................................................4-5
Storage ...........................................................................................................................................4-5
Operating........................................................................................................................................4-6
Elevation ........................................................................................................................................4-7
Contaminants..................................................................................................................................4-7
Vibration ........................................................................................................................................4-8
Packaging .......................................................................................................................................4-8
UL Class 1 Division 2 Listed Boards .............................................................................................4-8
ii x Contents GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I

Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration 5-1
Introduction ...............................................................................................................................................5-1
Installation Support ...................................................................................................................................5-1
Early Planning..............................................................................................................................5-2
GE Installation Documents ..........................................................................................................5-2
Technical Advisory Options ........................................................................................................5-3
Equipment Receiving and Handling........................................................................................................5-5
Weights and Dimensions.........................................................................................................................5-6
Cabinets........................................................................................................................................5-6
Control Console (Example)..........................................................................................................5-10
Power Requirements................................................................................................................................5-11
Installation Support Drawings.................................................................................................................5-12
Grounding ...............................................................................................................................................5-17
Equipment Grounding..................................................................................................................5-17
Building Grounding System.........................................................................................................5-18
Signal Reference Structure (SRS) ................................................................................................5-19
Cable Separation and Routing .................................................................................................................5-25
Signal/Power Level Definitions ...................................................................................................5-25
Cableway Spacing Guidelines......................................................................................................5-27
Cable Routing Guidelines ............................................................................................................5-30
Cable Specifications ................................................................................................................................5-31
Wire Sizes ....................................................................................................................................5-31
General Specifications .................................................................................................................5-32
Low Voltage Shielded Cable .......................................................................................................5-32
Connecting the System............................................................................................................................5-35
I/O Wiring....................................................................................................................................5-37
Terminal Block Features ..............................................................................................................5-38
Power System...............................................................................................................................5-38
Installing Ethernet ........................................................................................................................5-38
Startup Checks.........................................................................................................................................5-41
Board Inspections.........................................................................................................................5-41
Wiring and Circuit Checks...........................................................................................................5-44
Startup and Configuration .......................................................................................................................5-45
Topology and Application Code Download.................................................................................5-46
Online Download .........................................................................................................................5-47
Offline Download ........................................................................................................................5-48
Post-Download TMR Test ...........................................................................................................5-48
Controller Offline While System Online......................................................................................5-49
Offline Trip Analysis ...................................................................................................................5-49
Chapter 6 Tools and System Interface 6-1

Introduction ...............................................................................................................................................6-1
Toolbox .....................................................................................................................................................6-1
CIMPLICITY HMI ...................................................................................................................................6-4
Basic Description ...........................................................................................................................6-4
Product Features.............................................................................................................................6-6
Computer Operator Interface (COI) ..........................................................................................................6-7
Interface Features...........................................................................................................................6-7
Turbine Historian ......................................................................................................................................6-8
System Configuration.....................................................................................................................6-8
System Capability ..........................................................................................................................6-9
Data Flow.......................................................................................................................................6-9
Turbine Historian Tools ...............................................................................................................6-10
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Contents x iii

Chapter 7 Maintenance, Diagnostic, & Troubleshooting 7-1
Introduction ...............................................................................................................................................7-1
Maintenance ..............................................................................................................................................7-1
Modules and Boards.......................................................................................................................7-1
Component Replacement...........................................................................................................................7-2
Replacing a Controller ...................................................................................................................7-2
Replacing a VCMI .........................................................................................................................7-3
Replacing an I/O Board in an Interface Module.............................................................................7-3
Replacing a Terminal Board...........................................................................................................7-4
Cable Replacement.........................................................................................................................7-5
Alarms Overview.......................................................................................................................................7-6
Process Alarms ..........................................................................................................................................7-7
Process (and Hold) Alarm Data Flow ............................................................................................7-7
Diagnostic Alarms .....................................................................................................................................7-9
Voter Disagreement Diagnostics..................................................................................................7-10
Totalizers .................................................................................................................................................7-11
Troubleshooting.......................................................................................................................................7-12
I/O Board LEDs ...........................................................................................................................7-12
Controller Failures .......................................................................................................................7-14
Power Distribution Module Failure..............................................................................................7-14
Chapter 8 Applications 8-1

Introduction ...............................................................................................................................................8-1
Generator Synchronization ........................................................................................................................8-1
Hardware ........................................................................................................................................8-2
Application Code ...........................................................................................................................8-4
Algorithm Descriptions ..................................................................................................................8-5
Configuration .................................................................................................................................8-9
VTUR Diagnostics for the Auto Synch Function.........................................................................8-12
VPRO Diagnostics for the Auto Synch Function.........................................................................8-12
Hardware Verification Procedure.................................................................................................8-13
Synchronization Simulation .........................................................................................................8-13
Overspeed Protection Logic ....................................................................................................................8-15
Power Load Unbalance............................................................................................................................8-39
Early Valve Actuation .............................................................................................................................8-43
Fast Overspeed Trip in VTUR.................................................................................................................8-45
Compressor Stall Detection .....................................................................................................................8-48
Ground Fault Detection Sensitivity .........................................................................................................8-52
Glossary of Terms G-1
Index I-1
iv x Contents GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I

CHAPTER 1
Chapter 1 Overview
Related Documents..................................................................... 1-2
How to Get Help......................................................................... 1-3
Acronyms and Abbreviations ..................................................... 1-3
Introduction
This document describes the SPEEDTRONIC™ Mark VI turbine control system.
Mark VI is used for the control and protection of steam and gas turbines in electrical
generation and process plant applications.
The main functions of the Mark VI turbine control system are as follows:
x Speed control during turbine startup

x Automatic generator synchronization
x Turbine load control during normal operation on the grid
x Protection against turbine overspeed on loss of load
The Mark VI system is available as a simplex control or a triple modular redundant
(TMR) control with single or multiple racks, and local or remote I/O. The I/O
interface is designed for direct interface to the sensors and actuators on the turbine,
to eliminate the need for interposing instrumentation, and to avoid the reliability and
maintenance issues associated with that instrumentation.
Note To obtain the highest reliability, Mark VI uses a TMR architecture with
sophisticated signal voting techniques.
The following figure shows a typical Mark VI control system for a steam turbine
with the important inputs and control outputs.
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 1 Overview x 1-1

RS-232C
Mark VI I/O Board Rack

PC Interface
Laptop
Comm Controller VCCC
VSVO VTUR VAIC or VVIB VRTD VTCC VGEN
VCMI UCVX VCRC
Ethernet Data Highway
(48) Contact Inputs. 1 ms SOE
(24) Relays
(2) 3-Phase Gen/Line Voltage, (1) 3-Phase Gen. Current

(16) RTDs
Proximitors: (16) Vibration, (8) Position, (2) KP
(24) Thermocouples
Actuator
Actuator
Inlet Pressure
Trip
Generator
Speed
Extraction Pressure
Exhaust Pressure
Shaft Voltage & Current Monitor
Automatic Synchronizing
Vibration, Thrust, Eccentricity
Temperature (RTDs)
Temperature (Thermocouples)
Generator 3-Phase PTs & CT
Typical Turbine Control System
Related Documents
For additional information, refer to the following documents:
x GEH-6403 Control System Toolbox for a Mark VI Controller (for details of

configuring and downloading the control system)
x GEH-6422 Turbine Historian System Guide (for details of configuring and using
the Historian)
x GEH-6408 Control System Toolbox for Configuring the Trend Recorder (for
details of configuring the toolbox trend displays)
x GEI-100534, Control Operator Interface (COI) for Mark VI and EX2100
Systems
x GEI-100535, Modbus Communications
x GEI-100536, Profibus Communications
x GEI-100189, System Database (SDB) Server User's Guide
x GEI-100271, System Database (SDB) Browser
1-2 x Chapter 1 Overview GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I

How to Get Help
If technical assistance is required beyond the instructions provided in the
documentation, contact GE as follows:
GE Energy
Post Sales Service
1501 Roanoke Blvd. Salem, VA 24153-6492 USA
Fax: + 1 540 387 8606 (All)
Note "+" indicates the international access code required when calling from outside
the USA.
Acronyms and Abbreviations

ADL Asynchronous Device Language
ASCII America Standard Code for Information Interchange
BOP Balance of Plant
BIOS Basic Input/Output System
CCR Central Control Room
CMOS Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor
COI Computer Operator Interface
CPCI CompactPCI
CPU Central Processing Unit
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Code/Check
CT Current Transformer
DCE Data Communication Equipment
DCS Distributed Control System
DDE Data Distribution Equipment
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory
DTD Data Terminal Equipment Device
EGD Ethernet Global Data
EMC Electromagnetic Capability
EMI Electro-Magnetic Interference
EVA Early Valve Actuation
FE Functional Earth
FFT Fast Fourier Transform
FIT Failures in Time
GPS Global Position System
GSM GE Standard Messaging
GTS Global Time Source
HMI Human-Machine Interface
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 1 Overview x 1-3

HRSG Heat Recovery Steam Generator
ICS Integrated Control System
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
KP KeyPhasor®
LAN Local Area Network
MPU Magnetic Pickup
MTBF Mean Time Between Failures
MTBFO Mean Time Between Forced Outage
MTTR Mean Time To Repair
NEC National Electrical Code
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NTP Network Time Protocol
PDH Plant Data Highway
PE Protective Earth
PLU Power Load Unbalance
PDM Power Distribution Module
PLC Programmable Logic Controller
PPS Pulse per Second
PT Potential Transformer
RFI Radio Frequency Interference
RLD Relay Ladder Diagram
RPM Revolutions Per Minute
RPSM Redundant Power Supply Module
RTD Resistance Temperature Device
RTU Remote Terminal Unit
SDB Systems Database
SIFT Software Implemented Fault Tolerance
SOE Sequence of Events
SOF Start of Frame
SRS Single Reference Structure
TMR Triple Modular Redundant
UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter
UDH Unit Data Highway
UTC Coordinated Universal Time
VLAN Virtual Local Area Network
WAN Wide Area Network
1-4 x Chapter 1 Overview GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I

CHAPTER 2
Chapter 2 System Architecture

System Components ................................................................... 2-1
Levels of Redundancy ................................................................ 2-20
Control and Protection Features ................................................. 2-21
Turbine Protection ...................................................................... 2-34
Reliability and Availability ........................................................ 2-36
Third Party Connectivity ............................................................ 2-38
Introduction
This chapter defines the architecture of the Mark VI turbine control system,
including the system components, the three communication networks, and the
various levels of redundancy that are possible. It also discusses system reliability and
availability, and third-party connectivity to plant distributed control systems.
System Components
This section summarizes the main subsystems that make up the Mark VI control
system. These include the controllers, I/O boards, terminal boards, power
distribution, cabinets, networks, operator interfaces, and the protection module.
Control Cabinet
The control cabinet contains either a single (simplex) Mark VI control module or
three TMR control modules. These are linked to their remote I/O by a single or triple
high speed I/O network called IONet, and are linked to the UDH by their controller
Ethernet port. Local or remote I/O is possible. The control cabinet requires 120/240
V ac and/or 125 V dc power. This is converted to 125 V dc to supply the modules.
I/O Cabinet
The I/O cabinet contains either single or triple interface modules. These are linked to
the controllers by IONet, and to the terminal boards by dedicated cables. The
terminal boards are in the I/O cabinet close to the interface modules. Power require-
ments are 120/240 V ac and/or 125 V dc power.
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 2 System Architecture x 2-1
The UDH connects the Mark VI control panels with the HMI or HMI/Data Server.
The network media is UTP or fiber-optic Ethernet. Redundant cable operation is
optional and, if supplied, unit operation continues even if one cable is faulted. Dual
cable networks still comprise one logical network. Similar to the plant data highway
(PDH), the UDH can have redundant, separately powered network switches, and
fiber optic communication.
UDH command data is replicated to all three controllers. This data is read by the
Master communication controller board (VCMI) and transmitted to the other
controllers. Only the UDH communicator transmits UDH data (refer to the section,
UDH Communicator).
Note The UDH network supports the Ethernet Global Data (EGD) protocol for
communication with other Mark VIs, HRSG, Exciter, Static Starter, and Balance of
Plant (BOP) control.
To Optional Customer Network Enterprise Layer
Router
HMI HMI HMI Field
Viewer Viewer Viewer Support
Supervisory Layer
PLANT DATA H IGHWAY
PLANT DATA H IGHWAY
HMI Servers
Control Layer
U NIT D ATA H IGHWAY
U NIT DATA H IGHWAY
Gas Turbine Steam Turbine Generator

Control TMR Control Protection BOP Exciter
Mark VI Mark VI Gen. 90-70 PLC EXCITER
Protect
Mark VI
Mark VI
Genius
IONet IONet
Bus
I/O Boards I/O Boards I/O Boards
Typical Mark VI Integrated Control System
2-2 x Chapter 2 System Architecture GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Human-Machine Interface (HMI)
Typical HMI’s are computers running Windows operating system with
communication drivers for the data highways, and CIMPLICITY operator display
software. The operator initiates commands from the real time graphic displays, and
can view real time turbine data and alarms on the CIMPLICITY graphic displays.
Detailed I/O diagnostics and system configuration are available using the toolbox
software. An HMI can be configured as a server or viewer, and can contain tools and
utility programs.
An HMI may be linked to one data highway, or redundant network interface boards
can be used to link the HMI to both data highways for greater reliability. The HMI
can be cabinet, control console or table-mounted.
Servers
CIMPLICITY servers collect data on the UDH and use the PDH to communicate
with viewers. Multiple servers can be used to provide redundancy.
Note Redundant data servers are optional, and if supplied, communication with the
viewers continues even if one server fails.
Computer Operator Interface (COI)

The Computer Operator Interface (COI) consists of a set of product and application
specific operator displays running on a small cabinet computer (10.4 or 12.1 inch
touch screen) hosting Embedded Windows operating system. The COI is used where
the full capability of a CIMPLICITY HMI is not required. Embedded Windows
operating system uses only the components of the operating system required for a
specific application. This results in all the power and development advantages of a
Windows operating system. Development, installation or modification of requisition
content requires the toolbox. For details, refer to the appropriate toolbox
documentation.
The COI can be installed in many different configurations, depending on the product
line and specific requisition requirements. The only cabling requirements are for
power and for the Ethernet connection to the UDH. Network communication is via
the integrated auto-sensing 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection. Expansion
possibilities for the computer are limited, although it does support connection of
external devices through FDD, IDE, and USB connections.
The COI can be directly connected to the Mark VI or Excitation Control System, or
it can be connected through an EGD Ethernet switch. A redundant topology is
available when the controller is ordered with a second Ethernet port.
Interface Features
EGD pages transmitted by the controller are used to drive numeric data displays. The
refresh rate depends both on the rate at which the controller transmits the pages, and
the rate at which the COI refreshes the fields. Both are set at configuration time in
the toolbox.
The COI uses a touch screen, and no keyboard or mouse is provided. The color of
pushbuttons is driven by state feedback conditions. To change the state or condition,
press the button. The color of the button changes if the command is accepted and the
change implemented by the controller.
Touching an input numeric field on the COI touch screen displays a numeric keypad
and the desired number can be entered.
An Alarm Window is provided and an alarm is selected by touching it. Then Ack,
Silence, Lock, or Unlock the alarm by pressing the corresponding button. Multiple
alarms can be selected by dragging through the alarm list. Pressing the button then
applies to all selected alarms. For complete information, refer to GEI-10043,
Computer Operator Interface (COI) for Mark VI or EX2100 Systems.
Link to Distributed Control System (DCS)

External communication links are available to communicate with the plant
distributed control system. A serial communication link, using Modbus protocol
(RTU binary), can be supplied from an HMI or from a gateway controller. This
allows the DCS operator access to real time Mark VI data, and provides for discrete
and analog commands to be passed to the Mark VI control. In addition, an Ethernet
link from the HMI supports periodic data messages at rates consistent with operator
response, plus sequence of events (SOE) messages with data time tagged at a 1 ms
resolution.

The optional PDH connects the CIMPLICITY HMI/Data Server with remote
operator stations, printers, historians, and other customer computers. It does not
connect with the Mark VI directly. The media is UTP or fiber-optic Ethernet running
at 10/100 Mbps, using the TCP/IP protocol. Redundant cables are required by some
systems, but these form part of one single logical network. The hardware consists of
two redundant Ethernet switches with optional fiber-optic outputs for longer
distances, such as to the central control room. On small systems, the PDH and the
Unit Data Highway (UDH) may physically be the same network, as long as there is
no peer-to-peer control on the UDH.
Operator Console
The turbine control console is a modular design, which can be expanded from two
monitors, with space for one operator, to four monitors, with space for three
operators. Printers can be table-mounted, or on pedestals under the counter. The full
size console is 5507.04 mm (18 ft 0 13/16 in) long, and 2233.6 mm (7 ft 3 15/16 in)
wide. The center section, with space for two monitors and a phone/printer bay, is a
small console 1828.8 mm (6 ft) wide.
Excitation Control System
The excitation control system supplies dc power to the field of the synchronous
generator. The exciter controls the generator ac terminal voltage and/or the reactive
volt-amperes by means of the field current.
The exciter is supplied in NEMA 1 freestanding floor-mounted indoor type metal

cabinets. The cabinet lineup consists of several cabinets bolted together. Cable entry
can be through the top or bottom.
Generator Protection
The generator protection system is mounted in a single, indoor, freestanding cabinet.
The ensclosure is NEMA 1, and weighs 1133 kg (2500 lbs). The generator cabinet
interfacesto the Mark VI with hard-wired I/O, and has an optional Modbus interface
to the HMI.
Static Starter Control System

The static starter control system is used to start a gas turbine by running the
generator as a starting motor. The static starter system is integrated into the control
system along with the excitation control system. The control supplies the run, torque,
and speed setpoint signals to the static starter, which operates in a closed loop control
mode to supply variable frequency power to the generator stator. The excitation
control system is controlled by the static starter to regulate the field current during
startup.
The control cabinet contains an Innovation Series™ controller in a Versa Module

Eurocard (VME) control rack. The controller provides the Ethernet link to the UDH
and the HMI, and communication ports for field control I/O and Modbus. The field
control I/O are used for temperature inputs and diagnostic variables.
The static starter cabinet is a ventilated NEMA 1 free standing enclosure made of 12-
gauge sheet steel on a rigid steel frame designed for indoor mounting.
Control Module
The control module is available as an integrated control and I/O module, or as a
stand-alone control module only. The integrated control and I/O rack can be either a
21-slot or 13-slot VME size. The 13-slot rack can accommodate all the boards for
control of a small turbine. The backplane has P1 and P2 connectors for the VME
boards. The P1 connectors communicate data across the backplane, and the P2
connectors communicate data between the board and 37-pin J3 and J4 connectors
located directly beneath each board. Cables run from the J3 and J4 connectors to the
terminal boards.
There can be one control module (simplex) or three triple modular redundant (TMR)
control modules. Each of these configurations supports remote I/O over IONet. The
simplex control modules can be configured to support up to three independent
parallel IONet systems for higher I/O throughput. Multiple communication boards
may be used in a control module to increase the IONet throughput.
The following figure shows a 21-slot rack with a three-IONet VCMI communication
board, and a UCVx controller. The UCVx must go in slot 2. The remaining slots are
filled with I/O boards.
Controller UCVx Fan I/O Processor

(slot 2) Boards
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
VME Chassis,
21 slots
Power
Supply
UDH
Port
VCMI
Communication
Board, with
One or Three
IONet Ports
Note: This rack is for the UCVx controller, connectors Connectors for Cables to
J302 and J402 are not present. UCVB and UCVD Terminal Boards (J3 & J4)
controllers can be used in this rack.
Control Module with Control, Communication, and I/O Boards
The I/O racks and the I/O processor boards are shielded to control EMI/RFI
emissions. This shielding also protects the processor boards against interference from
external sources.
Do not plug the UCVx controller into any rack that has J302
and J402 connectors.
The stand-along controller module is a VME rack with the UCVx controller board,
VCMI communication board, and VDSK interface board as shown in the following
figure. This version is for remote I/O systems. The rack is powered by an integrated
power supply.
VDSK supplies 24 V dc to the cooling fan mounted under the rack, and monitors the
Power Distribution Module (PDM) through the 37-pin connector on the front. The
VDSK board is ribbon cabled in the back to the VCMI to transmit the PDM
diagnostics.
VCMI Communication Board with Controller Interface Board

Three IONet Ports (VCMI with One UCVx VDSK
IONet is for Simplex systems)
x x x x
VME Rack
POWER
SUPPLY
Power Supply
x x x x
Cooling Fan Fan 24 Vdc

behind Panel Power
Rack with Controller, VCMI, and VDSK (No I/O Boards)
Interface Module
The interface module houses the I/O boards remote from the control module. The
rack, shown in the following figure is similar to the control module VME rack, but
without the controller, interface board VDSK, and cooling fan. Each I/O board
occupies one or two slots in the module and has a backplane connection to a pair of
37-pin D connectors mounted on an apron beneath the VME rack. Cables run from
the 37-pin connectors to the terminal boards. Most I/O boards can be removed, with
power removed, and replaced without disconnecting any signal or power cable.
Communication with the module is via a VCMI communication board with a single
IONet port, located in the left slot. The module backplane contains a plug wired to
slot 1, which is read by the communication board to obtain the identity of the module
on the IONet.
VME Chassis, I/O Processor

21 slots Boards
VCMI
Communication x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Board with one

IONet Port Power
Supply
IONet Link
to Control
Module
Note: Slot 2 cannot be used for an I/O

processor board; it is reserved for a J3 & J4 Connectors for Cables
controller board to Terminal Boards
Interface Module with VCMI and I/O Boards
Controller
The controller is a single-slot VME board, housing a high-speed processor, DRAM,
flash memory, cache, an Ethernet port, and two serial RS-232C ports. It must always
be inserted in slot 2 of an I/O rack designed to accommodate it. These racks can be
identified by the fact that there are no J3 and J4 connectors under slot 2. The
controller provides communication with the UDH through the Ethernet port, and
supports a low-level diagnostic monitor on the COM1 serial port. The base software
includes appropriate portions of the existing Turbine Block Library of control
functions for the steam, gas, and Land-Marine aero-derivative (LM) products. The
controller can run its program at up to 100 Hz, (10 ms frame rate), depending on the
size of the system configuration.
External data is transferred to/from the controller over the VME bus by the VCMI
communication board. In a simplex system, the data consists of the process I/O from
the I/O boards, and in a TMR system, it consists of voted I/O. Refer to GEH-6421,
Volume II.
Typical Mark VI Controller (UCVx)
Status LEDs
STATUS
VMEbus SYSFAIL
Monitor Port for GE use
Flash Activity
S
V
Power Status
G
Keyboard/mouse port A
for GE use
M
/
COM1 RS-232C Port for K
Initial Controller Setup; C
COM2 RS-232C Port for O
M
Serial communication 1:2 Ethernet Status LEDs
L Active
A
N
Ethernet Port for Unit Data Link
RST
Highway Communication
P
C Notice: To connect
M batteries, user to set jumper
I E8 to pins 7-8 ("IN") and
P
jumper E10 to ("IN")
M
E
Z
Z
A
N
I
N
E
UCVE
H2A
x
UCVx Controller Front Cabinet
VCMI Communication Board
The VCMI board in the control and interface module communicates internally to the
I/O boards in its rack, and to the other VCMI cards through the IONet. There are two
versions, one with one Ethernet IONet port for simplex systems, and the other with
three Ethernet ports for TMR systems. Simplex systems have one control module
connected to one or more interface modules using a single cable. The VCMI with
three separate IONet ports is used in TMR systems for communication with the three
I/O channels Rx, Sx, and Tx, and with the two other control modules. This is shown
in the following figure.
Software Implemented Fault Tolerance (SIFT) voting is implemented in the VCMI

board. Input data from each of the IONet connections is voted in each of the R, S,
and T VCMI boards. The results are passed to the control signal database in the
controllers (labeled UCVx in the diagram) through the backplane VME bus.
Control Module R0
VCMI Board
with V U
Three IONet C C I/O
Ports M V Boards
I X
IONet - T to other Control, Interface, & Protection Modules
IONet - S to other Control, Interface, & Protection Modules
IONet - R
Interface Module R1
VCMI Board with V
One IONet Port C I/O
M Boards
I
IONet to other
Interface Modules &
Protection Module
VCMI Boards providing I/O Communication and I/O Voting
In TMR mode, the VCMI voter in the control module is always the Master of the
IONet and also provides the IONet clock. Time synch messages from the time source
on the UDH are sent to the controllers and then to the VCMIs. All input data from a
single rack is sent in one or more IONet packets (approximately 1500 bytes per
packet maximum). The VCMI in the control module broadcasts all data for all
remote racks in one packet, and each VCMI in the remote rack extracts the
appropriate data from the packet.
IONet
The IONet connection on the VCMI is a BNC for 10Base2 Ethernet. The interface
circuit is high impedance allowing “T” tap connections with 50 : terminal at the
first and last node. The cabling distances are restricted to 185 meters per segment
with up to eight nodes, using RG-58C/U or equivalent cable.
The Link Layer protocol is IEEE 802.3 standard Ethernet. The application layer
protocol uses Asynchronous Device Language (ADL) messaging with special
adaptations for the input/output handling and the state exchanges.
The VCMI board acts as IONet Master and polls the remote interface module for
data. The VCMI Master broadcasts a command to all slave stations on a single IONet
causing them to respond with their message in a consecutive manner. To avoid
collisions on the media, each station is told how long to delay before attempting to
transmit. Utilizing this Master/slave mechanism, and running at 10 Mb/s, the IONet
is capable of transmitting a 1000 byte packet every millisecond (8 MHz bit rate).
Note IONet supports control operation at up to 100 times per second.
In a multiple module or multiple cabinet system, powering down one module of a

channel does not disrupt IONet communication between other modules within that
channel. If one IONet stops communicating then the I/O boards, in that channel, time
out and the outputs go to a safe state. This state does not affect TMR system
operation. If two IONets stop then the I/O boards in both channels go to a safe state
which would result in a turbine trip, if the turbine was generating.
I/O Boards
Most I/O boards, are single width VME boards, of similar design and front cabinet,
using the same digital signal processor (TMS320C32).
The central processing unit (CPU) is a high-speed processor designed for digital
filtering and for working with data in IEEE 32-bit floating point format. The task
scheduler operates at a 1 ms and 5 ms rate to support high-speed analog and discrete
inputs. The I/O boards synchronize their input scan to complete a cycle before being
read by the VCMI board. Contact inputs in the VCCC and VCRC are time stamped
to 1 ms to provide a sequence of events (SOE) monitor.
Each I/O board contains the required sensor characteristic library, for example
thermocouple and RTD linearizations. Bad sensor data and alarm signal levels, both
high and low, are detected and alarmed. The I/O configuration in the toolbox can be
downloaded over the network to change the program online. This means that I/O
boards can accept tune-up commands and data while running.
Certain I/O boards, such as the servo and turbine board, contain special control
functions in firmware. This allows loops, such as the valve position control, to run
locally instead of in the controller. Using the I/O boards in this way provides fast
response for a number of time critical functions. Servo loops, can be performed in
the servo board at 200 times per second.
Each I/O board sends an identification message (ID packet) to the VCMI when
requested. The packet contains the hardware catalog number of the I/O board, the
hardware revision, the board barcode serial number, the firmware catalog number,
and the firmware version. Also each I/O board identifies the connected terminal
boards via the ID wire in the 37-pin cable. This allows each connector on each
terminal board to have a separate identity.
I/O Processor Terminal I/O Signal Types No. per I/O Type of Terminal Comments
Board Board Processor Board
Board
VAIC TBAI (2) Analog inputs, 01mA, 20 TMR, simplex
420 mA, voltage 4
Analog outputs, 420 mA,
0200 mA
VAOC TBAO Analog outputs, 420 mA 16 TMR, simplex
VCCC and TBCI (2) Contact inputs 48 TMR, (VCCC is two slots)
VCRC TRLY (2) Relay Outputs (note 1)* 24 simplex
TMR, simplex
VCCC TICI (2) Point Isolated Contact 48 TMR, simplex VCCC-only in place of
inputs TBCI. (optional)
VGEN TGEN Analog inputs, 420 mA 4 TMR, simplex
Potential transformers 2
Current transformers 3
TRLY Relay outputs (optional) 12 for FAS (PLU)
VPRO (3) TPRO Pulse rate 3 TMR Emergency Protect
Potential transformers 2
Thermocouples 3
Analog inputs, 420 mA 3
TREG (2) Solenoid drivers 6 TMR Gas turbine
Trip contact inputs 7
Emergency stop 2 Hardwire,Trip ,Clamp
TREL Solenoid drivers 3 TMR Large steam
TRES Solenoid drivers 3 TMR, simplex Small/medium steam
VPYR TPYR Pyrometers (4 analog 2 TMR, simplex
inputs each)
KeyPhasor shaft position 2
sensors
VRTD TRTD, Resistance Temperature 16 TMR, simplex 3 wire
Devices (RTD)
VSVO TSVO (2) Servo outputs to valve 4 TMR, simplex Trip, Clamp, Input
hydraulic servo
LVDT inputs from valve 12
LVDT excitation 8
Pulse rate inputs for flow 2
monitoring
Pulse rate excitation 2
VTCC TBTC Thermocouples 24 TMR, simplex
VTUR TTUR Pulse rate magnetic 4 TMR, simplex
pickups
Potential transformers, 2
gen. and bus
Shaft current and voltage 2
monitor
Breaker interface 1
TRPG Flame detectors 8 TMR, simplex Gas turbine
(Geiger Mueller)
Solenoid drivers (note 2)* 3
TRPL Solenoid drivers 3 TMR Large steam
Emergency stop 2
TRPS Solenoid drivers 3 TMR, simplex Small/med. steam
Emergency stop 2
VVIB TVIB (2) Shaft vibration probes 16 TMR, simplex Buffered using BNC
(Bently Nevada)
Shaft proximity probes 8
(Displacement)
Shaft proximity reference 2
(KeyPhasor)
*Note 1: Refer to the table in the section Relay Terminal Boards
*Note 2: VTURH2 occupies two slots and supports two TRPG boards, flame
detector support on only the first TRPG.
Terminal Boards
The terminal board provides the customer wiring connection point, and fans out the
signals to three separate 37-pin D connectors for cables to the R, S, and T I/O boards.
Each type of I/O board has its own special terminal board, some with a different
combination of connectors. For example, one version of the thermocouple board
does not fan out and has only two connectors for cabling to one I/O board. The other
version does fan out and has six connectors for R, S, and T. Since the fan out circuit
is a potential single point failure, the terminal board contains a minimum of active
circuitry limited primarily to filters and protective devices. Power for the outputs
usually comes from the I/O board, but for some relay and solenoid outputs, separate
power plugs are mounted on the terminal board.
TBAI Terminal Board

37-pin "D" shell
x x type connectors
x JT1
x
x with latching
x
x x fasteners
x x
x x
x x
Customer Wiring x x
x x
x x
x x JS1 Cable to VME Rack T
x x
x x
x
Shield Bar
x
x x
x x
x
x
x Cable to VME Rack S
x
x x JR1
x
Customer Wiring x
x x
x x
x x
x x
x x
BarrierType Terminal x x
Blocks can be x Cable to VME Rack R
x
unplugged from board
for maintenance
Typical Terminal Board with Cabling to I/O Boards in VME Rack
DIN-rail Mounted Terminal Boards
Smaller DIN-rail mounted terminal boards are available for simplex applications.
These low cost, small size simplex control systems are designed for small gas and
steam turbines. IONet is not used since the D-type terminal boards cable directly into
the control chassis to interface with the I/O boards. The types of DIN-rail boards are
shown in the following table.
DIN–Rail Mounted Terminal Boards
DIN Euro Size Number of Description of I/O Associated I/O
Terminal Board Points Processor Board
DTTC 12 Thermocouple temperature VTCC
inputs with one cold junction
reference
DRTD 8 RTD temperature inputs VRTD
DTAI 10 Analog current or voltage inputs VAIC
with on-board 24 V dc power
supply
2
Analog current outputs, with
choice of 20 mA or 200 mA
DTAO 8 Analog current outputs, 0-20 mA VAOC
DTCI 24 Contact Inputs with external 24 VCRC (or VCCC)
V dc excitation
DRLY 12 Form-C relay outputs, dry VCRC (or VCCC)
contacts, customer powered
DTRT ------- Transition board between VTUR VTUR
and DRLY for solenoid trip
functions
DTUR 4 Magnetic (passive) pulse rate VTUR
pickups for speed and fuel flow
measurement
DSVO 2 Servo-valve outputs with choice VSVO
of coil currents from 10 mA to
120 mA
6
LVDT valve position sensors
with on-board excitation
2 Active pulse rate probes for flow
measurement, with 24 V dc
excitation provided
DVIB 8 Vibration, Position, or Seismic, VVIB
or Accelerometer, or Velomiter
4 Position prox probes
1 KeyPhasor (reference)
DSCB 6 Serial communication ports VSCA

supporting RS-232C, RS-422 &
RS-485.
Relay Terminal Boards
The following table provides a comparison of the features offered by the different
relay terminal boards.
Relay Terminal Boards
Power
Board Relays Feedback Relay type Redundancy Suppression Terminals
Distribution
12 form C relays
soldered
24dc@10A
sealed
DRLYH1A 125dc@0.5A none none none, simplex only No 72 Euro-box
mechanical
120ac@10A
relays
240ac@3A
12 form C relays
soldered
24dc@2A
sealed
DRLYH1B 125dc@0.5A none none none, simplex only No 72 Euro-box
mechanical
120ac@1A
relays
240ac@0.5A
12 form C relays 6 fused socketed
Coil drive = voted
24dc@3A branches, voted sealed
TRLYH1B TMR input or MOV 48 Barrier
125dc@0.6A 1 special coil drive mechanical
simplex input
120/240ac@3A unfused relays
6 fused isolated socketed
12 form C relays Coil drive = voted
branches, contact sealed MOV &
TRLYH1C 125dc@0.6A TMR input or 48 Barrier
1 special voltage mechanical R-C
120/240ac@3A simplex input
unfused feedback relays
6 fused isolated socketed
Coil drive = voted
12 form C relays branches, contact sealed MOV &
TRLYH2C TMR input or 48 Barrier
24dc@3A 1 special voltage mechanical R-C
simplex input
unfused feedback relays
ohm
meter socketed
6 form A relays Coil drive = voted
6 fused (dc sealed
TRLYH1D 24dc@3A TMR input or MOV 24 Barrier
branches solenoid mechanical
125dc@0.6A simplex input
integrity relays
monitor)
isolated
soldered Coil drive = voted
12 form A relays contact
TRLYH1E none solid-state TMR input or No 24 Barrier
120/240ac@6A voltage
relays simplex input
feedback
isolated
24dc@7A voltage
feedback
isolated
125dc@3A voltage
feedback
soldered
none non-
sealed Relay contact 48 Barrier
TRLYH1F 12 form A relays without voted No
mechanical voting, TMR only (24 used)
WPDF coil drive
relays
soldered
With WPDF, non-
sealed Relay contact
TRLYH1F 12 form A relays 12 fused voted No 48 Barrier
mechanical voting, TMR only
outputs coil drive
relays
soldered
none non-
sealed Relay contact 48 Barrier
TRLYH2F 12 form B relays without voted No
mechanical voting, TMR only (24 used)
WPDF coil drive
relays
soldered
With WPDF, non-
sealed Relay contact
TRLYH2F 12 form B relays 12 fused voted No 48 Barrier
mechanical voting, TMR only
outputs coil drive
relays
Trip Terminal Boards
The following table provides a comparison of the features offered by the different
trip terminal boards.
Output Output Input Input

Contacts, Contacts, Contacts Contacts Economy
Board TMR Simplex 125 V dc, 1 A 24 V dc, 3 A ESTOP Dry 125 V dc Dry 125 V dc Resistor
TRPGH1A* Yes No Yes No No No No No
TRPGH1B Yes No Yes Yes No No No No
TRPGH2A* No Yes Yes No No No No No
TRPGH2B No Yes Yes Yes No No No No
TREGH1A* Yes No Yes No Yes Yes No Yes
TREGH1B Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes
TREGH2B Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes
TRPLH1A Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No No
TRELH1A Yes No Yes Yes No Yes No No
TRELH2A Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes No
TRPSH1A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No
TRESH1A Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No No
TRESH2A Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes No
* These boards will become obsolete
Power Sources
A reliable source of power is provided to the rack power supplies from either a
battery, or from multiple power converters, or from a combination of both. The
multiple power sources are connected as high select in the Power Distribution
Module (PDM) to provide the required redundancy.
A balancing resistor network creates a floating dc bus using a single ground

connection. From the 125 V dc, the resistor bridge produces +62.5 V dc (referred to
as P125) and -62.5 V dc (referred to as N125) to supply the system racks and
terminal boards. The PDM has ground fault detection and can tolerate a single
ground fault without losing any performance and without blowing fuses. This fault is
alarmed so it can be repaired.
Turbine Protection Module
The Turbine Protection Module (VPRO) and associated terminal boards (TPRO and
TREG) provide an independent emergency overspeed protection for turbines that do
not have a mechanical overspeed bolt. The protection module is separate from the
turbine control and consists of triple redundant VPRO boards, each with their own
on-board power supply, as shown in the following figure. VPRO controls the trip
solenoids through relay voting circuits on the TREG, TREL, and TRES boards.
VPRO R8 VPRO S8 VPRO T8

x x x x x x x x x x x
x x
I RUN I RUN I RUN

IONet R O FAIL O FAIL O FAIL
IONet S N STAT N STAT N STAT
E 8 X E 8 X E 8 X
IONet T T 4 Y T 4 Y T 4 Y
T 2 Z T 2 Z T 2 Z
R 1 R 1 R 1
C C C
S S S
E E E
Ground R J R J R J
6 J 6 6
J P5 P5 J P5
COM 5 COM COM
5 5
P28A P28A P28A
P28B P28B P28B
E E E
T T T
To TPRO H H H
R R R
J J J J J J
To TPRO x P
4
P P x
3 4 A P
3 A P
3 4 A P
R O R O R O
A W A W A W
F N L E F N L E F N L E
To TREG VPRO R VPRO R VPRO R
x x x x x x x x x x x
To TREG
Power In
125 Vdc
Turbine Protection Module with Cabling Connections
The TPRO terminal board provides independent speed pickups to each VPRO, which
processes them at high speed. This high speed reduces the maximum time delay to
calculate a trip and signal the ETR relay driver to 20 ms. In addition to calculating
speed, VPRO calculates acceleration which is another input to the overspeed logic.
TPRO fans out generator and line voltage inputs to each VPRO where an
independent generator synchronization check is made. Until VPRO closes the K25A
permissive relay on TTUR, generator synchronization cannot occur. For gas turbine
applications, inputs from temperature sensors are brought into the module for
exhaust over temperature protection.
The VPRO boards do not communicate over the VME backplane. Failures on TREG
are detected by VPRO and fed back to the control system over the IONet. Each
VPRO has an IONet communication port equivalent to that of the VCMI.
Operating Systems
All operator stations, communication servers, and engineering workstations use the
Windows operating system. The HMIs and servers run CIMPLICITY software, and
the engineer's workstation runs toolbox software for system configuration.
The I/O system, because of its TMR requirements, uses a proprietary executive
system designed for this special application. This executive is the basis for the
operating system in the VCMI and all of the I/O boards.
The controller uses the QNX operating system from QNX Software Systems Ltd.
This is a real time POSIX-compliant operating system ideally suited to high speed
automation applications such as turbine control and protection
Levels of Redundancy
The need for higher system reliability has led vendors to develop different systems of
increasing redundancy.
Simplex systems are the simplest systems having only one chain, and are therefore
the least expensive. Reliability is average.
TMR systems have a very high reliability, and since the voting software is simple,
the amount of software required is reasonable. Input sensors can be triplicated if
required.
Simplex System Redundancy Reliability

Type (MTBF)
Input Controller Output
Simplex Average
Triple Redundant System

Triple Very
Input Controller (TMR) High
Vote
Input Controller Vote Output
Vote
Input Controller
Single and Triple Redundant Systems
Simplex systems in a typical power plant are used for applications requiring
normal reliability, such as control of auxiliaries and balance of plant (BOP). A single
PLC with local and remote I/O might be used in this application. In a typical Mark
VI, many of the I/O are non-critical and are installed and configured as simplex.
These simplex I/O boards can be mixed with TMR boards in the same interface
module.
Triple Modular Redundant (TMR) control systems, such as Mark VI, are used
for the demanding turbine control and protection application. Here the highest
reliability ensures the minimum plant downtime due to control problems, since the
turbine can continue running even with a failed controller or I/O channel. In a TMR
system, failures are detected and annunciated, and can be repaired online. This
means the turbine protection system can be relied on to be fully operational, if a
turbine problem occurs.
Control and Protection Features
This section describes the fault tolerant features of the TMR part of the control
system. The control system can operate in two different configurations:
x Simplex configuration is for non-redundant applications where system operation

after a single failure is not a requirement.
x TMR configuration is for applications where the probability of a single failure
causing a process shutdown has to be taken to an extremely low value.
Triple Modular Redundancy

A TMR system is a special case of N-modular redundancy where N=3. It is based on
redundant modules with input and output voting.
Input signal voting is performed by software using an approach known as Software

Implemented Fault Tolerance (SIFT). Output voting is performed by hardware
circuits that are an integral part of the output terminal boards.
The voting of inputs and outputs provides a high degree of fault masking. When
three signals are voted, the failure of any one signal is masked by the other two good
signals. This is because the voting process selects the median of the three analog
inputs. In the case of discrete inputs, the voting selects the two that agree. In fact, the
fault masking in a TMR system hides the fault so well that special fault detection
functions are included as part of the voting software. Before voting, all input values
are compared to detect any large differences. This value comparison generates a
system diagnostic alarm.
In addition to fault masking, there are many other features designed to prevent fault
propagation or to provide fault isolation. A distributed architecture with dc isolation
provides a high degree of hardware isolation. Restrictions on memory access using
dual-port memories prevent accidental data destruction by adjacent processors.
Isolated power sources prevent a domino effect if a faulty module overloads its
power supply.
TMR Architecture
The TMR control architecture has three duplicate hardware controller modules
labeled R, S, and T. A high-speed network connects each control module with its
associated set of I/O modules, resulting in three independent I/O networks. Each
network is also extended to connect to separate ports on each of the other controllers.
Each of the three controllers has a VCMI communication board with three
independent I/O communication ports to allow each controller to receive data from
all of the I/O modules on all three I/O networks. The three protection modules are
also on the I/O networks.
Control Module R0 Control Module S0 Control Module T0

VCMI Board TMR System with
with Three V U V U V U Local & Remote I/O,
IONet Ports C C I/O C C I/O C C I/O Terminal Boards not
M V Boards M V Boards M V Boards shown
I X I X I X
IONet - R
IONet - S
IONet - T
Interface Module R1 Interface Module S1 Interface Module T1

VCMI Board
with One V V V
IONet Port C I/O C I/O C I/O IONet Supports
M Boards M Boards M Boards Multiple Remote
I I I I/O Racks
VPRO VPRO VPRO Protection

R8 S8 T8 Module
TMR Architecture with Local & Remote I/O, and Protection Module
Each of the three controllers is loaded with the same software image, so that there
are three copies of the control program running in parallel. External computers,
such as the HMI operator stations, acquire data from only the designated controller.
The designated controller is determined by a simple algorithm.
A separate protection module provides for very reliable trip operation. The VPRO
is an independent TMR subsystem complete with its own controllers and integral
power supplies. Separate independent sensor inputs and voted trip relay outputs are
used
Redundant
Unit Data
Highway Control Cabinet Termination Cabinet
Power
1 Serial <R x > Interface Module Supply
Terminal
V
I I I DC
Boards
Power DC C
V C I I I /
Supply / M U
C
V
D IONET M / / / 21 SLOT / / /
DC
<R> I O O O VME RACK O O O DC
I V S H
H X K Ethernet 1
2
10Base2
<R> Control Module Thin
Coax
Power
1 Serial <S x > Interface Module Supply
V DC
Power DC V U V C I I I I I I
/
Supply / C D IONET M / / / 21 SLOT / / /
DC M C I O O O VME RACK O OO
DC
I V S <S>
H X K H
2 Ethernet 1
10Base2
<S> Control Module
Thin
Coax
Power
1 Serial <T x > Interface Module Supply
V DC
Power DC V U V C I I I I I I
/
Supply / C
M C D IONET M / / / 21 SLOT / / /
DC
DC I O O O VME RACK O O O
I V S <T> H
H X K Ethernet 1
2 10Base2
<T> Control Module Thin
Coax
Input
+125Vdc
Power <R> Internal
Power Protection V V V
Converter <S> Buss Modules P P P
Input to R R R
Input T
Power <T> Power IONET Power O O O
Supplies Interface <R8> <S8><T8> R
Converter Converter
to I
Input other I/O <R> P
Input
Power Cabinet Power <S>
Lineups +125Vdc
Converter Converter <T> Internal Power
(Optional)
Busses to
Input <R8> Power Supplies &
Power <S8> Terminal Boards
Converter <T8>
To
Input Contact Input Excitatn. Terminal
Power Solenoid Power
Cond. Boards
Customer
Customer Supplied Sensor Cables
Power Input(s)
Typical Cabinet Layout of Mark VI TMR System
TMR Operation
Voting systems require that the input data be voted, and the voted result be available
for use on the next calculation pass. The sequential operations for each pass are
input, vote, calculate, and output. The time interval that is allotted to these operations
is referred to as the frame. The frame is set to a fixed value for a given application so
that the control program operates at a uniform rate.
For SIFT systems, a significant portion of the fault tolerance is implemented in

software. The advantage to this approach is software does not degrade over time. The
SIFT design requires little more than three identical controllers with some provision
of transferring data between them. All of the data exchange, voting, and output
selection may be performed by software. The exception to the all software approach
is the modification to the hardware output circuitry for hardware voting.
With each controller using the same software, the mode control software in each
controller is synchronizing with, and responding to, an identical copy of itself that is
operating in each of the other controllers. The three programs acting together are
referred to as the distributed executive and coordinate all operations of the controllers
including the sequential operations mentioned above.
There are several different synchronization requirements. Frame synchronization

enables all controllers and associated I/O modules to process the data at the same
time for a given frame. The frame synchronization error is determined at the start of
frame (SOF) and the controllers are required to adjust their internal timing so that all
three controllers reach SOF of the same frame at the same time.
The acceptable error in time of SOF is typically several microseconds in the 10 to 25

Hz control systems that are encountered. Large errors in SOF timing will affect
overall response time of the control since the voter will cause a delay until at least
two controllers have computed the new values. The constraining requirement for
synchronization comes from the need to measure contact SOE times with an
accuracy of 1 ms.
Designated Controller
Although three controllers R, S, and T contain identical hardware and software, some
of the functions performed are individually unique. A single designated controller is
automatically chosen to perform the following functions:
x Supply initialization data to the other two controllers at boot-up

x Keep the Master time clock
x Calculate the control state data for the cabinet if one of the other controllers
fails.
The VCMIs determine the designated controller through a process of nomination and
voting based upon local visibility of the IONet and whether a designated controller
currently exists. If all controllers are equal, a priority scheme is used favoring first
R, then S, and then T. If a controller, which was designated, is powered down and
repowered, the designated controller will move and not come back if all controllers
are equal. This ensures that a toggling designated controller is not automatically
reselected.
UDH Communicator
Controller communications takes place across the Unit Data Highway (UDH). A
UDH communicator is a controller selected to provide the cabinet data to that
network. This data includes both control signals (EGD) and alarms. Each controller
has an independent, physical connection to the UDH. In the event that the UDH
fractures and a controller becomes isolated from its companion controllers, it
assumes the role of UDH communicator for that network fragment. While for one
cabinet there can be only one designated controller, there may be multiple UDH
communicators. The designated controller is always a UDH communicator.
Fault Tolerant EGD
When a controller does not receive expected external EGD data from its UDH
connection, (for example, due to a severed network) it will request that the data be
forwarded across the IONet from another UDH communicator. One or more
communicators may supply the data and the requesting controller uses the last data
set received. Only the EGD data used in sequencing by the controllers is forwarded
in this manner.
Output Processing
The system outputs are the portions of the calculated data that have to be transferred
to the external hardware interfaces and then to the various actuators controlling the
process. Most of the outputs from the TMR system are voted in the output hardware,
but the system can also output individual signals in a simplex manner. Output voting
is performed as close to the final control element as possible.
Normally, outputs from the TMR system are calculated independently by the three
voting controllers and each controller sends the output to its associated I/O hardware
(for example, R controller sends to R I/O). The three independent outputs are then
combined into a single output by a voting mechanism. Different signal types require
different methods of establishing the voted value.
The signal outputs from the three controllers fall into three groups:
x Signals exist in only one I/O channel and are driven as single ended non-
redundant outputs
x Signals exist in all three controllers and are sent as output separately to an
external voting mechanism
x Signals exist in all three controllers but are merged into a signal by the output
hardware
For normal relay outputs, the three signals feed a voting relay driver, which operates
a single relay per signal. For more critical protective signals, the three signals drive
three independent relays with the relay contacts connected in the typical six-contact
voting configuration. The following figure shows two types of output boards.
Terminal Board, Relay Outputs

I/O Board
Channel R Voted Relay
Driver
Coil
I/O Board
V
Channel S
Relay Output
I/O Board
Channel T
Terminal Board, High Reliability Relay Outputs
I/O Board KR KS
Channel R Relay KR
Coil
Driver
KS KS KT Relay Output
I/O Board Relay
Coil
Channel S Driver
KT KT KR
Relay
I/O Board Coil
Driver
Channel T
Relay Output Circuits for Protection
For servo outputs as shown in the following figure, the three independent current
signals drive a three-coil servo actuator, which adds them by magnetic flux
summation. Failure of a servo driver is sensed and a deactivating relay contact is
opened.
I/O Boards
Servo Driver Output
Terminal Coils
Channel R
D/A Board on Servo
Valve
Servo Driver
Channel S
D/A
Servo Driver
Channel T
D/A
Hydraulic
Servo
Valve
TMR Circuit to Combine Three Analog Currents into a Single Output
The following figure shows 4-20 mA signals combined through a 2/3 current sharing
circuit that allows the three signals to be voted to one. This unique circuit ensures
that the total output current is the voted value of the three currents. Failure of a 4-20
mA output is sensed and a deactivating relay contact is opened.
I/O Boards
4-20 mA Driver Output Current
Channel R Terminal Feedback
D/A Board
Output
4-20 mA Driver
Load
Channel S
D/A
4-20 mA Driver
Channel T
D/A
TMR Circuits for Voted 4-20 mA Outputs
Input Processing
All inputs are available to all three controllers but there are several ways that the
input data is handled. For those input signals that exist in only one I/O module, the
value is used by all three controllers as common input without SIFT-voting as shown
in the following figure. Signals that appear in all three I/O channels may be
application-voted to create a single input value. The triple inputs either may come
from three independent sensors or may be created from a single sensor by hardware
fanning at the terminal board.
A single input can be brought to the three controllers without any voting as shown in
the following figure. This arrangement is used for non-critical, generic I/O, such as
monitoring 4-20 mA inputs, contacts, thermocouples, and RTDs.
I/O Rack Control Rack

Field Wiring Termin. Bd. I/O Board VCMI IONet VCMI Controller
Sensor Direct Signal Exchange No Control System

Input Condition Vote Data Base
Alarm Limit
A SC R
Single Input to Three Controllers, Not Voted
One sensor can be fanned to three I/O boards for medium-integrity applications as
shown in the following figure. This configuration is used for sensors with medium-
to-high reliability. Three such circuits are needed for three sensors. Typical inputs
are 4-20 mA inputs, contacts, thermocouples, and RTDs.

Sensors Fanned Signal Prevote Exchange Voter Control

Input Condition System Data
Base
SC R Voted (A)
A
R Voter
SC S Voted (A)
S Voter
SC T Voted (A)
T Voter
One Sensor with Fanned Input & Software Voting
Three independent sensors can be brought into the controllers without voting to
provide the individual sensor values to the application. Median values can be
selected in the controller if required. This configuration, shown in the following
figure, is used for special applications only.

Sensors Common Signal No Median Control System

Input Condition Vote Select Data Base
Alarm Limit Block
Median (A,B,C)
SC A
MSB
A B A
R R B
C
C
SC A Median (A,B,C)
B B MSB A
S C S B
C
A Median (A,B,C)
SC MSB
C B A
T C T B
C
Three Independent Sensors with Common Input, Not Voted
The following figure shows three sensors, each one fanned and then SIFT-voted.
This arrangement provides a high reliability system for current and contact inputs,
and temperature sensors.
I/O Rack Controller Rack
Sensors Fanned Signal Prevote Exchange Voter Control System

Input Condition Data Base
Alarm Limit
SC R Voted "A"
A Control
R Voter Voted "B" Block
Voted "C"
B SC S Voted "A"
Control
Same S Voter Voted "B"
Block
Voted "C"
SC T Voted "A"
C Control
Same T Voter Voted "B"
Block
Voted "C"
Three Sensors, Each One Fanned and Voted, for Medium to High Reliability Applications
Speed inputs to high reliability applications are brought in as dedicated inputs and
then SIFT-voted. The following figure shows the configuration. Inputs such as speed
control and overspeed are not fanned so there is a complete separation of inputs with
no hardware cross-coupling which could propagate a failure. RTDs, thermocouples,
contact inputs, and 4-20 mA signals can also be configured this way.
Sensors Dedicated Signal Prevote Exchange Voter Control System

Input Condition Data Base
Alarm Limit
SC R Voted (A,B,C)
A
R Voter
B SC S Voted (A,B,C)
S Voter
SC T Voted (A,B,C)
C
T Voter
Three Sensors with Dedicated Inputs, Software Voted for High Reliability Applications
State Exchange
Voting all of the calculated values in the TMR system is unnecessary and not
practical. The actual requirement is to vote the state of the controller database
between calculation frames. Calculated values such as timers, counters, and
integrators are dependent on the value from the previous calculation frame. Logic
signals such as bistable relays, momentary logic with seal-in, cross-linked relay
circuits, and feedbacks have a memory retention characteristic. A small section of the
database values is voted each frame.
Median Value Analog Voting
The analog signals are converted to floating point format by the I/O interface boards.
The voting operation occurs in each of the three controller modules (R, S, and T).
Each module receives a copy of the data from the other two channels. For each voted
data point, the module has three values including its own. The median value voter
selects the middle value of the three as the voter output. This is the most likely of the
three values to be closest to the true value. In the following figure shows some
examples.
The disagreement detector (see the section, Disagreement Detector) checks the
signal deviations and sets a diagnostic if they exceed a preconfigured limit, thereby
identifying failed input sensors or channels.
Median Value Voting Examples
Sensor Median Sensor Median Sensor Median

Sensor Inputs Input Selected Input Selected Input Selected
Value Value Value Value Value Value
Sensor
981 910 1020
1
Sensor 985 981 985 978 985 985

2
Sensor 978 978 978

3
Configured TMR No TMR TMR Diagnostic TMR Diagnostic

Deviation = 30 Diagnostic on Input 1 on Input 1
Median Value Voting Examples with Normal and Bad Inputs
Two Out of Three Logic Voter

Each of the controllers has three copies of the data as described above for the analog
voter. The logical values are stored in the controller database in a format that
requires a byte per logical value. Voting is a simple logic process, which inputs the
three values and finds the two values that agree.
The logical data has an auxiliary function called forcing which allows the operator to
force the logical state to be either true or false and have it remain in that state until
unforced. The logical data is packed in the input tables and the state exchange tables
to reduce the bandwidth requirements. The input cycle involves receive, vote,
unpack, and transfer to the controller database. The transfer to the database must
leave the forced values as they are.
Disagreement Detector
A disagreement detector is provided to continuously scan the prevote input data sets
and produce an alarm bit if a disagreement is detected between the three values in a
voted data set. The comparisons are made between the voted value and each of the
three prevote values. The delta for each value is compared with a user programmable
limit value. The limit can be set as required to avoid nuisance alarms but give
indication that one of the prevote values has moved out of normal range. Each
controller is required to compare only its prevote value with the voted value, for
example, R compares only the R prevote value with the voted value.
Failure of one of the three voted input circuits has no effect on the controlled process
since the fault is masked by SIFT. Without a disagreement detector, a failure could
go unnoticed until occurrence of a second failure.
Peer I/O
In addition to the data from the I/O modules, there is a class of data that comes from
other controllers in other cabinets that are connected through a common data
network. For the Mark VI controller the common network is the UDH. For integrated
systems, this common network provides a data path between multiple turbine
controllers and possibly the controls for the generator, the exciter, or the
HRSG/boiler.
Selected signals from the controller database may be mapped into a page of peer
outputs that are broadcast periodically on the UDH to provide external panels a
status update. For the TMR system this action is performed by the UDH
communicator using the data from its internal voted database.
Reception of peer data is handled independently by each controller.
Command Action
Commands sent to the TMR control require special processing to ensure that the
three voting controllers perform the requested action at the same time. Typically, the
commanding device is a PC connected to the UDH and sending messages over a
single network so there is no opportunity to vote the commands in each controller.
Moreover, commands may be sent from one of several redundant computers at the
operator position(s).
When any TMR controller receives a command message, it synchronizes the

corresponding response of all three controllers by retransmitting the command to its
companions across the IONet and queuing it for action at the start of the next frame.
By default the HMIs are predisposed to send all commands to the UDH
communicator.
Rate of Response
The control system can run selected control programs at the rate of 100 times per
second, (10 ms frame rate) for simplex systems and 50 times per second (20 ms
frame rate) for TMR systems.
Failure Handling
The general operating principle on failures is that corrective or default action takes
place in both directions away from the fault. This means that, in the control hierarchy
extending from the terminal mounts through I/O boards, backplanes, networks and
main CPUs, when a fault occurs, there is a reaction at the I/O processor and also at
the main controller if still operating. When faults are detected, health bits are reset in
a hierarchical fashion. If a signal goes bad, the health bit is set false at the control
module level. If a board goes bad, all signals associated with that board, whether
input or output, have the health bits set false. A similar situation exists for the I/O
rack. In addition, there are preconfigured default failure values defined for all input
and output signals so that normal application code may cope with failures without
excessive healthy bit referencing. Healthy bits in TMR systems are voted if the
corresponding signal is TMR.
Loss of Control Module in Simplex System - If a control module fails in a

simplex system, the output boards go to the configured default output state after a
timeout. The loss of the controller board propagates down through the IONet so that
the output board knows what to do. This is accomplished by shutting down the
IONet.
Loss of Control Module in TMR System - If a control module fails in a TMR

system, the TMR outputs and simplex outputs on that channel timeout to the
configured default output state. TMR control continues using the other two control
modules.
Loss of I/O VCMI in TMR System - If the VCMI in an interface module in a

TMR system fails, the outputs timeout to the configured default output state. The
inputs are set to the configured default state so that resultant outputs, such as UDH,
may be set correctly. Inputs and output healthy bits are reset. A failure of the VCMI
in Rack 0 is viewed as equivalent to a failure of the control module itself.
Loss of I/O VCMI in Simplex System - If the VCMI in an interface module in a

simplex system fails, the outputs and inputs are handled the same as a TMR system.
Loss of I/O Board in Simplex System - If an I/O board in a simplex system

fails, hardware on the outputs from the I/O boards set the outputs to a low power
default value given typical applications. Input boards have the input values set to the
preconfigured default value in the Master VCMI board.
Loss of Simplex I/O Board in TMR System - If the failed simplex I/O board is
in a TMR system, the inputs and outputs are handled as described herein if they were
in a simplex system.
Loss of TMR I/O Board in TMR System - If a TMR I/O board fails in a TMR
system, inputs and outputs are handled. TMR SIFT and hardware output voting keep
the process running.
Loss of IONet in Simplex System - If the IONet fails in a simplex system, the
output boards in the I/O racks timeout and set the preconfigured default output
values. The Master VCMI board defaults the inputs so that UDH outputs can be
correctly set.
Loss of IONet in TMR System - If the IONet fails in a simplex system, outputs
follow the same sequence as for a Loss of Control Module in simplex. Inputs follow
the same sequence as for Loss of I/O VCMI in TMR.
Turbine Protection
Turbine overspeed protection is available in three levels, control, primary, and
emergency. Control protection comes through closed loop speed control using the
fuel/steam valves. Primary overspeed protection is provided by the controller. The
TTUR terminal board and VTUR I/O board bring in a shaft speed signal to each
controller where they are median selected. If the controller determines a trip
condition, the controller sends the trip signal to the TRPG terminal board through the
VTUR I/O board. The three VTUR outputs are 2/3 voted in three-relay voting
circuits (one for each trip solenoid) and power is removed from the solenoids. The
following figure shows the primary and emergency levels of protection.
Software
Voting
High Speed Shaft R TTUR Controller R TRPG

& Terminal
Terminal VTUR
Board
Board
High Speed Shaft S
Controller S Primary
& Hardware Protection
VTUR Voting
High Speed Shaft T (Relays)
Controller T
&
VTUR
Magnetic
Speed
Pickups
Trip
(3 used)
Solenoids
(Up to three)
High Speed Shaft R8 TPRO

VPRO TREG
Terminal R8 Terminal
Board Board
High Speed Shaft S8
VPRO
Hardware Emergency
S8
Voting Protection
High Speed Shaft T8
(Relays)
VPRO
T8
Magnetic
Speed Trip Signal
Pickups to Servo
(3 used) Terminal
Board
TSVO
Primary and Emergency Overspeed Protection
Emergency overspeed protection is provided by the independent triple redundant
VPRO protection system. This uses three shaft speed signals from magnetic pickups,
one for each protection module. These are brought into TPRO, a terminal board
dedicated to the protection system. Either the controllers or the protection system can
independently trip the turbine. Each VPRO independently determines when to trip,
and the signals are passed to the TREG terminal board. TREG operates in a similar
way to TRPG, voting the three trip signals in relay circuits and removing power from
the trip solenoids. This system contains no software voting, making the three VPRO
modules completely independent. The only link between VPRO and the other parts
of the control system is the IONet cable, which transmits status information.
Additional protection for simplex systems is provided by the protection module

through the Servo Terminal Board, TSVO. Plug J1 on TREG is wired to plug JD1 on
TSVO, and if this is energized, relay K1 disconnects the servo output current and
applies a bias to force the control valve closed.
Reliability and Availability
System reliability and availability can be calculated using the component failure
rates. These numbers are important for deciding when to use simplex circuits versus
TMR circuits. TMR systems have the advantage of online repair discussed in the
section, Online Repair for TMR Systems.
Online Repair for TMR Systems

The high availability of the TMR system is a result of being able to do repair online.
It is possible to shut down single modules for repair and leave the voting trio in full
voting mode operation, which effectively masks the absence of the signals from the
powered down module. However, there are some restrictions and special cases that
require extra attention.
Many signals are reduced to a single customer wire at the terminal boards so removal
of the terminal board requires that the wires be disconnected momentarily. Each type
of terminal board must be evaluated for the application and the signal type involved.
Voltages in excess of 50 V are present in some customer wiring. Terminal boards
that have only signals from one controller channel may be replaced at any time if the
faulty signals are being masked by the voter. For other terminal boards such as the
relay outputs, the individual relays may be replaced without disconnecting the
terminal board.
For those singular signals that are driven from only one I/O board, there is no
redundancy or masking. These are typically used for non-critical functions such as
pump drives, where loss of the control output simply causes the pump to run
continuously. Application designers must avoid using such singular signals in critical
circuits. The TMR system is designed such that any of the three controllers may send
outputs to the singular signals, keeping the function operational even if the normal
sending controller fails.
Note Before performing an online repair, power down only the module (rack) that
has the fault. Failure to observe this rule may cause an unexpected shutdown of the
process (each module has its own power disconnect or switch). The modules are
labeled such that the diagnostic messages identify the faulty module.
Repair the faulty modules as soon as possible. Although the TMR system will
survive certain multiple faults without a forced outage, a lurking fault problem may
exist after the first unrepaired failure occurs. Multiple faults within the same module
cause no concern for online repair since all faults will be masked by the other voters.
However, once a second unrelated fault occurs in the same module set, then either of
the faulty modules of the set that is powered down will introduce a dual fault in the
same three signal set which may cause a process shutdown.
Reliability
Reliability is represented by the Mean Time Between Forced Outage (MTBFO) of
the control system. The MTBFO is a function of which boards are being used to
control and protect the turbine. The complete system MTBFO depends on the size of
the system, number of simplex boards, and the amount of sensor triplication.
In a simplex system, failure of the controller or I/O communication may cause a

forced outage. Failure of a critical I/O module will cause a forced outage, but there
are non-critical I/O modules, which can fail and be changed out without a shutdown.
The MTBFO is calculated using published failure rates for components.
Availability is the percentage of time the system is operating, taking into account the
time to repair a failure. Availability is calculated as follows:
MTBFO x 100%
-----------------------
MTBFO + MTTR
where:
MTTR is the Mean Time To Repair the system failure causing the forced outage.
With a TMR system there can be failures without a forced outage because the system
can be repaired while it continues to run. The MTBFO calculation is complex since
essentially it is calculating the probability of a second (critical) failure in another
channel during the time the first failure is being repaired. The time to repair is an
important input to the calculation.
The availability of a well-designed TMR system with timely online repair is

effectively 100%. Possible forced outages may still occur if a second failure of a
critical circuit comes before the repair can be completed. Other possible forced
outages may occur if the repairman erroneously powers down the wrong module.
Note To avoid possible forced outages from powering down the wrong module,
check the diagnostics for identification of the modules which contain the failure.
System reliability has been determined by calculating the Failures In Time (FIT)
(failures per 109 hours) based on the Bellcore TR-332 Reliability Prediction
Procedure for Electronic Equipment. The Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF) can
be calculated from the FIT.
Third Party Connectivity
The Mark VI can be linked to the plant Distributed Control System (DCS) in three
different ways as follows.
x Modbus link from the HMI Server RS-232C port to the DCS
x A high speed 10 Mbaud Ethernet link using the Modbus over TCP/IP protocol
x A high speed 10 Mbaud Ethernet link using the TCP/IP protocol with an
application layer called GEDS Standard Messages (GSM)
The Mark VI can be operated from the plant control room.
GSM supports turbine control commands, Mark VI data and alarms, the alarm
silence function, logical events, and contact input sequence of events records with 1
ms resolution. The following figure shows the three options. Modbus is widely used
to link to DCSs, but Ethernet GSM has the advantage of speed, distance, and
functionality.
To DCS To DCS To DCS

Serial Modbus Ethernet Modbus Ethernet GSM
UCVx
Controller
x
PLANT DATA HIGHWAY
HMI Server Node

L
A
N
To Plant Data
Highway (PDH)
Ethernet Ethernet
UCVE
x
Ethernet
UNIT DATA HIGHWAY
Optional Communication Links to Third-Party Distributed Control System
CHAPTER 3
Chapter 3 Networks
Network Overview ..................................................................... 3-1
Data Highways ........................................................................... 3-4
IONet.......................................................................................... 3-9
Ethernet Global Data (EGD) ...................................................... 3-12
Modbus Communications........................................................... 3-14
Ethernet Modbus Slave............................................................... 3-15
Serial Modbus Slave................................................................... 3-17
Ethernet GSM............................................................................. 3-22
PROFIBUS Communications..................................................... 3-24
Fiber-Optic Cables...................................................................... 3-27
Time Synchronization ................................................................ 3-32
Introduction
This chapter defines the various communication networks in the control system.
These networks provide communication with the operator interfaces, servers,
controllers, and I/O. It also provides information on fiber-optic cables, including
components and guidelines.
Network Overview
The Mark VI system is based on a hierarchy of networks used to interconnect the
individual nodes. These networks separate the different communication traffic into
layers according to their individual functions. This hierarchy extends from the I/O
and controllers, which provide real-time control of the turbine and its associated
equipment, through the operator interface systems, and up to facility wide
monitoring or distributed control systems (DCS). Each layer uses standard
components and protocols to simplify integration between different platforms and
improve overall reliability and maintenance. The layers are designated as the
Enterprise, Supervisory, Control, and I/O.
Note Ethernet is used for all Mark VI data highways and the I/O network.
Enterprise Layer
The Enterprise layer serves as an interface from specific process control into a
facility wide or group control layer. These higher layers are provided by the
customer. The network technology used in this layer is generally determined by the
customer and may include either Local Area Network (LAN) or Wide Area Network
(WAN) technologies, depending on the size of the facility. The Enterprise layer is
generally separated from other control layers through a router, which isolates the
traffic on both sides of the interface. Where unit control equipment is required to
communicate with a facility wide or DCS system, GE uses either a Modbus interface
or a TCP/IP protocol known as GE Standard Messaging (GSM).
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 3 Networks x 3-1

Supervisory Layer
The Supervisory layer provides operator interface capabilities such as to coordinate
HMI viewer and server nodes, and other functions like data collection (Historian),
remote monitoring, and vibration analysis.
This layer may be used as a single or dual network configuration. A dual network
provides redundant Ethernet switches and cables to prevent complete network failure
if a single component fails. The network is known as the Plant Data Highway (PDH).
To Optional Customer Network Enterprise Layer
Router
HMI HMI HMI Field
Viewer Viewer Viewer Support
Supervisory Layer
PLANT DATA H IGHWAY
P LANT DATA H IGHWAY
HMI Servers
Control Layer
U NIT D ATA H IGHWAY
U NIT DATA H IGHWAY
Gas Turbine Steam Turbine Generator

Control TMR Control Protection BOP Exciter
Mark VI Mark VI Gen. 90-70 PLC EXCITER
Protect
Mark VI
Mark VI
Genius
IONet IONet
Bus
I/O Boards I/O Boards I/O Boards
Mark VI Control as Part of Integrated Control System
3-2 x Chapter 3 Networks GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I

Control Layer
The control layer provides continuous operation of the process equipment. The
controllers on this layer are highly coordinated to support continuous operation
without interruption. The controllers operate at a fundamental rate called the frame
rate, which can be between 6-100 Hz. These controllers use Ethernet Global Data
(EGD) to exchange data between nodes. Various levels of redundancy for the
connected equipment are supported by the supervisory and control layers.
Printer
Printer
Type 1 Redundancy Non-critical nodes

such as printers can be connected without
using additional communication devices.
Network Switch B
Network Switch A
Type 2 Redundancy Nodes that are only

available in Simplex configuration
Redundant can be connected with a redundant
Switch switch. The switch automatically senses a
failed network component and fails-over to
Network Switch B a secondary link.
Network Switch A
Controller Controller
Network Switch B
Network Switch A Type 3 Redundancy Nodes such as

dual or TMR controllers are tightly
Dual
coupled so that each node can send the
same information. By connecting each
controller to alternate networks, data is still
<R> <S> <T> available if a controller or network fails.
Network Switch B
Network Switch A
TMR
Type 4 Redundancy This type provides

redundant controllers and redundant network
links for reliability. This is useful if
the active controller network interface cannot
Network Switch B sense a failed network condition.
Network Switch A
Redundant Networks for Different Applications

Data Highways
The PDH is the plant level supervisory network. The PDH connects the HMI Server
with remote viewers, printers, historians, and external interfaces. There is no direct
connection to the Mark VI controllers, which communicate over the UDH. Use of
Ethernet with the TCP/IP protocol over the PDH provides an open system for third-
party interfaces. The following figure shows the equipment connections to the PDH.
Fiber-optic cable provides the best signal quality, completely free of electromagnetic
interference (EMI) and radio frequency interference (RFI). Large point-to-point
distances are possible, and since the cable does not carry electrical charges, ground
potential problems are eliminated.
GT #1 PEECC GT #2 PEECC GT #3 PEECC

220VAC
UPS ENET 0/1 ENET 0/0 CONSOLE AUX
SW1 SW5 SW9

PDH
PDH
PDH
UDH
UDH
UDH
ADH
ADH
ADH
TRUNK
TRUNK
TRUNK
CROSSOVER UTP
CROSSOVER UTP
CROSSOVER UTP
220VAC 220VAC 220VAC
UPS UPS UPS
SW2 SW6 SW10

PDH
PDH
PDH
UDH
UDH
UDH
ADH
ADH
ADH
TRUNK
TRUNK
TRUNK
21
A B A B A A B A B A B A B
NIC1 NIC2 NIC1 NIC1 NIC2 NIC1 NIC2
M M M M M
M
GT1_SVR uOSM GT2_SVR GT3_SVR

PC Desk SEE NOTE 6 PC Desk PC Desk
18in. Desktop LCD(dual) PEECC Rack - uOSM 18in. Desktop LCD(dual) 18in. Desktop LCD(dual)
Mouse Mouse Mouse
UPS BY GE
220VAC 220VAC 220VAC 220VAC

UPS UPS UPS
Customer Control Room

SW14
SW16
SW13
SW15
220VAC
220VAC
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
UPS
UPS
PDH UDH ADH TRUNK PDH UDH ADH TRUNK
PDH UDH PDH UDH
GSM 1 GSM 2
GSM 2
GSM 3 GSM 3
4
GSM 1
A B A B A B A B A B A B
NIC1 NIC2 NIC1 NIC2 NIC1 NIC2
M M M M M M
CRM1_SVR CRM2_SVR CRM3_SVR

18in. Desktop LCD(dual) 18in. Desktop LCD(dual) 18in. Desktop LCD(dual)
Mouse Mouse Mouse

UPS UPS UPS
Typical Plant Data Highway Layout Drawing

PDH Network Features
Feature Description
Type of Network Ethernet CSMA/CD in a single or redundant star configuration
Speed 100 Mb/s, Full Duplex
Media and Distance Ethernet 100BaseTX for switch to controller/device connections. The cable is
22 to 26 AWG with unshielded twisted-pair, category 5e EIA/TIA 568 A/B.
Distance is up to 100 meters. Ethernet 100BaseFX with fiber-optic cable for
distances up to 2 km (1.24 miles).
Number of Nodes Up to 1024 nodes supported
Protocols Ethernet compatible protocol, typically TCP/IP based. Use GE Standard
Messaging (GSM) or Modbus over Ethernet for external communications.
Message Integrity 32-bit Cyclic Redundancy Code (CRC) appended to each Ethernet packet plus
additional checks in protocol used.
External Interfaces Various third-party interfaces are available, GSM and Modbus are the most
common.

The UDH is an Ethernet-based network that provides direct or broadcast peer-to-peer
communications between controllers and an operator/maintenance interface. It uses
Ethernet Global Data (EGD) which is a message-based protocol for sharing
information with multiple nodes based on UDP/IP. UDH network hardware is
similar to the PDH hardware. The following figure shows redundant UDH networks
with connections to the controllers and HMI servers.
GT #1 PEECC GT #1 - A192 GT #2 PEECC GT #2 - A192 GT #3 PEECC GT #3 - A192

Mark VI LCI Mark VI LCI Mark VI LCI
EX2100 EX2100 EX2100
T S R SW3 TRANSCEIVER T S R SW7 TRANSCEIVER T S R SW11 TRANSCEIVER
SW1 M1 M2 A B SW5 M1 M2 A B SW9 M1 M2 A B
PDH
PDH
PDH
PDH
PDH
PDH

UD H
UD H
UD H
UPS UPS UPS
UDH
UDH
UDH
ADH
ADH
ADH
ADH
ADH
ADH
TRU NK
TRU NK
TRU NK
TRUNK
TRUNK
TRUNK
CROSSOVER UTP
CROSSOVER UTP
CROSSOVER UTP
220VAC 220VAC 220VAC 220VAC 220VAC 220VAC

UPS UPS UPS UPS UPS UPS
SW4 SW8 SW12

SW2 SW6 SW10
PDH
PDH
PDH
PDH
PDH
PDH
U DH
U DH
U DH
U DH
UDH
UDH
ADH
ADH
ADH
AD H
ADH
ADH
TRUNK
TRUNK
TRUNK
TRUNK
TRU NK
TRU NK
M M M M M M
GT1_SVR GT2_SVR GT3_SVR

PC Desk PC Desk PC Desk
Mouse Mouse Mouse

UPS UPS UPS
Customer Control Room

SW14
SW16
SW13
SW15
220VAC
220VAC
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
UPS
UPS
PDH UD H ADH TR UNK PDH U DH AD H TRUNK
PDH UD H PDH UD H
M M M
M M M
UNIT DATA HIGHWAY (UDH)
CRM1_SVR CRM2_SVR CRM3_SVR
Mouse Mouse Mouse

UPS UPS UPS
Typical Unit Data Highway Layout Drawing

UDH Network Features
Feature Description
Type of Network Ethernet , full duplex, in a single or redundant star configuration
Media and Distance Ethernet 100BaseTX for switch to controller/device connections. The cable is 22
to 26 AWG unshielded twisted pair; category 5e EIA/TIA 568 A/B. Distance is up
to 100 meters. Ethernet 100BaseFX with fiber-optic cable optional for distances
up to 2 km (1.24 miles).
Number of Nodes At least 25 nodes, given a 25 Hz data rate. For other configurations contact the
factory.
Type of Nodes Controllers, PLCs, operator interfaces, and engineering workstations
Supported
Protocol EGD protocol based on the UDP/IP
Message Integrity 32-bit CRC appended to each Ethernet packet plus integrity checks built into
UDP and EGD
Time Sync. Methods Network Time Protocol (NTP), accuracy ±1 ms.
Data Highway Ethernet Switches

The UDH and PDH networks use Fast Ethernet switches. The system modules are
cabled into the switches to create a star type network architecture. Redundancy is
obtained by using two switches with an interconnecting cable.
Redundant switches provide redundant, duplex communication links to controllers

and HMIs. Primary and secondary designate the two redundant Ethernet links. If the
primary link fails, the converter automatically switches the traffic on main over to
the secondary link without interruption to network operation. At 10 Mb/s, using the
minimum data packet size, the maximum data loss during fail-over transition is 2-3
packets.
Note Switches are configured by GE for the control system, pre configured switches
should be purchased from GE. Each switch is configured to accept UDH and PDH.
GE Part # 323A4747NZP31(A,B or C)
Configuration A B C
PDH 1-8 Single VLAN May me 1-18,23-26
used for UDH or PDH
UDH 9-16 None
ADH 17-19 19-21
Uplinks 20-26 22 to Router

Configuration 323A4747NZP31A is the standard configuration with
323A4747NZP31B being used for legacy systems with separate UDH and PDH
networks. Part 323A4747NZP31C is obsolete and was used in special instances to
provide connectivity between the PDH and the OSM system.
GE Part # 323A4747NZP37(A or B)
Configuration A B
PDH 1-3 Single VLAN May me used for UDH or
UDH 5-7 PDH
ADH None
Uplinks 4,8,9-16
Virtual LAN (VLAN) technology is used in the UDH and PDH infrastructure to
provide separate and redundant network infrastructure using the same hardware. The
multi-VLAN configuration (Configuration A) provides connectivity to both PDH
and UDH networks. Supplying multiple switches at each location provides
redundancy. The switch fabric provides separation of the data. Each uplink between
switches carries each VLANs data encapsulated per IEEE 802.1q. The UDH VLAN
data is given priority over the other VLANs by increasing its 802.1p priority.

Selecting IP Addresses for UDH and PDH
Use the following table to select IP addresses on the UDH and PDH. The standard IP
address is 192.168.ABC.XYZ.
Ethernet IP Address Rules
Network A BC X Y Z
Type Type Network Controller/Device Number Unit Number Type of Device
Number
UDH 1 01-99 1 = gas turbine controllers 1 = Unit 1 1 = R0
2 = steam turbine controllers 2 = Unit 2 2 = S0
•
• 3 = T0
9 = Unit 9 4 = HRSG A
5 = HRSG B
6 = EX2000 or EX2100 A
7 = EX2000 or EX2100 B
8 = EX2000 or EX2100 C
9 = Not assigned
0 = Static Starter
0 = All other 02 - 15 = Servers
devices on the 16 - 25 = Workstations
UDH
26 - 37 = Other stations (Viewers)
38 = Turbine Historian
39 = OSM
40 - 99 = Aux Controllers, such as
ISCs
PDH 2 01 – 54 2 to 199 are reserved for customer supplied items
200 to 254 are reserved for GE supplied items such as viewers and printers
The following are examples of IP addresses:
192.168.104.133 would be UDH number 4, gas turbine unit number 3, T0 core.
192.168.102.215 would be UDH number 2, steam turbine unit number 1, HRSG B.
192.168.201.201 could be a CIMPLICITY Viewer supplied by GE, residing on

PDH#1.
192.168.205.10 could be a customer-supplied printer residing on PDH#5.
Note Each item on the network such as a controller, server, or viewer must have an
IP address. The above addresses are recommended, but if this is a custom
configuration, the requisition takes precedence.

IONet
IONet is an Ethernet 10Base2 network used to communicate data between the VCMI
communication board in the control module, the I/O boards, and the three
independent sections of the Protection Module . In large systems, it is used to
communicate with an expansion VME board rack containing additional I/O boards.
These racks are called interface modules since they contain exclusively I/O boards
and a VCMI. IONet also communicates data between controllers in TMR systems.
Note Remote I/O can be located up to 185 m (607 ft) from the controller.
Another application is to use the interface module as a remote I/O interface located at
the turbine or generator.
The following figure shows a TMR configuration using remote I/O and a protection
module.
R0 S0 T0 R8 S8 T8
TMR System V
V U V U V U V V
with Remote P
C C C C C C P P
I/O Racks M R
M V M V V R R
I X I X I X O O O
IONet - R
IONet - S
IONet - T
R1 S1 T1 UCVX is Controller,
V V V VCMI is Bus Master,
VPRO is Protection
C I/O C I/O C I/O Module,
M Boards M Boards M Boards I/O are VME boards.
I I I (Terminal Boards not
IONet Supports
Multiple Remote shown)
I/O Racks
IONet Communications with Controllers, I/O, and Protection Modules

IONet Features
IONet Feature Description
Type of Network Ethernet using extension of ADL protocol
Speed 10 Mb/s data rate
Media and Ethernet 10Base2, RG-58 coax cable is standard
Distance Distance to 185 m (607 ft)
Ethernet 10BaseFL with fiber-optic cable and
converters
Distance is 2 km (1.24 miles)
Number of 16 nodes
Nodes
Protocol Extension of ADL protocol designed to avoid message
collisions; Collision Sense (CSMA) functionality is still
maintained
Message Size Maximum packet size 1500 bytes
Message 32-bit CRC appended to each Ethernet packet
Integrity
IONet - Communications Interface

Communication between the control module (control rack) and interface module (I/O
rack) is handled by the VCMI in each rack. In the control module, the VCMI
operates as the IONet Master, while in the interface module it operates as an IONet
slave. The VCMI establishes the network ID, and displays the network ID, channel
ID, and status on its front cabinet LEDs.
The VCMI serves as the Master frame counter for all nodes on the IONet. Frames
are sequentially numbered and all nodes on IONet run in the same frame This
ensures that selected data is being transmitted and operated on correctly.

I/O Data Collection
I/O Data Collection, Simplex Systems - When used in an interface module, the
VCMI acts as the VME bus Master. It collects input data from the I/O boards and
transmits it to the control module through IONet. When it receives output data from
the control module it distributes it to the I/O boards.
The VCMI in slot 1 of the control module operates as the IONet Master. As packets
of input data are received from various racks on the IONet, the VCMI collects them
and transfers the data through the VME bus to the I/O table in the controller. After
application code completion, the VCMI transfers output values from the controller
I/O table to the VCMI where the data is then broadcast to all the I/O racks.
I/O Data Collection and Voting, TMR Systems - For a small TMR system, all
the I/O may be in one module (triplicated). In this case the VCMI transfers the input
values from each of the I/O boards through the VME bus to an internal buffer. After
the individual board transfers are complete, the entire block of data is transferred to
the pre-vote table, and also sent as an input packet on the IONet. As the packet is
being sent, corresponding packets from the other two control modules are being
received through the other IONet ports. Each of these packets is then transferred to
the pre-vote table.
After all packets are in the pre-vote table, the voting takes place. Analog data
(floating point) goes through a median selector, while logical data (bit values) goes
through a two-out-of-three majority voter. The results are placed in the voted table.
A selected portion of the controller variables (the states such as counter/timer values
and sequence steps) must be transferred by the Master VCMI boards to the other
Master VCMI boards to be included in the vote process. At completion of the voting
the voted table is transferred through the VME bus to the state table memory in the
controller.
For a larger TMR system with remote I/O racks, the procedure is very similar except
that packets of input values come into the Master VCMI over IONet. After all the
input data is accumulated in the internal buffer, it is placed in the pre-vote table and
also sent to the other control modules over IONet. After all the packets and states are
in the pre-vote table, they are voted, and the results are transferred to the controller.
Output Data Packet - All the output data from a control module VCMI is placed
in packets. These packets are then broadcast on the IONet and received by all
connected interface and control modules. Each interface module VCMI extracts the
required information and distributes to its associated I/O boards.

Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
EGD allows you to share information between controller components in a networked
environment. Controller data configured for transmission over EGD are separated
into groups called exchanges. Multiple exchanges make up pages. Pages can be
configured to either a specific address (unicast) if supported or to multiple
consumers at the same time (broadcast or multicast, if supported).
Each page is identified by the combination of a Producer ID and an Exchange ID so

the consumer recognizes the data and knows where to store it. EGD allows one
controller component, referred to as the producer of the data, to simultaneously send
information at a fixed periodic rate to any number of peer controller components,
known as the consumers. This network supports a large number of controller
components capable of both producing and consuming information.
The exchange contains a configuration signature, which shows the revision number
of the exchange configuration. If the consumer receives data with an unknown
configuration signature then it makes the data unhealthy.
In the case of a transmission interruption, the receiver waits three periods for the
EGD message, after which it times out and the data is considered unhealthy. Data
integrity is preserved by:
x 32-bit cyclic redundancy code (CRC) in the Ethernet packet

x Standard checksums in the UDP and IP headers
x Configuration signature
x Data size field
EGD Communications Features
Feature Description
Type of Supervisory data is transmitted either 480 or 960 ms. Control data is
Communication transmitted at frame rate.
Message Type Broadcast - a message to all stations on a subnet
Unicast - a directed message to one station
Redundancy Pages may be broadcast onto multiple Ethernet subnets or may be
received from multiple Ethernet subnets, if the specified controller
hardware supports multiple Ethernet ports.
Fault Tolerance In TMR configurations, a controller can forward EGD data across the
IONet to another controller that has been isolated from the Ethernet.
Sizes AN exchange can be a maximum of 1400 bytes. Pages can contain
multiple exchanges. The number of exchanges within a page and the
number of pages within an EGD node are limited by each EGD device
type. The Mark VI does not limit the number or exchanges or pages.
Message Integrity Ethernet supports a 32-bit CRC appended to each Ethernet packet.
Reception timeout (determined by EGD device type. The exchange
times out after an exchange update had not occurred within four times
the exchange period.), Using Sequence ID.
Missing/out of order packet detection
UDP and IP header checksums
Configuration signature (data layout revision control)
Exchange size validation
Function Codes EGD allows each controller to send a block of information to, or receive
a block from, other controllers in the system. Integer, Floating Point,
and Boolean data types are supported.

In a TMR configuration, each controller receives UDH EGD data independently
from a direct Ethernet connection. If the connection is broken a controller may
request the missing data from the second or third controller through the IONet.
One controller in a TMR configuration is automatically selected to transmit the EGD

data onto the UDH. If the UDH fractures causing the controllers to be isolated from
each other onto different physical network segments, multiple controllers are enabled
for transmission, providing data to each of the segments.
These features add a level of Ethernet fault tolerance to the basic protocol.
<R>
EGD
Redundant
path for UDH
UNIT DATA HIGHWAY

EGD
<T> IONET
<R> IONET
<S>
EGD
<S> IONET
<T>
EGD
Unit Data Highway EGD TMR Configuration
In a DUAL configuration, each controller receives UDH EGD data independently

from a direct Ethernet connection. If the connection is broken a controller may
request the missing data from the second through the IONet.
One controller in a DUAL configuration is automatically selected to transmit the

EGD data onto the UDH. If the UDH fractures causing the controllers to be isolated
from each other onto different physical network segments, each controller is enabled
for transmission, providing data to both segments.

Modbus Communications
The Mark VI control platform can be a Modbus Slave on either the COM2 RS-232C
serial connection or over Ethernet. In the TMR configuration, commands are
replicated to multiple controllers so only one physical Modbus link is required. All
the same functions are supported over Ethernet that are supported over the serial
ports. All Ethernet Modbus messages are received on Ethernet port 502.
Note The Modbus support is available in either the simplex or TMR configurations.
Messages are transmitted and received using the Modbus RTU transmission mode
where data is transmitted in 8-bit bytes. The other Modbus transmission mode where
characters are transmitted in ASCII is not supported. The supported Modbus point
data types are bits, shorts, longs and floats. These points can be scaled and placed
into compatible Mark VI signal types.
There are four Modbus register page types used:
x Input coils
x Output coils
x Input registers
x Holding registers
Since the Mark VI has high priority control code operating at a fixed frame rate, it is
necessary to limit the amount of CPU resources that can be taken by the Modbus
interface. To limit the operation time, a limit on the number of commands per second
received by the Mark VI is enforced. The Mark VI control code also can disable all
Modbus commands by setting an internal logical signal.
There are two diagnostic utilities that can be used to diagnose problems with the
Modbus communications on a Mark VI. The first utility prints out the accumulated
Modbus errors from a network and the second prints out a log of the most recent
Modbus messages. This data can be viewed using the toolbox.
Note For additional information on Mark VI Modbus communications, refer to the

sections Ethernet Modbus Slave and Serial Modbus Slave and to document, GEI-
100535, Modbus Communications.

Ethernet Modbus Slave
Modbus is widely used in control systems to establish communication between
distributed control systems, PLCs, and HMIs. The Mark VI controller supports
Ethernet Modbus as a standard slave interface. Ethernet establishes high-speed
communication between the various portions of the control system, and the Ethernet
Modbus protocol is layered on top of the TCP/IP stream sockets. The primary
purpose of this interface is to allow third party Modbus Master computers to read
and write signals that exist in the controller, using a subset of the Modbus function
codes.
The Mark VI controller will respond to Ethernet Modbus commands received from
any of the Ethernet ports supported by its hardware configuration.
Ethernet Modbus may be configured as an independent interface or may share a

register map with a serial Modbus interface.
UNIT DATA HIGHWAY
Ethernet Ethernet
Modbus Modbus
Mark VI 90-70 PLC
ENET1
ENET1
ENET2
UCVx
VC MI
CPU
I/ O
I/ O
I/ O
ENET2
Simplex
RS-232C
Serial Modbus
Ethernet Modbus

Ethernet Modbus Features
Feature Description
Communication Type Multidrop Ethernet CSMA/CD, employing TCP/IP with Modbus Application
Protocol (MBAP) layered on top. Slave protocol only
Speed 10 Mb/s data rate
Media and Distance Using 10Base2 RG-58 coax, the maximum distance is 185 m (607 ft).
Using 10BaseT shielded twisted-pair, with media access converter, the
maximum distance is 100 m (328 ft)
Using 10BaseFL fiber-optics, with media access converter, a distance of
several kilometers is possible
Only the coax cable can be multidropped; the other cable types use a hub
forming a Star network.
Message Integrity Ethernet supports a 32-bit CRC appended to each Ethernet packet.
Redundancy Responds to Modbus commands from any Ethernet interface supported by
the controller hardware
Supports register map sharing with serial Modbus
Function Codes
01 Read Coil Read the current status of a group of 1 to 2000 Boolean signals
02 Read Input Read the current status of a group of 1 to 2000 Boolean signals
03 Read Registers Read the current binary value in 1 to 125 holding registers
04 Read Input Read the current binary values in 1 to125 analog signal registers
Registers
05 Force Coil Force a single Boolean signal to a state of ON or OFF
06 Preset Register Set a specific binary value into holding registers
07 Read Exception Read the first 8 logic coils (coils 1-8) - short message length permits rapid
Status reading
15 Force Coils Force a series of 1 to 800 consecutive Boolean signals to a specific state
16 Preset Registers Set binary values into a series of 1 to 100 consecutive holding registers

Serial Modbus Slave
Serial Modbus is used to communicate between the Mark VI and the plant
Distributed Control System (DCS). This is shown as the Enterprise layer in the
introduction to this chapter. The serial Modbus communication link allows an
operator at a remote location to make an operator command by sending a logical
command or an analog setpoint to the Mark VI. Logical commands are used to
initiate automatic sequences in the controller. Analog setpoints are used to set a
target such as turbine load, and initiate a ramp to the target value at a predetermined
ramp rate.
Note The Mark VI controller also supports serial Modbus slave as a standard
interface.
The HMI Server supports serial Modbus as a standard interface. The DCS sends a
request for status information to the HMI, or the message can be a command to the
turbine control. The HMI is always a slave responding to requests from the serial
Modbus Master, and there can only be one Master.
Serial Modbus Features
Serial Modbus Feature Description
Type of Master/slave arrangement with the slave controller following
Communication the Master; full duplex, asynchronous communication
Speed 19,200 baud is standard; 9,600 baud is optional
Media and Distance Using an RS-232C cable without a modem, the distance is
15.24 m (50 ft); using an RS-485 converter it is 1.93 km (1.2
miles).
Mode ASCII Mode - Each 8-bit byte in the message is sent as two
ASCII characters, the hexadecimal representation of the byte.
(Not available from the HMI server.)
Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) Mode - Each 8-bit byte in the
message is sent with no translation, which packs the data
more efficiently than the ASCII mode, providing about twice
the throughput at the same baud rate.
Redundancy Supports register map sharing with Ethernet Modbus.
Message Security An optional parity check is done on each byte and a CRC16
check sum is appended to the message in the RTU mode; in
the ASCII mode an LRC is appended to the message instead
of the CRC.
Note This section discusses serial Modbus communication in general terms. Refer
to GEH-6410, Innovation Series Controller System Manual and HMI manuals for
additional information. Refer to GEH-6126, HMI Application Guide and GFK-1180,
CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User's Manual. For details on
how to configure the graphic screens refer to GFK-1396, CIMPLICITY HMI for
Windows NT and Windows 95 CimEdit Operation Manual.

Modbus Configuration
Systems are configured as single point-to-point RS-232C communication devices. A
GE device on Serial Modbus is a slave supporting binary RTU (Remote Terminal
Unit) full duplex messages with CRC. Both dedicated and broadcast messages are
supported.
A dedicated message is a message addressed to a specific slave device with a

corresponding response from that slave. A broadcast message is addressed to all
slaves without a corresponding return response.
The binary RTU message mode uses an 8-bit binary character data for messages.
RTU mode defines how information is packed into the message fields by the sender
and decoded by the receiver. Each RTU message is transmitted in a continuous
stream with a 2-byte CRC checksum and contains a slave address. A slave station’s
address is a fixed unique value in the range of 1 to 255.
The Serial Modbus communications system supports 9600 and 19,200 baud, none,
even, or odd parity, and 7 or 8 data bits. Both the Master and slave devices must be
configured with the same baud rate, parity, and data bit count.
Modbus Function Codes
Function Title Message Description
Codes
01 01 Read Holding Coils Read the current status of a group of 1 to 2000
Boolean signals
02 02 Read Input Coils Read the current status of a group of 1 to 2000
Boolean signals
03 03 Read Holding Read the current binary values in 1 to 125
Registers analog signal registers
04 04 Read Input Registers Read the current binary values in 1 to125
analog signal registers
05 05 Force Single Holding Force (or write) a single Boolean signal to a
Coil state of ON or OFF
06 06 Preset Single Preset (or write) a specific binary value into a
Holding Register holding register
07 07 Read Exception Read the first 8 logic coils (coils 1-8) - short
Status message length permits rapid reading of these
values
08 08 Loopback Test Loopback diagnostic to test communication
system
15 15 Force Multiple Coils Force a series of 1 to 800 consecutive Boolean
signals to a specific state
16 16 Preset Multiple Set binary values into a series of 1 to 100
Holding Registers consecutive analog signals

Hardware Configuration
A Data Terminal Equipment Device (DTD) transmits serial data on pin 3 (TD) of a
9-pin RS-232C cable. A Data Communication Device (DCE) is identified as a
device that transmits serial data on pin 2 (RD) of a 9-pin RS-232C cable. Refer to
the following table.
Using this definition, the GE slave Serial Modbus device is DTD because it transmits
serial data on pin 3 (TD) of the 9-pin RS-232C cable. If the master serial Modbus
device is also a DTD, connecting the master and slave devices together requires an
RS-232C null modem cable.
The RS-232C standard specifies 25 signal lines: 20 lines for routine operation, two
lines for modem testing, and three remaining lines unassigned. Nine of the signal
pins are used in a nominal RS-232C communication system. Cable references in this
document will refer to the 9-pin cable definition found in the following table.
Terms describing the various signals used in sending or receiving data are expressed
from the point of view of the DTE. For example the signal, transmit data (TD),
represents the transmission of data coming from the DTD going to the DCE.
Each RS-232C signal uses a single wire. The standard specifies the conventions used
to send sequential data as a sequence of voltage changes signifying the state of each
signal. Depending on the signal group, a negative voltage (less than -3 V) represents
either a binary 1 data bit, a signal mark, or a control off condition, while a positive
voltage (greater that +3 V) represents either a binary zero data bit, a signal space, or
a control on condition. Because of voltage limitations, an RS-232C cable may not be
longer than 15.2 m (50 ft).
Nine of the twenty-five RS-232C pins are used in a common asynchronous

application. All nine pins are necessary in a system configured for hardware
handshaking. The Modbus system does not use hardware handshaking; therefore it
requires just three wires, receive data (RD), transmit data (TD), and signal ground
(GND) to transmit and receive data.
The nine RS-232C signals used in the asynchronous communication system can be
broken down into four groups of signals: data, control, timing, ground.

RS-232C Connector Pinout Definition
DB 9 DB 25 Description DTE DTE Signal Function
Output Input Type
1 8 Data Carrier Detect X Contro Signal comes from the other RS-232C
(DCD) l device telling the DTE device that a
circuit has been established
2 3 Receive Data (RD) X Data Receiving serial data
3 2 Transmit Data (TD) X Data Transmitting serial data
4 20 Data Terminal Ready X Contro DTE places positive voltage on this pin
(DTR) l when powered up
5 7 Signal Ground (GND) Groun Must be connected
d
6 6 Data Set Ready (DSR) X Contro Signal from other RS-232C device
l telling the DTE that the other RS-232C
device is powered up
7 4 Request To Send X Contro DTE has data to send and places this
(RTS) l pin high to request permission to
transmit
8 5 Clear To Send (CTS) X Contro DTE looks for positive voltage on this
l pin for permission to transmit data
9 22 Ring Indicator (RI) X Contro A modem signal indicating a ringing
l signal on the telephone line
Data Signal wires are used to send and receive serial data. Pin 2 (RD) and pin 3
(TD) are used for transmitting data signals. A positive voltage (> +3 V) on either of
these two pins signifies a logic 0 data bit or space data signal. A negative voltage (< -
3 V) on either of these two pins signifies a logic 1 data bit or mark signal.
Control Signals coordinate and control the flow of data over the RS-232C cable.
Pins 1 (DCD), 4 (DTR), 6 (DSR), 7 (RTS), and 8 (CTS) are used for control signals.
A positive voltage (> +3 V) indicates a control on signal, while a negative voltage (<
-3 V) signifies a control off signal. When a device is configured for hardware
handshaking, these signals are used to control the communications.
Timing Signals are not used in an asynchronous 9-wire cable. These signals,
commonly called clock signals, are used in synchronous communication systems to
synchronize the data rate between transmitting and receiving devices. The logic
signal definitions used for timing are identical to those used for control signals.
Signal Ground on both ends of an RS-232C cable must be connected. Frame

ground is sometimes used in 25-pin RS-232C cables as a protective ground.

Serial Port Parameters
An RS-232C serial port is driven by a computer chip called a universal asynchronous
receiver/transmitter (UART). The UART sends an 8-bit byte of data out of a serial
port preceded with a start bit, the 8 data bits, an optional parity bit, and one or two
stop bits. The device on the other end of the serial cable must be configured the same
as the sender to understand the received data. The software configurable setup
parameters for a serial port are baud rate, parity, stop, and data bit counts.
Transmission baud rate signifies the bit transmission speed measured in bits per
second. Parity adds an extra bit that provides a mechanism to detect corrupted serial
data characters. Stop bits are used to pad a serial data character to a specific number
of bits. If the receiver expects 11 bits for each character, the sum of the start bit, data
bits, parity bit, and the specified stop bits should equal 11. The stop bits are used to
adjust the total to the desired bit count.
UARTs support three serial data transmission modes: simplex (one way only), full
duplex (bi-directional simultaneously), and half duplex (non-simultaneous bi-
directional). GE’s Modbus slave device supports only full duplex data transmission.
Device number is the physical RS-232C communication port.
Baud rate is the serial data transmission rate of the Modbus device measured in bits
per second. The GE Modbus slave device supports 9,600 and 19,200 baud (default).
Stop bits are used to pad the number of bits that are transmitted for each byte of
serial data. The GE Modbus slave device supports 1 or 2 stop bits. The default is 1
stop bit.
Parity provides a mechanism to error check individual serial 8-bit data bytes. The
GE Modbus slave device supports none, even, and odd parity. The default is none.
Code (byte size) is the number of data bits in each serial character. The GE
Modbus slave device supports 7 and 8-bit data bytes. The default byte size is 8 bits.

Ethernet GSM
Some applications require transmitting alarm and event information to the DCS. This
information includes high-resolution local time tags in the controller for alarms (25
Hz), system events (25 Hz), and sequence of events (SOEs) for contact inputs (1 ms).
Traditional SOEs have required multiple contacts for each trip contact with one
contact wired to the turbine control to initiate a trip and the other contact to a
separate SOE instrumentation rack for monitoring. The Mark VI uses dedicated
processors in each contact input board to time stamp all contact inputs with a 1 ms
time stamp, thus eliminating the initial cost and long term maintenance of a separate
SOE system.
Note The HMI server has the turbine data to support GSM messages.
An Ethernet link is available using TCP/IP to transmit data with the local time tags to
the plant level control. The link supports all the alarms, events, and SOEs in the
Mark VI cabinet. GE supplies an application layer protocol called GSM (GEDS
Standard Messages), which supports four classes of application level messages. The
HMI Server is the source of the Ethernet GSM communication.
HMI View Node
PLANT DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEM
(DCS)
Ethernet Ethernet
GSM Modbus
PLANT DATA HIGHWAY
PLANT DATA HIGHWAY
HMI Server Node HMI Server Node
Modbus Communication
From UDH From UDH

Communication to DCS from HMI using Modbus or Ethernet Options

Administration Messages are sent from the HMI to the DCS with a Support Unit
message, which describes the systems available for communication on that specific
link and general communication link availability.
Event Driven Messages are sent from the HMI to the DCS spontaneously when a
system alarm occurs or clears, a system event occurs or clears, or a contact input
(SOE) closes or opens. Each logic point is transmitted with an individual time tag.
Periodic Data Messages are groups of data points, defined by the DCS and
transmitted with a group time tag. All of the 5,000 data points in the Mark VI are
available for transmission to the DCS at periodic rates down to 1 second. One or
multiple data lists can be defined by the DCS using controller names and point
names.
Common Request Messages are sent from the DCS to the HMI including
turbine control commands and alarm queue commands. Turbine control commands
include momentary logical commands such as raise/lower, start/stop, and analog
setpoint target commands. Alarm queue commands consist of silence (plant alarm
horn) and reset commands as well as alarm dump requests which cause the entire
alarm queue to be transmitted from the Mark VI to the DCS.

PROFIBUS Communications
PROFIBUS is used in wide variety of industrial applications. It is defined in
PROFIBUS Standard EN 50170 and in other ancillary guideline specifications.
PROFIBUS devices are distinguished as Masters or slaves. Masters control the bus
and initiate data communication. They decide bus access by a token passing
protocol. Slaves, not having bus access rights, only respond to messages received
from Masters. Slaves are peripherals such as I/O devices, transducers, valves, and
such devices. PROFIBUS is an open fieldbus communication standard.
Note PROFIBUS functionality is only available in simplex, non-TMR Mark VI’s

only.
At the physical layer, PROFIBUS supports three transmission mediums: RS-485 for
universal applications; IEC 1158-2 for process automation; and optical fibers for
special noise immunity and distance requirements. The Mark VI PROFIBUS
controller provides opto-isolated RS-485 interfaces routed to 9-pin D-sub
connectors. Termination resistors are not included in the interface and must therefore
be provided by external connectors. Various bus speeds ranging from 9.6 kbit/s to 12
Mbit/s are supported, although maximum bus lengths decrease as bus speeds
increase.
To meet an extensive range of industrial requirements, PROFIBUS consists of three

variations: PROFIBUS-DP, PROFIBUS-FMS, and PROFIBUS-PA. Optimized for
speed and efficiency, PROFIBUS-DP is utilized in approximately 90% of
PROFIBUS slave applications. The Mark VI PROFIBUS implementation provides
PROFIBUS-DP Master functionality. PROFIBUS-DP Masters are divided into Class
1 and Class 2 types. Class 1 Masters cyclically exchange information with slaves in
defined message cycles, and Class 2 Masters provide configuration, monitoring, and
maintenance functionality.
Note The Mark VI operates as a PROFIBUS-DP Class 1 Master exchanging

information (generally I/O data) with slave devices each frame.
Mark VI UCVE controller versions are available providing one to three PROFIBUS-
DP Masters. Each may operate as the single bus Master or may have several Masters
on the same bus. Without repeaters, up to 32 stations (Masters and slaves) may be
configured per bus segment. With repeaters, up to 126 stations may exist on a bus.
Note More information on PROFIBUS can be obtained at www.profibus.com.

PROFIBUS Features
PROFIBUS Feature Description
Type of PROFIBUS-DP Class 1 Master/slave arrangement with slaves
Communication responding to Masters once per frame; a standardized application
based on the ISO/OSI model layers 1 and 2
Network Topology Linear bus, terminated at both ends with stubs possible
Speed 9.6 kbit/s, 19.2 kbit/s, 93.75 kbit/s, 187.5 kbit/s, 500 kbit/s, 1.5
Mbit/s, 12 Mbit/s
Media Shielded twisted pair cable
Number of Stations Up to 32 stations per line segment; extendable to 126 stations with
up to 4 repeaters
Connector 9-pin D-sub connector
Number of Masters From 1-3 Masters per UCVE
PROFIBUS Bus Length
kb/s Maximum Bus
Length in Meters
9.6 1200
19.2 1200
93.75 1200
187.5 1000
500 400
1500 200
12000 100
Configuration
The properties of all PROFIBUS Master and slave devices are defined in electronic
device data sheets called GSD files (for example, SOFTB203.GSD). PROFIBUS can
be configured with configuration tools such as Softing AG’s PROFI-KON-DP.
These tools enable the configuration of PROFIBUS networks comprised of devices
from different suppliers based on information imported from corresponding GSD
files.
Note GSD files define the properties of all PROFIBUS devices.
The third party tool is used rather than the toolbox to identify the devices making up
PROFIBUS networks as well as specifying bus parameters and device options (also
called parameters). The toolbox downloads the PROFIBUS configurations to Mark
VI permanent storage along with the normal application code files.
Note Although the Softing AG’s PROFI-KON-DP tool is provided as the

PROFIBUS configurator, any such tool will suffice as long as the binary
configuration file produced is in the Softing format.
For additional information on Mark VI PROFIBUS communications, refer to

document, GEI-100536, PROFIBUS Communications.

I/O and Diagnostics
PROFIBUS I/O transfer with slave devices is driven at the Mark VI application level
by a set of standard block library blocks. Pairs of blocks read and write analog,
Boolean, and byte-oriented data types. The analog blocks read 2, 4, 8 bytes,
depending on associated signal data types, and handle the proper byte swapping. The
Boolean blocks automatically pack and unpack bit-packed I/O data. The byte-
oriented blocks access PROFIBUS I/O as single bytes without byte swapping or bit
packing. To facilitate reading and writing unsigned short integer-oriented
PROFIBUS I/O (needed since unsigned short signals are not available), a pair of
analog-to-word/word-to-analog blocks work in tandem with the PROFIBUS analog
I/O blocks as needed.
Data transfers initiated by multiple blocks operating during a frame are fully
coherent since data exchange with slave devices takes place at the end of each frame.
PROFIBUS defines three types of diagnostic messages generated by slave devices:
x Station-related diagnostics provide general station status.

x Module-related diagnostics indicate certain modules having diagnostics pending.
x Channel-related diagnostics specify fault causes at the channel (point) level.
Note PROFIBUS diagnostics can be monitored by the toolbox and the Mark VI
application.
Presence of any of these diagnostics can be monitored by the toolbox as well as in

Mark VI applications by a PROFIBUS diagnostic block included in the standard
block library.

Fiber-Optic Cables
Fiber-optic cable is an effective substitute for copper cable, especially when longer
distances are required, or electrical disturbances are a serious problem.
The main advantages of fiber-optic transmission in the power plant environment are:
x Fiber segments can be longer than copper because the signal attenuation per foot
is less.
x In high lightning areas, copper cable can pick up currents, which can damage the
communications electronics. Since the glass fiber does not conduct electricity,
the use of fiber-optic segments avoids pickup and reduces lightning-caused
outages.
x Grounding problems are avoided with optical cable. The ground potential can
rise when there is a ground fault on transmission lines, caused by currents
coming back to the generator neutral point, or lightning.
x Optical cable can be routed through a switchyard or other electrically noisy area
and not pick up any interference. This can shorten the required runs and simplify
the installation.
x Fiber optic-cable with proper jacket materials can be run direct buried in trays or
in conduit.
x High quality optical fiber cable is light, tough, and easily pulled. With careful
installation, it can last the life of the plant.
Disadvantages of fiber optics include:
x The cost, especially for short runs, may be more for a fiber-optic link.
x Inexpensive fiber-optic cable can be broken during installation, and is more
prone to mechanical and performance degradation over time. The highest quality
cable avoids these problems.
Components
Basics
Each fiber link consists of two fibers, one outgoing, and the other incoming to form a
duplex channel. A LED drives the outgoing fiber, and the incoming fiber illuminates
a phototransistor, which generates the incoming electrical signal.
Multimode fiber, with a graded index of refraction core and outer cladding, is
recommended for the optical links. The fiber is protected with buffering which is the
equivalent of insulation on metallic wires. Mechanical stress is bad for fibers so a
strong sheath is used, sometimes with pre-tensioned Kevlar fibers to carry the stress
of pulling and vertical runs.
Connectors for a power plant need to be fastened to a reasonably robust cable with
its own buffering. The square connector (SC) type connector is recommended. This
connector is widely used for LANs, and is readily available.

Fiber-Optic Cable
Multimode fibers are rated for use at 850 nm and 1300 nm wavelength. Cable
attenuation is between 3.0 and 3.3 db/km at 850 nm. The core of the fiber is normally
62.5 microns in diameter, with a gradation of index of refraction. The higher index of
refraction is at the center, gradually shifting to a medium index at the circumference.
The higher index slows the light, therefore a light ray entering the fiber at an angle
curves back toward the center, out toward the other side, back toward the center, etc.
This ray travels further but goes faster because it spends most of its time closer to the
circumference where the index is less. The index is graded to keep the delays nearly
equal, thus preserving the shape of the light pulse as it passes through the fiber.
The inner core is protected with a low index of refraction cladding, which for the
recommended cable is 125 microns in diameter. 62.5/125 optical cable is the most
common type of cable and should be used.
Never look directly into a fiber. Although most fiber links use
LEDs that cannot damage the eyes, some longer links use lasers,
which can cause permanent damage to the eyes.
Guidelines on cables usage:
x Gel filled (or loose tube) cables should not be used because of difficulties
making installations, and terminations, and the potential for leakage in vertical
runs.
x Use a high quality break out cable, which makes each fiber a sturdy cable, and
helps prevent too sharp bends.
x Sub-cables are combined with more strength and filler members to build up the
cable to resist mechanical stress and the outside environment
x Two types of cable are recommended, one with armor and one without. Rodent
damage is a major cause of optical cable failure. If this is a problem in the plant,
the armored cable should be used. If not, the armor is not recommended because
it is heavier, has a larger bend radius, is more expensive, attracts lightning
currents, and has lower impact and crush resistance.
x Optical characteristics of the cable can be measured with an optical time domain
reflectometer. Some manufacturers will supply the OTDR printouts as proof of
cable quality. A simpler instrument is used by installer to measure attenuation,
and they should supply this data to demonstrate the installation has a good
power margin.
x Cables described here have four fibers, enough for two fiber-optic links. This
can be used to bring redundant communications to a central control room, or the
extra fibers can be retained as spares for future plant enhancements. Cables with
two fibers are available for indoor use.

Fiber-Optic Converter
Fiber-Optic connections are normally terminated at the 100BaseFX Fiber port of the
Ethernet switch. Occasionally, the Mark VI communication system may require an
Ethernet media converter to convert selected UDH and PDH electrical signals to
fiber-optic signals. The typical media converter makes a two-way conversion of one
or more Ethernet 100BaseTX signals to Ethernet 100Base FX signals.
100Base FX 100BaseTX
Port Port
Dimensions: Power: Data:

TX RX
Pwr
Width: 3.0 (76 mm) 120 V ac, 100 Mbps,
Height: 1.0 (25 mm) 60 Hz fiber optic
Depth: 4.75 (119 mm)
Fiber UTP/STP
Media Converter, Ethernet Electric to Ethernet Fiber-Optic
Connectors
The 100Base FX fiber-optic cables for indoor use in Mark VI have SC type
connectors. The connector, shown in the following figure, is a keyed, snap-in
connector that automatically aligns the center strand of the fiber with the
transmission or reception points of the network device. An integral spring helps to
keep the SC connectors from being crushed together, to avoid damaging the fiber.
The two plugs can be held together as shown, or they can be separate.
Locating
Key
.
Fiber
.
Solid Glass
Center
Snap-in connnectors
SC Connector for Fiber-Optic Cables

The process of attaching the fiber connectors involves stripping the buffering from
the fiber, inserting the end through the connector, and casting it with an epoxy or
other plastic. This requires a special kit designed for that particular connector. After
the epoxy has hardened, the end of the fiber is cut off, ground, and polished. The
complete process takes an experienced person about 5 minutes.
System Considerations
When designing a fiber optic network, note the following considerations.
Redundancy should be considered for continuing central control room (CCR) access
to the turbine controls. Redundant HMIs, fiber-optic links, Ethernet switches, and
power supplies are recommended.
Installation of the fiber can decrease its performance compared to factory new cable.
Installers may not make the connectors as well as experts can, resulting in more loss
than planned. The LED light source can get dimmer over time, the connections can
get dirty, the cable loss increases with aging, and the receiver can become less
sensitive. For all these reasons there must be a margin between the available power
budget and the link loss budget, of a minimum of 3 dB. Having a 6 dB margin is
more comfortable, helping assure a fiber link that will last the life of the plant.
Installation
Planning is important for a successful installation. This includes the layout for the
required level of redundancy, cable routing distances, proper application of the
distance rules, and procurement of excellent quality switches, UPS systems, and
connectors.
x Install the fiber-optic cable in accordance with all local safety codes.
Polyurethane and PVC are two possible options for cable materials that might
NOT meet the local safety codes.
x Select a cable strong enough for indoor and outdoor applications, including
direct burial.
x Adhere to the manufacturer's recommendations on the minimum bend radius and
maximum pulling force.
x Test the installed fiber to measure the losses. A substantial measured power
margin is the best proof of a high quality installation.
x Use trained people for the installation. If necessary hire outside people with fiber
LAN installation experience.
x The fiber switches and converters need reliable power, and should be placed in a
location that minimizes the amount of movement they must endure, yet keep
them accessible for maintenance.

Component Sources
The following are typical sources for fiber-optic cable, connectors, converters, and
switches.
Fiber-Optic Cable:
Optical Cable Corporation

5290 Concourse Drive
Roanoke, VA 24019
Phone: (540)265-0690
Siecor Corporation
PO Box 489
Hickory, NC 28603-0489
Phone: (800)743-2673
Fiber-Optic Connectors:
3M - Connectors and Installation kit

Thomas & Betts - Connectors and Assembly polishing kit
Amphenol – Connectors and Termination kit

Time Synchronization
The time synchronization option synchronizes all turbine controls, generator
controls, and operator interfaces (HMIs) on the Unit Data Highway to a Global Time
Source (GTS). Typical GTSs are Global Positioning Satellite (GPS) receivers such
as the StarTime GPS Clock or similar time processing hardware. The preferred time
sources are Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) or GPS.
A time/frequency processor board, either the BC620AT or BC627AT, is placed in

the HMI computer. This board acquires time from the GTS with a high degree of
accuracy. When the HMI receives the time signal, it makes the time information
available to the turbine and generator controls on the network through Network Time
Protocol (NTP). The HMI Server provides time to time slaves either by broadcasting
time, or by responding to NTP time queries, or by both methods. Refer to RFC 1305
Network Time Protocol (Version 3) dated March 1992 for details.
Redundant time synchronization is provided by supplying a time/frequency

processor board in another HMI Server as a backup. Normally, the primary HMI
Server on the UDH is the time Master for the UDH, and other computers without the
time/frequency board are time slaves. The time slave computes the difference
between the returned time and the recorded time of request and adjusts its internal
time. Each time slave can be configured to respond to a time Master through unicast
mode or broadcast mode.
Local time is used for display of real-time data by adding a local time correction to
UTC. A node’s internal time clock is normally global rather than local. This is done
because global time steadily increases at a constant rate while corrections are
allowed to local time. Historical data is stored with global time to minimize
discontinuities.
Redundant Time Sources

If either the GTS or time Master becomes inoperative, the backup is to switch the
BC620AT or BC627AT to flywheel mode with a drift of ±2 ms/hour. In most cases,
this allows sufficient time to repair the GTS without severe disruption of the plant’s
system time. If the time Master becomes inoperative, then each of the time slaves
picks the backup time Master. This means that all nodes on the UDH lock onto the
identical reference for their own time even if the primary and secondary time
Masters have different time bases for their reference. If multiple time Masters exist,
each time slave selects the current time Master based on whether or not the time
Master is tracking the GTS, which time Master has the best quality signal, and which
Master is listed first in the configuration file.

Selection of Time Sources
The BC620AT and BC627AT boards support the use of several different time
sources; however, the time synchronization software does not support all sources
supported by the BC620AT board. A list of time sources supported by both the
BC620AT and the time synchronization software includes:
x Modulated IRIG-A, IRIG-B, 2137, or NASA-36 timecode signals

– Modulation ratio 3:1 to 6:1
– Amplitude 0.5 to 5 V peak to peak
x Dc Level Shifted Modulated IRIG-A, IRIG-B, 2137, or NASA-36 timecode
signals
– TTL/CMOS compatible voltage levels
x 1 PPS (one pulse per second) using the External 1 PPS input signal of the
BC620AT board
– TTL/CMOS compatible voltage levels, positive edge on time
x Flywheel mode using no signal, using the low drift clock on the BC620AT or
BC627AT board
– Flywheel mode as the sole time source for the plant

Notes

CHAPTER 4
Chapter 4 Codes, Standards, and

Environment
Introduction ................................................................................ 4-1
Safety Standards ......................................................................... 4-1
Electrical..................................................................................... 4-2
Environment ............................................................................... 4-5
Introduction
This chapter describes the codes, standards, and environmental guidelines used for
the design of all printed circuits, modules, cores, panels, and cabinet line-ups in the
control system. Requirements for harsh environments, such as marine applications,
are not covered here.
Safety Standards
EN 61010-1 Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control, and Laboratory Use, Part 1: General
Requirements
CAN/CSA 22.2 No. 1010.1-92 Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control, and Laboratory Use, Part 1: General
Requirements
ANSI/ISA 82.02.01 1999 Safety Standard for Electrical and Electronic Test,
Measuring, Controlling, and Related Equipment – General
Requirements
IEC 60529 Intrusion Protection Codes/NEMA 1/IP 20
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Codes, Standards, and Environment x 4-1
Electrical
Printed Circuit Board Assemblies
UL 796 Printed Circuit Boards
ANSI IPC guidelines
ANSI IPC/EIA guidelines
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

EN 50081-2 General Emission Standard
EN 55011 Radiated and Conducted RF Emissions
EN 50082-2 Generic Immunity Industrial Environment
EN/IEC 61000-4-2 Electrostatic Discharge Susceptibility
EN/IEC 61000-4-3 Radiated RF Immunity
EN/IEC 61000-4-4 Electrical Fast Transient Susceptibility
EN/IEC 61000-4-5 Surge Immunity
EN/IEC 61000-4-6 Conducted RF Immunity
EN/IEC 61000-4-11 Voltage Variation, Dips and Interruptions
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 Surge
Low Voltage Directive

EN 61010-1 Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement,
Control, and Laboratory Use, Part 1: General Requirements
4-2 x Chapter 4 Codes, Standards, and Environment GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Supply Voltage
Line Variations
Ac Supplies – Operating line variations of ±10 %
IEEE Std 141-1993 defines the Equipment Terminal Voltage – Utilization voltage.
The above meets IEC 60204-1 1999, and exceeds IEEE Std 141-1993, and ANSI
C84.1-1989.
Dc Supplies – Operating line variations of -30 %, +20 % or 145 V dc. This meets
IEC 60204-1 1999.
Voltage Unbalance
Less than 2% of positive sequence component for negative sequence component
Less than 2% of positive sequence component for zero sequence component
This meets IEC 60204-1 1999 and IEEE Std 141-1993.
Harmonic Distortion
Voltage: Less than 10% of total rms voltage between live conductors for 2nd
through 5th harmonic
Additional 2% of total rms voltage between live conductors for sum of 6th – 30th
harmonic
This meets IEC 60204-1 1999.
Current: The system specification is not per individual equipment
Less than 15% of maximum demand load current for harmonics less than 11
Less than 7% of maximum demand load current for harmonics between 11 and 17
Less than 6% of maximum demand load current for harmonics between 17 and 23
Less than 2.5% of maximum demand load current for harmonics between 23 and 35
The above meets IEEE Std 519 1992.
Frequency Variations
Frequency variation of ±5% when operating from ac supplies (20 Hz/sec slew rate)
This exceeds IEC 60204-1 1999.
Surge
Withstand 2 kV common mode, 1 kV differential mode
This meets IEC 61000-4-5 (ENV50142), and ANSI C62.41 (combination wave).
Clearances
NEMA Tables 7-1 and 7-2 from NEMA ICS1-2000
This meets IEC 61010-1:1993/A2: 1995, CSA C22.2 #14, and UL 508C.
Power Loss
100 % Loss of supply - minimum 10 ms for normal operation of power products
100 % Loss of supply - minimum 500 ms before control products require reset (only
applicable to ac powered systems with DACAs; not applicable to dc-only powered
Mark VIs).
This exceeds IEC 61000-4-11.
Environment
Storage
If the system is not installed immediately upon receipt, it must be stored properly to
prevent corrosion and deterioration. Since packing cases do not protect the
equipment for outdoor storage, the customer must provide a clean, dry place, free of
temperature variations, high humidity, and dust.
Use the following guidelines when storing the equipment:
x Place the equipment under adequate cover with the following requirements:
– Keep the equipment clean and dry, protected from precipitation and
flooding.
– Use only breathable (canvas type) covering material – do not use
plastic.
x Unpack the equipment as described, and label it.
– Maintain the following environment in the storage enclosure:
– Recommended ambient storage temperature limits from -40 to 80°C (-
40 to 176 °F).
– Surrounding air free of dust and corrosive elements, such as salt spray
or chemical and electrically conductive contaminants
– Ambient relative humidity from 5 to 95% with provisions to prevent
condensation
– No rodents
– No temperature variations that cause moisture condensation
Moisture on certain internal parts can cause electrical failure.
Condensation occurs with temperature drops of 15°C (27 °F) at 50% humidity over a
4 hour period, and with smaller temperature variations at higher humidity.
If the storage room temperature varies in such a way, install a reliable heating system
that keeps the equipment temperature slightly above that of the ambient air. This can
include space heaters or cabinet space heaters (when supplied) inside each enclosure.
A 100 W lamp can sometimes serve as a substitute source of heat.
To prevent fire hazard, remove all cartons and other such

flammable materials packed inside units before energizing any
heaters.
Operating
The Mark VI control components are suited to most industrial environments. To ensure
proper performance and normal operational life, the environment should be
maintained as follows:
Temperature at bottom of module (acceptable):
Control Module with running fans 0 to 60°C (32 to 140 °F)

I/O Module 0 to 60°C (32 to 140 °F)
Enclosures should be designed to maintain this temperature range.
Relative humidity: 5 to 95%, non-condensing.
Note Higher ambient temperature decreases the life expectancy of any electronic
component.
Environments that include excessive amounts of any of the following elements

reduce panel performance and life:
x Dust, dirt, or foreign matter

x Vibration or shock
x Moisture or vapors
x Rapid temperature changes
x Caustic fumes
x Power line fluctuations
x Electromagnetic interference or noise introduced by:
– Radio frequency signals, typically from nearby portable transmitters
– Stray high voltage or high frequency signals, typically produced by arc
welders, unsuppressed relays, contactors, or brake coils operating near
control circuits
The preferred location for the Mark VI control system cabinet would be in an
environmentally controlled room or in the control room itself. The cabinet should be
mounted where the floor surface allows for attachment in one plane (a flat, level, and
continuous surface). The customer provides the mounting hardware. Lifting lugs are
provided and if used, the lifting cables must not exceed 45° from the vertical plane.
Finally, the cabinet is equipped with a door handle, which can be locked for
security.
Interconnecting cables can be brought into the cabinet from the top or the bottom
through removable access plates. Convection cooling of the cabinet requires that
conduits be sealed to the access plates. Also, air passing through the conduit must be
within the acceptable temperature range as listed previously. This applies to both top
and bottom access plates.
Elevation
Equipment elevation is related to the equivalent ambient air pressure.
x Normal Operation - 0 to1000 m (3300 ft) (101.3 KPa - 89.8 KPa)

x Extended Operation - 1000 to 3050 m (3300 to 10,000 ft) (89.8 KPa - 69.7
KPa)
x Shipping - 4600 m (15000 ft) maximum (57.2 KPa)
Note A guideline for system behavior as a function of altitude is that for altitudes
above 1000 m (3300 ft), the maximum ambient rating of the equipment decreases
linearly to a derating of 5°C (41°F) at 3050 m (10000 ft).
The extended operation and shipping specifications exceed EN50178.
Contaminants
Gas
The control equipment withstands the following concentrations of corrosive gases at

50% relative humidity and 40°C (104 °F):
Sulfur dioxide (SO2) 30 ppb
Hydrogen sulfide (H2S) 10 ppb
Nitrous fumes (NOx) 30 ppb
Chlorine (Cl2) 10 ppb
Hydrogen fluoride (HF) 10 ppb
Ammonia (NH3) 500 ppb
Ozone (O3) 5 ppb
The above meets EN50178 Section A.6.1.4 Table A.2 (m).
Vibration
Seismic
Universal Building Code (UBC) - Seismic Code section 2312 Zone 4
Operating / Installed at Site
Vibration of 1.0 G Horizontal, 0.5 G Vertical at 15 to 120 Hz
See Seismic UBC for frequencies lower than 15 Hz.
Packaging
The standard Mark VI cabinets meet NEMA 1 requirements (similar to the IP-20
cabinet). Optional cabinets for special applications meet NEMA 12 (IP-54), NEMA
4 (IP-65), and NEMA 4X (IP-68) requirements. Redundant heat exchangers or air
conditioners, when required, can be supplied for the above optional cabinets.
UL Class 1 Division 2 Listed Boards

Certain boards used in the Mark VI are UL listed (E207685) for Class 1 Division 2,
Groups A, B, C, and D, Hazardous Locations, Temperature Class T4 using UL-1604.
Division 2 is described by NFPA 70 NEC 1999 Article 500 (NFPA - National Fire
Protection Assocation, NEC - National Electrical Code).
The Mark VI boards/board combinations that are listed may be found under file
number E207685 at the UL website and currently include:
x IS200VCMIH1B, H2B
x IS200DTCCH1A, IS200VTCCH1C
x IS200DRTDH1A, IS200VRTDH1C
x IS200DTAIH1A, IS200VAICH1C
x IS200DTAOH1A, IS200VAOCH1B
x IS200DTCIH1A, IS200VCRCH1B
x IS200DRLYH1B
x IS200DTURH1A, IS200VTURH1B
x IS200DTRTH1A
x IS200DSVOH2B, IS200VSVOH1B
x IS200DVIBH1B, IS200VVIBH1C
x IS200DSCBH1A, IS200VSCAH2A
x IS215UCVEH2A, M01A, M03A, M04A, M05A
x IS215UCVDH2A
x IS2020LVPSG1A
CHAPTER 5
Chapter 5 Installation and

Configuration
Installation Support .................................................................... 5-1
Equipment Receiving and Handling........................................... 5-5
Weights and Dimensions............................................................ 5-6
Power Requirements................................................................... 5-11
Installation Support Drawings .................................................... 5-12
Grounding................................................................................... 5-17
Cable Separation and Routing .................................................... 5-25
Cable Specifications ................................................................... 5-31
Connecting the System ............................................................... 5-35
Startup Checks............................................................................ 5-41
Startup and Configuration .......................................................... 5-45
Introduction
This chapter defines installation requirements for the Mark VI control system.
Specific topics include GE installation support, wiring practices, grounding, typical
equipment weights and dimensions, power dissipation and heat loss, and
environmental requirements.
Installation Support
GE’s system warranty provisions require both quality installation and that a qualified
service engineer be present at the initial equipment startup. To assist the customer,
GE offers both standard and optional installation support. Standard support consists
of documents that define and detail installation requirements. Optional support is
typically the advisory services that the customer may purchase.
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration x 5-1
Early Planning
To help ensure a fast and accurate exchange of data, a planning meeting with the
customer is recommended early in the project. This meeting should include the
customer’s project management and construction engineering representatives. It
should accomplish the following:
x Familiarize the customer and construction engineers with the equipment

x Set up a direct communication path between GE and the party making the
customer’s installation drawings
x Determine a drawing distribution schedule that meets construction and
installation needs
x Establish working procedures and lines of communication for drawing
distribution
GE Installation Documents
Installation documents consist of both general and requisition-specific information.
The cycle time and the project size determine the quantity and level of
documentation provided to the customer.
General information, such as this document, provides product-specific guidelines for

the equipment. They are intended as supplements to the requisition-specific
information.
Requisition documents, such as outline drawings and elementary diagrams provide

data specific to a custom application. Therefore, they reflect the customer’s specific
installation needs and should be used as the primary data source.
As-Shipped drawings consist primarily of elementary diagrams revised to incorporate

any revisions or changes made during manufacture and test. These are issued when
the equipment is ready to ship. Revisions made after the equipment ships, but before
start of installation, are sent as Field Change, with the changes circled and dated.
5-2 x Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Technical Advisory Options
To assist the customer, GE Energy offers the optional technical advisory services of
field engineers for:
x Review of customer’s installation plan

x Installation support
These services are not normally included as installation support or in basic startup
and commissioning services shown below. GE presents installation support options
to the customer during the contract negotiation phase.
Installation
Support
Startup
Begin
Installation
Commissioning
Complete
Installation
Begin Product Support - On going

Formal
Testing
System
Acceptance
Startup and Commissioning Services Cycle
Installation Plan and Support
It is recommended that a GE field representative review all installation/construction

drawings and the cable and conduit schedule when completed. This optional review
service ensures that the drawings meet installation requirements and are complete.
Optional installation support is offered: planning, practices, equipment placement,

and onsite interpretation of construction and equipment drawings. Engineering
services are also offered to develop transition and implementation plans to install and
commission new equipment in both new and existing (revamp) facilities.
Customer’s Conduit and Cable Schedule
The customer’s finished conduit and cable schedule should include:
x Interconnection wire list (optional)

x Level definitions
x Shield terminations
The cable and conduit schedule should define signal levels and classes of wiring (see
the section, Cable Separation and Routing). This information should be listed in a
separate column to help prevent installation errors.
The cable and conduit schedule should include the signal level definitions in the
instructions. This provides all level restriction and practice information needed
before installing cables.
The conduit and cable schedule should indicate shield terminal practice for each
shielded cable (refer to section, Connecting the System).
Equipment Receiving and Handling
Note For information on storing equipment, refer to Chapter 4
GE inspects and packs all equipment before shipping it from the factory. A packing
list, itemizing the contents of each package, is attached to the side of each case.
Upon receipt, carefully examine the contents of each shipment and check them with
the packing list. Immediately report any shortage, damage, or visual indication of
rough handling to the carrier. Then notify both the transportation company and GE
Energy. Be sure to include the serial number, part (model) number, GE requisition
number, and case number when identifying the missing or damaged part.
Immediately upon receiving the system, place it under adequate

cover to protect it from adverse conditions. Packing cases are not
suitable for outdoor or unprotected storage. Shock caused by
rough handling can damage electrical equipment. To prevent such
damage when moving the equipment, observe normal precautions
along with all handling instructions printed on the case.
If assistance is needed contact:
GE Energy
Post Sales Service
1501 Roanoke Blvd.
Salem, VA 24153-6492

Fax: + 1 540 387 8606 (All)
Note "+" indicates the international access code required when calling from outside
of the USA.
Weights and Dimensions
Cabinets
A single Mark VI cabinet is shown below. This can house three controllers used in a
system with all remote I/O. Dimensions, clearance, bolt holes, lifting lugs, and
temperature information is included.
Lift Bolts with 38 mm (1.5 in) dia

hole, should be left in place after
installation for Seismic Zone 4. If
removed, fill bolt holes.
Single Control Panel
Total Weight 180 kg (400lbs)

Window Cabinet Depth 610.0 mm (24 in)
1842 mm Cable Entry Space for wire entry

(72.5) in base of cabinet
Equipment Access Front and

rear access doors, no side access.
Air Front door has clear plastic
A
A Intake
window.
Service Conditions NEMA1

enclosure for standard indoor use.
610 mm
(24)
Six 16 mm (0.635 inch)

dia holes in base for
236.5
customers mounting
(9.31)
610 studs or bolts
(24.0) 236.5
(9.31)
View of base looking
down in direction "A"
475
(18.6875)
Typical Controller Cabinet
The controller cabinet is for small gas turbine systems (simplex only). It contains
control, I/O, and power supplies, and weighs 620 kg (1,367 lbs) complete.
One Panel Lineup (one door) Notes:

114.3
(4.5)
1. All dimensions are in mm and
(inches) unless noted.
2. Door swing clearance required
at front as shown. Doors open
38.1 105 degrees max. and are
(1.5) removable by removing hinge
pins.
3. All doors have provisions for
2400.3 pad locking.
(94.5) 57.9 4. Suggested mounting is 10 mm
(2.28) (0.375) expansion anchors.
Length must allow for 71.1 mm
A (2.8) case sill.
5. Cross hatching indicates
conduit entry with removable
covers.
865.63 6. Lift angles should remain in
925.58
(34.08) place to meet seismic UBC
(36.44)
906.53 zone 4 requirements.
(35.69) Approx. Door Swing
7. No mechanical clearance
(See Note 2)
required at back or ends.
8. Service conditions - indoor use
at rated minimum and maximum
348.49
(13.72) ambient temperatures.
184.15
(7.25) 6 holes, 16 mm (0.635 inch)
dia, in base for customers
mounting studs or bolts.
609.6
387.6 151.64 (24.0)
(15.26) (5.97)
(2.47) 387.6
(15.26) View of top looking down
62.74 254.0 in direction of arrow "A"
(10.0)
775.97 61.47
69.09 317.25
(30.55)
(2.72) (2.42) (12.49)
View of base looking down in direction of arrow "A"

The two-door cabinet shown in the following figure is for small gas turbine systems.
It contains control, I/O, and power supplies, and weighs approximately 720 kg
(1,590 lbs) complete. A 1600 mm wide version of this cabinet is available, and
weighs approximately 912 kg ( 2,010 lbs) complete.
Lift Angles with two 30.2 (1.18) Two Panel Lineup (Two Doors)
holes, should be left in place for
Seismic Zone 4, if removed, fill
bolt holes.
912 kg
Total Weight
(2010lbs)
Cabinet Depth 903.9 mm
(35.59 in)
Cable Entry Removable

covers top and bottom.
2400 mm Equipment Access Front

(94.5)
doors only, no rear or side
access. Door swing
clearance 977.9 mm (38.5).
Mounting Holes in Base

A Six 16 mm (0.635 in) dia
holes in base of the cabinet
for customers mounting
studs or bolts, for details
see GE dwgs.
1350 mm
(53.15)
Service Conditions
Standard NEMA1 enclosure
for indoor use.
387.5
(15.26)
387.5
(15.26) 6 holes, 16 mm (0.635 inch)
dia, in base for customers
mounting studs or bolts.
1225.0
62.5 (48.23)
(2.46)
62.5
(2.46)
View of base looking down in direction of arrow "A"
A typical lineup for a complete Mark VI system is shown in the following figure.
These cabinets contain controllers, I/O, and terminal boards, or they can contain just
the remote I/O and terminal boards.
Lift Angles front and back, Three Cabinet Lineup (Five Doors)
should be left in place for
Seismic Zone 4, if removed,
fill bolt holes. Total Weight 1770 kg
(3,900 lbs)
Cabinet Depth 602 mm
(23.7 in)
Cable Entry Removable

I/O I/O Control I/O Power covers top and bottom.
2324.3 mm
Equipment Access Front
(91.5)
doors only, no rear or side
access. Door swing
clearance 977.9 mm (38.5 in).
Mounting Holes in Base

A Six 16 mm (0.635 in) dia
holes in base of each of the
three cabinets for customers
mounting studs or bol ts, for
1600 mm 1600 mm
details see GE dwgs.
1000 mm
(62.99) (39.37) (62.99)
Service Conditions
4200 mm
(165.35)
Standard NEMA1 enclosure
for indoor use.
237.5
(9.35)
237.5
(9.35) 18 holes, 16 mm (0.635 in)
dia, in base for
62.5 customers mounting
1475.0 875.0 1475.0
(2.46) (34.45) (58.07) studs or bolts.
(58.07)
62.5 125.0 125.0 62.5

(2.46) (4.92) (4.92) (2.46)
View of base looking down in direction of ar row "A"

Typical Mark VI Cabinet Lineup
Control Console (Example)
The turbine control HMI computers can be table-mounted, or installed in the optional
control console shown in the following figure. The console is modular and
expandable from an 1828.8 mm version with two computers. A 5507 mm version
with four computers is shown. The console rests on feet and is not usually bolted to
the floor.
Full Console
5507 mm
(18 '- 0 13/16 ")
Short Console
1828.8 mm
(72 ")
itor Main Module

Mon le
d u
Mo
M
M oni t
od o r
ul e 2233.61 mm
Modular Desktop
(7 '- 3 15/16")
Phone Phone
Printer
Monitor Monitor Monitor Monitor
1181.1mm
Printer Undercounter Keyboards (46.5 ")
Pedestal
Turbine Control Console with Dimensions
Power Requirements
The Mark VI control cabinet can accept power from multiple power sources. Each
power input source (such as the dc and two ac sources) should feed through its own
external 30 A two-pole thermal magnetic circuit breaker before entering the Mark VI
enclosure. The breaker should be supplied in accordance with required site codes.
Power sources can be any combination of 24 V dc, 125 V dc and 120/240 V ac

sources. The Mark VI power distribution hardware is configured for the required
sources, and not all inputs may be available in a configuration. Input power is
converted to 28 V dc for operation of the control electronics. Other power is
distributed as needed for use with I/O signals.
Power requirements for a typical three-bay (five-door) 4200 mm cabinet containing

controllers, I/O, and terminal boards are shown in the following table. The power
shown is the heat generated in the cabinet, which must be dissipated. For the total
current draw, add the current supplied to external solenoids as shown in the notes
below the table. These external solenoids generate heat inside the cabinet. Heat Loss
in a typical 4200 mm (165 in) TMR cabinet is 1500 W fully loaded.
For a single control cabinet containing three controllers only (no I/O), the following
table shows the nominal power requirements. This power generates heat inside the
control cabinet. Heat Loss in a typical TMR controller cabinet is 300 W.
The current draw number in the following table is assuming a single voltage source,
if two or three sources are used, they share the load. The actual current draw from
each source cannot be predicted because of differences in the ac/dc converters. For
further details on the cabinet power distribution system, refer to Volume II of this
System Guide.
Power Requirements for Cabinets
Cabinet Voltage Frequency Current Draw
4200 mm 125 V dc 100 to 144 V dc N/A N/A 10.0 A dc (see Note 1)
Cabinet (see Note 5)
120 V ac 108 to 132 V ac 50/60 Hz ± 3 Hz 17.3 A rms (see Notes 2 and 4)
(see Note 6)
240 V ac 200 to 264 V ac 50/60 Hz ± 3 Hz 8.8 A rms (see Notes 3 and 4)
Controller 125 V dc 100 to 144 V dc N/A N/A 1.7 A dc
Cabinet (see Note 5)
120 V ac 108 to 132 V ac 50/60 Hz ± 3 Hz 3.8 A rms
(see Note 6)
240 V ac 200 to 264 V ac 50/60 Hz ± 3 Hz 1.9 A rms
* Notes on table (these are external and do not create cabinet heat load).
1 Add 0.5 A dc continuous for each 125 V dc external solenoid powered.

2 Add 6.0 A rms for a continuously powered ignition transformer (2 maximum).
3 Add 3.5 A rms for a continuously powered ignition transformer (2 maximum).
4 Add 2.0 A rms continuous for each 120 V ac external solenoid powered (in rush
10 A).
5 Supply voltage ripple is not to exceed 10 V peak-to-peak.
6 Supply voltage total harmonic distortion is not to exceed 5.0%.
Installation Support Drawings
This section describes GE installation support drawings. These drawings are usually
B-size AutoCAD drawings covering all hardware aspects of the system. A few
sample drawings include:
x System Topology
x Cabinet Layout
x Cabinet Layout
x Circuit Diagram
In addition to the installation drawings, site personnel will need the I/O Assignments
(IO Report).
GPS Plant Data Highway (GE PS)
(ICS)
Plant
SCADA 2 Local
21 Color inkjet Local
21 1 21 Laser printer GT
'' (ICS) Printer (ICS) GT
'' '' '' (ICS) Server
Server
ST Interface (ICS)
21 21 21 21 21 21 21 17 17
21
'' '' '' '' '' '' '' " "
''
Supervisor EWS (ICS) Historian OSM

HMI Server 1 HMI Server 2 Work Sta (ICS)
ST Interface (ICS) Unit 1 (ICS)
(GEPS) (GEPS )
Operator
IEC608 Console Engineering
70 Office
-5-104 ST OP Sta Printer
ST OP Sta Alarm printer Alarm printer
(ALSTOM)
(ALSTOM) CEMS Alarm Printer Alarm Printer
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I

Unit Data
Highway
* 350 logic and

150 analog
points.
g g
g
g g g g g
Centralog
Centralog C1 Gas Turbine Gas Turbine
CVS CVS S1 HRSG1 HRSG2 BOP 1 X1 MarkVI (ICS) Mark VI TMR Mark VI TMR
(ALSTOM)(ALSTOM) MarkVI (ICS) MarkVI (ICS) MarkVI (ICS)MarkVI (ICS) EX2100 Unit #1 Unit #2
Printer Air
Typical System Topology Showing Interfaces

ST/BOP H1 H2 by GE PS
Cooled
Alstom PEECC #1 PEECC #2
Cond.
P320 Steam Turbine
Control Electrical Room GEC
Unit #3 Modbus
Modbus
Aux Boiler
Gas Chromatograph #1 Data Water g g g g
via Gas Reduction Sta PLC Treatment
(ERM)
(400 PTS)
Serial
Gas Chromatograph #2 EX2100 LS2100 EX2100 LS2100
Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration x 5-13

GT #1 LEC GT #2 LEC
Typical I/O Cabinet Drawing showing Dimensions, Cable Access, Lifting Angles, and Mounting
5-14 Chapter 5 Installation GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I

Panel Layout with Protection Module
Mark VI Control System Guide GEH-6421H Volume I Chapter 5 Installation 5-15

1J4
1I5 1J5
I/O Panel with Terminal Boards and Power Supplies
5-16 Chapter 5 Installation GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I

Grounding
This section defines grounding and signal-referencing practices for the Mark VI
system. This can be used to check for proper grounding and Signal Reference
Structure (SRS) after the equipment is installed. If checking the equipment after the
power cable has been connected or after power has been applied to the cabling, be
sure to follow all safety precautions for working around high voltages.
To prevent electric shock, make sure that all power supplies to

the equipment are turned off. Then discharge and ground the
equipment before performing any act requiring physical contact
with the electrical components or wiring. If test equipment
cannot be grounded to the equipment under test, the test
equipment's case must be shielded to prevent contact by
personnel.
Equipment Grounding
Equipment grounding and signal referencing have two distinct purposes:
x Equipment grounding protects personnel and equipment from risk of electrical

shock or burn, fire, or other damage caused by ground faults or lightning.
x Signal referencing helps protect equipment from the effects of internal and
external electrical noise such as from lightning or switching surges.
Installation practices must simultaneously comply with all codes in effect at the time
and place of installation, and practices, which improve the immunity of the
installation. In addition to codes, IEEE Std 142-1991 IEEE Recommended Practice
for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems and IEEE Std 1100-
1992 IEEE Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Sensitive
Electronic Equipment provide guidance in the design and implementation of the
system. Code requirements for safety of personnel and equipment must take
precedence in the case of any conflict with noise control practices.
The Mark VI system has no special or nonstandard installation requirements, if

installed in compliance with all of the following:
x The NEC® or local codes

x With a signal reference structure (SRS) designed to meet IEEE Std 1100
x Interconnected with signal/power-level separation as defined later
This section provides equipment grounding and bonding guidelines for control and
I/O cabinets. These guidelines also apply to motors, transformers, brakes, and
reactors. Each of these devices should have its own grounding conductor going
directly to the building ground grid.
x Ground each cabinet or cabinet lineup to the equipment ground at the source of
power feeding it.
– See NEC Article 250 for sizing and other requirements for the
equipment grounding conductor.
– For dc circuits only, the NEC allows the equipment grounding
conductor to be run separate from the circuit conductors.
x With certain restrictions, the NEC allows the metallic raceways or cable trays
containing the circuit conductors to serve as the equipment grounding
conductor:
– This use requires that they form a continuous, low-impedance path
capable of conducting anticipated fault current.
– This use requires bonding across loose-fitting joints and discontinuities.
See NEC Article 250 for specific bonding requirements. This chapter
includes recommendations for high frequency bonding methods.
– If metallic raceways or cable trays are not used as the primary
equipment grounding conductor, they should be used as a
supplementary equipment grounding conductor. This enhances the
safety of the installation and improves the performance of the Signal
Reference Structure (see later).
x The equipment grounding connection for the Mark VI cabinets is plated copper
bus or stub bus. This connection is bonded to the cabinet enclosure using bolting
that keeps the conducting path’s resistance at 1 ohm or less.
x There should be a bonding jumper across the ground bus or floor sill between all
shipping splits. The jumper may be a plated metal plate.
x The non-current carrying metal parts of the equipment covered by this section
should be bonded to the metallic support structure or building structure
supporting this equipment. The equipment mounting method may satisfy this
requirement. If supplementary bonding conductors are required, size them the
same as equipment grounding conductors.
Building Grounding System

This section provides guidelines for the building grounding system requirements. For
specific requirements, refer to NEC article 250 under the heading Grounding
Electrode System.
The guidelines below are for metal framed buildings. For non-metal framed
buildings, consult the GE factory.
The ground electrode system should be composed of steel reinforcing bars in

building column piers bonded to the major building columns.
x A buried ground ring should encircle the building. This ring should be
interconnected with the bonding conductor running between the steel reinforcing
bars and the building columns.
x All underground, metal water piping should be bonded to the building system at
the point where the piping crosses the ground ring.
x NEC Article 250 requires that separately derived systems (transformers) be
grounded to the nearest effectively grounded metal building structural member.
x Braze or exothermically weld all electrical joints and connections to the building
structure, where practical. This type of connection keeps the required good
electrical and mechanical properties from deteriorating over time.
Signal Reference Structure (SRS)
On modern equipment communicating at high bandwidths, signals are typically
differential and/or isolated electrically or optically. The modern SRS system replaces
the older single-point grounding system with a much more robust system. The SRS
system is also easier to install and maintain.
The goal of the SRS is to hold the electronics at or near case potential to prevent
unwanted signals from disturbing operation. The following conditions must all be
met by an SRS:
x Bonding connections to the SRS must be less than 1/20 wavelength of the
highest frequency to which the equipment is susceptible. This prevents standing
waves. In modern equipment using high-frequency digital electronics,
frequencies as high as 500 MHz should be considered, which translates to about
30 mm (1in).
x SRS must be a good high frequency conductor. (Impedance at high frequencies
consists primarily of distributed inductance and capacitance.) Surface area is
more important than cross-sectional area because of skin effect. Conductivity is
less important (steel with large surface area is better than copper with less
surface area).
x SRS must consist of multiple paths. This lowers the impedance and the
probability of wave reflections and resonance
In general, a good signal referencing system can be obtained with readily available
components in an industrial site. All of the items listed below can be included in an
SRS:
x Metal building structural members

x Galvanized steel floor decking under concrete floors
x Woven wire steel reinforcing mesh in concrete floors
x Steel floors in pulpits and power control rooms
x Bolted grid stringers for cellular raised floors
x Steel floor decking or grating on line-mounted equipment
x Galvanized steel culvert stock
x Metallic cable tray systems
x Raceway (cableway) and raceway support systems
x Embedded steel floor channels
Note All provisions may not apply to an installation.
Connection of the protective earth terminal to the installation ground system must
first comply with code requirements and second provide a low-impedance path for
high-frequency currents, including lightning surge currents. This grounding
conductor must not provide, either intentionally or inadvertently, a path for load
current. The system should be designed such that in so far as is possible the control
system is not an attractive path for induced currents from any source. This is best
accomplished by providing a ground plane that is large and low impedance, so that
the entire system remains at the same potential. A metallic system (grid) will
accomplish this much better than a system that relies upon earth for connection. At
the same time all metallic structures in the system should be effectively bonded both
to the grid and to each other, so that bonding conductors rather than control
equipment become the path of choice for noise currents of all types.
In the Mark VI cabinet, the electronics cabinet is insulated from the chassis and
bonded at one point. The grounding recommendations shown in the following figure.
Call for the equipment grounding conductor to be 120 mm2 (AWG 4/0) gauge wire,
connected to the building ground system. The Functional Earth (FE) is bonded at one
point to the Protective Earth (PE) ground using two 25 mm2 (4 AWG) green/yellow
bonding jumpers.
Control & I/O

Electronics
Panel
Mark VIe
Cabinet
Functional
Earth
Two 25 mm sq. (4 AWG)
(FE) Green/Yellow insulated
bonding jumpers
Equipment grounding conductor,
Identified 120 mm sq. (4/0 AWG),
insulated wire, short a distance
as possible Protective Conductor Terminal
Protective Earth (PE)
PE
Building Ground
System
Grounding Recommendations for Single Mark VI Cabinet
If acceptable by local codes, the bonding jumpers may be removed and a 4/0 AWG
identified insulated wire run from FE to the nearest accessible point on the building
ground system, or to another ground point as required by the local code. The distance
between the two connections to building ground should be approximately 4.6 m (15
ft), but not less than 3 m (10 ft).
Grounding for a larger system is shown in following figure. Here the FE is still
connected to the control electronics section, but the equipment-grounding conductor
is connected to the center cabinet chassis. Individual control and I/O panels are
connected with bolted plates.
On a cable carrying conductors and/or shielded conductors, the armor is an

additional current carrying braid that surrounds the internal conductors. This type
cable can be used to carry control signals between buildings. The armor carries
secondary lightning-induced earth currents, bypassing the control wiring, thus
avoiding damage or disturbance to the control system. At the cable ends and at any
strategic places between, the armor is grounded to the building ground through the
structure of the building with a 360° mechanical and electrical fitting. The armor is
normally terminated at the entry point to a metal building or machine. Attention to
detail in installing armored cables can significantly reduce induced lightning surges
in control wiring.
Control
I/O Panel Electronics I/O Panel
Panel
Panel Grounding
Connection Plates
Functional
Earth Two 25 mm sq. 4AWG
(FE) Green/Yellow Bonding
Jumper wires
Equipment grounding conductor,

Identified 120 mm sq. (4/0 AWG), Protective Conductor Terminal
insulated wire, short a distance (Chassis Safety Ground plate)
as possible
PE
Building Ground System

Grounding Recommendations for Mark VI Cabinet Lineup
Notes on Grounding
Bonding to building structure - The cable tray support system typically

provides many bonding connections to building structural steel. If this is not the case,
supplemental bonding connections must be made at frequent intervals from the cable
tray system to building steel.
Bottom connected equipment - Cable tray installations for bottom connected

equipment should follow the same basic principles as those illustrated for top
connected equipment, paying special attention to good high frequency bonding
between the cable tray and the equipment.
Cable spacing - Maintain cable spacing between signal levels in cable drops, as
recommended here.
Conduit sleeves - Where conduit sleeves are used for bottom-entry cables, the
sleeves should be bonded to the floor decking and equipment enclosure with short
bonding jumpers.
Embedded conduits - Bond all embedded conduits to the enclosure with multiple
bonding jumper connections following the shortest possible path.
Galvanized steel sheet floor decking - Floor decking can serve as a high
frequency signal reference plane for equipment located on upper floors. With typical
building construction, there will be a large number of structural connections between
the floor decking and building steel. If this is not the case, then an electrical bonding
connection must be added between the floor decking and building steel. These added
connections need to be as short as possible and of sufficient surface area to be low
impedance at high frequencies.
High frequency bonding jumpers - Jumpers must be short, less than 500 mm
(20 in) and good high frequency conductors. Thin, wide metal strips are best with
length not more than three times width for best performance. Jumpers can be
copper, aluminum, or steel. Steel has the advantage of not creating galvanic half-
cells when bonded to other steel parts.
Jumpers must make good electrical contact with both the enclosure and the signal
reference structure. Welding is best. If a mechanical connection is used, each end
should be fastened with two bolts or screws with star washers backed up by large
diameter flat washers.
Each enclosure must have two bonding jumpers of short, random lengths. Random
lengths are used so that parallel bonding paths are of different quarter wavelength
multiples. Do not fold bonding jumpers or make sharp bends.
Metallic cable tray - System must be installed per NEC Article 318 with signal
level spacing per the next section. This serve as a signal reference structure between
remotely connected pieces of equipment. The large surface area of cable trays
provides a low impedance path at high frequencies.
Metal framing channel - Metal framing channel cable support systems also serves
as part of the signal reference structure. Make certain that channels are well bonded
to the equipment enclosure, cable tray, and each other, with large surface area
connections to provide low impedance at high frequencies.
Noise-sensitive cables - Try to run noise-sensitive cables tight against a vertical
support to allow this support to serve as a reference plane. Cables that are extremely
susceptible to noise should be run in a metallic conduit, preferably ferrous. Keep
these cables tight against the inside walls of the metallic enclosure, and well away
from higher-level cables.
Power cables - Keep single-conductor power cables from the same circuit tightly
bundled together to minimize interference with nearby signal cables. Keep 3-phase
ac cables in a tight triangular configuration.
Woven wire mesh - Woven wire mesh can serve as a high frequency signal
reference grid for enclosures located on floors not accessible from below. Each
adjoining section of mesh must be welded together at intervals not exceeding 500
mm (20 in) to create a continuous reference grid. The woven wire mesh must be
bonded at frequent intervals to building structural members along the floor
perimeter.
Conduit terminal at cable trays - To provide the best shielding, conduits

containing level L cables (see Leveling channels) should be terminated to the tray's
side rails (steel solid bottom) with two locknuts and a bushing. Conduit should be
terminated to ladder tray side rails with approved clamps.
Where it is not possible to connect conduit directly to tray (such as with large
conduit banks), conduit must be terminated with bonding bushings and bonded to
tray with short bonding jumpers.
Leveling channels - If the enclosure is mounted on leveling channels, bond the

channels to the woven wire mesh with solid-steel wire jumpers of approximately the
same gauge as the woven wire mesh. Bolt the enclosure to leveling steel, front and
rear.
Signal and power levels - See section, Cable Separation and Routing for
guidelines.
Solid-bottom tray - Use steel solid bottom cable trays with steel covers for low-
level signals most susceptible to noise.
Level P
Level L
Solid
Bottom
Tray
Bond leveling channels to the

woven wire mesh with solid steel
Enclosure wire jumpers of approximately the
same gage as the wire mesh.
Jumpers must be short, less than

200 mm (8 in). Weld to mesh and
leveling steel at random intervals of
300 - 500 mm (12-20 in).
Bolt
Bolt the enclosure to the leveling
Leveling steel, front and rear. See site
Channels specific GE Equipment Outline
Wire dwgs. Refer to Section 6 for
Mesh examples.
Enclosure and Cable Tray Installation Guidelines
Cable Separation and Routing
This section provides recommended cabling practices to reduce electrical noise.
These include signal/power level separation and cable routing guidelines.
Note Electrical noise from cabling of various voltage levels can interfere with
microprocessor-based control systems, causing a malfunction. If a situation at the
installation site is not covered in this document, or if these guidelines cannot be met,
please contact GE before installing the cable.
Early planning enables the customer’s representatives to design adequate separation

of embedded conduit. On new installations, sufficient space should be allowed to
efficiently arrange mechanical and electrical equipment. On revamps, level rules
should be considered during the planning stages to help ensure correct application
and a more trouble-free installation.
Signal/Power Level Definitions

Signal/power carrying cables are categorized into four defining levels: low, medium,
high, and power. Each level can include classes.
Low-Level Signals (Level L)
Low-level signals are designated as level L. In general these consist of:
x Analog signals 0 through ±50 V dc, <60 mA

x Digital (logic-level) signals less than 28 V dc
x 4 – 20 mA current loops
x Ac signals less than 24 V ac
The following are specific examples of level L signals used in the Mark VI cabling:
x All analog and digital signals including LVDTs, Servos, RTDs, Analog Inputs
and Outputs, and Pyrometer signals
x Thermocouples are in a special category (Level LS) because they generate
millivolt signals with very low current.
x Network communication bus signals: Ethernet, IONet, UDH, PDH, RS-232C,
and RS-422
x Phone circuits
Note Signal input to analog and digital blocks or to programmable logic control
(PLC)-related devices should be run as shielded twisted-pair (for example, input
from RTDs).
Medium-Level Signals (Level M)
Medium-level signals are designated as level M. Magnetic pickup signals are

examples of level M signals used in the Mark VI. These signals consist of:
x Analog signals less than 50 V dc with less than 28 V ac ripple and less than 0.6
A current
x 28 V dc light and switching circuits
x 24 V dc switching circuits
x Analog pulse rate circuits
Note Level M and level L signals may be run together only inside the control
cabinet.
High-Level Signals (Level H)
High-level signals are designated as level H. These signals consist of:
x Dc switching signals greater than 28 V dc

x Analog signals greater than 50 V dc with greater than 28 V ac ripple
x Ac feeders less than 20 A, without motor loads
The following are specific examples of level H signals used in Mark VI cabling:
x Contact inputs
x Relay outputs
x Solenoid outputs
x PT and CT circuits
Note Flame detector (GM) type signals, 335 V dc, and Ultraviolet detectors are a
special category (Level HS). Special low capacitance twisted shielded pair wiring is
required.
Power (Level P)
Power wiring is designated as level P. This consists of ac and dc buses 0 – 600 V

with currents 20 A – 800 A. The following are specific examples of level P signals
used in plant cabling:
x Motor armature loops

x Generator armature loops
x Ac power input and dc outputs
x Primaries and secondaries of transformers above 5 kVA
x SCR field exciter ac power input and dc output
x Static exciters (regulated and unregulated) ac power and dc output
x 250 V shop bus
x Machine fields
Class Codes
Certain conditions can require that specific wires within a level be grouped in the
same cable. This is indicated by class codes, defined as follows:
S Special handling of specified levels can require special spacing of conduit and
trays. Check dimension chart for levels. These wires include:
x Signals from COMM field and line resistors

x Signals from line shunts to regulators
U High voltage potential unfused wires over 600 V dc
PS Power greater than 600 V dc and/or greater than 800 A
If there is no code, there are no grouping restrictions
Marking Cables to Identify Levels
It is good practice to mark the cableway cables, conduit, and trays in a way that
clearly identifies their signal/power levels. This helps ensure correct level separation
for proper installation. It can also be useful during equipment maintenance.
Cables can be marked by any means that makes the level easy to recognize (for
example, coding or numbering). Conduit and trays should be marked at junction
points or at periodic intervals.
Cableway Spacing Guidelines

Spacing (or clearance) between cableways (trays and conduit) depends on the level
of the wiring inside them. For correct level separation when installing cable, the
customer should apply the general practices along with the specific spacing values
for tray/tray, conduit/tray, conduit/conduit, cable/conduit, and cable/cable distances
as discussed below.
General Practices
The following general practices should be used for all levels of cabling:
x All cables of like signal levels and power levels must be grouped together in like
cableways.
x In general, different levels must run in separate cableways, as defined in the
different classes. Intermixing cannot be allowed, except as noted by exception.
x Interconnecting wire runs should carry a level designation.
x If wires are the same level and same type signal, group those wires from one
cabinet to any one specific location together in multiconductor cables.
x When unlike signals must cross in trays or conduit, cross them in 90° angles at
maximum spacing. Where it is not possible to maintain spacing, place a
grounded steel barrier between unlike levels at the crossover point.
x When entering terminal equipment where it is difficult to maintain the specific
spacing guidelines shown in the following tables, keep parallel runs to a
minimum, not to exceed 1.5 m (5 ft) in the overall run.
x Where the tables show tray or conduit spacing as 0, the levels can be run
together. Spacing for other levels must be based on the worst condition.
x Trays for all levels should be galvanized steel and solidly grounded with good
ground continuity. Conduit should be metal to provide shielding.
The following general practices should be used for specific levels of cabling:
x When separate trays are impractical, levels L and M can combined in a common
tray if a grounded steel barrier separates levels. This practice is not as effective
as tray separation, and may require some rerouting at system startup. If levels L
and M are run side-by-side, a 50 mm (2-inch) minimum spacing is
recommended.
x Locate levels L and M trays and conduit closest to the control panels.
x Trays containing level L and level M wiring should have solid galvanized steel
bottoms and sides and be covered to provide complete shielding. There must be
positive and continuous cover contact to side rails to avoid high-reluctance air
gaps, which impair shielding.
x Trays containing levels other than L and M wiring can have ventilation slots or
louvers.
x Trays and conduit containing levels L, M, and H(S) should not be routed parallel
to high power equipment enclosures of 100 kV and larger at a spacing of less
than 1.5 m (5 ft) for trays, and 750 mm (2-1/2 ft) for conduit.
x Level H and H(S) can be combined in the same tray or conduit but cannot be
combined in the same cable.
x Level H(S) is listed only for information since many customers want to isolate
unfused high voltage potential wires.
x Do not run levels H and H(S) in the same conduit as level P.
x Where practical for level P and/or P(S) wiring, route the complete power circuit
between equipment in the same tray or conduit. This minimizes the possibility
of power and control circuits encircling each other.
Tray and Conduit Spacing
The following tables show the recommended distances between metal trays and
metal conduit carrying cables with various signal levels, and the cable-to cable
distance for non-metal conduit and trays.
Table 1. Spacing Between Metal Cable Trays, inches(mm)
Level L M H H(S) P P(S) Recommended minimum distances between

trays from the top of one tray to the bottom of
L 0 1(25) 6(150) 6(150) 26(660) 26(660) the tray above, or between the sides of
M 0 6(150) 6(150) 18(457) 26(660) adjacent trays.
H 0 0 8(302) 12(305)
H(S) 0 8(302) 12(305) Table 1 also applies if the distance between
P 0 0 trays and power equipment up to 100 kVA is
P(S) 0 less than 1.5 m (5 ft).
Table 2. Spacing Between Metal Trays and Conduit, inches(mm)
Level L M H H(S) P P(S)

L 0 1(25) 4(102) 4(102) 18(457) 18(457) Recommended minimum distance between the
M 0 4(102) 4(102) 12(305) 18(457) outside surfaces of metal trays and conduit.
H 0 0 4(102) 8(203)
H(S) 0 4(102) 8(203) Use Table 1 if the distance between trays or
P 0 0 conduit and power equipment up to 100 kVA is
P(S) 0 less than 1.5 m (5 ft).
Table 3. Spacing Between Metal Conduit Runs, inches(mm)

M 0 3(76) 3(76) 9(229) 12(305) outside surfaces of metal conduit run in banks.
H 0 0 3(76) 6(150)
H(S) 0 3(76) 6(150)
P 0 0
P(S) 0
Table 4. Spacing Between Cable and Steel Conduit, inches(mm)

M 0 4(102) 4(102) 20(508) 48(1219) outside surfaces of cables and metal conduit.
H 0 0 12(305) 18(457)
H(S) 0 12(305) 18(457)
P 0 0
P(S) 0
Table 5. Spacing Between Cable and Cable, inches(mm)

M 0 6(150) 6(150) 28(711) 84(2134) outside surfaces of cables.
H 0 0 20(508) 29(737)
H(S) 0 20(508) 29(737)
P 0 0
P(S) 0
Cable, Tray, and Conduit Spacing
Cable Routing Guidelines
Pullboxes and Junction Boxes
Keep signal/power levels separate inside pullboxes and junction boxes. Use
grounded steel barriers to maintain level spacing. Tray-to-conduit transition spacing
and separation are a potential source of noise. Be sure to cross unlike levels at right
angles and maintain required separation. Protect transition areas per the level spacing
recommendations.
Transitional Areas
When entering or leaving conduit or trays, make sure that cables of unlike levels do
not intermix. If the installation needs parallel runs over 1.5 m (5 ft), grounded steel
barriers may be needed for proper level separation.
Cabling for Retrofits
Reducing electrical noise on retrofits requires careful planning. Lower and higher
levels should never encircle each other or run parallel for long distances. It is
practical to use existing conduit or trays as long as the level spacing can be
maintained for the full length of the run. Existing cables are generally of high voltage
potential and noise producing. Therefore, route levels L and M in a path apart from
existing cables when possible. Use barriers in existing pullboxes and junction boxes
for level L wiring to minimize noise potential. Do not loop level L signals around
high control or level P conduit or trays.
Conduit Around and Through Machinery Housing
Care should be taken to plan level spacing on both embedded and exposed conduit in
and around machinery. Runs containing mixed levels should be minimized to 1.5 m
(5 ft) or less in the overall run. Conduit running through and attached to machinery
housing should follow level spacing recommendations. This should be discussed
with the contractor early in the project.
Trunnions entering floor mounted operator station cabinets should be kept as short as
possible when used as cableways. This helps minimize parallel runs of unlike levels
to a maximum of 1.5 m (5 ft) before entering the equipment. Where different
signal/power levels are running together for short distances, each level should be
connected by cord ties, barriers, or some logical method. This prevents intermixing.
RF Interference
To prevent radio frequency (RF) interference, take care when routing power cables
in the vicinity of radio-controlled devices (for example, cranes) and audio/visual
systems (public address and closed-circuit television).
Suppression
Unless specifically noted otherwise, suppression (for example, a snubber) is required

on all inductive devices controlled by an output. This suppression minimizes noise
and prevents damage caused by electrical surges. Standard Mark VI relay and
solenoid output boards have suppression.
Cable Specifications
Wire Sizes
The recommended current carrying capacity for flexible wires up to 1,000 V, PVC
insulated, based on DIN VDE 0298 Part 4, is shown in following table. Cross section
references of mm2 versus AWG are based on EN 60204 Part 1, VDE 0113 Part 1.
NFPA 70 (NEC) may require larger wire sizes based on the type of wire used.
Current Cross Section Wire Size Circular
Amp Area (mm2) AWG No. mils
15 0.75
0.82 18
19 1
1.31 16
24 1.5
2.08 14
32 2.5
3.31 12
42 4
5.26 10
54 6
8.36 8
73 10
13.3 6
98 16
21.15 4
129 25
33.6 2
158 35 69,073
42.4 1
198 50 92,756
53.5 1/0
67.4 2/0
245 70 138,146
85 3/00
292 95 187,484
107 4/00
344 120 236,823
391 150 296,000
448 185 365,102
528 240 473,646
608 300 592,057
726 400 789,410
General Specifications
x Maximum length (unless specified) 300 m (1000 ft)
x Individual minimum stated wire size is for electrical needs
x Clamp-type terminals accept two 14 AWG wires or one 12 AWG wire
x Mark VI terminal blocks accept two 12 AWG wires
x PTs and CTs use 10 AWG stranded wire
Surface Ambient temperature .......................30oC (86 oF)

Maximum temperature .................. 70oC (158 oF)
Temperature rise ............................ 40oC (104 °F)
Installation ........................Free in air, see sketch
d
Wire
Insulator
It is standard practice to use shielded cable with control equipment. Shielding

provides the following benefits:
x Generally, shielding protects a wire or grouping of wires from its environment.

x Because of the capacitive coupling effect between two sources of potential
energy, low-level signals may require shielding to prevent signal interference.
Low Voltage Shielded Cable

This section defines minimum requirements for low voltage shielded cable. These
guidelines should be used along with the level practices and routing guidelines
provided previously.
Note The specifications listed are for sensitive computer-based controls. Cabling
for less sensitive controls should be considered on an individual basis.
Single-Conductor Shielded Cable, Rated 300 V

x 18 AWG minimum, stranded single-conductor insulated with minimum 85% to
100% coverage shield
x Protective insulating cover for shield
x Wire rating: 300 V minimum
x Maximum capacitance between conductor and shield: 492 pF/m (150 pF/ft)
Multi-conductor Shielded Cable, Rated 300 V
x 18 AWG minimum, stranded conductors individually insulated per cable with
minimum 85% to 100% coverage shield
x Mutual capacitance between conductors with shield grounded: 394 pF/m (120
pF/ft) maximum
x Capacitance between one conductor and all other conductors and grounded
shield: 213 pF/m (65 pF/ft)
Shielded Twisted-Pair Cable, Rated 300 V

x Two 18 AWG minimum, stranded conductors individually insulated with
minimum 85% to 100% coverage shield
x Mutual capacitance between conductors with shield grounded: 394 pF/m (120
pF/ft) maximum
x Capacitance between one conductor and the other conductor and grounded
shield: 213 pF/m (65 pF/ft) maximum
Coaxial Cable RG-58/U (for IONet and UDH)

x 20 AWG stranded tinned copper conductor with FEP insulation with a 95%
coverage braid shield
x Protective Flamarrest insulating jacket for shield
x Normal attenuation per 30.48 m (100 ft): 4.2 dB at 100 MHz
x Nominal capacitance: 50.5 pF/m (25.4 pF/ft)
x Nominal impedance: 50 :
x Example supplier: Belden Coax Cable no. 82907
UTP Cable (for Data Highways)

x High quality, category 5 UTP cable, for 10BaseTX Ethernet
x Four pairs of twisted 22 or 24 AWG wire
x Protective plastic jacket
x Impedance: 75 – 165 :
x Connector: RJ45 UTP connector for solid wire
RS-232C Communications
x Modbus communication from the HMI: for short distances use RS-232C cable;
for distances over 15 m (50 feet) add a modem
x Modbus communication from the controller COM2 port: for use on small
systems, RS-232C cable with Micro-D adapter cable (GE catalog No.
336A4929G1). For longer distances over 15 m (50 feet), add a modem.
Note For more information on Modbus and wiring, refer to Chapter 3, Networks.
Instrument Cable, 4 – 20 mA
x With Tefzel® insulation and jacket: Belden catalog no. 85231 or equivalent
x With plastic jacket: Belden catalog no. 9316 or equivalent
Note Belden refers to the Belden Wire & Cable Company, a subsidiary of Belden,
Inc.
Fiber-optic Cable, Outdoor Use (Data Highways)

x Multimode fiber, 62.5/125 micron core/cladding, 850 nm infra-red light
x Four sub-cables with elastomeric jackets and aramid strength members, and
plastic outer jacket
x Cable construction: flame retardant pressure extruded polyurethane,
Cable diameter: 8.0 mm, Cable weight: 65 kg/km
x Optical Cable Corporation Part No. RK920929-A
Fiber-Optic Cable, Heavy Duty Outdoor Use

x Four sub-cables with elastomeric jackets and aramid strength members, and
armored outer jacket
x Cable construction: flame retardant pressure extruded polyurethane. Armored
with 0.155 mm steel tape, wound with 2 mm overlap, and covered with
polyethylene outer jacket, 1 to 1.5 mm thick.
Cable diameter: 13.0 mm, Cable weight: 174 kg/km
x Optical Cable Corporation Part No. RK920929-A-CST
Fiber-Optic Cable, Indoor Use (Data Highways)

x Twin plastic jacketed cables (Zipcord) for indoor use
x Cable construction: tight-buffered fibers surrounded by aramid strength
members with a flexible flame retardant jacket
Cable dimensions: 2.9 mm dia x 5.8 mm width, Cable weight:15 kg/km
x Siecor Corporation Part No. 002K58-31141
Connecting the System
The panels come complete with the internal cabling. This cabling will probably
never need to be replaced. I/O cables between the control modules and interface
modules and the I/O racks are run in plastic racks behind the mounting plates as
shown in the following figure.
Power cables from the Power Distribution Module to the control modules, interface
modules, and terminal boards are secured by plastic cable cleats located behind the
riser brackets. Most of this cabling is covered by the mounting brackets and plates.
Plate
Mounting Panel
Lexan Tray for
I/O Cables
I/O Cable
3/4 inch Cable
Cleat for Power
Cables
Riser
Bracket
1 inch Cable Cleat

Terminal
Board
Insulating Plate
Cable Trays and Mounting Brackets for Terminal Boards
The upper diagram in the following figure shows routing of the I/O
cables and power cables in a typical 1600 mm cabinet line-up.
Dotted outlines show where terminal boards and I/O modules will
be mounted on top. These cables are not visible from the front.
The following figure shows routing of IONet cables and customer

field wiring to the I/O modules and terminal boards. This wiring is
visible and accessible from the front so that boards and field wiring
can be replaced.
Tray I/O Powr
Tray for I/O Cables

Tray for I/O Power
R
PDM
Tray for 115 V dc Power

S
Tray for I/O Cables
Tray for I/O Cables
T Main
125 V dc
Supply
Typical Power and I/O Cabling Behind Mounting Brackets
Tie wrap Wiring to

vertical perforated
side plate
IM
R
IM
S
IM
T
Customer IONet Customer

I/O Wiring Cables I/O Wiring
Typical Communication and Customer I/O Wiring in Front of Mounting Brackets
Typical Cabinet Wiring and Cabling
I/O Wiring
I/O connections are made to terminal blocks on the Mark VI terminal boards. The
various terminal boards and types of I/O devices used are described in Volume II of
the system guide. Shielding connections to the shield bar located to the left of the
terminal board is shown in the following figure below.
Grounded Shield Bar
Shield
Terminal
Block
Shield
Terminal
Board
Shield
Cable
I/O Wiring Shielding Connections to Ground Bar at Terminal Board
The grounded shield bars provide an equipotential ground plane to which all cable
shield drain wires should be connected, with as short a pigtail as practical. The
length should not exceed 5 cm (2 in) to reduce the high-frequency impedance of the
shield ground. Reducing the length of the pigtail should take precedence over
reducing the length of exposed wire within the cabinet. Pigtails should not be
connected except at the grounding bars provided, to avoid loops and maintain a
radial grounding system. Shields should be insulated up to the pigtail. In most cases
shields should not be connected at the far end of the cable, to avoid circulating
power-frequency currents induced by pickup.
A small capacitor may be used to ground the far end of the shield, producing a
hybrid ground system, and may improve noise immunity. Shields must continue
across junction boxes between the control and the turbine, and should match up with
the signal they are shielding. Avoid hard grounding the shield at the junction boxes,
but small capacitors to ground at junction boxes may improve immunity.
Terminal Block Features

Many of the terminal boards in the Mark VI use a 24-position pluggable barrier
terminal block (179C9123BB). These terminal blocks have the following features:
x Made from a polyester resin material with 130°C (266 °F) rating
x Terminal rating is 300 V, 10 A, UL class C general industry, 0.375 in (9.525
mm) creepage, 0.250 in (6.35 mm) strike
x UL and CSA code approved
x Screws finished in zinc clear chromate and contacts in tin
x Each block screw is number labeled 1 through 24 or 25 through 48 in white
x Recommended screw tightening torque is 8 in lbs.
Power System
The 125 V dc supply must be installed and maintained such that it meets
requirements of IEC 61010-1 cl. 6.3.1 to be considered Not Hazardous Live. The
BJS berg jumper must be installed in the PDM to provide the monitored ground
reference for the 125 V dc. If there are multiple PDMs connected to the dc mains,
only one has the Berg jumper installed. If the dc mains are connected to a 125 V dc
supply (battery) it must be floated, that is isolated from ground.
Note The DS200TCPD board in the PDM must provide the single, monitored,
ground reference point for the 125 V dc system. Refer to section, Wiring and Circuit
Checks.
Installing Ethernet
The Mark VI modules communicate over several different Ethernet LANs (refer to
Chapter 3 Networks). IONet uses Ethernet 10Base2 cable. The data highways use a
number of 10BaseT segments, and some 10Base2 segments and fiber-optic
segments. These guidelines comply with IEEE 802.3 standards for Ethernet. For
details on installing individual Ethernet LAN components, refer to the instructions
supplied by the manufacturer of that equipment.
Installing Ethernet 10Base2 Coax Cable for IONet
10Base2 cable (Thinwire™) is a 20 AWG copper-centered wire used for connecting

the interface modules and control modules. Use the following guidelines when
installing 10Base2:
x The maximum length of a 10Base2 coax cable segment is 185 m (610 ft)
x Both ends of each segment should be terminated with a 50 : resistor
x All connectors and terminators must be isolated from ground to prevent ground
loops (grounding of shield controlled by Mark VI boards)
x The maximum length of cable is 925 m (3035 ft) using the IEEE 5-4-3 rule
x Maximum length of a transceiver and repeater cable: 50 m (164 ft)
x Minimum distance between transceivers: 2.5 m (8.2 ft)
x Maximum device connections (taps) per segment: 100, including repeater taps
x In systems with repeaters, transceivers should have the SQE test (heartbeat)
switch disabled
Preventing Reflections
Short segments should have no breaks with 50 : terminations on both ends. This
produces minimal reflections from cable impedance discontinuities.
A coaxial barrel connector is used to join smaller segments. However, the joint
between the two segments makes a signal reflection point. This is caused by
impedance discontinuity from the batch-to-batch impedance tolerance of the
manufactured cable. If cables are built from smaller sections, all sections should
either come from the same manufacturer and lot, or with one of the IEEE
recommended standard segment lengths.
Note Cables of non-standard length produce impedance mismatches that cause

signal reflections and possible data loss.
IEEE standard segment lengths are:
23.4 m (76.75 ft) 117 m (383.76 ft)

70.2 m (230.25 ft) 500 m (1640 ft)
These standard sections can be used to build a cable segment up to 500 m (1640 ft)
long. To prevent excessive reflections, the segment should be an odd multiple of
23.4 m (76.75 ft) lengths. For example:
3 x 23.4 m (or 3 x 76.75 ft)

7 x 23.4 m (or 7 x 76.75 ft)
9 x 23.4 m (or 9 x 76.75 ft)
These lengths are odd integral multiples of a half wavelength in the cable at 5 MHz.
Any mix of these cable sections (only) can be used.
Ethernet Cable Component Descriptions
Component Description Part Number
10Base2 Connector Connector for Ethernet 10Base2 trunk BNC coax connector with gold-plated
ThinWire coax cable pin, MilesTek catalog no. 10-02001-
233
BNC F-Adapter, MilesTek catalog no.
10-02918
BNC Goal Post Adapter, MilesTek
catalog no. 10-02914
10Base2 Terminator BNC terminator for Ethernet trunk coax MilesTek catalog no. 10-02406-009
cable, 50 :
10Base2 Connection Quick crimp tool kit for crimping MilesTek catalog no. 40-50156/GE
Tools connectors on Ethernet trunk 10Base2
coax cable, including strip tool, flush
cutter, and case.
Startup Checks
All Mark VI control panels are pre-cabled and factory-tested before shipment.
However, final checks should be made after installation and before starting the
equipment.
This equipment contains a potential hazard of electrical shock or

burn. Power is provided by the Mark VI control panel to various
input and output devices. External sources of power may be
present in the Mark VI panels that are NOT switched by the
control power circuit breaker(s). Before handling or connecting
any conductors to the equipment, use proper safety precautions to
insure all power is turned off.
Inspect the control panel components for any damage, which might have occurred
during shipping. Check for loose cables or wires, connections or loose components
such as relays or retainer clips. Report any damage that may have occurred during
shipping to GE Product Service.
Refer to section, Grounding for equipment grounding instructions.
Board Inspections
Perform the following to inspect the printed circuit boards, jumpers, and wiring:
x Inspect the boards in each module checking for loose or damaged components.
x Verify the Berg jumpers on each I/O board are set correctly for the slot number
in the VME rack (see the following figure). If the boards do not have Berg
jumpers, then the VCMI identifies all the I/O boards during startup by
communication over the VME backplane. At this point do not replug the I/O
boards. This will be done after the rack power supply check.
x Check the EMI spring-gasket shield on the right hand side of the board front
(see the following figure). If the installed boards do not have EMI emissions
shielding, and a board with a shield gasket is present, remove this gasket by
sliding it out vertically. Failure to do this could result in a damaged board.
VME I/O Board Example:
VME Slot Position = 17

1 0 0 0 16
Board ID
Berg
1 2 4 8 16
Jumpers
Jumper Binary Values
ID Jumper Positions on VME Board
VME I/O Board
EMI spring gasket to reduce EMI/RFI
Gasket emissions. Use only with adjacent
removal EMI-shielded I/O boards.
Note: if the board in the adjacent

righthand slot does not have an EMI
spring gasket, then this spring gasket
must be removed.
EMI Emissions Shield Gasket

x Check wire harnesses and verify they are securely connected.
x Verify that the terminal board hardware jumpers match the toolbox
configuration settings, and move the jumper(s) if necessary.
x Verify all plug-in relays are firmly inserted into their sockets (refer to Volume II
of the system guide). Verify the jumpers on TRLY are removed.
x Check the Ethernet ID plug located at the left side of the rack under the power
test points. The jumpers on this plug define the number of the rack (0, 1, 2, 3) in
the IONet channel. The jumper positions are shown in the following figure.
VME Rack Wire Jumper VME Rack

Backplane Ethernet ID Plug Positions per Table front view
1 2
RO-SMP
Ethernet ID Plug located

at Bottom Left Hand Side
15 16 of VME Rack
Rack Ethernet ID Plug
Ethernet ID Plug Jumper Positions
Conn. Connector Pins Pins Pins Pins Pins Pins Pins Pins Notes
P/N Label 1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 11-12 13-14 15-16
10 R0-SMP X X X X X X
11 R1 X X X X X
12 R2 X X X X X
13 R3 X X X X
14 R4 X X X X X
15 R5 X X X X
16 R6 X X X X
17 R7 X X X
18 R8 X X X X X
19 R9 X X X X
20 R10 X X X X
21 R11 X X X
22 R12 X X X X
23 R13 X X X
Future
28 R0-DPX X X X X X X
29 R0-TPX X X X X X
30 R0-TMR X X X X X X X
Future
40 S0-SMP X X X X X X
41 S1 X X X X X
42 S2 X X X X X
43 S3 X X X X
44 S4 X X X X X
45 S5 Future
46 S6 Future
47 S7 Future
48 S8 X X X X X
Future
60 S0-TMR X X X X X X X
Future
70 T0-SMP X X X X X
71 T1 X X X X
72 T2 X X X X
73 T3 X X X
74 T4 X X X X
75 T5 Future
76 T6 Future
77 T7 Future
78 T8 X X X X
Future
90 T0-TMR X X X X X X
Wiring and Circuit Checks
This equipment contains a potential hazard of electric shock or
burn. Only personnel who are adequately trained and
thoroughly familiar with the equipment and the instructions
should install, operate, or maintain this equipment.
The following steps should be completed to check the cabinet wiring and circuits.
¾ To check the power wiring
1 Check that all incoming power wiring agrees with the supplied elementary
drawings.
2 Make sure that the incoming power wiring conforms to approved wiring
practices as described previously in this chapter.
3 Check that all electrical terminal connections are tight.
4 Make sure that no wiring has been damaged or frayed during installation.
Replace if necessary.
5 Check that incoming power (125 V dc, 115 V ac, 230 V ac) is the correct
voltage and frequency, and that it is clean and free of noise. Make sure the ac to
dc converters, if used, are set to the correct voltage (115 or 230 V ac) by
selecting the JTX1 or JTX2 jumper positions on the front of the converter.
6 If the installation includes more than one PDM on an interconnected 125 V dc
system, the BJS jumper must be installed in one and only one PDM. This
arrangement is required because the parallel connection of more than one ground
reference circuit will reduce the impedance to the point where the 125 V dc no
longer meets the Not Hazardous Live requirement.
To verify that the 125 V dc is properly grounded, a qualified person using

appropriate safety procedures should make tests. Measure the current from first the
P125 V dc, and then the N125 V dc, using a 2000 :, 10 W resistor to the protective
conductor terminal of the Mark VI in series with a dc ammeter. The measured
current should be 1.7 to 2.0 mA (the tolerance will depend on the test resistor and the
PDM tolerances). If the measured current exceeds 2.0 mA, the system must be
cleared of the extra ground(s). A test current of about 65 mA, usually indicates one
or more hard grounds on the system, while currents in multiples of 1 mA usually
indicate more than one BJS jumper is installed.
Note At this point the system is ready for initial energization.
Startup and Configuration
This equipment contains a potential hazard of electric
shock or burn. Only personnel who are adequately trained
and thoroughly familiar with the equipment and the
instructions should install, operate, or maintain this
equipment.
Assuming all the above checks are complete, use the following steps to apply power,
load the application code, and startup the Mark VI system.
Note It is recommended that the initial rack energization be done with all the I/O
boards removed to check the power supply in an unloaded condition.
¾ To energize the rack for the first time
1 Unlock the I/O boards and slide them part way out of the racks.
2 Apply power to the PDM and to the first VME I/O rack power supply.
3 Check the voltages at the test points located at the lower left side of the VME
rack. These are shown in the following following figure.
4 If the rack voltages check out, switch off the power supply, and carefully replace
the boards in that rack.
5 Reapply power. All the I/O boards should flash green within five minutes
displaying normal operation in the RUN condition.
6 Repeat steps 1-5 for all the racks.
Bottom of VME
Rack Backplane
P5 P15 N15
VME Rack Power
DCOM1 ACOM P28AA
Supply Test Points
P28BB
P28CC
P28DD
P28EE
PCOM
N28
DCOM
SCOM
ETHERNET ID
VME Rack Power Supply Test Points
If the system is a remote I/O system, the controller is in a separate rack.

Apply power to this rack, wait for the controller and VCMI to boot up,
and check that they are in the RUN condition. Check the VPRO modules,
if present, to make sure all three are in the RUN condition.
Topology and Application Code Download
Network topology defines the location of the control and interface modules (racks)
on the IONet network, and is stored in the VCMI.
Note If you have a new controller, before application code can be downloaded, the
TCP/IP address must be loaded. Refer to GEH-6403 Control System Toolbox for a
Mark VI Controller for details.
¾ To download topology and application code
1 From the toolbox Outline View, select the first VCMI (R0), and right click on it.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Download. The network topology configuration
downloads to the Master VCMI in the first controller rack and now knows the
location of the Interface Modules (R0, R1, R2, ...).
3 Repeat for all the Master VCMIs in the controller racks S, and T.
4 Cycle power to reboot all three controllers. The controllers reboot and initialize
their VCMIs. The VCMIs expect to see the configured number of racks on
IONet. If an Ethernet ID plug does not identify a rack, then communication with
that rack is not possible. Similarly if a VCMI is not responding, then
communication with that rack is not possible. The VCMI will work even if there
are no I/O boards in its rack.
5 Following the above procedure, download the network topology to the slave
VCMI in the I/O racks (R1, R2, R3 ...). The VCMI now knows what I/O boards
are in its rack. Download to each rack in turn, or all racks at once.
6 Cycle power to reboot all racks.
7 Download the I/O configuration to all the I/O boards, one at a time or all at
once. With all racks running you are now ready to check the I/O.
Online Download
When there are minor changes to the application code, the new code can be
downloaded online using the toolbox. The advantage of online downloading is that
it does not require restarting the controller (as in an offline download); the
controllers continue to operate during and after the online download. The code is
downloaded both to memory and storage.
Download Prerequisites
Before downloading new code, adhere to the following prerequisites to support

continued turbine operation after the new code is downloaded.
x Diagnostic Messages and Alarms – Check the controller for diagnostic

messages and alarms and do not download new code if any exist. Resolve and
clear all diagnostic messages and alarms before downloading. Otherwise, the
download may not proceed properly and cause the system to trip.
Note If conditions warrant downloading with existing diagnostic messages and

alarms, record and examine every alarm message for potential failure modes and
incident recovery after the controllers are powered up with the new code.
x Code Compatibility – Verify that the new code is compatible with the existing
code and TMR interface to prevent inadvertent trips after the new code has been
downloaded.
x Review TMR Test – Each time new code is downloaded, the TMR system must
be tested online to verify that the new code is compatible, operates the system
properly, and maintains TMR capability. Before beginning, review the records
from the last TMR test from the previous download.
Performing an Online Download
¾ To perform an online download:
1 Refer to the section, Download Prerequisites and verify that these requirements
have been met, prior to an online download.
2 From the toolbox, select the Device menu and select Download, Application
Code
or
Click the Download Application Code button. The Download Application Code
dialog box displays. The Download to Memory option and Download to
Storage option are already checked by default indicating that the application code
will be downloaded to memory and storage.
3 Click OK.
4 Perform the TMR Test from the procedures in the section, Post-Download TMR
Test.
Offline Download
When there are major changes to the application code, the new code must be
downloaded offline using the toolbox. An offline download consists of making a
build image of the code, downloading the code, restarting the controller, and testing
the TMR. The code is downloaded to storage.
¾ To perform an online download:
1 Refer to the section, Download Prerequisites and verify that these requirements
have been met, prior to an offline download.
2 From the toolbox, select the Device menu and select Download, Application
Code
or
Click the Download Application Code button. The Download Application Code
dialog box displays. The Download to Memory option and Download to
Storage option are already checked by default indicating that the application code
will be downloaded to memory and storage.
3 Click OK.
4 Perform the TMR Test from the procedures in the section, Post-Download TMR
Test.
Post-Download TMR Test

After downloading new code, test the TMR System online again to verify that the
new code is compatible, operates the system properly, and maintains TMR
capability. This test is required to assure online serviceability for continued system
operation and trip reliability and prevent inadvertent hardware failures.
Prior to performing TMR testing, verify that the system is:
x Clear of all alarm messages

x Operational and could trip after a fault
¾ To perform the TMR test
1 Power down one controller/protective module at a time from the PDM. For R0,
S0, T0, R8, S8, T8, and optional R7, S7, and T7 processors, power down one at
a time in random order.
2 Wait 10 seconds, then power back up.
3 Wait for the processor to go back online.
4 Check for alarm messages.
5 Verify that there are no messages requesting a trip condition. Clear all alarm
messages.
6 Once the system returns online, wait five minutes before powering down the
next processor.
Controller Offline While System Online
Problem: After multiple online code downloads in the absence of TMR testing on
previous downloads, including those with EGD page differences, one controller may
remain offline while the other two controllers are online.
Corrective Action:
x Check and correct field wiring problems.

x Check the controller.
x Check compatibility of the application code with the TMR function.
x If there are no field wiring or code incompatibility problems, perform the
following recovery procedure (which will keep the system running and
protected):
¾ To perform the recovery procedure:
1 Power down the controller which is offline.

2 Download code to permanent storage as well as to memory of the powered-
down controller.
3 Perform the TMR test as instructed in the section, Post-Download TMR Test.
4 Power up the controller. This controller should now come online with the other
two controllers, running the new downloaded code that is compatible with the
old code on the other two controllers.
5 Allow the restored online controller to run. at least 5 minutes.
6 Verify that there are no diagnostic messages or alarms.
7 Repeat this recovery procedure, one at a time on the remaining two controllers.
Offline Trip Analysis

Problem: System tripped – the usual cause is an application code issue (since the
standard product has passed TMR testing). Corrective Action:
1 Review all alarm and trip logs.

2 If trip logs are unavailable, use the Trend Recorder to upload the individual
capture block data from the controllers as follows:
a. From toolbox, select the File menu and New.
b. From the Utilities List, select Trend Recorder.
c. From the Trend Recorder, select the Edit menu and Configure. The Trend
Recorder dialog box displays.
d. Under Trend Type, select Block Collected.
e. Select the Block Collected device and Capture Buffer.
f. Select each signal and upload.
As a result, approximately five trend files will be produced per controller.
3 Analyze the trip to determine the cause.

4 Correct the cause of the trip.
Notes
CHAPTER 6
Chapter 6 Tools and System

Interface
Toolbox ...................................................................................... 6-1
CIMPLICITY HMI .................................................................... 6-4
Computer Operator Interface (COI) ........................................... 6-7
Turbine Historian ....................................................................... 6-8
Introduction
This chapter summarizes the tools used for configuring, loading, and operating the
Mark VI system. These include the Control System Toolbox (toolbox),
CIMPLICITY HMI operator interface, and the Turbine Historian.
Toolbox
The toolbox is Windows®-based software for configuring and maintaining the Mark
VI control system. The software usually runs on an engineering workstation or a
CIMPLICITY HMI located on the Plant Data Highway. For details refer to GEH-
6403, Control System Toolbox for a Mark VI Controller.
IONet communicates with all the control and interface racks. This network topology
is configured using the toolbox. Similarly, the toolbox configures all the I/O boards
in the racks and the I/O points in the boards. the following figure displays the
toolbox screen used to select the racks.
The Outline View on the left side of the screen is used to select the racks required for
the system. This view displays all the racks inserted under Mark VI I/O. In the
example, three TMR Rack 0s are included under the heading Rack 0 Channel R/S/T
(TMR).
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 6 Tools and System Interface x 6-1
Click on the TMR rack in the Outline View (Rack 0 The Summary View displays a
in this example) to view all the channels at the graphic of each rack and all the
same time in the Summary View. boards they contain.
Configuring the Equipment Racks
6-2 x Chapter 6 Tools and System Interface GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Configuring the Application
The turbine control application is configured in the toolbox using graphically
connected control blocks, which display in the Summary View. These blocks consist
of basic analog and discrete functions and a library of special turbine control blocks.
The Standard Block library contains over 60 different control blocks designed for
discrete and continuous control applications. Blocks provide a simple graphical way
for the engineer to configure the control system. The turbine block library contains
more than 150 additional blocks relating to turbine control applications.
The control system is configured in the toolbox work area, displayed in the following
figure The Outline View on the left side of the screen displays the control device.
The Summary View on the right side of the screen displays the graphical
configuration of the selected item. Block inputs and outputs are connected with
signals to form the control configuration. These connections are created by dragging
and dropping a signal from a block output to another block input. The connected
blocks form macros, and at a higher level, the blocks and macros form tasks covering
major sections of the complete control.
Connecting Control Blocks in the Work Area
CIMPLICITY HMI
The CIMPLICITY Human-Machine Interface (HMI) is the main operator interface to
the Mark VI turbine control system. HMI is a computer with a Windows operating
system and CIMPLICITY graphics display system, communicating with the
controllers over Ethernet.
For details refer to GEH-6126, HMI Application Guide. Also refer to GFK-1180,
CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User's Manual. For details on
how to configure the graphic screens refer to GFK-1396 CIMPLICITY HMI for
Windows NT and Windows 95 CimEdit Operation Manual.
Basic Description
The Mark VI HMI consists of three distinct elements:
HMI server is the hub of the system, channeling data between the UDH and the
PDH, and providing data support and system management. The server also provides
device communication for both internal and external data interchanges.
System database establishes signal management and definition for the control
system, provides a single repository for system alarm messages and definitions, and
contains signal relationships and correlation between the controllers and I/O. The
database is used for system configuration, but not required for running the system.
HMI viewer provides the visual functions, and is the client of the server. It contains
the operator interface software, which allows the operator or maintenance personnel
to view screen graphics, data values, alarms, and trends, as well as issue commands,
edit control coefficient values, and obtain system logs and reports.
Depending on the size of the system, these three elements can be combined into a
single computer, or distributed in multiple units. The modular nature of the HMI
allows units to be expanded incrementally as system needs change. A typical Viewer
screen using graphics and real-time turbine data is displayed in the following figure.
In the graphic display, special displays can be obtained using the buttons in the
column on the right side. Also note the setpoint button for numeric entry and the
raise/lower arrows for opening and closing valves.
Alarm Detail
display selection
Shaft Vibration
display selection
Setpoint Entry
selection
Alarm Summary
window
Interactive Operator Display for Steam Turbine & Generator
Product Features
The HMI contains a number of product features important for power plant control:
x Dynamic graphics
x Alarm displays
x Process variable trending
x Point control display for changing setpoints
x Database logger
x HMI access security
x Data Distribution Equipment (DDE) application interface
The graphic system performs key HMI functions and provides the operator with real
time process visualization and control using the following:
CimEdit is an object-oriented program that creates and maintains the user graphic
screen displays. Editing and animation tools, with the familiar Windows
environment, provide an intuitive, easy to use interface. Features include:
x Standard shape library

x Object Linking and Embedding (OLE)
x Movement and rotation animation
x Filled object capabilities, and interior and border animation
CimView is the HMI run-time portion, displaying the process information in
graphical formats. In CimView, the operator can view the system screens, and
screens from other applications, using OLE automation, run scripts, and get
descriptions of object actions. Screens have a 1-second refresh rate, and a typical
graphical display takes 1second to repaint.
Alarm Viewer provides alarm management functions such as sorting and filtering
by priority, by unit, by time, or by source device. Also supported are configurable
alarm field displays, and embedding dynamically updated objects into CimView
screens.
Trending, based on Active X technology, gives user’s data analysis capabilities.

Trending uses data collected by the HMI or data from other third-party software
packages or interfaces. Data comparisons between current and past variable data can
be made for identification of process problems. Trending includes multiple trending
charts per graphic screen with unlimited pens per chart, and the operator can resize
or move trend windows to convenient locations on the display.
The point control cabinet provides a listing of points in the system with real-
time values and alarm status. Operators can view and change local and remote set
points using the up/down arrows or by direct numeric entry. Alarms can be enabled
and disabled, and alarm limits modified by authorized personnel.
The basic control engine allows users to define control actions in response to
system events. A single event can invoke multiple actions, or one action can be
invoked by many events. The program editor uses a Visual Basic for Applications
compliant programming language.
Optional features include the Web Gateway that allows operators to access HMI data
from anywhere in the world over the Internet. Third party interfaces allow the HMI
to exchange data with distributed control systems (DCS), programmable logic
controllers, I/O devices, and other computers.

The Computer Operator Interface (COI) consists of a set of product and application
specific operator displays running on a small cabinet computer (10.4 or 12.1 inch
touch screen) hosting the Embedded Windows operating system. This operating
system uses only the components of the operating system required for a specific
application. This results in all the power and development advantages of a Windows
operating system. Development, installation or modification of requisition content
requires the GE Control System Toolbox (toolbox). For details, refer to GEH-6403,
Control System Toolbox for a Mark VI Controller.
The COI can be installed in many different configurations, depending on the product
line and specific requisition requirements. For example, it can be installed in the
cabinet door for Mark VI applications or in a control room desk for Excitation
Control System applications. The only cabling requirements are for power and for
the Ethernet connection to the UDH. Network communication is via the integrated
auto-sensing 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection. Expansion possibilities for the
computer are limited, although it does support connection of external devices
through FDD, IDE, and USB connections.
The COI can be directly connected to the Mark VI or Excitation Control System, or
it can be connected through an EGD Ethernet switch. A redundant topology is
available when the controller is ordered with a second Ethernet port.
The networking of the COI to the Mark VI is requisitioned or customer-defined.
Interface Features
Numeric data displays are driven by EGD (Ethernet Global Data) pages transmitted
by the controller. The refresh rate depends both on the rate at which the controller
transmits the pages, and the rate at which the COI refreshes the fields. Both are set at
configuration time in the toolbox.
The COI uses a touch screen, and no keyboard or mouse is provided. The color of
pushbuttons are feedbacks and represent state conditions. To change the state or
condition, press the button. The color of the button changes if the command is
accepted and the change implemented by the controller.
Numeric inputs on the COI touch screen are made by touching a numeric field that
supports input. A numeric keypad then displays and the desired number can be
entered.
An Alarm Window is provided and an alarm is selected by touching it. Then Ack,
Silence, Lock, or Unlock the alarm by pressing the corresponding button. Multiple
alarms can be selected by dragging through the alarm list. Pressing the button then
applies to all selected alarms.
Note For complete information, refer to GEI-100434, Computer Operator Interface

(COI) for Mark VI or EX2100 Systems.
Turbine Historian
The Turbine Historian is a data archival system based on client-server technology,
which provides data collection, storage, and display of power island and auxiliary
process data. Depending on the requirements, the product can be configured for just
turbine-related data, or for broader applications that include balance of plant process
data.
The Turbine Historian combines high-resolution digital event data from the turbine
controller with process analog data to create a sophisticated tool for investigating
cause-effect relationships. It provides a menu of predefined database query forms for
typical analysis relating to the turbine operations. Flexible tools enable the operator
to quickly generate custom trends and reports from the archived process data.
System Configuration
The Turbine Historian provides historical data archiving and retrieval functions.
When required, the system architecture provides time synchronization to ensure time
coherent data.
The Turbine Historian accesses turbine controller data via the UDH as shown in the
figure below. Additional Turbine Historian data acquisition is performed through
Modbus and/or Ethernet-based interfaces. Data from third-party devices such as
Bently Nevada monitors, or non-GE PLCs is usually obtained via Modbus, while
Ethernet is the preferred communication channel for GE/Fanuc PLC products.
The HMI and other operator interface devices communicate to the Turbine Historian
through the PDH. Network technology provided by the Windows operating system
allows interaction from network computers, including query and view capabilities,
using the Turbine Historian Client Tool Set. The interface options include the ability
to export data into spreadsheet applications.
Plant Data Highway
HMI Server # 1 HMI Server # 2 HMI Viewer Historian

DAT
Tape
Unit Data Highway
Data Transmission to the Historian and HMI
System Capability
The Turbine Historian provides an online historical database for collecting and
storing data from the control system. Packages of 1,000, 5,000 or 10,000 point tags
may be configured and collected from as many as eight turbine controls.
A typical turbine control application uses less than 1,000 points of time tagged
analog and discrete data per unit. The length of time that the data is stored on disk,
before offline archiving is required, depends upon collection rate, dead-band
configuration, process rate of change, and the disk size.
Data Flow
The Turbine Historian has three main functions: data collection, storage, and
retrieval. Data collection is over the UDH and Modbus. Data is stored in the
Exception database for sequence of events (SOE), events, and alarms, and in the
archives for analog values. Retrieval is through a web browser or standard trend
screens.
I/O I/O I/O
Control Third Party

System
PLC Devices
Ethernet Ethernet Modbus
Process
Turbine Control
Data Archives
Exception
Dictionary (Analog
Database Values)
(SOE)
Server Side
Client Side
Trend DataLink
Web Browser
Generation
Alarm & Event Report Process Data Excel for

Cross Plot (Trends) Reports &
Event Scanner Analysis
Turbine Historian Functions and Data Flow
Turbine Historian Tools
A selection of tools, screens, and reports are available to ensure that the operator can
make efficient use of the collected data as follows:
x Alarm and Event Report is a tabular display of the alarms, events, and SOE
for all Mark VI units connected to the Turbine Historian. This report presents
the following information on a point’s status: time of pickup (or dropout), unit
name, status, processor drop number, and descriptive text. This is a valuable tool
to aid in the analysis of the system, especially after an upset.
x Historical Cross Plot references the chronological data of two signal points,
plotted one against another, for example temperature against revolutions per
minute (RPM). This function permits visual contrasting and correlation of
operational data.
x Event Scanner function uses logic point information (start, trip, shutdown, or
user-defined) stored in the historical database to search and identify specific
situations in the unit control.
x Event/Trigger Query Results shows the user’s inputs and a tabular display
of resulting event triggers. The data in the Time column represents the time tag
of the specified Event Trigger.
x Process Data (Trends) is the graphical interface for the Turbine Historian
and can trend any analog or digital point. It is fully configurable and can auto-
range the scales or set fixed indexes. For accurate read out, the trend cursor
displays the exact value of all points trended at a given point in time. The
Turbine Historian can be set up to mimic strip chart recorders, analyze the
performance of particular parameters over time, or help troubleshoot root causes
of a turbine upset. The trend in the following figure is an example of a turbine
startup.
Typical Multi-Pen Process Trend Display
Data Collection Details
Mark VI uses two methods to collect data. The first process uses EGD pages defined
in the SDB. The Turbine Historian uses this collection method for periodic storage of
control data. It also receives exception messages from the Mark VI controller for
alarm and event state changes. When a state change occurs, it is sent to the Turbine
Historian. Contact inputs or SOE changes are scanned, sent to the Turbine Historian
and stored in the Exception database with the alarms and event state changes. These
points are time-tagged by the Mark VI.
Time synchronization and time coherency are extremely important when the operator
or maintenance technician is trying to analyze and determine the root cause of a
problem. To provide this, the data is time-tagged at the controller that offers system
time-sync functions as an option to ensure that total integrated system data remain
time-coherent.
Data points configured for collection in the archives are sampled once per second
from EGD. Analog data that exceeds an exception dead-band and digital data that
changes state are sent to the archives. The Turbine Historian uses the swinging door
compression method that filters on the slope of the value to determine when to save a
value. This allows the Turbine Historian to keep orders of magnitude more data
online than in conventional scanned systems.
The web browser interface provides access to the Alarm & Event Report, the Cross-
Plot, the Event Scanner, and several Turbine Historian status displays. Configurable
trend displays are the graphical interface to the history stored in the archives. They
provide historical and real time trending of process data.
The PI DataLink (optional) is used to extract data from the archives into
spreadsheets, such as Excel for report generation and analysis.
Notes
CHAPTER 7
Chapter 7 Maintenance, Diagnostic

& Troubleshooting
Maintenance ............................................................................... 7-1
Component Replacement............................................................ 7-2
Alarms Overview ....................................................................... 7-6
Process Alarms ........................................................................... 7-7
Diagnostic Alarms ...................................................................... 7-9
Totalizers .................................................................................... 7-11
Troubleshooting.......................................................................... 7-12
Introduction
This chapter discusses board maintenance and component replacement, alarm
handling, and troubleshooting in the Mark VI system. The configuration of process
alarms and events is described, and also the creation and handling of diagnostic
alarms caused by control system equipment failures.
Maintenance
burn. Only personnel who are adequately trained and thoroughly
familiar with the equipment and the instructions should install,
operate, or maintain this equipment.
Modules and Boards

System troubleshooting should be at the circuit board level. The failed board or
module should be removed and replaced with a spare. (See section, Component
Replacement for downloading.)
Note Return the failed board to GE for repair. Do not attempt to repair it on site.
After long service in a very dirty environment it may be necessary to clean the
boards. If there is a dust build up it is advisable to vacuum around the rack and the
front of the boards before removing them. Remove the boards from the cabinet
before cleaning them. Dust can be removed with a low-pressure air jet. If there is
dirt, which cannot be removed with the air jet, it should be cleaned off using
deionized water. Shake off and allow the board to air-dry before re-applying power.
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 7 Maintenance, Diagnostic & Troubleshooting x 7-1
Component Replacement
Replacing a Controller
¾ To replace and reload the UCVx
1 If a controller has failed, the rack should be powered down, and all cables
disconnected from the controller board front.
2 Remove the controller and replace it with a spare controller.
3 Pull the VCMI out of the rack far enough to disconnect it from the backplane.
4 Connect the serial loader cable between the computer and COM1 of the
controller.
a. If the controller is a UCVB or UCVD, use the serial loader to download the
flash file system to the controller
b. If the controller is a UCVE or later, use the compact flash programmer to
download the flash file system. (The programmer is included in the service
kit)
5 Use the serial loader to configure the controller with its TCP/IP address.
6 Reconnect the Ethernet cable to the controller and power up the rack.
7 Use the toolbox to download runtime to the controller.
8 Use the toolbox to download application code, to permanent storage only, in the
controller.
9 Power down the rack.
10 Re-insert the VCMI into the backplane.
11 Power up the rack.
7-2 x Chapter 7 Maintenance, Diagnostic & Troubleshooting GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Replacing a VCMI
¾ To replace and reload the VCMI
1 If a VCMI or VPRO has failed, the rack should be powered down, and the IONet
connector unplugged from the board front, leaving the network still running
through the T-fitting.
2 Remove the VCMI and replace it with a spare VCMI that has a clear flash disk
memory, then power up the rack.
3 From the toolbox Outline View, under item Mark VI I/O, locate the failed rack.
Locate the VCMI, which is usually under the simplex rack, and right-click the
VCMI.
4 From the shortcut menu, click Download. The topology downloads into the new
board.
5 Cycle power to the rack to establish communication with the controller.
For a successful download, the flash disk memory in the replacement VCMI should
be clear, because an old topology stored in flash can sometimes cause problems. If
the flash memory needs to be cleared, contact GE.
Replacing an I/O Board in an Interface Module

¾ To replace an I/O Board
1 Power down the rack and remove the failed I/O board.
2 Replace the board with a spare board of the same type, first checking that the
jumper positions match the slot number (the same as the old board).
3 Power up the rack.
4 From the toolbox Outline View, under item Mark VI I/O, locate the failed rack.
Find the slot number of the failed board and right-click the board.
5 From the shortcut menu, click Download. The board configuration downloads.
6 Cycle power to the rack to establish communication with the controller.
Note Newer I/O boards do not have Berg jumpers.
Replacing a Terminal Board
The terminal boards do not contain software requiring reload, but some have power
supplied to them.

burn. Power is provided by the Mark VI control cabinet to
various input and output devices. External sources of power
may be present in the Mark VI cabinet that are NOT switched
by the control power circuit breaker(s). Before handling or
connecting any conductors to the equipment, use proper safety
precautions to ensure all power is turned off.To minimize risk of
personal injury, damage to the control equipment, or damage to
the controlled process, it is recommended that all power to a
terminal board be removed before replacement of the terminal
board. Most terminal boards are supplied from all three power
supplies of a TMR system as well as multiple external sources
and therefore may require shutdown of the turbine before
replacement is made.
¾ To replace a terminal board
1 Disconnect any power cables coming into the terminal board, and unplug the I/O
cables (J-plugs).
2 Loosen the two screws on the wiring terminal blocks and remove the blocks,
leaving the field wiring attached.
3 Remove the terminal board and replace it with a spare board, checking that any
jumpers are set correctly (the same as the old board).
4 Screw the terminal blocks back in place and plug in the J-plugs and the power
cables.
Cable Replacement
The I/O cables or power cables are supported in plastic brackets behind the back
base. Since these brackets are not continuous, it is not recommended that the
replacement cable be pulled through behind the back bases.
¾ To replace an I/O cable
1 Power down the interface module and disconnect the failed cable from the
module. Leave the cable in place.
2 Disconnect the failed cable from the terminal board.
3 Connect the replacement cable to the terminal board, and lay the new cable in
the field-wiring trough at the side of the I/O terminal boards. Use space at the
top and bottom of the cabinet to run the cable across the cabinet to the interface
module.
4 Connect the cable to the interface module and power up the module. Secure the
cable in place with tie wraps.
The power cables (125 V dc) are held in cable cleats behind the mounting panels. If a
power cable needs to be replaced, it is recommended it be run across the top or
bottom of the back base and down the side of the I/O wiring trough to the module
power supply.
Note Additional cables that may be required for system expansion can be installed
in this same way.
Alarms Overview
Three types of alarms are generated by the Mark VI system, as follows:
Process alarms are caused by machinery and process problems and alert the
operator by means of messages on the HMI screen. The alarms are created in the
controller using alarm bits generated in the I/O boards or in sequencing. The user
configures the desired analog alarm settings in sequencing using the toolbox. As well
as generating operator alarms, the alarm bits in the controller can be used as
interlocks in the application program.
Hold list alarms are similar to process alarms with the additional feature that the
scanner drives a specified signal True whenever any hold list signal is in the alarm
state (hold present). This signal is used to disable automatic turbine startup logic at
various stages in the sequencing. Operators may override a hold list signal so that the
sequencing can proceed even if the hold condition has not cleared.
Diagnostic alarms are caused by Mark VI equipment problems and use settings
factory-programmed in the boards. Diagnostic alarms identify the failed module to
help the service engineer quickly repair the system. For details of the failure, the
operator can request a display on the toolbox screen.
Alarm Diagnostic
HMI HMI Toolbox
Display Display
UDH
<R> Process and <S> <T> Diagnostic

Hold List Alarms
Controller Controller Controller
Alarms
Diagnostic
I/O I/O I/O
Alarm Bits
Three Types of Alarms generated by Mark VI
Process Alarms
Process Alarms are generated by the transition of Boolean signals configured by the
toolbox with the alarm attribute. The signals may be driven by sequencing or they
may be tied to input points to map values directly from I/O boards. Process alarm
signals are scanned each frame after the sequencing is run. In TMR systems process
signals are voted and the resulting composite signal is present in each controller.
A useful application for process alarms is the annunciation of system limit-checking.

Limit-checking takes place in the I/O boards at the frame rate, and the resulting
Boolean status information is transferred to the controller and mapped to process
alarm signals.
Two system limits are available for each process input, including thermocouple,
RTD, current, voltage, and pulse rate inputs. System limit 1 can be the high or low
alarm setting, and system limit 2 can be a second high or low alarm setting. These
limits are configured from the toolbox in engineering units.
There are several choices when configuring system limits. Limits can be configured
as enabled or disabled, latched or unlatched, and greater than or less than the preset
value. System out of limits can be reset with the RESET_SYS signal.
Process (and Hold) Alarm Data Flow

Process and Hold alarms are time stamped and stored in a local queue in the
controller. Changes representing alarms are time stamped and sent to the alarm
queue. Reports containing alarm information are assembled and sent over the UDH
to the CIMPLICITY HMIs. Here the alarms are again queued and prepared for
operator display by the alarm viewer.
Operator commands from the HMI, such as alarm Acknowledge, Reset, Lock, and
Unlock, are sent back over the UDH to the alarm queue where they change the status
of the appropriate alarms. An alarm entry is removed from the controller queue when
its state has returned to normal and it has been acknowledged by an operator. Refer
to the following figure.
Hold alarms are managed in the same fashion but are stored on a separate queue.
Additionally, hold alarms cannot be locked but may be overridden.
Note The operator or the controller can take action based on process alarms.
Mark VI Controller UDH Mark VI HMI
Input Signal 1
. . Alarm
Report
Alarm
Receiver
Alarm
Viewer
Alarm
. . Scanner
. . Alarm
Command
Alarm Queue
Input Signal n Operator Commands
Alarm
Queue - Ack
Alarm Logic including - Reset
variable Time - Lock
- Unlock
Alarm ID - Override for hold lists
Generating Process Alarms
To configure the alarm scanner on the controller, refer to GEH-6403 Control System
Toolbox for Mark VI Controller. To configure the controller to send alarms to all
HMIs, use the UDH broadcast address in the alarm IP address area.
Diagnostic Alarms
The controller and I/O boards all generate diagnostic alarms, including the VCMI,
which generates diagnostics for the power subsystem. Alarm bits are created in the
I/O board by hardware limit-checking. Raw input-checking takes place at the frame
rate, and resulting alarms are queued.
x Each type of I/O board has hardware limit-checking based on preset (non-
configurable) high and low levels set near the ends of the operating range. If this
limit is exceeded a logic signal is set and some types of input are removed from
the scan.
x In TMR systems, a limit alarm associated with TMR Diff Limt is created if any
of the three inputs differ from the voted value by more than a preset amount.
This limit value is configured by the user and creates a voting alarm indicating a
problem exists with a specific input.
x If any one of the diagnostic alarms is set, it creates a board composite diagnostic
alarm, L3DIAG_xxxx, where xxxx is the board name. This signal can be used to
trigger a process alarm. Each board has three L3DIAG_ signals,
L3DIAG_xxxx1, 2, and 3. Simplex boards only use L3DIAG_xxxx1. TMR
boards use all three with the first assigned to the board in <R>, the second
assigned to the same board in <S>, and the third assigned to the same board in
<T>.
x The diagnostic signals can be individually latched, and then reset with the
RESET_DIA signal, typically in the form of a message from the HMI.
x Generally diagnostic alarms require two consecutive occurrences before being
set True (process alarms only require one occurrence).
In addition to inputs, each board has its own diagnostics. The VCMI and I/O boards
have a processor stall timer which generates a signal SYSFAIL. This signal lights the
red LED on the front cabinet. The watchdog timers are set as follows:
x VCMI communication board 150 ms

x I/O boards 150 ms
If an I/O board times out, the outputs go to a fail-safe condition which is zero (or
open contacts) and the input data is put in the default condition, which is zero.
The three LEDs at the top of the front cabinet provide status information. The normal
RUN condition is a flashing green and FAIL is a solid red. The third LED is
normally off but shows a steady orange if a diagnostic alarm condition exists in the
board.
The controller has extensive self-diagnostics, most of which are available directly at
the toolbox. In addition, UCVB and UCVD runtime diagnostics, which may occur
during a program download, are displayed on LEDs on the controller front cabinet.
Each terminal board has its own ID device, which is interrogated by the I/O board.
The board ID is coded into a read-only chip containing the terminal board serial
number, board type, revision number, and the J type connector location.
Voter Disagreement Diagnostics
Each I/O board produces diagnostic alarms when it is configured as TMR and any of
its inputs disagree with the voted value of that input by more than a configured
amount. This feature allows the user to find and fix potential problems that would
otherwise be masked by the redundancy of the control system. The user can view
these diagnostics the same way one views any other diagnostic alarms. The VCMI
triggers these diagnostic alarm when an individual input disagrees with the voted
value for a number of consecutive frames. The diagnostic clears when the
disagreement clears for a number of frames.
The user configures voter disagreement diagnostics for each signal. Boolean signals
are all enabled or disabled by setting the DiagVoteEnab signal to enable under the
configuration section for each input. Analog signals are configured using the
TMR_DiffLimit signal under configuration for each point. This difference limit is
defined in one of two ways. It is implemented as a fixed engineering unit value for
certain inputs and as a percent of configured span for other signals. For example, if a
point is configured as a 4-20 mA input scaled as 0-40 engineering unit, its
TMR_DiffLimit is defined as a percent of (40-0). The type of limit-checking used is
spelled out in the dialog box for the TMR_DiffLimit signal for each card type and is
summarized in the following table.
Type of TMR Limit-Checking
I/O Processor Type of I/O Delta Method
Board
VAIC % of Configured Span
VGEN Analogs % of Configured Span
PT, CT Engineering Units
VPRO Pulse rates Engineering Units
Thermocouples Engineering Units
Analogs % of Configured Span
PT, CT Engineering Units
VPYR mA % of Configured Span
Gap Engineering Units
VRTD -------- Engineering Units
VSVO Pulse rates Engineering Units
POS Engineering Units
mA % of Configured Span
VTCC -------- Engineering Units
VTURH1/H2 Pulse rates Engineering Units
PT Engineering Units
Flame Engineering Units
Shaft monitor Engineering Units
VVIB Vibration signals Engineering Units
For TMR input configuration, refer to GEH-6403 Control System Toolbox for a
Mark VI Controller. All unused signals will have the voter disagreement checking
disabled to prevent nuisance diagnostics.
Totalizers
Totalizers are timers and counters that store critical data such as number of trips,
number of starts, and number of fired hours. The Mark VI provides the special block,
Totalizer, that maintains up to 64 values in a protected section of Non-volatile RAM.
The Totalizer block should be placed in a protected macro to prevent the logic
driving its counters from being modified. Users with sufficient privilege may set and
clear Totalizer counter values from a toolbox dialogue. An unprivileged user cannot
modify the data, either accidentally or intentionally. The standard block library Help
file provides more details on using the Totalizer block.
Troubleshooting
To start troubleshooting, be certain the racks have correct power supply voltages;
these can be checked at the test points on the left side on the VME rack.
Refer to Help files as required. From the toolbox, click Help for files on Runtime
Errors and the Block Library. Also, from the Start button, navigate to the Mark VI
controller to see help files on Runtime, I/O networks, Serial Loader, Standard Block
Library, and Turbine Block Library.

First level troubleshooting uses the LEDs on the front of the I/O and VCMI boards.
If more information on the board problems and I/O problems is required, use the
toolbox diagnostic alarm display for details.
I/O Board LEDs

Green - Normal Operation
During normal operation all the Run LEDs on the board front panels flash green
together. All boards and all racks should flash green in synchronism. If one light is
out of sequence there could be a problem with the synchronizing on that board which
should be investigated. Contact your turbine control representative and have the
firmware revision number for that board available.
Orange - System Diagnostic in Queue
An orange Status LED lit on one board indicates there is an I/O or system diagnostic
in queue in that board. This is not an I/O board failure, but may be a sensor problem.
¾ To view the diagnostic message
1 From the toolbox Outline View, select Online using the Go on/offline button.
2 Locate the rack in the Summary View and right-click the board. A pop-up menu
displays.
3 From the pop-up menu, select View Diagnostic Alarms. The Diagnostic Alarms
table displays. The following data is displayed in tabular form:
– Time - The time when the diagnostic was generated
– Fault Code - The fault code number
– Status - A 1 indicates an active alarm, and a 0 indicates a cleared, but
not reset (acknowledged), alarm
– Description - A short message describing the diagnostic
This diagnostic screen is a snapshot, but not real time. For new data, select the
Update command.
To display all of the real time I/O values in the Summary View, left-click the board
on the screen. The I/O values will display. All the real time I/O values display in the
Summary View. At the top of the list is the L3DIAG board alarm, followed by the
board point system limit values, and with the I/O (sensor) values at the bottom. From
these alarms and I/O values, determine whether the problem is in the terminal board
or in the sensor.
For example, if all the I/O points in a board are bad, the board has failed, a cable is
loose, or the board has not been configured. If only a few I/O points are bad, the I/O
values are bad, or part of the terminal board is burned up.
Red - Board Not Operating
If a board has a red Fail LED lit, it indicates the board is not operating. Check if it is
loose in its slot and, if so, switch off the rack power supply, push the board in, and
turn on the power again.
If the red light still comes on, power down the rack, remove the board and check the
firmware flash chip. If the board has a socketed flash chip, this chip can be plugged
in the wrong way, which damages it; the following figure shows a typical I/O board
with the chip location. The chamfer on the chip should line up with the chamfer on
the receptacle, as shown. If no flash chip is installed, replace the board with a new
one. Newer boards have a soldered flash chip so no adjustment is possible.
I/O Board
I/O Board Generic

Circuitry
Flash
Memory
Flash
Chip
Memory
Socket
I/O Board Specific

Circuitry
I/O Board with Flash Memory Chip
Earlier I/O board versions had a reset button on the front. If your board has this,
check to see if this button is stuck in. If so replace the board with a new one.
It is possible the failure is in the rack slot and not in the board. This can be
determined by board swapping, assuming the turbine is shut down. Remove the same
good board from the same slot in an adjacent TMR rack, and move the bad board to
this good slot. Be sure to power down the racks each time. If the problem follows the
board, replace the board. If it does not, there may be a problem with the VME
backplane. Inspect the board slot for damage; if no damage is visible, the original
board may not have been seated properly. Check the board for proper seating.
If a whole rack of I/O boards show red LEDs, it is probably caused by a

communication failure between the slave VCMI and the I/O boards in the rack. This
can result from a controller or VCMI failure or an IONet cable break. The failure
could also be caused by a rack power supply problem. Either the master or slave
VCMI could be at fault, so check the Fail LEDs to see where the problem is.
If several but not all I/O boards in a rack show red, this is probably caused by a rack
power supply problem.
Controller Failures
If the controller fails, check the VCMI and controller diagnostic queues for failure
information. Power down the controller rack and reboot by bringing power back (do
not use the Reset button). If the controller stays failed after reboot, replace it with a
spare.
If a controller fails to start, this usually indicates a runtime error that is typically a
boot-up or download problem. The runtime error number is usually displayed after
an attempted online download. The controller Runtime Errors Help screen on the
toolbox displays all the runtime errors together with suggested actions.
If the controller or its VCMI fails, then the IONet on this channel stops sending or
receiving data. This drives the outputs on the failed channel to their fail-safe state.
The failure does not affect the other two IONet channels, which keep running.
Power Distribution Module Failure

The PDM is a very reliable module with no active components. However, it does
contain fuses and circuit switches, and may have an occasional cabling or connector
problem. Most of the outputs have lights indicating voltage across their supply
circuit. Open the PDM front door to see the lights, switches, and fuses.
PDM diagnostic information is collected by the VCMI, including the 125 V dc bus
voltage and the status of the fuses feeding relay output boards. These can be viewed
on the toolbox by right-clicking the VCMI board, and then selecting View
Diagnostic Alarms.
CHAPTER 8
Chapter 8 Applications
Generator Synchronization ......................................................... 8-1
Overspeed Protection Logic ....................................................... 8-15
Power Load Unbalance............................................................... 8-39
Early Valve Actuation ................................................................ 8-43
Fast Overspeed Trip in VTUR.................................................... 8-45
Compressor Stall Detection ........................................................ 8-48
Ground Fault Detection Sensitivity ............................................ 8-52
Introduction
This chapter describes some of the applications of the Mark VI hardware and
software, including the servo regulators, overspeed protection logic, generator
synchronization, and ground fault detection. This chapter is organized as follows:
Generator Synchronization
This section describes the Mark VI Generator Synchronization system. Its purpose is
to momentarily energize the breaker close coil, at the optimum time and with the
correct amount of time anticipation, so as to close the breaker contact at top center on
the synchroscope. Top center is often known as top dead center. Closure will be
within one degree of top center. It is a requirement that a normally closed breaker
auxiliary contact be used to interrupt the closing coil current.
The synchronizing system consists of three basic functions, each with an output
relay, with all three relays connected in series. All three functions have to be true
(relay picked up) simultaneously before the system applies power to the breaker
close coil. Normally there will be additional external permissive contacts in series
with the Mark VI system, but it is required that they be permissives only, and that the
precise timing of the breaker closure be controlled by the Mark VI system. The three
functions are:
x Relay K25P, a synchronize permissive; turbine sequence status

x Relay K25A, a synchronize check; checks that the slip and phase are within a
window (rectangle shape); this window is configurable
x Relay K25, an auto synchronize; optimizes for top dead center
The K25A relay should close before the K25 otherwise the synch check function will
interfere with the auto synch optimizing. If this sequence is not executed, a
diagnostic alarm will be posted, a lockout signal will be set true in signal space, and
the application code may prevent any further attempts to synchronize until a reset is
issued and the correct coordination is set up.
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 8 Applications x 8-1

Hardware
The synchronizing system interfaces to the breaker close coil via the TTUR terminal
board as in the following figure. Three Mark VI relays must be picked up, plus
external permissives must be true, before a breaker closure can be made.
The K25P relay is directly driven from the controller application code. In a TMR
system, it is driven from <R>, <S>, and <T>, using 2/3 logic voting. For a simplex
system, it may be configured by jumper to be driven from <R> only.
The K25 relay is driven from the VTUR auto synch algorithm, which is managed by
the controller application code. In a TMR system, it is driven from <R>, <S>, and
<T>, using 2/3 logic voting. Again for a simplex system, it may be configured by
jumper to be driven from <R> only.
The K25A relay is located on TTUR, but is driven from the VPRO synch check
algorithm, which is managed by the controller application code. The relay is driven
from VPRO, <R8>, <S8>, and <T8>, using 2/3 logic voting in TREG/L/S.
The synch check relay driver (located on TREG/L/S) is connected to the K25A relay
coil (located on TTUR) through cabling through J2 to TRPG/L/S. It then goes
through JR1 (and JS1, JT1) to J4 and VTUR, then J3, JR1 to TTUR.
Both sides of the breaker close coil power bus must be connected to the TTUR
board. This provides diagnostic information and also measures the breaker closure
time, through the normally open breaker auxiliary contact for optimization.
The breaker close circuit is rated to make (close) 10 A at 125 V dc, but to open only
0.6 A. A normally open auxiliary contact on the breaker is required to interrupt the
closing coil current.
8-2 x Chapter 8 Applications GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I

<T>
<S>
TTUR Cont'd
<R>
TTUR VTUR P28
K25P K25 K25A
J3 JR1 <T>
Generator, Cont'd 2/3 2/3
PT secondary, 17 Fan out
Cont'd
RD RD <S> P125/24 VDC
nomin. 115 Vac, connection JR1 J3 Slip +0.3 hz
(0.25 hz)
(75 to 130 Vac), 18 03
45 to 66 hz. +0.12 hz
(0.1 hz) 01
Phase K25P
JS1 CB_Volts_OK 04
+10 Deg 02
19 to <S> Gen lag Gen lead
Bus, L52G K25
PT secondary, a CB_K25P_PU
nomin. 115 Vac, 05
20 L52G
(75 to 130 Vac), JT1
45 to 66 hz. K25A 06 52G
to <T> Auto Synch CB_K25_PU
07 b
Algorithm
CB_K25A_PU Breaker
Close Coil
08
J4
N125/24 VDC
JR1 TRPG/L/S
JS1
JT1
J2
<T8>
<S8>
<R8> J2
TPRO VPRO TREG/L/S
Generator, J3 JX1 K25A

PT secondary, 1 Fan out Relay Driver
J6 L25A <R8>
nomin. 115 Vac, connection JX1 Slip
2/3
(75 to 130 Vac), 2 +0.3 Hz RD
45 to 66 hz.
<S8>
-10 Deg +10 Deg Phase <T8>
JY1
-0.3 Hz
Bus, 3 to <S8>
PT secondary,
nomin. 115 Vac, 4 Synch Check
(75 to 130 Vac), JZ1
45 to 66 hz. Algorithm
to <T8>
Generator Synchronizing System

Application Code
The application code must sequence the turbine and bring it to a state where it is
ready for the generator to synchronize with the system bus. For automatic
synchronization, the code must:
x Match speeds
x Match voltages
x Energize the synch permissive relay, K25P
x Arm (grant permission to) the synch check function (VPRO, K25A)
x Arm (grant permission to) the auto synch function (VTUR, K25)
The following illustrations represent positive slip (Gen) and negative phase (Gen).
Oscilloscope Voltage Phasors SynchroScope

V_Bus
V_Gen
time V_Bus
V_Gen,
Lagging
Generator Synchronizing System

Algorithm Descriptions
This section describes the synchronizing algorithms in the VTUR I/O processor, and
then VPRO.
Automatic Synchronization Control in VTUR (K25)
VTUR runs the auto synch algorithm. Its basic function is to monitor two Potential
Transformer (PT) inputs, generator and bus, to calculate phase and slip difference,
and when armed (enabled) from the application code, and when the calculations
anticipate top center, to attempt a breaker closure by energizing relay K25. The
algorithm uses the zero voltage crossing technique to calculate phase, slip, and
acceleration. It compensates for breaker closure time delay (configurable), with self-
adaptive control when enabled, with configurable limits. It is interrupt driven and
must have generator voltage to function. The configuration can manage the timing on
two separate breakers. For details, refer to the figure below.
The algorithm has a bypass function, two signals for redundancy, to provide dead
bus and Manual Breaker Closures. It anticipates top dead center, therefore it uses a
projected window, based on current phase, slip, acceleration, and breaker closure
time. To pickup K25, the generator must be currently lagging, have been lagging for
the last 10 consecutive cycles, and projected (anticipated) to be leading when the
breaker actually reaches closure. Auto synch will not allow the breaker to close with
negative slip. In this fashion, assuming the correct breaker closure time has been
acquired, and the synch check relay is not interfering, breaker closures with less than
1 degree error can be obtained.
Slip is the difference frequency (Hz), positive when the generator is faster than the
bus. Positive phase means the generator is leading the bus, the generator is ahead in
time, or the right hand side on the synchroscope. The standard window is fixed and is
not configurable. However, a special window has been provided for synchronous
condenser applications where a more permissive window is needed. It is selectable
with a signal space Boolean and has a configurable slip parameter.
The algorithm validates both PT inputs with a requirement of 50% nominal

amplitude or greater; that is, they must exceed approximately 60 V rms before they
are accepted as legitimate signals. This is to guard against cross talk under open
circuit conditions. The monitor mode is used to verify that the performance of the
system is correct, and to block the actual closure of the K25 relay contacts; it is used
as a confidence builder. The signal space Input Gen_Sync_Lo will become true if the
K25 contacts are closed when they should not be closed, or if the Synch Check
K25A is not picked up before the Auto Synch K25. It is latched and can be reset with
Synch_Reset.
The algorithm compensates for breaker closure time delay, with a nominal breaker
close time, provided in the configuration in milliseconds. This compensation is
adjusted with self-adaptive control, based upon the measured breaker close time. The
adjustment is made in increments of one cycle (16.6/20 ms) per breaker closure and
is limited in authority to a configurable parameter. If the adjustment reaches the
limit, a diagnostic alarm Breaker #n Slower/Faster Than Limits Allows is posted.

Signal Space, Outputs;
Algorithm Inputs
VTUR Config
SystemFreq
CB1CloseTime
CB1AdaptLimt
CB1AdapEnbl Slip +0.3 Hz
CB1FreqDiff (0.25Hz)
L3window
CB1PhaseDiff
- +0.12 Hz
etc. (0.1Hz) Signal Space, inputs
for CB2_Selected +10 Deg Phase Algorithm Outputs
Gen
TTUR CB2 AS_Win_Sel Lag
Gen
Lead
17 GenFreq
Generator, Phase, Slip, Freq, BusFreq
PT secondary 18 Amplitude, Bkr Close GenVoltsDiff
Time, Calculators GenFreqDiff
19 GenPhaseDiff
Bus, CB1CloseTime
PT secondary 20 Gen lagging (10) CB2CloseTime
01
L52G 02 L52G
a Sync_Perm_AS, L83AS
AND
PT Signal Validation
L3window AND
L52G
Ckt_Bkr
Sync_Bypass1
Sync_Bypass0
AND OR L25_Command
Gen voltage Min close pulse TTUR

Max(6,bkr
close time)
K25
Sync_Monitor AND
Sync_Perm
Synch_Reset
CB_Volts_OK Diagn Gen_Sync_LO
CB_K25P_PU
CB_K25_PU
CB_K25A_PU
CB_Volts_OK
CB_K25P_PU
CB_K25_PU
CB_K25A_PU
Automatic Synchronizing on VTUR

Synchronization Check in VPRO (K25A)
The synch check algorithm is performed in the VPRO boards. Its basic function is to
monitor two Potential Transformer (PT) inputs, and to calculate generator and bus
voltage amplitudes and frequencies, phase, and slip. When it is armed (enabled) from
the application code, and when the calculations determine that the input variables are
within the requirements, the relay K25A will be energized. The above limits are
configurable. The algorithm uses the phase lock loop technique to derive the above
input variables, and is therefore relatively immune from noise disturbances. For
details, refer to the following figure.
The algorithm has a bypass function to provide dead bus closures. The window in
this algorithm is the current window, not the projected window (as used on the auto
synch function), therefore it does not include anticipation.
The Synch Check will allow the breaker to close with negative slip. Slip is the
difference frequency (Hz), positive when the Generator is faster than the Bus.
Positive phase means the generator is leading the Bus, the Generator is ahead in
time, or the right hand side on the synchroscope. The window is configurable and
both phase and slip are adjustable within predefined limits.

Signal Space, Outputs;
Algorithm Inputs
VPRO Config
SynchCheck used/unused
SystemFreq
FreqDiff
TurbRPM
Slip
PhaseDiff
*ReferFreq PR_Std +0.3 Hz L3window
+10 Deg
Phase Signal Space, inputs;
PR1/PR2 Algorithm Outputs
Gen Lag Gen Lead
TPRO
DriveFreq
1 center freq BusFreq
Generator, GenFreq
PT secondary 2 Phase Lock Loop GenVoltsDiff
Phase, Slip, Freq, GenFreqDiff
3 Amplitude GenPhaseDiff
Bus, Calculations
PT secondary 4
GenVolts
A L3GenVolts
GenVoltage 6.9 A>B
B
BusVolts
A L3BusVolts
BusVoltage A>B AND
6.9 B
GenVoltsDiff
A
VoltageDiff A<B L3window AND
2.8 B
SynCk_Perm L25A_Command
OR
SynCk_Bypass
dead bus TREG/L/S
L3GenVolts AND TRPG/L/S TTUR
VTUR
*Note: L3BusVolts
"ReferFreq" is a configuration parameter, used to K25A
make a selection of the variable that is used to RD
establish the center frequency of the "Phase Lock
Loop". It allows a choise between:
(a): "PR_Std" using speed input , PulseRate1, on a
single shaft application; speed input, PulseRate2,on
all multiple shaft applications.
(b): or "SgSpace", the Generator freq (Hz), from signal
space (application code), "DriveFreq".
Choise (b) is used when (a) is not applicable.
Synchronization Check on VTUR

Configuration
VTUR configuration of the auto synch function is shown the following table. The
configuration is located under J3 J5: IS200VTUR, signal Ckt_Bkr.
TUR Auto Synch Configuration
VTUR Parameter Description Selection Choice
SystemFreq System Frequency 50 Hz, 60 Hz
CB1CloseTime Breaker #1 closing time 0 to 500 ms
CB1AdaptLimt Breaker #1 adaption limit 0 to 500 ms
CB1AdaptEnabl Breaker #1 adaption enable Enable, disable
CB1FreqDiff Breaker #1 allowable frequency 0.15 to 0.66 Hz
difference for the special window
CB1PhaseDiff Breaker #1 allowable phase difference 0 to 20 degrees
for the special window
CB2CloseTime Breaker #2 closing time 0 to 500 ms
CB2AdaptLimt Breaker #2 adaption limit 0 to 500 ms
CB2AdaptEnabl Breaker #2 adaption enable Enable, disable
CB2FreqDiff Breaker #2 allowable frequency 0.15 to 0.66 Hz
difference for the special window
CB2PhaseDiff Breaker #2 allowable phase difference 0 to 20 degrees
for the special window
VPRO configuration of the Synch Check Function is shown in the following table.
The configuration is located under J3: IS200TREX, signal K25A_Fdbk.
VTUR Auto Synch Configuration
VPRO Parameter Description Selection Choice
SynchCheck Enable Used, unused
SystemFreq System Frequency 50 Hz, 60 Hz
ReferFreq Phase Lock Loop center PR_Std, SgSpace
frequency Where PR_Std means use
PulseRate1 on a single shaft
application - use PulseRate2 on
all multiple shaft applications
SgSpace means use generator
freq (Hz), from signal space
(application code), DriveFreq
TurbRPM Load Turbine rated RPM 0 to 20,000
Used to compensate for driving
gear ratio between the turbine
and the generator
VoltageDiff Allowable voltage 1 to 1,000 Engineering units, kV
difference or percent
FreqDiff Allowable freq difference 0 to 0.5 Hz
PhaseDiff Allowable phase 0 to 30 degrees
difference
GenVoltage Allowable minimum gen 1 to 1,000 Engineering units, kV
voltage or percent
BusVoltage Allowable minimum bus 1 to 1,000 Engineering units, kV
voltage or percent

This section defines all inputs and outputs in signal space that are available to the
application code for synchronization control. The breaker closure is not given
directly from the application code, rather the synchronizing algorithms, located in the
I/O boards, is armed from this code. In special situations the synch relays are
operated directly from the application code, for example when there is a dead bus.
The VTUR signal space interface for the Auto Synch function is shown in the
following table.
VTUR Auto Synch Signal Space Interface
VTUR Signal Description Comments
Space Output
Sync_Perm_AS Auto Synch permissive Traditionally known as L83AS
Sync_Perm Synch permissive mode, Traditionally known as L25P;
L25P interface to control the K25P relay
Sync_Monitor Auto Synch monitor mode Traditionally known as L83S_MTR;
enables the Auto Synch function,
except it blocks the K25 relays from
picking up
Sync_Bypass1 Auto Synch bypass Traditionally known as
L25_BYPASS; to pickup L25 for
Dead Bus or Manual Synch
Sync_Bypass0 Auto Synch bypass Traditionally known as
L25_BYPASSZ; to pickup L25 for
Dead Bus or Manual Synch
CB2 Selected #2 Breaker is selected Traditionally known as L43SAUTO2;
to use the breaker close time
associated with Breaker #2
AS_WIN_SEL Special Auto Synch New function, used on synchronous
window condenser applications to give a
more permissive window
Synch_Reset Auto Synch reset Traditionally known as
L86MR_TCEA; to reset the synch
Lockout function
VTUR Signal
Space Inputs
Ckt_BKR Breaker State (feedback) Traditionally known as L52B_SEL
CB_Volts_OK Breaker Closing Coil Used in diagnostics
Voltage is present
CB_K25P_PU Breaker Closing Coil Used in diagnostics
Voltage is present
downstream of the K25P
relay contacts
CB_K25_PU Breaker Closing Coil Used in diagnostics
Voltage is present
downstream of the K25
relay contacts
CB_K25A_PU Breaker Closing Coil Used in diagnostics
Voltage is present
downstream of the K25A
relay contacts
Gen_Sync_LO Synch Lock out Traditionally known as L30AS1 or
L30AS2; it is a latched signal
requiring a reset to clear
(Synch_Reset). It detects a K25
relay problem (picked up when it
should be dropped out) or a slow
Synch Check (relay K25A) function

L25_Comand Breaker Close Command Traditionally known as L25
to the K25 relay
GenFreq Generator frequency Hz
BusFreq Bus frequency Hz
GenVoltsDiff Difference Voltage Engineering units, kV or percent
between the Generator
and the Bus
GenFreqDiff Difference Frequency Hz
between the Generator
and the Bus
GenPhaseDiff Difference Phase between Degree
the Generator and the Bus
CB1CloseTime Breaker #1 measured ms
close time
CB2CloseTime Breaker #2 measured ms
close time
GenPT_Kvolts Generator Voltage Engineering units, kV or percent
BusPT_Kvolts Bus Voltage Engineering units, kV or percent
The VPRO signal space interface for the Synch Check function is shown in the
following table.
VPRO Synch Check Signal Space Interface
VPRO Signal Description Comments
Space Outputs
SynCk_Perm Synch Check permissive Traditionally known as L25X_PERM
SynCk_ByPass Synch Check bypass Traditionally known as
L25X_BYPASS; used for dead bus
closure
DriveRef Drive (generator) Traditionally known as TND_PC; used
frequency (Hz) used for only for non-standard drives where
Phase Lock Loop center the center frequency can not be
frequency derived from the pulserate signals
VPRO Signal
Space Inputs
K25A_Fdbk Feedback from K25A
relay
L25A_Cmd The synch check relay Traditionally known as L25X
close command
BusFreq Bus frequency Traditionally known as SFL2, Hz
GenFreq Generator frequency Hz
GenVoltsDiff The difference voltage Traditionally known as DV_ERR,
between the gen and bus engineering units kV or percent
GenFreqDiff The difference frequency Traditionally known as SFDIFF2, Hz
(slip) between the gen
and bus
GenPhaseDiff The difference phase Traditionally known as SSDIFF2,
between the gen and bus degrees
GenPT_Kvolts Generator voltage Traditionally known as DV,
engineering units kV or percent
BusPT_Kvolts Bus voltage Traditionally known as SVL,
engineering units kV or percent

VTUR Diagnostics for the Auto Synch Function
L3BKR_GXS – Synch Check Relay is Slow. This means that K25 (auto synch)
has picked up, but K25A (synch check) or K25P has not picked up, or there is no
breaker closing voltage source. If it is due to a slow K25A relay, the breaker will
close but the K25A is interfering with the K25 optimization. It will cause the input
signal Gen_Sync_LO to become TRUE.
L3BKR_GES – Auto Synch Relay is Slow. This means the K25 (auto synch)
relay has not picked up when it should have, or the K25P is not picked up, or there is
no breaker closing voltage source. It will cause the input signal Gen_Sync_LO to
become TRUE.
Breaker #1 Slower than Adjustment Limit Allows. This means, on breaker

#1, the self-adaptive function adjustment of the Breaker Close Time has reached the
allowable limit and can not make further adjustments to correct the Breaker Close
Time.
Breaker #2 Slower than Adjustment Limit Allows. This means, on breaker

#2, the self-adaptive function adjustment of the Breaker Close Time has reached the
allowable limit and can not make further adjustments to correct the Breaker Close
Time.
Synchronization Trouble – K25 Relay Locked Up. This means the K25 relay
is picked up when it should not be. It will cause the input signal Gen_Sync_LO to
become TRUE.
VPRO Diagnostics for the Auto Synch Function

K25A Relay (synch check) Driver mismatch requested state. This means
VPRO cannot establish a current path from VPRO to the TREx terminal board.
K25A Relay (synch check) Coil trouble, cabling to P28V on TTUR. This
means the K25A relay is not functional; it could be due to an open circuit between
the TREx and the TTUR terminal boards or to a missing P28 V source on the TTUR
terminal board.

Hardware Verification Procedure
The hardware interface may be verified by forcing the three synchronizing relays,
individually or in combination. If the breaker close coil is connected to the TTUR
terminal board, then the breaker must be disabled so as not to actually connect the
generator to the system bus.
1 Operate the K25P relay by forcing output signal Sync_Perm found under VTUR,
card points. Verify that the K25P relay is functional by probing TTUR screws 3
and 4. The application code has direct control of this relay.
2 Simulate generator voltage on TTUR screws 17 and 18. Operate the K25 relay
by forcing TTUR, card point output signals Sync_Bypass1 =1, and
Sync_Bypass0 = 0. Verify that the K25 relay is functional by probing screws 4
and 5 on TTUR.
3 Simulate generator voltage on TPRO screws 1 and 2. Operate the K25A relay
by forcing TPRO, card point output signals SynCK_Bypass =1, and
SynCk_Perm 1. The bus voltage must be zero (dead bus) for this test to be
functional. Verify that the K25A relay is functional by probing screws 5 and 6
on TTUR.
Synchronization Simulation
¾ To simulate a synchronization
1 Disable the breaker

2 Establish the center frequency of the VPRO PLL; this depends on the VPRO
configuration, under J3:IS200TREx, signal K25A_Fdbk, ReferFreq.
a. If ReferFreq is configured PR_Std, and is configured for a single shaft
machine, then apply rated speed (frequency) to input PulseRate1; that is
TPRO screw pairs 31/32, 37/38, and 43/44.
b. If ReferFreq is configured PR_Std and is configured for a multiple
shaft machine, then apply rated speed (frequency) to input PulseRate 2,
that is TPRO screw pairs 33/34, 39/40, and 45/46.
c. If ReferFreq is configured SgSpace, force VPRO signal space output
DriveRef to 50 or 60 (Hz), depending on the system frequency.
3 Apply the bus voltage, a nominal 115 V ac, 50/60 Hz, to TTUR screws 19 and
20, and to TPRO screws 3 and 4.
4 Apply the generator voltage, a nominal 115 V ac, adjustable frequency, to
TTUR screws 17 and 18 and to TPRO screws 1 and 2. Adjust the frequency to a
value to give a positive slip, that is VTUR signal GenFreqDiff of 0.1 to 0.2 Hz.
(10 to 5 sec scope).
5 Force the following signals to the TRUE state:
– VTUR, Sync_Perm, then K25P should pick up
– VTUR, Sync_Perm_AS, then K25 should pulse when the voltages
are in phase
– VPRO, SynCK_Perm, then K25A should pulse when the voltages are
in phase
6 Verify that the TTUR breaker close interface circuit, screws 3 to 7, is being
made (contacts closed) when the voltages are in phase.

7 Run a trend chart on the following signals:
– VPRO: GenFreqDiff, GenPhaseDiff, L25A_Command, K25A_Fdbk
– VTUR: GenFreqDiff, GenPhaseDiff, L25_Command, CB_K25_PU,
CB_K25A_PU
8 Use an oscilloscope, voltmeter, synchroscope, or a light to verify that the relays
are pulsing at approximately the correct time.
9 Examine the trend chart and verify that the correlation between the phase and
the close commands is correct.
10 Increase the slip frequency to 0.5 Hz and verify that K25 and K25A stop pulsing
and are open.
11 Return the slip frequency to 0.1 to 0.2 Hz, and verify that K25 and K25A are
pulsing. Reduce the generator voltage to 40 V ac and verify that K25 and K25A
stop pulsing and are open.

Overspeed Protection Logic
The figures in this section define the protection algorithms coded in the VPRO
firmware. VTUR contains similar algorithms. A parameter configurable from the
toolbox is illustrated with the abbreviation CFG(xx), where xx indicates the
configuration location. Some parameters/variables are followed with an SS
indicating they are outputs from Signal Space (meaning they are driven from the
CSDBase); other variables are followed with IO indicating they are hardware I/O
points.

CONTACT INPUT TRIPS: Notes:
,CFG == VPRO config data
,SS == from signal space
(SS) == to signal space
KESTOP1_Fdbk, IO L5ESTOP1, (SS)

ESTOP1
TRIP
L5ESTOP1 L86MR, SS
KESTOP2_Fdbk, IO L5ESTOP2, (SS)

ESTOP2
TRIP
L5ESTOP2 L86MR, SS
vcmi_master_keepalive L3SS_Comm, (SS)

A
3 A>=B
B
Trip_Mode1, CFG Trip1_En_Dir

A
Direct, CNST A=B
B
Trip1_En_Cond
A
Conditional, CNST A=B
B
Contact1, IO Trip1_En_Dir
Trip1_En_Cond Trip1_Inhbt, SS
L5Cont1_Trip, (SS)
CONTACT1
L3SS_Comm TDPU
TRIP
TrpTimeDelay (sec.), CFG (J3, Contact1)
L5Cont1_Trip L86MR, SS
Trip1_Inhbt, SS Inhbt_T1_Fdbk, (SS)
VPRO Protection Logic - Contact Inputs

CONTACT INPUT TRIPS (CONT.):

A
Direct, CNST A=B
B
Trip2_En_Cond
A
B
L5Cont2_Trip, (SS)
CONTACT2
L3SS_Comm TDPU TRIP

A
Direct, CNST A=B
B
Trip3_En_Cond
A
B
L5Cont3_Trip, (SS)
CONTACT3
L3SS_Comm TDPU
TRIP
VPRO Protection Logic - Contact Inputs (continued)


A
Direct, CNST A=B
B
Trip4_En_Cond
A
B
Trip4_En_Cond Trip4_Inhibit, SS
L5Cont4_Trip, (SS)
CONTACT4
L3SS_Comm TDPU
TRIP

A
Direct, CNST A=B
B
Trip5_En_Cond
A
B
L5Cont5_Trip, (SS)
CONTACT5
L3SS_Comm TDPU TRIP


A
Direct, CNST A=B
B
Trip6_En_Cond
A
B
L5Cont6_Trip, (SS)
CONTACT6
L3SS_Comm TDPU
TRIP

A
Direct, CNST A=B
B
Trip7_En_Cond
A
B
L5Cont7_Trip, (SS)
CONTACT7
L3SS_Comm TDPU TRIP

VPRO Protection Logic - Online Overspeed Test
OS1_Setpoint , SS
A |A|
RPM A
A-B A OS1_SP_CfgEr
OS_Setpoint, CFG A>B
B 1 RPM System Alarm, if the two
(J5, PulseRate1) RPM B
setpoints don't agree
A
Min
B
OS_Setpoint_PR1
OS_Stpt_PR1
A A
zero
Mult A A+B
0.04
B Min B
OS_Tst_Delta
B
CFG(J5, PulseRate1) RPM
OfflineOS1test, SS
OnlineOS1
PulseRate1, IO
A
OS1
A>=B
OS_Setpoint_PR1
B
OS1_Trip
OS1
Overspeed
Trip
OS1_Trip L86MRX
VPRO Protection Logic - Overspeed Trip, HP

PR_Zero
Hyst
1
0 RPM
PulseRate1, IO CFG
A
PR1_Zero
Zero_Speed, AB
Min_Speed, CFG (J5, PulseRate1)
B
S PR1_Accel
A
(Der) PR1_Dec
AB
Acc_Setpoint, CFG (J5,PulseRate1)
B
Dec1_Trip
PR1_DEC
Decel Trip
Dec1_Trip L86MR,SS
Acc_Trip, CFG (J5, PulseRate1)

Enable Acc1_Trip
PR1_ACC Acc1_TrEnab
Accel Trip
Acc1_Trip L86MR,SS
*Note: where 100% is defined as the

configured value of OS_Stpt_PR1
VPRO Protection Logic - Overspeed Trip, HP (continued)

OS1_SP_CfgEr PR1_Zero L5CFG1_Trip
HP
Config Trip
L5CFG1_Trip L86MR,SS
PR1_Max_Rst
PR_Max_Rst
PR1_Zero_Old PR1_Zero
PR1_Zero
0.00
PR1_Max_Rst PR1_Max
Max
PulseRate1
PR1_Zero PR1_Zero_Old
VPRO Protection Logic - Overspeed Trip, HP (continued)

OS2_Setpoint , SS
A |A|
RPM A
A-B A OS2_SP_CfgEr
A
Min
B
OS_Setpoint_PR2
OS_Stpt_PR2
A A
Mult A A+B zero
0.04
B Min B
OS_Tst_Delta
B
OfflineOS2test, SS
OnlineOS2
PulseRate2, IO
A
OS2
A>=B
OS_Setpoint_PR2
B
OS2_Trip
OS2
Overspeed
Trip
OS2_Trip L86MR,SS
VPRO Protection Logic - Overspeed LP

PulseRate2, IO
A
PR2_Zero
AB
B
S PR2_Accel
A
(Der) PR2_Dec
AB
B
Dec2_Trip
PR2_DEC
Decel Trip
LP
Dec2_Trip L86MR,SS

Enable Acc2_Trip
PR2_ACC PR2_MIN Acc2_TrEnab
Accel Trip
LP
Acc2_Trip L86MR,SS

VPRO Protection Logic - Overspeed LP (continued)

L5CFG2_Trip
OS2_SP_CfgEr PR2_Zero LP
Config Trip
PR_Max_Rst PR2_Max_Rst
PR2_Zero
0.00
PR2_Max_Rst Max PR2_Max
PulseRate2
PR1_MIN PR2_Zero LockRotorByp LPShaftLocked
LPShaftLocked L86MR, SS
VPRO Protection Logic - Overspeed LP (continued)

OS3_Setpoint , SS
A
RPM |A| A
A-B A OS3_SP_CfgEr
A
Min
B
OS_Stpt_PR3
OS_Setpoint_PR3
A A
Mult A A+B zero
0.04
B Min B
OS_Tst_Delta
B
OfflineOS3tst, SS
OnlineOS3tst, SS
PulseRate3, IO
A
OS3
A>=B
OS_Setpoint_PR3
B
OS3_Trip
OS3
Overspeed
Trip
OS3_Trip L86MRX
VPRO Protection Logic - Overspeed IP

PulseRate3, IO
A
PR3_Zero
AB
B
S PR3_Accel
(Der) A
PR3_Dec
AB
B
PR3_DEC Dec3_Trip
Decel Trip
IP
Dec3_Trip L86MR,SS
Enable Acc3_Trip
PR3_ACC PR3_MIN Acc3_TrEnab
Accel Trip
IP
Acc3_Trip L86MR,SS

VPRO Protection Logic - Overspeed IP (continued)

OS3_SP_CfgEr PR3_Zero L5CFG3_Trip
IP
Config Trip
PR_Max_Rst PR3_Max_Rst
PR3_Zero
0.00
PR3_Max_Rst PR3_Max
Max
PulseRate3
VPRO Protection Logic - Overspeed IP (continued)

Notes:
,CFG == VPRO config data
,SS == from signal space
(SS) == to signal space
TC1 (SS)
TC_MED(SS
TC2 (SS) )
MED
TC3 (SS)
Zer
o
MA OTSPBias(SS)
X
OTBias,SS
L3SS_Com
m
OTBias_RampP,CF
G
OTBias_RampN,CF
ME
G D A
OTBias_Dflt,CFG A+B
A
B
A-B
B
-
1
Z
TC_ME
D A
Overtemp_Trip,CF L26T
A>=
G A B
A-B B
OTSPBias
B OTSetpoint(SS)
OT_Trip_Enable,CF
G
OT_Trip (SS)
L26T
L86MR,S
OT_Trip
S
VPRO Protection Logic - Over-Temperature

RPM_94%
RatedRPM_TA, RPM_103.5%
Calc Trip
CFG (VPRO, Config)
Anticipate RPM_106%
Speed RPM_116%
references RPM_1%
RPM_116%
A TA_StptLoss,SS
OS1_TATrpSp,SS RPM A<B Alarm
B OR L30TA
A
A<B
RPM_103.5% B
TA_Spd_SP
RPM_106%
RPM_1%/sec
Rate
TA_Spd_SP TA_Spd_SPX, RPM
Ramp A
Trp_Anticptr
RPM_94% Reset A<B
(Out=In)
B
TrpAntcptTst Hyst
RPM_1%
PulseRate1, IO, RPM
TA_Trip,SS Trip Anticipator

SteamTurbOnly Trp_Anticptr Trip
L12TA_TP
VPRO Protection Logic - Trip Anticipation

L5Cont_Trip
L5Cont1_Trip Contact
Trip
L5Cont2_Trip
L5Cont3_Trip
L5Cont4_Trip
L5Cont5_Trip
L5Cont6_Trip
L5Cont7_Trip
Turbine_Type, CFG (VPRO Crd_Cfg)

SteamTurb Only Configured
LargeSteam Steam Turbine
only, not
MediumSteam including Stag
SmallSteam
ComposTrip1A
OS1_Trip
Composite
Dec1_Trip Trip 1A
L5CFG1_Trip
L5Cont_Trip
Acc1_Trip
Cross_Trip, SS
OT_Trip SteamTurbOnly
LM_2Shaft LM_3Shaft HPZero SpdByp,SS PR1__Zero
L3Z
LMTripZEnabl,
CFG(VPRO)
VPRO Protection Logic - Trip Logic

OS2_Trip GT_2Shaft ComposTrip1B Composite
Trip 1B
Dec2_Trip
LM_2Shaft
L5CFG2_Trip
LM_3Shaft
Acc2_Trip
LPShaftLocked
OS3_Trip LM_3Shaft
Dec3_Trip
L5CFG3_Trip
Acc3_Trip
ComposTrip1 Composite
ComposTrip1A
Trip 1
ComposTrip1B
Turbine_Type, CFG (VPRO)

ComposTrip2
ComposTrip1 Stag_GT_1Sh Composite
Trip 2
Stag_GT_1Sh
OS1_Trip
Dec1_Trip
L5CFG1_Trip
L5Cont_Trip
Acc1_Trip
Cross_Trip, SS
VPRO Protection Logic - Trip Logic (continued)

RelayOutput, CFG( J3,K1_Fdbk)
used ETR1
TA_Trip TestETR1 ComposTrip1 L5ESTOP1 Trip Relay,
ETR1_Enab
x x Energize
to Run
TRES,TREL*
KE1*
ETR1 SOL1_Vfdbk KE1_Enab Economizing
TDPU Relay,
used Energize to
TA_Trp_Enabl1 Econ,
CFG(VPRO_CRD,CFG) KE1, J3
RelayOutput, CFG( J3,KE1_Vfdbk)
2 sec
used
L5ESTOP1 ETR2
TA_Trip TestETR2 ComposTrip1 Trip Relay,
ETR2_Enab Energize
x x
to Run
TRES,TREL*
KE2*
TDPU Relay,
Energize to
used
TA_Trp_Enabl2 Econ,
RelayOutput, CFG(J3,KE2_Vfdbk)
2 sec

L97EOST_ONLZ Large Steam
used
ETR3
TA_Trip ComposTrip1 TestETR3 ETR3_Enab L5ESTOP1 Trip Relay,
x x Energize
to Run
TRES,TREL*
KE3* Economizing
ETR3 SOL3_Vfdbk KE3_Enab
TDPU Relay,
Energize to
used Econ,
TA_Trp_Enabl3
2 sec Note: * Functions, L5ESTOP1 & KEx

are not included in the TRES, TREL
TB applications. They are included
only in the TREG applications.
VPRO Protection Logic - ETR 1, 2, and 3

used ETR4
TA_Trip TestETR4 ComposTrip1 L5ESTOP2 Trip Relay,
ETR4_Enab
x x Energize
to Run
TRES,TREL*
KE4*
TDPU Relay,
used Energize to
TA_Trp_Enabl4 Econ,
RelayOutput, CFG( J4,KE4_Vfdbk)
2 sec
used ETR5
ComposTrip1 L5ESTOP2 Trip Relay,
ETR5_Enab Energize
x x
to Run
TRES,TREL*
KE5*
TDPU Relay,
Energize to
used
Econ,
KE2, J4
2 sec
used
ComposTrip2 ETR6
ETR6_Enab L5ESTOP2 Trip Relay,
x x Energize
to Run
TRES,TREL*
KE6* Economizing
ETR6 SOL6_Vfdbk KE6_Enab
TDPU Relay,
Energize to
used Econ,
KE3, J4
2 sec Note: * Functions, L5ESTOP2 and

are not included in the TRES, TREL
TB applications. They are included
only in the TREG applications.
VPRO Protection Logic - ETR 4, 5, and 6

CFG(J3, K25K_Fdbk)
SynchCheck(Used, Unused)
VoltageDiff
SystemFreq(50,60)
TurbRPM
ReferFreq
FreqDiff
PhaseDiff
GenVoltage
BusVoltage
SynCk_Perm, SS GenFreq, SS
Synch Check Function
SynCk_ByPass, SS BusFreq, SS
GenVolts, SS
Slip
BusVolts, SS
GenFreqDiff, SS
DriveFreq Phase GenPhaseDiff, SS
GenVoltsDiff, SS
GenPT_KVolts, IO Synch
Window
BusPT_KVolts, IO L25A_Cmd, IO
K4CL
ComposTrip1 K4CL_Enab OnlineOS1Tst Servo Clamp
Relay, Energize
Used to Clamp, K4CL
RelayOutput,
CFG (J3,K4CL_Fdbk)
K25A
L25A_Cmd K25A_Enab Synch Check Relay
Energize to Close
Used Breaker, K25A
on TTUR via TREG
SynchCheck,
CFG (J3,K25A_Fdbk)
VPRO Protection Logic - Servo Clamp

Inputs Inputs
TPRO, J5 TPRO, J6 GenPT_KVolts
PulseRate1 Gen Volts
Speeds, PR BusPT_KVolts
PulseRate2 Bus Volts
TC1*
PulseRate3 Thermocouples
TC2*
TREG, J3 KESTOP1_Fdbk TC3*
ESTOP1
Contact1 ColdJunction
Trip Interlocks
Contact2 Analog AnalogIn1
Inputs
Contact3 AnalogIn2
Contact4 AnalogIn3
Contact5
Contact6
Contact7
Outputs:
Sol1_Vfdbk
Voltage to TREG, J3
solenoid, Sol2_Vfdbk ETR1
feedback Relays KX1, KY1, KZ1
Sol3_Vfdbk ETR2
Relays KX2, KY2, KZ2
K1_Fdbk* ETR3
Trip Relay Relays KX3, KY3, KZ3
feedback K2_Fdbk* KE1
Relay KE1
K3_Fdbk* KE2
Relay KE2
KE1_Fdbk KE3
Econ Relay Relay KE3
feedback KE2_Fdbk K4CL
Relay K4CL
KE3_Fdbk K25A
Relay K25A
Clamp Relay K4CL_Fdbk
feedback TREG, J4
K25A_Fdbk ETR4
Synch Check Relays KX1, KY1, KZ1
Relay feedback ETR5
TREG, J4 ETR6
KESTOP2_Fdbk KE4
ESTOP2 Relay KE4
Sol4_Vfdbk KE5
Relay KE5
Voltage to KE6
solenoid, Sol5_Vfdbk Relay KE6
feedback Sol6_Vfdbk
K4_Fdbk*
Trip Relay
feedback K5_Fdbk
K6_Fdbk
*Note: Each signal appears three
KE4_Fdbk times in the CSDB; declared Simplex.
Econ Relay
feedback KE5_Fdbk
KE6_Fdbk
VPRO Protection Logic - Hardware I/O Definition

Signal Space Signal Space
Inputs Inputs
PulseRate1 TPRO,J5
PR1_Zero
PulseRate2 Speeds, RPM PR2_Zero Zero Speed
PulseRate3
PR3_Zero
TREG, J3
KESTOP1_Fdbk
ESTOP1 OS1_SP_CfgErr
OS2_SP_CfgErr Config Alarm
Contact1
Contact2 Contacts OS3_SP_CfgErr
Contact3 ComposTrip1 Composite Trips
Contact4 ComposTrip2
Contact5 ComposTrip3
Contact6 L5CFG1_Trip Outputs:
Contact7 L5CFG2_Trip Config Trip
L5CFG3_Trip SynCk_Perm
Sol1_Vfdbk Synch
Voltage to OS1_Trip SynCk_ByPass
Sol2_Vfdbk solenoid, Overspd Check
OS2_Trip
Sol3_Vfdbk feedback Trips Cross_Trip
OS3_Trip
Dec1_Trip OnLineOS1Tst
*K1_Fdbk
Dec2_Trip Dec Overspeed OnLineOS1X
*K2_Fdbk Trip Relay Test
feedback Dec3_Trip Trips OnLineOS2Tst
*K3_Fdbk Acc1_Trip OnLineOS3Tst
Acc2_Trip Accel Trips OffLineOS1Tst
KE1_Fdbk Acc3_Trip OffLineOS2Tst
Econ Relay
KE2_Fdbk feedback LPShaftLock OffLineOS3Tst
LP Shaft Locked TrpAntcptTst
KE3_Fdbk Trip
TA_Trip LockRotorByp
Trip Trip
K4CL_Fdbk TA_StptLoss Antic HPZeroSpdByp
Clamp Relay Bypass
feedback OT_Trip Ovrtemp PTR1
K25A_Fdbk Diagn
Synch Check Trip PTR2
checking
Relay feedback L5ESTOP1 PTR3
ESTOPs
L5ESTOP2 PTR4
KESTOP2_Fdbk TREG, J4 PTR5
ESTOP2 L5Cont1_Trip PTR6
Sol4_Vfdbk L5Cont2_Trip Contact Trips
Sol5_Vfdbk Voltage to L5Cont3_Trip OS1_Setpoint
solenoid, Overspeed
L5Cont4_Trip Setpoints OS2_Setpoint
Sol6_Vfdbk feedback
L5Cont5_Trip OS3_Setpoint
*K4_Fdbk L5Cont6_Trip
Trip Relay TA Setpoint OS1_TATrpSP
K5_Fdbk feedback L5Cont7_Trip
K6_Fdbk CPD
mA1_Trip
KE4_Fdbk Misc Trips
Econ Relay mA2_Trip
KE5_Fdbk TestETR1
feedback mA3_Trip Relay Test TestETR2
KE6_Fdbk
L25A_Cmd TestETR3
GenPT_KVolts TPRO,J6 GenFreq Synch Check TestETR4
Gen Volts BusFreq
BusPT_KVolts Cold Junction CJBackup
Bus Volts GenVolts
Backup
BusVolts
*TC1 VCMI (Mstr) L86MR
GenFreqDiff
*TC2 GenPhaseDiff Reset
Thermocouples
*TC3 GenVoltsDiff Max speed PR_Max_Rst
ColdJunction Reset
PR1_Accel Accel
PR2_Accel Gen Center DriveFreq
AnalogIn1
Analog PR3_Accel Freq
AnalogIn2 Inputs
PR1_Max
AnalogIn3 Max Speed
PR2_Max since the
PR3_Max last Zero
*Note: Each signal appears three times in the CSDB; declared Simplex
VPRO Protection Logic - Signal Space

Inputs Signal Space
Cont1_TrEnab Configuration
Cont2_TrEnab Status
Cont3_TrEnab
Cont4_TrEnab
Cont5_TrEnab
Cont6_TrEnab
Cont7_TrEnab
Acc1_TrEnab
Acc2_TrEnab
Acc3_TrEnab
OT_TrEnab
GT_1Shaft
GT_2Shaft
LM_2Shaft
LM_3Shaft
LargeSteam
MediumSteam
SmallSteam
Stag_GT_1Sh
Stag_GT_2Sh
ETR1_Enab
ETR2_Enab
ETR3_Enab
ETR4_Enab
ETR5_Enab
ETR6_Enab
KE1_Enab
KE2_Enab
KE3_Enab
KE4_Enab
KE5_Enab
KE6_Enab
K4CL_Enab
K25A_Enab
VPRO Protection Logic - Signal Space (continued)

Power Load Unbalance
The Power Load Unbalance (PLU) option is used on large steam turbines to protect
the machine from overspeed under load rejection. The PLU function looks for an
unbalance between mechanical and electrical power. Its purpose is to initiate Control
Valve (CV) and Intercept Valve (IV) fast closing actions under load rejection
conditions where rapid acceleration could lead to an overspeed event. Valve
actuation does not occur under stable fault conditions that are self-clearing (such as
grid faults).
Valve action occurs when the difference between turbine power and generator load is
typically 40% of rated load or greater, the difference has been sustained for at least
10 milliseconds and the load is lost at a rate equivalent to going from 22.5% rated
load to zero in approximately 6 ms (a PLU rate threshold of 37.5 Per Unit
Current/Second).
The 40% PLU level setting is standard. If it becomes necessary to deviate from this
setting for a specific unit, the fact will be noted by the unit-specific documentation.
The PLU unbalance threshold, (PLU_Unbal), may be adjusted from the toolbox.
Turbine mechanical power is derived from a milliamp reheat steam pressure signal.
The mechanical power signal source is configurable as follows:
x The mid value of the first three mA inputs (circuits 1, 2, 3)

x The max value of the first two mA inputs (circuits 1, 2)
x A single transducer, circuit 1
x A single transducer, circuit 2
x A signal from signal space, where Mechanical Power is calculated in the
controller, in percent
The generator load is assumed to be proportional to the sum of the 3-phase currents,
thereby discriminating between load rejection and power line faults. This
discrimination would not be possible if a true MW signal was used.
The PLU signal actuates the CV and IV fast closing solenoids and resets the Load
Reference signal to the no-load value (and performs some auxiliary functions).
The PLU function is an important part of the overspeed

protective system. Do not disable during turbine operation.
The three current signals from the station current transformers are reduced by three
auxiliary transformers on TGEN. These signals are summed in the controller and
compare to the power pressure signal from the reheat pressure sensor. The signals are
qualified (normalized) according to the Current Rating and Press Rating
configuration parameters. This comparison yields a qualified unbalance measure of
the PLU, as shown by signal B in the following figure. The output of the total
generator current is also fed into the current rate amplifier. This comparison provides
a measure of the rate of change of the generator current, signal A. The current rate
level may be adjusted through the PLU rate threshold function (PLU_Rate). This
value must be set at 37.5 (PU/Sec).

PU Current
Rate Threshold (37.5 PU/Sec)
Rectified Current
500 ms Pulse PLU_Rate_Thd (Cfg)
Phase A PLU_Tst (so)
PLU_test_active
PLU Current Rate

Rectified Current Note 1 Out of Limits
Phase B Edge
A
Triggered
PU Current Rate of B < -A [A]
Pulse
Change B
12 ms
Rectified Current Detect
Phase C 0 Note 2
pi
-----
1
------------------ - PLU Unbalance
6 CurrentRatg (Cfg) A Out of Limits
TDPU
+ A>B
Note 3
10 ms [B]
B
Reheat Pressure PU Mechanical Power
PLU_Unbal (Cfg)
PLU Unbalanced
PLU_Enab (Cfg)
Threshold (0.4)
PLU Permissive
1
--------------------
PressRatg (Cfg)
PLU IV Event
[C]
PLU_Del_Enab (Cfg)
PLU Delay Enable
PLU CV Event
PLU Current Rate
[D]
Out of Limits
[A] No Delay
AND PLU Event
SET
[B] Delay S Q
PLU Unbalance
Out of Limits SET
S Q TDPU
R CLR
Q
OR R CLR
Q
PLU_Delay (Cfg)
TDPU
16 ms
fixed
Notes: (1) Closed when PLU_tst (so) is enabled

(2) Force to 0 when PLU_test_active
(3) Closed when PLU_Enab (cfg) is enabled
PLU Valve Actuation Logic

If these comparators operate simultaneously, PLU action is initiated and latched,
making continuation of the PLU action dependent only on the unbalance for all
functions except IV fast closing. The IVs do not lock in, but remain closed for
approximately one second and then begin to re-open regardless of PLU duration.
A time-delay may be implemented for the PLU function. To initiate the delay, go to
the Enable PLU response delay parameter (PLU_Del_Enab) and select Enable. The
duration of the time-delay can be adjusted by altering the value of the PLU delay
(PLU_Delay) parameter.
These dropout times have been arrived at based on experience, and are used to
reduce the transient load on the hydraulic system.
The IVs and CVs may be operated through test signals from the controller. These
signals are executed individually and are logic ORed with the above signals as
shown in following figure. The IVs may also be driven by the Early Valve Actuation
(EVA) and IV Trigger (IVT) functions. Each solenoid has a unique dropout time
delay, refer to the following table and figure.
Solenoid Drop-Out Point Delay Values
Steam Valve IV1 IV2 IV3 IV4 IV5 IV6 CV1 CV2 CV3 CV4
Dropout 1.35 1.50 1.75 1.35 1.75 1.50 1.10 2.00 3.00 4.00
Delay,
seconds

PLU_test_active
[D] PLU CV Event Dropout

Delay
Note 1 1
To TRLY, Control Valve 1
RelayDropTim (Cfg) Solenoid
OR
Control Valve 1 Test *
Relay nn_Tst
Dropout
Delay
2
RelayDropTim (Cfg) Solenoid
OR
Control Valve 2 Test *

Relay nn_Tst
EVA_test_active
Dropout
Note 3
EVA OR Delay
[G]
3
Note 2 To TRLY, Control Valve 3
RelayDropTim (Cfg)
Solenoid
EVA_Enable (Cfg) OR
*
Control Valve 3 Test
Relay nn_Tst
Dropout
OR Delay
4
Notes: (1) Open when PLU_test_active RelayDropTim (Cfg)
Solenoid
(2) Open when EVA_test_active OR
(3) Closed when EVA_Enab (cfg) is enabled
(4) Closed when IVT_Enab (cfg) is enabled *
Control Valve 4 Test
Relay nn_Tst
Duplicate for IV 1 to 6
PLU_test_active
PLU IV Event Note 1

[C]
IV_Trgr * Note 4 Dropout
OR Delay
EVA 5
[G]
To TRLY, Intercept Valve 1
Note 2 Solenoid
OR
RelayDropTim (Cfg)
*
Intercept Valve 1 Test
IVT_Enab (Cfg )
EVA_test_active Relay nn_Tst
Spare 7-12 Test Spare Solenoid 7-12 Control

Spare Solenoid
Control Signals
*
Signal to/from System
Fast Acting Solenoid Sequencing

Early Valve Actuation
The Early Valve Actuation (EVA) system was developed for power systems where
instability, such as the loss of synchronization, is a problem. When the EVA senses a
fault that is not a load rejection, it causes closing of the Intercept Valves (IV) for
approximately one second. This action reduces the available mechanical power to
that of the already reduced electrical power, and therefore prevents too large an
increase in the machine angle and the consequent loss of synchronization. See
following figure for the valve actuation diagram.
Reheat P.U. Reheat

Pressure pressure
X
EVA P.U.
+ Unbalance
EVA Unbalance
Filter A Out of Limit
1/(Rated A>B E
Heat Press) - B
P.U. EVA Unbal Limit
(Download) IO_Cfg
Per Unit Megawatt EVA per Unit
Megawatt Rate
Rate of Change EVA M.W.

A
Detect Rate Out of Limit
A>B F
B
0.0
P.U EVA Rate Limit
(Downloaded)
* EVA Test Negative Number
Functional Test
* Ext. EVA * EVA

Dropout
Event
* Ext. EVA Delay
Enable #2
IO_Cfg
Download Fixed 5 sec.
OR Dropout EVA Control
*EVA Perm. AND Delay G
S Pickup EVA
#1
E AND Latch Delay Event
R 1 1
Delay time
F EVA Enable (Downloaded)
Fixed 10 (Downloaded) IO_Cfg
OR msec IO_Cfg
Pickup
Delay
1 * Signal to/from Signal Space
Fixed 15
msec
EVA Valve Actuation Logic

Intercept Valve Trigger
The peak speed following rejection of 10% or greater rated load cannot be
maintained within limits on some units by the normal speed and servo control action.
Approximately 70% of turbine power is generated in the reheat and low-pressure
turbine sections (the boiler re-heater volume represents a significant acceleration
energy source). Fast closing of the IVs can therefore quickly reduce turbine power
and peak overspeed. The action fulfills the first basic function of normal overspeed
control, limiting peak speed. The Intercept Valve Trigger (IVT) signal is produced in
the controller by the IVT algorithm and associated sequencing, see the previous
figure, EVA Valve Actuation Logic.
Early Valve Actuation (EVA)
The EVA function may be implemented on sites where instability, such as loss of
synchronization, presents a problem. EVA closes the IVs for approximately one
second upon sensing a fault that is not a load rejection. This action reduces the
available mechanical power, thereby inhibiting the loss of synchronization that can
occur as a result of increased machine angle (unbalance between mechanical and
electrical power). If the fault persists, the generator loses synchronization and the
turbine is tripped by the overspeed control or out-of-step relaying.
The EVA is enabled in the toolbox by selecting Enable for the EVA_Enab
parameter. The conditions for EVA action are as follows:
x The difference between mechanical power (reheat pressure) and electrical power
(megawatts) exceeds the configured EVA unbalance threshold (EVA_Unbal)
input value.
x Electrical power (megawatts) decreases at a rate equivalent to (or greater than)
one of three rates configured for EVA megawatt rate threshold (EVA_Rate).
This value is adjustable according to three settings: HIgh, MEdium, and LOw.
These settings correspond to 50, 35, and 20 ms rates respectively.
Note The megawatt signal is derived from voltage and current signals provided by
customer-supplied transformers located on the generator side of the circuit breaker.
The EVA_Unbal value represents the largest fault a particular generator can sustain
without losing synchronization. Although the standard setting for this constant is
70%, it may be adjusted up or down 0 to 2 per unit from the toolbox. All EVA events
are annunciated.

Fast Overspeed Trip in VTUR
In special cases where a faster overspeed trip system is required, the VTUR Fast
Overspeed Trip algorithms may be enabled. The system employs a speed
measurement algorithm using a calculation for a predetermined tooth wheel. Two
overspeed algorithms are available in VTUR as follows:
x PR_Single. This uses two redundant VTUR boards by splitting up the two
redundant PR transducers, one to each board.
x PR_Max. This uses one VTUR board connected to the two redundant PR
transducers. PR_Max allows broken shaft and deceleration protection without
the risk of a nuisance trip if one transducer is lost.
The fast trips are linked to the output trip relays with an OR-gate as shown in the
following figures. VTUR computes the overspeed trip, not the controller, so the trip
is very fast. The time from the overspeed input to the completed relay dropout is 30
msec or less.

Input Signal Space
VTUR, Firmware
Config. Inputs
Scaling
Input, PR1 param. RPM PulseRate1
PR1Type, d RPM/sec Accel1
PR1Scale 2
PulseRate2 dt
------ Four Pulse Rate Circuits ------- RPM PulseRate2
PulseRate3 Accel1 RPM/sec Accel2
Accel2 RPM PulseRate3
PulseRate4 Accel3 RPM/sec Accel3
Accel4 RPM PulseRate4
RPM/sec Accel4
Fast Overspeed Protection
FastTripType PR_Single
PulseRate1 A
PR1Setpoint A>B S FastOS1Trip
PR1TrEnable B
R
PR1TrPerm
PulseRate2 A
A>B S
PR2Setpoint B FastOS2Trip
PR2TrEnable R
PR2TrPerm
PulseRate3 A
PR3Setpoint A>B S FastOS3Trip
PR3TrEnable B
R
PR3TrPerm
PulseRate4 A
A>B S FastOS4Trip
PR4Setpoint B
PR4TrEnable R
PR4TrPerm
InForChanA Accel1
Accel2 Input AccelA
Accel3 cct. A S
Accel4 select A>B AccATrip
AccASetpoint
B R
AccelAEnab
AccelAPerm
InForChanB Accel1
Accel2 Input AccelB
Accel3 cct. A S AccBTrip
Accel4 select A>B
AccBSetpoint B R
AccelBEnab Fast Trip
AccelBPerm Path
ResetSys, VCMI, Mstr False = Run
OR
PTR1 Primary Trip Relay, normal Path, True= Run True = Run Output, J4,PTR1
AND
PTR1_Output
PTR2 Primary Trip Relay, normal Path, True= Run AND True = Run Output, J4,PTR2
PTR2_Output
PTR3 True = Run Output, J4,PTR3
PTR3_Output -------------Total of six circuits ----- Output, J4A,PTR4
PTR4 True = Run
PTR4_Output Output, J4A,PTR5
PTR5 True = Run
PTR5_Output True = Run Output, J4A,PTR6
PTR6
PTR6 Output
Fast Overspeed Algorithm, PR-Single

Signal Space
Input Config. VTUR, Firmware
Scaling inputs
Input, PR1 param. PulseRate1 RPM PulseRate1
PR1Type, RPM/sec Accel1
2 d
PR1Scale
dt RPM PulseRate2
PulseRate2
Accel1 ------ Four Pulse Rate Circuits ------- RPM/sec Accel2
PulseRate3 Accel2 RPM PulseRate3
Accel3 RPM/sec Accel3
PulseRate4 Accel4 RPM PulseRate4
RPM/sec Accel4
FastTripType PR_Max Fast Overspeed Protection
DecelPerm
DecelEnab
DecelStpt
InForChanA
InForChanB
Accel1 Input AccelA
Neg A
Accel2 cct. S
Accel3 AccelB AB
B PR1/2Max
PulseRate1 A
MAX A>B S
PulseRate2 FastOS1Trip
FastOS1Stpt B
FastOS1Enab R
FastOS1Perm
PR3/4Max
PulseRate3 A
MAX A>B S FastOS2Trip
PulseRate4
FastOS2Stpt B
FastOS2Enab R
FastOS2Perm
N/C FastOS3Trip
PR1/2Max N/C FastOS4Trip
A
|A-B| A
PR3/4Max A>B S
DiffSetpoint B FastDiffTrip
B
DiffEnab R
DiffPerm
Fast Trip
ResetSys, VCMI, Mstr Path
OR
False = Run
True = Run Output, J4,PTR1

PTR1 Primary Trip Relay, normal Path, True= Run AND
PTR1_Output
True = Run Output, J4,PTR2
PTR2 Primary Trip Relay, normal Path, True= Run AND
PTR2_Output
PTR3 True = Run Output, J4,PTR3
PTR3_Output -------------Total of six circuits --------- True = Run Output, J4A,PTR4
PTR4
PTR5 True = Run Output, J4A,PTR5
PTR5_Output
PTR6 True = Run Output, J4A,PTR6
PTR6_Output
Fast Overspeed Algorithm, PR-Max

Compressor Stall Detection
Gas turbine compressor stall detection is included with the VAIC firmware and is
executed at a rate of 200 Hz. There is a choice of two stall algorithms and both use
the first four analog inputs, scanned at 200 Hz. One algorithm is for small LM gas
turbines and uses two pressure transducers. The other algorithm is for heavy-duty gas
turbines and uses three pressure transducers, refer to the figures below.
Real-time inputs are separated from the configured parameters for clarity. The
parameter CompStalType selects the type of algorithm required, either two
transducers or three. PS3 is the compressor discharge pressure, and a drop in this
pressure (PS3 drop) is an indication of a possible compressor stall. In addition to the
drop in pressure, the algorithm calculates the rate of change of discharge pressure,
dPS3dt, and compares these values with configured stall parameters (KPS3
constants). Refer to the figures below.
The compressor stall trip is initiated by VAIC, and the signal is sent to the controller
where it is used to initiate a shutdown. The shutdown signal can be used to set all the
fuel shut-off valves (FSOV) through the VCRC and TRLY or DRLY board.

Input VAIC, 200 Hz scan rate *Note: where x, y, represent any two Signal Space
Config of the input circuits 1 thru 4. Inputs
Input, cctx* param.
AnalogInx*
Scaling
Low_Input, Low_Value,
High_Input, High Value 4
Sys Lim Chk #1
SysLim1Enabl, Enabl SysLimit1_x*
4
SysLim1Latch, Latch
SysLim1Type, >=
SysLimit1, xxxx
ResetSys, VCMI, Mstr Sys Lim Chk #2
4 SysLimit2_x*
SysLim2Enabl, Enabl AnalogIny*
SysLim2Latch, Latch
SysLimit1_y*
SysLim2Type, <=
SysLimit2, xxxx SysLimit2_y*
Validation & Stall Detection

CompStalType two_xducer PS3B_Fail
OR PS3A_Fail OR
Input Circuit Selection PS3A PS3B
InputForPS3A eg. AnalogIn2
InputForPS3B PS3A_Fail
eg. AnalogIn4 PS3_Fail
PS3B_Fail AND
PS3A A
|A-B| A
PS3B DeltaFault
B A>B
PressDelta B
PS3Sel Selection Definition
If PS3B_Fail & not PS3A_Fail
SelMode Max then PS3Sel = PS3A;
ElseIf PS3A_Fail & not PS3B_Fail
PS3A then PS3Sel = PS3B;
ElseIf DeltaFault
then PS3Sel = Max (PS3A, PS3B)
PS3B ElseIf SelMode = Avg PS3Sel PressSel
then PS3Sel = Avg (PS3A, PS3B)
PS3A_Fail ElseIf SelMode = Max
then PS3Sel = Max (PS3A, PS3B) d DPS3DTSel
__
Else
PS3B_Fail then PS3SEL = old value of PS3SEL dt PressRateSel
-DPS3DTSel
-1 X
TimeDelay
-DPS3DTSel TD
KPS3_Drop_Mx PS3_Fail
KPS3_Drop_Mn
KPS3_Drop_I A Mid A AND
KPS3_Drop_S A+B A>B
X B B
z-1
stall_timeout
PS3i
PS3Sel X stall_set
KPS3_Delta_S AND S
A
delta_ref CompStall
KPS3_Delta_I A+B MIN Latch
B A R
stall_delta
KPS3_Delta_Mx delta AB AND PS3i_Hold
A
KPS3_Drop_L
B PS3Sel BA-B stall_permissive
CompStalPerm
MasterReset, VCMI, Mstr
Small (LM) Gas Turbine Compressor Stall Detection Algorithm

Input VAIC, 200 Hz scan rate *Note: where x, y, z, represent any
Signal Space
Config. three of the input circuits 1 thru 4. inputs
param. Scaling
Input, cctx* AnalogInx*
Low_Input, Low_Value,
High_Input, High Value 4 Sys Lim Chk #1
SysLim1Enabl, Enabl SysLimit1_x*
4
SysLim1Latch, Latch
SysLim1Type, >=
SysLimit1, xxxx
ResetSys, VCMI, Mstr
Sys Lim Chk #2
4 SysLimit2_x*
SysLim2Enabl, Enabl
AnalogIny*
SysLim2Latch, Latch SysLimit1_y*
SysLim2Type, <=
SysLimit2_y*
SysLimit2, xxxx
AnalogInz*
SysLimit1_z*
SysLimit2_z*
Stall Detection
CompStalType
three_xducer
not used DeltaFault

Input Circuit Selection
InputForPS3A
eg. AnalogIn1
InputForPS3B
eg. AnalogIn2
InputForPS3C
eg. AnalogIn4
PS3C
PS3B MID PS3Sel, or CPD PressSel
PressDelta not used PS3A SEL
d DPS3DTSel
__
SelMode not used dt PressRateSel
-DPS3DTSel
-1 X
TimeDelay
TD
KPS3_Drop_Mx -DPS3DTSel
KPS3_Drop_Mn
KPS3_Drop_I MID A
A
KPS3_Drop_S A+B A>B
X B B
z-1
stall_timeout
PS3i
PS3Sel X stall_set
KPS3_Delta_S S
A AND CompStall
A+B delta_ref Latch
KPS3_Delta_I MIN stall_
B A
KPS3_Delta_Mx delta R
delta AB PS3i_Hold A
B AND A-B
PS3Sel stall_permissive
B
CompStalPerm
MasterReset, VCMI, Mstr
Heavy Duty Gas Turbine Compressor Stall Detection Algorithm

200
0
B. Delta PS3 drop (PS3 initial - PS3 actual) , DPS3, psid

180 25
0 0
Rate of Change of Pressure- dPS3dt, psia/sec
D
A. KPS3_Drop_S
B. KPS3_Drop_I
C. KPS3_Drop_Mn
140 D. KPS3_Drop_Mx 20
0 0
120 A
0
100 15
0 0
80
0
60 10
0 0
G
40 E
0
20 5
C
0 0
E. KPS3_Delta_S
B
0 F. KPS3_Delta_I
F G. KPS3_Delta_Mx
-200 0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
Initial Compressor Discharge Pressure PS3
Configurable Compressor Stall Detection Parameters
The variables used by the stall detection algorithm are defined as follows:
PS3 Compressor discharge pressure
PS3I Initial PS3
KPS3_Drop_S Slope of line for PS3I versus dPS3dt
KPS3_Drop_I Intercept of line for PS3I versus dPS3dt
KPS3_Drop_Mn Minimum value for PS3I versus dPS3dt
KPS3_Drop_Mx Maximum value for PS3I versus dPS3dt
KPS3_Delta_S Slope of line for PS3I versus Delta PS3 drop
KPS3_Delta_I Intercept of line for PS3I versus Delta PS3
drop
KPS3_Delta_Mx Maximum value for PS3I versus Delta PS3
drop

Ground Fault Detection Sensitivity
Ground fault detection on the floating 125 V dc power bus is based upon monitoring
the voltage between the bus and the ground. The bus voltages with respect to ground
are normally balanced (in magnitude), that is the positive bus to ground is equal to
the negative bus to ground. The bus is forced to the balanced condition by the
bridging resistors, Rb as shown in the following figure. Bus leakage (or ground fault)
from one side will cause the bus voltages with respect to ground to be unbalanced.
Ground fault detection is performed by the VCMI using signals from the PDM.
Refer to Volume II of this System Guide.
P125 Vdc
Rb Rf Vout,Pos
Monitor1
Jumper Grd Fault
Grd Vout,Neg
Rb Monitor2
N125 Vdc
Electrical Circuit Model
Rb/2
Vbus/2 Vout,
Rf Bus Volts
wrt Ground
Ground Fault on Floating 125 V dc Power Bus
There is a relationship between the bridge resistors, the fault resistance, the bus
voltage, and the bus to ground voltage (Vout) as follows:
Vout = Vbus*Rf / [2*(Rf + Rb/2)]
Therefore the threshold sensitivity to ground fault resistance is as follows:
Rf = Vout*Rb / (Vbus – 2*Vout).
The ground fault threshold voltage is typically set at 30 V, that is Vout = 30 V. The
bridging resistors are 82 K each. Therefore, from the formula above, the sensitivity
of the control panel to ground faults, assuming it is on one side only, is as shown in
the following figure.
Note On Mark V, the bridging resistors are 33 K each so different Vout values
result.

Sensitivity to Ground Faults
Vbus - Vout - Measured Rb (Kohms) - Rf (Kohms) - Control System
Bus Bus to ground bridge resistors fault resistor
voltage voltage (threshold) (balancing)
105 30 82 55 Mark VI
125 30 82 38 Mark VI
140 30 82 31 Mark VI
105 19 82 23 Mark VI
125 19 82 18 Mark VI
140 19 82 15 Mark VI
105 10 82 10 Mark VI
125 10 82 8 Mark VI
140 10 82 7 Mark VI
105 30 33 22 Mark V
125 30 33 15 Mark V
140 30 33 12 Mark V
The results for the case of 125 V dc bus voltage with various fault resistor values is
shown in the following figure.
40.0
30.0 Fault Resistance (Rf) Vs Threshold
Fault, Rf
Voltage (Vout) at 125 V dc on

20.0
Mark VI
10.0
0.0
0 10 20 30
Voltage, Vout
Threshold Voltage as Function of Fault Resistance
Analysis of Results
On Mark VI, when the voltage threshold is configured to 30 V and the voltage bus is
125 V dc, the fault threshold is 38 :. When the voltage threshold is configured to 17
V and the voltage bus is 125 V dc, the fault threshold is 15 :.
The sensitivity of the ground fault detection is configurable. Balanced bus leakage
decreases the sensitivity of the detector.

Notes

Glossary of Terms
application code
Software that controls the machines or processes, specific to the application.
ARCNet
Attached Resource Computer Network. A LAN communications protocol developed
by Datapoint Corporation.The physical (coax and chip) and datalink (token ring and
board interface) layer of a 2.5 MHz communication network which serves as the
basis for DLAN+.
ASCII
American Standard for Code for Information Interchange (ASCII). An 8-bit code
used for data.
Asynchronous Device Language (ADL)

An application layer protocol used for I/O communication on IONet.
attributes
Information, such as location, visibility, and type of data that sets something apart
from others. In signals, an attribute can be a field within a record.
Balance of Plant (BOP)

Plant equipment other than the turbine that needs to be controlled.
Basic Input/Output System (BIOS)

Performs the controller boot-up, which includes hardware self-tests and the file
system loader. The BIOS is stored in EEPROM and is not loaded from the toolbox.
baud
A unit of data transmission. Baud rate is the number of bits per second transmitted.
Bently Nevada
A manufacturer of shaft vibration monitoring equipment.
bit
Binary Digit. The smallest unit of memory used to store only one piece of
information with two states, such as One/Zero or On/Off. Data requiring more than
two states, such as numerical values 000 to 999, requires multiple bits (see Word).
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Glossary of Terms x G-1

block
Instruction blocks contain basic control functions, which are connected together
during configuration to form the required machine or process control. Blocks can
perform math computations, sequencing, or continuous control. The toolbox receives
a description of the blocks from the block libraries.
board
Printed wiring board.
Boolean
Digital statement that expresses a condition that is either True or False. In the
toolbox, it is a data type for logical signals.
Bus
An electrical path for transmitting and receiving data.
byte
A group of binary digits (bits); a measure of data flow when bytes per second.
CIMPLICITY
Operator interface software configurable for a wide variety of control applications.
COM port
Serial controller communication ports (two). COM1 is reserved for diagnostic
information and the Serial Loader. COM2 is used for I/O communication.

Interface that consists of a set of product and application specific operator displays
running on a small cabinet computer hosting Embedded Windows NT.
configure
To select specific options, either by setting the location of hardware jumpers or
loading software parameters into memory.
Current Transformer (CT)

Measures current in an ac power cable.
Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC)

Detects errors in Ethernet and other transmissions.
data server
A computer which gathers control data from input networks and makes the data
available to computers on output networks.
G-2 x Glossary of Terms GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I

dead band
A range of values in which the incoming signal can be altered without changing the
output response.
device
A configurable component of a process control system.
DIN-rail
European standard mounting rail for electronic modules.
Distributed Control System (DCS)

Control system, usually applied to control of boilers and other process equipment.
DLAN+
GE Energy LAN protocol, using an ARCNET controller chip with modified
ARCNET drivers. A communication link between exciters, drives, and controllers,
featuring a maximum of 255 drops with transmissions at 2.5 MBPS.
Ethernet
LAN with a 10/100 M baud collision avoidance/collision detection system used to
link one or more computers together. Basis for TCP/IP and I/O services layers that
conform to the IEEE 802.3 standard, developed by Xerox, Digital, and Intel.
Ethernet Global Data (EGD)

Control network and protocol for the controller. Devices share data through EGD
exchanges (pages).
EX2000 (Exciter)
Latest version of GE generator exciter control; regulates the generator field current to
control the generator output voltage.
fanned input
An input to the terminal board which is connected to all three TMR I/O boards.
fault code
A message from the controller to the HMI indicating a controller warning or failure.
Finder
A subsystem of the toolbox for searching and determining the usage of a particular
item in a configuration.
firmware
The set of executable software that is stored in memory chips that hold their content
without electrical power, such as EEPROM.

flash
A non-volatile programmable memory device.
forcing
Setting a live signal to a particular value, regardless of the value blockware or I/O is
writing to that signal.
frame rate
Basic scheduling period of the controller encompassing one complete input-
compute-output cycle for the controller. It is the system-dependent scan rate.
function
The highest level of the blockware hierarchy, and the entity that corresponds to a
single .tre file.
gateway
A device that connects two dissimilar LANs or connects a LAN to a wide-area
network (WAN), computer, or a mainframe. A gateway can perform protocol and
bandwidth conversion.
Graphic Window
A subsystem of the toolbox for viewing and setting the value of live signals.
health
A term that defines whether a signal is functioning as expected.
Heartbeat
A signal emitted at regular intervals by software to demonstrate that it is still active.
hexadecimal (hex)
Base 16 numbering system using the digits 0-9 and letters A-F to represent the
decimal numbers 0-15. Two hex digits represent 1 byte.
I/O
Input/output interfaces that allow the flow of data into and out of a device.
I/O drivers
Interface the controller with input/output devices, such as sensors, solenoid valves,
and drives, using a choice of communication networks.
I/O mapping
Method for moving I/O points from one network type to another without needing an
interposing application task.

initialize
To set values (addresses, counters, registers, and such) to a beginning value prior to
the rest of processing.
Innovation Series Controller

A process and logic controller used for several types of GE industrial control
systems.
insert
Adding an item either below or next to another item in a configuration, as it is
viewed in the hierarchy of the Outline View of the toolbox.
instance
Update an item with a new definition.
IONet
The Mark VI I/O Ethernet communication network (controlled by the VCMIs)
IP Address
The address assigned to a device on an Ethernet communication network.
logical
A statement of a true sense, such as a Boolean.
macro
A group of instruction blocks (and other macros) used to perform part of an
application program. Macros can be saved and reused.
Mark VI Turbine Controller

A controller hosted in one or more VME racks that perform turbine-specific speed
control, logic, and sequencing.
median
The middle value of three values; the median selector picks the value most likely to
be closest to correct.
Modbus
A serial communication protocol developed by Modicon for use between PLCs and
other computers.
module
A collection of tasks that have a defined scheduling period in the controller.
non-volatile
The memory specially designed to store information even when the power is off.

online
Online mode provides full CPU communications, allowing data to be both read and
written. It is the state of the toolbox when it is communicating with the system for
which it holds the configuration. Also, a download mode where the device is not
stopped and then restarted.
pcode
A binary set of records created by the toolbox, which contain the controller
application configuration code for a device. Pcode is stored in RAM and Flash
memory.
period
The time between execution scans for a Module or Task. Also a property of a
Module that is the base period of all of the Tasks in the Module.
pin
Block, macro, or module parameter that creates a signal used to make
interconnections.

Ethernet communication network between the HMI Servers and the HMI Viewers
and workstations
Potential Transformer (PT)

Measures voltage in a power cable.
Power Distribution Module (PDM)

The PDM distributes 125 V dc and 115 V ac to the VME racks and I/O terminal
boards.
Power Load Unbalance (PLU)

Detects a load rejection condition which can cause overspeed.
product code (runtime)

Software stored in the controller’s Flash memory that converts application code
(pcode) to executable code.
PROFIBUS
An open fieldbus communication standard defined in international standard EN 50
170 and is supported in simplex Mark VI systems.
Programmable Logic Controller (PLC)

Designed for discrete (logic) control of machinery. It also computes math (analog)
function and performs regulatory control.

Proximitor
Bently Nevada's proximity probes used for sensing shaft vibration.
QNX
A real time operating system used in the controller.
realtime
Immediate response, referring to process control and embedded control systems that
must respond instantly to changing conditions.
reboot
To restart the controller or toolbox.
Redundant Power Supply Module (RPSM)

IS2020RPSM Redundant Power Supply Module for VME racks that mounts on the
side of the control rack instead of the power supply. The two power supplies that
feed the RPSM are mounted remotely.
register page
A form of shared memory that is updated over a network. Register pages can be
created and instanced in the controller and posted to the SDB.
Relay Ladder Diagram (RLD)

A ladder diagram that represents a relay circuit. Power is considered to flow from the
left rail through contacts to the coil connected at the right.
resources
Also known as groups. Resources are systems (devices, machines, or work stations
where work is performed) or areas where several tasks are carried out. Resource
configuration plays an important role in the CIMPLICITY system by routing alarms
to specific users and filtering the data users receive.
runtime
See product code.
runtime errors
Controller problems indicated on the front cabinet by coded flashing LEDS, and also
in the Log View of the toolbox.
sampling rate
The rate at which process signal samples are obtained, measured in samples/second.
Sequence of Events (SOE)

A high-speed record of contact closures taken during a plant upset to allow detailed
analysis of the event.

Serial Loader
Connects the controller to the toolbox computer using the RS-232C COM ports. The
Serial Loader initializes the controller flash file system and sets its TCP/IP address to
allow it to communicate with the toolbox over the Ethernet.
server
A computer which gathers data over the Ethernet from plant devices, and makes the
data available to computer-based operator interfaces known as viewers.
signal
The basic unit for variable information in the controller.
simplex
Operation that requires only one set of control and I/O, and generally uses only one
channel. The entire Mark VI control system can operate in simplex mode, or
individual VME boards in an otherwise TMR system can operate in implex mode.
simulation
Running a system without all of the configured I/O devices by modeling the behavior
of the machine and the devices in software.
Software Implemented Fault Tolerance (SIFT)

A technique for voting the three incoming I/O data sets to find and inhibit errors.
Note that Mark VI also uses output hardware voting.
stall detection
Detection of stall condition in a gas turbine compressor.
static starter
This runs the generator as a motor to bring a gas turbine up to starting speed.
Status_S
GE proprietary communications protocol that provides a way of commanding and
presenting the necessary control, configuration, and feedback data for a device. The
protocol over DLAN+ is Status_S. It can send directed, group, or broadcast
messages.
Status_S pages
Devices share data through Status_S pages. They make the addresses of the points on
the pages known to other devices through the system database.
symbols
Created by the toolbox and stored in the controller, the symbol table contains signal
names and descriptions for diagnostic messages.

task
A group of blocks and macros scheduled for execution by the user.
TCP/IP
Communication protocols developed to inter-network dissimilar systems. It is a de
facto UNIX standard, but is supported on almost all systems. TCP controls data
transfer and IP provides the routing for functions, such as file transfer and e-mail.
time slice
Division of the total module scheduling period. There are eight slices per single
execution period. These slices provide a means for scheduling modules and tasks to
begin execution at different times.
toolbox
A Windows-based software package used to configure the Mark VI controllers, also
exciters and drives.
trend
A time-based plot to show the history of values, similar to a recorder, available in the
Turbine Historian and the toolbox.
Triple Module Redundancy (TMR)

An operation that uses three identical sets of control and I/O (channels R, S, and T)
and votes the results.

Connects the Mark VI controllers, static starter control system, excitation control
system, PLCs, and other GE provided equipment to the HMI Servers.
validate
Makes certain that toolbox items or devices do not contain errors, and verifies that
the configuration is ready to be built into pcode.
Windows NT
Advanced 32-bit operating system from Microsoft for 386-based computers and
above.
word
A unit of information composed of characters, bits, or bytes, that is treated as an
entity and can be stored in one location. Also, a measurement of memory length,
usually 4, 8, or 16-bits long.

Notes

Index
A F
Acronyms and Abbreviations 1-3 Fault Detection 8-52
Alarms Overview 7-6 Fiber-Optic Cables 3-27
ANSI 4-1 firmware 2-12
Application Code 8-4
G
B
GE Installation Documents 5-2
Building Grounding System 5-18 Generator Protection 2-15
Grounding 5-17
C Ground Fault Detection 8-52
Cable Separation and Routing 5-25
H
Cable Specifications 5-31
CIMPLICITY 6-4 How To Get Help 1-3
Communications 3-10, 3-14 Human-Machine Interface (HMI) 2-3
Code Download 5-46
Components 2-1, 3-27 I
Computer Operator Interface (COI) 2-3, 6-7
Connecting the System 5-35 I/O Cabinets 2-1
Command action 2-32 I/O boards 2-12
Control Cabinet 2-1 interface modules 2-1
Control Module 2-6 Input Processing 2-28
Contaminants 4-7 Installation Support 5-1
Control and Protection 2-21 Installation Support Drawings 5-12
Control Layer 3-3 Interface Features 6-7
Controller 2-9 IONet 2-11, 3-9
IP Address 3-8
D
Data Highway Ethernet Switches 3-6 L
Data Highways 3-4 Levels of Redundancy 2-20
Designated Controller 2-25 Link to Distributed Control System (DCS) 2-4
Diagnostic Alarms 7-9
Disagreement Detector 2-32 M
E MTBFO 2-37
Median Value Analog Voting 2-31
Early Planning 5-2 Modbus 3-14
EGD 3-12
Electrical 4-2 N
Elevation 4-7
NEMA 1-4
Enterprise Layer 3-1
Network Overview 3-1
Environment 4-5
Equipment Grounding 5-17 O
Ethernet Global Data (EGD) 3-12
Ethernet GSM 3-22 Online Repair 2-36
Ethernet Modbus Slave 3-15 Output Processing 2-26
Excitation Control system 2-5
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Index x I-1

P
Plant Data Highway (PDH) 2-4, 3-4
Power Requirements 5-11
Process Alarms 7-7
Q
QNX 2-19
R
Related Documents 1-2
S
SOE 1-4, 3-22, 6-9
Startup Checks 5-41
State Exchange 2-30
Storage 4-5
System Components 2-1
T
TMR 2-22, 2-36
Totalizers 7-11
Turbine Historian 6-8
U
UDH Communicator 2-25
Unit Data Highway (UDH) 2-2, 3-5
V
Vibration 4-8
Voting 2-31, 3-11
W
Windows NT G-9
I-2 x Index GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I

g GE Energy General Electric Company
1501 Roanoke Blvd.
GEH-6421 Vol I
041004
+1 540 387 7000

www.geenergy.com

GE Power Systems
FUNDAMENTALS OF SPEEDTRONIC
MARK VI CONTROL SYSTEM
SPEEDTRONIC Mark VI Control contains a celeration, speed, temperature, shutdown, and

number of control, protection and sequencing sys- manual control functions illustrated in Figure 1.
tems designed for reliable and safe operation of the Sensors monitor turbine speed, exhaust tempera-
gas turbine. It is the objective of this chapter to de- ture, compressor discharge pressure, and other pa-
scribe how the gas turbine control requirements are rameters to determine the operating conditions of
met, using simplified block diagrams and one–line the unit. When it is necessary to alter the turbine op-
diagrams of the SPEEDTRONIC Mark VI control, erating conditions because of changes in load or am-
protection, and sequencing systems. A generator bient conditions, the control modulates the flow of
drive gas turbine is used as the reference. fuel to the gas turbine. For example, if the exhaust
temperature tends to exceed its allowable value for a
CONTROL SYSTEM given operating condition, the temperature control
system reduces the fuel supplied to the turbine and
Basic Design thereby limits the exhaust tempera-
Control of the gas turbine is done by the startup, ac- ture.
TO CRT DISPLAY
FUEL
TEMPERATURE
TO CRT DISPLAY
FSR
FUEL
SPEED MINIMUM SYSTEM
VALUE
SELECT
LOGIC
ACCELERATION
RATE TO TURBINE
TO CRT
DISPLAY
START
UP
SHUT
DOWN
MANUAL
id0043
Figure 1 Simplified Control Schematic
Operating conditions of the turbine are sensed and modes of acceleration, manual FSR, and shutdown
utilized as feedback signals to the SPEEDTRONIC operate in a similar manner.
control system. There are three major control loops –
startup, speed, and temperature – which may be in Fuel Stroke Reference (FSR) is the command signal
control during turbine operation. The output of these for fuel flow. The minimum value select gate con-
control loops is connected to a minimum value gate nects the output signals of the six control modes to
circuit as shown in Figure 1. The secondary control the FSR controller; the lowest FSR output of the six
Fund_Mk_VI 1 FUNDAMENTALS OF SPEEDTRONIC
GE Power Systems
LOGIC FSRSU <R><S><T>

START-UP
CQTC CONTROL
<R><S><T>
FSR FSRACC ACCELERATION
TNHAR CONTROL
LOGIC TNH
TNH TNHAR
FSRMIN
FSRSU FSR
<R><S><T>
LOGIC FSRMAN MANUAL FSR FSRACC
FSRC FSRMAN
FSRSD FSR
MIN
FSRN GATE
FSRT
LOGIC FSRSD
<R><S><T>
FSRC SHUTDOWN
TNHCOR FSRMIN CONTROL
FSR
CQTC
FSRMIN
SPEED CONTROL <R><S><T>

LOGIC
TTUR
VTUR
TNH
77NH PR/D FSRN
LOGIC TNR
TNR
LOGIC TNRI ISOCHRONOUS

TNRI ONLY
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
LOGIC TTRX
TBAI
VAIC <R><S><T>
96CD A/D
TTRX FSRT
FSR
LOGIC
<R><S><T>
FSR
TBTC TTXM
VTCC
TTXD <R><S><T> TTXM
TTXD A/D
MEDIAN
id0038V
Figure 2 Block Diagram – Control Schematic
FUNDAMENTALS OF SPEEDTRONIC 2 Fund_Mk_VI

GE Power Systems
control loops is allowed to pass through the gate to The following speed detectors and speed relays are
the fuel control system as the controlling FSR. The typically used:
controlling FSR will establish the fuel input to the
–L14HR Zero–Speed (approx. 0% speed)
turbine at the rate required by the system which is in
control. Only one control loop will be in control at –L14HM Minimum Speed (approx. 16%
any particular time and the control loop which is speed)
controlling FSR will be displayed on the <HMI>.
–L14HA Accelerating Speed (approx. 50%
Figure 2 shows a more detailed schematic of the speed)
control loops. This can be referenced during the ex- –L14HS Operating Speed (approx. 95%
planation of each loop to show the interfacing. speed)
The zero–speed detector, L14HR, provides the sig-
Start–up/Shutdown Sequence and Control nal when the turbine shaft starts or stops rotating.
When the shaft speed is below 14HR, or at zero–
Start–up control brings the gas turbine from zero speed, L14HR picks–up (fail safe) and the permis-
speed up to operating speed safely by providing sive logic initiates turning gear or slow–roll
proper fuel to establish flame, accelerate the turbine, operation during the automatic start–up sequence of
and to do it in such a manner as to minimize the low the turbine.
cycle fatigue of the hot gas path parts during the se- The minimum speed detector L14HM indicates that
quence. This involves proper sequencing of com- the turbine has reached the minimum firing speed
mand signals to the accessories, starting device and and initiates the purge cycle prior to the introduction
fuel control system. Since a safe and successful of fuel and ignition. The dropout of the L14HM
start–up depends on proper functioning of the gas minimum speed relay provides several permissive
turbine equipment, it is important to verify the state functions in the restarting of the gas turbine after
of selected devices in the sequence. Much of the shutdown.
control logic circuitry is associated not only with ac-
The accelerating speed relay L14HA pickup indi-
tuating control devices, but enabling protective cir-
cates when the turbine has reached approximately
cuits and obtaining permissive conditions before
50 percent speed; this indicates that turbine start–up
proceeding.
is progressing and keys certain protective features.
The gas turbine uses a static start system whereby The high–speed sensor L14HS pickup indicates
the generator serves as a starting motor. A turning when the turbine is at speed and that the accelerating
gear is used for rotor breakaway. sequence is almost complete. This signal provides
General values for control settings are given in this the logic for various control sequences such as stop-
description to help in the understanding of the oper- ping auxiliary lube oil pumps and starting turbine
ating system. Actual values for control settings are shell/exhaust frame blowers.
given in the Control Specifications for a particular Should the turbine and generator slow during an un-
machine. derfrequency situation, L14HS will drop out at the
under–frequency speed setting. After L14HS drops
Speed Detectors out the generator breaker will trip open and the Tur-
bine Speed Reference (TNR) will be reset to
An important part of the start–up/shutdown se- 100.3%. As the turbine accelerates, L14HS will
quence control of the gas turbine is proper speed again pick up; the turbine will then require another
sensing. Turbine speed is measured by magnetic start signal before the generator will attempt to auto–
pickups and will be discussed under speed control. synchronize to the system again.
GE Power Systems
The actual settings of the speed relays are listed in OR LOWER” allows manual adjustment of FSR
the Control Specification and are programmed in the setting between FSRMIN and FSRMAX.
<RST> processors as EEPROM control constants.
While the turbine is at rest, electronic checks are
made of the fuel system stop and control valves, the
accessories, and the voltage supplies. At this time,
START–UP CONTROL “SHUTDOWN STATUS” will be displayed on the
<HMI>. Activating the Master Operation Switch
The start–up control operates as an open loop con- (L43) from “OFF” to an operating mode will acti-
trol using preset levels of the fuel command signal vate the ready circuit. If all protective circuits and
FSR. The levels are: “ZERO”, “FIRE”, “WARM– trip latches are reset, the “STARTUP STATUS” and
UP”, “ACCELERATE” and “MAX”. The Control “READY TO START” messages will be displayed,
Specifications provide proper settings calculated for indicating that the turbine will accept a start signal.
the fuel anticipated at the site. The FSR levels are set Clicking on the “START” Master Control Switch
as Control Constants in the SPEEDTRONIC Mark (L1S) and “EXECUTE” will introduce the start sig-
VI start–up control. nal to the logic sequence.
Start–up control FSR signals operate through the The start signal energizes the Master Control and
minimum value gate to ensure that other control Protection circuit (the “L4” circuit) and starts the
functions can limit FSR as required. necessary auxiliary equipment. The “L4” circuit
permits pressurization of the trip oil system. With
The fuel command signals are generated by the the “L4” circuit permissive and starting clutch auto-
SPEEDTRONIC control start–up software. In addi- matically engaged, the starting device starts turning.
tion to the three active start–up levels, the software Startup status message “STARTING” will be dis-
sets maximum and minimum FSR and provides for played on the <HMI>. See point “A” on the Typical
manual control of FSR. Clicking on the targets for Start–up Curve Figure
“MAN FSR CONTROL” and “FSR GAG RAISE 3.
SPEED – %
100
80
ACCELERATE
IGNITION &
CROSSFIRE WARMUP
60 IGV – DEGREES
START 1 MIN
AUXILIARIES &
DIESEL WARMUP
Tx – °F/10
40 PURGE COAST
DOWN
20
FSR – %
0
A B D
APPROXIMATE TIME – MINUTES id0093
Figure 3 Mark VI Start-up Curve

GE Power Systems
The starting clutch is a positive tooth type overrun- eration. This is done by programming a slow rise in
ning clutch which is self–engagifng in the break- FSR. See point “C” on Figure 3. As fuel is increased,
away mode and overruns whenever the turbine rotor the turbine begins the acceleration phase of start–up.
exceeds the turning gear speed. The clutch is held in as long as the turning gear pro-
vides torque to the gas turbine. When the turbine
When the turbine ‘breaks away’ the turning gear will overruns the turning gear, the clutch will disengage,
rotate the turbine rotor from 5 to 7 rpm. As the static shutting down the turning gear. Speed relay L14HA
starter begins it’s sequence, and accelerates the rotor indicates the turbine is accelerating.
the starting clutch will automatically disengage the
turning gear from the turbine rotor. The turbine The start–up phase ends when the unit attains full–
speed relay L14HM indicates that the turbine is turn- speed–no–load (see point “D” on Figure 3). FSR is
ing at the speed required for proper purging and igni- then controlled by the speed loop and the auxiliary
tion in the combustors. Gas fired units that have systems are automatically shut down.
exhaust configurations which can trap gas leakage
The start–up control software establishes the maxi-
(i.e., boilers) have a purge timer, L2TV, which is ini-
mum allowable levels of FSR signals during start–
tiated with the L14HM signal. The purge time is set
up. As stated before, other control circuits are able to
to allow three to four changes of air through the unit
reduce and modulate FSR to perform their control
to ensure that any combustible mixture has been
functions. In the acceleration phase of the start–up,
purged from the system. The starting means will
FSR control usually passes to acceleration control,
hold speed until L2TV has completed its cycle.
which monitors the rate of rotor acceleration. It is
Units which do not have extensive exhaust systems
possible, but not normal, to reach the temperature
may not have a purge timer, but rely on the starting
control limit. The <HMI> display will show which
cycle and natural draft to purge the system.
parameter is limiting or controlling FSR.
The L14HM signal or completion of the purge cycle
(L2TVX) ‘enables’ fuel flow, ignition, sets firing Fired Shutdown
level FSR, and initiates the firing timer L2F. See
point “B” on Figure 3. When the flame detector out- A normal shutdown is initiated by clicking on the
put signals indicate flame has been established in the “STOP” target (L1STOP) and “EXECUTE”; this
combustors (L28FD), the warm–up timer L2W will produce the L94X signal. If the generator break-
starts and the fuel command signal is reduced to the er is closed when the stop signal is initiated, the Tur-
“WARM–UP” FSR level. The warm–up time is pro- bine Speed Reference (TNR) counts down to reduce
vided to minimize the thermal stresses of the hot gas load at the normal loading rate until the reverse pow-
path parts during the initial part of the start–up. er relay operates to open the generator breaker; TNR
then continues to count down to reduce speed. When
If flame is not established by the time the L2F timer the STOP signal is given, shutdown Fuel Stroke Ref-
times out, typically 60 seconds, fuel flow is halted. erence FSRSD is set equal to FSR.
The unit can be given another start signal, but firing
will be delayed by the L2TV timer to avoid fuel ac- When the generator breaker opens, FSRSD ramps
cumulation in successive attempts. This sequence from existing FSR down to a value equal to
occurs even on units not requiring initial L2TV FSRMIN, the minimum fuel required to keep the
purge. turbine fired. FSRSD latches onto FSRMIN and de-
creases with corrected speed. When turbine speed
At the completion of the warm–up period (L2WX), drops below a defined threshold (Control Constant
the start–up control ramps FSR at a predetermined K60RB) FSRSD ramps to a blowout of one flame
rate to the setting for “ACCELERATE LIMIT”. The detector. The sequencing logic remembers which
start–up cycle has been designed to moderate the flame detectors were functional when the breaker
highest firing temperature produced during accel- opened. When any of the functional flame detectors
GE Power Systems
senses a loss of flame, FSRMIN/FSRSD decreases Speed/Load Reference

at a higher rate until flame–out occurs, after which
fuel flow is stopped. The speed control software will change FSR in pro-
Fired shut down is an improvement over the former portion to the difference between the actual turbine–
fuel shut off at L14HS drop out. By maintaining generator speed (TNH) and the called–for speed
flame down to a lower speed there is significant re- reference (TNR).
duction in the strain developed on the hot gas path The called–for–speed, TNR, determines the load of
parts at the time of fuel shut off. the turbine. The range for generator drive turbines is
normally from 95% (min.) to 107% (max.) speed.
The start–up speed reference is 100.3% and is preset
SPEED CONTROL when a “START” signal is given.
The Speed Control System controls the speed and TNR MAX. HIGH SPEED STOP
107
load of the gas turbine generator in response to the
actual turbine speed signal and the called–for speed
reference. While on speed control the control mode 104
message “SPEED CTRL”will be displayed.
Speed Signal
REFERENCE % (TNR)
SPEED
“FSNL”
Three magnetic sensors are used to measure the 100
speed of the turbine. These magnetic pickup sensors

FULL SPEED NO LOAD FSR
RATED FSR
(77NH–1,–2,–3) are high output devices consisting
of a permanent magnet surrounded by a hermetically
MINIMUM FSR
sealed case. The pickups are mounted in a ring
MAX FSR
around a 60–toothed wheel on the gas turbine com-
pressor rotor. With the 60–tooth wheel, the frequen-
LOW SPEED STOP
cy of the voltage output in Hertz is exactly equal to 95
TNR MIN.
the speed of the turbine in revolutions per minute. FUEL STROKE REFERENCE (LOAD)
(FSR)
id0044
The voltage output is affected by the clearance be- Figure 4 Droop Control Curve
tween the teeth of the wheel and the tip of the mag-
netic pickup. Clearance between the outside
diameter of the toothed wheel and the tip of the mag- The turbine follows to 100.3% TNH for synchro-
netic pickup should be kept within the limits speci- nization. At this point the operator can raise or lower
fied in the Control Specifications (approx. 0.05 inch TNR, in turn raising or lowering TNH, via the
or 1.27 mm). If the clearance is not maintained with- 70R4CS switch on the generator control panel or by
in the specified limits, the pulse signal can be dis- clicking on the targets on the <HMI>, if required.
torted. Turbine speed control would then operate in Refer to Figure 4. Once the generator breaker is
response to the incorrect speed feedback signal. closed onto the power grid, the speed is held
constant by the grid frequency. Fuel flow in excess
The signal from the magnetic pickups is brought into of that necessary to maintain full speed no load will
the Mark VI panel, one mag pickup to each control- result in increased power produced by the generator.
ler <RST>, where it is monitored by the speed con- Thus the speed control loop becomes a load control
trol software. loop and the speed reference is a convenient control
GE Power Systems
of the desired amount of load to be applied to the tur- units have the same droop, all will share a load in-
bine–generator unit. crease equally. Load sharing and system stability are
the main advantages of this method of speed control.
Droop speed control is a proportional control,
changing FSR in proportion to the difference be- Normally 4% droop is selected and the setpoint is
tween actual turbine speed and the speed reference. calibrated such that 104% setpoint will generate a
Any change in actual speed (grid frequency) will speed reference which will produce an FSR result-
cause a proportional change in unit load. This pro- ing in base load at design ambient temperature.
portionality is adjustable to the desired regulation or
When operating on droop control, the full–speed–
“Droop”. The speed vs. FSR relationship is shown
no–load FSR setting calls for a fuel flow which is
on Figure 4.
sufficient to maintain full speed with no generator
If the entire grid system tends to be overloaded, grid load. By closing the generator breaker and raising
frequency (or speed) will decrease and cause an FSR TNR via raise/lower, the error between speed and
increase in proportion to the droop setting. If all reference is increased. This error is multiplied by a
<RST>
SPEED CONTROL
FSNL
TNR
SPEED
REFERENCE
+ ERROR + FSRN
+
– SIGNAL
TNH
SPEED
DROOP
<RST>
SPEED CHANGER LOAD SET POINT
MAX. LIMIT
L83SD
RATE
MEDIAN
L70R SELECT
RAISE
L70L
LOWER
L83PRES TNR
PRESET SPEED
LOGIC REFERENCE
PRESET
OPERATING
L83TNROP MIN.
MIN. SELECT LOGIC
START-UP
OR SHUTDOWN
id0040
Figure 5 Speed Control Schematic

GE Power Systems
gain constant dependent on the desired droop setting start–up control can drive FSR to zero and are not in-
and added to the FSNL FSR setting to produce the fluenced by FSRMIN.
required FSR to take more load and thus assist in
holding the system frequency. Refer to Figures 4 and
5. Synchronizing
The minimum FSR limit (FSRMIN) in the SPEED- Automatic synchronizing is accomplished using
TRONIC Mark VI system prevents the speed con- synchronizing algorithms programmed into <RST>
trol circuits from driving the FSR below the value and <VPRO> software. Bus and generator voltage
which would cause flameout during a transient signals are input to the <VPRO> core which con-
condition. For example, with a sudden rejection of tains isolation transformers, and are then paralleled
load on the turbine, the speed control system loop to <RST>. <RST> software drives the synch check
would want to drive the FSR signal to zero, but the and synch permissive relays, while <VPRO> pro-
minimum FSR setting establishes the minimum fuel vides the actual breaker close command. See Figure
level that prevents a flameout. Temperature and/or 6.
<XYZ>
AUTO SYNCH
<RST>
AUTO SYNCH
PERMISSIVE
CALCULATED PHASE WITHIN LIMITS AND
GEN VOLTS A CALCULATED SLIP WITHIN LIMITS

A>B L25
REF B AND L83AS BREAKER
AUTO SYNCH CLOSE
CALCULATED ACCELERATION
PERMISSIVE
LINE VOLTS
A
A>B CALCULATED BREAKER LEAD TIME
REF B
id0048V
Figure 6 Synchronizing Control Schematic
There are three basic synchronizing modes. These For synchronizing, the unit is brought to 100.3%
may be selected from external contacts, i.e., genera- speed to keep the generator “faster” than the grid, as-
tor panel selector switch, or from the SPEEDTRON- suring load pick–up upon breaker closure. If the sys-
IC Mark VI <HMI>. tem frequency has varied enough to cause an
unacceptable slip frequency (difference between
1. OFF – Breaker will not be closed by SPEED- generator frequency and grid frequency), the speed
TRONIC Mark VI control matching circuit adjusts TNR to maintain turbine
speed 0.20% to 0.40% faster than the grid to assure
2. MANUAL – Operator initiated breaker closure
the correct slip frequency and permit synchronizing.
when permissive synch check relay 25X is satis-
fied
For added protection a synchronizing check relay is
3. AUTO – System will automatically match volt- provided in the generator panel. It is used in series
age and speed and then close the breaker at the with both the auto synchronizing relay and the
appropriate time to hit top dead center on the manual breaker close switch to prevent large out–
synchroscope of–phase breaker closures.
GE Power Systems
ACCELERATION CONTROL turbine occurs in the flame zone of the combustion

chambers. The combustion gas in that zone is di-
Acceleration control compares the present value of luted by cooling air and flows into the turbine sec-
the speed signal with the value at the last sample tion through the first stage nozzle. The temperature
time. The difference between these two numbers is a of that gas as it exits the first stage nozzle is known as
measure of the acceleration. If the actual accelera- the “firing temperature” of the gas turbine; it is this
tion is greater than the acceleration reference, temperature that must be limited by the control sys-
FSRACC is reduced, which will reduce FSR, and tem. From thermodynamic relationships, gas tur-
consequently the fuel to the gas turbine. During bine cycle performance calculations, and known site
start–up the acceleration reference is a function of conditions, firing temperature can be determined as
turbine speed; acceleration control usually takes a function of exhaust temperature and the pressure
over from speed control shortly after the warm–up ratio across the turbine; the latter is determined from
period and brings the unit to speed. At “Complete the measured compressor discharge pressure (CPD).
Sequence”, which is normally 14HS pick–up, the The temperature control system is designed to mea-
acceleration reference is a Control Constant, nor- sure and control turbine exhaust temperature rather
mally 1% speed/second. After the unit has reached than firing temperature because it is impractical to
100% TNH, acceleration control usually serves only measure temperatures directly in the combustion
to contain the unit’s speed if the generator breaker chambers or at the turbine inlet. This indirect control
should open while under load. of turbine firing temperature is made practical by
utilizing known gas turbine aero– and thermo–dy-
namic characteristics and using those to bias the ex-
haust temperature signal, since the exhaust
temperature alone is not a true indication of firing
ISOTHERMAL
temperature.
EXHASUT TEMPERATURE (Tx)
Firing temperature can also be approximated as a

function of exhaust temperature and fuel flow (FSR)
and as a function of exhaust temperature and genera-
tor output (DWATT). Either FSR or megawatt ex-
haust temperature control curves are used as
back–up to the primary CPD–biased temperature
control curve.
These relationships are shown on Figures 7 and 8.
The lines of constant firing temperature are used in
the control system to limit gas turbine operating
COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE PRESSURE (CPD)
id0045 temperatures, while the constant exhaust tempera-
Figure 7 Exhaust Temperature vs.
ture limit protects the exhaust system during start–
Compressor Discharge Pressure up.
Exhaust Temperature Control Hardware

TEMPERATURE CONTROL
Chromel–Alumel exhaust temperature thermocou-
The Temperature Control System will limit fuel ples are used and, typically 27 in number. These
flow to the gas turbine to maintain internal operating thermocouples circumferentially inside the exhaust
temperatures within design limitations of turbine diffuser. They have individual radiation shields that
hot gas path parts. The highest temperature in the gas allow the radial outward diffuser flow to pass over
GE Power Systems
tive exhaust temperature value, compares this value

with the setpoint, and then generates a fuel com-
mand signal to the analog control system to limit ex-
haust temperature.
ISOTHERMAL
Temperature Control Command Program

EXHASUT TEMPERATURE (Tx)
The temperature control command program

compares the exhaust temperature control setpoint
with the measured gas turbine exhaust temperature
as obtained from the thermocouples mounted in the
exhaust plenum; these thermocouples are scanned
and cold junction corrected by programs described
later. These signals are accessed by <RST>. The
temperature control command program in <RST>
FUEL STROKE REFERENCE (FSR) (Figure 9) reads the exhaust thermocouple tempera-
id0046
ture values and sorts them from the highest to the
Figure 8 Exhaust Temperature vs. Fuel lowest. This array (TTXD2) is used in the combus-
Control Command Signal
tion monitor program as well as in the Temperature
these 1/16” diameter (1.6mm) stainless steel Control Program. In the Temperature Control Pro-
sheathed thermocouples at high velocity, minimiz- gram all exhaust thermocouple inputs are monitored
ing the cooling effect of the longer time constant, and if any are reading too low as compared to a
cooler plenum walls. The signals from these individ- constant, they will be rejected. The highest and low-
ual, ungrounded detectors are sent to the SPEED- est values are then rejected and the remaining values
TRONIC Mark VI control panel through shielded are averaged, that average being the TTXM signal.
thermocouple cables and are divided amongst con- If a Controller should fail, this program will ignore
trollers <RST>. the readings from the failed Controller. The TTXM
signal will be based on the remaining Controllers’
Exhaust Temperature Control Software thermocouples and an alarm will be generated.
The TTXM value is used as the feedback for the ex-
The software contains a series of application pro- haust temperature comparator because the value is
grams written to perform the exhaust temperature not affected by extremes that may be the result of
control and monitoring functions such as digital and faulty instrumentation. The temperature–control–
analog input scan. A major function is the exhaust command program in <RST> compares the exhaust
temperature control, which consists of the following temperature control setpoint (calculated in the tem-
programs: perature–control–bias program and stored in the
computer memory) TTRXB to the TTXM value to
1. Temperature control command determine the temperature error. The software pro-
2. Temperature control bias calculations gram converts the temperature error to a fuel stroke
reference signal, FSRT.
3. Temperature reference selection
The temperature control software determines the Temperature Control Bias Program
cold junction compensated thermocouple readings,
selects the temperature control setpoint, calculates Gas turbine firing temperature is determined by the
the control setpoint value, calculates the representa- measured parameters of exhaust temperature and
GE Power Systems
<RST>
.
TO
COMBUSTION
TTXDR TTXD2 MONITOR
TTXDS SORT
HIGHEST
TO
TTXDT LOWEST
REJECT REJECT
HIGH AVERAGE TTXM
LOW
TC’s AND REMAINING
QUANTITY LOW
OF TC’s USED
<RST> <RST>
TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE CONTROL

CORNER CONTROL
REFERENCE
FSRMIN
CPD
FSRMAX
SLOPE
TTRXB
MIN MEDIAN
SELECT SELECT FSRT
SLOPE
TTXM
+
FSR +
GAIN
CORNER
FSR
ISOTHERMAL
id0032V
Figure 9 Temperature Control Schematic
compressor discharge pressure (CPD) or exhaust

temperature and fuel consumption (proportional to DIGITAL
COMPUTER
INPUT
FSR). In the computer, firing temperature is limited DATA MEMORY
by a linearized function of exhaust temperature and

CPD backed up by a linearized function of exhaust
temperature and FSR (See Figure 8). The tempera- SELECTED TEMPERATURE
ture control bias program (Figure 10) calculates the TEMPERATURE CONTROL COMPUTER
REFERENCE BIAS MEMORY
TABLE
exhaust temperature control setpoint TTRXB based PROGRAM
on the CPD data stored in computer memory and

constants from the selected temperature–reference
table. The program calculates another setpoint based CONSTANT
STORAGE
on FSR and constants from another temperature–
id0023
reference table.
Figure 10 Temperature Control Bias
Figure 11 is a graphical illustration of the control set- perature setpoint. The constants TTKn_K (FSR bias
points. The constants TTKn_C (CPD bias corner) corner) and TTKn_M (FSR bias slope) are used with
and TTKn_S (CPD bias slope) are used with the the FSR data to determine the FSR bias exhaust tem-
CPD data to determine the CPD bias exhaust temperature setpoint. The values for these constants are
GE Power Systems
given in the Control Specifications–Control System Temperature Reference Select Program

Settings drawing. The temperature–control–bias
program also selects the isothermal setpoint
TTKn_I. The program selects the minimum of the The exhaust temperature control function selects
three setpoints, CPD bias, FSR bias, or isothermal control setpoints to allow gas turbine operation at
for the final exhaust temperature control reference. various firing temperatures. The temperature–refer-
During normal operation with gas or light distillate ence–select program (Figure 12) determines the op-
fuels, this selection results in a CPD bias control erational level for control setpoints based on digital
with an isothermal limit, as shown by the heavy lines input information representing temperature control
on Figure 11. The CPD bias setpoint is compared requirements. Three digital input signals are de-
with the FSR bias setpoint by the program and an coded to select one set of constants which define the
alarm occurs when the CPD setpoint is higher. For control setpoints necessary to meet those require-
units operating with heavy fuel, FSR bias control ments. A typical digital signal is “BASE SELECT”,
will be selected to minimize the effect of turbine selected by clicking on the appropriate target on the
nozzle plugging on firing temperature. The FSR bias operator interface <HMI>.
setpoint will then be compared with the CPD bias
setpoint and an alarm will occur when the FSR set-
point exceeds the CPD setpoint. A ramp function is FUEL CONTROL SYSTEM
provided in the program to limit the rate at which the
setpoint can change. The maximum and minimum The gas turbine fuel control system will change fuel
change in ramp rates (slope) are programmed in flow to the combustors in response to the fuel stroke
constants TTKRXR1 and TTKRXR2. Consult the reference signal (FSR). FSR actually consists of two
Control Sequence Program (CSP) and the Control separate signals added together, FSR1 being the
Specifications drawing for the block diagram il- called–for liquid fuel flow and FSR2 being the
lustration of this function and the value of the called–for gas fuel flow; normally, FSR1 + FSR2 =
constants. Typical rate change limit is 1.5°F per se- FSR. Standard fuel systems are designed for opera-
cond. The output of the ramp function is the exhaust tion with liquid fuel and/or gas fuel. This chapter
temperature control setpoint which is stored in the will describe a dual fuel system. It starts with the ser-
computer memory. vo drive system, where the setpoint is compared
with the feedback signal and converted to a valve
position. It will describe liquid, gas and dual fuel op-
eration and how the FSR from the control systems
previously described is conditioned and sent as a set
point to the servo system.
EXHAUST TEMPERATURE
TTKn_K
TTKn_I ISOTHERMAL
TTKn_C
TEMPERATURE SELECTED
DIGITAL REFERENCE TEMPERATURE
INPUT DATA SELECT REFERENCE
TABLE
CONSTANT
CPD STORAGE
FSR
id0054
id0106
Figure 11 Exhaust Temperature Control Setpoints
Figure 12 Temperature Reference Select Program

GE Power Systems
Servo Drive System actuator. If the hydraulic actuator has spring return,
hydraulic oil will be ported to one side of the cylin-
The heart of the fuel system is a three coil electro– der and the other to drain. A feedback signal pro-
hydraulic servovalve (servo) as shown in Figure 13. vided by a linear variable differential transformer
The servovalve is the interface between the electri- (LVDT, Figure 13) will tell the control whether or
cal and mechanical systems and controls the direc- not it is in the required position. The LVDT outputs
tion and rate of motion of a hydraulic actuator based an AC voltage which is proportional to the position
on the input current to the servo. of the core of the LVDT. This core in turn is con-
nected to the valve whose position is being con-
3-COIL TORQUE MOTOR
trolled; as the valve moves, the feedback voltage
TORQUE changes. The LVDT requires an exciter voltage
MOTOR TORQUE
ARMATURE MOTOR which is provided by the VSVO card.
N N
Figure 14 shows the major components of the servo

JET TUBE
FORCE
positioning loops. The digital (microprocessor sig-
FEEDBACK
SPRING
S S
nal) to analog conversion is done on the VSVO card;
FAIL
this represents called–for fuel flow. The called–for
SAFE
BIAS fuel flow signal is then compared to a feedback rep-
SPRING
resenting actual fuel flow. The difference is ampli-
fied on the VSVO card and sent through the TSVO
Â
P R P card to the servo. This output to the servos is moni-
1 2 tored and there will be an alarm on loss of any one of
the three signals from <RST>.
SPOOL VALVE FILTER
DRAIN PS
1350 PSI Liquid Fuel Control
HYDRAULIC
The liquid fuel system consists of fuel handling
ACTUATOR
components and electrical control components.
Some of the fuel handling components are: primary
TO <RST> LVDT
fuel oil filter, fuel oil stop valve, three fuel pumps,
ABEX Servovalve id0029 fuel bypass valve, fuel pump pressure relief valve,
Figure 13 Electrohydraulic Servovalve flow divider, combined selector valve/pressure
The servovalve contains three electrically isolated gauge assembly, false start drain valve, fuel lines,
coils on the torque motor. Each coil is connected to and fuel nozzles. The electrical control components
one of the three Controllers <RST>. This provides are: liquid fuel pressure switch (upstream) 63FL–2,
redundancy should one of the Controllers or coils fuel oil stop valve limit switch 33FL, liquid fuel
fail. There is a null–bias spring which positions the pump bypass valve servovalve 65FP, flow divider
servo so that the actuator will go to the fail safe posi- magnetic speed pickups 77FD–1, –2, –3 and
tion should ALL power and/or control signals be SPEEDTRONIC control cards TSVO and VSVO. A
lost. diagram of the system showing major components is
shown in Figure 15.
If the hydraulic actuator is a double–action piston,
the control signal positions the servovalve so that it The fuel bypass valve is a hydraulically actuated
ports high–pressure oil to either side of the hydraulic valve with a linear flow characteristic. Located

FUNDAMENTALS OF SPEEDTRONIC
POSTION FEEDBACK
LVDT
<R>
TSVO VSVO TSVO

3.2KHZ
EXCITATION
REF
D/A
Figure 14 Servo Positioning Loops
FUEL
<S>
SERVO
VSVO 3.2KHZ VALVE
REF
D/A TORQUE
MOTOR
14
HYDRAULIC
ACTUATOR
HIGH
<T> PRESSURE
OIL
VSVO 3.2KHZ
EXCITATION
REF
D/A
GE Power Systems
POSTION FEEDBACK
LVDT
Fund_Mk_VI
id0026
GE Power Systems
between the inlet (low pressure) and discharge (high fuel necessary to meet the control system fuel de-
pressure) sides of the fuel pump, this valve bypasses mand. It is positioned by servo valve 65FP, which
excess fuel delivered by the fuel pump back to the receives its signal from the controllers.
fuel pump inlet, delivering to the flow divider the
<RST>
FSR1 FQ1 <RST>
FQROUT <RST>
TSVO
TNH
L4 VSVO
L20FLX PR/A
BY-PASS VALVE ASM.
P R 65FP TYPICAL
40µ DIFFERENTIAL FLOW FUEL NOZZLES
PRESSURE GUAGE DIVIDER
77FD-1
63FL-2 OH
HYDRAULIC COMBUSTION
SUPPLY CHAMBER
OFV
FUEL
STOP
VALVE VR4
OF AD
FUEL PUMP
(QTY 3)
33FL
M FALSE START
OLT- DRAIN VALVE
CONTROL CHAMBER OFD
OIL 77FD-2
TO DRAIN
77FD-3
id0031V
Figure 15 Liquid Fuel Control Schematic
The flow divider divides the single stream of fuel VSVO card modulates servovalve 65FP based on
from the pump into several streams, one for each inputs of turbine speed, FSR1 (called–for liquid fuel
combustor. It consists of a number of matched high flow), and flow divider speed (FQ1).
volumetric efficiency positive displacement gear
pumps, again one per combustor. The flow divider is Fuel Oil Control – Software
driven by the small pressure differential between the
When the turbine is run on liquid fuel oil, the control
inlet and outlet. The gear pumps are mechanically
system checks the permissives L4 and L20FLX and
connected so that they all run at the same speed,
does not allow FSR1 to close the bypass valve unless
making the discharge flow from each pump equal.
they are ‘true’ (closing the bypass valve sends fuel to
Fuel flow is represented by the output from the flow
the combustors). The L4 permissive comes from the
divider magnetic pickups (77FD–1, –2 & –3). These
Master Protective System (to be discussed later) and
are non–contacting magnetic pickups, giving a
L20FLX becomes ‘true’ after the turbine vent timer
pulse signal frequency proportional to flow divider
times out. These signals control the opening and
speed, which is proportional to the fuel flow deliv-
closing of the fuel oil stop valve.
ered to the combustion chambers.
The FSR signal from the controlling system goes
The TSVO card receives the pulse rate signals from through the fuel splitter where the liquid fuel re-
77FD–1, –2, and –3 and outputs an analog signal quirement becomes FSR1. The FSR1 signal is mul-
which is proportional to the pulse rate input. The tiplied by TNH, so fuel flow becomes a function of
GE Power Systems
speed – an important feature, particularly while the Gas Fuel Control

unit is starting. This enables the system to have bet-
ter resolution at the lower, more critical speeds The dry low NOx II (DLN–2) control system regu-
where air flow is very low. This produces the lates the distribution of gas fuel to a multi–nozzle
FQROUT signal, which is the digital liquid fuel combustor arrangement. The fuel flow distribution
flow command. At full speed TNH does not change, to each fuel nozzle assembly is a function of com-
therefore FQROUT is directly proportional to FSR. bustion reference temperature (TTRF1) and IGV
temperature control mode. By a combination of fuel
FQROUT then goes to the VSVO card where it is staging and shifting of combustion modes from dif-
changed to an analog signal to be compared to the fusion at ignition through premix at higher loads,
feedback signal from the flow divider. As the fuel low nitrous oxide (NOx) emissions are achieved.
flows into the turbine, speed sensors 77FD–1, –2, Fuel gas is controlled by the gas stop/speed ratio
and –3 send a signal to the TSVO card, which in turn valve (SRV), the primary, secondary and quaternary
outputs the fuel flow rate signal (FQ1) to the VSVO gas control valves (GCV) , and the premix splitter
card. When the fuel flow rate is equal to the called– valve (PMSV). The premix splitter valve controls
for rate (FQ1 = FSR1), the servovalve 65FP is the split between secondary and tertiary gas flow.
moved to the null position and the bypass valve re- All valves are servo controlled by signals from the
mains “stationary” until some input to the system SPEEDTRONIC control panel (Figure 16).
changes. If the feedback is in error with FQROUT,
the operational amplifier on the VSVO card will It is the gas control valve which controls the desired
change the signal to servovalve 65FP to drive the by- gas fuel flow in response to the command signal
pass valve in a direction to decrease the error. FSR. To enable it to do this in a predictable manner,
the speed ratio valve is designed to maintain a prede-
The flow divider feedback signal is also used for termined pressure (P2) at the inlet of the gas control
valve as a function of gas turbine speed.
system checks. This analog signal is converted to
digital counts and is used in the controller’s software There are three main DLN–2 combustion modes:
to compare to certain limits as well as to display fuel Primary, Lean–Lean, and Premix.
flow on the <HMI>. The checks made are as fol-
Primary mode exists from light off to 81% corrected
lows:
speed, fuel flow to primary nozzles only. Lean–
Lean is from 81% corrected speed to a preselected
L60FFLH:Excessive fuel flow on start–up combustion reference temperature, with fuel to the
primary and tertiary nozzles. In Premix operation
L3LFLT1:Loss of LVDT position feedback
fuel is directed to secondary, tertiary and quaternary
nozzles. Minimum load for this operation is set by
L3LFBSQ:Bypass valve is not fully open when
combustion reference temperature and IGV posi-
the stop valve is closed.
tion.
L3LFBSC:Servo current is detected when the The fuel gas control system consists primarily of the
stop valve is closed. following components: gas strainer, gas supply
pressure switch 63FG, stop/speed ratio valve assem-
L3LFT:Loss of flow divider feedback bly, fuel gas pressure transducer(s) 96FG, gas fuel
vent solenoid valve 20VG, control valve assembly,
If L60FFLH is true for a specified time period (nom- LVDT’s 96GC–1, –2, –3, –4, –5, –6, 96SR–1, –2, 96
inally 2 seconds), the unit will trip; if L3LFLT1 PS–1, –2, electro–hydraulic servovalves 90SR,
through L3LFT are true, these faults will trip the unit 65GC and 65PS, dump valve(s) VH–5, three pres-
during start–up and require manual reset. sure gauges, gas manifold with ‘pigtails’ to respec-
GE Power Systems
tive fuel nozzles, and SPEEDTRONIC control cards tion is contained in subsequent para-
TBQB and TCQC. The components are shown graphs.
schematically in Figure 17. A functional explana-
DLN–2 GAS FUEL SYSTEM
SGCV T
SRV PMSV S SINGLE

PGCV
BURNING
ZONE
P 5 BURNERS
QGCV
*
Q
GAS SKID TURBINE COMPARTMENT
SRV SPEED/RATIO VALVE T TERTIARY MANIFOLD, 1 NOZ. PREMIX ONLY

PGCV GAS CONTROL, PRIMARY S SECONDARY MANIFOLD, 4 NOZ. PREMIX INJ.
SGCV GAS CONTROL, SECONDARY P PRIMARY MANIFOLD, 4 NOZ. DIFFUSION INJ.
QGCV GAS CONTROL, QUATERNARY Q QUAT MANIFOLD, CASING. PREMIX ONLY
PMSV PREMIX SPLITTER VALVE
* PURGE AIR (PCD AIR SUPPLY)
Figure 16 DLN–2 Gas Fuel System

GE Power Systems
VSVO
FPRG TSVO POS1 VSVO TSVO
POS2 GAS CONTROL GAS CONTROL

SPEED RATIO FSR2 VALVE SERVO VALVE POSITION
VALVE CONTROL FEEDBACK
FPG
TBAI 96FG-2A TSVO

VAIC
96FG-2B
96FG-2C 20VG
TRANSDUCERS
VENT
COMBUSTION
CHAMBER
63FG-3
STOP/ GAS
RATIO CONTROL
VALVE VALVE
GAS
P2
Electrical
Connection GAS
MANIFOLD
Hydraulic LVDT’S LVDT’S
Piping 96SR-1,2 96GC-1,2
Gas Piping
VH5-1 DUMP
RELAY
TRIP
90SR SERVO
65GC SERVO
HYDRAULIC
SUPPLY id0059V
Figure 17 Gas Fuel Control System

GE Power Systems
Gas Control Valves then output to the servo valve through the TSVO
The position of the gas control valve plug is intended card. The gas control valve stem position is sensed
to be proportional to FSR2 which represents called– by the output of a linear variable differential trans-
for gas fuel flow. Actuation of the spring–loaded gas former (LVDT) and fed back through the TSVO card
control valve is by a hydraulic cylinder controlled by to an operational amplifier on the VSVO card where
an electro–hydraulic servovalve. it is compared to the FSROUT input signal at a sum-
ming junction. There are two LVDTs providing
When the turbine is to run on gas fuel the permis- feedback ; two of the three controllers are dedicated
sives L4, L20FGX and L2TVX (turbine purge com- to one LVDT each, while the third selects the highest
plete) must be ‘true’, similar to the liquid system. feedback through a high–select diode gate. If the
This allows the Gas Control Valve to open. The feedback is in error with FSROUT, the operational
stroke of the valve will be proportional to FSR. amplifier on the VSVO card will change the signal
FSR goes through the fuel splitter (to be discussed in to the hydraulic servovalve to drive the gas control
the dual fuel section) where the gas fuel requirement valve in a direction to decrease the error. In this way
becomes FSR2, which is then conditioned for offset the desired relationship between position and FSR2
and gain. This signal, FSROUT, goes to the VSVO is maintained and the control valve correctly meters
card where it is converted to an analog signal and the gas fuel. See Figure 18.
<RST>
OFFSET
GAIN
<RST>
FSR2 +
TBQC
+
HIGH
SELECT
L4
L3GCV
FSROUT
ANALOG
I/O
GAS CONTROL VALVE
GAS
P2
ÎÎ
GAS CONTROL VALVE
POSITION LOOP
ÎÎ
CALIBRATION
ÎÎ
POSITION
LVDT
LVDT’S
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION 96GC-1, -2
GAS PIPING
SERVO
HYDRAULIC PIPING VALVE FSR
id0027V
Figure 18 Gas Control Valve Control Schematic

GE Power Systems
<RST>
TNH
<RST>
GAIN
VSVO
+ FPRG
OFFSET + D
A
L4
FPG
L3GRV
HIGH POS2
SELECT
96FG-2A
96FG-2B
96FG-2C
SPEED RATIO VALVE
GAS
VAIC
ÎÎÎ
96SR-1,2
LVDT’S
OPERATING
CYLINDER
PISTON
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ TBAI
TRIP OIL DUMP

RELAY
TSVO
SERVO
VALVE
LEGEND
HYDRAULIC
ELECTRICAL OIL
CONNECTION
GAS PIPING
HYDRAULIC
PIPING P2
DIGITAL or PRESSURE
CONTROL VOLTAGE
TNH
Speed Ratio Valve Pressure Calibration
id0058V
Figure 19 Stop/Speed Ratio Valve Control Schematic

GE Power Systems
The plug in the gas control valve is contoured to pro- The stop/speed ratio valve provides a positive stop
vide the proper flow area in relation to valve stroke. to fuel gas flow when required by a normal shut–
The gas control valve uses a skirted valve disc and down, emergency trip, or a no–run condition. Hy-
venturi seat to obtain adequate pressure recovery. draulic trip dump valve VH–5 is located between the
High pressure recovery occurs at overall valve pres- electro–hydraulic servovalve 90SR and the hydrau-
sure ratios substantially less than the critical pres- lic actuating cylinder. This dump valve is operated
sure ratio. The net result is that flow through the by the low pressure control oil trip system. If permis-
control valve is independent of valve pressure drop. sives L4 and L3GRV are ‘true’ the trip oil (OLT) is at
Gas flow then is a function of valve inlet pressure P2 normal pressure and the dump valve is maintained in
and valve area only. a position that allows servovalve 90SR to control the
cylinder position. When the trip oil pressure is low
As before, an open or a short circuit in one of the ser- (as in the case of normal or emergency shutdown),
vo coils or in the signal to one coil does not cause a the dump valve spring shifts a spool valve to a posi-
trip. Each GCV has two LVDTs and can run correct- tion which dumps the high pressure hydraulic oil
ly on one. (OH) in the speed ratio/stop valve actuating cylinder
to the lube oil reservoir. The closing spring atop the
valve plug instantly shuts the valve, thereby shutting
Stop/Speed Ratio Valve off fuel flow to the combustors.
In addition to being displayed, the feedback signals
The speed ratio/stop valve is a dual function valve. It and the control signals of both valves are compared
serves as a pressure regulating valve to hold a de- to normal operating limits, and if they go outside of
sired fuel gas pressure ahead of the gas control valve these limits there will be an alarm. The following are
and it also serves as a stop valve. As a stop valve it is typical alarms:
an integral part of the protection system. Any emer-
gency trip or normal shutdown will move the valve L60FSGH: Excessive fuel flow on start–up
to its closed position shutting off gas fuel flow to the L3GRVFB: Loss of LVDT feedback on the SRV
turbine. This is done either by dumping hydraulic oil
L3GRVO: SRV open prior to permissive to open
from the Stop/Speed Ratio Valve VH–5 hydraulic
trip relay or driving the position control closed elec- L3GRVSC: Servo current to SRV detected prior
trically. to permissive to open
L3GCVFB: Loss of LVDT feedback on the
The stop/speed ratio valve has two control loops. GCV
There is a position loop similar to that for the gas
control valve and there is a pressure control loop. L3GCVO: GCV open prior to permissive to
See Figure 19. Fuel gas pressure P2 at the inlet to the open
gas control valve is controlled by the pressure loop L3GCVSC: Servo current to GCV detected
as a function of turbine speed. This is done by pro- prior to permissive to open
portioning it to turbine speed signal TNH, with an
L3GFIVP: Intervalve (P2) pressure low
offset and gain, which then becomes Gas Fuel Pres-
sure Reference FPRG. FPRG then goes to the The servovalves are furnished with a mechanical
VSVO card to be converted to an analog signal. P2 null offset bias to cause the gas control valve or
pressure is measured by 96FG which outputs a volt- speed ratio valve to go to the zero stroke position
age proportional to P2 pressure. This P2 signal (fail safe condition) should the servovalve signals or
(FPG) is compared to the FPRG and the error signal power be lost. During a trip or no–run condition, a
(if any) is in turn compared with the 96SR LVDT positive voltage bias is placed on the servo coils
feedback to reposition the valve as in the GCV loop. holding them in the ‘valve closed’ position.
GE Power Systems
Premix Splitter Valve <RST>

FUEL SPLITTER
L84TG
A=B
TOTAL GAS
The Premix splitter valve (PMSV) regulates the split A=B
L84TL
TOTAL LIQUID
MAX. LIMIT
of secondary/tertiary gas fuel flow between the sec-
MIN. LIMIT
ondary and tertiary gas fuel manifolds. The valve is MEDIAN
L83FZ SELECT
referenced to the secondary fuel passages, i.e. 0% PERMISSIVES
valve stroke corresponds to 0% secondary fuel flow. RAMP
Unlike the SRV and GCV’s the flow through the RATE
L83FG
splitter valve is not linear with valve position.The GAS SELECT
L83FL
control system linearizes the fuel split setpoint and LIQUID SELECT
the resulting valve position command FSRXPOUT FSR FSR1
LIQUID REF.
is used as the position reference.
FSR2
GAS REF.
id0034
Dual Fuel Control Figure 20 Fuel Splitter Schematic
Turbines that are designed to operate on both liquid Fuel Transfer – Liquid to Gas
and gaseous fuel are equipped with controls to pro-
vide the following features:
If the unit is running on liquid fuel (FSR1) and the
1.Transfer from one fuel to the other on com- “GAS” target on the <HMI> screen is selected the
mand. following sequence of events will take place, pro-
viding the transfer and fuel gas permissives are true
2. Allow time for filling the lines with the type of (refer to Figure 21):
fuel to which turbine operation is being trans-
ferred. FSR1 will remain at its initial value, but FSR2 will
step to a value slightly greater than zero, usually
3. Operation of liquid fuel nozzle purge when 0.5%. This will open the gas control valve slightly to
operating totally on gas fuel. bleed down the intervalve volume. This is done in
case a high pressure has been entrained. The pres-
4. Operation of gas fuel nozzle purge when oper-
ence of a higher pressure than that required by the
ating totally on liquid fuel.
speed/ratio controller would cause slow response in
The software diagram for the fuel splitter is shown in initiating gas flow.
Figure 20.
After a typical time delay of thirty seconds to bleed
down the P2 pressure and fill the gas supply line, the
Fuel Splitter software program ramps the fuel commands, FSR2
to increase and FSR1 to decrease, at a programmed
As stated before FSR is divided into two signals, rate through the median select gate. This is complete
FSR1 and FSR2, to provide dual fuel operation. See in thirty seconds.
Figure 20.
When the transfer is complete logic signal L84TG
FSR is multiplied by the liquid fuel fraction FX1 to (Total Gas) will de–energize the liquid fuel forward-
produce the FSR1 signal. FSR1 is then subtracted ing pump, close the fuel oil stop valve by de–ener-
from the FSR signal resulting in FSR2, the control gizing the liquid fuel dump valve 20FL, and initiate
signal for the secondary fuel. the purge sequence.
GE Power Systems
Fuel Transfer – Gas to Liquid

Transfer from Full Gas to Full Distillate
FSR2 Transfer from gas to liquid is essentially the same se-
quence as previously described, except that gas and
UNITS
liquid fuel command signals are interchanged. For

FSR1
PURGE
instance, at the beginning of a transfer, FSR2 re-
SELECT DISTILLATE
TIME
mains at its initial value, but FSR1 steps to a value
slightly greater than zero. This will command a
Transfer from Full Distillate to Full Gas
small liquid fuel flow. If there has been any fuel leak-
FSR1
age out past the check valves, this will fill the liquid
fuel piping and avoid any delay in delivery at the be-
UNITS
ginning of the FSR1 increase.

FSR2
The rest of the sequence is the same as liquid–to–
PURGE
TIME
SELECT GAS gas, except that there is usually no purging se-
quence.
Transfer from Full Distillate to Mixture
Gas Fuel Purge
FSR1
UNITS
Primary gas fuel purge is required during premix

steady state and liquid fuel operation. This system
FSR2
PURGE
involves a double block and bleed arrangement,
TIME
SELECT GAS SELECT MIX wherby two purge valves (VA13–1, –2) are shut
id0033
when primary gas is flowing and intervalve vent so-
Figure 21 Fuel Transfer lenoid (20VG–2) is open to bleed any leakage across
the valves. The purge valves are air operated through
solenoid valves 20PG–1, –2. When there is no pri-
Liquid Fuel Purge mary gas flow, the purge valves open and allow com-
pressor discharge air to flow through the primary
fuel nozzle passages. Secondary purge is required
To prevent coking of the liquid fuel nozzles while for the secondary and tertiary nozzles when second-
operating on gas fuel, some atomizing air is diverted ary and tertiary fuel flow is reduced to zero and when
through the liquid fuel nozzles. The following se- operating on liquid fuel. This is a block and bleed ar-
quence of events occurs when transfer from liquid to rangement similar to the primary purge with two
gas is complete. purge valves (VA13–3, –4), intervalve vent solenoid
(20VG–3), and solenoid valves 20PG–3, –4.
Air from the atomizing air system flows through a
cooler (HX4–1), through the fuel oil purge valve
(VA19–3) and through check valve VCK2 to each
fuel nozzle.
MODULATED INLET GUIDE VANE
The fuel oil purge valve is controlled by the position SYSTEM
of a solenoid valve 20PL–2 . When this valve is en-
ergized , actuating air pressure opens the purge oil The Inlet Guide Vanes (IGVs) modulate during the
check valve, allowing air flow to the fuel oil nozzle acceleration of the gas turbine to rated speed, load-
purge check valves. ing and unloading of the generator, and deceleration
of the gas turbine. This IGV modulation maintains
proper flows and pressures, and thus stresses, in the
GE Power Systems
compressor, maintains a minimum pressure drop bined cycle application, maintains high exhaust
across the fuel nozzles, and, when used in a com- temperatures at low loads.
<RST>
<RST>
CSRGV
VSVO
CSRGV IGV REF CSRGVOUT
D/A
HIGH
SELECT
TSVO
CLOSE
HM3-1
HYD.
SUPPLY R P OPEN
IN FH6 OUT
–1
90TV-1
2 1
A
96TV-1,2
OLT-1
TRIP OIL
C1
VH3-1
D C2
ORIFICES (2)
OD
id0030
Figure 23 Modulating Inlet Guide Vane Control Schematic
Guide Vane Actuation Operation
During start–up, the inlet guide vanes are held fully

The modulated inlet guide vane actuating system is closed, a nominal 27 degree angle, from zero to
comprised of the following components: servovalve 83.5% corrected speed. Turbine speed is corrected
90TV, LVDT position sensors 96TV–1 and to reflect air conditions at 27° C (80° F); this com-
96TV–2, and, in some instances, solenoid valve pensates for changes in air density as ambient condi-
20TV and hydraulic dump valve VH3. Control of tions change. At ambient temperatures greater than
90TV will port hydraulic pressure to operate the 80° F, corrected speed TNHCOR is less than actual
variable inlet guide vane actuator. If used, 20TV and speed TNH; at ambients less than 27° C (80° F),
VH3 can prevent hydraulic oil pressure from flow- TNHCOR is greater than TNH. After attaining a
ing to 90TV. See Figure 23. speed of approximately 83.5%, the guide vanes will
GE Power Systems
modulate open at about 6.7 degrees per percent in-

crease in corrected speed. When the guide vanes FULL OPEN (MAX ANGLE)
reach the minimum full speed angle, nominally 54°,
IGV ANGLE – DEGREES (CSRGV)

they stop opening; this is usually at approximately
91% TNH. By not allowing the guide vanes to close SIMPLE CYCLE
COMBINED
CYCLE
(CSKGVSSR) (TTRX)
to an angle less than the minimum full speed angle at
100% TNH, a minimum pressure drop is maintained MINIMUM FULL SPEED ANGLE
across the fuel nozzles, thereby lessening combus- ROTATING
STALL STARTUP
tion system resonance. Solenoid valve 20CB is usu- REGION PROGRAM
ally opened when the generator breaker is closed; REGION OF NEGATIVE

5TH STAGE EXTRACTION
this in turn closes the compressor bleed valves. FULL CLOSED
(MIN ANGLE)
PRESSURE
0 100
As the unit is loaded and exhaust temperature in- CORRECTED SPEED–%
(TNHCOR) 0 100
LOAD–%
creases, the inlet guide vanes will go to the full open FSNL BASE LOAD
EXHAUST TEMPERATURE
position when the exhaust temperature reaches one id0037
of two points, depending on the operation mode se- Figure 24 Variable Inlet Guide Vane Schedule
lected. For simple cycle operation, the IGVs move to
the full open position at a pre–selected exhaust tem-
perature, usually 371° C (700° F). For combined PROTECTION SYSTEMS
cycle operation, the IGVs begin to move to the full
open position as exhaust temperature approaches The gas turbine protection system is comprised of a
the temperature control reference temperature; nor- number of sub–systems, several of which operate
mally, the IGVs begin to open when exhaust temper- during each normal start–up and shutdown. The oth-
ature is within 17° C (30° F) of the temperature er systems and components function strictly during
control reference. emergency and abnormal operating conditions. The
most common kind of failure on a gas turbine is the
During a normal shutdown, as the exhaust tempera- failure of a sensor or sensor wiring; the protection
ture decreases the IGVs move to the minimum full systems are set up to detect and alarm such a failure.
speed angle; as the turbine decelerates from 100% If the condition is serious enough to disable the
TNH, the inlet guide vanes are modulated to the ful- protection completely, the turbine will be tripped.
ly closed position. When the generator breaker Protective systems respond to the simple trip signals
opens, the compressor bleed valves will be opened. such as pressure switches used for low lube oil pres-
sure, high gas compressor discharge pressure, or
In the event of a turbine trip, the compressor bleed similar indications. They also respond to more com-
valves are opened and the inlet guide vanes go to the plex parameters such as overspeed, overtempera-
fully closed position. The inlet guide vanes remain ture, high vibration, combustion monitor, and loss of
fully closed as the turbine continues to coast down. flame. To do this, some of these protection systems
and their components operate through the master
For underspeed operation, if TNHCOR decreases control and protection circuit in the SPEEDTRON-
below approximately 91%, the inlet guide vanes IC control system, while other totally mechanical
modulate closed at 6.7 degrees per percent decrease systems operate directly on the components of the
in corrected speed. In most cases, if the actual speed turbine. In each case there are two essentially inde-
decreases below 95% TNH, the generator breaker pendent paths for stopping fuel flow, making use of
will open and the turbine speed setpoint will be reset both the fuel control valve (FCV) and the fuel stop
to 100.3%. The IGVs will then go to the minimum valve (FSV). Each protective system is designed in-
full speed angle. See Figure 24. dependent of the control system to avoid the possi-
GE Power Systems
bility of a control system failure disabling the

protective devices. See Figure 25.
MASTER
PRIMARY PROTECTION GCV GAS FUEL
OVERSPEED CIRCUIT SERVOVALVE CONTROL VALVE
<RST>
OVERTEMP
SRV GAS FUEL

VIBRATION SERVOVALVE SPEED RATIO/
STOP VALVE
COMBUSTION
MONITOR
RELAY
VOTING 20FG
MODULE
LOSS
of
FLAME
MASTER
PROTECTION
SECONDARY CIRCUIT BYPASS
<XYZ> VALVE
OVERSPEED FUEL
SERVOVALVE PUMP
RELAY LIQUID
VOTING 20FL FUEL STOP
MODULE VALVE
id0036V
Figure 25 Protective Systems Schematic
Trip Oil Inlet Orifice
An orifice is located in the line running from the

A hydraulic trip system called Trip Oil is the primary bearing header supply to the trip oil system. This ori-
protection interface between the turbine control and fice is sized to limit the flow of oil from the lube oil
protection system and the components on the tur- system into the trip oil system. It must ensure ade-
bine which admit, or shut–off, fuel. The system con- quate capacity for all tripping devices, yet prevent
tains devices which are electrically operated by reduction of lube oil flow to the gas turbine and other
SPEEDTRONIC control signals as well as some to- equipment when the trip system is in the tripped
tally mechanical devices. state.
Besides the tripping functions, trip oil also provides Dump Valve
a hydraulic signal to the fuel stop valves for normal
start–up and shutdown sequences. On gas turbines Each individual fuel branch in the trip oil system has
equipped for dual fuel (gas and oil) operation the a solenoid dump valve (20FL for liquid, 20FG for
system is used to selectively isolate the fuel system gas). This device is a solenoid–operated spring–re-
not required. turn spool valve which will relieve trip oil pressure
only in the branch that it controls. These valves are
Significant components of the Hydraulic Trip Cir- normally energized–to–run, deenergized–to–trip.
cuit are described below. This philosophy protects the turbine during all nor-
GE Power Systems
mal situations as well as that time when loss of dc

power occurs.
PROTECTIVE MASTER
SIGNALS PROTECTION
L4
CIRCUITS
LIQUID
FUEL
LIQUID FUEL
STOP VALVE
20FG 20FL
ORIFICE AND
CHECK VALVE
NETWORK
63HL
INLET ORIFICE
GAS FUEL
GAS SPEED RATIO/
FUEL STOP VALVE
WIRING 63HG
PIPING
GAS FUEL
DUMP RELAY
VALVE
OH
id0056
Figure 26 Trip Oil Schematic – Dual Fuel
Check Valve & Orifice Network dividual fuel stop valve may be selectively closed by
dumping the flow of trip oil going to it. Solenoid
At the inlet of each individual fuel branch is a check valve 20FL can cause the trip valve on the liquid fuel
valve and orifice network which limits flow out of stop valve to go to the trip state, which permits clo-
that branch. This network limits flow into each sure of the liquid fuel stop valve by its spring return
branch, thus allowing individual fuel control with- mechanism. Solenoid valve 20FG can cause the trip
out total system pressure decay. However, when one valve on the gas fuel speed ratio/stop valve to go to
of the trip devices located in the main artery of the the trip state, permitting its spring–returned closure.
system, e.g., the overspeed trip, is actuated, the The orifice in the check valve and orifice network
check valve will open and result in decay of all trip permits independent dumping of each fuel branch of
pressures. the trip oil system without affecting the other
branch. Tripping all devices other than the individu-
Pressure Switches al dump valves will result in dumping the total trip
oil system, which will shut the unit down.
Each individual fuel branch contains pressure
switches (63HL–1,–2,–3 for liquid, 63HG–1,–2,–3 During start–up or fuel transfer, the SPEEDTRON-
for gas) which will ensure tripping of the turbine if IC control system will close the appropriate dump
the trip oil pressure becomes too low for reliable op- valve to activate the desired fuel system(s). Both
eration while operating on that fuel. dump valves will be closed only during fuel transfer
or mixed fuel operation.
Operation
The dump valves are de–energized on a “2–out–
The tripping devices which cause unit shutdown or of–3 voted” trip signal from the relay module. This
selective fuel system shutdown do so by dumping helps prevent trips caused by faulty sensors or the
the low pressure trip oil (OLT). See Figure 26. An in- failure of one controller.
GE Power Systems
The signal to the fuel system servovalves will also <RST> <XYZ>
HIGH PRESSURE OVERSPEED TRIP
be a “close” command should a trip occur. This is
TNH HP SPEED
done by clamping FSR to zero. Should one control- A
A>B
L12H TO MASTER
PROTECTION
TRIP SETPOINT SET
ler fail, the FSR from that controller will be zero. TNKHOS B AND
AND ALARM
MESSAGE
LATCH
The output of the other two controllers is sufficient TNKHOST
TEST
to continue to control the servovalve. TEST

RESET
LH3HOST PERMISSIVE
By pushing the Emergency Trip Button, 5E P/B, the L86MR1 MASTER RESET
P28 vdc power supply is cut off to the relays control- SAMPLING RATE = 0.25 SEC
ling solenoid valves 20FL and 20FG, thus de–ener- id0060
gizing the dump valves. Figure 27 Electronic Overspeed Trip
Overtemperature Protection
Overspeed Protection
The overtemperature system protects the gas turbine
The SPEEDTRONIC Mark VI overspeed system is against possible damage caused by overfiring. It is a
designed to protect the gas turbine against possible backup system, operating only after the failure of the
damage caused by overspeeding the turbine rotor. temperature control system.
Under normal operation, the speed of the rotor is
controlled by speed control. The overspeed system TTKOT1 TRIP
would not be called on except after the failure of oth-
er systems.
The overspeed protection system consists of a pri-

EXH TEMP
mary and secondary electronic overspeed system.

The primary electronic overspeed protection system
resides in the <RST> controllers. The secondary TTRX
electronic overspeed protection system resides in TRIP MARGIN

TTKOT2
the <XYZ> controllers (in <VPRO>). Both systems ALARM MARGIN
TTKOT3
consist of magnetic pickups to sense turbine speed,
speed detection software, and associated logic cir- CPD/FSR
id0053
cuits and are set to trip the unit at 110% rated speed.
Figure 29 Overtemperature Protection
Electronic Overspeed Protection System Under normal operating conditions, the exhaust
temperature control system acts to control fuel flow
The electronic overspeed protection function is per- when the firing temperature limit is reached. In cer-
formed in both <RST> and <XYZ> as shown in Fig- tain failure modes however, exhaust temperature
ure 27. The turbine speed signal (TNH) derived from and fuel flow can exceed control limits. Under such
the magnetic pickup sensors (77NH–1,–2, and –3) is circumstances the overtemperature protection sys-
compared to an overspeed setpoint (TNKHOS). tem provides an overtemperature alarm about 14° C
When TNH exceeds the setpoint, the overspeed trip (25° F) above the temperature control reference. To
signal (L12H) is transmitted to the master protective avoid further temperature increase, it starts unload-
circuit to trip the turbine and the “OVERSPEED ing the gas turbine. If the temperature should in-
TRIP” message will be displayed on the <HMI>. crease further to a point about 22° C (40° F) above
This trip will latch and must be reset by the master the temperature control reference, the gas turbine is
reset signal L86MR. tripped. For the actual alarm and trip overtempera-
GE Power Systems
ture setpoints refer to the Control Specifications. will be tripped through the master protection circuit.
See Figure 29. The trip function will be latched in and the master re-
set signal L86MR1 must be true to reset and unlatch
Overtemperature trip and alarm setpoints are deter-
the trip.
mined from the temperature control setpoints
derived by the Exhaust Temperature Control soft-
ware. See Figure 30. Flame Detection and Protection System
<RST> The SPEEDTRONIC Mark VI flame detectors per-

OVERTEMPERATURE
TTXM
TRIP AND ALARM form two functions, one in the sequencing system
A
ALARM
A>B
L30TXA
ALARM
TO ALARM and the other in the protective system. During a nor-
TTKOT3 B MESSAGE
AND SPEED
SETPOINT mal start–up the flame detectors indicate when a
LOWER
flame has been established in the combustion cham-
TTRXB
bers and allow the start–up sequence to continue.
A
A>B Most units have four flame detectors, some have
TTKOT2 B
OR
two, and a very few have eight. Generally speaking,
A if half of the flame detectors indicate flame and half
A>B
TTKOT1
TRIP ISOTHERMAL
B
SET
AND
L86TXT
TRIP
TO MASTER
PROTECTION
(or less) indicate no–flame, there will be an alarm
LATCH
L86MR1
AND ALARM
MESSAGE but the unit will continue to run. If more than half in-
RESET
SAMPLING RATE: 0.25 SEC. dicate loss–of–flame, the unit will trip on “LOSS OF
id0055
FLAME.” This avoids possible accumulation of an
Figure 30 Overtemperature Trip and Alarm explosive mixture in the turbine and any exhaust
heat recovery equipment which may be installed.
Overtemperature Protection Software The flame detector system used with the SPEED-
TRONIC Mark VI system detects flame by sensing
ultraviolet (UV) radiation. Such radiation results
Overtemperature Alarm (L30TXA)
from the combustion of hydrocarbon fuels and is
The representative value of the exhaust temperature more reliably detected than visible light, which va-
thermocouples (TTXM) is compared with alarm and ries in color and intensity.
trip temperature setpoints. The “EXHAUST TEM- The flame sensor is a copper cathode detector de-
PERATURE HIGH” alarm message will be dis- signed to detect the presence of ultraviolet radiation.
played when the exhaust temperature (TTXM) The SPEEDTRONIC control will furnish +24Vdc
exceeds the temperature control reference (TTRXB) to drive the ultraviolet detector tube. In the presence
plus the alarm margin (TTKOT3) programmed as a of ultraviolet radiation, the gas in the detector tube
Control Constant in the software. The alarm will au- ionizes and conducts current. The strength of the
tomatically reset if the temperature decreases below current feedback (4 – 20 mA) to the panel is a pro-
the setpoint. portional indication of the strength of the ultraviolet
radiation present. If the feedback current exceeds a
Overtemperature Trip (L86TXT) threshold value the SPEEDTRONIC generates a
logic signal to indicate ”FLAME DETECTED” by
An overtemperature trip will occur if the exhaust
the sensor.
temperature (TTXM) exceeds the temperature con-
trol reference (TTRXB) plus the trip margin The flame detector system is similar to other protec-
(TTKOT2), or if it exceeds the isothermal trip set- tive systems, in that it is self–monitoring. For exam-
point (TTKOT1). The overtemperature trip will ple, when the gas turbine is below L14HM all
latch, the “EXHAUST OVERTEMPERATURE channels must indicate “NO FLAME.” If this condi-
TRIP” message will be displayed, and the turbine tion is not met, the condition is annunciated as a
GE Power Systems
“FLAME DETECTOR TROUBLE” alarm and the and the turbine will continue to run. More than half
turbine cannot be started. After firing speed has been the flame detectors must indicate “NO FLAME” in
reached and fuel introduced to the machine, if at order to trip the turbine.
least half the flame detectors see flame the starting
Note that a short–circuited or open–circuited detec-
sequence is allowed to proceed. A failure of one de-
tor tube will result in a “NO FLAME” signal.
tector will be annunciated as “FLAME DETECTOR
TROUBLE” when complete sequence is reached
SPEEDTRONIC Mk VI Flame Detection
Turbine
Protection
Logic
28FD
UV Scanner
28FD
UV Scanner Analog Flame <HMI>
I/O Detection Display
28FD Logic
UV Scanner TBAI
VAIC
28FD
UV Scanner
Turbine
Control
Logic
NOTE: Excitation for the sensors and signal processing is

performed by SPEEDTRONIC Mk VI circuits
Figure 31 SPEEDTRONIC Mk VI Flame Detection ido115
Vibration Protection ceeded, the vibration protection system trips the tur-
bine and annunciates to indicate the cause of the trip.
The vibration protection system of a gas turbine unit Each channel includes one vibration pickup (veloc-
is composed of several independent vibration chan- ity type) and a SPEEDTRONIC Mark VI amplifier
nels. Each channel detects excessive vibration by circuit. The vibration detectors generate a relatively
means of a seismic pickup mounted on a bearing low voltage by the relative motion of a permanent
housing or similar location of the gas turbine and the magnet suspended in a coil and therefore no excita-
driven load. If a predetermined vibration level is ex- tion is necessary. A twisted–pair shielded cable is
GE Power Systems
used to connect the detector to the analog input/out- Combustion Monitoring

put module.
The pickup signal from the analog I/O module is in- The primary function of the combustion monitor is
putted to the computer software where it is to reduce the likelihood of extensive damage to the
compared with the alarm and trip levels pro- gas turbine if the combustion system deteriorates.
grammed as Control Constants. See Figure 32. The monitor does this by examining the exhaust
When the vibration amplitude reaches the pro- temperature thermocouples and compressor dis-
grammed trip set point, the channel will trigger a trip charge temperature thermocouples. From changes
signal, the circuit will latch, and a “HIGH VIBRA- that may occur in the pattern of the thermocouple
TION TRIP” message will be displayed. Removal readings, warning and protective signals are gener-
of the latched trip condition can be accomplished ated by the combustion monitor software to alarm
only by depressing the master reset button and/or trip the gas turbine.
(L86MR1) when vibration is not excessive. This means of detecting abnormalities in the com-
<RST> bustion system is effective only when there is in-
L39TEST
complete mixing as the gases pass through the
39V
turbine; an uneven turbine inlet pattern will cause an
FAULT
OR
L39VF
uneven exhaust pattern. The uneven inlet pattern
A
AB
ALARM B
L39VA The usefulness and reliability of the combustion
monitor depends on the condition of the exhaust
SET TRIP
TRIP
A
A>B
VT AND
L39VT AND thermocouples. It is important that each of the ther-
LATCH
TRIP B
RESET
mocouples is in good working condition.
AUTO OR MANUAL RESET Combustion Monitoring Software

L86AMR
id0057
The controllers contain a series of programs written
Figure 32 Vibration Protection to perform the monitoring tasks (See Combustion
When the “VIBRATION TRANSDUCER FAULT” Monitoring Schematic Figure 33). The main moni-
message is displayed and machine operation is not tor program is written to analyze the thermocouple
interrupted, either an open or shorted condition may readings and make appropriate decisions. Several
be the cause. This message indicates that mainte- different algorithms have been developed for this
nance or replacement action is required. With the depending on the turbine model series and the type
<HMI> display, it is possible to monitor vibration of thermocouples used. The significant program
levels of each channel while the turbine is running constants used with each algorithm are specified in
without interrupting operation. the Control Specification for each unit.

GE Power Systems
<RST>
COMBUSTION MONITOR ALGORITHM

CTDA
MAX TTKSPL1 MEDIAN

SELECT
MIN TTKSPL2 CALCULATE

ALLOWABLE MEDIAN TTXSPL
SPREAD SELECT
TTXM
MAX TTKSPL5
MIN TTKSPL7
CONSTANTS
A L60SP1
A>B
TTXD2 B
CALCULATE A L60SP2
ACTUAL A>B
SPREADS B
A L60SP3
A<B
B
A L60SP4
A<B
B
id0049
Figure 33 Combustion Monitoring Function Algorithm (Schematic)
The most advanced algorithm, which is standard for a. SPREAD #1 (S1): The difference between the
gas turbines with redundant sensors, makes use of highest and the lowest thermocouple reading
the temperature spread and adjacency tests to differ- b. SPREAD #2 (S2): The difference between the
entiate between actual combustion problems and highest and the 2nd lowest thermocouple
thermocouple failures. The behavior is summarized reading
by the Venn diagram (Figure 34) where:
c. SPREAD #3 (S3): The difference between the
highest and the 3rd lowest thermocouple
reading
VENN DIAGRAM ALSO TRIP IF:
S2 S1
The allowable spread will be between the limits
S
allow S
allow
uK
1 TTKSPL7 and TTKSPL6, usually 17° C 〈30° F) and
53° C (125° F). The values of the combustion moni-
TRIP IF S1 & S2
OR S2 & S3 COMMUNICATIONS
ARE ADJACENT FAILURE
TYPICAL K1 = 1.0
K2 = 5.0
tor program constants are listed in the Control Speci-
TRIP IF S1 & S2
K3
ARE ADJACENT
K3 = 0.8
fications.
MONITOR TC ALARM
ALARM S1 The various controller processor outputs to the
K1 K2 S
allow
id0050
<HMI> cause alarm message displays as well as ap-
Figure 34 Exhaust Temperature Spread Limits
propriate control action. The combustion monitor
outputs are:
Sallow is the “Allowable Spread”, based on aver- Exhaust Thermocouple Trouble Alarm
age exhaust temperature and compressor dis- (L30SPTA)
charge temperature.
If any thermocouple value causes the largest spread
S1, S2 and S3 are defined as follows: to exceed a constant (usually 5 times the allowable
GE Power Systems
spread), a thermocouple alarm (L30SPTA) is pro- If any of the trip conditions exist for 9 seconds, the
duced. If this condition persists for four seconds, the trip will latch and “HIGH EXHAUST TEMPERA-
alarm message “EXHAUST THERMOCOUPLE TURE SPREAD TRIP” message will be displayed.
TROUBLE” will be displayed and will remain on The turbine will be tripped through the master pro-
until acknowledged and reset. This usually indicates tective circuit. The alarm and trip signals will be dis-
a failed thermocouple, i.e., open circuit. played until they are acknowledged and reset.
Combustion Trouble Alarm (L30SPA)

Monitor Enable (L83SPM)
A combustion alarm can occur if a thermocouple
value causes the largest spread to exceed a constant The protective function of the monitor is enabled
(usually the allowable spread). If this condition per- when the turbine is above 14HS and a shutdown sig-
sists for three seconds, the alarm message “COM- nal has not been given. The purpose of the “enable”
BUSTION TROUBLE” will be displayed and will signal (L83SPM) is to prevent false action during
remain on until it is acknowledged and reset. normal start–up and shutdown transient conditions.
When the monitor is not enabled, no new protective
High Exhaust Temperature Spread Trip actions are taken. The combustion monitor will also
(L30SPT) be disabled during a high rate of change of FSR. This
prevents false alarms and trips during large fuel and
A high exhaust temperature spread trip can occur if:
load transients.
“COMBUSTION TROUBLE” alarm exists, the
second largest spread exceeds a constant (usual- The two main sources of alarm and trip signals being
ly 0.8 times the allowable spread), and the low- generated by the combustion monitor are failed ther-
est and second lowest outputs are from adjacent mocouples and combustion system problems. Other
thermocouples causes include poor fuel distribution due to plugged
or worn fuel nozzles and combustor flameout due,
“EXHAUST THERMOCOUPLE TROUBLE”
for instance, to water injection.
alarm exists, the second largest spread exceeds a
constant (usually 0.8 times the allowable The tests for combustion alarm and trip action have
spread), and the second and third lowest outputs been designed to minimize false actions due to failed
are from adjacent thermocouples thermocouples. Should a controller fail, the thermo-
the third largest spread exceeds a constant (usu- couples from the failed controller will be ignored
ally the allowable spread) for a period of five (similar to temperature control) so as not to give a
minutes false trip.


One River Road
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
01 01
02 Alarm Report 02
03 This section lists all Alarms defined in the system 03
04 04
05 Signal Name Description Alarm ID Alarm Class HMI Screen Written At 05
G1\BTGJ1_1_ALM BRG METAL TEMP GEN JOURNAL #1 HIGH 1 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@BRG_METAL.BrgMtl.15:L30COMP2.OUT1
06 06
G1\BTGJ1_2_ALM BRG METAL TEMP GEN JOURNAL #1 HIGH 2 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@BRG_METAL.BrgMtl.15:L30COMP2.OUT2
07 G1\BTGJ2_1_ALM BRG METAL TEMP GEN JOURNAL #2 HIGH 3 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@BRG_METAL.BrgMtl.15:L30COMP2.OUT3 07
08 G1\BTGJ2_2_ALM BRG METAL TEMP GEN JOURNAL #2 HIGH 4 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@BRG_METAL.BrgMtl.15:L30COMP2.OUT4 08
G1\BTJ1_1_ALM BRG METAL TEMP TURB JOURNAL #1 HIGH 5 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@BRG_METAL.BrgMtl.20:L30COMP2.OUT1
09 09
10 G1\BTJ2_1_ALM BRG METAL TEMP TURB JOURNAL #2 HIGH 7 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@BRG_METAL.BrgMtl.20:L30COMP2.OUT3 10
11 G1\BTJ2_2_ALM BRG METAL TEMP TURB JOURNAL #2 HIGH 8 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@BRG_METAL.BrgMtl.20:L30COMP2.OUT4 11
12 12
13 G1\BTTA1_2_ALM BRG METAL TEMP THRUST ACTIVE 2 HIGH 11 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@BRG_METAL.BrgMtl.10:L30COMP2.OUT4 13
14 G1\BTTA1_5_ALM BRG METAL TEMP THRUST ACTIVE 5 HIGH 12 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@BRG_METAL.BrgMtl.10:L30COMP2.OUT5 14
G1\BTTA1_8_ALM BRG METAL TEMP THRUST ACTIVE 8 HIGH 13 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@BRG_METAL.BrgMtl.10:L30COMP2.OUT6
15 15
G1\BTTI1_2_ALM BRG METAL TEMP THRUST INACTIVE 2 HIGH 14 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@BRG_METAL.BrgMtl.10:L30COMP2.OUT1
16 G1\BTTI1_5_ALM BRG METAL TEMP THRUST INACTIVE 5 HIGH 15 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@BRG_METAL.BrgMtl.10:L30COMP2.OUT2 16
17 G1\BTTI1_9_ALM BRG METAL TEMP THRUST INACTIVE 9 HIGH 16 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@BRG_METAL.BrgMtl.10:L30COMP2.OUT3 17
G1\L12H_ACC_ALM PROT MODULE SPEED SGNL LOSS (DECEL DET) 17 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@OVRSPD.OvrSpdHp.100:L12HV1.LHACCAL
18 18
G1\L12H_ALM ELECTRICAL OVERSPEED TRIP - HP 18 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@OVRSPD.OvrSpdHp.175:_MOVE_B.DEST
19 G1\L12H_FLT_ALM LOSS OF PROTECTIVE HP SPEED SIGNALS 19 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@OVRSPD.OvrSpdVPRO.40:_MOVE_B.DEST 19
20 G1\L12H_P_ALM PROTECTIVE OVERSPEED STATUS 20 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@OVRSPD.OvrSpdHp.100:L12HV1.L12HPAL 20
G1\L12HBLT_ALM PROTECTIVE OVERSPEED BOLT TRIP 21 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@OVRSPD.OvrSpdHp.100:L12HV1.LHBLTAL
21 21
G1\L12HF_ALM CONTROL SPEED SIGNAL LOSS - HP 22 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@OVRSPD.OvrSpdHp.165:_MOVE_B.DEST
22 G1\L12HFD_C_ALM CONTROL SPEED SIGNAL TROUBLE 23 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@OVRSPD.OvrSpdHp.145:_MOVE_B.DEST 22
23 G1\L12HFD_P_ALM PROTECTIVE SPEED SIGNAL TROUBLE 24 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@OVRSPD.OvrSpdHp.155:_MOVE_B.DEST 23
G1\L20FDY_ALM FV155 LIQ FUEL STOP VLV OPEN POSITION FLT 744 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_LIQ_AUX.LiqStopVlv.85:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_LIQ_AUX.LiqStopVlv.85:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
24 24
G1\L20FDZ_ALM FV155 LIQ FUEL STOP VLV CLOSED POSITION FLT 745 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_LIQ_AUX.LiqStopVlv.115:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_LIQ_AUX.LiqStopVlv.115:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
25 G1\L20FTY_ALM CRUDE OIL FWD HEAVY TO DIST FUEL XFER FAULT 523 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CRUDE_OIL.FILTERING.180:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@CRUDE_OIL.FILTERING.180:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT25
26 G1\L20FTZ_ALM CRUDE OIL FWD DIST TO HEAVY FUEL XFER FAULT 524 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CRUDE_OIL.FILTERING.150:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@CRUDE_OIL.FILTERING.150:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT26
G1\L20WN2_ALM WATER INJECTION VALVE TROUBLE 715 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@WATER_INJECT.ALARMS_MISC.425:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@WATER_INJECT.ALARMS_MISC.425:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
27 27
G1\L25A_ENAB_AL K25A RELAY HAS NOT BEEN ENABLED 25 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@OVRSPD.OvrSpdVPRO.540:_MOVE_B.DEST
28 G1\L26AAH_ALM ATOMIZING AIR TEMPERATURE HIGH 475 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@ATOMIZINGAIR.ALARMS_MISC.130:_MOVE_B.DEST 28
29 G1\L26AAL_ALM ATOMIZING AIR TEMPERATURE LOW 476 PRC 29
*G1.UNIT1.G1@ATOMIZINGAIR.ALARMS_MISC.100:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@ATOMIZINGAIR.ALARMS_MISC.100:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
G1\L26CR1H_ALM STARTING MEANS CRANK MOTOR TEMP HIGH PHASE#1-TRIP 29 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@START_MEANS.ALARMS_MISC.240:_MOVE_B.DEST
30 30
G1\L26CR1HH_ALM STARTING MEANS CRANK MOTOR TEMP VERY HIGH PHASE#1 30 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@START_MEANS.ALARMS_MISC.280:_MOVE_B.DEST
31 G1\L26CR2H_ALM STARTING MEANS CRANK MOTOR TEMP HIGH PHASE#2-TRIP 31 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@START_MEANS.ALARMS_MISC.250:_MOVE_B.DEST 31
32 G1\L26CR2HH_ALM STARTING MEANS CRANK MOTOR TEMP VERY HIGH PHASE#2 32 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@START_MEANS.ALARMS_MISC.290:_MOVE_B.DEST 32
G1\L26CR3H_ALM STARTING MEANS CRANK MOTOR TEMP HIGH PHASE#3-TRIP 33 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@START_MEANS.ALARMS_MISC.260:_MOVE_B.DEST
33 33
Last Modified Module Revision Customer Title Mark VI Software
12/20/06 18:20:13 Reliance Alarm Report
Build Major Revision Type Site DM Number Requisition Toolbox Revision DWG Engineer
Modified TMR Jamnagar E0601 503150 V11.03.24C General Electric Company #A014/A210 Vikram Muralidharan
Build Minor Revision Print Date Process Application Serial Number Shop Order No. Machine Size Cont. on Sh. Sh. No.
Salem, Va. USA
Modified 20-Dec-06 GenDrive #890123 MS9171-STD 0002 0001
Signal Name Description Alarm ID Alarm Class HMI Screen Written At
01 01
G1\L26CR3HH_ALM STARTING MEANS CRANK MOTOR TEMP VERY HIGH PHASE#3 34 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@START_MEANS.ALARMS_MISC.300:_MOVE_B.DEST
02 G1\L26CTH_ALM CONTROL PANEL TEMPERATURE HIGH 35 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CTRLMODE.CtrlMdStat.110:_COMPARE_F.OUT 02
03 G1\L26FU1L_ALM LIQUID FUEL TEMP LOWER THAN HEAT TRACING SETPOINT 734 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CRUDE_OIL.ALARMS_MICS.207:_BENG.OUT 03
G1\L26FURAMP_AL LIQ FUEL TEMPERATURE VARIATION TOO HIGH 736 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CRUDE_OIL.ALARMS_MICS.227:_COMPARE_F.OUT
04 04
G1\L26GGCA_ALM GENERATOR COLD GAS TEMPERATURE HIGH 530 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENTEMP.GenTemp9A5.130:_MOVE_B.DEST
05 G1\L26GGCS_ALM GENERATOR HIGH COLD GAS TEMP SPREAD 531 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENTEMP.GenTemp9A5.250:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENTEMP.GenTemp9A5.250:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
05
06 G1\L26GGF_ALM GENERATOR RTD OUT OF LIMITS 532 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENTEMP.GenTemp9A5.115:_BENG.OUT 06
G1\L26GGFH_ALM GENERATOR RTD HIGH FAILURE 533 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENTEMP.GenTemp9A5.170:L30COMP2.OUTPUT
07 07
G1\L26GGFL_ALM GENERATOR RTD HIGH FAILURE 534 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENTEMP.GenTemp9A5.180:L30COMP2.OUTPUT
08 G1\L26GGHA_ALM GENERATOR HOT GAS TEMPERATURE HIGH 535 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENTEMP.GenTemp9A5.140:_MOVE_B.DEST
08
09 G1\L26GV_SENS HEAT VENT GENERATOR COMP SPACE HEATER FAULT 689 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Gen_Alarms.20:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Gen_Alarms.20:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT09
G1\L26HA11HH_AL HEAT VENT VERY HIGH TEMP. IN DLN COMPARTMENT 460 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.DLN_Alarms.40:_COMPHYS.OUT
10 10
G1\L26HA11LL_AL HEAT VENT VERY LOW TEMP. IN DLN COMPARTMENT 461 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.DLN_Alarms.20:_COMPHYS.OUT
11 G1\L26HAHH_ALM HEAT VENT VERY HIGH TEMP. IN AUXILIARY COMPARTMENT 462 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Aux_Alarms.50:_COMPHYS.OUT
11
12 G1\L26HALL_ALM HEAT VENT VERY LOW TEMP. IN AUXILIARY COMPARTMENT 463 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Aux_Alarms.30:_BENG.OUT 12
G1\L26HGHH_ALM HEAT VENT VERY HIGH TEMP. IN LOAD COMPARTMENT 479 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Load_Alarms.50:_COMPHYS.OUT
13 13
G1\L26HGLL_ALM HEAT VENT VERY LOW TEMP. IN LOAD COMPARTMENT 480 PRC
14 G1\L26HTHH_ALM HEAT VENT VERY HIGH TEMP. IN TURBINE COMPARTMENT 464 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Turb_Alarms.80:_COMPHYS.OUT
14
15 G1\L26HTLL_ALM HEAT VENT VERY LOW TEMP. IN TURBINE COMPARTMENT 465 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Turb_Alarms.60:_BENG.OUT 15
16 G1\L26PMBT1L_AL EXH PRESS MONITORING PANEL TEMP LOW-HTR MALFUNCTIO 51 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@AIRFLOW.PerfMonitor.40:_MOVE_B.DEST 16
G1\L26QA_ALM LUBE OIL HEADER TEMPERATURE TOO HIGH 53 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.ALARMS_MISC.115:_BENG.OUT
17 17
G1\L26QN_ALM LUBE OIL TANK TEMPERATURE TOO LOW 54 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.ALARMS_MISC.140:_MOVE_B.DEST
18 G1\L26QT_ALM LUBE OIL HEADER TEMPERATURE HIGH HIGH 55 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.ALARMS_MISC.126:_BENG.OUT 18
19 G1\L26WC_FLT COOLING WATER TEMP MEASUREMENT FAULT 57 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@COOLWATSUPP.ALARM_MISC.15:_BENG.OUT 19
G1\L26WCCUST_AL WATER TEMP HIGH ON EXTERNAL COOLING 732 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@COOLWATSUPP.ALARM_MISC.245:_COMPARE_F.OUT
20 20
G1\L26WCHH_ALM COOLING WATER TEMPERATURE VERY HIGH 58 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@COOLWATSUPP.ALARM_MISC.7:_MOVE_B.DEST
21 G1\L26WRHH_ALM HEAT VENT VERY HIGH TEMP. IN WI COMPARTMENT 536 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.WI_Alarms.40:_COMPHYS.OUT 21
22 G1\L26WRLL_ALM HEAT VENT VERY LOW TEMP. IN WI COMPARTMENT 537 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.WI_Alarms.20:_COMPHYS.OUT 22
G1\L27BLN11_ALM BAT CHAR AC UNDERVOLT - T.D. NORMAL SD 60 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@MISC.Misc_Alarms.70:_MOVE_B.DEST
23 23
G1\L27BLN12_ALM BAT CHAR AC UNDERVOLT - INSTANT NORMAL SD 61 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@MISC.Misc_Alarms.120:_MOVE_B.DEST
24 G1\L27BLN13_ALM BATTERY CHARGER AC UNDERVOLTAGE - SHUTDOWN 62 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@MISC.Misc_Alarms.90:_MOVE_B.DEST 24
25 G1\L27BLN21_ALM BAT CHAR 2 AC UNDERVOLT - T.D. NORMAL SD 538 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@MISC.Misc_Alarms.160:_MOVE_B.DEST 25
G1\L27BLN22_ALM BAT CHAR 2 AC UNDERVOLT - INSTANT NORMAL SD 539 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@MISC.Misc_Alarms.210:_MOVE_B.DEST
26 26
G1\L27BLN23_ALM BATTERY CHARGER 2 AC UNDERVOLTAGE - SHUTDOWN 540 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@MISC.Misc_Alarms.180:_MOVE_B.DEST
27 G1\L27BN_12_ALM AC BUS NORMAL INFORMATIONS MISMATCH 63 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENSYNC.Synch.890:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENSYNC.Synch.890:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT 27
28 G1\L27BN_ALM BUS UNDERVOLTAGE - NO AUTO SYNCH 64 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENSYNC.Synch.910:_BENG.OUT 28
G1\L27BZ_12_ALM AC BUS UNDERVOLTAGE INFORMATIONS MISMATCH 67 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENSYNC.Synch.900:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENSYNC.Synch.900:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
29 29
G1\L27DZ_ALM DC POWER SUPPLY UNDERVOLTAGE 68 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CTRLMODE.CtrlMdStat.490:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@CTRLMODE.CtrlMdStat.490:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
30 G1\L27GRDAC_ALM GAS DETECT RACK 230 VAC POWER SPPLY FLT 69 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HGD.ALARMS_MISC.20:_MOVE_B.DEST 30
31 G1\L27GRDDC_ALM GAS DETECT RACK 125 VDC POWER SPPLY FLT 70 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HGD.ALARMS_MISC.30:_MOVE_B.DEST 31
G1\L27MC1N_ALM MCC BUS #1 UNDERVOLTAGE 72 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@MISC.Misc_Alarms.10:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@MISC.Misc_Alarms.10:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
32 32
G1\L27N_ALM NORMAL SUPPLY LOW VOLTAGE 74 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@MISC.Misc_Alarms.330:_MOVE_B.DEST
33 33
Salem, Va. USA
01 01
G1\L27QEL_ALM LUBE OIL EMERGENCY PUMP MOTOR UNDERVOLTAGE 75 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.T88QE.380:_MOVE_B.DEST
02 G1\L27S_ALM STAND BY SUPPLY LOW VOLTAGE 76 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@MISC.Misc_Alarms.350:_MOVE_B.DEST 02
03 G1\L27TF_ALM INLET FILTER DEFECT POWER SUPPLY TROUBLE 77 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FLOW_INLET.ALARMS_MISC.90:_MOVE_B.DEST 03
G1\L27X1_ALM G60A PROTECTION POWER SUPPLY FAULT 543 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENPRO.GP21K_G60A.160:_MOVE_B.DEST
04 04
G1\L27X2_ALM G60B PROTECTION POWER SUPPLY FAULT 544 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENPRO.GP21K_G60B.190:_MOVE_B.DEST
05 G1\L27X3_ALM T60A PROTECTION POWER SUPPLY FAULT 545 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENPRO.GP21K_T60A.100:_MOVE_B.DEST
05
06 G1\L28FD_ALM FLAME DETECTOR TROUBLE 79 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FLAME.FlameSeqSTD.110:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@FLAME.FlameSeqSTD.110:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT 06
G1\L28FD_SD STARTUP CHECK STOP CHAMB FLMED OUT DURING SD ALARM 80 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@START_STOP.ALARMS_MICS.20:_BENG.OUT
07 07
G1\L28FDT_ALM LOSS OF FLAME TRIP 81 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FLAME.FlameSeqSTD.145:_MOVE_B.DEST
08 G1\L2SFT_ALM STARTUP FUEL FLOW EXCESSIVE TRIP 82 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@TRIP.Trip.880:_MOVE_B.DEST
08
09 G1\L30AAT_ALM ATOMIZING AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR FAULT 481 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@ATOMIZINGAIR.ALARMS_MISC.50:_MOVE_B.DEST 09
G1\L30AIRCRFT_A AIR CRAFT LIGHTS FAULT 737 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@MISC.Misc_Alarms.500:_MOVE_B.DEST
10 10
G1\L30ALLSTCK_A DISTILLATE FUEL SUPPLY FAULT - SU INHIBITED 748 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@MISC.Misc_Alarms.515:_BENG.OUT
11 G1\L30ALLTKSD_A DISTILLATE FUEL SUPPLY FAULT - SD 749 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@MISC.Misc_Alarms.520:_BENG.OUT
11
12 G1\L30ALM2LF_AL 2ND LIQ FUEL SUPPLY FLT - RETURN TO DIST 750 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@MISC.Misc_Alarms.540:_BENG.OUT 12
G1\L30BA_ALM HEAT VENT AUX COMPT ELEC. FAULT 722 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Aux_Alarms.170:_BENG.OUT
13 13
G1\L30BAX_ALM HEAT VENT AUX COMPARTMENT VENT. CHANGE OVER 731 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Aux_Alarms.270:_BENG.OUT
14 G1\L30BB_ALM DAMPER DAMPER OUT OF ORDER 547 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@DAMPER.ALARMS_MICS.30:_MOVE_B.DEST
14
15 G1\L30BN_F_ALM VIBRATION BN MONITOR FAULT 548 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@VIB_BN.R35K_VibProx.20:_MOVE_B.DEST 15
16 G1\L30BT_ALM HEAT VENT TURB COMPT ELEC. FAULT 84 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Turb_Alarms.200:_BENG.OUT 16
G1\L30BTA_ALM BEARING METAL TEMPERATURE HIGH 85 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@BRG_METAL.BrgMtl.50:_MOVE_B.DEST
17 17
G1\L30BTX_ALM HEAT VENT TURBINE COMPARTMENT VENT. CHANGE OVER 86 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Turb_Alarms.250:_BENG.OUT
18 G1\L30BW_ALM WATER WASH ONLINE WASHING SKID FAULT 87 PRC 18 *G1.UNIT1.G
*G1.UNIT1.G1@WATER_WASH.WASH_OFFLINE.170:_MOVE_B.DEST; *G1.UNIT1.G1@WATER_WASH.WASH_ONLINE.175:TIMER_SEC5.coil;
19 G1\L30CBC_ALM COMP BLD VALVES FAILURE TO OPEN 88 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@COOL_AIR.VA2_CompBldV.280:_BENG.OUT 19

G1\L30CC_ALM FIRE PROTEC PANEL TROUBLE 89 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FIRE_PROT.OUT_MODULE.68:_MOVE_B.DEST
20 20
G1\L30CD_ALM STARTING MEANS COOLDOWN TROUBLE 90 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@START_MEANS.ALARMS_MISC.450:TIMER_SEC5.coil; *G1.UNIT1.G1@START_MEANS.ALARMS_MISC.450:TIMER_SEC5.40:_TIMER.AT_TIM
21 G1\L30COM_EXFLT EXCITER TO MKVI COMMUNICATION FAULT 549 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@EXCITER.Ex21K.1270:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@EXCITER.Ex21K.1270:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT 21
22 G1\L30COMM_IO_R VCMI IO STATE EXCHANGE FOR <R> FAILED 91 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CTRLMODE.CtrlMdStat.330:_MOVE_B.DEST 22
G1\L30COMM_IO_S VCMI IO STATE EXCHANGE FOR <S> FAILED 92 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CTRLMODE.CtrlMdStat.340:_MOVE_B.DEST
23 23
G1\L30COMM_IO_T VCMI IO STATE EXCHANGED FOR <T> FAILED 93 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CTRLMODE.CtrlMdStat.350:_MOVE_B.DEST
24 G1\L30DPFLT_ALM FLOW INLET DEWPOINT TEMPERATURE SENSOR FAULT 94 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@AIRFLOW.DewPoint.50:_BENG.OUT 24
25 G1\L30EX_FSP EXCITER FAILURE TO STOP 553 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@EXCITER.Ex21K.530:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@EXCITER.Ex21K.530:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT 25
G1\L30EX_FTS EXCITER FAILURE TO START 554 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@EXCITER.Ex21K.350:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@EXCITER.Ex21K.350:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
26 26
G1\L30EX_RS EXCITER NOT READY TO START 555 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@EXCITER.Ex21K.358:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@EXCITER.Ex21K.358:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
27 G1\L30FAX_ALM CRUDE OIL FWD SMOKE INHIBITION PUMP CHANGE OVER 556 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CRUDE_OIL.ADDITIVE.220:_BENG.OUT 27
28 G1\L30FC1_ALM COOLING WATER FANS PERMANENT BLOCK FAULT 97 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@COOLWATSUPP.ALARM_MISC.30:_MOVE_B.DEST 28
G1\L30FC2_ALM COOLING WATER FANS REGULATOR BLOCK FAULT 98 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@COOLWATSUPP.ALARM_MISC.40:_MOVE_B.DEST
29 29
G1\L30FC3_ALM COOLING WATER FANS SPARE BLOCK FAULT 706 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@COOLWATSUPP.ALARM_MISC.50:_MOVE_B.DEST
30 G1\L30FC_ALM EXTERNAL COOLING SYSTEM FAULT 733 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@COOLWATSUPP.ALARM_MISC.255:_MOVE_B.DEST 30
31 G1\L30FD_ALM FAILURE TO IGNITE 99 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@SUPURGE.SuPurge.360:_BENG.OUT 31
G1\L30FORCED_AL SIGNAL FORCING ENABLED 100 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CTRLMODE.CtrlMdStat.560:FORCED.alarm; *G1.UNIT1.G1@CTRLMODE.CtrlMdStat.560:FORCED.40:_BENG.OUT
32 32
G1\L30FPG2L_ALM GAS FUEL INTER-VALVE PRESS. (P2) LOW 101 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasSRV.760:_BENG.OUT
33 33
Salem, Va. USA
01 01
G1\L30G60A_ALM G60A GENERAL FAULT 558 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENPRO.GP21K_G60A.20:_MOVE_B.DEST
02 G1\L30G60B_ALM G60B GENERAL FAULT 559 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENPRO.GP21K_G60B.20:_MOVE_B.DEST 02
03 G1\L30GV_ALM HEAT VENT GENERATOR COMP FAN ELECTRICAL FAULT 690 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Gen_Alarms.80:_BENG.OUT 03
G1\L30GVX_ALM HEAT VENT GENERATOR COMPARTMENT VENT. CHANGE OVER691 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Gen_Alarms.110:_BENG.OUT
04 04
G1\L30HG_ALM GENERATOR COMPARTMENT HEATER FAULT 738 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@MISC.Misc_Alarms.460:_MOVE_B.DEST
05 G1\L30JS_ALM HEAT VENT WATER INJ COMP VENT. ELECTRICAL FAULT 560 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.WI_Alarms.140:_BENG.OUT
05
06 G1\L30JSX_ALM HEAT VENT WI COMPARTMENT VENT. CHANGE OVER 561 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.WI_Alarms.210:_BENG.OUT 06
G1\L30LOAH_ALM BEARING DRAIN TEMPERATURE HIGH 110 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.BEARINGDRAIN.280:L30COMP1.OUTPUT
07 07
G1\L30LOAHH_ALM BEARING DRAIN TEMPERATURE VERY HIGH 111 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.BEARINGDRAIN.300:L30COMP1.OUTPUT
08 G1\L30LTA HIGH LOAD TUNNEL TEMP - AUTO UNLOADING 112 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@WHEELSP.Load_Tunnel.10:_COMPHYS.OUT
08
09 G1\L30LTTH_ALM LUBE OIL HEADER TEMP SENSOR HIGH SPREAD 113 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.ALARMS_MISC.195:_BENG.OUT 09
G1\L30MRSYNC_AL SYNC INHIBITED - EX MAN REG ACTIVE 562 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENSYNC.Synch.240:_BENG.OUT
10 10
G1\L30QB_ALM GENERATOR LIFT BEARING LIFT PUMP CHANGE OVER ALM 563 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENERT_LIFT.GenBrgLftGE.410:_BENG.OUT
11 G1\L30QVX_ALM LUBE OIL MIST ELIM FAULT - CHANGE OVER 716 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.T88QV_2.210:_BENG.OUT
11
12 G1\L30SG1_ALM EXCITER CHANNEL FAILED WITH IGNITOR ON 115 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@SUPURGE.SuPurge.400:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@SUPURGE.SuPurge.400:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT 12
G1\L30SPA COMBUSTION TROUBLE 116 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@COMBMON.CombMon.150:COMB_MON_SEQ.l30spa; *G1.UNIT1.G1@COMBMON.CombMon.150:COMB_MON_SEQ.150:TIMER_SEC.log_out;
13 13
G1\L30SPT HIGH EXHAUST TEMPERATURE SPREAD TRIP 117 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@COMBMON.CombMon.150:COMB_MON_SEQ.l30spt; *G1.UNIT1.G1@COMBMON.CombMon.150:COMB_MON_SEQ.130:TIMER_SEC.log_out;
14 G1\L30SPTA EXHAUST THERMOCOUPLE TROUBLE 118 PRC
14
*G1.UNIT1.G1@COMBMON.CombMon.150:COMB_MON_SEQ.l30spta; *G1.UNIT1.G1@COMBMON.CombMon.150:COMB_MON_SEQ.170:TIMER_SEC.log_out
15 G1\L30T60A_ALM T60A GENERAL FAULT 564 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENPRO.GP21K_T60A.20:_MOVE_B.DEST 15
16 G1\L30T60B_ALM T60B GENERAL FAULT 565 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENPRO.GP21K_T60B.20:_MOVE_B.DEST 16
G1\L30TWW_ALM WHEELSPACE TEMP HIGH - WW INHIBITED 119 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@WATER_WASH.WASH_OFFLINE.185:_MOVE_B.DEST
17 17
G1\L30TXA_ALM EXHAUST TEMPERATURE HIGH 120 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@EXTMP.ExTmpMed.180:_MOVE_B.DEST
18 G1\L30UPSCS_ALM INVERTER STATIC CONVERTER GROUP FAULT 675 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@MISC.Misc_Alarms.370:_MOVE_B.DEST 18
19 G1\L30UPSMAN_AL INVERTER MAJOR UPS FAULT 676 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@MISC.Misc_Alarms.380:_MOVE_B.DEST 19
G1\L30UPSMIN_AL INVERTER MINOR GROUP FAULT 677 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@MISC.Misc_Alarms.390:_MOVE_B.DEST
20 20
G1\L30UPSMOD_AL INVERTER MODULE GROUP FAULT 678 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@MISC.Misc_Alarms.400:_MOVE_B.DEST
21 G1\L30VG_ALM HEAT VENT LOAD COMPARTMENT VENT. ELEC. FAULT 485 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Load_Alarms.150:_BENG.OUT 21
22 G1\L30VGX_ALM HEAT VENT LOAD COMPARTMENT VENT. CHANGE OVER 486 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Load_Alarms.200:_BENG.OUT 22
G1\L30VL_ALM HEAT VENT DLN COMPARTMENT VENT. ELEC. FAULT 123 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.DLN_Alarms.180:_BENG.OUT
23 23
G1\L30VLX_ALM HEAT VENT DLN COMPARTMENT VENT. CHANGE OVER 124 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.DLN_Alarms.230:_BENG.OUT
24 G1\L30WCX1_ALM COOLING WATER MOTOR#1 FAULT 125 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@COOLWATSUPP.T88WC_Pumps.210:_MOVE_B.DEST 24
25 G1\L30WCX2_ALM COOLING WATER MOTOR#2 FAULT 126 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@COOLWATSUPP.T88WC_Pumps.230:_MOVE_B.DEST 25
G1\L30WCX_ALM COOLING WATER PUMP FAULT - CHANGE OVER 127 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@COOLWATSUPP.T88WC_Pumps.260:_BENG.OUT
26 26
G1\L30WN1_ALM WATER INJECTION PUMP ELECTRICAL FAULT 566 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@WATER_INJECT.ALARMS_MISC.395:_MOVE_B.DEST
27 G1\L30WN_ALM WATER INJECTION NOT SELECTED 567 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@WATER_INJECT.ALARMS_MISC.30:_MOVE_B.DEST 27
28 G1\L30WQER_ALM WATER INJECTION SERVO NOT FOLLOWING OUTPUT 568 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@WATER_INJECT.ALARMS_MISC.345:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@WATER_INJECT.ALARMS_MISC.345:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
28
G1\L30WSA1_ALM WHEELSPACE TEMP DIFFERENTIAL HIGH 128 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@WHEELSP.Wheelsp.10:L30WSAV1.L30WSA1
29 29
G1\L30WSA2_ALM WHEELSPACE TEMPERATURE HIGH 129 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@WHEELSP.Wheelsp.10:L30WSAV1.L30WSA2
30 G1\L32DW_ALM GENERATOR BREAKER TRIP REVERSE POWER 130 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENMWATT.RvPwrCtrl.130:_BENG.OUT 30
31 G1\L33ARS_ALM AC TRANSFER CB SPRING CHARGE FAILURE 131 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@MISC.Misc_Alarms.290:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@MISC.Misc_Alarms.290:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT 31
G1\L33BA_ALM HEAT VENT AUX COMPT VENT FLAP TROUBLE 723 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Aux_Alarms.150:_BENG.OUT
32 32
G1\L33BT_ALM HEAT VENT TURB COMPT VENT FLAP TROUBLE 469 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Turb_Alarms.180:_BENG.OUT
33 33
Salem, Va. USA
01 01
G1\L33CDMN_ALM AT MIN TNR REVERSE POWER NOT DETECTED 133 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENMWATT.RvPwrCtrl.15:_BENG.OUT
02 G1\L33CL1_ALM FIRE PROTECTION - CO2 LOCKED OFF IN ZONE 1 134 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FIRE_PROT.Aux_GT_Compt.50:_MOVE_B.DEST 02
03 G1\L33CL2_ALM FIRE PROTECTION - CO2 LOCKED OFF IN ZONE 2 135 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FIRE_PROT.Load_Compt.50:_MOVE_B.DEST 03
G1\L33CL3_ALM FIRE PROTECTION - CO2 LOCKED OFF IN ZONE 3 707 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FIRE_PROT.Gen_Compt.50:_MOVE_B.DEST
04 04
G1\L33CL4_ALM FIRE PROTECTION - CO2 LOCKED OFF IN ZONE 4 708 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FIRE_PROT.Gas_Compt.50:_MOVE_B.DEST
05 G1\L33DT1_ALM HEAT VENT AUXILIARY COMPARTMENT DOOR OPEN 470 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Aux_Alarms.90:_BENG.OUT
05
06 G1\L33DT2_ALM HEAT VENT TURBINE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPEN 471 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Turb_Alarms.120:_BENG.OUT 06
G1\L33DT3_ALM HEAT VENT DLN COMPARTMENT DOOR OPEN 472 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.DLN_Alarms.100:_BENG.OUT
07 07
G1\L33GV34_ALM GENERATOR COMP AIR INLET DAMPER CLOSED 743 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Gen_Alarms.130:_BENG.OUT
08 G1\L33GV_ALM HEAT VENT GENERATOR COMPT VENT FLAP TROUBLE 692 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Gen_Alarms.70:_BENG.OUT
08
09 G1\L33JS_ALM HEAT VENT WI COMPT VENT FLAP TROUBLE 571 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.WI_Alarms.120:_BENG.OUT 09
G1\L33PGC_ALM GAS FUEL PURGE FAIL TO CLOSE 487 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GASLIQ_PURGE.GAS_PRIM.220:_BENG.OUT
10 10
G1\L33PGO_ALM GAS FUEL PURGE FAIL TO OPEN 488 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GASLIQ_PURGE.GAS_PRIM.250:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@GASLIQ_PURGE.GAS_PRIM.250:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
11 G1\L33PLP_ALM FUEL PURGE PRIM LIQ FUEL VALVE POSITION TROUBLE 489 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GASLIQ_PURGE.LIQ_NO_DLN.210:_BENG.OUT
11
12 G1\L33PS1C_ALM GAS FUEL VENT VALVE LIMIT SWITCH NOT CLOSED 140 PRC 12
*G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS_AUX.Valve_Skid.270:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS_AUX.Valve_Skid.270:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
G1\L33PS2O_ALM GAS FUEL VENT VALVE LIMIT SWITCH NOT OPEN 141 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS_AUX.Valve_Skid.250:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS_AUX.Valve_Skid.250:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
13 13
G1\L33PSC_ALM GAS FUEL VENT VALVE CLOSED TROUBLE 142 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS_AUX.Valve_Skid.350:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS_AUX.Valve_Skid.350:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
14 G1\L33PSO_ALM GAS FUEL VENT VALVE OPEN TROUBLE 143 PRC
14
15 G1\L33S_ALM GAS FUEL AUTOMATIC VALVE FAULT 144 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS_AUX.OUT_MODULE.100:_MOVE_B.DEST 15
16 G1\L33VG11_ALM GAS FUEL VENT VALVE OUT OF POSITION 145 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasSeq.50:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasSeq.50:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT 16
G1\L33VG_ALM HEAT VENT LOAD COMPT VENT FLAP TROUBLE 490 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Load_Alarms.130:_BENG.OUT
17 17
G1\L33VL_ALM HEAT VENT GAS/DLN COMPT VENT FLAP TROUBLE 147 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.DLN_Alarms.160:_BENG.OUT
18 G1\L33VS411C_AL GAS FUEL SHUT OFF VALVE LIMIT SWITCH NOT CLOSED 491 PRC 18
19 G1\L33VS411CX_A GAS FUEL SHUT OFF VALVE CLOSED TROUBLE 492 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS_AUX.Valve_Skid.290:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS_AUX.Valve_Skid.290:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
19
G1\L33VS421O_AL GAS FUEL SHUT OFF VALVE LIMIT SWITCH NOT OPEN 493 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS_AUX.Valve_Skid.210:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS_AUX.Valve_Skid.210:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
20 20
G1\L33VS421OX_A GAS FUEL SHUT OFF VALVE OPEN TROUBLE 494 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS_AUX.Valve_Skid.310:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS_AUX.Valve_Skid.310:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
21 G1\L33WNC_ALM WATER INJECTION VALVE CLOSING PB 572 PRC 21
*G1.UNIT1.G1@WATER_INJECT.ALARMS_MISC.110:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@WATER_INJECT.ALARMS_MISC.110:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
22 G1\L33WNO_ALM WATER INJECTION FAULT 573 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@WATER_INJECT.ALARMS_MISC.130:_BENG.OUT 22

G1\L39VA_ALM HIGH VIBRATION 148 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@VIB.VibGt.280:_BENG.OUT
23 23
G1\L39VD1_ALM VIBRATION SENSOR DISABLED 151 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@VIB.VibGt.260:_BENG.OUT
24 G1\L39VD3_ALM VIBRATION START INHIBIT 152 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@VIB.VibGt.230:_BENG.OUT 24
25 G1\L39VDIFF_ALM VIBRATION SENSOR DIFFERENTIAL TROUBLE 153 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@VIB.VibGt.290:_MOVE_B.DEST 25
G1\L39VF_ALM VIBRATION TRANSDUCER FAULT 154 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@VIB.VibGt.270:_MOVE_B.DEST
26 26
G1\L39VSD_ALM HIGH VIBRATION SHUTDOWN 163 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@VIB.VibGt.240:_BENG.OUT
27 G1\L39VSGH_ALM VIBRATION BN GEN. RADIAL SHAFT DISPLACEMENT ALERT 574 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@VIB_BN.R35K_VibProx.100:_MOVE_B.DEST 27
28 G1\L39VSGHH_ALM VIBRATION BN GEN. RADIAL SHAFT DISPLACEMENT DANGER 575 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@VIB_BN.R35K_VibProx.110:_MOVE_B.DEST 28
G1\L39VSTH_ALM VIBRATION BN GT. RADIAL SHAFT DISPLACEMENT ALERT 576 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@VIB_BN.R35K_VibProx.70:_MOVE_B.DEST
29 29
G1\L39VSTHH_ALM VIBRATION BN GT. RADIAL SHAFT DISPLACEMENT DANGER 577 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@VIB_BN.R35K_VibProx.80:_MOVE_B.DEST
30 G1\L39VT_ALM HIGH VIBRATION TRIP 164 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@VIB.VibGt.250:_MOVE_B.DEST 30
31 G1\L3A_ALM TURBINE UNDERSPEED 165 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@SUCMPLT.SuCmplt.40:_BENG.OUT 31
G1\L3APFLT_ALM AMBIENT PRESS FAULT-XFER TO SITE CONST 166 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CPR.Cpr.135:_MOVE_B.DEST
32 32
G1\L3CP_ALM DAMPER CUSTOMER START INHIBIT 459 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@START_STOP.ALARMS_MICS.70:_MOVE_B.DEST
33 33
Salem, Va. USA
01 01
G1\L3CPRI_ALM INLET PRESS DROP MEASUREMENT FAULT 167 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CPR.Cpr.150:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@CPR.Cpr.150:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
02 G1\L3D_UCVX_AF UCVx AIRFLOW OR OVERTEMPERATURE TROUBLE 168 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CTRLMODE.CtrlMdStat.80:DEV_FLTS.airflow; *G1.UNIT1.G1@CTRLMODE.CtrlMdStat.80:DEV_FLTS.20:_BENG.OUT 02
03 G1\L3D_UCVX_OT UCVx OVERTEMPERATURE 169 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CTRLMODE.CtrlMdStat.80:DEV_FLTS.overtmp; *G1.UNIT1.G1@CTRLMODE.CtrlMdStat.80:DEV_FLTS.30:_BENG.OUT 03
G1\L3DWBCOKZ_AL FSR LIMITED DUE TO DWATT XDUCER FAILURE 170 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENMWATT.GenMwattCtrl.210:_BENG.OUT
04 04
G1\L3FS1C_T_ALM GAS FUEL SHUT OFF VALVE SWITCH FAIL TO CLOSED 171 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS_AUX.Valve_Skid.130:_MOVE_B.DEST
05 G1\L3FTGL_ALM GAS FUEL TEMPERATURE GAS LOW 172 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS_AUX.ALARMS_MISC.20:_MOVE_B.DEST
05
06 G1\L3FTGLT_ALM GAS FUEL TEMPERATURE GAS TOO LOW - TRIP 173 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS_AUX.ALARMS_MISC.30:_MOVE_B.DEST 06
G1\L3FTGLZ_ALM GAS FUEL TEMPERATURE GAS LOW DURING STARTUP - TRIP 174 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS_AUX.ALARMS_MISC.40:_MOVE_B.DEST
07 07
G1\L3FUZ_ALM HEAVY FUEL XFER PERMISSIVE TROUBLE 578 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CRUDE_OIL.FILTERING.210:TIMER_SEC5.coil; *G1.UNIT1.G1@CRUDE_OIL.FILTERING.210:TIMER_SEC5.40:_TIMER.AT_TIME
08 G1\L3GCVA_ALM G1 GCV NOT FOLLOWING REF 175 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasVlv.70:_BENG.OUT
08
09 G1\L3GCVFLT_ALM GCV SERVO TROUBLE 176 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasVlv.50:_MOVE_B.DEST 09
G1\L3GLTSDTC_AL SHUT DOWN GAS LEAK TEST COMPLETE 177 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasLeakTest.240:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasLeakTest.240:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
10 10
G1\L3GLTSUTC_AL START UP GAS LEAK TEST COMPLETE 178 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasLeakTest.80:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasLeakTest.80:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
11 G1\L3GRVA_ALM STOP/SPEED RATIO VALVE NOT TRACKING 179 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasSRV.175:_MOVE_B.DEST
11
12 G1\L3GRVFLT GAS RATIO VALVE POSITION SERVO TROUBLE 180 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasSRV.100:GSRV_FAULT.l3grflt; *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasSRV.100:GSRV_FAULT.170:_BENG.OUT 12
G1\L3GRVT_ALM STOP/SPEED RATIO VALVE NOT TRACKING TRIP 181 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasSRV.240:_MOVE_B.DEST
13 13
G1\L3HQ1_ALM HYDRAULIC SUPPLY MAIN PUMP DEFAULT 182 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HYDR_SUPPLY.PUMPS.90:_BENG.OUT
14 G1\L3IGVFLT_ALM IGV POSITION SERVO FAULT 183 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@IGV.IGVRef.440:_MOVE_B.DEST
14
15 G1\L3LFLT_ALM LIQUID FUEL CONTROL FAULT 495 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_LIQ.LiqCtrlVlv.90:_MOVE_B.DEST 15
16 G1\L3LTOT_ALM LUBE OIL TANK TEMP SENSOR HIGH SPREAD 184 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.ALARMS_MISC.160:_MOVE_B.DEST 16
G1\L3MP_ALM MASTER PROTECTIVE START CHECK ETR FAULT 185 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@OVRSPD.OvrSpdVPRO.390:_MOVE_B.DEST
17 17
G1\L3SFLT_ALM CONTROL SYSTEM FAULT TRIP 186 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CTRLMODE.CtrlMdStat.420:_MOVE_B.DEST
18 G1\L3TFLT_ALM LOSS OF COMPR DISCHARGE PRESS BIAS 187 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@EXTMP.ExTmpMed.90:_MOVE_B.DEST 18
19 G1\L3TM_ALM CORRECTING TNR DRIFT ON IGV TEMP MATCH 579 *G1.UNIT1.G1@TMPMTCH.TempMatch.250:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@TMPMTCH.TempMatch.250:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT 19
G1\L3TM_TRP TNR OUTSIDE IGV TMP MATCH RANGE TRIP TM 580 *G1.UNIT1.G1@TMPMTCH.TempMatch.270:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@TMPMTCH.TempMatch.270:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
20 20
G1\L3TMFLT1_ALM STARTING MEANS LOSS TRQ CNV GUIDE VANE FEEDBACK 188 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@START_MEANS.ALARMS_MISC.420:_MOVE_B.DEST
21 G1\L3TNRERRX DWATT TOO LOW TO SUPPORT TNR-TNR LOWER 189 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@SPDLD.SpdLdCsDrp.45:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@SPDLD.SpdLdCsDrp.45:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT 21
22 G1\L3TTWS_ALM FORCED COOLDOWN DUE TO CO2 RELEASE 190 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@WHEELSP.StartInhibit.80:_MOVE_B.DEST 22
G1\L3VLST_ALM HEAT VENT GAS PRESS ULTRA LOW DOWNSTREAM SSOV 191 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasSplyPress.72:_BENG.OUT
23 23
G1\L3VTCC_ALM EXHAUST TC VTCC COMMUNICATIONS FAULT 192 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CTRLMODE.CtrlMdStat.390:_MOVE_B.DEST
24 G1\L3WCTIM_ALM WATER WASH ONLINE ONLINE WATER INHIBITED 193 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@WATER_WASH.WASH_ONLINE.40:_BENG.OUT 24
25 G1\L3Z_ALM FAILURE TO SYNCHRONIZE 194 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@SUCMPLT.SuCmplt.70:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@SUCMPLT.SuCmplt.70:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT 25
G1\L43ADJ_ALM VSVO IN CALIBRATION MODE 195 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CTRLMODE.CtrlMdStat.310:_MOVE_B.DEST
26 26
G1\L43BBLR_ALM DAMPER LOCAL CONTROL MODE OF DIVERTER 581 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@DAMPER.ALARMS_MICS.100:_MOVE_B.DEST
27 G1\L43CRLOC_ALM STARTING MOTOR IN LOCAL CONTROL POSITION 724 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@MISC.Misc_Alarms.480:_MOVE_B.DEST 27
28 G1\L43EX_ALM EX2K MANUAL (FVR) REGULATOR ACTIVE 582 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@EXCITER.Ex21K.640:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@EXCITER.Ex21K.640:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT 28
G1\L43MAINT_ALM MAINTENANCE - FORCING MODE ENABLED 196 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CTRLMODE.CtrlMdStat.280:_MOVE_B.DEST
29 29
G1\L45FP1_ALM FIRE PROTECTION - FIRE PRE ALARM ZONE 1 197 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FIRE_PROT.Aux_GT_Compt.20:_MOVE_B.DEST
30 G1\L45FP2_ALM FIRE PROTECTION - FIRE PRE ALARM ZONE 2 198 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FIRE_PROT.Load_Compt.20:_MOVE_B.DEST 30
31 G1\L45FP3_ALM FIRE PROTECTION - FIRE PRE ALARM ZONE 3 709 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FIRE_PROT.Gen_Compt.20:_MOVE_B.DEST 31
G1\L45FP4_ALM FIRE PROTECTION - FIRE PRE ALARM ZONE 4 710 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FIRE_PROT.Gas_Compt.20:_MOVE_B.DEST
32 32
G1\L45FPX_ALM FIRE PROTECTION - GENERAL FIRE ALARM ZONE 1 2 199 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FIRE_PROT.OUT_MODULE.5:_MOVE_B.DEST
33 33
Salem, Va. USA
01 01
G1\L45FTX1_ALM FIRE PROTECTION - FIRE ALARM ZONE 1 200 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FIRE_PROT.Aux_GT_Compt.30:_MOVE_B.DEST
02 G1\L45FTX2_ALM FIRE PROTECTION - FIRE ALARM ZONE 2 201 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FIRE_PROT.Load_Compt.30:_MOVE_B.DEST 02
03 G1\L45FTX3_ALM FIRE PROTECTION - FIRE ALARM ZONE 3 711 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FIRE_PROT.Gen_Compt.30:_MOVE_B.DEST 03
G1\L45FTX4_ALM FIRE PROTECTION - FIRE ALARM ZONE 4 712 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FIRE_PROT.Gas_Compt.30:_MOVE_B.DEST
04 04
G1\L45HA10_ALM SENSOR 45HA-10 CONTROL CARD FAULT 693 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HGD.ALARMS_MISC.230:_MOVE_B.DEST
05 G1\L45HA10H_ALM HZD GAS DETEC AUX COMPT- NAPHTA HIGH LEVEL 694 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HGD.L45HA_Naphta.20:_MOVE_B.DEST
05
06 G1\L45HA10HH_AL HZD GAS DETEC AUX COMPT#10 HIGH HIGH LEVEL 695 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HGD.L45HA_Naphta.40:_MOVE_B.DEST 06
G1\L45HA10T_AL HZD GAS DETEC AUX COMPT- NAPHTA TRIP 696 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HGD.L45HA_Naphta.100:_MOVE_B.DEST
07 07
08 G1\L45HA11HH_AL HZD GAS DETEC AUX COMPT#11 HIGH HIGH LEVEL 698 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HGD.L45HA_Naphta.50:_MOVE_B.DEST
08
09 G1\L45HA12_ALM SENSOR 45HA-12 CONTROL CARD FAULT 699 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HGD.ALARMS_MISC.270:_MOVE_B.DEST 09
G1\L45HA12HH_AL HZD GAS DETEC AUX COMPT#12 HIGH HIGH LEVEL 700 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HGD.L45HA_Naphta.60:_MOVE_B.DEST
10 10
11 G1\L45HA1H_ALM HZD GAS DETEC DLN COMP-DLN VENT/GAS CAB HIGH LEVEL 680 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HGD.L45HA_GasEnc.120:_MOVE_B.DEST
11
12 G1\L45HA1HH_ALM HZD GAS DETEC DLN/AUX COMPT#1 HIGH HIGH LEVEL 681 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HGD.L45HA_GasEnc.140:_MOVE_B.DEST 12
G1\L45HA1T_ALM HZD GAS DETEC DLN COMPT- VENT DUCT/GAS CAB TRIP 682 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HGD.L45HA_GasEnc.200:_MOVE_B.DEST
13 13
14 G1\L45HA2HH_ALM HZD GAS DETEC DLN/AUX COMPT#2 HIGH HIGH LEVEL 684 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HGD.L45HA_GasEnc.150:_MOVE_B.DEST
14
17 17
G1\L45HA4H_ALM HZD GAS DETEC DLN COMP-DLN VENT/GAS CAB HIGH LEVEL 203 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HGD.L45HA_GasEnc.20:_MOVE_B.DEST
19 G1\L45HA4T_ALM HZD GAS DETEC DLN COMPT- VENT DUCT/GAS CAB TRIP 205 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HGD.L45HA_GasEnc.100:_MOVE_B.DEST 19
20 20
G1\L45HA5HH_ALM HZD GAS DETEC DLN/AUX COMPT#5 HIGH HIGH LEVEL 207 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HGD.L45HA_GasEnc.50:_MOVE_B.DEST
G1\L45HGDHH_ALM HZD GAS DETEC HIGH HIGH LEVEL INFORMATION 210 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HGD.OUT_MODULE.130:_MOVE_B.DEST
23 23
G1\L45HGDSD_ALM HAZARDOUS GAS DETECTION FAILURE - SHUT DOWN 211 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HGD.OUT_MODULE.280:_MOVE_B.DEST
24 G1\L45HT1_ALM SENSOR 45HT-1 CONTROL CARD FAULT 212 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HGD.ALARMS_MISC.50:_MOVE_B.DEST 24
25 G1\L45HT1H_ALM HZD GAS DETEC TURBINE COMPT- TURB FRAME HIGH LEVEL 213 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HGD.L45HT_TurEnc.20:_MOVE_B.DEST 25
G1\L45HT1HH_ALM HZD GAS DETEC TURBINE COMPT#1 HIGH HIGH LEVEL 214 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HGD.L45HT_TurEnc.60:_MOVE_B.DEST
26 26
G1\L45HT1T_ALM HZD GAS DETEC TURB COMP - TURB FRAME TRIP 215 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HGD.L45HT_TurEnc.120:_MOVE_B.DEST
28 G1\L45HT2HH_ALM HZD GAS DETEC TURBINE COMPT#2 HIGH HIGH LEVEL 217 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HGD.L45HT_TurEnc.70:_MOVE_B.DEST 28
G1\L45HT3_ALM SENSOR 45HT-3 CONTROL CARD FAULT 218 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HGD.ALARMS_MISC.90:_MOVE_B.DEST
29 29
31 G1\L45HT4H_ALM HZD GAS DETEC TURBINE COMPT- VENT DUCT HIGH LEVEL 221 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HGD.L45HT_TurEnc.40:_MOVE_B.DEST 31
32 32
G1\L45HT4T_ALM HZD GAS DETEC TURB COMP- VENT DUCT TRIP 223 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HGD.L45HT_TurEnc.200:_MOVE_B.DEST
33 33
Salem, Va. USA
01 01
G1\L45HT5_ALM SENSOR 45HT-5 CONTROL CARD FAULT 224 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HGD.ALARMS_MISC.130:_MOVE_B.DEST
02 G1\L45HT5HH_ALM HZD GAS DETEC TURBINE COMPT#5 HIGH HIGH LEVEL 225 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HGD.L45HT_TurEnc.150:_MOVE_B.DEST 02
04 04
G1\L48_ALM TURBINE INCOMPLETE SEQUENCE 228 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@SUCMPLT.SuCmplt.120:_MOVE_B.DEST
05 G1\L48CR_ALM STARTING MEANS TURB SHFT FAIL TO BREAK TURB AWAY 229 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@START_MEANS.ALARMS_MISC.360:_MOVE_B.DEST
05
06 G1\L49GH_ALM GENERATOR STATOR TEMPERATURE HIGH 591 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENTEMP.GenTemp9A5.150:_MOVE_B.DEST 06
G1\L49X_ALM HEAT VENT AUXILIARY MOTOR OVERLOAD 230 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@MISC.Misc_Alarms.30:_MOVE_B.DEST
07 07
G1\L4EXOFF_ALM EX2K OPERATOR SELECTED EXCITATION OFF 592 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@EXCITER.Ex21K.536:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@EXCITER.Ex21K.536:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
08 G1\L4FCBRUN_ALM COOLING WATER REGULATION FAN BLOCK FIRST START 232 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@COOLWATSUPP.T88FC_Reg.60:_MOVE_B.DEST
08
09 G1\L4IGVT_ALM INLET GUIDE VANE CONTROL FAULT TRIP 233 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@IGV.IGVRef.460:_MOVE_B.DEST 09
G1\L4QESTP1_ALM DC 88QE PUMP FIRST STEP TIMER FAILURE 234 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.T88QE.470:_BENG.OUT
10 10
G1\L4QESTP2_ALM DC 88QE PUMP SECOND STEP TIMER FAILURE 235 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.T88QE.510:_BENG.OUT
11 G1\L4QETRPZ_ALM AC PUMP FAILURE TRIP 236 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.OUT_MODULE.110:_MOVE_B.DEST
11
12 G1\L4QETST_ALM DC PUMP TEST FAILED 237 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.T88QE.610:_BENG.OUT 12
G1\L4TK_WW_ALM EXHAUST FRAME BLOWER FAULT. WATER WASH INHIBITED 238 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@WATER_WASH.ALARMS_MISC.36:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@WATER_WASH.ALARMS_MISC.36:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
13 13
G1\L51QE_ALM LUBE OIL EMERGENCY PUMP MOTOR OVERLOAD 241 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.T88QE.360:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.T88QE.360:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
14 G1\L51QEFLT_ALM DC PUMP ABNORMAL POWER 242 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.T88QE.560:_BENG.OUT
14
15 G1\L51QEOFF_ALM EMERGENCY LUBE OIL PUMP OUT OF SERVICE 243 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.T88QE.438:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.T88QE.438:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT 15
16 G1\L52AB1_ALM ATOMIZING AIR BOOSTER FEEDBACK FAULT 725 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@ATOMIZINGAIR.ALARMS_MISC.160:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@ATOMIZINGAIR.ALARMS_MISC.160:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
16
G1\L52BA_ALM HEAT VENT AUX COMPARTMENT VENT. FAULT 726 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Aux_Alarms.200:TIMER_SEC5.coil; *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Aux_Alarms.200:TIMER_SEC5.40:_TIMER.AT_TIME
17 17
G1\L52BT_ALM HEAT VENT TURBINE COMPARTMENT VENT. FAULT 248 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Turb_Alarms.230:TIMER_SEC5.coil; *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Turb_Alarms.230:TIMER_SEC5.40:_TIMER.AT_TIME
18 G1\L52FAY_ALM ADDITIVE SKID MOTOR BREAKER OPEN 739 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CRUDE_OIL.ADDITIVE.530:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@CRUDE_OIL.ADDITIVE.530:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT 18
19 G1\L52FC1_ALM COOLING WATER FANS PERMANENT BLOCK FDBCK FAULT 249 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@COOLWATSUPP.ALARM_MISC.185:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@COOLWATSUPP.ALARM_MISC.185:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
19
G1\L52FC2_ALM COOLING WATER FANS REGULATOR BLOCK FDBCK FAULT 250 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@COOLWATSUPP.ALARM_MISC.205:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@COOLWATSUPP.ALARM_MISC.205:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
20 20
G1\L52FC3_ALM COOLING WATER FANS SPARE BLOCK FDBCK FAULT 717 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@COOLWATSUPP.ALARM_MISC.225:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@COOLWATSUPP.ALARM_MISC.225:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
21 G1\L52FM_ALM FLOW DIVIDER MOTOR 88FM FAULT 497 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_LIQ.LiqDvd.70:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_LIQ.LiqDvd.70:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT 21
22 G1\L52GV_ALM HEAT VENT GENERATOR COMP MOTOR BREAKER TROUBLE 701 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Gen_Alarms.100:TIMER_SEC5.coil; *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Gen_Alarms.100:TIMER_SEC5.40:_TIMER.AT_TIME
22
G1\L52HQ1_ALM HYDRAULIC SUPPLY AUXILIARY PUMP DISCREPANCY 252 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HYDR_SUPPLY.PUMPS.81:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@HYDR_SUPPLY.PUMPS.81:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
23 23
G1\L52JS_ALM HEAT VENT WI COMPARTMENT VENT. FAULT 594 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.WI_Alarms.170:TIMER_SEC5.coil; *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.WI_Alarms.170:TIMER_SEC5.40:_TIMER.AT_TIME
24 G1\L52L1_ALM LINE BREAKER TRIPPED 720 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@SPDLD.SpdLdBrkr.70:_BENG.OUT 24
25 G1\L52L2_ALM LINE BREAKER TRIPPED 721 LVL_1 *G1.UNIT1.G1@SPDLD.SpdLdBrkr.90:_BENG.OUT 25
G1\L52QA_ALM LUBE OIL AUX PUMP IN OPERATION 253 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.T88QA.75:_BENG.OUT
26 26
G1\L52QBLAG_ALM GENERATOR LIFT STANDBY BEAR LIFT OIL PMP RUNN ALM 596 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENERT_LIFT.GenBrgLftGE.460:TIMER_SEC5.coil; *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENERT_LIFT.GenBrgLftGE.460:TIMER_SEC5.40:_TIMER.AT_TIME
27 G1\L52QVY_ALM LUBE OIL MIST ELIMINATOR MOTOR FEEDBACK TROUBLE 740 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.T88QV_2.250:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.T88QV_2.250:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT 27
28 G1\L52TG_ALM TURNING GEAR MOTOR FAULT 255 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@START_MEANS.ALARMS_MISC.480:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@START_MEANS.ALARMS_MISC.480:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
28
G1\L52TK1_ALM EXHAUST FRAME BLOWER #1 DISCREPENCY 256 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@COOL_AIR.ALARMS_MISC.270:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@COOL_AIR.ALARMS_MISC.270:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
29 29
G1\L52TK2_ALM EXHAUST FRAME BLOWER #2 DISCREPENCY 257 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@COOL_AIR.ALARMS_MISC.290:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@COOL_AIR.ALARMS_MISC.290:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
30 G1\L52VG_ALM HEAT VENT LOAD COMPARTMENT VENT. FAULT 498 PRC 30
*G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Load_Alarms.180:TIMER_SEC5.coil; *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Load_Alarms.180:TIMER_SEC5.40:_TIMER.AT_TIME
31 G1\L52VL_ALM HEAT VENT DLN COMPARTMENT VENT. FAULT 259 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.DLN_Alarms.210:TIMER_SEC5.coil; *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.DLN_Alarms.210:TIMER_SEC5.40:_TIMER.AT_TIME
31
G1\L52WCY_ALM COOLING WATER MOTOR BREAKER OPEN 260 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@COOLWATSUPP.T88WC_Pumps.290:TIMER_SEC5.coil; *G1.UNIT1.G1@COOLWATSUPP.T88WC_Pumps.290:TIMER_SEC5.40:_TIMER.AT_T
32 32
G1\L52WN1_ALM WATER INJECTION PUMP DISCREPENCY 597 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@WATER_INJECT.ALARMS_MISC.375:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@WATER_INJECT.ALARMS_MISC.375:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
33 33
Salem, Va. USA
01 01
G1\L5CFG_TRP_AL VPRO - OS SETPOINT CONFIG ERROR TRIP 261 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@OVRSPD.OvrSpdVPRO.480:_MOVE_B.DEST
02 G1\L5E_ALM EMERGENCY MANUAL TRIP - MKVI PANEL 262 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@TRIP.Trip.3400:_MOVE_B.DEST 02
03 G1\L5ESTOP1_ALM E-STOP 1 PROTECTIVE CIRCUIT LATCHED 263 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@OVRSPD.OvrSpdVPRO.450:_MOVE_B.DEST 03
G1\L5ESTOP1_FZA VPRO E-STOP PB CIRCUIT OPEN 264 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@TRIP.Trip.3490:_MOVE_B.DEST
04 04
G1\L5VPRO_LATCH PROTECTIVE VPRO CARD TRIP - LATCH 265 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@TRIP.Trip.3104:_BENG.OUT
05 G1\L60BOG_ALM TURBINE STARTUP BOGGED DOWN - TRIP 266 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@SUFSR.SuBogDwn.50:_MOVE_B.DEST
05
06 G1\L60FSRG_ALM FSR GAG NOT AT MAX LIMIT 267 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FSR.FSRMan.90:_MOVE_B.DEST 06
G1\L60TRF_ALM FSR TEMPERATURE REFERENCE ACTIVE 268 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@EXTMP.ExTmpRefCPR.80:_BENG.OUT
07 07
G1\L62CD_ALM COOLDOWN SEQUENCE RUNNING 269 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@COOLDOWN.Cooldown.130:_BENG.OUT
08 G1\L62TT2_ALM STARTUP CHECK STOP FAILURE TO START 270 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@START_STOP.ALARMS_MICS.40:_BENG.OUT
08
09 G1\L62WWY_ALM WARNING : VENTIL AFTER OFF LINE WW INTERRUPTED 271 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@WATER_WASH.WWAccum.110:_BENG.OUT 09
G1\L63AD4L_ALM AIR PROCESSING UNIT LOW PRESSURE 272 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@MISC.Misc_Alarms.270:_MOVE_B.DEST
10 10
G1\L63ADL_ALM ATOMIZING AIR COMPRESSOR DIFF PRESSURE LOW 499 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@ATOMIZINGAIR.COMPRESSOR.120:_BENG.OUT
11 G1\L63ADLA_ALM ATOMIZING AIR COMP DIFF PRESS LOW FUEL CHANGE 598 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@ATOMIZINGAIR.OUT_MODULE.70:_MOVE_B.DEST
11
12 G1\L63BAH_ALM AUX COMP INLET FILTER CLOGGED - BY PASS OPEN 702 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Aux_Filters.40:_MOVE_B.DEST 12
G1\L63BTH_ALM TURB COMP INLET FILTER CLOGGED - BY PASS OPEN 599 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Turb_Filters.40:_MOVE_B.DEST
13 13
G1\L63BWL_ALM LOW WATER WASH PRESSURE 273 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@WATER_WASH.ALARMS_MISC.30:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@WATER_WASH.ALARMS_MISC.30:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
14 G1\L63CA1L_ALM FLOW INLET GT AIR FILTER COMPRESSED AIR TROUBLE 274 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FLOW_INLET.ALARMS_MISC.110:_MOVE_B.DEST
14
15 G1\L63CPDL_ALM CPD PRESSURE LOW ALARM 276 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CPR.Cpr.24:_BENG.OUT 15
16 G1\L63CSH_ALM FLOW INLET COMPRESSOR PRESSURE HIGH ALARM 277 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FLOW_INLET.ALARMS_MISC.190:_MOVE_B.DEST 16
G1\L63CSH_SENSR FLOW INLET COMP DIFF PRESS SWITCH TROUBLE 278 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FLOW_INLET.ALARMS_MISC.170:_MOVE_B.DEST
17 17
G1\L63CSHH_ALM INLET FILTER VERY HIGH PRESSURE DROP - TRIP 279 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FLOW_INLET.ALARMS_MISC.130:_MOVE_B.DEST
18 G1\L63EAH_ALM EXHAUST DUCT PRESSURE HIGH 280 PRC 18
19 G1\L63ETF_SENSR EXHAUST DUCT PRESS SWITCH FAILURE 281 PRC 19
G1\L63ETH_ALM EXHAUST DUCT PRESSURE HIGH TRIP 282 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@EXDUCTPS.ExDuctPs.55:_MOVE_B.DEST
20 20
G1\L63FAH_ALM CRUDE OIL FWD INHIBITOR FLOW CHECKING ALM 600 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CRUDE_OIL.ADDITIVE.390:_BENG.OUT
21 G1\L63FG1_ALM HEAT VENT 63FG-1 SENSOR TROUBLE 283 PRC 21
*G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasSplyPress.78:TIMER_SEC5.coil; *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasSplyPress.78:TIMER_SEC5.40:_TIMER.AT_TIME
22 G1\L63FG2_ALM HEAT VENT 63FG-2 SENSOR TROUBLE 284 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasSplyPress.81:TIMER_SEC5.coil; *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasSplyPress.81:TIMER_SEC5.40:_TIMER.AT_TIME
22
G1\L63FGL_ALM GAS FUEL PRESSURE LOW 286 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasSplyPress.250:_MOVE_B.DEST
23 23
G1\L63FL1_ALM LIQUID FUEL OIL SYSTEM HIGH PRESSURE 735 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CRUDE_OIL.ALARMS_MICS.187:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@CRUDE_OIL.ALARMS_MICS.187:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
24 G1\L63FLZ_ALM LIQUID FUEL PRESSURE LOW 502 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_LIQ.LiqSeq.68:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_LIQ.LiqSeq.68:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT 24
25 G1\L63HF1H_ALM HYDRAULIC SUPPLY FILTER HIGH DIFF PRESSURE 290 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HYDR_SUPPLY.ALARMS_MICS.50:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@HYDR_SUPPLY.ALARMS_MICS.50:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
25
G1\L63HQ1L_ALM HYDRAULIC SUPPLY SYSTEM OUTPUT PRESSURE LOW 291 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HYDR_SUPPLY.ALARMS_MICS.30:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@HYDR_SUPPLY.ALARMS_MICS.30:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
26 26
G1\L63JSH_ALM WI COMP INLET FILTER CLOGGED - BY PASS OPEN 603 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.WI_Filter.40:_MOVE_B.DEST
27 G1\L63LF3H_ALM LIQUID FUEL FILTER DIFF PRESS HIGH 504 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_LIQ.LiqSeq.520:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_LIQ.LiqSeq.520:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT 27
28 G1\L63PGFT_ALM GAS FUEL PURGE HIGH PRESS IN INTERVLV 505 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GASLIQ_PURGE.GAS_PRIM.170:_BENG.OUT 28
G1\L63PLLZ_ALM LIQ FUEL PURGE LOW AIR PRESS 506 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GASLIQ_PURGE.LIQ_NO_DLN.240:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@GASLIQ_PURGE.LIQ_NO_DLN.240:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
29 29
G1\L63QA2L_ALM LUBE OIL HEADER LOW PRESSURE 292 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.T88QA.90:_BENG.OUT
30 G1\L63QB1L_ALM GENERATOR LIFT LIFTING OUTPUT LOW PRESSURE ALM 605 PRC 30
*G1.UNIT1.G1@GENERT_LIFT.GenBrgLftGE.440:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENERT_LIFT.GenBrgLftGE.440:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
31 G1\L63QBF1H_ALM GENERATOR LIFT HIGH FILTER DIFF PRESSURE #1 ALARM 606 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENERT_LIFT.GenBrgLftGE.390:_MOVE_B.DEST 31
G1\L63QBF2H_ALM GENERATOR LIFT HIGH FILTER DIFF PRESSURE #2 ALARM 607 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENERT_LIFT.GenBrgLftGE.400:_MOVE_B.DEST
32 32
G1\L63QQ10H_ALM LUBE OIL MIST ELIM FILTER HIGH DIFF PRESSURE 294 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.T88QV_2.200:_MOVE_B.DEST
33 33
Salem, Va. USA
01 01
G1\L63QQ1H_ALM LUBE OIL FILTER HIGH DIFF PRESSURE 295 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.ALARMS_MISC.70:_MOVE_B.DEST
02 G1\L63QQ8H_ALM LUBE OIL TORQUE CONVERT FILTER HIGH DIFF PRESSURE 296 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.ALARMS_MISC.76:_MOVE_B.DEST 02
03 G1\L63QT_ALM LUBE OIL GEN PRESSURE LOW LOW 297 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.ALARMS_MISC.23:_BENG.OUT 03
G1\L63QT_SENSR LUBE OIL HEADER PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT 298 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.ALARMS_MISC.40:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.ALARMS_MISC.40:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
04 04
G1\L63QTX_ALM TURBINE LUBE OIL HEADER PRESS LOW TRIP 299 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@TRIP.Trip.3070:_MOVE_B.DEST
05 G1\L63TF1H_ALM FLOW INLET FILTER DIFF PRESSURE 300 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FLOW_INLET.ALARMS_MISC.70:_MOVE_B.DEST
05
06 G1\L63TK_ALM COOL SEAL AIR EXH BLOWER FAN#1 OR #2 LOW DIFF PRES 301 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@COOL_AIR.ALARMS_MISC.140:_MOVE_B.DEST 06
G1\L63TKY_ALM EXHAUST FRAME PRESS SW TROUBLE 302 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@COOL_AIR.ALARMS_MISC.240:_BENG.OUT
07 07
G1\L63VGH_ALM LOAD COMP INLET FILTER CLOGGED - BY PASS OPEN 507 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Load_Filter.40:_MOVE_B.DEST
08 G1\L63VLH_ALM DLN COMP INLET FILTER CLOGGED - BY PASS OPEN 608 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.DLN_Filter.40:_MOVE_B.DEST
08
09 G1\L63WC1L_ALM COOLING WATER PUMP DISCH PRESS LOW 303 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@COOLWATSUPP.T88WC_Pumps.310:_BENG.OUT 09
G1\L63WN3H_ALM WATER INJECTION FILTER DIFF PRESS HIGH 609 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@WATER_INJECT.ALARMS_MISC.45:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@WATER_INJECT.ALARMS_MISC.45:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
10 10
G1\L64D_ALM BATTERY 125VDC GROUND 304 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CTRLMODE.CtrlMdStat.540:_BENG.OUT
11 G1\L71FA1L_ALM CRUDE OIL FWD ADDITIVE TANK LOW LEVEL ALM 610 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CRUDE_OIL.ADDITIVE.340:_MOVE_B.DEST
11
12 G1\L71FA1LX_ALM CRUDE OIL FWD ADDITIVE TANK LOW LEVEL 30 MIN ALM 611 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CRUDE_OIL.ADDITIVE.370:_MOVE_B.DEST 12
G1\L71FA2L_ALM CRUDE OIL ADDITIVE SKID TANK FAULT 612 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CRUDE_OIL.ADDITIVE.460:_MOVE_B.DEST
13 13
G1\l71ff4h High Leakage Level 666 PRC *Q0.S9.J33.Contact09
14 G1\l71ff5hh Very High Leakage Level 667 PRC *Q0.S12.J33.Contact09
14
15 G1\l71ff6hh Very High Leakage Level 668 PRC *Q0.S18.J33.Contact02 15
16 G1\L71QH_ALM LUBE OIL TANK HIGH LEVEL 317 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.ALARMS_MISC.100:_MOVE_B.DEST 16
G1\L71QL_ALM LUBE OIL TANK LOW LEVEL 318 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.ALARMS_MISC.90:_MOVE_B.DEST
17 17
G1\L71WG1_ALM GENERATOR LIQUID LEVEL DETECTOR 319 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@MISC.Misc_Alarms.440:_MOVE_B.DEST
18 G1\L71WL_ALM COOLING WATER TANK LEVEL LOW 320 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@COOLWATSUPP.ALARM_MISC.17:_MOVE_B.DEST 18
19 G1\L71WS1_ALM SUMP TANK HIGH LEVEL 321 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@SUMP_TANK.ALARM_MISC.40:_MOVE_B.DEST 19
G1\L71WS4_ALM SUMP TANK VERY LOW LEVEL 322 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@SUMP_TANK.ALARM_MISC.60:_MOVE_B.DEST
20 20
G1\L72QE_ALM LUBE OIL EMERGENCY PUMP NOT IN OPERATION 323 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.T88QE.410:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.T88QE.410:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
21 G1\L72QETST_ALM DC PUMP DID NOT START 324 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.T88QE.590:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.T88QE.590:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT 21
22 G1\L72QEZ_ALM LUBE OIL EMERGENCY PUMP IN OPERATION 325 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.T88QE.430:_BENG.OUT 22
G1\L83CBLIMIT CBV FAILED TO CLOSE-LOAD LIMITING 328 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@COOL_AIR.OUT_MODULE.70:_BENG.OUT
23 23
G1\L83HOST_ALM OVERSPEED TEST MODE SELECTED 329 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@OVRSPD.OvrSpdHp.185:_MOVE_B.DEST
24 G1\L83LBSX_ALM 2nd BREAKER SWITCHING RELAY FAILURE 613 PRC 24
*G1.UNIT1.G1@GENSYNC.Serialbkr.202:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENSYNC.Serialbkr.202:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT; *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENSY
25 G1\L83RBO_ALM REMOTE BREAKER OPEN DETECTED 330 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@SPDLD.SpdLdRBO.50:_MOVE_B.DEST 25

G1\L83SGSX_ALM 33KV SWGR SWITCHING RELAY FAILURE 746 PRC
26 26
G1\L83WW_ALM WATER WASH WASHING ONLINE PROHIB INLET TEMP LOW 331 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@WATER_WASH.WASH_ONLINE.150:_BENG.OUT
27 G1\L83WWON_ALM WATER WASH WASHING ONLINE - 24H TIMER PROGR. 332 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@WATER_WASH.WASH_ONLINE.300:_BENG.OUT 27
28 G1\L86ARS_ALM AC TRANSFER FAULT 333 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@MISC.Misc_Alarms.310:_MOVE_B.DEST 28
G1\L86BATEST_AL HEAT VENT AUX COMP TEST ABORTED 703 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Aux_88BA.210:_BENG.OUT
29 29
G1\L86BAX_ALM HEAT VENT LOSS OF AUX. COMP. VENT 727 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Aux_Alarms.260:_BENG.OUT
30 G1\L86BTTEST_AL HEAT VENT TURB COMP TEST ABORTED 614 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Turb_88BT.210:_BENG.OUT 30
31 G1\L86BTX_ALM HEAT VENT LOSS OF TURB. COMP. VENT.- FAST SHUTDOWN 473 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Turb_Alarms.270:_BENG.OUT 31
G1\L86CBA_ALM COOL SEAL AIR COMP BLEED VALVE CLOSE POS PBL 335 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@COOL_AIR.VA2_CompBldV.240:_MOVE_B.DEST
32 32
G1\L86CBT_ALM COOL SEAL AIR COMP BLEED VALVE OPEN POS PBL-TRIP 336 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@COOL_AIR.VA2_CompBldV.310:_MOVE_B.DEST
33 33
Salem, Va. USA
01 01
G1\L86CPR_FLT COMP OPERATING LIMIT CONTROL FAULT 337 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@COMP.CompProt.210:_BENG.OUT
02 G1\L86CRTX_ALM STARTING MOTOR PROTECTIVE LOCKOUT 338 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@START_MEANS.ALARMS_MISC.320:_MOVE_B.DEST 02
03 G1\L86FA_ALM CRUDE OIL ADDITIVE SKID FAULT 616 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CRUDE_OIL.ADDITIVE.500:_MOVE_B.DEST 03
G1\L86FAX_ALM CRUDE OIL FWD ADDITIVE PUMPS FAULT ALARM 617 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CRUDE_OIL.ADDITIVE.260:_MOVE_B.DEST
04 04
G1\L86FPG2HT_A POST-IGNITION P2 HIGH TRIP 339 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasSRV.570:_MOVE_B.DEST
05 G1\L86FPG2IH_AL PRE-IGNITION P2 PRESS HIGH IGN INHIBIT 340 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasSRV.440:_MOVE_B.DEST
05
06 G1\L86FPG2LT_A POST-IGNITION P2 LOW TRIP 341 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasSRV.670:_MOVE_B.DEST 06
G1\L86FS_ALM LIQUID FUEL FALSE START - USE RESET DISPLAY 514 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_LIQ.LiqAccum.60:_MOVE_B.DEST
07 07
G1\L86FT_ALM CRUDE OIL FWD HEAVY FUEL TEMP FLT XFER LOCKOUT ALM 618 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CRUDE_OIL.FILTERING.120:_MOVE_B.DEST
08 G1\L86G2AALM_AL 74/86L-2A OR 74/86L-2B LOCK OUT RELAY TRIP 622 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENPRO.GP21K_G60A.120:_MOVE_B.DEST
08
09 G1\L86GCVT_ALM G1 GCV NOT FOLLOWING REF TRIP 342 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasVlv.90:_BENG.OUT 09
G1\L86GLTA_ALM GAS LEAK TEST OF SRV FAILED 343 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasLeakTest.700:_BENG.OUT
10 10
G1\L86GLTB_ALM GAS LEAK TEST OF GCV/VENT FAILED 344 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasLeakTest.920:_BENG.OUT
11 G1\L86GVA_ALM INLET GUIDE VANE CONTROL TROUBLE 349 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@IGV.IGVRef.470:_MOVE_B.DEST
11
12 G1\L86GVX_ALM HEAT VENT LOSS OF GENERATO COMPARTMENT VENTILATION 704 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Gen_Alarms.120:_BENG.OUT 12
G1\L86JSX_ALM HEAT VENT LOSS OF W. I. COMPARTMENT VENTILATION 626 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.WI_Alarms.230:_BENG.OUT
13 13
G1\L86LAEALM_AL LOCKOUT RELAY 74/86L-AE TRIP 687 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENPRO.GP21K_G60A.170:_MOVE_B.DEST
14 G1\L86LBFALM_AL LOCKOUT RELAY 74/86L-BF TRIP 688 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENPRO.GP21K_G60A.180:_MOVE_B.DEST
14
15 G1\L86MON_ALM 74/86G-1A LOCK OUT RELAY COIL FAULT 728 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENPRO.GP21K_G60A.130:_MOVE_B.DEST 15
16 G1\L86N_ALM ELECTRICAL TROUBLE - NORMAL SHUTDOWN 350 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENPRO.GP21K_BKR.290:_MOVE_B.DEST 16
G1\L86PUR_ALM CRUDE OIL FWD HEAVY FUEL TG TRIP ALARM 629 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CRUDE_OIL.TRIP_PURGE.50:_MOVE_B.DEST
17 17
G1\L86PURC_ALM CRUDE OIL FWD HEAVY FUEL PURGE VLV FAILURE TO OPEN 630 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CRUDE_OIL.ALARMS_MICS.40:_MOVE_B.DEST
18 G1\L86PURT_ALM CRUDE OIL FWD PURGE NOT REQUIRED 631 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CRUDE_OIL.ALARMS_MICS.90:_MOVE_B.DEST 18
19 G1\L86PURZ_ALM PURGE DONE BUT NOT CONFIRMED 632 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CRUDE_OIL.ALARMS_MICS.157:TIMER_MIN.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@CRUDE_OIL.ALARMS_MICS.157:TIMER_MIN.50:_BFILT.OUT
19
G1\L86QB1LO_ALM GENERATOR LIFT PUMP #1 LOGICAL LOCK-OUT ALARM 633 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENERT_LIFT.GenBrgLftGE.360:_MOVE_B.DEST
20 20
G1\L86QB2LO_ALM GENERATOR LIFT PUMP #2 LOGICAL LOCK-OUT ALARM 634 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENERT_LIFT.GenBrgLftGE.370:_MOVE_B.DEST
21 G1\L86QB_ALM GENERATOR LIFT LOSS OF BEARING LIFT PUMPS ALARM 635 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENERT_LIFT.GenBrgLftGE.420:_BENG.OUT 21
22 G1\L86QBLO_ALM GENERATOR LIFT LUBE OIL PUMPS LOCKOUT ALARM 636 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENERT_LIFT.GenBrgLftGE.380:_MOVE_B.DEST 22
G1\L86QE_ALM DC PUMP ELECTRICAL TROUBLE START INHIBITED 351 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.OUT_MODULE.140:_MOVE_B.DEST
23 23
G1\L86QVX_ALM LUBE OIL MIST ELIM FANS LOSS - SD 718 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.T88QV_2.220:_BENG.OUT
24 G1\L86S AUTO SYNCHRONIZING LOCKOUT 352 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENSYNC.Synch.480:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENSYNC.Synch.480:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT 24
25 G1\L86SDA_ALM AC BUS FAULT 741 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@MISC.Misc_Alarms.420:_MOVE_B.DEST 25
G1\L86SDC_ALM DC BUS FAULT 742 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@MISC.Misc_Alarms.426:_MOVE_B.DEST
26 26
G1\L86TCI COMPRESSOR INLET THERMOCOUPLE DISAGREE 353 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@COMP.CompAirTemp.14:_BENG.OUT
27 G1\L86TFB_ALM EXHAUST THERMOCOUPLES OPEN TRIP 354 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@EXTMP.ExTmpMed.200:_MOVE_B.DEST 27
28 G1\L86TGT1_ALM GENERATOR DIFFERENTIAL TRIP CHANNEL 1 355 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENPRO.GP21K_TRIP.50:_MOVE_B.DEST 28
G1\L86TGT2_ALM GENERATOR DIFFERENTIAL TRIP CHANNEL 2 356 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENPRO.GP21K_TRIP.60:_MOVE_B.DEST
29 29
G1\L86TVA_ALM INLET GUIDE VANE POSITION TROUBLE 357 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@IGV.IGVRef.450:_MOVE_B.DEST
30 G1\L86TXT_ALM EXHAUST OVER TEMPERATURE TRIP 358 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@EXTMP.ExTmpMed.190:_MOVE_B.DEST 30
31 G1\L86VGX_ALM HEAT VENT LOSS OF LOAD COMPARTMENT VENTILATION 515 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Load_Alarms.220:_BENG.OUT 31
G1\L86VLTEST_AL HEAT VENT DLN COMP TEST ABORTED 641 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.DLN_88VL.130:_BENG.OUT
32 32
G1\L86VLX_ALM HEAT VENT LOSS OF DLN COMPARTMENT VENTILATION 474 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.DLN_Alarms.250:_BENG.OUT
33 33
Salem, Va. USA
01 01
G1\L86WN1_ALM WATER INJECTION SUCTION PRESSURE HIGH LOCKOUT 642 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@WATER_INJECT.ALARMS_MISC.180:_MOVE_B.DEST
02 G1\L86WN2_ALM WATER INJECTION DISCHARGE PRESSURE LOW LOCKOUT 643 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@WATER_INJECT.ALARMS_MISC.220:_MOVE_B.DEST 02
03 G1\L86WN3_ALM WATER INJECTION FLOW HIGH LOCKOUT 644 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@WATER_INJECT.ALARMS_MISC.250:_MOVE_B.DEST 03
G1\L86WN7_ALM WATER INJECTION LOW FLOW - TRIP WATER 645 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@WATER_INJECT.ALARMS_MISC.320:_MOVE_B.DEST
04 04
G1\L86WW_ALM OFF LINE COMP WW - USE RESET DISPLAY 361 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@WATER_WASH.WWAccum.50:_MOVE_B.DEST
05 G1\l88cr 88CR Feeder Cell Ready to Start 671 PRC
05
06 G1\L90TKL_ALM COOL SEAL AIR EXH BLOWERS LOAD DECREASE TROUBLE 362 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@COOL_AIR.ALARMS_MISC.130:_MOVE_B.DEST 06
G1\L94BAL_ALM HEAT VENT AUX COMPARTMENT SB FAN TEST FAILED 705 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Aux_88BA.830:_BENG.OUT
07 07
G1\L94BTL_ALM HEAT VENT TURBINE COMPARTMENT SB FAN TEST FAILED 646 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Turb_88BT.830:_BENG.OUT
08 G1\L94DP1_ALM G60A CRITICAL FAILURE 647 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENPRO.GP21K_G60A.40:_MOVE_B.DEST
08
09 G1\L94DP2_ALM G60B CRITICAL FAILURE 648 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENPRO.GP21K_G60B.40:_MOVE_B.DEST 09
G1\L94DP3_ALM T60A CRITICAL FAILURE 649 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENPRO.GP21K_T60A.40:_MOVE_B.DEST
10 10
G1\L94DP4_ALM T60B CRITICAL FAILURE 650 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENPRO.GP21K_T60B.40:_MOVE_B.DEST
11 G1\L94F1B_ALM FIRE PROTECTION - CO2 RELEASED ZONE 1 363 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FIRE_PROT.Aux_GT_Compt.40:_MOVE_B.DEST
11
12 G1\L94F2B_ALM FIRE PROTECTION - CO2 RELEASED ZONE 2 364 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FIRE_PROT.Load_Compt.40:_MOVE_B.DEST 12
G1\L94F3B_ALM FIRE PROTECTION - CO2 RELEASED ZONE 3 713 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FIRE_PROT.Gen_Compt.40:_MOVE_B.DEST
13 13
G1\L94F4B_ALM FIRE PROTECTION - CO2 RELEASED ZONE 4 714 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FIRE_PROT.Gas_Compt.40:_MOVE_B.DEST
14 G1\L94GEN GENERATOR VENTILLATION TROUBLE SHUTDOWN 651 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENTEMP.GenTemp9A5.70:_BENG.OUT
14
15 G1\L94PGT_ALM GAS FUEL PURGE PROBLEM-TRIP 516 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GASLIQ_PURGE.GAS_PRIM.190:_BENG.OUT 15
16 G1\L94QB_ALM BEARING LIFT OIL PUMPS TROUBLE - SD 747 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENERT_LIFT.GenBrgLftGE.580:_MOVE_B.DEST 16
G1\L94TC_ALM STARTING MEANS TRQ CONVERTER DRAIN VALVE TROUBLE 366 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@START_MEANS.ALARMS_MISC.400:_MOVE_B.DEST
17 17
G1\L94VLL_ALM HEAT VENT DLN COMPARTMENT SB FAN TEST FAILED 652 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.DLN_88VL.420:_BENG.OUT
18 G1\L94X_S_ALM SHUTDOWN PAUSED - COMP BLD VLV POS FAIL 367 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@COOL_AIR.ALARMS_MISC.20:_BENG.OUT 18
19 G1\L94XZ_ALM FIRED SHUTDOWN ABNORMAL SEQUENCE - TRIP 368 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@START_STOP.SHUTDOWN.730:_BENG.OUT 19
G1\L95BA_ALM HEAT VENT AUX COMPT AIR INLET LOW FLOW 729 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Aux_Alarms.220:_BENG.OUT
20 20
G1\L95BAL_ALM HEAT VENT AUX COMPT AIR INLET LOW FLOW CONFIRMED 730 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Aux_Alarms.240:_BENG.OUT
21 G1\L95BT_ALM HEAT VENT TURB COMPT AIR INLET LOW FLOW 653 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Turb_Alarms.234:_BENG.OUT 21
22 G1\L95BTL_ALM HEAT VENT TURB COMPT AIR INLET LOW FLOW CONFIRMED 654 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Turb_Alarms.238:_BENG.OUT 22
G1\L95VL_ALM HEAT VENT DLN COMPT AIR INLET LOW FLOW 655 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.DLN_Alarms.214:_BENG.OUT
23 23
G1\L95VLL_ALM HEAT VENT DLN COMPT AIR INLET LOW FLOW CONFIRMED 656 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.DLN_Alarms.218:_BENG.OUT
24 G1\L96FG1_ALM HEAT VENT 96FG-1 SENSOR TROUBLE 369 PRC 24
*G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasSplyPress.75:TIMER_SEC5.coil; *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasSplyPress.75:TIMER_SEC5.40:_TIMER.AT_TIME
25 G1\L96FGDIFF_AL GAS FUEL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS DIFFERENCE FAILURE 370 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasLeakTest.880:_BENG.OUT 25
G1\L96FGH_ALM FUEL GAS PRESSURE HIGH 371 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasSplyPress.270:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasSplyPress.270:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
26 26
G1\L96FGL_ALM GAS FUEL SUPPLY PRESSURE LOW 372 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasSplyPress.140:_BENG.OUT
27 G1\L96QV1_ALM LUBE OIL MIST ELIM HIGH PRESSURE 719 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.T88QV_2.230:_COMPARE_F.OUT 27
28 G1\L96VSTH_ALM VIBRATION BN GT. AXIAL SHAFT DISPLACEMENT ALERT 657 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@VIB_BN.R35K_VibProx.40:_MOVE_B.DEST 28
G1\L96VSTHH_ALM VIBRATION BN GT. AXIAL SHAFT DISPLACEMENT DANGER 658 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@VIB_BN.R35K_VibProx.50:_MOVE_B.DEST
29 29
G1\LAFPAP_SENSR BAROMETRIC PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS DISAGREE 373 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@AIRFLOW.AmbientPress.10:XPTS00.LDIFLMT
30 G1\LCPD_SENSR COMPRESSOR DISCH XDUCER DIFF FAULT HIGH 374 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CPR.Cpr.20:XPTS00.LDIFLMT 30
31 G1\LCPRERR_ALM COMP OP LIMIT PROTECTION MAX CTRL ERROR 375 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@COMP.CompProt.190:_MOVE_B.DEST 31
G1\LDB_ABRT_ALM UNIT ABORTING DEAD BUS MODE 659 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENSYNC.Deadbus.520:_BENG.OUT
32 32
G1\LDB_FAIL_ALM UNIT NOT READY FOR DEAD BUS MODE 660 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENSYNC.Deadbus.150:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENSYNC.Deadbus.150:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
33 33
Salem, Va. USA
01 01
G1\LDBMD_OF_ALM UNIT DEAD BUS BRKR CLOSURE SUCCESSFUL 661 PRC
02 G1\LDBMD_ON_ALM UNIT READY FOR DEAD BUS MODE 662 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENSYNC.Deadbus.380:_BENG.OUT 02
03 G1\LDWATT_ALM MEGAWATT TRANSDUCER SIGNAL TROUBLE 376 PRC 03
*G1.UNIT1.G1@GENMWATT.GenMwattCtrl.70:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENMWATT.GenMwattCtrl.70:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
G1\LDWCAL_ALM DWATT NONZERO WITH BREAKER OPEN 377 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENMWATT.GenMwattCtrl.117:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENMWATT.GenMwattCtrl.117:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
04 04
G1\LFAGNBA_A GCV REG AT NULL COMP AUTHORITY LIMIT 378 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasNullComp.50:_BENG.OUT
05 G1\LFALNBA_A LCV REG AT NULL COMP AUTHORITY LIMIT 517 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_LIQ.LiqNullComp.30:_BENG.OUT
05
06 G1\LFPG2_SENSR INTERVALVE PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS DISAGREE 379 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasSRV.10:XPTS00.LDIFLMT 06
G1\LFQGUV_ALM GAS FUEL FLOW OUT OF RANGE 380 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS_AUX.INPUTSIGNALS.205:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS_AUX.INPUTSIGNALS.205:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OU
07 07
G1\LFQLDIFF_ALM FLOW DIVIDER FUEL HIGH FLOW DIFFERENCE 518 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_LIQ.LiqDvd.150:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_LIQ.LiqDvd.150:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
08 G1\LFSGRH_ALM SRV OPEN AT 90 % - RISK OF TRIP ON HIGH EXH TEMP 381 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasSRV.840:_MOVE_B.DEST
08
09 G1\LFSGRHH_ALM SRV VLV OPEN AT 95 % - XFER TO LIQUID FUEL 519 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasSRV.890:_MOVE_B.DEST 09
G1\LFSRCPR_ALM COMP LIMIT FSR BACKUP CONTROL ACTIVE 382 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@COMP.CompProt.180:_MOVE_B.DEST
10 10
G1\LFTG_ALM GAS FUEL THERMOCOUPLE SIGNAL TROUBLE 383 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS_AUX.INPUTSIGNALS.26:_MOVE_B.DEST
11 G1\LRB_ALM GAS TURBINE LOAD RUNBACK 663 *G1.UNIT1.G1@HRSG_HSTP.HRSGHiTmpPro.40:_BENG.OUT
11
12 G1\LTBRGH_ALM LUBE OIL TG TEMP FEED/RETURN DIFF HIGH 387 PRC 12
*G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.BEARINGDRAIN.80:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.BEARINGDRAIN.80:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
G1\LTBRGHH_ALM LUBE OIL TG TEMP FEED/RETURN DIFF HIGH HIGH 388 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.BEARINGDRAIN.150:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.BEARINGDRAIN.150:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
13 13
G1\LTGBRGH_ALM LUBE OIL GEN TEMP FEED/RETURN DIFF HIGH 389 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.BEARINGDRAIN.210:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.BEARINGDRAIN.210:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
14 G1\LTGBRGHH_ALM LUBE OIL GEN TEMP FEED/RETURN DIFF HIGH HIGH 390 PRC
14
*G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.BEARINGDRAIN.260:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.BEARINGDRAIN.260:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
15 G1\LTNHLOSS_ALM LOSS OF CTRL SPEED SIGNAL - START EMERG. LO PUMP 391 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.T88QE.70:_BENG.OUT 15
16 G1\LTTH1_ALM LUBE OIL HEADER SENSOR#1 FAULT 392 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.ALARMS_MISC.210:_MOVE_B.DEST 16
G1\LTTH2_ALM LUBE OIL HEADER SENSOR#2 FAULT 393 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.ALARMS_MISC.230:_MOVE_B.DEST
17 17
G1\LTTH3_ALM LUBE OIL HEADER SENSOR#3 FAULT 394 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.ALARMS_MISC.250:_MOVE_B.DEST
18 G1\LWLX4MIN INJECTION TO FUEL RATIO LOW: 4 MIN AVG 664 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@WLNOX.Epa_Monitor.30:EPA_MON.lwlx4mn; *G1.UNIT1.G1@WLNOX.Epa_Monitor.30:EPA_MON.710:_BENG.OUT 18
19 G1\LWLXHR INJECTION TO FUEL RATIO LOW:HOURLY AVG 665 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@WLNOX.Epa_Monitor.30:EPA_MON.lwlxhr; *G1.UNIT1.G1@WLNOX.Epa_Monitor.30:EPA_MON.760:_BENG.OUT 19
G1\R5E_ALM EMERGENCY REMOTE MANUAL TRIP - MKVI PANEL 395 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@TRIP.Trip.3440:_BENG.OUT
20 20
G1\XUCVXR0S02_A <R> SLOT 2 UCVX DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 396 PRC *Q0.S2.CP.L3DIAG_UCVXR
21 G1\XUCVXS0S02_A <S> SLOT 2 UCVX DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 397 PRC *Q0.S2.CP.L3DIAG_UCVXS 21
22 G1\XUCVXT0S02_A <T> SLOT 2 UCVX DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 398 PRC *Q0.S2.CP.L3DIAG_UCVXT 22
G1\XVAICR0S04_A <R> SLOT 4 VAIC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 399 PRC *Q0.S4.CP.L3DIAG_VAICR
23 23
G1\XVAICR0S06_A <R> SLOT 6 VAIC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 400 PRC *Q0.S6.CP.L3DIAG_VAICR
24 G1\XVAICR0S08_A <R> SLOT 8 VAIC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 401 PRC *Q0.S8.CP.L3DIAG_VAICR 24
25 G1\XVAICR0S15_A <R> SLOT 15 VAIC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 402 PRC *Q0.S15.CP.L3DIAG_VAICR 25
G1\XVAICS0S04_A <S> SLOT 4 VAIC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 403 PRC *Q0.S4.CP.L3DIAG_VAICS
26 26
G1\XVAICS0S06_A <S> SLOT 6 VAIC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 404 PRC *Q0.S6.CP.L3DIAG_VAICS
27 G1\XVAICS0S08_A <S> SLOT 8 VAIC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 520 PRC *Q0.S8.CP.L3DIAG_VAICS 27
28 G1\XVAICS0S15_A <S> SLOT 15 VAIC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 405 PRC *Q0.S15.CP.L3DIAG_VAICS 28
G1\XVAICT0S04_A <T> SLOT 4 VAIC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 406 PRC *Q0.S4.CP.L3DIAG_VAICT
29 29
G1\XVAICT0S06_A <T> SLOT 6 VAIC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 407 PRC *Q0.S6.CP.L3DIAG_VAICT
30 G1\XVAICT0S08_A <T> SLOT 8 VAIC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 521 PRC *Q0.S8.CP.L3DIAG_VAICT 30
31 G1\XVAICT0S15_A <T> SLOT 15 VAIC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 408 PRC *Q0.S15.CP.L3DIAG_VAICT 31
G1\XVCMIR0S01_A <R> SLOT 1 VCMI DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 409 PRC *R0.S1.CP.L3DIAG_VCMIR
32 32
G1\XVCMIS0S01_A <S> SLOT 1 VCMI DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 410 PRC *S0.S1.CP.L3DIAG_VCMIR
33 33
Salem, Va. USA
01 01
G1\XVCMIT0S01_A <T> SLOT 1 VCMI DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 411 PRC *T0.S1.CP.L3DIAG_VCMIR
02 G1\XVCRCR0S09_A <R> SLOT 9 VCRC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 412 PRC *Q0.S9.CP.L3DIAG_VCRCR 02
G1\XVCRCR0S13_A <R> SLOT 13 VCRC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 414 PRC *Q0.S13.CP.L3DIAG_VCRCR
04 04
G1\XVCRCR0S14_A <R> SLOT 14 VCRC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 415 PRC *Q0.S14.CP.L3DIAG_VCRCR
05 G1\XVCRCR0S17_A <R> SLOT 17 VCRC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 416 PRC *Q0.S17.CP.L3DIAG_VCRCR
05
G1\XVCRCR0S19_A <R> SLOT 19 VCRC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 522 PRC *S0.S19.CP.L3DIAG_VCRCR
07 07
G1\XVCRCS0S09_A <S> SLOT 9 VCRC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 418 PRC *Q0.S9.CP.L3DIAG_VCRCS
08 G1\XVCRCS0S12_A <S> SLOT 12 VCRC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 419 PRC *Q0.S12.CP.L3DIAG_VCRCS
08
09 G1\XVCRCS0S13_A <S> SLOT 13 VCRC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 420 PRC *Q0.S13.CP.L3DIAG_VCRCS 09
10 10
11 G1\XVCRCS0S18_A <S> SLOT 18 VCRC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 423 PRC *Q0.S18.CP.L3DIAG_VCRCS
11
12 G1\XVCRCT0S09_A <T> SLOT 9 VCRC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 424 PRC *Q0.S9.CP.L3DIAG_VCRCT 12
G1\XVCRCT0S12_A <T> SLOT 12 VCRC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 425 PRC *Q0.S12.CP.L3DIAG_VCRCT
13 13
G1\XVCRCT0S13_A <T> SLOT 13 VCRC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 426 PRC *Q0.S13.CP.L3DIAG_VCRCT
14 G1\XVCRCT0S14_A <T> SLOT 14 VCRC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 427 PRC *Q0.S14.CP.L3DIAG_VCRCT
14
G1\XVPROR8S01_A <X> VPRO DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 430 PRC *Q8.S1.CP.L3DIAG_VPROR
17 17
G1\XVPROS8S02_A <Y> VPRO DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 431 PRC *Q8.S1.CP.L3DIAG_VPROS
18 G1\XVPROT8S03_A <Z> VPRO DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 432 PRC *Q8.S1.CP.L3DIAG_VPROT 18
19 G1\XVRTDR0S20_A <R> SLOT 20 VRTD DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 433 PRC *R0.S20.CP.L3DIAG_VRTDR 19
G1\XVRTDS0S20_A <S> SLOT 20 VRTD DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 434 PRC *S0.S20.CP.L3DIAG_VRTDR
20 20
G1\XVRTDT0S20_A <T> SLOT 20 VRTD DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 435 PRC *T0.S20.CP.L3DIAG_VRTDR
21 G1\XVSVOR0S05_A <R> SLOT 5 VSVO DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 436 PRC *Q0.S5.CP.L3DIAG_VSVOR 21
22 G1\XVSVOR0S07_A <R> SLOT 7 VSVO DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 437 PRC *Q0.S7.CP.L3DIAG_VSVOR 22
G1\XVSVOS0S05_A <S> SLOT 5 VSVO DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 438 PRC *Q0.S5.CP.L3DIAG_VSVOS
23 23
G1\XVSVOS0S07_A <S> SLOT 7 VSVO DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 439 PRC *Q0.S7.CP.L3DIAG_VSVOS
24 G1\XVSVOT0S05_A <T> SLOT 5 VSVO DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 440 PRC *Q0.S5.CP.L3DIAG_VSVOT 24
25 G1\XVSVOT0S07_A <T> SLOT 7 VSVO DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 441 PRC *Q0.S7.CP.L3DIAG_VSVOT 25
G1\XVTCCR0S19_A <R> SLOT 19 VTCC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 442 PRC *R0.S19.CP.L3DIAG_VTCCR
26 26
G1\XVTCCR0S21_A <R> SLOT 21 VTCC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 443 PRC *R0.S21.CP.L3DIAG_VTCCR
27 G1\XVTCCS0S21_A <S> SLOT 21 VTCC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 444 PRC *S0.S21.CP.L3DIAG_VTCCR 27
28 G1\XVTCCT0S21_A <T> SLOT 21 VTCC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 445 PRC *T0.S21.CP.L3DIAG_VTCCR 28
G1\XVTURR0S10_A <R> SLOT 10 VTUR DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 446 PRC *Q0.S10.CP.L3DIAG_VTURR
29 29
G1\XVTURS0S10_A <S> SLOT 10 VTUR DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 447 PRC *Q0.S10.CP.L3DIAG_VTURS
30 G1\XVTURT0S10_A <T> SLOT 10 VTUR DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 448 PRC *Q0.S10.CP.L3DIAG_VTURT 30
31 G1\XVVIBR0S16_A <R> SLOT 16 VVIB DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 449 PRC *Q0.S16.CP.L3DIAG_VVIBR 31
G1\XVVIBS0S16_A <S> SLOT 16 VVIB DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 450 PRC *Q0.S16.CP.L3DIAG_VVIBS
32 32
G1\XVVIBT0S16_A <T> SLOT 16 VVIB DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 451 PRC *Q0.S16.CP.L3DIAG_VVIBT
33 33
Salem, Va. USA
Modified 20-Dec-06 GenDrive #890123 MS9171-STD Final 0014

GEFL3688B
GE Power Generation
GE Generators - An Overview
James J. Gibney, III

GE industrial & Power Systems
Schenectady, NY
GER-3688B
GE GENERATORS - AN OVERVIEW
J. J. Gibney, III
GE Industrial & Power Systems
Schenectady, NY
INTRODUCTION NUMBER OF UNITS IN SERVICE -

The history of GE’s design, manufacture and BY COOLING TYPE
development of electric generators has been a
long and varied one. Since the early 1900s more Air Cooled
than 10,000 GE generators have been shipped Liquid Hydrogen Open
and placed in service at utility companies and Cooled Cooled Ventilated TEWAC
___ ~Total
industrial plants, and as ship service units. The Steam
rurbine-Driven 520 3,006 2 1,164 4,712
designs have evolved from slow-speed vertical- Gas
shaft units to high-speed horizontal shaft air- Turbine-Driven 1 214 1,340 151 1,706
cooled units, through indirect hydrogencooled Totals 521 3,220 1,342 1,335 6,416
units to direct water-cooled units.
During the 1950s through the mid-1970s much
emphasis was placed on developing units to sup Figure 1. GE generator experience
port the rapid growth in unit ratings, which
increased from 100 MW to more than 1100 MW. paper will give an overview of each of these basic
It was during this time frame that such innovative design classifications.
design features as direct water-cooled armature
windings, gap-pickup rotor winding cooling,
Micapal II TM stator insulation, Class F rotor and DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
stator insulation, advanced TetralocTM stator end- The design of synchronous generators is an
winding support systems, and the side ripple- optimization process. A generator design engi-
spring armature bar slot support structure were neer’s challenge is to develop a final design that,
developed. as best as is practical, optimizes the overall size,
In the early 1960s packaged gas-turbinedriven efficiency, performance capabilities and electrical
generators were introduced. These applications parameters, while maintaining mechanical, ther-
were characterized by the ambient-temperature- mal and magnetic limits. In addition, the designer
following nature of the gas turbine output and the must be aware of the need to minimize the overall
ability of the gas turbine to provide peaking capa- cost impact of the design.
bility for short periods. Generator designs were The development of modern analytical calcu-
developed which were tailored to gas turbine lation methods, including finiteelement analysis,
applications. As new gas turbines were intro- supplemented with the use of improved materi-
duced, or as older designs were uprated, genera- als, building upon component testing, has aided
tor designs were introduced to match the new gas the generator designer in the pursuit of an opti-
turbine ratings. mal design.
Over the course of the past decade, the empha-
sis in new electric power generation installations AIR-COOLED GENERATORS
has swung away from large units delivering major Air-cooled generators are produced in two
blocks of power to smaller units operated not only basic configurations: open ventilated (OV) and
by utilities, but by cogenerators or other smaller totallyenclosed water-to-air-cooled (TEWAC) . In
independent power production companies. In the OV design, outside air is drawn directly from
response to this change, GE is placing a major outside the unit through filters, passes through
emphasis on the design and development of gen- the generator and is discharged outside the gener-
erators suited to these applications. ator. In the TEWAC design, air is circulated within
Excluding marine service applications, GE cur- the generator passing through frame-mounted
rently has more than 6400 generators in service air-to-water heat exchangers.
(Figure 1) . These generators can be placed in three The recent emphasis in the marketplace on
major design classifications based on the cooling steam and gas turbinegenerators in the 20- to lOO-
medium used: air, hydrogen and liquid cooled. This MVA size has provided GE with the impetus to
GER-3688B
restructure its aircooled machines. A consequence account is the use of steam and water injection for
of the historical development of the turbinegener- NO, control. The output of the gas turbine can
ator market was that two lines of generators increase by 5% or more above its dry IS0 rating,
evolved, one for steam turbine applications and the depending on the level of steam or water injection
other for gas turbine applications, with little stan- required to meet the emission requirements. An
dardization between the designs. As GE embarked approach that results in the generator having suf-
on this design restructuring, it took the opportunity ficient capacity to match the gas turbine at the
to look at other issues which GE judged were criti- required NO, requirements has been factored
cal to its ability to maintain leadership in the design into the generator rating.
and manufacture of this size generator. Among
these issues were performance parameters, avail-
ability of features, cycle time and cost effectiveness. STANDARDS
All new designs will meet the requirements of
the applicable ANSI and IEC standards, as did the
MARKET NEEDS older designs.
The basic design of a generator, while influ-
enced primarily by material and electromagnetic
properties, is also impacted by market require- RELIABILITY
ments. Hence, customer discussions as well as Particular attention has been paid to known
recent market trends are used in the development problem areas based on inservice generator experi-
of a final generator design. Some of these include: ence. The new designs strive for a high level of relia-
winding temperature rise, industry standards, gen- bility and availability through attention to detail
erator ratings, etc. design and to the problems that have caused down-
time on older designs. In addition, the reliability of
the product will improve through design simplifica-
TEMPERATURE RISES tion and standardization, discussed below.
In the early 1970s GE introduced insulation sys-
tems capable of operating at class F temperatures
(155 C, 311 F) for the life of the generator. This PRODUCT
enabled a significant uprating of generator designs STANDARDIZATION
(about 10%) with a minimal increase in cost. To Standardization of the product line has signifi-
capitalize on this technical capability, GE designed cant benefits both to the user and to the manufac-
generators with Class F insulation and Class F rises.
turer. From the user’s viewpoint, the standardiza-
Many such generators built by GE are in service
tion of the product line translates into a simpler
and operating successfully at Class F temperatures.
machine with fewer unique parts, easier spare
However, the trend in recent specifications has
parts access and the reliability benefit of a larger
been toward Class F insulation systems operating at
fleet of identical machines, with the rapid identifi-
Class B temperatures. In order to be responsive to
cation of any performance problems that this
these requirements, the new designs will operate at
brings. The benefits to the manufacturer are that,
Class B temperatures according to ANSI and IEC
with fewer unique parts to track and check, fewer
standards.
different assemblies to build and fewer drawings
to keep up to date, the job of building a highqual-
GENERATOR RATINGS ity machine becomes simpler.
In a rapidly developing technology, such as that Standardization is being implemented at three
of the combustion turbine, it is inevitable that the levels. At the highest level, the number of differ-
output of a given gas turbine frame size will be ent designs can be reduced by careful selection of
increased from time to time. This has required generator ratings and the use of common designs
redesign of the generator to keep pace with the for gas and steam turbines. At the time the
rise in turbine output. The ratings of the genera- redesign project was begun, there were 17 unique
tors designed to match the gas turbine frame sizes air-cooled generator designs between 12 MVA and
have been set so that the generator will meet or 100 MVA. With careful choice this has been
exceed the gas turbine capability over the full reduced to six basic electromagnetic designs.
operating temperature range, taking into account The second level of standardization is illustrat-
the expected turbine upratings duriiig the life- ed in Figure 2. This shows the high level of stan-
time of the design. dardization achieved in covering the basic config-
Another important consideratioil that affects urations of the generator for the Frame 6 gas
the generator rating which must be taken into turbine (designated 6A3), 50 Hz or 60 Hz, open
2
GER-3688B
Design Option
6A3
5oHz
6OHz 6OHZ
Generator Component TEWAC ov TEWAC ov
BSBSBSBS
Frame.. ............................................... . .. . ,
Core.. ............................................... . . .. . . . .
Base .................................................
................................................. .
. .
. .
. .
. l .
. l
Slator Bar 50 Hz.. ............................... . .

Stator Bar 60 Hz ............................... l . t f
Brushless Exe .................................... * .

Static Ext.. ........................................ * 1 .
ov Roof.. .......................................... t * l
TRNAC Roof.. ......................................
Rotor Forging.. .................................. - ... . . l
Rotor Copper ................................... l . l .....

Rotor Edg. 60 Hz ............................. . l ..
Rotor Wdg. 60 Hz.. ............................. , .
Rotor Slot Width ............................... . . . ....
Rotor Slot Depth 50 Hz .................... t t l .
Rotor Slot Depth 60 Hz .................... l * t .
B - Brushless Excitation
* .%me Canp~nent Applied to Deoign Option
S - Static Excitation
GT164SOA
Figure 2. Generator standardization
ventilated (OV) or totally enclosed (TEWAC) , and addition, while the gas turbines are the primary
brushless or static excitation. For example, the sta- application of the new air-cooled generators, they
tor frame, core and base, and the rotor forging can and have been applied with steam turbine
and rotor copper cross section are identical for drives as well (Figure 3).
any combination of these features. The only dif- The most detailed level of standardization is
ference between the 50-Hz stator and the 60-Hz with hardware such as fasteners and small compo
stator is the different stator bar. Everything else is nents. A carefully constructed list of preferred
the same. This component standardization can be hardware has been developed and the number of
extended to other ratings when the same compo different nuts, bolts and similar items has been
nent is used for two different machines. For exam- drastically reduced.
ple, the generator base is the same for the Frame The impact of standardization is illustrated in
5 generator as it is for the Frame 6 generator. In Figure 4, which shows the reduction in the num-
ber of parts and drawings required to build a sin-
I- ,
OLD DESIGN NEW DESIGN
REL. # OF
PARTS 1.0 0.6
REL. # OF
DRAWINGS 1.0 0.7
GT19263 GT1649’
Figure 3. Air-cooled steam turbine generator Figure 4. Impact of standardization
3
GER-3688B
gle new design as compared to its predecessor. configuration, a large range of design alternates
When these gains are compounded by the was considered, and the final choice of design
reduced number of unique designs, there is a pro reflects the optimization of the types of considera-
found effect on the productivity and quality of the tion described herein.
manufacturing operation.
One of the potential adverse effects of stan-
dardization can be a loss of flexibility to meet an
STATOR DESIGN
individual customer’s needs. This has been The stator frame is divided onto an inner and an
addressed first by building into the design those outer section, both of which mount on a single
features that are frequently specified. An example base fabrication. The inrrer frame is a very simple
is the use of stainless steel oil feed piping. This fea- structure designed to support the stator core and
ture is not requested by every customer, but it is winding while providing some guidance to the air
asked for often enough such that it is easier to flow in the machine. The stator core, made from
build every unit with the stainless steel piping. The grainoriented silicon steel for low loss and high
second way in which individual needs have been permeability, is mounted rigidly in the inrrer frame.
met is through “standard options.” These are pre- Isolation of the core vibration from the remainder
engineered options commonly requested for of the structure is accomplished through the use of
which drawings have been prepared ahead of flexible pads between the feet on the inner frame
time. and the base structure. The combined core and
These options can be readily incorporated in inner frame are designed to have a four-nodal natu-
the machine, within normal material procure- ral frequency well removed from 100 Hz or 120 Hz,
ment and manufacturing cycles. An additional and tests on the assembled inner frame confirmed
group of options is available that have not been the predicted natural frequencies.
pre-engineered due to the low frequency of The outer frame is a simple fabricated enclo-
request. These are available but with longer lead sure, which supports either the air inlets and
times since the necessary engineering work must silencers if the unit is open ventilated (Figure 5)
be accommodated. or the roof and cooler enclosure if the unit is
totally enclosed, water-to-air-cooled. The outer
frame further acts as an air guide to complete the
DESIGN AND ventilation paths and as a soundproof enclosure
CONSTRUCTION FEATURES to keep noise levels low. Since the rotor is pedestal
The design teams involved were organized with mounted, the end shields are very simple struc-
representation from all the major business func- tures. As with the inner frame, the outer frame
tions, and members of the design teams visited was designed to be free of resonances below 80
some representative customers to better under- Hz, and again, tests of the completed structure
stand user needs. In this way, the technical confirmed the design analysis.
requirements of the designs were influenced by The entire generator is mounted on a single
the needs of all the functions involved in the fabricated base, which supports the pedestals, the
design, manufacture, marketing and maintenance inrrer and outer frames, and the brush rigging or
of the generator. Features were incorporated into the exciter. The base contains piping for oil sup
the design specifically to aid producibility. Visits to plies, conduit for wiring and a number of compo
and discussions with potential vendors influenced nents associated with the main leads, such as light-
the design of components both for improved per- ning arresters and surge capacitors. The structural
formance and to suit vendors’ capabilities. Careful vibration of the base was also confirmed by test to
cost comparisons were made of alternative design be well away from any frequency of concern.
approaches to ensure that the final configuration The stator winding is a conventional lapwound
was cost effective. design. The insulating materials are those used
since the early 1930s thus maintaining the proven
reliability record. The materials are all designed
ELECTROMAGNETIC DESIGN and tested to provide reliable performance at
To achieve the reliability objectives of the pro Class F temperatures for the life of the machine.
ject, no new electromagnetic design limits have The stator bar copper is stranded and insulated
been used. The designs are based on proven tech- with Class F materials and is Roebelled for mini-
nology used in generators already in service. mum losses. The ground wall insulation is Micapal
Where appropriate, the technology used in larger HT, a proven Class F system (Reference 1). This is
units has been drawn upon to improve the a resin-rich tape system, with the volatiles removed
designs of these machines. In reaching the final under vacuum, which is then cured under pres-
4
GER-3688B
JGEWERMRI
,YR-:
sIL:zlc4
I
1; .:* I
I I GENERATOR
AIR
lNLET
GENERAlOR CGMPIRTYEN,
GT18560
Figure 5. Generator packaging
FILLER BETWEEN / INSULATED TOUGH PITCH

CROSSOVERS COPPER WIRE WITH
ROEBEL TRANSPOSITION
VERTICAL EPOXY IMPREGNATED MICA

SEPARATOR A TAPE GROUND WALL
\RTD OR
FILLER
GLASS TAPE -E
ARMOR I SIDE RIPPLE
SPRING
TOP RIPPLE j
SPRING
f
FILLER/ J \ WEDGE
STATOR SLOT ASSEMBLY
GT18494A-1
Figure 6. Stator slot section
GER-3688B
! - STATOR
FLANGE
i r BINDING
/ ’ BAND
I ;I SUPPORT
STAT01
KEYBA.. \
TION
STATOR
PUNCHINGS--,
\
VENTILATION - . .. ..
DUCT
BETWEEN BAR
FILLER
_----
\ ‘- GLASS
.------
WFDCXS -‘-\ \
\
?
\ M&END
ROVING
TIES
\
BLOCK ’ BINDING
(FINGER) RAND
GTlW!SA
Figure 7. Stator end winding section
sure to a solid, void-free structure. The exterior of rugged mechanical joint.

the bar is taped with a conducting armor in the The complete end winding structure has been
slot section, and a semi-conducting grading sys- vibration tested to ensure freedom from critical
tem is applied to the end arms. In this way the bar resonances, and vibration levels measured during
is fully protected from the effects of high electri- running tests were found to be low.
cal voltage gradients.
The bars are secured in the slots (Figure 6) ROTOR DESIGN
with fillers and top-ripple springs to restrain the
The rotor (Figure 8) is a simple single-piece
bars radially, and with side-ripple springs to
forging, pedestal mounted, with tilting-pad bear-
increase friction between the bar and the slot wall.
The side-ripple springs are also conducting to ings for smooth operation. On smaller units, the
ensure proper grounding of the bar surface. rotor is sufficiently short that the second critical
The end winding support system is the proven speed is above running speed, thus simplifying
approach used on conventionally-cooled stators of balance. The retaining ring is nonmagnetic 18 Cr
all sizes built by GE. This system utilizes resin- 18 Mn stainless steel for low losses and good stress-
impregnated glass roving ties (Figure 7). corrosion resistance. The rings are shrunk onto
One design improvement made in response to the rotor body, thus eliminating any risk of top
problems experienced on some designs manufac- turn breakage. The retaining ring is secured to
tured in the late 1970s is in the manner in which the rotor body with a snap ring, a design which
the series connection between top and bottom minimizes the stresses in the tip of the retaining
bars is made. Until recently, this was accomplished ring.
by brazing individual strands together and then Radial-flow fans are mounted on the centering
solidifying the package with an epoxy. The ring at each end of the rotor. The fan is a high-
improved system is to braze all the strands togeth- efficiency design, and when tested prior to use in
er in a solid block and then to braze top and bot- the generator proved to have satisfactory margins
tom bars together with solid copper plates. This compared to the design requirements. The fans
provides a solid electrical connection and a provide cooling air for the stator winding and
6
Fan
Fan
Ring
GTlWX
Figure 8. Generator field
/:YIR 1 1
OUTLE
1 AIR
FILTER
s,,k%ls~
‘Is =--=
1 $r II -f-- JI -J-
I
I INLET
* SILENCEAS
I j 1
GENERmJR
4 I / A,R
INLET
tie --....’
‘i -- -- ..--
I i '/%ki I 'I Lg.& t BEARING
t .-- 7;: - -.
I- DRIVE ’ -_, ‘;;ib- l-y;dA -* _- 1 IA
GEAR i,r: i+.
“: i I;
.I 1,
1. -- ;;;T-g*1, p!JJ--~7+sJ,,~ H I-- ‘:Ag
t I rlj’ .-, _IJ’
. imm,
‘-‘I ,: 1 K.‘&-;/y
’ ; +,I,-’
&mms SW& !
TR;:;aEFls
^:;g$g=
^.._^r..l
GT18561
Figure 9. Generator cross section and ventilation paths
core. The rotor winding, which is a directlycooled required on longer rotors, several wedges are used
radial flow design, is self-pumping and does not in each slot. The rotor slot insulation, turn insula-
rely on the fan for air flow. The overall ventilation tion and other materials in contact with the wind-
pattern is shown in Figure 9. ing are full Class F materials and have proven reli-
The rotor winding fits in a rectangular slot ability through use on other generator designs.
(Figure 10) and is retained by a full-length wedge
on the shorter machines. Where cross slots are
7
GER-3688B
COll Wedge
Measured Vibration
creepage BlWk Journal Probe Mils Peak-to-Peak (MM)
Location
and Orientation Broadband Filtered - l/Rev
Field COll
Turn l”S”latlOn
Turbine End Horizontal 0.90 (.023) 0.37 (.009)
slot Armor Turbine End Vertical 1.00 (.025) 0.46 (.012)
Collector End Horizontal 0.60 (.013) 0.19 (.005)

- Sub sot
Channel
Collector End Vertical 0.50 (.013) 0.23 (.006)
GI1lU!M
Figure 10. Section through coil slot Figure 12.6A3 journal vibration maximum val-
ues observed for all speed and operat-
PACKAGING DESIGN ing conditions
The objective in the packaging design has been all the expected performance requirements
to reduce the number of sections (Figure 5) to throughout the load range. Some of the key test
simplify the structure and to improve the piping objectives are listed in Figure 11.
and wiring design for fewest parts and ease of Loss measurements confirmed the prediction
assembly. The lesser number of package sections of generator efficiency at the generator rated out-
leads to a stronger structure, but, more important- put, and heat runs both in the factory and under
ly, results in fewer feet of joint through which load confirmed that the generator would meet
unfiltered air can leak, thus aiding cleanliness in both NASI and IEC standards for Class B tempera-
the generator. Depending on the design, a num- ture rise.
ber of components have been relocated from the At the design stage, a great deal of attention
auxiliary cubicle into the base, simplifjring the was focused on achieving a smooth running rotor.
design of the auxiliary cubicle. Components in the Figure 12 shows the levels measured on a 6A3 at
base are low-maintenance items, and are accessible the site. These levels are significantly lower than
through covers in the collector compartment. those required by API, and also are much lower
A great deal of attention has been paid to cus- than those in a recently issued draft international
tomer requirements in this area, as the prefer- standard (7919/3). The API requirements for sep
ences of individual users frequently require pack- aration margins of rotor lateral critical speeds
aging changes. Ease of addition or removal of from operating speeds were also fully met.
features and hardware is critical to meeting these A noise survey was conducted during startup of
needs within the normal cycle times. the first 6A3, using the sound intensity method
which compensates for ambient noise effects. The
average generator near-field sound pressure was
TESTING determined from the measurements to be 85.7
Extensive prototype testing of each of the new dBA, which is very satisfactory, and compares
designs, both in the factory and under load at a favorably with the design target of 85 dBA.
customer’s site, has proven that the designs meet
CURRENT STATUS
Electrical Testing
Three new machines have been designed to
l Excitation Requirements
l Short Circuit Ratio
match the GE Frame 5,6 and ‘7 gas turbines. More
l Temperatures
than 130 generators of these new designs have
been shipped through the end of 1992, with
Mechanical Testing approximately one-half in service.
l Rotor Vibration
The air-cooled generator product line is contin-
l Stator Frame Vibration
uing to evolve. The generator that is being
l Noise
applied with the LM6000 aeroderivative gas tur-
l Stator Winding Vibration
l Ventilation
bine (Figure 13) was tested and shipped in 1992.
Its basic configuration is open ventilated (with a
TEWAC option), brushless exciter, pedestal-
GT22940
mounted bearings, on a “single-lift” base, rated 60
Figure 11. Factory and load test objectives
GER-3688B
RDC26475-2 GO2A-00.044
Figure 13. LM6000 Figure 15. Hydrogen-cooled generator
Approx.
Relative Relative Rel Heat
Spectfic Relative Practical Removal
FluId HEat Denstty Vol Flow Abihty
1 1.0 1 1.0 1 10 I 1.0 )

Hydrogen 30 pslg
(2.07 bar) 14.36 0.21 10 3.0
Hydrogen 45 psig
(3.10 bar) 14.36 0.26 IO 4.0
Water 4.16 1000.0 0 012 50.0
GT21022A
RDC26126.21-3
Figure 14. Air, hydrogen, water heat removal
comparison Figure 16.7F generator
MVA at 0.8 pf. In 1993, a 160 MVA, 50-Hz air- below, while direct water cooling of armature
cooled generator, to be used primarily with the windings is applied to units above 250 MVA. This
frame 9E gas turbine, will be tested as well. division results from design optimization. While it
is possible to apply water cooling on machines
rated below 250 MVA, the cost/performance ben-
HYDROGEN-COOLED efit suffers. Water cooling adds manufacturing
GENERATORS complexity, as well as requires the need for an
auxiliary water cooling and deionizing skid, plus
As the rating of steam turbines rose in the associated piping, control and protection features.
1930-1950 time frame, it became clear that in At higher ratings, the cost of this complexity is off-
order to keep the size, weight, ability to ship and set by the advantage of producing a generator of
cost of a generator within reason, a more optimal significantly smaller size than a comparable con-
cooling medium needed to be used. Hence the ventionallycooled generator.
introduction of hydrogen. Hydrogen-cooled generator construction
How well the armature winding of a generator (Figure 15)) except for the frame, is very similar
is cooled has a significant influence on the overall to that of air-cooled generators. The stator slot
size of a synchronous generator. The cooling of and end winding support designs are essentially
the armature winding is dependent on a number like those shown in Figures 6 and ‘7. Most designs
of factors: cooling medium (air, hydrogen, water) ; use direct radial flow cooling similar to that
insulation thickness; and overall electrical losses shown in Figure 10. The stator frame, on the
(12R + load loss). As Figure 14 shows, relative heat other hand, because of the need to contain 30
removal capability improves from air to hydrogen, psig (2.07 bar) to 45 psig (3.10 bar) hydrogen,
with increased hydrogen pressure, and even more uses thick plate cylindrical construction. End
significant with the use of water cooling. shields are appropriately more rugged, and con-
Conventional hydrogen cooling can be utilized on tain a hydrogen seal system to minimize leakage.
generators rated approximately 300 MVA and Conventional hydrogen cooling, while available
9
GER-3688B
- /
G02A-00-043 POP35782
Figure 17. Water-cooled generator F@we 19. Water-cooled stator winding

arrangement
.-”
?OO systarri
Faults
Xela~rvai
FGiZO ioao Cycrlng
Normar
f-1hom?ai Expanslan)
Fiunnmg
FBC%S
1 -
i
L-. ---L ..-.--.-L-.-L-
7 102 d 4 1010 30’2
Total ~*~~~ of Cycles
w a .3t?-bar 4ime Span
GO4A-00-019 GT21019
Figure 18. Hollow copper strand construction Figure 20. Cyclic duty on stator winding in
30 years
for generators rated below 100 MVA, is most rated units. These present unique design require-
often applied to steam-turbinedriven units above ments must be addressed if high reliability and
100 MVA, as well as with the frame 9 and 7F long life of the equipment is to be maintained.
(Figure 16) and frame 7FA and 9F gas turbines.
Insulation
HYDROGEN/WATER-COOLED The stator insulation material used in modern
GENERATORS GE water-cooled generators consists of an epoxy-
Even more compact generator designs are mica-based system called Micapal. Micapal I was
achievable through the use of direct water cooling introduced in 1954, partially as a solution to tape
of the generator armature winding (Figure 17). migration and girth cracking problems associated
These designs employ hollow copper strands with the then almost universally applied asphalt-
(Figure 18) through which deionized water flows. insulation-based system.
The cooling water is supplied via a closed-loop In 1975, an improved epoxy-mica system was
auxiliary-base-mounted skid. The cool water introduced (Micapal II). This all-mica paper insu-
enters the winding through a distribution header lation has improved mechanical toughness (15%)
on the connection end of the generator and the and voltage endurance (12%). While these prop
warm water is discharged in a similar manrrer on erties were developed to meet the requirements
the turbine end of the generator (Figure 19). of very large ratings, the application of Micapal II
The armature voltage and current of hydro- on small and midsize units permits further opti-
gen/watercooled generators are significantly high- mization opportunities. Micapal II has excellent
er than those of air- or hydrogencooled units. As a thermal cycling capability, and is particularly suit-
result, the insulation voltage stress and forces on ed for the daily start/stop duty required of many
the armature windings can be several orders of units today.
magnitude larger than those experienced on lower-
10
GER-3688B
nance close to double frequency.

These forces require the design engineer to
closely examine the detail design of the endwind-
ing and stator slot sections.
Stator Slot Support System

The key elements of the stator-slot support
system design (Figure 21) are:
Careful assembly of the stator core to ensure
a uniform slot dimension and avoid “high
areas.”
GT17109
Use of side ripple springs full length along
Figure 2 1. Armature bar restraint in stator slot each bar to ground the bar armor to the slot
and provide permanent friction damping
against tangential and radial motion.
Forces on Stator Winding-s
A top-of-slot, radial force wedge designed to
There are two sources of force on the stator securely hold the armature bars down to the
windings: high-level, short-duration transient bottom of the slot, preventing potential
forces due to system or misoperation faults, as well destructive bar motion.
as those that result from normal load currents Freedom for axial movement to accommodate
and load cycling. thermal expansion without component stress.
Figure 20 charts frequency of occurrence against
relative magnitude for these forces. Each type of
Endwinding Support Structure
force requires careful consideration during the
design process. High-level fault currents can cause Because the endwindings are suspended
very high forces, which will cause major winding beyond the core, shortcircuit or faulty synchroniz-
damage if not suitably restrained. Load cycling, and ing current forces are much more difficult to
the thermal expansion which accompanies it, is a restrain than those in the stator slots. In addition,
daily event that causes expansion and contraction the structure itself has many more “degrees of free-
of the entire windings. If components are not suit- dom” complicating the process of avoiding detri-
ably designed, or if windings are unduly restrained mental resonant frequencies. As with the stator slot
in the axial direction, lowcycle fatigue damage may support system, the endwinding support system for
occur. Finally, the electromagnetic forces at twice a watercooled armature design is more complex
system frequency due to normal load currents may than that for a conventionally-cooled winding.
cause fretting or highcycle fatigue of components, However, each of the support systems evolved from
particularly if a component has a mechanical reso the same heritage, and both have provided
extremely reliable service since their introduction.
The advanced TetralocTM endwinding support
system (Figure 22) is used on all water-cooled
designs and features:
l A support basket consisting of axial supports,
supported from the stator flange, and contin-
uous circumferential epoxy fiberglass rings.
l Glass filament ties to secure the armature
bars to the fiberglass rings.
l Conformable, resin-impregnated, between-
bar blocking to maintain bar spacing and
provide mechanical support.
Rotor Electrical Design

The generator rotor contains the field windings
GT17110 that produce the magnetic flux, which, in turn,
Figure 22. Stator and winding support cross produces the stator current and voltage. Proper
section cooling of the field winding is another challenge
11
GER-3688B
tilation is coordinated with the rotor-cooling gas

flow, thus creating an in-and-out flow of hydrogen
through the stator core, through the rotor, and
Creepage
Block
returning to the hydrogen cooler through the
Gas Flow
core. This cooling method produces a tempera-
ture profile, as shown in Figure 25, and results in a
Copper
design which maintains the same average copper
Wmdmg
temperature, independent of rotor length.
Rotor Mechanical Design

There are significant challenges to be faced in
GT21018 producing an optimal generator rotor mechanical
Figure 23. Slot section of generator rotor wind- design. The following describes some of those
ing with radial-flow direct cooling challenges and features that have been incorpo-
rated to meet those challenges.
that the generator designer must overcome.
All hydrogen/water-cooled generators use
direct conductor cooling of the rotor winding for Retaining Rings
heat removal. Smaller two-pole and all four-pole The generator retaining rings, which support
generators use the radial-flow design (Figure 23). the rotor winding end turns against centrifugal
At the end of the rotor body, hydrogen enters the force, are the most highly stressed components of
windings through full-length subslots and is dis- the generator. On most designs they are shrunk on
charged along the length of the rotor body to the end of the generator body, as shown in
through radial slots, machined or punched, in the Figure 26. Locking of the retaining ring to the gen-
copper conductors. The hydrogen passes from erator body is required to ensure the ring is not
the conductors through the creepage blocks and pushed off its fit surface due to the axial force gen-
wedges to the “air gap,” where it is directed erated by thermal expansion of the field winding.
through the stator core to the hydrogen coolers. Important design requirements of retaining
As generator ratings, and consequently rotor rings are that they be tolerant to high stress levels,
body length, increase even further, the gappickup possess adequate low-cycle fatigue capability and
diagonal-flow cooling method is employed have acceptable separating speeds. Therefore, a
(Figure 24). In this scheme, cold hydrogen is design is required where careful attention is paid
scooped up in the gas gap and driven diagonally to minimize stress concentrations. Large shrink-fit
through the rotor copper to directly remove the interferences are required to prevent separation
heat. At the bottom of the slot, the gas is turned under overspeed conditions, which result in rela-
and passes diagonally outward to the gas gap in a tively high stress levels at standstill. In most cases,
discharge stator core section. The stator core ven-
INSULATING
CREEPAGE BLOCK INLET WEDGE
I WARM GAS
OUT
r OUTLET
8,
WEDGE
COOL GAS IN \
INSULATING CREEPAGE STRIP
D COPPER CHANNEL
SUB-DIVIDED
FIELD CONDUCTOR
\- SLOT INSULATION
\
‘. TURN INSULATION
GT17110A
Figure 24. Air gap-pickup diagonal-flow rotor cooling scheme
12
GEK3688B
‘)“A
CI I”
c-,.“.(.*rln~
““I l”“C,“l
Copper Temperature
Temperature Rise From Bottom A
OF OC
/ A
140 60
II \I
/’ -’
122 50
-
104 40
t I T
) Gas Temperature Rise

,INi kt-ti
Rotor
Baftle
I
GTZlOZOA
Figure 25. Diagonal-flow cooling field winding temperature profile
Rotor Balance
One of the most critical rotor manufacturing
requirements, after all the parts are accurately
machined and carefully assembled, is the final bal-
ance operation. This ensures that the rotor vibra-
tion will be within acceptable limits and that the
rotor remains straight within very close tolerances
at all running speeds up to and including the
maximum specified overspeed.
The design work initially includes the accurate
calculation of all shaft stiffness and critical speeds. To
correct for the double frequency vibrations which
would otherwise occur, cross slots of appropriate
Figm-e 26. Arrangement of locking key and depth and number are specified in the pole centers
shrink fit of most twopole rotors to equalize the bending stiff-
ness between the direct and quadrature axes.
the ring material must be nonmagnetic to mini- Provisions are incorporated for making balance
mize the end leakage flux and reduce heating of weight corrections. Each GE hydrogencooled gen-
the core end structure. erator field is supported in its own pair of bearings.
For many years, nonmagnetic retaining rings Balancing and overspeed testing are per-
have been made from an 18Mn-5Cr steel alloy. formed in GE’s factory balance facility. A high-
However, it was not until the mid-1970s that the speed multiplane modal balancing procedure is
susceptibility of 185 retaining rings to stress-corro used. This procedure is done to ensure minimum
sion cracking became known. As a result of coop- vibration levels at every speed up to the maxi-
erative programs with retaining ring suppliers, a mum specified overspeed.
different alloy, 18Mn-18Cr (originally proposed by
GE), was selected as a better retaining ring materi-
al. This material has the required properties, CONCLUSION
including high resistance to stress-corrosion crack-
ing in the types of environments of which rings While this paper has focused mainly on the
may be exposed during the service life of the gen- “flange-to-flange” generator, the successful opera-
erator. GE now supplies 18-l 8 retaining rings on tion of a steam or gas turbine generator involves
its generators. other systems as well. Discussion of excitation,
lube oil, hydrogen and stator cooling water sys-
tems, as well as generator protection and opera-
tion, can be found in other GE publications.
13
GER-3688B
The design of modern generators, whether

they are air, hydrogen or hydrogen/water-cooled,
requires a blend of time-proven, as well as innova-
tive, design concepts. This successful integration
of time-proven concepts with modern technology
produces generators that can be expected to pro
vide efficient, trouble-free service through years of
baseload or cycling operation.
REFERENCE
1. Galpern, H.N. and Vogt, G.H.,‘A New Class F

Armature Insulation System for Turbine
Generators,” presented at the 13th Electrical /
Electronics Conference, September 2529, 1977.
IEEE Publication Number 77CH12732-FL.
0 1994 GE Company
14
GEK 95159c
g
Revised, May 2007
GE Energy
Description
Totally Enclosed, Water-to-Air-Cooled Generator
Electrical and Mechanical Features
(Brushless Excitation)
These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment nor to provide for every
possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should further
information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser's
purposes the matter should be referred to the GE Company.

GEK 95159c Totally Enclosed, Water-to-Air-Cooled Generator
Figure 1. Typical Generator Assembly
I. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF GENERATOR

The TEWAC air-cooled generator is designed for operation with ambient air as the cooling medium. The
ventilating air is circulated by fans located at the ends of the generator rotor. The separately excited
rotating field is supported by pedestal-mounted bearings located at each end of the generator frame (see
Figure 1).
The integral frame design consists of a center frame which houses the stator frame and winding and
defines the ventilation air path. The endcap regions act as the structural interface from the center frame to
the rotor pedestals and the mounting feet. The endcaps also provide support for the exciter and defines
the ventilation air passage for the return air from the coolers. The coolers are mounted on the top of the
machine in a plenum arrangement. Flange connections are provided for the customers cooling water lines
to the air coolers. Mechanical power is derived from the turbine, which also supplies the bearing
lubricating oil (for industrial turbines). For packaged generators, a separate lubricating oil system is
supplied by the packager.
The generator is designed for continuous operation. Temperature detectors installed in the generator
permit the measurement of the winding and inlet air temperatures. The generator is constructed to
withstand, without harm, all normal conditions of operation, as well as transient conditions such as
system faults, load rejection and mal-synchronization.
A. Stator Frame
The stator frame consists of a casing of welded plate construction, reinforced internally by web plates
in the radial direction, and by braces, key bars and ventilating ducts in the axial direction.
The key bars which support the stator core are welded directly to the fixed web plates. Core vibration
is both minimized and attenuated by the core dimensions and the locations of the feed relative to the
core.
2
Totally Enclosed, Water-to-Air-Cooled Generator GEK 95159c
The ventilation path is integral with the stator frame structure and is a completely closed structure
with the exception of a small amount of make up air that is designed to leak at the interface between
the rotor and the outer air shield at each end of the machine.
B. Stator Core
The stator core is made up of segmented, annealed, insulated punchings (see Figure 2) of high-
quality, silicon steel. These punchings are assembled in an interleaved manner on keys machined on
the key bars, and are separated into packets by space blocks to provide ventilation ducts. The
punchings are stamped from thin steel sheets and contain open-end slots for the armature bars with
dovetail slots for the wedges which hold the armature bars in place. Other dovetail slots at the back of
the punching are for assembly and locking of the segments on the key bars. The assembled punchings
are clamped into a stiff cylindrical core by pressure applied through end flanges by means of the
stator key bars. Pressure is applied to the teeth by non-magnetic steel fingers located under the end
flanges (see Figure 4). In order to reduce end heating caused by the end leakage flux and its
associated electrical losses, the end packets of punchings are stepped back at the ends of the stator
core to increase the gap between the punchings and the rotor. The punching insulation is a thermo-
setting varnish designed to maintain its insulating value at temperatures above the normal operating
range.
C. Stator Winding
The stator winding is composed of insulated bars assembled in the stator slots, joined at the ends to
form coils, and connected in the proper phase belts by bus rings. Each phase is split into groups of
coils 180° apart. The stator bars are composed of insulated copper conductors (strands) transposed by
the “Roebel” method so that each strand occupies every radial position in the bar for an equal length
along the bar. This arrangement minimizes the circulating current loss which would otherwise be
present under load conditions due to the distribution of magnetic flux in the coil slot. (See Figure 3
for details of the transposed bar.)
The main “ground wall” insulation is a mica paper-based type structure, utilizing a Class F thermo-
setting binder. The ground insulation is cured during vacuum, pressure and then heating cycles to
compact
Figure 2. Typical Stator Punching
3
the system and eliminate voids. The result is a high-density, high dielectric strength system which
maintains high mechanical strength throughout the operating temperature range.
An outer covering of protective tape is applied to the core portion of the bar to protect the bar from
abrasion in the slot. This protective tape is impregnated with a controlled-resistivity material to
prevent slot discharge sparking and vibration sparking. The end arms of the bars are graded with a
nonlinear voltage grading material.
The stator coil ends are covered with an outer layer of tape to bind and protect the mica insulation,
after which they are sprayed with epoxy paint. These end turns are securely laced with treated glass
cord to the binding bands, which are molded fiberglass rings supported from the stator core flanges
(see Figure 4). The armature bars are held in the coil slots by wedges driven into the dovetail slots.
D. Resistance Temperature Detectors and Terminal Boards

Twelve dual-element resistance temperature detectors are located between coils of the armature
windings, four in each phase, to measure the temperature of the windings at the points of highest
normal temperature.
Two temperature detectors are provided to measure the inlet air temperature and one for outlet
temperature. The leads from the detectors are brought out through the generator frame and connected
to terminal boards for connection to temperature meters or relays. The locations of the resistance
temperature detectors, and the arrangement of connections at the terminal board, are shown on the
Connection Outline drawing. A description of the detectors and circuit is given in the instructions for
RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE DETECTORS.
E. Generator Leads
The main armature leads are brought out of either side of the stator frame at the exciter end,
depending on the product line, and are available for outgoing and neutral bus connections.
The leads exit through insulated bushings, bolted to the side of the frame, which clamp and support
the leads. The leads are suitable for connection to bus bars. Both ends of each phase are brought out
to accommodate differential protection equipment.
F. Air Coolers
Generator air coolers are mounted horizontally in the plenum chamber on top of the frame. Water
inlet, outlet and vent pipe connections are made externally on either side of the unit to suit station
arrangement. Seals are made by gaskets between the frame and the cooler water box. The method of
sealing is such that the water boxes and covers can be removed to clean a cooler without opening the
generator air ventilation circuit. See instructions in MAINTENANCE.
G. Stator Ventilation
The rotor fans provide the ventilation of the generator. They are the radial flow type assembled near
the ends of the rotor. The entrance conditions of the air to the fans is controlled by an inlet nozzle.
Cooling air is forced by the fans into the air gap, and also around and behind the stator core. The
stator is divided axially into sections by the web plates so that in some sections cold air is forced
from the outside of the core toward the air gap through the radial air ducts, while in other sections it
passes from the air gap toward the outside of the core through the radial ducts. The cooling air is
conducted through tubes
4
Figure 3. Armature Conductors Assembled in a Roebel Bar
Figure 4. Stator End Winding Structure
5
or ducts to the proper section, and hot air is directed back to the coolers. After the heat is removed by
the coolers, cold air is returned to the rotor fans and recirculated.
The arrangement of alternate inward and outward air flow in the stator core results in a substantially
uniform cooling of the core and windings, thus avoiding excessive local heating and reducing stresses
caused by temperature differentials.
H. Generator Rotor (Mechanical and Ventilation)

The construction of the generator rotor is illustrated in Figures 5 and 6. The rotor is machined from a
single alloy-steel forging which has passed extensive tests to assure that the forging meets the
required physical and metallurgical properties.
Longitudinal slots, machined radially in the body, contain the field coils. The field coils are held in
the slots against centrifugal force by steel wedges. These wedges are fitted into dovetail openings
machined in the rotor slots.I.
The rotor fans, provided for the ventilation of the generator, are assembled near the ends of the rotor.
The rotor is cooled externally by the air flowing along the gap over the rotor surface, and internally
by air which passes under the rotor end windings, and axially under the rotor winding, through the
subslot channels, and radially outward through holes in the coils and wedges.
I. Field Winding and Retaining Rings
The field winding consists of rectangular copper bars, fabricated into coils. Several turns in one pair
of slots around one pole form a coil. Several coils are assembled around each pole to form the
winding. The individual turns are insulated from each other. The coils are insulated from the slot wall
in the body portion by molded slot liners. To provide maximum ventilation and cooling, the end
portions of the field coils are left bare except for turn insulation. Molded ring insulation is provided
between the coils and the retaining rings, and epoxy-glass blocking is provided in the end windings to
separate and support the coils and restrict their movements under stresses from thermal and rotational
forces.
The end turns are held in place against centrifugal force by heavy retaining rings machined from high
strength, corrosion-resistant alloy-steel forgings which are shrunk and key-locked onto the rotor
body.
The axial movement of the field winding is restricted by the centering ring, which is held in place by
a shrink fit onto the retaining ring.
J. Brushless Excitation
A description of the brushless exciter may be found in the Exciter Section of the Instruction Book.
K. Pedestals and Bearings
The generator rotor bearings and oil supply piping are contained in pedestals. For aeroderivative
turbines only, the drive end pedestal also contains provisions for accommodating turbine thrust
requirements. The pedestals and the bearings are split on the horizontal centerline of the bearing to
facilitate their removal.
The bearing at the exciter end of the generator is insulated from the generator frame to prevent the
flow of shaft currents.
6
Figure 5. Typical Machined Rotor
Figure 6. Typical Assembled Rotor
The lubricating oil is retained within the pedestal by seal rings on the bearing assembly and by oil
deflectors on either side of the pedestal.
A detailed description of the bearings and pedestal is provided in a separate instruction, PEDESTALS
AND BEARING, listed in the table of contents.
L. Air Shields
The outer air shields are bolted and sealed such that the surface of the bearing pedestals is entirely
outside the internal generator ventilation circuit.
The inner air shields are located between the ends of the armature windings and the outer air shields
to separate the fan discharge air from the air entering the fans. Air seal fan nozzle rings are attached
to the inner air shields to prevent the fan discharge air from leaking into the fan inlet.
7
g GE Energy
www.gepower.com
8
g
GEK 106931d
Revised, July 2007
GE Energy
Description Totally Enclosed, Water-to-Air-Cooled 9A4 and

9A5 Generator with Brushless Excitation
Electrical and Mechanical Features
These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment nor to provide for every
possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should further
information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser's
purposes the matter should be referred to the GE Company.

GEK 106931d Description Totally Enclosed, Water-to-Air-Cooled 9A4 and 9A5 Generator with Brushless
Excitation
I. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF GENERATOR
This compact generator has been designed for ease of installation and reduced on-site installation cycle
time. The generator is a fully assembled package with the rotor already installed.
The totally enclosed, water-to-air-cooled (TEWAC) generator is designed for operation with air as the
cooling medium. The ventilating air is circulated by fans located at the end of the generator rotor. The
separately excited rotating field is supported by end shield mounted bearings located at each end of the
generator frame.
The stator frame containing the stator core and armature winding along with the shields, bearings and
rotor are assembled for mounting on the concrete foundation. Figure 1 shows the configuration for a flat
slab foundation. Figure 2 shows the configuration for a pedestal foundation. The water to air heat
exchangers (coolers) are mounted above the generator. Flange connections are provided for the customers
cooling water lines. Mechanical power is derived from the turbine.
Figure 1. 9A4 Configuration for Slab Foundation.
Figure 2. 9A4 Configuration for Pedestal Foundation (Leads Down).
2
Description Totally Enclosed, Water-to-Air-Cooled 9A4 and 9A5 Generator with Brushless GEK 106931d
Excitation
The generator is designed for continuous operation. Temperature detectors installed in the generator
permit the measurement of the stator winding and air temperatures. The generator is constructed to
withstand, without harm, all normal conditions of operation, as well as transient conditions such as
system faults, load rejection and mal-synchronization.
II. STATOR FRAME
The stator frame consists of a casing of welded plate construction, reinforced internally by web plates in
the radial direction, and by braces and springbars in the axial direction.
A series of floating web plates are welded to key bars which support the stator core. The floating web
plates are suspended on springbars welded to fixed web plates. This isolates both radial and tangential
magnetic vibration. Core motion is limited to safe levels by stop collars on several springbars.
III. STATOR CORE
The stator core is made up of segmented, annealed, insulated punchings (see Figure 2) of high-quality,
silicon steel. These punchings are assembled in an interleaved manner on the key bars, and are separated
into packets by space blocks to provide ventilation ducts. The punchings are stamped from thin steel
sheets and contain open-end slots for the armature bars with dovetail slots for the wedges which hold the
armature bars in place. Other dovetail slots at the back of the punching are for assembly and locking of
the segments on the key bars. The assembled punchings are clamped into a stiff cylindrical core by
pressure applied through end flanges by torquing the nuts which are assembled onto the threaded key bar
ends. Pressure is applied to the teeth by non-magnetic steel outside space blocks (fingers) located under
the end flanges (see Figure 3). In order to reduce end heating caused by the end leakage flux and its
associated electrical losses, the end packets of punchings are radially stepped back at the ends of the
stator core to increase the gap between the punchings and the rotor. The punching insulation is a thermo-
setting varnish designed to maintain its insulating value at temperatures above the normal operating
range.
Figure 3. Stator End Winding Structure.
3
Excitation
IV. STATOR WINDING
The stator winding is composed of insulated bars assembled in the stator slots, joined at the ends to form
coils, and connected in the proper phase belts by connection rings. The bars are secured in the slot by top
and side ripple springs, which ensure tight seating of the bars during operation. Each phase is split into
groups of coils 180 apart. The stator bars are composed of insulated copper conductors (strands)
transposed by the “Roebel” method so that each strand occupies every radial position in the bar for an
equal length along the bar. This arrangement minimizes the circulating current loss which would
otherwise be present under load conditions due to the distribution of magnetic flux in the coil slot (see
Figure 4 for details of the transposed bar).
Figure 4. Armature Conductors Assembled in a Roebel Bar.
The micaceous insulation system with epoxy binder is applied to form the main “ground wall” of
insulation over the stator bar. This insulation system consists of several layers of mica tape half-lapped
over the bars, which is processed to form a high density, high dielectric strength system with high tensile
strength throughout the operating temperature range.
An outer covering of protective tape is applied to the core portion of the bar to protect the bar from
abrasion in the slot. This tape is impregnated with a controlled-resistivity material to prevent slot
discharge and vibration sparking. The end arms of the bars are graded with a non-linear voltage grading
material.
The stator coil ends are covered with an outer layer of tape to bind and protect the mica insulation, and
then sprayed with epoxy paint. These end turns are securely laced with treated glass cord to molded
fiberglass support rings positioned from the stator core flanges (see Figure 3). The armature bars are held
in the coil slots by wedges driven into the dovetail slots.
V. RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE DETECTORS AND TERMINAL BOARDS
Six resistance-type temperature detectors, two in each phase, are located between coils of the armature
windings to measure the temperature of the windings at the points of expected highest temperature.
4
Excitation
Inlet and outlet air temperatures are each measured by two temperature detectors. The leads from the
detectors are brought out through the generator frame and connected to terminal boards for connection to
temperature meters or relays. The locations of the resistance temperature detectors, and the arrangement
of connections at the terminal board, are shown on the Connection Outline drawing. A description of the
detectors is given in the instructions for RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE DETECTORS, listed in the
table of contents.
VI. GENERATOR LEADS
In the standard configuration, the main armature leads are brought out of the upper side portion of the
stator. The leads exit the frame through insulated terminal plates which clamp and support the leads. The
neutral leads exit the side opposite the line leads.
Optional lead exit through the bottom is available.
VII. AIR COOLERS
Generator air coolers are mounted horizontally above the machine (see Figure 5). Water inlet, outlet and
vent pipe connections are made externally on either side of the unit to suit station arrangement. The
method of sealing is such that the water boxes and covers can be removed to clean a cooler without
opening the generator air ventilation circuit. See instructions in MAINTENANCE.
Figure 5. Reverse Flow Generator Cooling Circuit Schematic
VIII. STATOR VENTILATION
The generator is cooled by an internally re-circulating air stream that dissipates the generator heat
through air-to-water heat exchangers. For maximum cooling effectiveness, a reverse flow ventilation
system is used (see Figure 5). The reverse flow system supplies the coldest cooling air to both stator and
rotor simultaneously. Cold air from the heat exchangers is drawn directly through the stator core from
chambers between section plates at the outside diameter of the core. Structural plates positioned
circumferentially around the
5
Excitation
stator core form flow chambers that are used to control the inlet pressure and regulate the air flow.
Ventilation of the armature core is accomplished by forcing air radially inward through cooling ducts
formed by space blocks between lamination packets. As the air flows radially inward it accelerates and
reaches maximum cooling velocity at the armature bars and core teeth — the region of greatest heat
generation. The cooling flow is drawn from the stator, through the air gap by rotor mounted fans and
directed to the cooler inlet.
IX. GENERATOR ROTOR (MECHANICAL AND VENTILATION)
The construction of the generator rotor is illustrated in Figure 6 and Figure 7. The rotor is machined from
a single alloy-steel forging which has passed extensive tests to assure that the forging meets the required
physical and metallurgical properties.
Figure 6. Typical Machined Rotor.
Figure 7. Typical Assembled Rotor.
6
Excitation
Longitudinal slots, machined radially in the body, contain the field coils. The field coils are held in the
slots against centrifugal force by steel wedges. These wedges are fitted into dovetail openings machined
in the rotor slots (see Figure 8).
Figure 8. Cross-section of Rotor Slot.

Cold air from the heat exchangers flows to both ends of the rotor through channels in the frame (see
Figure 5). The rotor is cooled internally by air that flows through subslots under the field coils within the
rotor body and then passes directly through cooling ducts in the copper coils and wedges (see Figure 8).
The axial type reverse flow fans draw ventilating air through the air gap and the rotor is cooled externally
by air flowing over the rotor surfaces. From the fan discharge, the cooling air is delivered directly to the
coolers.
A. Field Winding and Retaining Rings
The field winding consists of rectangular copper bars, fabricated into coils. Several turns in one pair
of slots around one pole form a coil. Several coils are assembled around each pole to form the
winding. The individual turns are insulated from each other. The coils are insulated from the slot wall
in the body portion by molded slot armor or liners. To provide maximum ventilation and cooling, the
end portions of the field coils are left bare except for turn insulation. A thick cross section of molded
ring insulation is provided between the coils and the retaining rings. Epoxy-glass blocking is
provided in the end windings to separate and support the coils, limiting their movements under
stresses from thermal and rotational forces.
The end turns are held in place against centrifugal force by heavy retaining rings machined from high
strength, corrosion-resistant alloy-steel forgings which are shrunk and key-locked onto the rotor
body.
7
Excitation
B. Brushless Excitation
A description of the Brushless Exciter may be found in the “Exciter Section” of the instruction book
(see table of contents).
C. Bearings
The generator rotor bearings and oil supply piping are contained in end shields. The end shields and
the bearings are split on the horizontal centerline of the bearing to facilitate their removal.
Tilting-pad, pedestal bearings are used to minimize vibration during operation. The bearings
incorporate a special seal design to prevent oil leakage. Optional hydrostatic oil lift is available to
dramatically reduce starting torque requirements and thus prolong bearing life.
The lubricating oil is retained within the end shield by seal rings on the bearing assembly by
pressurized oil deflectors on either side of the end shield. Both the generator and the turbine are
served by a common lube oil system.
The bearing at the exciter end of the generator is electrically insulated from the generator frame to
prevent the flow of shaft currents.
A detailed description of the bearings is provided in a separate instruction, ASSEMBLY,

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE OF BEARINGS, listed in the table of contents.
D. End Shields
The end shields are bolted and sealed to the frame to limit the amount of air leakage (see Figure 5).
The inner air shields are located between the ends of the armature windings and the outer air shields,
to separate the fan discharge from the air entering the fans. Close radial clearance is maintained
between the fans and the inner air shields to prevent the fan discharge air from leaking into the fan
inlet (see Figure 3 and Figure 5).
g GE Energy
www.gepower.com
8
GE Power Systems
GENERATOR FUNDAMENTALS
NATURE AND ASSOCIATION OF to maintain a continuous circulation. Such is the

ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM case with the flow of electrical currents. Current is
said to flow from points of high potential or voltage
Most people are familiar with the general nature of to points of low potential.
electrical energy as transmitted and distributed by Copper is second only to silver as a conductor of
power companies and, perhaps through regular dis- electrical currents, and, since it is available at rea-
tribution of electric bills at the start of each month. sonable cost, is used almost exclusively as conduc-
Electrical current can be thought of as a concerted tor material in manufacture of electrical apparatus.
motion of electrons in a substance (conductor) Certain definite relationships exist between voltage,
caused by the presence of an electric force or poten- current, and resistance in a given electrical circuit
tial, generally referred to as a voltage. Electric volt- such that electrical energy lends itself readily to ac-
age is a kind of electrostatic tension or pressure curate calculation and measurement of its various
which excites electrons to motion in a concerted parts.
fashion in many substances.
All mass is basically composed of charged electrical
It is necessary that an electric potential or voltage ex- particles although the net charge exhibited by one
ist in a substance before current flow is possible; molecule is generally of a random nature relative to
however, current will not necessarily flow even if an the charge exhibited by another molecule resulting
electrical voltage does exist. Assuming that an elec- in a general over–all neutralization or cancellation.
trical potential is applied, two conditions are neces-
sary to establish a current flow. The electrical path If the electrical nuclei of a given substance can be
must be through an electrical “conductor”, and it caused to align themselves uniformly such that their
must be a complete, unbroken, or closed path which basic electrical charges reinforce each other and are
eventually returns to the voltage source. additive, a strong overall charged condition will be
formed, or the substance is said to be magnetized.
Regarding the first condition, depending upon the Thus a magnetic force is established and the material
nature of the molecular bond, some substances con- acts much as a magnetic battery with a high positive
duct electrical current very readily or with very little charge at one end compared to a negative charge at
resistance while others resist formation or flow of the opposite end depending upon the basic align-
electrical currents very strongly and are known as ment of the electrically charged nuclei. Similar to
insulators. Thus, the resistance exhibited by materi- electrical energy previously discussed, this “mag-
al to the formation of electric currents will determine netic voltage” will cause a magnetic “current” to
whether the material is a good or mediocre conduc- flow in closed paths from the source of high magnet-
tor; or perhaps an insulator, and the amount of resis- ic potential, or north pole, to the source of low mag-
tance will determine the quantity or intensity of netic potential, or the south pole.
current flow for a given amount of voltage applied.
Therefore, all magnets are characterized by the pres-
Regarding the second condition, electrical current ence of north and south poles of unlike polarity or
and voltage is analogous to water flow and pressure. charge and it is well known that unlike poles attract
Water will not flow against a closed valve even and like poles repel each other. This introduces the
though high pressures be applied. To cause water to very important fact that mechanical forces may be
flow when a pressure is developed, a complete path involved wherever magnetic fields exist. Lines of
for flow must be established and, if the supply is lim- magnetic flux or “magnetic current” strongly seek
ited a return path to the pumping source is necessary the shortest and earliest path from the north to south
M–29 (B00082) 1 GENERATOR FUNDAMENTALS
GE Power Systems
magnetic poles. It will divide or lengthen its course

in order to flow through good magnetic conductors,
or, material which is easily magnetized. Thus, the
flow of magnetic current or flux, similar to electric
current, is determined by the strength of the magnet-
ic source and the magnetic resistance, called reluc-
tance, of the magnetic conductors available as a path
between magnetic poles. There are many materials
which are far better conductors of magnetic flux
than air, and, accordingly magnetic flux will seek to
flow through such material, and further, will actual-
ly exert mechanical force to align the material in the
shortest and least resistance path possible. Thus, the
familiar “pull” of a magnet upon magnetic materials
placed in its flux field as the magnetic attempts to
align or move the material to form the easiest path
for magnetic flux. This can be visualized as a bend-
ing or distortion of magnetic flux lines to pass
through highly magnetic materials with the flux
lines functioning somewhat as springs attempting to
straighten themselves to form the shortest straight
line “pulling” the magnetic material into the shortest Figure 1 Magnets and Magnetic Fields
path.
One of the best ways to form a magnet is to pass a cal nature of all mater. Thus, a magnetic field exists
strong direct current through a suitable material. simultaneously with current flow, which will have a
Electric current causes the charged nuclei of a sub- definite direction and strength depending upon the
stance to align or orient themselves, thus producing amount of current flowing and the nature of the con-
net magnetic charges as in a permanent magnet. This ducting material.
charge will be found to exist as long as electric cur-
rent flows and, of course, will be proportional to the Similar and very important manifestation of the in-
strength of the electric current. Permanent magnets terrelating qualities of electrical and magnetic ef-
may be formed by using high currents, special mate- fects occurs when a conductor is moved through a
rials, and methods. Refer to Figure 1 showing a magnetic field of force, or a magnetic field of force
sketch depicting each molecule of a material as a moves across a conductor: i.e., there is a relative mo-
very small magnet which, when aligned uniformly tion between an electrical conductor and magnetic
similar, results in an overall positive magnetic flux. When this occurs, electrons are set in motion in
charge being exhibited by the material. the conductors, an electrical voltage is generated, or
induced, and an electrical current will flow if a com-
The preceding broad conceptions are intended to plete electrical conducting loop or circuit exists. The
emphasize the general nature of electrical voltage or voltage induced will have a definite magnitude and
potential, current, and resistance; as related to simi- direction which will be determined by the strength
lar conceptions of magnetic potential or charge “cur- and direction of the magnetic field and the speed and
rent” or flux and “resistance” or reluctance. Of direction of relative motion between the conductor
perhaps even more importance is the interrelation and the magnetic field; and, as might be expected,
between the familiar electrical entities such as elec- the number of conductors within the magnetic field
tric current with magnetic effects due to the electri- which may be connected in series; or connected so
GENERATOR FUNDAMENTALS 2 M–29 (B00082)
GE Power Systems
that the induced voltage in each add to result in much These two relationships lead mathematically to oth-
higher and stronger voltages. er equally valid relationships. One of the most im-
portant is shown following:
The principle of induced voltages due to relative
motion between electrical conductors and magnetic W = I2 R
fields govern the design and manufacture of alter- Where: V = volts R= ohms of resistance , and I =
nating current generators. The study of alternating amperes
current generators is, therefore, a study of the inter-
action between electrical and magnetic circuits, and
the resulting magnetic forces and electrical energy. This relationship indicates that the power absorbed
Note Figure 2 illustrating the basic factors necessary or developed in any portion of an electrical circuit
to induce voltage in an electrical conductor. will be in proportion to the resistance of the circuit
and to the square of the current flowing. This power
appears as heat. Thus, four times the amount of pow-
AMMETER er will be dissipated and four times the amount of
DIRECTION
OF heat will be developed if the current flow is doubled.
MOTION
– +
In the design of high voltage generators it is, of
N S
course, necessary to insulate the voltage carrying
FIXED conductors to keep current flow in the desired path
CONDUCTOR
where it may be controlled and distributed as de-
sired. Very effective insulation is required at all
A VOLTAGE IS INDUCED IN THE STATIONARY CONDUCTOR
WHEN THE MAGNETIC FIELD MOVES ACROSS IT. REVERSING points to safeguard personnel and machinery or oth-
THE DIRECTION OF MOVEMENT OF THE MAGNETIC FIELD er equipment from contact with high voltage and
WILL CAUSE THE DIRECTION OF THE INDUCED VOLTAGE AND
RESULTING CURRENT FLOW TO REVERSE.
from possibilities of destructive short circuit cur-
rents. The insulation necessary to electrically safe-
Figure 2 Electromagnetic Induction guard generator windings is a major obstruction to
removing the I2 losses appearing as heat and which
must be removed to keep temperatures of generators
RELATIONSHIPS OF ELECTRICAL and windings to satisfactory levels.
VOLTAGE, CURRENT AND POWER Earlier, it was explained that relative motion be-
tween a conductor and magnetic field was necessary
A direct current is a current produced by a steady to induce electrical voltages in the conductor. Since
non–oscillating, or uni–directional voltage. In such direct current energy is at essentially steady condi-
an electric circuit, the power developed in watts will tions at any given instant, it is not suited for direct
be equal to the product of the current and the voltage generation by electromagnetic methods.
measured in amps and volts respectively, or:
Consequently, all rotating generators are essentially
W = VI alternating current generators with their voltage pro-
duced by the effects of alternating magnetic fields
Where: W = watts, V = volts, and I = amperes and the laws of magnetic induction. The so–called
Also, in such DC circuits the voltage across any se- DC generators are, therefore, really AC generators
lected portion of the circuit will be equal to the prod- with provisions for rectifying or converting the AC
uct of the current flowing and the resistance of that voltage to DC in removing them from the generator.
portion of the circuit, or: This function is performed by the commutator and
its associated voltage gathering circuits in DC gen-
V = RI erators.
GE Power Systems
Again, due to the lack of continuously varying mag- comparison, the “average” value of the AC wave
netic fields, DC current and voltage does not lend it- form will be 0.636 times the maximum valve.
self to many functions desirable in transmitting large
blocks of electrical power. For instance, transform- In power generation and distribution, the mean ef-
ers may be used to convert the AC power output of fective valve is the only one of interest as this is the
large generators to extremely high voltages with valve measured by instruments, used in calcula-
corresponding reductions in current with relatively tions, etc. All references to AC amps or volts auto-
small losses. Power in this form may then be trans- matically refer to this mean heating value. Note, the
mitted for long distances with only a fraction of the AC wave form shown on Figure 3.
losses at normal voltage and current since the actual
current flow is very small. You will recall that power
or heating loss will be proportional to the square of CURRENT & VOLTAGE IN PHASE
the current flowing.
ONE CYCLE =
360°
Similarly, alternating current energy adapts itself to

many other conversions allowing ease in handling
power and minimizing losses, all by utilizing the V
principles of electromagnetic induction. l
0
Thus, alternating current or voltage continuously
varies and undergoes repetitive reversals in positive
and negative cycles. The usual frequency at which
AC power is generated and distributed in the U.S. is TIME
60 cycles per second. As has previously been stated,
most modern generators are two–pole generators CURRENT LAGGING VOLTAGE BY θ DEGREES
driven at a constant 3600 RPM to produce 60–cycle
V
power, although some four–pole, 1800 RPM mod-
ern units will be found, mainly on cross compound l
units where the low pressure turbine and generator
runs on steam exhausting from the high pressure tur- 0
bine. The size of the turbine steam path parts are apt θ°
to be so large to handle the large volume of low pres-

sure steam, that safe operation at 3600 rpm is not
TIME
possible due to centrifugal force considerations.
CURRENT LAGGING BY 90 DEGREES
Each cycle of alternating current will naturally have
a maximum positive valve as well as a maximum V
negative value and will pass through zero. It will
also have an average value as might be supposed. l
However, AC current is measured and referred to in 0
units which will produce the same amount of power 90°
dissipation in heat as corresponding units of DC cur-
rent. This is called the mean effective value of an AC
current or the “root mean square” value. This turns TIME
out to be 0.707 times the peak or maximum value of

an AC cycle wave form of current or voltage. By Figure 3 Phase Relationship in AC Circuits

GE Power Systems
The effects of electromagnetic induction lead to relationships in AC current and voltage, and note
many adaptions or uses to facilitate the handling and that when phase relationship between current and
use of AC power. Its effects also introduce some voltage is different by 90° the current wave is at zero
slight complications in power measurement and cal- whenever the voltage wave is at its maximum and
culation which, for many years, was a major mystery vice versa.
and impediment to the advancement of the electrical
These considerations lead to the following relation-
industry.
ship for computing power in AC circuits due to the
An amp of AC power is equivalent in most all re- possible effects of voltage and current not “working
spects to an amp of DC power and the same may be together” or being out of phase.
said of an AC volt relative to a DC volt. However,
W = VI X PF
the cycle of AC voltage which produces a given
cycle of current may or may not reach its maximum Where: W = watts, V = volts, I = amperes and PF
and minimum values at the same instant as the cur- = power factor.
rent cycle. If the two waves, current and voltage, did
and power factor is the cosine of the angle of lag or
reach their positive and negative peaks at exactly the
lead (phase angle) between the voltage and current.
same instant, or were exactly “in phase”, the power
produced would be equal to the volts indicated by a
NOTE
voltmeter multiplied by the amps indicated by an
ammeter, just as in a DC circuit. See Figure 4 for a visual analogy of phase and
power factor in relation to the power produced.
In AC circuits the use of coils, condensers, and other
types of devices in the continuously variable mag-
netic fields will have the effect of causing slight lags It should be noted, however, that the expression for-
in the buildup of current compared to the applied power dissipated in heat for DC circuits will still be
voltage in a given cycle due to the effect of induced valid in AC circuits since one ampere of AC by defi-
voltages, sometimes referred to as “counter volt- nition will produce the same amount of heating as an
ages” since they will be in a direction to oppose the ampere of DC. This is repeated from page 3 as fol-
current flow causing them. lows:
Similarly, some devices such as capacitors or con- W = I2R
densors will have the effect of causing the voltage to
Where: W = watts, I = amperes, and R = ohms of
slightly lag the current in an AC circuit due to the
resistance.
tendency of such devices to store or “hold” a charge
of voltage, yet offer no resistance to current flow. In Consequently, operators of alternating current tur-
any case, the current would be said to be out of phase bine–generators carefully monitor the power factor
with the voltage and would, therefore, lag or lead the at which AC power is supplied. They are paid by the
voltage slightly in a given time cycle. In the case of kw–hour and many of their circuit losses will be in
voltage and current not in phase, the product of the proportion the the current flow squared. Since pow-
voltage and current no longer gives the true power or er output is low for a given current flow, and losses
wattage since the effective value and current and high at low power factors, this type of operation is
voltage do not occur at the same time. avoided and may be adjusted to some extent by con-
trolling the excitation circuits of the generator.
In the AC circuits, it is entirely possible to encounter
or design a circuit which will cause current and volt- Also of importance is the fact that low power factor
age to be as much as 90° out of phase in which case operation tends to produce severely distorted mag-
no power could be transmitted although the current netic fields in the generator. This is particularly true
might be very high. Refer to Figure 4 showing phase in the case of leading power factors which tend to
GE Power Systems
0° 90° 180° 270° 360°
TIME
V = VOLTS
90° L = AMPERES
θ = PHASE ANGLE
W = WATTS (POWER)
VARS = REACTIVE VOLTS-AMPS
(PRODUCES NO POWER
BUT MAINTAINS VOLTAGE)
l
lX
θ V TIME
180° 0°
lR
V = VlR VARS = Vlx

= Vl cos θ = Vl sin θ
= Vl x pf
270°
Figure 4 Power and Reactive Volt-Amperes in AC Circuits
cause overheating in some parts of the generator

windings, or a loss of “synchronizing” power of the
generator; i.e., it may tend to drop out of synchro-
nism with the system if sudden loads are imposed. MAJOR GENERATOR PARTS AND
THEIR FUNCTION
Alternating current generators are always manufac-
tured and their ratings, guarantees, etc. established Refer to Figure 5 for reference in considering the
based upon lagging power factor operation over a major generator parts. These are defined as follows:
relatively small range from unity power factor of
1. The generator frame provides the structural
1.0, to 0.8 or 0.85 lagging power factor. These values
strength and rigidity for the generator and serves
are consistent with the load characteristics of most
as a housing to guide cooling air or gas flow.
users and offer no particular difficulties or limita-
tions to operators in supplying distribution systems 2. The inner end shield is a baffle used to form a
except in unusual cases. path for cooled air or gas.
GE Power Systems
Figure 5 Major Parts of Alternating Current Generators
3. The generator fan, mounted on the rotating field 10. The high voltage terminal leads serve to conduct
causes continuous circulation of cooling air or the three phase voltage and current flow from the
gas. generator stator to the external system.
4. The rotating field forms a strong polarized, ro- 11. Collector rings are used to provide a connection
tating magnetic field when energized by an ex- and path for DC power into the rotating field
ternal source of DC power. windings.
5. The stator core carries the stationary high volt- 12. The outboard end stub shaft is sometimes used
age windings and forms a magnetic patch for to drive a small DC generator used to supply DC
magnetic fields. power to the rotating field.
6. The air gap is the radial clearance between the 13. Field conductor end turns are securely blocked
rotating field and the stator core. and serve as connection points for the DC power
applied to the field windings.
7. Stator core springbars act as somewhat flexible
support for the stator core assembly. 14. The main coupling is bolted to the driving tur-
bine shaft.
8. Stator coil end turns are formed when coils leave
one slot in the stator core and are returned to a 15. Generator coolers serve to remove heat from the
different slot. generator cooling air or gas after it has passed
over a through the stator and rotating field.
9. The end turn support structure provides for brac-
ing and ties to secure the stator coil end turns 16. Cooling water connections are supplied to the
against magnetic forces. generator air coolers.
GE Power Systems
FUNDAMENTALS OF direction at right angles to the flow of magnetic flux

GENERATORS and consequently will cause internal circulating cur-
rents to be set up in the material at right angles to the
Alternating current generators, as has been indi- flow of magnetic flux. Since energy is dissipated in
cated, are designed to utilize the principles of elec- the phenomena described above, losses and heating
tromagnetic induction to generate electrical energy. are involved, generally lumped together and called
From the previous discussions throughout this core losses. Core losses are basically hysteresis
course, it will be clear that alternating current gener- losses and eddy current losses described above.
ators may be, and frequently are, built in large sizes Eddy current losses are largely eliminated or mini-
and ratings, and generally operate at high rotating mized by constructing the generator core of
speeds. Further, such generators operate with very hundreds of thousands of thin, insulated, steel sheets
high efficiency in the neighborhood of 98 to 99 per- or “punchings” compressed and bolted together.
cent. Each sheet is a few mils thick and is insulated from
Also, it will have been seen that alternating current adjacent sheets to allow unrestricted flow of mag-
generators utilize definite, carefully designed magnetic flux while stopping the right angle flow of
netic paths or circuits as well as the electric circuits eddy currents.
which would normally be expected. In considering Two electric circuits are involved in alternating cur-
the operation of generators, the path and function of rent generators. The first is the externally supplied
magnetic fields involved should be visualized as DC circuit through the rotating field coils. After the
closely as possible. Magnetic paths link both the ro- field has reached running speed the rotating field cir-
tating field windings and the stator coils and there- cuits is gradually energized or, “field excitation” is
fore, must cross the air gap. It should be kept in mind established which effectively converts the generator
that leakage flux from the desired magnetic path field into a huge and powerful electromagnet. It will,
tends to reduce efficiency and may cause heating of therefore, have a north and south magnetic pole and
some generator parts such as structural sections. Ab- a strong flow of magnetic flux will exist from field
normal magnetic flux leakage or abnormal flux pat- poles, across the air gap, and through the generator
terns may also be caused by unusual operating core; thereby linking or crossing the stator windings.
conditions on the generator. Note Figure 6.
Considering the importance and key function of Since the field rotates at 3600 RPM (usually), a ro-
magnetic circuits, it would be well to carefully study tating magnetic field traverses the stator windings
the construction and intended operation of the gen- and core. Each stator coil will have an alternating
erator core where the intensified magnetic field is voltage induced each rotation of the generator field
purposely confined as much as possible to reduce which will be essentially as shown on Figure 4, with
generator losses and to eliminate stray or extraneous respect to time and to positive and negative half–
magnetic fields. cycles.
Certain definite losses do occur when iron based ma- Generator stator windings will be imbedded in slots
terial is subjected to magnetization which is due to in the stator core, usually two coils or winding bars
the internal energy used in orienting charged mole- to the slot. Each bar or winding must be suitably in-
cules. This will also cause a slight lag in the magne- sulated for the rather high terminal voltages of the
tizing flux flow relative to the formation of the stator winding. All bars will be symmetrically con-
magnetizing force. Also, varying magnetic flux, in nected to form three phase belts in the generator
flowing through magnetic materials, will cause windings. Thus, three windings are formed which
small voltages to be induced in the magnetic materi- are symmetrically displaced from each other by
al itself. These tiny voltages will be induced in a 120°F and which have symmetrically similar termi-
GE Power Systems
and high instantaneous torques on generator and tur-

bine shafts. Accordingly, the turbine governor is ad-
justed until the generator electrical frequency, and
the generator field excitation is varied until genera-
tor terminal voltage exactly matches the system
voltage.
Finally, an instrument known as synchroscope is
used to indicate when these conditions exactly paral-
lel in magnitude and time, at which time the genera-
tor is said to be synchronized and may be connected
to the system without disturbance.
At the instant the generator breaker closes, if condi-
tions of the generator output voltage exactly
matches the system voltage in magnitude, frequen-
cy, and timing: the generator will “float” on the line.
1. STATOR CORE 4. STATOR COILS That is, it will be electrically connected and synchro-
2. ROTATING FIELD 5. ROTOR COILS
3. AIR GAP 6. ROTATION nized but is neither taking nor receiving power from
Figure 6 Generator Magnetic Circuit Due to Field
the external electrical system. The conditions of the
Current rotating magnetic field in the generator will be as
nal voltages due to electrical connections of bars in shown in Figure 6. The magnetic field will be seen to
each phase belt. be symmetrically aligned with the magnetic axis of
the rotating field at each instant, and the terminal
For each revolution of the energized rotating field, voltage of the generator produced by the magnetic
there will, therefore, be three symmetrical terminal field is in exact synchronism and timing with the
voltages induced in a three phase sequence which system voltage. The generator may be thought of as
may be suitably connected to furnish electrical ener- being electrically “locked” into the external system.
gy to an external system. Of course, all locks may be broken, but unusual ef-
fort will generally be required. Such would be the
Improved magnetic materials, electrical–insulating case with the electrically connected, three–phase,
materials, and cooling methods have allowed the alternating current generator as energy available in
ratings of single alternating current generators to ex- the external system is available to hold the generator
ceed 1,500 MW. Generator terminal voltages have in electrical “step” synchronism through the me-
also intended to increase and may be around 20,000 dium of the generator magnetic circuits.
volts for some utility turbine–generators. Most in-
dustrial power generation is done to 2400 to 13,800 The actual force or torque necessary to cause the
volts. generator to depart from electrical synchronism will
depend upon the electro–magnetic characteristics
Since the alternating current generator supplies built into the generator circuits, and upon the operat-
three phase power into existing systems, it is neces- ing conditions imposed upon the generator. Capa-
sary to carefully “match” electrical conditions of the bility curves are furnished by manufacturers to
generator to the system before closing the generator define abnormal operating conditions. For instance,
output breaker to electrically connect the two. The the abnormal condition of generators furnishing
terminal voltages of the generator should exactly substantial power at high “leading” power factors
match the voltage of the system at every instant to (current leading voltage with respect to phase rela-
avoid large in rushes or exchanges of electrical pow- tionship) causes a weakening of the generator mag-
er, severe distortion of generator magnetic fields, netic fields and results in reductions in
GE Power Systems
synchronizing power or stability and abnormal mag-

netic field patterns.
If the turbine governor setting is now increased, a
momentary speed or frequency increase occurs
which causes the phase relationship of the generator
voltages to advance with respect to the phase rela-
tionship of the system and current will flow into the
system; or power may be delivered to the system.
Thus, the generator may be “loaded” or “unloaded”
by adjusting the turbine governor.
The generator, while operating at a fixed governor
setting, will also share with other connected genera-
tors in supplying any additional electrical load
placed on the system up to the limit of the turbine
generator set’s capacity.
Finally, when the generator begins to deliver cur-
rent, new magnetic fields are established due to the 1.
2.
ROTATING FIELD
STATOR CORE
large currents flowing in the stator or armature 3. ROTATION
4. MAGNETIC FLUX PATTERN DUE TO FIELD CURRENT
windings. The magnetic fields due to armature cur- 5. MAGNETIC FLUX PATTERN DUE TO ARMATURE CURRENT
rent called “armature reaction” or “armature reac-
tion flux”, immediately affect the main field flux. Figure 7 Relationship of Magnetic Fields Due to
Field Current and Armature Current
Thus, it may strengthen, weaken or distort the flux;
in effect forcing it from its desired path. The strength erator field and is a the limiting factor in high
of the main field magnetic flux will attempt to reload operation.
align itself to its desired path, and mechanical torque
is necessary to prevent this realignment in order to 2. Leading power factor operation causes relative-
sustain the desired current flow. The turbine must in- ly weak magnetic fields with lower field cur-
crease steam flow and power output to maintain the rents; and armature reaction flux weakens and
phase advance of generator armature voltage neces- causes distortion of the main field. Heating at the
sary to cause current to flow into the system. Figure ends of generator core or windings may be the
7 indicates the relative alignment of magnetic fields limiting factor in high load operation.
due to field current. 3. The power factor may be varied on a generator
The electrical explanation of the internal factors in- connected to large system by changing the field
volved in operating generators electrically con- current. Increasing field current will cause more
nected to large electrical systems is not unduly lagging reactive KVA to be furnished and de-
involved when key principles previously discussed creasing field current will cause less lagging
are kept firmly in mind. This is shown on Figure 9 reactive KVA to be furnished (or more leading
along with a summary of the factors involved. reactive KVA). Reactive KVA is defined as KVA
caused by current flow which is not effective in
By carefully studying vector diagrams shown on producing power.
Figure 8, most of the following operating fundamen-
4. As had been noted, increasing steam flow
tals may be verified.
through the turbine will cause an increase in gen-
1. Lagging power factor operation causes high erator load, or decreasing steam flow will cause
field currents and may cause heating of the gen- generator load to decrease. Increasing load by
GE Power Systems
increasing steam flow through the turbine will

EO
FF FR tend to increase lagging power factors (cause
E less lag in current) or increase leading power
SUPPLYING
CURRENT factors.
IN
lX
V
PHASE 5. If field current is increased on several generators,
l
the effect would be to raise the system voltage.
FA lR
Figure 9 shows the components of a basic excitation
FF
system which might be used with an AC generator.
FR The exciter is a relatively small DC generator which
is driven directly by the main generator shaft in
many cases. The output of the exciter is used to sup-
E SUPPLYING ply excitation for the generator field through the
LAGGING
FA CURRENT field collector rings. Field excitation may, therefore,
V
lX be varied by adjusting the exciter field rheostat. In
θ lR practice, this is automatically done to hold generator
output voltage within extremely close limits due to
the action of the voltage regulator in adjusting out-
put of the exciter whenever a variation in voltage
EO output from the generator occurs.
FR
E As an aid in understanding typical operating limits
FF l
lX
for generators, Figure 10 is shown which gives the
SUPPLYING
LEADING recommended operating limits in terms of KVA out-
θ CURRENT
lR
put, field amps, and power factor of the generator.
V These curves are called “V” curves due to their
FA shape. Also shown on Figure 10 is a typical genera-
tor capability curve defining recommended operat-
Figure 8 Generator Electrical and Magnetic ing conditions on the generator in terms of KW
Relationships at Different Power Factors
output, KVAR output, and power factor.
EXCITER
FIELD
GENERATOR OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
FIELD BREAKER
RHEOSTAT AND LIMITATIONS OF
COLLECTOR
RING GENERATORS
EXCITER GENERATOR
FIELD BREAKER
DC
AC
Alternating current generators incorporate a cooling
EXCITER
ARM GEN. system utilizing fans, coolers and suitable structural
passages to remove heat caused by stator core mag-
netic losses, due to windage of rotating parts, and
COLLECTOR RING due to copper heating losses caused by current flow
POTENTIAL
TRANSFORMER (I2R losses) in the stator windings as well as the ro-
tating field windings.
VOLTAGE Adequate cooling of generators tends to become a
REGULATOR
limiting factor in their maximum rating and has a
governing effect upon the physical size of generator
Figure 9 Basic Excitation System parts. Generator cooling systems are significantly
GE Power Systems
ings. With such intimate contact and superior heat

conducting properties, the amount of copper in gen-
erators can be reduced appreciably, due to the im-
proved cooling. Such conductor cooling of
windings may be used in conjunction with circulat-
ing gas cooling. The effect is to allow much larger
electrical ratings without exceeding physical sizes
which can be shipped or transported satisfactorily.
Since some complication and expense is introduced
with cooling systems more involved than with air or
gas cooling, industrial applications have used air or
hydrogen cooling exclusively and generally find hy-
drogen cooling justified in modern units with ratings
over 15000 KW.
Electrical insulation of generator windings limits
the effectiveness of the cooling medium because it
tends to also serve as thermal insulation. Generator
winding temperatures are generally measured at two
or more locations in each phase belt by installing
thermocouples or other temperature measuring de-
vices between top and bottom coils in a given stator
slot. These devices do not measure actual copper
temperature but will always indicate a significantly
lower temperature due to the temperature drop
across winding insulation. This reading will be 15°C
to 20°C lower (27°F to 36°F) than copper tempera-
ture for normal operation in many generators.
It is normally recommended that the generator cool-
ers be operated by throttling discharge water flow
from the cooler to result in maintaining cooled air
from the coolers at approximately 40°C (104°F).
This will cause cooler water pressure to be higher
than atmospheric pressures for all operation and
CURVES SHOWN ARE FOR HYDROGEN COOLED avoid the possibility of air locking coolers to prevent
GENERATORS WITH MAXIMUM RATINGS AT 1/2 PSI, cooling water flow, as well as insure the cooler is
15 PSI, OR 30 PSI HYDROGEN PRESSURE.
completely filled on the water side. Vents are usually
Figure 10 Typical Generator Performance Curves provided near the very top of generator coolers to al-
low visual indication of vent flow to verify that cool-
more effective with some cooling mediums other ers are properly filled.
than air. For instance, hydrogen, certain coils, or
chemically pure water is much more effective than Generator field winding temperatures are even more
air and all are satisfactory electrical insulators. Of difficult to judge due to high rotating speeds of the
course, oil or water, would not be circulated in the field. Sometimes this is done by using an instrument
generator casing as would air or hydrogen, rather it which essentially provides continuous measure-
would be pumped directly through hollow wind- ment of the total resistance of the field windings.
GE Power Systems
Since the increase in resistance of the field winding sult in safe operation and perform its electrical func-
is normally an accurate measure of the temperature tion reliably for the life of the turbine–generator. If a
rise in the winding, the instrument may be calibrated generator field coil is allowed to shift or move at all,
to read in degrees F or degrees C. This is based upon the effect upon the field balance will be immediate
accurate knowledge of the field winding resistance and high vibrations may result.
at some known temperature, usually ambient tem-
Similarly, the effect of differential temperatures
perature or 20°C.
from one side of the field to the opposite side, even
Due to the temperature rise in the copper windings as small as one or two degrees centigrade, may cause
and to differential expansion between the field forg- a bow in the generator field sufficient to unbalance
ing and the copper windings, the windings will be the field when loaded. Since varnish or lacquer is
subject to growth as the generator is placed in ser- often sprayed on the field body to prevent rusting,
vice and loaded. For this reason, it is wise to cut off only a thin coat should be applied to avoid limiting
cooling water to generator coolers when rolling and the heat transfer from the field. Also, care should be
starting turbine–generators to allow as much warm- taken to apply a uniform coating so that heat transfer
ing as possible of the generator due to windage properties will not be significantly different over the
losses before going beyond one–half rated speed. rotor surface.
Thus, growth of windings due to increased tempera- Generator field coils are installed into slots milled
ture may occur before high centrifugal forces tend to the length of generator forgings. In addition to elec-
lock the windings forcibly in their slots. This is more trical insulation, slot armor is used to secure the coil
important when starting during cold ambient condi- in the slot as well as slot wedges to retain the coil and
tions, particularly in outdoor stations and becomes transfer the mechanical force to the high strength
more important with larger and longer fields. When field forgings.
excessive growth of windings occurs after the gener-
ator reaches rated speed, scuffing of field coil insula- At the ends of generator fields, coil end turns are ar-
tion could occur, or mechanical stresses could be ranged with sufficient flexibility to accept expan-
developed in windings restricted from free expansion growth of the coils without excessive
sion. mechanical stresses being developed. End turns are
separated and held in place with blocking in con-
Similarly, generator forging temperatures will be al- junction with radiating plates to facilitate heat re-
lowed to increase substantially before high centrifu- moval. In addition, ventilation passages for the
gal forces at normal operating speeds or during cooling air or gas are provided at the end turn area.
overspeed trials are experienced. Generator field The whole end turn and blocking assembly is held
forgings will exhibit better properties with respect to firmly in position by retaining rings. Theses are es-
ductility at temperatures higher than ambient, par- sentially cylindrical sleeves installed with very high
ticularly in the case of lower than normal ambient shrink fits to centering rings on the generator shaft
temperatures. which serve to secure end turns and blocking while
positioning this assembly in a permanent, symmetri-
The generator field, functionally an electrical de-
cal, balanced assembly.
vice, is nevertheless a marvelous combination of
electrical and mechanical design to achieve suitabil- Generator field retaining rings, similar to field forg-
ity for high rotating speeds. For instance, a single ings, are given the utmost in care and testing
field coil for a 10,000 KW generator weighs 300 throughout their manufacture. Retaining rings are
pounds at rest, but exerts a force of over 1,000,000 perhaps the key structural part of generator fields
pounds when operating at 3600 RPM. The mechani- and are the most highly stressed in operation. Simi-
cal restraint necessary and the qualities of the field lar to large turbine wheels, a scratch on a retaining
forging must be of the highest order possible to re- ring surface would be a matter of concern. The ut-
GE Power Systems
most in mechanical strength is designed for and no tween the copper and the stator core. Coil insulation
sharp breaks in contour or surface condition are al- is of the highest order to isolate the high alternating
lowed due to possibilities of introducing stress con- current voltages in their desired paths. Stator wind-
centrations. ings are not subject to centrifugal stresses as are field
coils, therefore, slot wedges and filler material will
Terminal connections of generator field windings not be as substantial as for field coils.
are brought through the shaft bore to connect electri-
cally to collector rings. Terminal leads are carefully Stator windings are subject, however, to magnetic
insulated from the shaft or forging as are the collec- forces which will be somewhat dependent upon the
tor rings. The collector rings thus serve as input ter- current density in the windings. This could cause
minals for the DC power providing excitation for the stator bar vibration and damage to insulation if stator
generator field. bar wedges became excessively loose.
Excitation is introduced into the collector rings, Generator stator windings cannot generally be mon-
which are essentially accurately machined and high- itored or their condition judged during normal op-
ly polished sleeves, by means of carbon brushes eration. Their good condition can best be assured by
which are fitted to ride the surface of the rings accu- careful observance of good operating habits with re-
rately. spect to the generator. Normal temperatures can be
maintained by proper operation of the generator
Generator fan rings are installed on the generator cooling system and by reference to temperature in-
shaft to provide a means of circulating cooling air or dications at the stator windings and in the cooling air
gas. The power absorbed by the fans, along with oth- path.
er rotating windage losses, represent the largest
single type of loss connected with operation of the Also, operation of generators outside recommended
generator. limits furnished by the manufacturer involves cer-
tain risks and the possibility of decreasing life of
Generator collector rings may be subjected to exces- generator windings. Manufacturers normally fur-
sive vibration or overheating if brushes are not cor- nish generator capability curves which define rec-
rectly fitted and installed. These are normally cooled ommended operating ranges with respect to load,
by a portion of the generator or exciter cooling air field current, and power factor which are the usual
flow. Operation of generator collector brushes and operating variables.
rings should be checked frequently for excessive
wear, vibration, or contamination which may cause Conditions of stator windings can only be evaluated
serious trouble such as heavy sparking, flashover, or after electrical tests and close visual inspection dur-
loss of generator field excitation. ing shutdown intervals. Of course, periodic inspec-
tions by operating personnel should include checks
Stator windings, similar to field coils, are subject to of collector operation, vibrations, noise level, and
appreciable growth due to differential expansion be- cleanliness of accessible generator parts.

GEK 95143b
Revised November 2004
GE Energy
Operation
Totally Enclosed, Water-to-Air Cooled Generator with Brushless Excitation Gas
Turbine Drive
These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment nor to provide for
every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should
further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for
the purchaser's purposes the matter should be referred to the GE Company.
GEK 95143b Operation
TABLE OF CONTENTS
I. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
II. FINAL INSPECTION BEFORE STARTING THE GENERATOR FOR THE FIRST TIME . . 3
A. Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B. Generator Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
C. Resistance Temperature Detectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
D. Insulation Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
E. Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
F. Rubbing and Vibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
G. Bearing Insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
H. Exciter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
I. Air Coolers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
III. STARTING THE GENERATOR AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS FOR

BRUSHLESS EXCITER REGULATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
A. Conventional Starting Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
B. LCI Starting Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
IV. BEFORE SYNCHRONIZING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
V. SYNCHRONIZING THE GENERATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
VI. SHUTTING DOWN THE GENERATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
VII. POWER FACTOR ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
VIII. EFFECT OF LEADING AND LAGGING POWER FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
IX. OPERATION WITH UNBALANCED ARMATURE CURRENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
X. OPERATION OF THE AIR COOLERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
XI. RECTIFIER LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
XII. LOSS OF FIELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
XIII. INSPECTION FOLLOWING TRIPOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
XIV. GROUNDED FIELD WINDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
XV. GENERATOR LOAD CAPABILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1. Typical Reactive Capability for a Given Value of Cold Gas Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Figure 2. Negative Phase Sequence Current from the Magnitudes of the Three
Phase Currents (For Case of No Zero Phase Current) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2
Operation GEK 95143b
I. INTRODUCTION
A high-speed generator is a complex, precision built piece of equipment designed to operate in conjunction
with a turbine in a modern plant with a minimum of manual control. These machines are constructed to
operate continuously for long periods of time without shutdown. Proper operation of a high speed generator
requires close adherence to operating guides and procedures for the particular unit. Although operating
practices differ to some extent between various operators, there are many general operating rules that can
be applied universally. This instruction is included as a guide for operating a turbine-generator and does
not purport to cover all details or variations in operating procedures.
II. FINAL INSPECTION BEFORE STARTING THE GENERATOR FOR THE FIRST TIME
One of the most important periods in the life cycle of a turbine-generator is the initial start-up. During this
period each component part of the unit is checked and tested for proper installation and operation.
Before shipment, standard factory tests are performed on the generator, including the following:
• Mechanical inspection
• Mechanical balance
• Overspeed run
• Measurement of cold resistance of armature and field windings
• Insulation resistance measurements
• Dielectric tests
• Resistance temperature detector tests
To supplement the tests made in the factory, it is considered essential to repeat many checks just prior to
operating the unit in the power plant. The following inspections and preliminary checks should be made
just before the generator is started up for the first time.
A. Connections
Check the armature connections with the Connection Outline.
B. Generator Voltage
See that the voltage on the generator nameplate corresponds with the line voltage.
C. Resistance Temperature Detectors
The resistance temperature detectors should be checked to determine that they are indicating properly.
D. Insulation Resistance
The insulation resistance should be measured in accordance with instructions on INSULATION TEST-
ING.
3
E. Clearances
Refer to the CLEARANCE Diagram.
F. Rubbing and Vibration
As specified in the instructions for bringing the turbine up to speed, checks should be made to ensure
that there is no rubbing between the rotating and stationary parts of the generator, and that the operation
of the combined turbine and generator rotors is free from excessive vibration.
G. Bearing Insulation
The exciter-end bearing insulation should be checked with an insulation resistance meter in accordance
with instructions on BEARING INSULATION.
H. Exciter
Refer to Exciter section.
I. Air Coolers
The air coolers should be checked as follows: the water supply to all cooler sections should be turned
on full. The cooler vents should be open to bleed all entrapped air. The cooler discharge lines should
be checked to ascertain that nearly an equal flow of water is discharging from each cooler section.
With the vents cracked open to provide for continuous venting, the water discharge may be throttled
to obtain the desired rate of flow. Excessive flow results in accelerated tube erosion and unbalanced
flow results in ineffective generator cooling. The coolant flow may be balanced by measuring the
differential pressure across the inlet and outlet nozzles at the connection end of each cooler section.
The discharge flow rate from the cooler vents and cold gas RTD temperatures are also good indicators
of balanced coolant flow.
Cooler water should be throttled on the discharge of the coolers to avoid air pockets and unstable oper-
ation with low flows. Where valves are located both before and after the coolers, care should be taken
to maintain a positive pressure on the coolers. If condensate is used for cooling, it may be necessary
to connect the discharge from the vent lines to the condenser in order to maintain an effective pressure
for venting.
The cooling water supply pressure should be checked to determine that this pressure is within the de-
signed operating pressure for the coolers.
Excessive flow results in accelerated tube erosion and unbalanced flow results in ineffective generator
cooling. The coolant flow may be balanced by measuring the differential pressure across the inlet and
outlet nozzles at the connection end of each cooler section. The discharge flow rate from the cooler
vents and cold gas RTD temperatures are also good indicators of balanced coolant flow.
III. STARTING THE GENERATOR AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS FOR BRUSHLESS

EXCITER REGULATOR
When starting a turbine-generator, it is recommended that a start-up checklist be used to ascertain that no
items have been overlooked. The following items should be included on a checklist for starting a generator.
4
This is a recommended list and does not purport to cover all items to be checked on a specific installation.
Refer to separate instruction for detailed operation of the exciter system.
Operator actions employing the regulator described below use datalink (digital regulators only) or remote
control switches/hardware.
The voltage regulator and exciter protective circuits must be set up according to detailed instructions con-
tained in a separate regulator instruction book prior to initial operation.
Two major starting methods are employed. The first is for turbine-generators which are started and brought
to operating speed using conventional starting motors. The second category has been included to cover the
unique generator requirements associated with LCI (Load Commutated Inverter) turbine-generator starting
systems. Refer to Turbine startup procedures for operational details related specifically to the LCI. Also
refer to separate instructions for detailed operation of the excitation system.
A. Conventional Starting Motor
1. The following initial checks to be made:
a. Armature circuit breaker open
b. Main and spare field circuit breaker open if so equipped
c. Regulator control switch in manual position
d. Manual voltage adjuster on extreme low
e. Turn on the water to the gas coolers
2. When the unit is turning slowly check for rubbing.
3. As the generator is brought up to speed, check the mechanical balance by taking shaft vibration
readings.
4. Regulate the cold liquid flow valves to obtain the rated flow condition. The cold gas temperature
inside the generator will then be a function of cold liquid temperature and the losses during the
start sequence.
B. LCI Starting System
***WARNING***
THE GENERATOR AND LCI MAY NOT BE USED TO PRODUCE

“TURNING GEAR” OPERATION FOR THE ROTOR TRAIN.
THE GENERATOR MAY NOT BE ENERGIZED BY THE LCI IN
SUCH A FASHION AS TO PRODUCE AN AVERAGE STEADY
STATE SPEED OTHER THAN THAT DEFINED AS NORMAL
OPERATION FOR WATER WASH, TURBINE PURGE OR HRSG
WARMUP.
5
OPERATION OF STATIC START BRUSH RIGGING DURING LCI STARTING
For generators with brushless excitation, field power during LCI operation is applied though an auxil-
iary set of slip rings located aft of the brushless exciter. This auxiliary slip ring assembly is employed
only during starting. On all other occasions, the auxiliary brushes are lifted from the rings by mechan-
ical actuators.
The static start collector assembly is designed to operate during starting of the generator from turning
gear to rated speed. Before the generator is started, the brushholder must be fully engaged with all the
brushes making complete contact will the collector rings. When activated, the brush holder will engage
and actuator will stop automatically by limit switches. Once the brushes are engaged, power can be
applied to the collector rings. The automatic start sequence will then proceed.
Once the generator is at rated speed, the power to the collector rings (generator field winding) must be
turned off before the brushholder is retracted or damage to the collector or brushless exciter may result.
The brushholder will continue to retract until actuator is shut off by the limit switches.
Collector ring operation should be checked weekly or every 10 starts using observation windows and
any sparking during starting should be remedied immediately. Also, check brushes for wear. Replace
brushes when wear gage reaches limit mark.
1. The following initial checks to be made:
a. LCI controls are properly set per Turbine Operating Procedures
b. LCI safeties are reset and operational
c. Generator safeties are reset and operational
d. Verify flow and temperature of bearing oil is within defined limits.
e. Turn on water to the gas coolers.
NOTE
The generator grounding transformer will open automatically during start

sequence.
For static start operation involving a GE exciter (EX2000/EX2100), the start up

is fully automated. Prior to starting, the turbine control switches the exciter into
manual regulator static start mode. In this mode the exciter output is controlled
via a reference input from the static starter. This reference signal can be either
hardwired or on the UDH. When the static starter is disengaged at about 80 to
90 % speed the turbine control shuts the exciter off. Once the static starter has
been physically disconnected from the generator by opening the 89SS disconnect
switch the exciter is switched to automatic regulator mode and restarted. The gen-
erator terminal voltage will go to the AVR preset level (typically rated voltage).
The automatic synch control will now take over and adjust terminal voltage as
necessary to synchronize.
6
2. When the unit is turning slowly by means of the turning gear motor, check for rubbing.
3. Check position of auxiliary collector ring brushes on collector rings to see that they ride properly
on the rings.
4. Regulate the cold liquid flow valves to obtain the rated flow condition. The cold gas temperature
inside the generator will then be a function of cold liquid temperature and the losses during the
start sequence.
5. As the generator is brought up to speed, check the mechanical balance by taking shaft vibration
readings.
6. The resistance temperature detectors and field temperature should be checked frequently during
startup to ascertain that the winding temperatures are not excessive
7. At 90% speed verify that the LCI is de-energized and that the disconnect switch between it and
the generator has opened.
8. Verify that the LCI exciter circuit breaker has been opened.
9. Verify that the disconnect switch between the generator neutral and the grounding transformer is
closed.
IV. BEFORE SYNCHRONIZING
1. See that all circuits connecting the generator armature to any load are open. Be sure exciter control
switch is “OFF” so the exciter field is off.
2. Close all AVR (Automatic Voltage Regulator) maintenance disconnects, if applicable. Switch on the
ac and dc power to the regulator, if not already engerized
3. Start-up using the automatic voltage regulator is recommended.
4. Confirm factory preset of the minimum excitation regulator setpoint, per voltage regulator instruc-
tions. For analog voltage regulators, it may take up to 60 seconds for the motor operated voltage
adjuster to travel to its minimum excitation position. In all cases, the setpoint should yield between
80-100% voltage under open circuit.
5. After the unit is at 98 to 100% of rated speed, and the start sequence in section III has been fulfilled,
switch on excitation. If the manual regulator is used for start-up, the generator terminal voltage should
build up to the setpoint within about 10 to 30 seconds. If the automatic regulator is used for start-up,
the generator terminal voltage will build up very rapidly, in 3 to 4 seconds. Analog regulators may
have some voltage overshoot.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to operate lower than 95% of rated speed since the generator, the
exciter, and the voltage regulator could be damaged, unless under frequency pro-
tection is provided.
6. Check that generator voltage is approximately equal to the bus voltage.
7
7. If the manual voltage regulator is used for start-up, adjust the generator voltage to rated voltage using
the applicable voltage adjuster. For generator with analog auto/man. regulators, balance the transfer
meter using the voltage adjuster of the automatic regulator, then, transfer to automatic voltage regu-
lator.
8. Recheck the generator voltage with the bus voltage.
NOTE
Generators equipped with a GE exciter (EX2000/2100) shall be energized with

the exciter in automatic mode, as they are provided with a V/Hz limiter, prevent-
ing generator overfluxing. Setpoints for automatic and manual mode track each
other without operator adjustment. GE Exciters (EX2000/2100) operate in manual
mode only during static starting (if so equipped) and in the event that PT feedback
signals are lost to the AVR.
V. SYNCHRONIZING THE GENERATOR
CAUTION
At the time of synchronization, the generator voltage must be matched to the sys-
tem voltage to within ±5% and the breaker closing angle must not exceed 10 elec-
trical degrees.
CAUTION
The following checks are essential as the damage resulting from improper syn-
chronizing can be extremely great.
Before any attempt is made to close the generator breaker, the phase sequence of the generator and the
system should be checked to make absolutely certain that the phase rotation of the generator and the line
are the same. At this time check the synchronizing equipment connections.
After the above checks have been made, the generator can be synchronized and connected to the line.
Load the generator according to applicable instructions. Refer also to the GENERATOR REACTIVE CA-
PABILITY CURVE for generator load capability.
The resistance temperature detectors should be checked frequently to ascertain that the winding tempera-
tures are not excessive. The output capability of the generator depends upon the cold gas temperature at
the cooler outlets inside the generator. Refer to the GENERATOR CAPABILITY CURVES to determine
the output capability of the generator for a particular cold gas temperature.
VI. SHUTTING DOWN THE GENERATOR
1. Reduce the load on the unit to zero by adjusting the turbine and the excitation control systems (or by
switching off loads on an individual machine). It will usually be necessary to adjust the voltage reg-
ulator in order to reduce the generator line current to zero when the generator is operating in parallel
with a power system.
8
2. When the load current has been reduced to zero, open the generator line breaker and switch off exci-
tation. This should be done before the generator falls below 95% of rated speed.
3. Shut off the water to the air coolers when the speed has been reduced to 50% of rated.
When shutting down a generator do not attempt to reduce the speed rapidly by means of core loss,
as magnetic flux saturation can be reached in the armature core, and the flux leakage into the stator
frame may result in eddy currents causing heating in the stator frame structure.
VII. POWER FACTOR ADJUSTMENT
When operating the generator singly, the power factor is determined by the power factor that the load de-
mands. However, when the generator is operating on a system or in parallel with other machines, its power
factor is determined by the generator field current. The power factor for the generator may be adjusted by
adjusting the field current; for overexcited (or lagging power factor) operation increasing the field current
will lower the power factor, and decreasing the field current will raise the power factor.
VIII. EFFECT OF LEADING AND LAGGING POWER FACTOR
All turbine-generator units are designed to meet a particular rating. This rating includes the power factor,
in addition to kVA, voltage, and speed. However, because of system conditions, turbine-generator units
are usually operated at other than rated power factor, and it is important for the operators to know the
capabilities and limitations of this type of operation. These are shown by a reactive capability curve which
is included in the data section of the instruction book. A typical reactive capability curve showing the
output capability of the generator for one particular value of generator cold gas temperature is shown in
Figure 1. This curve is plotted in per unit for illustrative reasons.
To illustrate the relationship of kW, kVAR, and kVA, a vector diagram has been added to the lower left
hand corner of the curve. This diagram shows that at any operating point on the reactive capability curve,
the values of kW and kVAR may be vectorially added to determine the kVA.
The majority of switchboards in power stations are provided with kW and kVAR meters, so that the reactive
capability curves may be used directly. Therefore, it is not usually necessary when operating a generator
to know the kVA.
An inspection of Figure 1shows that the portion of the curves extending between the rated power factor
lagging line and the 1.0 power factor line is an arc of a circle whose radius of 1.0 per unit kVA corresponds
to the rating. In this region the kVA is limited by armature winding temperature limitations.
In the region of operation between the rated power factor line and zero power factor lagging (over-excited),
the kVA is limited by the temperature rise of the field winding. In the leading power factor region of
operation (under-excited), the kVA must be reduced to maintain safe stator core end-iron temperatures.
NOTE
The Vee curves included in the Operator‘s Manual are provided to show excitation
requirements only. Refer to the actual reactive capability curve for operation and
loading of this particular generator.
9
Zero P.F. Lagging

+1.0
Lagging
+0.9
+0.8 Rated P.F.

Lagging
Armature
+0.7 Winding
Heating
+0.6 Limitation
Field Winding
+0.5 Heat Limitation
+0.4
Reactive Power Per Unit
+0.3
kVAR
+0.2 1.0 P.F.
+0.1
0
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1.0 1.1
–0.1
KW–Per Unit
–0.2
–0.3
Armature Core End–Iron
–0.4 Heating Limitation
Leading
–0.5
θ
–0.6
Cos θ = Power Factor
Figure 1. Typical Reactive Capability for a Given Value of Cold Gas Temperature
Another consideration for low leading power–factor operation is steady–state stability. Testing has shown that
a typical turbine–generator unit, using a modern voltage regulator, will have a steady–state pullout consider-
ably below the operating range permitted by the heating limitations shown on the curve, but the limit is also
dependent on the system characteristics.
IX. OPERATION WITH UNBALANCED ARMATURE CURRENT
Turbine–generators are rated on the basis of balanced load conditions. With a balanced three–phase load, the
generator phase currents are equal in magnitude and are in symmetrical phase sequence. With unbalanced load
conditions, the phase currents and terminal voltages deviate from this ideal relationship and a negative phase
sequence armature current is imposed on the generator. Excessive unbalanced loading results in extra losses
and temperature rises which erode the generator design margins. The extra losses appear primarily at the sur-
face of the rotor, and generator capability decreases with an increase in the amount of unbalance.
Permissible balanced load operation is defined by the generator reactive capability curves in terms of generator
kW and kVAR. The generator is designed to operate at rated kVA within the range of 95 and 105% of rated
terminal voltage under balanced conditions.
10
Permissible unbalanced load operation is defined by the generator reactive capability curves, the maximum
phase current capability, and the permissible negative sequence current. Under unbalanced conditions, the
generator may also be operated at rated kVA capability, calculated using the average of the line–to–line volt-
ages and the average of the phase currents, provided the maximum phase current does not exceed the following
values:
A. Terminal voltage from 100 to 105% of rated:

Maximum phase current = rated armature current
B. Terminal voltage from 95 to 100% of rated:

rated line–to–line voltage
Maximum phase current rated phase current
aver. of line–line voltages
An evaluation of a given unbalanced load condition can be made by comparing the actual negative sequence
armature current with the maximum permissible negative sequence armature current, and comparing the maxi-
mum phase current with the capability listed above. If the maximum phase current exceeds the limiting values
listed, or if the actual negative sequence current is in excess of the maximum permissible, one of the following
corrective measures should be taken:
1. Reduce the unbalanced load
2. Increase the generator power factor
3. Reduce the generator kVA load
4. Reduce the terminal voltage (down to a minimum of 95% of rated voltage).

The maximum permissible negative phase sequence current is 0.08 per unit, where base armature current is
determined as follows:
• For cold gas temperatures less than or equal to rated cold gas temperatures, base current is the armature
current level at the rated cold gas base load output capability of the generator.
• For cold gas temperatures greater than rated cold gas temperature, base current is variable and corresponds
to the armature current level at the base load output capability of the generator at the particular cold gas
temperature.
Cold gas temperature, as referred to above, is the temperature of the cooling gas at the cooler outlets inside
the generator.
The normal short–time capability is given as the integrated product of (I2)2t, where I2 = per unit negative phase
sequence current and t = time in seconds. The allowable value is shown in the Generator Data sheet and applies
for times up to 120 seconds.
The actual negative sequence armature current may be calculated using Figure 2, provided there are no zero
phase sequence currents. For example, let Ia = 0.880, Ib = 0.704, and Ic = 0.757, in per unit of rated armature
current. Then Ib/Ia is 0.8 and Ic/Ia is 0.86. From Figure 2, I2/Ia is 0.125 and I2 = 0.125 x 0.880 = 0.11, in per
unit of rated armature current.
11
A helpful rule, applying with less than 0.05 per unit negative phase sequence current, is that the positive phase
sequence component is approximately the average of the three phase currents, and the negative phase sequence
component is approximately the maximum deviation of any of the phase currents from the average.
Operation according to these unbalanced load recommendations is not intended to be within limits of guaran-
teed temperatures or limits of temperatures established by standards for operations at the machine rating. The
departures from temperature limits established by standards will be small, however, and temperatures general-
ly will be within a safe temperature range that would be expected if the machine were operated within the range
of 95 to 105% terminal voltage at rated balanced kVA.
The magnitude of the extra losses and heating resulting from zero phase sequence armature current will depend
on the individual generator design (in particular, the armature winding pattern) as well as the value of the zero
phase sequence armature current. Zero phase sequence loading of a particular generator should be referred to
the manufacturer for a recommendation.
In the absence of data from the manufacturer, a basis for evaluating zero phase sequence loading, or combined
negative phase sequence and zero phase sequence loading, is the following. Combine the per unit zero phase
sequence, Io, and negative phase sequence, I2, current components according to the following equation, and
observe the same limitations for the resulting equivalent current, I1, as shown for I2. This rule is conservative,
but generally should be adequate for the rather rare situations where it is necessary to impose zero phase se-
quence loads on turbine–generators.
0.20 0.70
0.70
0.75
0.75
0.15
0.80
0.80
I2 0.85
0.10 0.85 Ib
Ia Ib Ia
Ia
0.90
0.90
0.05
0.95 0.95
0 1.0
0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
Ic
Ia
Ia = largest of three phase currents

Ib = smallest of three phase currents
Ic = third phase current of intermediate value
Figure 2. Negative Phase Sequence Current from the Magnitudes of the Three
Phase Currents (For Case of No Zero Phase Current)
I 1 + Ǹ(I 2) 2 ) 2(I 0) 2
12
X. OPERATION OF THE AIR COOLERS
The ventilating air is circulated through the generator by the rotor fans in a closed system and the heat
absorbed by the air is removed in the cooler sections by the cooling water. The generator data sheet indi-
cates the water flow and the maximum water temperature required for satisfactory operation at rated load.
Recommended coolant flows should not be exceeded without generator approval or damage to the coolers
may result.
If it is necessary to clean the cooler sections while operating, the sections may be taken out of service one at
a time without shutting down the unit. Cooler tube cleaning is done in place by closing the coolant isolation
valves, draining the cooler section, and removing the water boxes on both ends of the cooler section to be
cleaned. The maximum load which may be carried with one cooler section out of service must be limited
to the values given on the data sheet.
XI. RECTIFIER LOAD
Turbine-generators are rated on the basis of armature current with negligible deviation from a pure sine
wave. If part of the generator ac output is converted to dc, harmonic currents generated by the rectifying
process will flow in the generator armature windings. These harmonic currents result in extra losses, pri-
marily at the surface of the rotor, which are not normally provided for in the generator design.
The decrease in generator capability is a function of the magnitude of each of the harmonic currents and
of the electrical design of the specific generator. Before any rectifier load is connected to the generator,
it is recommended that the schedule of harmonic currents be submitted to GE for use in determining the
corresponding reduction in generator capability.
XII. LOSS OF FIELD
Operation of the turbine-generator connected to a system without field current will quickly lead to exces-
sive field heating. The degree of heating depends on several conditions, including the initial load on the
machine, the manner in which field current is lost, the manner in which the generator is connected to the
system and the period of time the generator remains connected to the system. When excitation is lost, the
generator tends to overspeed and operates as an induction generator. This overspeed normally results in
a reduction in load due to the characteristics of the turbine governor, an increase in armature current, and
possible low voltage at the generator terminals, and is accompanied by high rotor currents. These rotor
currents will flow through both the field winding (provided the field winding is connected to the exciter)
and the rotor body. The rotor body currents will cause high and possibly dangerous temperatures in a very
short time. The time required for the heating to become dangerous depends on the conditions of loss of
excitation. In general this time is short, being only a matter of seconds rather than minutes, for a machine
with a completely open field winding. In addition, opening of the field circuit with the machine carrying
a load may subject the winding and exciter to high and possibly dangerous voltages from the inductive
effects of the winding.
If excitation is lost by accidental tripping or switching off of excitation, excitation should be immediately
re-applied without shutting down the machine.
If the machine is discovered to be operating without field for an unknown interval of time, it should be
immediately tripped off the line and shut down for an inspection to determine the degree of rotor damage
from heating.
13
Relays are now available which determine when a machine has started slipping due to loss of excitation.
Since heating occurs in a relatively few seconds after loss of field, use of such relays to trip the machine
from the line will prevent damage from overheating and the machine may be put back in service as soon
as excitation has been re-established.
XIII. INSPECTION FOLLOWING TRIPOUT
If the machine is tripped off the line by any of its protective devices, no attempt should be made to resyn-
chronize the machine before the cause of the tripout is determined. The exciter diode wheel fuses should
be inspected.
Following a tripout due to the differential phase relays, both the armature and field windings should be
tested and otherwise inspected before attempting to resynchronize.
If an exciter protective trip or transfer to backup voltage regulator occurs, the cause of the protective action
must be determined and corrected. The exciter protective relays must be per regulator instructions.
XIV. GROUNDED FIELD WINDING
It is general practice to operate a turbine-generator with the excitation system ungrounded. If an accidental
single ground occurs on the generator field operating on an ungrounded system, no change in the excitation
system occurs at the time of the ground, and the machine may be removed from the system without risk of
system interruption or costly damage to the generator field. As soon as possible after a ground is indicated,
the generator should be removed from the line and the difficulty repaired.
CAUTION
In no case should a generator be allowed to remain on the system for any appre-
ciable time after a ground occurs. If a second ground were to occur, the field could
experience damage due to the large current flow through the closed circuit.
XV. GENERATOR LOAD CAPABILITY
The generator should not be operated at any loads above the output allowed on the capability curves even
though its operating temperature rise may be well below the guaranteed temperature rises specified and the
cooling water temperature may be lower than specified on the data sheet. The generator is designed to give
long trouble-free life for continuous and intermittent operation at allowable outputs, and loading beyond
the capability curves encroaches on the design margins built into the machine.
Similarly, the generator should not be operated when temperature indicating devices (such as stator slot
RTD’s) read above the Alarm Levels specified in the Generator Device Data drawing. The generator shall
not be operated when any such devices read above the Shutdown Levels specified in the Generator Device
Data drawing. In applications where an operator may not continuously monitor these devices and alarms,
consideration should be given to implementing an automatic shutdown or trip to provide this protection.
14
PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
15
GE Energy
www.gepower.com
16

351-02020-01A
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Diode Fault Detector
for Series Redundant Brushless Exciters
Description • Installation • Operation

• Maintenance • Parts Description
Made By:
Rockwell Automation - P.O. Box 8446
Kato Engineering Mankato, MN 56002-8447
(507) 625-4011
Fax. (507) 345-2798
DANGER
ONLY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL FAMILIAR WITH THE CONSTRUCTION AND

OPERATION OF THIS EQUIPMENT AND THE HAZARDS INVOLVED SHOULD
INSTALL, ADJUST, OPERATE AND /OR SERVICE THIS UNIT. READ AND
UNDERSTAND THIS MANUAL IN ITS ENTIRETY BEFORE PROCEEDING. FAILURE
TO OBSERVE THIS PRECAUTION COULD RESULT IN SEVERE BODILY INJURY OR
LOSS OF LIFE.
DANGER
THE USER IS RESPONSIBLE FOR CONFORMING TO THE NATIONAL ELECTRIC

CODE AND ALL OTHER APPLICABLE LOCAL CODES. WIRING, GROUNDING,
DISCONNECTS, AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTION ARE PARTICULARLY
IMPORTANT. FAILURE TO OBSERVE THIS PRECAUTION COULD RESULT IN
SEVERE BODILY INJURY OR LOSS OF LIFE.
DANGER
SUBSEQUENT STEPS REQUIRE ROTATING PARTS AND/OR ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS

TO BE EXPOSED. STAY CLEAR IF UNIT MUST BE RUNNING OR DISCONNECT AND
LOCKOUT AND TAG POWER SOURCE IF CONTACT MUST BE MADE. FAILURE TO
OBSERVE THESE PRECAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN SEVERE BODILY INJURY OR
LOSS OF LIFE.
WARNING
IF LIFTING OF EXCITER IS REQUIRED, DO NOT PULL AT AN ANGLE ON LIFTING

EYES. THE LIFTING EYES ARE FOR THE UNIT ONLY AND NOT FOR THE
COMPLETE SET. FAILURE TO OBSERVE THESE PRECAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN
BODILY INJURY.
Table of Contents
SECTION 1: Introduction and Description
1.1. Introduction
1.2. General Description
1.3. Construction and Mounting
1.3.1. Diode Fault Detector (DFD) Versions and Application
1.3.2. Input Connections
1.3.3. Output Connections
1.3.4. Installation Instructions
1.3.4.1 508-00118-31, -32 Detectors
1.3.4.2 508-00118-33 Detectors
1.4 Description of Operation
1.4.1. DFD Circuit Overview
1.4.2. DFD Output Signals
SECTION 2: Initial Inspection, Storage and Alignment
2.1. Receiving Inspection

2.2. Alignment and Adjustments
SECTION 3: Maintenance
3.1 Periodic Maintenance

3.2 Replacement
3.3 Insulation Resistance
SECTION 4: Troubleshooting
4.1. Diode Fault Alarm

4.2. Troubleshooting General Method
4.3. Wire Continuity Test
4.4. Checkout of Signal Wires to Ground Detector
4.5. Functional Check of Diode Fault Detector
4.6. Replacement Part Numbers
TABLE OF FIGURES AND ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure 1: Diode Fault Detector Mounting on Brushless Exciter Rotors
Figure 2: Block Diagram of Detector AC and DC Connections on Diode Wheel
Figure 3: Complete Diode Wheel Assembly (6A6 and 7A6 type exciter designs)
Figure 4: Diode Wheel Assembly – Inboard Side (6A6 and 7A6 type exciter designs)
Figure 5: Diode Wheel Assembly – Outboard Side (6A6 and 7A6 type exciter designs)
Figure 6: Diode Fault Detector Outline of Mounting and Connections
Figure 7: Diode Fault Detector Mounting – Face View (Photo)
Figure 8: Diode Fault Detector Top View and Output Connections to Ground Detector System
(Photo)
Figure 9: Diode Fault Detector Connection Example to DC Buss (Photo of 6A6 and 7A6 type
exciter designs)
Figure 10: Diode Fault Detector AC Connection Example and Wire Harness Securing in Diode
Wheel Groove (Photo of 6A6 and 7A6 type exciter designs)
Figure 11: Complete Diode Wheel Assembly (7A7 and 9A4 type exciter designs)
Figure 12: Diode Wheel Assembly – Inboard Side (7A7 and 9A4 type exciter designs)
Figure 13: Diode Wheel Assembly – Outboard Side (7A7 and 9A4 type exciter designs)
Figure 14: Block Diagram of Diode Fault Detector / Field Ground Detector
Figure 15: Diode Fault Detector Alarm Logic

1. INTRODUCTION AND DESCRIPTION
1.1 Introduction
This manual describes the Diode Fault Detector used on brushless exciters with series redundant diodes on the diode
wheel used mainly on 2 pole synchronous generators. The instruction book covers the general description,
construction, installation, operation, initial inspection, maintenance, troubleshooting and renewal parts.
1.2 General Description
The Diode Fault Detector is used in conjunction with a field ground detector system (see separate instruction book)
to detect faulty diodes in a series redundant brushless exciter system. The brushless excitation system consists of a
high frequency AC generator complete with a rotating, series redundant diode assembly and a lead assembly that
connects the DC diode bridge output to the field windings of the main generator. The Diode Fault Detector is a
electronic module mounted underneath the rim of the diode assembly hub or wheel between the wheel and the
armature of the exciter as shown in Figure 1.
The module connects to the AC and DC connections of the rectifier bridge and monitors the forward voltage drop of
the series redundant diodes within the rectifier bridge. It is also powered from the DC connections. If a diode fails
open or shorted , the forward voltage drop of the cells in that leg changes with respect to the other legs of the bridge.
This creates a ripple in the forward voltage balance which is detected in the module. When the ripple exceeds a
preset threshold, the module sends a fault signal to the field ground detector transmitter (see separate instruction
book) located diametrically opposite the Diode Fault Detector. The transmitter in turn sends the alarm signal to a
stationary receiver unit. The receiver sends this alarm signal to a remote device such as the brushless exciter voltage
regulator which provides a fault signal to the user.
A block diagram of how the Diode Fault Detector connects to the exciter and ground detector system is shown
in Figure 14 (found in section 1.4.).
RED DIODE FAULT DETECTOR
AC CONNECTION LINKS
DIODE WHEEL ASSEMBLY
AC CONNECTION RING
WIRE HARNESS GROOVE
DFD OUTPUT CONNECTIONS

TO GROUND DETECTOR
TRANSMITTER
GREEN
(CUT AWAY VIEW)

FIGURE #1a: DIODE FAULT DETECTOR MOUNTING
(6A6 AND 7A6 TYPE EXCITER ROTOR DESIGNS)
RED DIODE FAULT DETECTOR DIODE WHEEL ASSEMBLY
AC CONNECTION LINKS
AC CONNECTION RING WIRE HARNESS GROOVE
DFD OUTPUT CONNECTIONS

TO GROUND DETECTOR
TRANSMITTER GREEN
SPACER
(CUT AWAY VIEW)
FIGURE #1b: DIODE FAULT DETECTOR MOUNTING

(7A7 AND 9A4 TYPE BRUSHLESS EXCITER ROTORS)
1.3 Construction and Mounting
The Diode Fault Detector (DFD) is consists electronic components mounted to printed circuit boards and a heat sink
which are encapsulated in a high strength molded potting compound. The Detector has 2 holes for mounting to the
face of the diode assembly as shown in Figures 3 to 6.
1.3.1. DFD Versions and Application
As of the date of this publication there are 4 models of Diode Fault Detectors. These models are used for
various DC buss operating voltages and different diode wheel mechanical arrangements. The following list
gives the Kato Engineering part number and associated application information.
508-00118-32, 508-00118-34:
These 2 models are used on exciters with an output operating voltage range of 20 to 278 VDC. They
mount on 6A6 style exciters (with the smaller diode wheel). The –34 Detector incorporates a special
harness for mounting to diode wheels which do not have the harness groove (also the smaller 6A6 style
diode wheels).
508-00118-31:
This model is used on exciters with an output operating voltage range of 32 to 390 VDC. They mount
on 7A6 style exciters utilizing the smaller diameter diode wheel.
508-00118-33:
This model is used on exciters with an output operating voltage range of 60 to 525 VDC. They mount
on 7A7 and 9A4 style exciters utilizing the larger diameter diode wheel.
1.3.2. Input Connections
The Detector receives input signals from the AC and DC terminals of the diode bridge via the wire
harnesses (one on each side of the Detector). Each wire harness contains 3 pairs of leads for connection to
each pair of diodes. One lead of the pair connects to AC heatsink and other lead (DC lead) is routed
through the diode wheel opening for that heatsink and connects to the DC buss. The A and C leads are
encased in a harness and are routed in a groove in the diode wheel rim on the inboard side of the diode
wheel (figures 3, 4, and 6). The length of the leads in the harness are sized to assure connection lead
lengths match the mechanical arrangement of the correct AC phase. The leads must be connected to the
proper phase to avoid noise pickup from magnetic fields from the diode currents. The wires of the
harnesses are routed through the diode wheel openings as shown in Figure 2.
The DC leads are connected to the DC buss ring as shown in Figure 3 and 5.
The AC leads of the Detector are connected to the AC heatsink assembly under one of the bolts securing the
“U” shaped AC connection leads to the heatsinks. AC lead connection locations are shown in figures 3, 4,
11 and 12. For lead assembly and torque of the bolts for U connectors refer to the brushless exciter
instruction book.
DIODE FAULT MONITOR
ARMATURE PHASE CONNECTIONS, C+, A+, B+ ARMATURE PHASE CONNECTIONS, B-, C-, A-
C DC
C AC
C+ A+ B DC
B- AC HEAT C- A-
B+ B AC SINK
BL O G A DC G BL O
A AC
W Y DC BUS RING R B DC BUS RING W Y
POSITIVE POLARITY HARNESS NEGATIVE POLARITY HARNESS

DIODE WHEEL HUB
LAYOUT OF TOP VIEW OF DIODE WHEEL (RIM NOT SHOWN) WIRE COLOR CODE
O ORANGE Y YELLOW
G GREEN R RED
BL BLUE W WHITE
B BLACK
Figure 2: Block Diagram Of Detector AC And DC Connections On Diode Wheel
1.3.3. Output Connections
Two leads from the Ground Detector Transmitter (red and green) are routed to the Diode Fault Detector
along the outboard face of exciter AC connection ring (see Figure 1) or in a groove at the ID of the diode
wheel rim. These leads are connected to the DFD output terminals as shown in detail B of Figures 3, 4,
11 and 12. After the leads are connected to the Detector, they are secured to the “U” connector near the
Detector with glass cord and air dry varnish (Figure 1). The leads are then routed along the connection
ring face (in nearly all cases these leads will be pre-routed).
1.3.4. Installation Instructions
Installation of these models is basically the same in that they all mount under the rim of the diode wheel
(see Figure 1). They are also similar in that they contain a harness that distributes around the wheel and
connects across the series redundant diode assemblies located between the spokes of the wheel.
At the time of this publication there were 4 models of Diode Fault Detectors as listed in section 1.3.1.
Normally these Detectors will be mounted on the diode wheels at the factory. However, if field
installation is required the following sections will provide the instructions necessary for successful
installation or replacement of the Detector. Removal of the Detector which exists on the diode wheel is
as simple as disconnecting all of the leads connected to the potted Diode Fault Detector module and
removing the module along with the wire harness (which is potted right into the module).
NOTE: Care should be taken when removing the RED and GREEN wires from the DFD. These
wires will remain and be re-used and must not be damaged (these wires connect the DFD
to the Ground Detector System and are difficult to replace if damaged).
Refer to section 1.3.4.1. for installation instructions on the 508-00118-31 and –32 Detectors. Refer to
section 1.3.4.2. for installation instructions on the 508-00118-33 Detectors.
Tools Required:
v 3/8” torque wrench (small head is best) and 7/16” short socket
v 1/4” small open end or combination wrench
v screwdriver (medium flat tip for #8 screw)
v wire harness installation tool (provided along with the DFD)
v Loctite 242 or equivalent threadlocker
v Wire cutter, stripper, and crimping tools for 22AWG wire lugs
v Wire lugs (provided with the DFD)
v allen wrench to fit 1/4” x 20 socket head bolts
v nylon installation tools (provided with DFD for harness installation of –31 and –32 Detectors)
Kato Engineering part numbers: 172-60000-17
172-60000-18
GROOVE IN DIODE WHEEL RIM ID
DIODE WHEEL ASM.

DIODE WHEEL RIM
LEADS TO
AC/DC HEAT-
SINKS FAN
ASSURE MONITOR IS SEATED AGAINT RIM I.D.
DIODE FAULT MONITOR

RED MODULE DC AC
C
DC AC
A DC BUS
DC AC DIODE WHEEL ASM.
B RING
OUTPUT TERMINAL ( + )
CONNECTION
LEADS
TERM./
DIODE FAULT SCREW
OUTPUT TERMINAL ( - ) MONITOR
AC HEAT SINK
GREEN INSULATION
LEADS FROM GROUND

DETECTOR TRANSMITTER #1/4-20x1.5 MOUNTING SCREWS (2)
FLAT WASHER, LOCK WASHER AC
HEAT SINK
SIDE VIEW
FACE VIEW
SLIDE HARNESS INTO GROOVE
UNDERNEATH SLOT INSULATION
MAY NEED TO LOOSEN AC CONNECTORS
SIDE VIEW OF RIM NEAR AC HEAT SINK
Figure 6: Diode Fault Detector Outline of Mounting and Connections
1.3.4.1. 508-00118-31, -32 Style Detectors
Installation of these Detectors requires: installation of the wire harness, connection of the leads from
the Ground Detection System (GDS) to the DFD output terminals, mounting of the DFD module, and
termination of the sensing leads encased in the wire harness.
** Wire Harness Installation:

Installation of the wire harness on this type of DFD requires the wire harness to be wedged into a
groove located on the ID of the diode wheel. Installation of this wire harness is facilitated through the
use of the nylon installation tools provided in the package along with the DFD. The tools and their
associated Kato part numbers are listed in the above section under the heading “Tools Required”.
To install the harness, first locate the DFD module on the spoke face of the diode wheel rim in which
the module will ultimately be secured. Second, using the heavier of the two installation tools, push the
wire harness into the groove between the diode wheel rim and the insulation papers found under the
series diode assembly heatsinks (figure’s 7 and 10 show proper installation of the wire harness). Care
should be taken when pushing the wire harness into the groove so as not to damage the sensing
wires. The portion of the harness nearest to the DFD module fits quite snugly in the groove.
Therefore, it may be necessary to loosen the AC link nearest to the module in order to get the
harness into the groove without damaging the sensing leads.
Spread the harness out around the diode wheel rim as it is being installed (the lead wires will be
terminated during a later step in this installation process). Do not trim any sensing leads at this
time. The finer of the installation tools can be used to finish off the complete installation of the wire
harness (press the harness totally within the groove). Make sure that the wire harness is total
encased by the groove in the rim – the harness should not hang out beyond the edge of the rim
at any point.
** Connecting the Output Leads of the DFD to the GDS:

The next step is to connect the red and green leads which run between the GDS and the DFD. It is
easiest to connect these wires before final mounting of the DFD module is completed. To accomplish
this simply connect the ring lugged red wire to the terminal of the DFD which is closest to the diode
wheel ID (the red wire must be landed on the terminal closest to the edge of the diode wheel rim
– the terminal furthest out on the radius).
Next land the lugged green wire on the other terminal of the DFD module (the terminal closest to the
shaft).
The lugs should be installed (if at all possible) with the barrels (crimped portion of the lug) pointing
out radially from the terminals (so that the centrifugal force will not turn the lug and terminal). Refer
to Figure 8 showing these terminations.
Care should be exercised when terminating or landing these leads so that they will not be
damaged or broken – these wires are 24AWG stranded wire and can be fragile if mishandled.
Once these leads are terminated the terminals should be secured with a threadlocker (loctite 242 or
equivalent) and sprayed with an air dry varnish.
** Mounting the DFD Module:

At this point the DFD module can be fastened to the diode wheel. The module is secured by (2) ¼” -
20 x 1 ½” socket head cap screws with flat washers. The screw should be secured with loctite 242
threadlocker or equivalent and torqued to 50 in-lbs. While tightening make sure that the module is
seated tightly against the ID of the diode wheel (slightly pry the module up by inserting a flat tipped
screwdriver between the module and the shaft collar).
Figures 7 and 8 show the installed module as it is mounted to the diode wheel.
** Terminating the Sensing Lead Wires:

Termination of the sensing lead wires is critical. This operation should be done carefully as the
lead wires are exposed to the full electrical and mechanical stresses produced by this rotary
excitation system.
Please refer to figures 3, 4, 5, 7, 9, and 10 for assistance in determining where and how each sensing
lead should be terminated (if replacing a DFD module carefully examine and document the existing
lead termination arrangement). Termination of these lead wires requires trimming each perspective
lead to the proper length (very critical), stripping back the Teflon coated wire, lugging the lead with
the proper type lug (these lugs are shipped in the same package that contains the DFD), and finally
terminating the perspective lead to the proper termination point. Within the package that contains the
DFD module there are 3 different sizes of wire lugs. The smallest ring lugs (number 6 hole) are used
for termination of the leads which connect the DFD to the GDS (this process should already have been
done in previous steps). Also included in this package are ring lugs containing a number 8 size hole
(to be used to terminate the leads to the DC buss bar located on the outboard side of the diode wheel –
see figure 5). The remaining wire lugs in this package are the lugs that will be used to terminate the
sensing leads to the AC connection links. These ring lugs contain a ¼” hole for securing the lead
directly to the bolts that fasten the AC connection links to the heat sinks of the series redundant diode
assemblies – refer to figures 4, 7, and 10.
Termination of the sensing leads is best performed by starting at the DFD module (terminate the
sensing leads closest to the module first then continue around the rim until all leads have been
properly terminated).
The diode wheel rim is the securing surface for all of these sensing leads. When terminating
these leads be sure that when the lead is finally landed in the correct location there is no
possibility for the lead to creep out or extend out in any way beyond the edge of the diode
wheel rim. The diode wheel rim protects the sensing leads from the centrifugal forces
present when the exciter is rotating.
Begin by extending the green wire down below the insulating paper and over the closest AC link
mounting bolt. There is a green sensing wire that extends out from either side of the DFD
module. Refer to Figure 4 to see how these leads are to be connected (the sensing lead wire color
is shown on this figure). Figure 4 does not show the AC connection links. However, the sensing
leads are to be connected under the bolt head and on top of the connection link.
Trim the lead wire so that after the lug is applied, and fastened to the proper connection link, the
lead wire length is not so long that it may creep out from under the diode wheel rim when the unit
is running. It is absolutely necessary that the sensing lead wire does not extend, or have the
potential to extend, out beyond the edge of the diode wheel rim once it is finally terminated
on the AC link. Figure 10 is a photo showing how these wires should look once terminated (this
photo was taken without the AC link in place and was intended to show proper lead length and
how the sensing leads break out of the wire harness only).
The next step is to feed the red and black sensing leads through the diode wheel spoke openings
(windows). They should be fed through the windows in the locations shown on Figure 4. The
sensing leads are shown on this figure and are the red, black, white and yellow leads. After
feeding the leads through the windows, measure and trim the leads. Then feed them back though
the window and strip and lug the lead wire. Feed the lugged wire through the window again as
before and terminate the lead on the DC buss in the proper location (use loctite 242 or equivalent
for securing the #8 screws used to terminate the leads which connect to the DC buss bars). Figure
5 shows how they are to be terminated on the DC buss bars located on the diode wheel rim
outboard side (included in this figure is the color of the sensing lead as well as the proper location
for termination to the DC buss). As before, these leads must be terminated short enough so that
the potential for these leads to extend out beyond the edge of the diode wheel rim is non-existent.
Make sure that the barrels of the lugs lay against the diode wheel rim. This will reduce the
chance of the lug turning under normal centrifugal loads.
Figure 9 is a photo showing termination of a sensing lead to the DC buss bar. In this photo one of
the yellow leads of the DFD is shown terminated along with the black lead from the GDS
transmitter.
** Final Preparation:
Once all of the sensing leads have been properly terminated, the next step is to spray all of
the connection points with an air dry varnish.
At this point the installation of the 508-00118-31 and 508-00118-32 Diode Fault Detectors is
complete.
Figure 7: Diode Fault Detector Mounting – Face View (Photo)

Figure 8: Diode Fault Detector Top View and Output Connections to Ground Detector (Photo)
Figure 9: Diode Fault Detector Connection Example to DC Buss

(Photo of 6A6 and 7A6 type exciter designs)
Figure 10: Diode Fault Detector AC Connection Example and Wire Harness Securing in Diode
Wheel Groove (Photo of 6A6 and 7A6 type exciter designs)
1.3.4.2. 508-00118-33 Style Detectors
Installation of this Detector requires: installation of the wire harness, connection of the leads from the
Ground Detection System (GDS) to the DFD output terminals, mounting of the DFD module, and
termination of the sensing leads encased in the wire harness. If this is a replacement of an existing
DFD module then carefully examine and document the installation as it exists. Also, the groove
should be cleaned out thoroughly with a solvent. Cleaning of the groove is required so that the silicon
sealant used to retain the harness will adhere properly to the coating in the groove.
** Wire Harness Installation:

Installation of the wire harness on this type of DFD requires the wire harness to be laid into a groove
located on the ID of the diode wheel. The harness must also be installed in the groove underneath the
series redundant diode assemblies (the harness must be fed between the mounting block of this
assembly and into the groove – in some cases loosening of the diode assembly may facilitate
installation of the harness in this location). Centrifugal force exerted on this wire harness while the
exciter is rotating is what will keep it in place.
Spread the harness out around the diode wheel rim as it is being installed (the lead wires will be
terminated during a later step in this installation process). Do not trim any sensing leads at this
time.
Once the harness is laid into the groove, apply 100% clear silicon sealant over the harness and into the
groove, at approximately 4 inch intervals around the diode wheel rim. Apply the silicon sealant so
that there is a bead of sealant approximately ½” in length which fully fills the groove and encases the
harness in that location. Make sure that the wire harness is total encased by the groove in the rim
– the harness should not hang out beyond the edge of the rim at any point.
Allow the silicon sealant to skin and dry for about at least an hour before proceeding on with the
installation process.
** Connecting the Output Leads of the DFD to the GDS:

Once the silicon sealant has dried sufficiently to hold the harness in place, the next step is to connect
the red and green leads which run between the GDS and the DFD. It is easiest to connect these wires
before final mounting of the DFD module is completed. To accomplish this simply connect the ring
lugged red wire to the terminal of the DFD which is closest to the diode wheel ID (the red wire must
be landed on the terminal closest to the edge of the diode wheel rim – the terminal furthest out
on the radius).
Next land the lugged green wire on the other terminal of the DFD module (the terminal closest to the
shaft).
The lugs should be installed (if at all possible) with the barrels (crimped portion of the lug) pointing
out radially from the terminals (so that the centrifugal force will not turn the lug and terminal). Refer
to Figure 8 showing these terminations.
Care should be exercised when terminating or landing these leads so that they are not damaged
or broken – these wires are 24AWG stranded wire and can be fragile if mishandled.
Once these leads are terminated the terminals should be secured with a threadlocker (loctite 242 or
equivalent) and the terminals sprayed with an air dry varnish.
** Mounting the DFD Module:

At this point the DFD module can be fastened to the diode wheel. The module is secured by (2) ¼” x
20 x 1 ½” socket head cap screws with flat washers. The screw should be secured with loctite 242
threadlocker or equivalent and torqued to 50 in-lbs. While tightening make sure that the module is
seated tightly against the ID of the diode wheel (slightly pry the module up by inserting a flat tipped
screwdriver between the module and the shaft collar).
Figures 7 and 8 show an installed module as it is mounted to the 6A6 and 7A6 style diode
wheels. The mounting on this larger style diode wheel looks the same except that the rim is
deeper and the module nestles deeper into the rim (the entire DFD back radius fits under the
rim – Figure 1 shows this).
** Terminating the Sensing Lead Wires:

Termination of the sensing lead wires is critical. This operation should be done carefully as the
lead wires are exposed to the full electrical and mechanical stresses produced by this rotary excitation
system.
Please refer to figures 12 and 13 for assistance in determining where and how each sensing lead
should be terminated (if replacing a DFD module carefully examine and document the existing lead
termination arrangement). Termination of these lead wires requires trimming each perspective lead to
the proper length (very critical), stripping back the Teflon coated wire, lugging the lead with the
proper type lug (these lugs are shipped in the same package that contains the DFD), and finally
terminating the perspective lead to the proper termination point. Within the package that contains the
DFD module there are 2 different sizes of wire lugs. The smallest ring lugs (number 6 hole) are used
for termination of the leads which connect the DFD to the GDS (this process should already have been
done in previous steps). Also included in this package are ring lugs containing a number 8 size hole
which will be used to terminate the sensing leads contained within the wire harness to the AC and DC
sides of the series redundant diode heatsinks.
The AC sensing leads will all connect on the inboard side of the diode wheel assembly. Figure 11
displays the complete diode wheel assembly and Figure 12 shows, in greater detail, the inboard side of
the diode wheel assembly.
Termination of the sensing leads is best performed by starting at the DFD module (terminate the
sensing leads closest to the module first then continue around the rim until all leads have been
properly terminated).
The diode wheel rim is the securing surface for all of these sensing leads. When terminating
these leads be sure that when the lead is finally landed in the correct location there is no
possibility for the lead to creep out or extend out in any way beyond the edge of the diode
wheel rim. The diode wheel rim protects the sensing leads from the centrifugal forces
present when the exciter is rotating.
Begin by extending the green wire from the wire harness and out to the first heatsink. There is a
green sensing wire that extends out from either side of the DFD module. Refer to Figure 12 to see
how these leads are to be connected (the sensing lead wire color is shown on this figure). Trim
and lug the wire such that when landed the wire will lay on the rim of the diode wheel and not be
too loose to hang out beyond the edge of the diode wheel rim.
It is absolutely necessary that the sensing lead wire does not extend, or have the potential to
extend, out beyond the edge of the diode wheel rim once it is finally terminated on the AC
link.
Next apply loctite 242 or equivalent threadlocker to the #8 screw which will be used to secure the
sensing lead to the heatsink and terminate the lead to the heatsink.
The next step is to feed the red and black sensing leads through the diode wheel spoke openings
(windows). They should be fed through the windows in the locations shown on Figure 12 (these
are the red, black, yellow and white wires). After feeding the leads through the windows, measure
and trim the leads. Then feed them back though the window and strip and lug the lead wire. Feed
the lugged wire through the window again as before and terminate the lead on the DC buss spiders
in the proper location as shown on Figure 13 (again use the loctite 242 or equivalent). As before,
these leads must be terminated short enough so that the potential for these leads to extend out
beyond the edge of the diode wheel rim is non-existent. Make sure that the barrels of the lugs
hang radially outward from the heatsinks. This will reduce the chance of the lug turning
under normal centrifugal loads.
Continue around the rim terminating each sensing wire as shown on figures 12 and 13 using the
same procedure as outlined above.
** Final Preparation:
Once all of the sensing leads have been properly terminated, the next step is to spray all of
the connection points with an air dry varnish.
At this point the installation of the 508-00118-33 Diode Fault Detector is complete.
FIGURE 11: COMPLETE DIODE WHEEL ASSEMBLY
(7A7 AND 9A4 TYPE EXCITER DESIGNS)
FIGURE 12: DIODE WHEEL-INBOARD SIDE
FIGURE 13: DIODE WHEEL-OUTBOARD SIDE
1.4 Description of Operation
1.4.1. Diode Fault Detector Circuit Overview
The Diode Fault Detector senses the forward voltage drop of the series redundant diodes within the rectifier
bridge. Normally the forward voltage drop of each diode is about .7 and 1.2 volts DC or 1.4 to 2.4 volts for both
diodes. When one of the diodes fail either shorted (predominant mode) or open, the forward drop changes
significantly with respect to the other legs. The Detector senses this change by monitoring the filtered AC
component of the composite forward voltage drop signal of all the legs of a given polarity. Referring to block
diagram of the Detector (Figure 14), the following describes the basic circuit elements of the Diode Fault
Detector:
1. The Detector senses the forward voltage drop of the diodes in positive and negative buss separately. For
each polarity, the Detector receives the signals from the 3 AC phase connections and the DC output buss
(positive or negative). These signals are fed into a high or low value gate (A0) to detect the largest absolute
value of the potential difference as referenced to the DC buss. This is the unfiltered composite forward
voltage drop.
2. The output of A0 is then limited by the clamping circuit A1, filtered by circuit A2 (band limiting ) , and low
pass filtered by A3 to attenuate high frequency noise and bridge harmonics.
3. The filtered signal is fed into a high pass filter A4 to obtain the AC coupled ripple voltage or AC component
of the filtered forward voltage drop signal produced by the bridge.
4. The AC component of the filtered forward voltage drop signal from item 3 is converted to a DC signal by
precision rectifier A5. Circuit A6 is a pure integrating amplifier which provides added noise immunity and
fault detection delay timing to the AC ripple signal.
5. The resulting AC ripple signal is compared to a preset thresh-hold voltage for alarm, Vref1 or Vref2. When
signal exceeds the thresh-hold, output of the comparator A7 goes low signaling a diode fault condition.
6. The diode fault signals from the high and low side Detector circuits are passed to a low value gate (LVG), A9
along with a square wave pulse of about 1 to 2 Hz. With a normal condition, the diode fault signals are high
and the LVG , A9 provides a square wave output signaling a normal condition. If either of the diode fault
signals go low, the square wave signal is inhibited and the LVG output stays low indicating a diode fault has
occurred.
7. Circuit A10 monitors the input DC voltage and provides an inhibit signal when the input voltage is below the
preset threshold (about 32 Vdc for a –31 Detector). When the input DC voltage rises above the threshold ,
A10 goes from high to low (no inhibit). This signal is fed into the high value gate (HVG) A11 along with the
diode fault signal from A9 and it serves as to inhibit the diode fault signal from A9 when high. This prevents
spurious or unpredictable Detector operation when the exciter is operating at low voltage.
The preset threshold for: 508-00118-32, 34 is approx. 20VDC

508-00118-31 is approx. 32VDC
508-00118-33 is approx. 60VDC
This is the level of main field excitation at which the Diode Fault Detector will begin to monitor the status of
the diode wheel and series redundant diodes. It is at this point that the Detector will begin to output a signal
(pulse or continuous output).
8. HVG, A11 provides the diode fault alarm signal to an external device such is the optical isolator of the
ground detector transmitter. The opto-isolator is connected between Detector DC+ and the output of A11,
thus when A11 is low, the current flows (1 to 2 ma) through the isolator driving it to a high state (diode
fault). The transmitter sends this signal to the receiver which causes the diode fault alarm to go high, 24 Vdc.
When the output current of A11 is 1 to 2 Hz square wave, this indicates a normal condition. The resulting
signal out of the ground detector receiver is a 1 to 2 Hz square wave , 0 to 24 Vdc.
When the diode fault signal at A11 is high, current output to the transmitter is zero. This indicates an
undervoltage condition (from A10) or malfunction condition (under most conditions the current output will
go to zero when a malfunction has occurred). The diode fault signal output from the receiver will be
constant at about 0 Vdc.
9. Thus, the Diode Fault Detector alarm signal has three states which allows the indication of normal, alarm, or
malfunction / undervoltage condition. These states are summarized in Figure 15. The receiver sends the
diode fault alarm signal along with the generator ground fault alarm signals (see separate instruction book) to
a remote device for indication to user.
DIODE FAULT MONITOR

ROTATING COMPONENTS High Side Monitoring Circuit
A0 A1 A5 A6
DIODE BRIDGE ASM. A7
ISO. AMP/ LIMITER/ AC TO K
HVG FILTERS DC CNV. s+m -
+
A2-A4 VREF1 COMPARE
+ DC +
HIGH SIDE
POWER SUPPLY DIODE
GEN. A8 A9 FAULT
EXCITER A11 SIGNAL
ARMATURE FIELD OUTPUT
AC VOLTS LVG
HVG
1 - 2 HZ SQUARE WAVE
NORMAL SIGNAL
DIODE LOW SIDE DC +
- POWER SUPPLY
DC -
VREF2 A7
A1
ISO. AMP/ LIMITER/ AC TO K
+
FILTERS DC CNV. s+m
-
LVG
COMPARE
A0 A2-A4 A5 A6
Low Side Monitoring Circuit A10 UNDER VOLTAGE
GROUND FAULT DET. LOCKOUT
CIRCUIT
OPT. ISO.
RED
DIODE FAULT SIG.
TELEMETRY CIR. GREEN
FIELD GROUND DETECTOR TRANSMITTER
TELEMETRY CIR. FIELD GROUND DETECTOR RECEIVER (STATIONARY)

INPUT POWER (24 VDC)
0 TO 24 VDC OUTPUT SIGNALS
FIELD GROUND ALARM
PICK-UP COILS FIELD GROUND DETECTOR MALFUNCTION
DIODE FAULT ALARM.
FIGURE 14: BLOCK DIAGRAM OF DIODE FAULT DETECTOR

/FIELD GROUND DETECTOR
1.4.2 Diode Fault Detector Output Signals
The Diode Fault Detector is used in conjunction with brushless exciters with series redundant diode bridge
arrangement and the field ground detector (see separate instruction books). The Diode Fault Detector output
signals as transmitted via the Ground Detector System are shown below.
24 V
Normal Signal
No Alarm
0V
1 to 2 Hz Frequency
24 V
Diode Fault
Alarm Signal
0V
Recommended Time Delay to Alarm - 20 Sec to Alarm.

Set to Alarm on less than 4 pulses (.15 sec Min.
Pulse width) in Rolling 20 second Period
24 V
Diode Detector
Undervoltage/
Malfunction 0V
Alarm
Figure 15: Diode Fault Detector Alarm Logic
2. INITIAL INSPECTION, STORAGE AND ALIGNMENT
2.1. RECEIVING INSPECTION
The Diode Fault Detector comes mounted and pre-wired to the diode wheel of the brushless exciter which is
carefully crated for shipment and can withstand most shocks incurred during transit. Before accepting shipment
from the transportation company, examine the crating carefully per exciter instruction book. If the Diode Fault
Detector is shipped as a separate or replacement part unpack and check for damage to the module or wires.
Notify the transportation company claims office and Kato Engineering if damage is found. Be sure to give
complete and accurate details when reporting damage.
2.2. ALIGNMENT AND ADJUSTMENTS
The Diode Fault Detector does not require adjustment or alignment. Some brushless exciter disassembly is
required to access the Diode Fault Detector and ground detector. Remove the exciter end cover, ground
detector mounting cover , exciter fan, and fan baffle per the exciter instruction book. The Diode Fault Detector
will be accessible through the ground detector cover opening and from the back of the exciter (monitor leads).
Mount the Diode Fault Detector to diode wheel per paragraph 1.3. Be sure to use a thread lock adhesive on all
the threaded fasteners of the Detector. Lock exciter fasteners per the exciter instruction book.
3. MAINTENANCE
3.1. PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
The Diode Fault Detector requires no maintenance beyond that required for the exciter to which it is mounted.
Check connections for damage or upset during exciter maintenance. Any connections removed and replaced
should be sprayed with a good quality, air drying insulating varnish.
3.2. REPLACEMENT
If replacement Diode Fault Detector is required refer to section 1.3 for assembly/disassembly.
3.3. INSULATION RESISTANCE
Periodic measurement of the insulation resistance may prevent a serious problem caused by a double ground.
Readings with a 500 volt megger of the combined exciter rotor, diode wheel, Diode Fault Detector, and generator
field may be made. Refer to the exciter instruction book for further information.
4. TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1. Diode Fault Alarm
If a diode fault alarm occurs, the redundant diode will, under normal circumstances, continue to provide
rectification for the leg. The diode may be visually inspected during operation using a strobe light through an
access plate on the end of the exciter to see if there is mechanical damage.
If the exciter continues to function normally, the rectifier assembly may be checked at the next planned outage.
The diodes can then be checked per the exciter instruction book.
If no diodes are found to be faulty. Disconnect the Diode Fault Detector wires and check per paragraph the
following few paragraphs (sections 4.2., 4.3., 4.4., and 4.5.).
Note: If both diodes fail in the same leg then excitation will be lost.
4.2. Troubleshooting General Method
A digital voltmeter with diode check scale, 0 to 50 VDC power supply, and a function generator are useful in
locating problems with the Diode Fault Detector.
4.3. Wire Continuity Test
Disconnect the AC and DC input leads of the Detector and the ground detector output leads. With a digital
multimeter (similar to an 8060 Fluke digital meter) with diode check feature, check the continuity between the AC
and DC leads to determine if there are any wire breaks. The readings will range from 10K ohms to 5 Megohm
and some leads will be polarity sensitive. The magnitude of the reading not important, just determine if any wire
has broken. Check the continuity of the red and green diode wires from the ground detector.
4.4. Checkout of Signal Wires to Ground Detector
Align the ground detector pickup coils. Then apply about 2 mA across the red (plus) and green (minus) lead. It is
recommended that a limiting resister be placed in the circuit to protect from over current. The current must not
exceed 25 mA. With 1 to 2 mA current, the diode fault signal out of the receiver assembly should go high (about
24 VDC). The output signal should go to zero with no current. If it does not respond as described, the ground
detector transmitter circuit is faulty and the transmitter should be replaced.
4.5. Functional Check of Diode Fault Detector
Reconnect the ground detector red and green wires to the Detector. Alternately, the Diode Fault Detector output
terminals may be connected to an ammeter (0 to 10 mA scale). The Diode Fault Detector can be functionally
checked using a variable power supply 0 to 50 VDC (floating / ungrounded). Connect power supply to the DC
buss leads, leave the AC leads connected. A 1 to 2 Hz square wave output current should appear at DFD output
terminals at about 32 VDC on –31 DFD’s (20VDC on –32 and –34 DFD’s, and approx. 65VDC on –33 DFD’s).
Then connect a function generator set for 250 to 400 Hz square or sine wave, 0 to 5V to between one of the AC
leads and the corresponding DC signal lead (this AC lead will have to be disconnected from the exciter AC links
and heatsinks). The function generator is being used here to simulate an AC ripple on the forward voltage drop
thus simulating a failed diode. Measure the function generator output with a digital voltmeter on RMS scale.
Gradually increase the function generator voltage. At about .5 to 1 Vrms, the Diode Fault Detector output or
alarm signal current should change from a square wave signal to a steady 1 to 2 ma signal. Check the other AC
leads in the same manner. If the Detector checks good , contact GE representative for assistance. If the Detector
checks bad, replace with a new one. There are no serviceable parts.
4.6. Replacement Part Numbers
GE Part Number Kato Engineering Part Number Operating Range

351A6424P0001 508-00118-31 32 to 390 VDC
351A6424P0002 508-00118-34 20 to 278 VDC
351A6424P0003 508-00118-32 20 to 278 VDC
351A6424P0004 508-00118-33 60 to 525 VDC
352-56001-06
FEB. 2003
Instruction Manual
Model 9A5 Brushless Exciters

for 2 Pole Synchronous Generators
Description * Installation * Operation

Adjustments * Maintenance * Parts Description
1
352-56001-06
FEB. 2003
DANGER
ONLY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL FAMILIAR WITH THE CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION OF

THIS EQUIPMENT AND THE HAZARDS INVOLVED SHOULD INSTALL, ADJUST, OPERATE, AND
/OR SERVICE THIS UNIT. READ AND UNDERSTAND THIS MANUAL IN ITS ENTIRETY BEFORE
PROCEEDING. FAILURE TO OBSERVE THIS PRECAUTION COULD RESULT IN SEVERE BODILY
INJURY OR LOSS OF LIFE.
DANGER
THE USER IS RESPONSIBLE FOR CONFORMING TO THE NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE AND ALL
OTHER APPLICABLE LOCAL CODES. WIRING, GROUNDING, DISCONNECTS, AND OVERCUR-
RENT PROTECTION IS PARTICULARLY IMPORTANT. FAILURE TO OBSERVE THIS PRECAU-
TION COULD RESULT IN SEVERE BODILY INJURY OR LOSS OF LIFE.
DANGER
SUBSEQUENT STEPS REQUIRE ROTATING PARTS AND/OR ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS TO BE

EXPOSED. STAY CLEAR IF UNIT MUST BE RUNNING OR DISCONNECT AND LOCKOUT AND
TAG POWER SOURCE IF CONTACT MUST BE MADE. FAILURE TO OBSERVE THESE PRECAU-
TIONS COULD RESULT IN SEVERE BODILY INJURY OR LOSS OF LIFE.
WARNING
WHEN LIFTING THIS UNIT, DO NOT PULL AT AN ANGLE ON LIFTING EYES. THE LIFTING EYES
ARE FOR THE UNIT ONLY AND NOT FOR THE COMPLETE SET. FAILURE TO OBSERVE THESE
PRECAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN BODILY INJURY.
WARNING
DISCONNECT ROTOR TRANSMITTER GROUND LEAD PRIOR TO PERFORMING HIPOTENTIAL

TESTS ON THE ROTOR.
2
352-56001-06
FEB. 2003
PART NUMBERS
STATOR ROTOR
GE 364A2978P1003 364A2978P0002
KATO 230-54009-11 093-54013-11
RATINGS
MIN. EXCITER RATING @: 3600 RPM 3000 RPM
Continuous power rating, KW 505 504
Continuous output current, Adc 1160 1195
Continuous voltage rating, VDC 435 422
Ceiling voltage for 10 sec., Vdc 844 795
Ceiling current for 10 Sec., Adc 2250 2250
Min. response ratio, PU V/sec 1.0 1.0
Rated inlet air temp, oC 40 40
Min. output voltage @gen no load 76 76
EXCITER MIN. ELECTRICAL CAPABILITY @ 3600 RPM 3000 RPM

Inlet air temperature, oC 40 68 -20 to11 40 68 -20 to11
Continuous output power, KW 505 330 731 504 272 687
Continuous output currebt, Adc 1160 938 1396 1195 878 1395
Continuous output voltage, Vdc 435 352 523 422 310 492
Load resistance (@125 C), Ohms .375 .375 .375 .353 .353 .353
Ceiling current for 10 seconds 2250 2250 2250 2250 2250 2250
Ceiling voltage for 10 seconds 844 844 844 795 795 795
Minimum response ratio, PU V/Sec 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
Maximum field voltage: 255 Volts
Maximum field current: 20 amps DC continuous, 30 amps for 10 seconds
3
352-56001-06
FEB. 2003
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION AND DESCRIPTION 5

1. 1. Introduction 5
1.2. General Description 5
1.3. Construction 6
1.4. Description of Operation 6
2. INITIAL INSPECTION, STORAGE AND ALIGNMENT 8
2.1. Receiving Inspection 8
2.2. Unpacking and Storage 8
2.3. Lifting 9
2.4 Alignment 11
3. MAINTENANCE 13
3.1. Periodic Maintenance 13
3.2. Exciter Diode Wheel Checking 13
3.3. Replacement of Diodes 14
3.4. Insulation Resistance 15
3.5. Recommended Spares 15
3.6 Recommended Tools 15
4. TROUBLESHOOTING 17
4.1. Loss of Excitation 17
4.2. Trouble Shooting General Method 17
4.3. Rectifier Test 17
4.4. Armature Test 18
4.5. Field Ground Detection System 18
4.6. Stationary Field 18
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1. Brushless Exciter Rotor 5

Figure 2. Block Diagram of Series Redundant Brushless Exciter 7
Figure 3. Lifting Eye Locations 9
Figure 4. Brushless Exciter Rotor Removal From Generator Shaft 10
Figure 5. Brushless Exciter Rotor Installation on Generator Shaft 12
DRAWING SECTION
102-90716-00 GE 9A5 Exciter

412-01032-00 9A5 Rotor Layout (3 Pages)
412-01033-00 9A5 Stator Layout
040-70003-62 Rectifier Assembly (7 Pages)
4
352-56001-06
FEB. 2003
SECTION I
INTRODUCTION AND DESCRIPTION
1.1 INTRODUCTION
This manual on the brushless exciter for 2 pole generators covers the general description, construc-
tion, operation, initial inspection, alignment, maintenance, troubleshooting and renewal parts.
1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The brushless excitation system consists of a high frequency AC generator complete with rotating,
series redundant diode assembly and a lead assembly that connects the DC diode output to the field
windings of the main generator. The brushless design eliminates collector rings, commutators, and
brushes.
These features contribute to a brushless excitation system with high reliability components and trouble
free low maintenance operation. It is also a relatively uncomplicated system, easy to operate and
inspect without extensive personnel training. Other advantages include:
a. The overhung design, shrink fit on the generator rotor shaft, requires no exciter bearings.
b. There are no carbon dust or contamination problems in the brushless exciter system if it
operates in a clean, controlled environment.
c. The brushless excitation system does not have the large field circuit breakers, heavy field
current control or bus interconnections components such static systems require.
Figure 1. Brusheless Exciter
5
352-56001-06
FEB. 2003
1.3 CONSTRUCTION
The brushless exciter (Figure 1) consists of a rotating armature assembly and a stationary field
assembly. An electrical block diagram of the system is shown in Figure 2.
The stator assembly consists of 12 stationary field poles mounted in a steel housing. The steel hous-
ing is flange mounted to the generator bearing bracket. Field poles are made of high quality steel
laminations and the coil insulation is a Class F VPI insulation system.
The rotor is shrink mounted, overhung on an extension of the main generator rotor shaft. Diodes
are mounted on a rotating wheel, outboard of the exciter armature. The armature consists of a lami-
nated core of high quality electrical steel, a delta connected 3 phase winding, and a connection ring
assembly. The armature coils are random wound and have Class F resin impregnated insulation (VPI
system). All armature connections or coil extensions are made via a shaft mounted connection ring
assembly. These connections are securely supported by the potted connection ring assembly and
steel retaining ring. The rotor has a 3 phase delta winding with a high frequency output (60 Hz at
3600 RPM). This is in conjunction with the ceiling voltage capability, which provides the high speed of
response and consequently less voltage disturbance with load changes.
A full wave, 3 phase bridge diode assembly (see Figure 2) is used to rectify the exciter armature
output. Series diodes in each leg, each sized to allow full generator output, are mounted on a wheel
located adjacent to the exciter armature winding. Diodes are of the highest quality and are conserva-
tively rated. The diode failure mode is shorted. When a diodes fails shorted, the second diode in the
leg provides the required rectification with full exciter capability. The diodes are mounted in a spring
loaded clamp assembly and loaded in a radial direction so that the centrifugal forces aid in providing
the proper clamping force at operating speed.
1.4 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION
Direct current for the exciter field is supplied by the voltage regulator. Alternating current is produced
by the exciter armature and is rectified by the diode assembly. The output of the diode assembly is
fed directly to the main generator field through internal lead bars in the generator shaft.
The exciter is self ventilated by a radial fan. Air is drawn in through the top of the exciter and passes
over the armature winding, the field winding, the diodes, and exhausts through the discharge duct.
A field ground detector is mounted on the exciter rotor and stator and its operation is described in
a separate instruction.
6
352-56001-06
FEB. 2003
Figure 2. Block Diagram of Series Redundant Brushless Exciter
7
352-56001-06
FEB. 2003
SECTION 2
INITIAL INSPECTION, STORAGE AND ALIGNMENT
2.1 RECEIVING INSPECTION

2.1.1 The exciter stator and rotor are carefully crated for shipment and can withstand most shocks
incurred during transit. Before accepting shipment from the transportation company, examine the
crating carefully to determine if any damage has occurred during shipment. Unpack the unit as
described in paragraph 2.2 and then carefully examine the sheet metal frame and exciter cover for
signs of damage. Remove the exciter cover and access plates and examine the inside of the genera-
tor for signs of damage to windings, lead wires and other internal parts. Inspect for loosely mounted
components and the presence of moisture. Inspect to make certain foreign material such as crating
nails, loose bolts or packing material which may have fallen into the machine during unpacking are
removed. If damage is noted, determine the extent of damage and immediately notify the transpor-
tation company claims office and Kato Engineering. Be sure to give complete and accurate details
when reporting damage.
2.1.2 If the exciter is to be placed in storage, repackage and crate the exciter. Recommended proce-
dures for storage are contained in paragraph 2.2.3.
2.2 UNPACKING AND STORAGE

2.2.1 If the exciter is received during cold weather, let the unit stabilize to room temperature before
removing the protective crating and packing material. This precaution will minimize the condensa-
tion of moisture on coil surfaces, eliminating the possibilities of wet windings and insulating materials
which could cause early malfunctions of the generator.
2.2.2 Unpack the exciter with care to avoid damage to the unit. Move the exciter to the mounting
location by attaching an overhead hoist to the lifting eyes installed in the exciter frame.
2.2.3 If the exciter is not installed on the generator as soon as received, it should be stored in a
clean, dry area, not subject to sudden temperature or humidity changes. If possible, storage should
be in an ambient temperature of approximately normal room, temperature. Units which cannot be
stored in a temperature and humidity controlled area and which are to be in storage for a period of
longer than six months should be prepared for storage as follows:
a. Install desiccant bags inside the unit.
b. Vacuum seal the unit in a covering of plastic or other material designed for that purpose.
c. Adequately tag the exciter to ensure that preservative greases and desiccant bags are
removed prior to start up.
8
352-56001-06
FEB. 2003
2.3 LIFTING
LIFTING EYES
LIFTING EYE FOR THIS

PART ONLY
Figure 3 Lifting Eye Locations
Stator Weight: 2560 Lbs

Rotor Weight: 1596 Lbs.
For center of gravity for Rotor and Stator See 102-90716-00 in the drawing sec-
tion at the back of this manual.
WARNING
WHEN LIFTING THIS UNIT, DO NOT PULL AT AN ANGLE ON LIFTING EYES. THE LIFTING EYES
ARE FOR THE UNIT ONLY AND NOT FOR THE COMPLETE SET. FAILURE TO OBSERVE THESE
PRECAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN BODILY INJURY.
9
352-56001-06
FEB. 2003
Threaded Jacking Studs (8)

JACKING PLATE SPACER
Figure 4 Brushless Exciter Rotor Removal From Generator Shaft
10
352-56001-06
FEB. 2003
2.4 ALIGNMENT, INSPECTION AND INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
2.4.1 Mount Rotor Procedure
Prior to installation, heat the exciter rotor assembly at 200o F for four hours.
To mount the exciter rotor, refer to Figure 5 and perform the following steps.
1. Check exciter and shaft lengths to ensure that when the exciter is seated against the shaft
inboard stop shoulder, the outboard end of the exciter and the shaft will be flush within +/-.010 inches.
2. Apply a thin coat of lubricant at two fit areas indicated on Figure 5 (if specified on assembly
drawings). Install Key. Then slide the exciter over the shaft and engage with key.
3. Using jacking plate, push on the exciter while checking the clearance between exciter and
shoulder.
4. Remove jacking plate and check that exciter is flush (see step 1).
5. Bolt electrical connections to diode wheel and lead bars. Check to see that insulators are in
place. Spray with air drying insulating varnish (if specified on assembly drawings).
6. Lock exciter rotor in place with end cap.
7. Trim Balance generator rotor.
8. To remove rotor, remove end cap and electrical connection leads then remove exciter using a
jacking plate, M24-3.0 grade 8 studs and nuts, and spacer tube (see Figure 4).
2.4.2 Assemble Stator Procedure
To assemble the stator perform the following steps.
1. With rotor in position hoist stator into position.
2. Check alignment.
3. Tighten but do not torque stator mounting bolts.
4. Recheck air gap.
5. Torque stator mounting bolts.
6. Ream alignment holes and install dowel pins.
7. Mount covers.
8. Connect field leads and ground detection system. Refer to the Ground Detection System
manual.
11
352-56001-06
FEB. 2003
THREADED JACKING
STUDS (8)
JACKING PLATE
FIT AREA
Figure 5. Brushless Exciter Rotor Installation on Generator Shaft
12
352-56001-06
FEB. 2003
SECTION 3
MAINTENANCE
3.1 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE

The exciter rotor, stator and diode wheel should be cleaned with the same regularity and in the same
manner as the main generator. Make certain that the rectifier diodes are kept free of dust, grease and
similar material (see Paragraph 3.1.1), because such coatings restrict dissipation of heat and cause
low megger readings. All lead wires should be in good condition and tightly fastened. The corro-
sion resistant coating on the wheel should not be damaged. Any connections removed and replaced
should be sprayed with a good quality, air drying insulating varnish.
3.1.1 Diode Wheel Cleaning Procedure
WARNING
Adequate diode wheel cleaning requires solvent use. Provide adequate ventilation and respiratory
protection and avoid contact with skin or eyes. Use extreme caution with petroleum solvents, as their
flames are highly flammable.
For best results, apply solvents under pressure using an aspirator or similar device with a clean, dry
compressed air supply. Less efficient, but acceptable means of applying solvent include self con-
tained (garden type) sprayers, vacuum cleaner with spray attachment, portable sprayers and so forth.
Initial cleaning should be done with a slow drying solvent having good oil and dirt cutting properties.
This should wash out most of the dirt, oil and soot. Use “Stoddard” solvent, mineral spirits or alcohol.
This should be followed by a quick drying solvent, which finish cleans and leaves the wheel dry.
3.2 EXCITER DIODE WHEEL INSPECTION

It is suggested that the diode wheel inspection program be established along with the following rules:
1. Inspect after first month of operation for cleanliness
2. Inspect when any other generator hardware inspection occurs
3. Inspect after the generator experiences an unusual operation condition such as:
a. Synchronization out of phase
b. Generator circuit breaker opening due to protective relay operation
c. Generator pulling out of step
13
352-56001-06
FEB. 2003
3.3 REPLACEMENT OF DIODES
Before replacing any diode, review the assembly and parts break down shown in drawing 040-
70003-62 in the drawing appendix at the end of this manual. The following text refers to the item
numbers found on this drawing.
Note: Strict adherence to the procedure is required for proper rectifier performance and life.
Needed or Recommended Tools for replacement (see above drawing):
TOOL # DESCRIPTION
1 Wrench, Kato Part # 172-20566-08
2 Wood or Fiber Wedge, about 25 MM Wide x 200 MM Long x 20 MM High
3 10 x 3.81 x 152 MM Long Steel Bar
4 Nylon Tie Wraps - 305 MM long
5 Silicon Oil, Kato Part # 991-03742-01
1. To gain access to the rectifier assembly: remove ground detector receiver and cover, exciter
end cover, fan, fan housing and fan baffle. Torque fan mounting bolt to 32 ft-lbs or 43 n-m when re-
assembling.
2. It is advisable to tie the inner heat sink assembly to the clamping bar prior to removal to
contain the washers and pins from falling to the bottom of the exciter during removal and re-assembly.
Use a 9/16” socket to remove the diode clamping bolt, (item #12). Carefully lift the radial inner heat
sink and clamping bar assembly away from the outer heat sink until the diode can be pulled off. It is
easier to remove and reassemble the diode assemblies if they are at the top or bottom. However, if
the diodes are on the sides, take care that the diodes do not fall out of the slot.
3. Clean the diode heat sink surface thoroughly.
4. Inner heat sink assembly with the bolt insulator, (item #13) can be removed after removing
inboard heat sink, (item #5). To re-assemble insert the inner heat sink assembly with bolt insulator,
(item #13) into the slot. Insert inboard heat sink, (item #5) and align with dc bus, (item #4) by placing
two temporary steel bars, (tool #3) in key slots in the heat sinks.
5. Insert the spherical washer (item #15), clamping bolt, (item #12), and o-ring, (item #14).
6. Important Step. When assembling diodes, assure/confirm proper polarity. Coat the new
diode or diodes with silicone oil. Carefully lift the inner heat sink and clamping plate assembly away
from the outer heat sink until the diode can be inserted. Carefully align the pins in the heat sinks
with the hole in the diodes or the protrusion on the diodes with the hole in the heat sinks. As an aid
in handling the inner heat sink assembly and clamping plate, the heat sinks and clamping plate can
be held in position with tie wraps or rubber bands. These must be later cut and removed after the
clamping bolt has secured the assembly.
7. Use Kato wrench, (tool #1) and wood or fiber wedge, (tool #2) to temporarily secure the inner
heat sink assembly in the slot. Push the wedge in by hand space between tool #1 and the diode
wheel hub.
8. Important Step. Torque the clamping bolt 30 ft-lbs or 41 n-m and then release and re-tighten
to 5 ft-lbs or 7 n-m. Match mark the bolt head and diode wheel rim with a fine felt tip pen. Tighten the
bolt exactly 1 full turn. This will give the diodes the required clamping force.
9. Re-assemble exciter rotor and stator components.
14
352-56001-06
FEB. 2003
3.4 INSULATION RESISTANCE
Periodic measurement of the insulation resistance may prevent a serious problem caused by a
double ground. 500 volt insulation resistance readings of the combined exciter rotor, diode wheel, and
generator field may be made.
It is difficult to set a minimum value of insulation resistance. This depends upon such things as age,
temperature, humidity, and operating conditions. In general, the exciter by itself should be over 50
megohms while the combined exciter rotor, diode wheel, and generator field should be over 10 meg-
ohms. The exciter stator should be over 50 megohms.
A low resistance reading can be caused by dirt, moisture, or insulation damage (usually at some
terminal). Cleaning and drying is recommended. If reading does not improve, separate exciter rotor
winding and generator field winding to locate the problem.
3.5 RECOMMENDED SPARES
PART PART NUMBER QUANTITY

Diodes 850-52928-90 12
GDS Transmitter 508-00615-00 1
Diode Fault Monitor 508-00118-33 1
GDS Reciever 508-00618-00 1
.
3.6 RECOMMENDED TOOLS & EQUIPMENT
Test Equipment
Ammeter Clamp-on, 0 to 500 amp range for measuring of electrical current.
Multi-meter Digital, for measuring voltage, current and resistance.
Thermometer For measuring Temperature in Celsius
Megger To measure insulation resistance.
Resistive Bridge To measure resistance of windings.
Special Tools
Exciter Puller (172-20611-04) For pulling exciter rotor armature
Standard Tools
Cable tool Crimping

Flashlight As required.
Hammer Soft-faced.
Lamp Incandescent Safety light.
Screwdrivers Standard, sized as required.
Screwdrivers Phillips, sized as required.
Wrench Adjustable, 12-inch.
Wrench Torque 0 to 100 ft-lb.
Wrench Set Allen, metric.
Wrench Set Socket, metric.
Wrench Set Standard, open-end/box-end combination sized, metric.
Vacuum Electric with nonmetallic nozzle.
15
352-56001-06
FEB. 2003
Materials
Air Compressed, Dry.

Corrosion Inhibitor Nox-Rust VC #10 Oil or equivalent.
Covering Material Waterproof Desiccant Bags For protection from
moisture during long-term equipment storage.
Detergent As required for cleaning.
Gloves Chemical-protective
Gloves Electrical, Rubber, 5000V
Heaters Space Heater, for eliminating excess moisture in damp areas and dry out of
motor or generator windings.
Plastic Protection for long-term storage.
Rags As required.
Water Warm and clean, for cleaning.
Tags Warning and Cautions.
16
352-56001-06
FEB. 2003
SECTION 4
TROUBLE SHOOTING
4.1 LOSS OF EXCITATION

Complete loss of excitation on an operating generator results in dangerous overheating of its rotor
within a short time unless the machine is disconnected from the system. When excitation is lost the
generator operates as an induction generator with low power factor and high rotor surface currents.
This can cause high and possibly damaging temperatures in the generator rotor in a very short time.
If trouble occurs, thoroughly examine the main generator and controls and contact the nearest GE
Service Office for assistance.
4.2 TROUBLE SHOOTING GENERAL METHOD

The following brushless exciter faults cause abnormal generator operation:
1. Two shorted diodes in the same leg.
2. Short or open circuits in the field or rotor windings.
3. Grounds in the stator, armature, or diode wheel.
4. Open Diodes
The exciter field ammeter, digital voltmeter, and megger are the most useful items for locating prob-
lems in the excitation system. Refer to the generator data to determine expected normal no load and
full load excitation field current values.
4.3 RECTIFIER TEST

Almost all diode failures will be a failure to block reverse current which will not cause an operational
problem unless the second diode in the leg also fails. Then a loss of excitation will occur.
Tests to check the diode can be done by breaking one of the connections to the generator field.
The diodes can then be checked in groups by connection between the inner heat sinks and any “u”
shaped connector and between the inner sinks and the dc bus rings.
The precise evaluation of a rectifier requires laboratory equipment which is seldom available for field
testing. For service use, however, a reliable test can be made requiring minimal equipment (500 Vdc
electronic megger Biddle 1500 Vdc or similar. and digital voltmeter (DVM) with a diode check, Fluke
8060 meters work well). With exciter at room temperature, connect the DVM on diode check scale
between the ac connector and each inner heat sink (both meter polarities), be sure to remove lacquer
at connection point. The reading should be .3 to .5 Vdc in the forward direction and open reverse
biased. Repeat with the DVM between the inner heat sink and DC bus rings.
Repeat the test using a 500 Vdc megger instead of the DVM. In this case the readings are usually in
the megohm range reverse biased and shorted when forward biased. Check the insulation resistance
to ground per paragraph 3.4
17
352-56001-06
FEB. 2003
4.4 ARMATURE TEST
An open or shorted rotor may be detected by measuring the phase-to-phase resistance at the rotor
terminals. Each phase should be within plus or minus 5 %. The resistances are extremely low, less
than .005 ohms, thus a bridge type instrument suitable for these low resistances should be used.
Check also the insulation resistance of the windings to the core, see paragraph 3.4.
4.5 FIELD GROUND DETECTION SYSTEM

This system can be checked per the separate Field Ground Detection System instruction book.
4.6 STATIONARY FIELD

Check the resistance with a resistance bridge and compare with the nameplate resistance. Check
insulation resistance, see paragraph 3.4. Examine wire, insulating tapes, ties, and varnish for any
breaks or distress.
18
352-56001-06
FEB. 2003
19
352-56001-06
FEB. 2003
20
352-56001-06
FEB. 2003
21

Operation Manual 950 Pages

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operation Manual 950 Pages

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

g GE Power Systems

Gas Turbines MS 9001 E’

Operation Training Manual

The text and the classroom instruction offered with it

They do not purport to be complete nor are they

© 2003 General Electric Company

Turbine Numbers : 890 123, 124, 129, 130, 131, 142.

Tab 1 Gas Turbine Overview

Gas Turbine Functional Description GFD91ES

Tab 2 Gas Turbine Construction

Gas Turbine Arrangement (ML 0406) 91-104 E 8224 C

Tab 3 Piping Reference Drawings

Device Summary (ML 0414) 137 A 3171 F

Lube Oil System Description

Tab 5 Air Systems

Cooling and Sealing Air System Description

Tab 6 Fuel Systems

Fuel Gas System Description

Tab 7 Water Systems

Cooling Water System Description

Tab 8 Other Systems

Turbine Control Device System Description

GE Gas Turbine Performance Characteristics GER 3567 H

Tab 10 SPEEDTRONIC TM Mk VI Control System

Network Topology ( 4108 ) 132 B 8218 E

Tab 11 Mark VI Commands / Control Support

Fundamentals of Mk VI Control System Fund Mk VI

Tab 12 Generator Design and Fundamentals

Mechanical Outline 134 E 5633

Tab 13 Generator and Exciter Control

Diode Fault Detector 351-02020-01 A

Gas Turbine Functional Description

Figure 1. Single-Shaft STAG Unit Flow Diagram

Air Inlet Compressor Section Turbine Exhaust

Figure 2. Major Sections of the MS9000 Gas Turbine Assembly

Figure 3. Gas Turbine Assembly-Component Identification

C. Gas Path Description

II. BASE AND SUPPORTS

D. Gib Key and Guide Block

III. COMPRESSOR SECTION

• Forward compressor casing

• Aft compressor casing

• Compressor discharge casing

Figure 4. Compressor Stator-Cutaway View

Figure 5. Air Inlet Casing With Variable Inlet Guide Vanes

Figure 6. Inlet Guide Vane Control Ring and Pinion Gears

Figure 7. Compressor Discharge Casing Assembly

IV. COMBUSTION SYSTEM

Figure 8. Combustion System Arrangement

Figure 9. Combustion Chamber Arrangement

Figure 10. Combustion Chamber Details and Flow Diagram

Liner Stop Slot Cooling Holes Spring Seal

E. Ultraviolet Flame Detectors

Fuel Oil Swirl Chamber

Swirl Tip Assembly

Atomizing Gas Connection

2nd-Stage Turbine 3rd-Stage Turbine

Figure 13. Compressor and Turbine Rotor Assembly

Figure 14. First, Second and Third-Stage Turbine Buckets

Figure 15. First-Stage, Air-Cooled Bucket Details

2. Turbine Casing (Shell)

Figure 16. Turbine Section-Cutaway View

Suction End of Partition